[PDF] Calc Manual GNU Emacs Calc Dave Gillespie

Download Calc Manual GNU Emacs Calc Dave Gillespie...

Calc Manual

GNU Emacs Calc

Dave Gillespie [emailprotected]

This file documents Calc, the GNU Emacs calculator, included with GNU Emacs 24.3. c 1990–1991, 2001–2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being just “GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE”, with the Front-Cover Texts being “A GNU Manual,” and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.” (a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and modify this GNU manual.”

Short Contents 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

4 5

Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Stack and Trail Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Arithmetic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

8 9

Scientific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Vector/Matrix Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

10 Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 11 Operating on Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 12 Storing and Recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 13 Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 14 Kill and Yank Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 15 Keypad Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 16 Embedded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 17 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 A

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

GNU Free Documentation License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

C D

Customizing Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Reporting Bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Calc Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Index of Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Index of Calculator Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Index of Algebraic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Concept Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Index of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Index of Lisp Math Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

iii

Table of Contents 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

What is Calc? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Notations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 A Demonstration of Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Using Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.5.1 Starting Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.5.2 The Standard Calc Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.5.3 Quick Mode (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.5.4 Keypad Mode (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.5.5 Standalone Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.5.6 Embedded Mode (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.5.7 Other C-x * Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.6 History and Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.1

Basic Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 RPN Calculations and the Stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Algebraic-Style Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Undo and Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.4 Mode-Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Arithmetic Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Vector/Matrix Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Vector Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 Vectors as Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Types Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Algebra and Calculus Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Basic Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Programming Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Answers to Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 RPN Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.2 RPN Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.3 RPN Tutorial Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.4 RPN Tutorial Exercise 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.5 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.6 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.7 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.8 Modes Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.9 Modes Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.10 Modes Tutorial Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.11 Modes Tutorial Exercise 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 15 20 23 25 30 34 34 36 38 46 51 51 57 62 69 69 69 69 70 70 70 70 71 71 72 72

GNU Emacs Calc Manual 2.7.12 2.7.13 2.7.14 2.7.15 2.7.16 2.7.17 2.7.18 2.7.19 2.7.20 2.7.21 2.7.22 2.7.23 2.7.24 2.7.25 2.7.26 2.7.27 2.7.28 2.7.29 2.7.30 2.7.31 2.7.32 2.7.33 2.7.34 2.7.35 2.7.36 2.7.37 2.7.38 2.7.39 2.7.40 2.7.41 2.7.42 2.7.43 2.7.44 2.7.45 2.7.46 2.7.47 2.7.48 2.7.49 2.7.50 2.7.51 2.7.52 2.7.53 2.7.54 2.7.55 2.7.56 2.7.57 2.7.58 2.7.59

Arithmetic Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arithmetic Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matrix Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matrix Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matrix Tutorial Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Tutorial Exercise 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types Tutorial Exercise 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Algebra Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Algebra Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Algebra Tutorial Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Algebra Tutorial Exercise 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming Tutorial Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming Tutorial Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73 73 73 73 73 73 74 75 75 76 76 76 77 77 78 78 80 80 81 82 83 84 84 85 85 85 86 86 87 87 87 88 88 89 89 89 89 90 90 91 91 92 92 92 93 93 94 94

v 2.7.60 2.7.61 2.7.62 2.7.63 2.7.64 2.7.65 2.7.66 2.7.67 2.7.68 2.7.69

Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming Programming

Tutorial Tutorial Tutorial Tutorial Tutorial Tutorial Tutorial Tutorial Tutorial Tutorial

Exercise Exercise Exercise Exercise Exercise Exercise Exercise Exercise Exercise Exercise

3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3.1 Basic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Help Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Stack Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Numeric Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Algebraic Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 “Quick Calculator” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Numeric Prefix Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Undoing Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Multiple Calculators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Troubleshooting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.1 Autoloading Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.2 Recursion Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.3 Caches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.4 Debugging Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103 104 106 106 107 108 109 110 110 111 111 111 111 112 112

Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15

Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complex Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infinities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vectors and Matrices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Strings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modulo Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interval Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incomplete Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115 115 115 116 117 118 118 119 120 122 123 124 125 126 127

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Stack and Trail Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4

Stack Manipulation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Stack Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trail Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keep Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

131 132 133 134

Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4

General Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverse and Hyperbolic Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Angular Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Polar Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Fraction Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.4 Infinite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.5 Symbolic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.6 Matrix and Scalar Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.7 Automatic Recomputation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.8 Working Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Simplification Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 Declaration Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 Kinds of Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 Functions for Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.1 Radix Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.2 Grouping Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.3 Float Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.4 Complex Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.5 Fraction Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.6 HMS Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.7 Date Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.7.1 ISO 8601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.7.2 Date Formatting Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.7.3 Free-Form Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.7.4 Standard Date Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.8 Truncating the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.9 Justification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.10 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Language Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.1 Normal Language Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.2 C, FORTRAN, and Pascal Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3 TEX and LATEX Language Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.4 Eqn Language Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.5 Yacas Language Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.6 Maxima Language Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.7 Giac Language Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.8 Mathematica Language Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

135 136 137 137 137 137 138 138 138 139 140 140 140 141 141 142 145 146 146 147 148 148 149 149 149 150 151 154 154 155 155 156 156 157 158 159 163 164 165 165 165

vii 6.8.9 Maple Language Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.10 Compositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.10.1 Composition Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.10.2 Horizontal Compositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.10.3 Vertical Compositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.10.4 Other Compositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.10.5 Information about Compositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.10.6 User-Defined Compositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.11 Syntax Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.11.1 Syntax Table Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.11.2 Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.11.3 Advanced Syntax Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.11.4 Conditional Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 The Modes Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 The Calc Mode Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Arithmetic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5

Basic Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integer Truncation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complex Number Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.1 Date Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.2 Date Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.3 Business Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.4 Time Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Financial Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.1 Percentages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.2 Future Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.3 Present Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.4 Related Financial Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.5 Depreciation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.6 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Binary Number Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

165 166 166 168 169 170 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178

183 187 188 188 190 190 191 193 195 198 198 199 200 201 201 202 204

Scientific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5

Logarithmic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trigonometric/Hyperbolic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Mathematical Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Branch Cuts and Principal Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Random Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.1 Random Number Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Combinatorial Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Probability Distribution Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207 208 209 210 211 213 214 216

viii

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Vector/Matrix Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7

Packing and Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extracting Vector Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulating Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector and Matrix Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Operations using Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistical Operations on Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.1 Single-Variable Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.2 Paired-Sample Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8 Reducing and Mapping Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.1 Specifying Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.2 Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.3 Reducing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.4 Nesting and Fixed Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.5 Generalized Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9 Vector and Matrix Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

219 221 223 224 226 227 229 230 232 233 233 235 236 237 238 238

Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

10.1 Selecting Sub-Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 Making Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.2 Changing Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.3 Displaying Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.4 Operating on Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.5 Rearranging Formulas using Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Algebraic Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Simplifying Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Basic Simplifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 Algebraic Simplifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.3 “Unsafe” Simplifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.4 Simplification of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Calculus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.1 Differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.2 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.3 Customizing the Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.4 Numerical Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.5 Taylor Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 Solving Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.1 Multiple Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.2 Solving Systems of Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.3 Decomposing Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 Numerical Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7.1 Root Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7.2 Minimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7.3 Systems of Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8 Curve Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.1 Linear Fits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

241 241 243 244 244 246 249 251 251 255 258 259 260 262 262 263 264 266 266 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 272 273 273

ix 10.8.2 Polynomial and Multilinear Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.3 Error Estimates for Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.4 Standard Nonlinear Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.5 Curve Fitting Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.6 Polynomial Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 Summations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Logical Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11 Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.1 Entering Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.2 Basic Rewrite Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.3 Conditional Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.4 Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.5 Other Features of Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.6 Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.7 Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.8 Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.9 Selections with Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.10 Matching Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.11 Automatic Rewrites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.12 Debugging Rewrites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11.13 Examples of Rewrite Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating on Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6

Basic Operations on Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Units Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Predefined Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User-Defined Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logarithmic Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Musical Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311 313 314 315 317 318

Storing and Recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5

275 276 277 279 283 284 286 289 290 291 291 292 296 301 302 304 305 306 307 309 309

Storing Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Operations on Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Let Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Evaluates-To Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

321 323 323 325 325

Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5

Basic Graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-Dimensional Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphics Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

327 328 329 331 333

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Kill and Yank Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7

Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binary Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vectors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343 345 346 346 347

Embedded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5

337 337 337 338 338 340 340

Keypad Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5

Killing from the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yanking into the Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving into Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting from Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grabbing from Other Buffers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yanking into Other Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X Cut and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Embedded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More About Embedded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignments in Embedded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode Settings in Embedded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Embedded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

349 351 353 356 358

Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

17.1 Creating User Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 Programming with Keyboard Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.1 Naming Keyboard Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.2 Conditionals in Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.3 Loops in Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.4 Local Values in Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.5 Queries in Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 Invocation Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Programming with Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 Programming with Lisp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.1 Defining New Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.2 Defining New Simple Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.3 Defining New Stack-Based Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.4 Argument Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.5 Example Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.5.1 Bit-Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.5.2 The Sine Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6 Calling Calc from Your Lisp Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.1 Additional Arguments to calc-eval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.2 Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.3 Numbers Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.4 Default Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.5 Raw Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361 362 363 363 364 365 366 366 367 368 369 371 374 375 376 376 377 378 379 379 379 379 380

xi 17.5.6.6 Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.7 Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.8 Stack Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.9 Keyboard Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.10 Lisp Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.6.11 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7 Calculator Internals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.1 Data Type Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.2 Interactive Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.3 Stack-Oriented Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.4 Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.5 Computational Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.6 Vector Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.7 Symbolic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.8 I/O and Formatting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.7.9 Hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

380 381 381 381 382 382 383 383 385 386 389 393 397 399 407 409

Appendix A GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Appendix C

Customizing Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Appendix D

Reporting Bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Appendix E

Calc Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Index of Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Index of Calculator Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Index of Algebraic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Concept Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Index of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Index of Lisp Math Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1 Getting Started This chapter provides a general overview of Calc, the GNU Emacs Calculator: What it is, how to start it and how to exit from it, and what are the various ways that it can be used.

1.1 What is Calc? Calc is an advanced calculator and mathematical tool that runs as part of the GNU Emacs environment. Very roughly based on the HP-28/48 series of calculators, its many features include: • Choice of algebraic or RPN (stack-based) entry of calculations. • Arbitrary precision integers and floating-point numbers. • Arithmetic on rational numbers, complex numbers (rectangular and polar), error forms with standard deviations, open and closed intervals, vectors and matrices, dates and times, infinities, sets, quantities with units, and algebraic formulas. • Mathematical operations such as logarithms and trigonometric functions. • Programmer’s features (bitwise operations, non-decimal numbers). • Financial functions such as future value and internal rate of return. • Number theoretical features such as prime factorization and arithmetic modulo m for any m. • Algebraic manipulation features, including symbolic calculus. • Moving data to and from regular editing buffers. • Embedded mode for manipulating Calc formulas and data directly inside any editing buffer. • Graphics using GNUPLOT, a versatile (and free) plotting program. • Easy programming using keyboard macros, algebraic formulas, algebraic rewrite rules, or extended Emacs Lisp. Calc tries to include a little something for everyone; as a result it is large and might be intimidating to the first-time user. If you plan to use Calc only as a traditional desk calculator, all you really need to read is the “Getting Started” chapter of this manual and possibly the first few sections of the tutorial. As you become more comfortable with the program you can learn its additional features. Calc does not have the scope and depth of a fully-functional symbolic math package, but Calc has the advantages of convenience, portability, and freedom.

1.2 About This Manual This document serves as a complete description of the GNU Emacs Calculator. It works both as an introduction for novices and as a reference for experienced users. While it helps to have some experience with GNU Emacs in order to get the most out of Calc, this manual ought to be readable even if you don’t know or use Emacs regularly. This manual is divided into three major parts: the “Getting Started” chapter you are reading now, the Calc tutorial, and the Calc reference manual.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

If you are in a hurry to use Calc, there is a brief “demonstration” below which illustrates the major features of Calc in just a couple of pages. If you don’t have time to go through the full tutorial, this will show you everything you need to know to begin. See Section 1.4 [Demonstration of Calc], page 5. The tutorial chapter walks you through the various parts of Calc with lots of hands-on examples and explanations. If you are new to Calc and you have some time, try going through at least the beginning of the tutorial. The tutorial includes about 70 exercises with answers. These exercises give you some guided practice with Calc, as well as pointing out some interesting and unusual ways to use its features. The reference section discusses Calc in complete depth. You can read the reference from start to finish if you want to learn every aspect of Calc. Or, you can look in the table of contents or the Concept Index to find the parts of the manual that discuss the things you need to know. Every Calc keyboard command is listed in the Calc Summary, and also in the Key Index. Algebraic functions, M-x commands, and variables also have their own indices. You can access this manual on-line at any time within Calc by pressing the h i key sequence. Outside of the Calc window, you can press C-x * i to read the manual on-line. From within Calc the command h t will jump directly to the Tutorial; from outside of Calc the command C-x * t will jump to the Tutorial and start Calc if necessary. Pressing h s or C-x * s will take you directly to the Calc Summary. Within Calc, you can also go to the part of the manual describing any Calc key, function, or variable using h k, h f, or h v, respectively. See Section 3.2 [Help Commands], page 104.

1.3 Notations Used in This Manual This section describes the various notations that are used throughout the Calc manual. In keystroke sequences, uppercase letters mean you must hold down the shift key while typing the letter. Keys pressed with Control held down are shown as C-x. Keys pressed with Meta held down are shown as M-x. Other notations are RET for the Return key, SPC for the space bar, TAB for the Tab key, DEL for the Delete key, and LFD for the Line-Feed key. The DEL key is called Backspace on some keyboards, it is whatever key you would use to correct a simple typing error when regularly using Emacs. (If you don’t have the LFD or TAB keys on your keyboard, the C-j and C-i keys are equivalent to them, respectively. If you don’t have a Meta key, look for Alt or Extend Char. You can also press ESC or C-[ first to get the same effect, so that M-x, ESC x, and C-[ x are all equivalent.) Sometimes the RET key is not shown when it is “obvious” that you must press RET to proceed. For example, the RET is usually omitted in key sequences like M-x calc-keypad RET. Commands are generally shown like this: p (calc-precision) or C-x * k (calc-keypad). This means that the command is normally used by pressing the p key or C-x * k key sequence, but it also has the full-name equivalent shown, e.g., M-x calc-precision. Commands that correspond to functions in algebraic notation are written: C (calc-cos) [cos]. This means the C key is equivalent to M-x calc-cos, and that the corresponding function in an algebraic-style formula would be ‘cos(x)’.

Chapter 1: Getting Started

A few commands don’t have key equivalents: calc-sincos [sincos].

1.4 A Demonstration of Calc This section will show some typical small problems being solved with Calc. The focus is more on demonstration than explanation, but everything you see here will be covered more thoroughly in the Tutorial. To begin, start Emacs if necessary (usually the command emacs does this), and type C-x * c to start the Calculator. (You can also use M-x calc if this doesn’t work. See Section 1.5.1 [Starting Calc], page 6, for various ways of starting the Calculator.) Be sure to type all the sample input exactly, especially noting the difference between lower-case and upper-case letters. Remember, RET, TAB, DEL, and SPC are the Return, Tab, Delete, and Space keys. RPN calculation. In RPN, you type the input number(s) first, then the command to operate on the numbers. √ Type 2 RET 3 + Q to compute 2 + 3 = 2.2360679775. Type P 2 ^ to compute π 2 = 9.86960440109. Type TAB to exchange the order of these two results. Type - I H S to subtract these results and compute the Inverse Hyperbolic sine of the difference, 2.72996136574. Type DEL to erase this result. Algebraic calculation. You can also enter calculations using conventional “algebraic” notation. To enter an algebraic formula, use the apostrophe key. √ Type ’ sqrt(2+3) RET to compute 2 + 3. Type ’ pi^2 RET to enter π 2 . To evaluate this symbolic formula as a number, type =. Type ’ arcsinh($ - $$) RET to subtract the second-most-recent result from the mostrecent and compute the Inverse Hyperbolic sine. Keypad mode. If you are using the X window system, press C-x * k to get Keypad mode. (If you don’t use X, skip to the next section.) Click on the 2, ENTER, 3, +, and SQRT “buttons” using your left mouse button. Click on PI, 2, and y^x. Click on INV, then ENTER to swap the two results. Click on -, INV, HYP, and SIN. Click on -5 | (Calculator)----All----- --%*- *Calc Trail*

In this figure, the mode-line for myfile has moved up and the “Calculator” window has appeared below it. As you can see, Calc actually makes two windows side-by-side. The lefthand one is called the stack window and the righthand one is called the trail window. The stack holds the numbers involved in the calculation you are currently performing. The trail holds a complete record of all calculations you have done. In a desk calculator with a printer, the trail corresponds to the paper tape that records what you do. In this case, the trail shows that four numbers (17.3, 3, 2, and 4) were first entered into the Calculator, then the 2 and 4 were multiplied to get 8, then the 3 and 8 were subtracted to get −5. (The ‘>’ symbol shows that this was the most recent calculation.) The net result is the two numbers 17.3 and −5 sitting on the stack. Most Calculator commands deal explicitly with the stack only, but there is a set of commands that allow you to search back through the trail and retrieve any previous result. Calc commands use the digits, letters, and punctuation keys. Shifted (i.e., upper-case) letters are different from lowercase letters. Some letters are prefix keys that begin twoletter commands. For example, e means “enter exponent” and shifted E means ex . With the d (“display modes”) prefix the letter “e” takes on very different meanings: d e means “engineering notation” and d E means “eqn language mode.” There is nothing stopping you from switching out of the Calc window and back into your editing window, say by using the Emacs C-x o (other-window) command. When the cursor is inside a regular window, Emacs acts just like normal. When the cursor is in the Calc stack or trail windows, keys are interpreted as Calc commands.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

When you quit by pressing C-x * c a second time, the Calculator windows go away but the actual Stack and Trail are not gone, just hidden. When you press C-x * c once again you will get the same stack and trail contents you had when you last used the Calculator. The Calculator does not remember its state between Emacs sessions. Thus if you quit Emacs and start it again, C-x * c will give you a fresh stack and trail. There is a command (m m) that lets you save your favorite mode settings between sessions, though. One of the things it saves is which user interface (standard or Keypad) you last used; otherwise, a freshly started Emacs will always treat C-x * * the same as C-x * c. The q key is another equivalent way to turn the Calculator off. If you type C-x * b first and then C-x * c, you get a full-screen version of Calc (full-calc) in which the stack and trail windows are still side-by-side but are now as tall as the whole Emacs screen. When you press q or C-x * c again to quit, the file you were editing before reappears. The C-x * b key switches back and forth between “big” full-screen mode and the normal partial-screen mode. Finally, C-x * o (calc-other-window) is like C-x * c except that the Calc window is not selected. The buffer you were editing before remains selected instead. If you are in a Calc window, then C-x * o will switch you out of it, being careful not to switch you to the Calc Trail window. So C-x * o is a handy way to switch out of Calc momentarily to edit your file; you can then type C-x * c to switch back into Calc when you are done.

1.5.3 Quick Mode (Overview) Quick mode is a quick way to use Calc when you don’t need the full complexity of the stack and trail. To use it, type C-x * q (quick-calc) in any regular editing buffer. Quick mode is very simple: It prompts you to type any formula in standard algebraic notation (like ‘4 - 2/3’) and then displays the result at the bottom of the Emacs screen (3.33333333333 in this case). You are then back in the same editing buffer you were in before, ready to continue editing or to type C-x * q again to do another quick calculation. The result of the calculation will also be in the Emacs “kill ring” so that a C-y command at this point will yank the result into your editing buffer. Calc mode settings affect Quick mode, too, though you will have to go into regular Calc (with C-x * c) to change the mode settings. See Section 3.6 [Quick Calculator], page 108, for further information.

1.5.4 Keypad Mode (Overview) Keypad mode is a mouse-based interface to the Calculator. It is designed for use with terminals that support a mouse. If you don’t have a mouse, you will have to operate Keypad mode with your arrow keys (which is probably more trouble than it’s worth). Type C-x * k to turn Keypad mode on or off. Once again you get two new windows, this time on the righthand side of the screen instead of at the bottom. The upper window is the familiar Calc Stack; the lower window is a picture of a typical calculator keypad.

Chapter 1: Getting Started

|--- Emacs Calculator Mode --|2: 17.3 |1: -5 | . |--%*-Calc: 12 Deg (Calcul |----+----+--Calc---+----+----1 |FLR |CEIL|RND |TRNC|CLN2|FLT | |----+----+----+----+----+----| | LN |EXP | |ABS |IDIV|MOD | |----+----+----+----+----+----| |SIN |COS |TAN |SQRT|y^x |1/x | |----+----+----+----+----+----| | ENTER |+/- |EEX |UNDO| ’ symbols and record their locations so that they can be updated automatically as variables are changed.

Duplicate the current formula immediately below and select the duplicate.

Insert a new formula at the current point.

Move the cursor to the next active formula in the buffer.

Move the cursor to the previous active formula in the buffer.

Update (i.e., as if by the = key) the formula at the current point.

‘

Edit (as if by calc-edit) the formula at the current point.

Miscellaneous commands: I

Run the Emacs Info system to read the Calc manual. (This is the same as h i inside of Calc.)

Run the Emacs Info system to read the Calc Tutorial.

Run the Emacs Info system to read the Calc Summary.

Load Calc entirely into memory. (Normally the various parts are loaded only as they are needed.)

Read a region of written keystroke names (like C-n a b c RET) and record them as the current keyboard macro.

(This is the “zero” digit key.) Reset the Calculator to its initial state: Empty stack, and initial mode settings.

1.6 History and Acknowledgments Calc was originally started as a two-week project to occupy a lull in the author’s schedule. Basically, a friend asked if I remembered the value of 232 . I didn’t offhand, but I said, “that’s easy, just call up an xcalc.” Xcalc duly reported that the answer to our question was ‘4.294967e+09’—with no way to see the full ten digits even though we knew they were there in the program’s memory! I was so annoyed, I vowed to write a calculator of my own, once and for all. I chose Emacs Lisp, a) because I had always been curious about it and b) because, being only a text editor extension language after all, Emacs Lisp would surely reach its limits long before the project got too far out of hand. To make a long story short, Emacs Lisp turned out to be a distressingly solid implementation of Lisp, and the humble task of calculating turned out to be more open-ended than one might have expected. Emacs Lisp didn’t have built-in floating point math (now it does), so this had to be simulated in software. In fact, Emacs integers would only comfortably fit six decimal digits or so (at the time)—not enough for a decent calculator. So I had to write my own highprecision integer code as well, and once I had this I figured that arbitrary-size integers were

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

just as easy as large integers. Arbitrary floating-point precision was the logical next step. Also, since the large integer arithmetic was there anyway it seemed only fair to give the user direct access to it, which in turn made it practical to support fractions as well as floats. All these features inspired me to look around for other data types that might be worth having. Around this time, my friend Rick Koshi showed me his nifty new HP-28 calculator. It allowed the user to manipulate formulas as well as numerical quantities, and it could also operate on matrices. I decided that these would be good for Calc to have, too. And once things had gone this far, I figured I might as well take a look at serious algebra systems for further ideas. Since these systems did far more than I could ever hope to implement, I decided to focus on rewrite rules and other programming features so that users could implement what they needed for themselves. Rick complained that matrices were hard to read, so I put in code to format them in a 2D style. Once these routines were in place, Big mode was obligatory. Gee, what other language modes would be useful? Scott Hemphill and Allen Knutson, two friends with a strong mathematical bent, contributed ideas and algorithms for a number of Calc features including modulo forms, primality testing, and float-to-fraction conversion. Units were added at the eager insistence of Mass Sivilotti. Later, Ulrich Mueller at CERN and Przemek Klosowski at NIST provided invaluable expert assistance with the units table. As far as I can remember, the idea of using algebraic formulas and variables to represent units dates back to an ancient article in Byte magazine about muMath, an early algebra system for microcomputers. Many people have contributed to Calc by reporting bugs and suggesting features, large and small. A few deserve special mention: Tim Peters, who helped develop the ideas that led to the selection commands, rewrite rules, and many other algebra features; Fran\ccois Pinard, who contributed an early prototype of the Calc Summary appendix as well as providing valuable suggestions in many other areas of Calc; Carl Witty, whose eagle eyes discovered many typographical and factual errors in the Calc manual; Tim Kay, who drove the development of Embedded mode; Ove Ewerlid, who made many suggestions relating to the algebra commands and contributed some code for polynomial operations; Randal Schwartz, who suggested the calc-eval function; Juha Sarlin, who first worked out how to split Calc into quickly-loading parts; Bob Weiner, who helped immensely with the Lucid Emacs port; and Robert J. Chassell, who suggested the Calc Tutorial and exercises as well as many other things. Among the books used in the development of Calc were Knuth’s Art of Computer Programming (especially volume II, Seminumerical Algorithms); Numerical Recipes by Press, Flannery, Teukolsky, and Vetterling; Bevington’s Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences; Concrete Mathematics by Graham, Knuth, and Patashnik; Steele’s Common Lisp, the Language; the CRC Standard Math Tables (William H. Beyer, ed.); and Abramowitz and Stegun’s venerable Handbook of Mathematical Functions. Also, of course, Calc could not have been written without the excellent GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, by Bil Lewis and Dan LaLiberte. Final thanks go to Richard Stallman, without whose fine implementations of the Emacs editor, language, and environment, Calc would have been finished in two weeks.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2 Tutorial This chapter explains how to use Calc and its many features, in a step-by-step, tutorial way. You are encouraged to run Calc and work along with the examples as you read (see Section 1.5.1 [Starting Calc], page 6). If you are already familiar with advanced calculators, you may wish to skip on to the rest of this manual. This tutorial describes the standard user interface of Calc only. The Quick mode and Keypad mode interfaces are fairly self-explanatory. See Chapter 16 [Embedded Mode], page 349, for a description of the Embedded mode interface. The easiest way to read this tutorial on-line is to have two windows on your Emacs screen, one with Calc and one with the Info system. Press C-x * t to set this up; the on-line tutorial will be opened in the current window and Calc will be started in another window. From the Info window, the command C-x * c can be used to switch to the Calc window and C-x * o can be used to switch back to the Info window. (If you have a printed copy of the manual you can use that instead; in that case you only need to press C-x * c to start Calc.) This tutorial is designed to be done in sequence. But the rest of this manual does not assume you have gone through the tutorial. The tutorial does not cover everything in the Calculator, but it touches on most general areas. The Calc Summary at the end of the reference manual includes some blank space for your own use. You may wish to keep notes there as you learn Calc.

2.1 Basic Tutorial In this section, we learn how RPN and algebraic-style calculations work, how to undo and redo an operation done by mistake, and how to control various modes of the Calculator.

2.1.1 RPN Calculations and the Stack Calc normally uses RPN notation. You may be familiar with the RPN system from HewlettPackard calculators, FORTH, or PostScript. (Reverse Polish Notation, RPN, is named after the Polish mathematician Jan Lukasiewicz.) The central component of an RPN calculator is the stack. A calculator stack is like a stack of dishes. New dishes (numbers) are added at the top of the stack, and numbers are normally only removed from the top of the stack. In an operation like 2 + 3, the 2 and 3 are called the operands and the + is the operator. In an RPN calculator you always enter the operands first, then the operator. Each time you type a number, Calc adds or pushes it onto the top of the Stack. When you press an operator key like +, Calc pops the appropriate number of operands from the stack and pushes back the result. Thus we could add the numbers 2 and 3 in an RPN calculator by typing: 2 RET 3 RET +. (The RET key, Return, corresponds to the ENTER key on traditional RPN calculators.) Try this now if you wish; type C-x * c to switch into the Calc window (you can type C-x * c again or C-x * o to switch back to the Tutorial window). The first four keystrokes “push” the numbers 2 and 3 onto the stack. The + key “pops” the top two numbers from the stack, adds them, and pushes the result (5) back onto the stack. Here’s how the stack will look at various points throughout the calculation:

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

C-x * c

2 .

2: 1:

2 RET

2 3 . 3 RET

5 .

DEL

The ‘.’ symbol is a marker that represents the top of the stack. Note that the “top” of the stack is really shown at the bottom of the Stack window. This may seem backwards, but it turns out to be less distracting in regular use. The numbers ‘1:’ and ‘2:’ on the left are stack level numbers. Old RPN calculators always had four stack levels called x, y, z, and t. Calc’s stack can grow as large as you like, so it uses numbers instead of letters. Some stack-manipulation commands accept a numeric argument that says which stack level to work on. Normal commands like + always work on the top few levels of the stack. The Stack buffer is just an Emacs buffer, and you can move around in it using the regular Emacs motion commands. But no matter where the cursor is, even if you have scrolled the ‘.’ marker out of view, most Calc commands always move the cursor back down to level 1 before doing anything. It is possible to move the ‘.’ marker upwards through the stack, temporarily “hiding” some numbers from commands like +. This is called stack truncation and we will not cover it in this tutorial; see Section 6.7.8 [Truncating the Stack], page 155, if you are interested. You don’t really need the second RET in 2 RET 3 RET +. That’s because if you type any operator name or other non-numeric key when you are entering a number, the Calculator automatically enters that number and then does the requested command. Thus 2 RET 3 + will work just as well. Examples in this tutorial will often omit RET even when the stack displays shown would only happen if you did press RET: 1:

2 .

2 RET

2: 1:

2 3 . 3

5 .

Here, after pressing 3 the stack would really show ‘1: 2’ with ‘Calc: 3’ in the minibuffer. In these situations, you can press the optional RET to see the stack as the figure shows. (•) Exercise 1. (This tutorial will include exercises at various points. Try them if you wish. Answers to all the exercises are located at the end of the Tutorial chapter. Each exercise will include a cross-reference to its particular answer. If you are reading with the Emacs Info system, press f and the exercise number to go to the answer, then the letter l to return to where you were.) Here’s the first exercise: What will the keystrokes 1 RET 2 RET 3 RET 4 + * - compute? (‘*’ is the symbol for multiplication.) Figure it out by hand, then try it with Calc to see if you’re right. See Section 2.7.1 [RPN Answer 1], page 69. (•) (•) Exercise 2. Compute (2 × 4) + (7 × 9.5) + 54 using the stack. See Section 2.7.2 [RPN Answer 2], page 69. (•) The DEL key is called Backspace on some keyboards. It is whatever key you would use to correct a simple typing error when regularly using Emacs. The DEL key pops and throws away the top value on the stack. (You can still get that value back from the Trail if you

Chapter 2: Tutorial

should need it later on.) There are many places in this tutorial where we assume you have used DEL to erase the results of the previous example at the beginning of a new example. In the few places where it is really important to use DEL to clear away old results, the text will remind you to do so. (It won’t hurt to let things accumulate on the stack, except that whenever you give a display-mode-changing command Calc will have to spend a long time reformatting such a large stack.) Since the - key is also an operator (it subtracts the top two stack elements), how does one enter a negative number? Calc uses the _ (underscore) key to act like the minus sign in a number. So, typing -5 RET won’t work because the - key will try to do a subtraction, but _5 RET works just fine. You can also press n, which means “change sign.” It changes the number at the top of the stack (or the number being entered) from positive to negative or vice-versa: 5 n RET. If you press RET when you’re not entering a number, the effect is to duplicate the top number on the stack. Consider this calculation: 1:

3 .

2: 1:

3 RET

3 3 .

RET

9 .

2: 1:

9 9 .

RET

81 .

(Of course, an easier way to do this would be 3 RET 4 ^, to raise 3 to the fourth power.) The space-bar key (denoted SPC here) performs the same function as RET; you could replace all three occurrences of RET in the above example with SPC and the effect would be the same. Another stack manipulation key is TAB. This exchanges the top two stack entries. Suppose you have computed 2 RET 3 + to get 5, and then you realize what you really wanted to compute was 20/(2 + 3). 1:

5 .

2: 1:

2 RET 3 +

5 20 .

2: 1:

20 5 .

TAB

4 .

Planning ahead, the calculation would have gone like this: 1:

20 .

20 RET

2: 1:

20 2 .

3: 2: 1:

2 RET

20 2 3 .

2: 1:

20 5 .

4 .

A related stack command is M-TAB (hold META and type TAB). It rotates the top three elements of the stack upward, bringing the object in level 3 to the top. 1:

10 .

10 RET

2: 1:

10 20 .

20 RET

3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 .

30 RET

3: 2: 1:

20 30 10 .

M-TAB

3: 2: 1:

30 10 20 .

M-TAB

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

(•) Exercise 3. Suppose the numbers 10, 20, and 30 are on the stack. Figure out how to add one to the number in level 2 without affecting the rest of the stack. Also figure out how to add one to the number in level 3. See Section 2.7.3 [RPN Answer 3], page 69. (•) Operations like +, -, *, /, and ^ pop two arguments from the stack and push a result. Operations like n and Q (square root) pop a single number and push the result. You can think of them as simply operating on the top element of the stack. 1:

3 .

3 RET

9 .

RET *

2: 1:

9 16 .

4 RET RET *

25 .

5 .

(Note that capital Q means to hold down the Shift key while typing q. Remember, plain unshifted q is the Quit command.) Here we’ve used the Pythagorean Theorem to determine the hypotenuse of a right triangle. Calc actually has a built-in command for that called f h, but let’s suppose we can’t remember the necessary keystrokes. We can still enter it by its full name using M-x notation: 1:

3 .

3 RET

2: 1:

3 4 .

4 RET

5 .

M-x calc-hypot

All Calculator commands begin with the word ‘calc-’. Since it gets tiring to type this, Calc provides an x key which is just like the regular Emacs M-x key except that it types the ‘calc-’ prefix for you: 1:

3 .

3 RET

2: 1:

3 4 .

4 RET

5 .

x hypot

What happens if you take the square root of a negative number? 1:

4 .

4 RET

-4 .

(0, 2) . Q

The notation (a, b) represents a complex number. Complex numbers are more traditionally written a + bi; Calc can display in this format, too, but for now we’ll stick to the (a, b) notation. If you don’t know how complex numbers work, you can safely ignore this feature. Complex numbers only arise from operations that would be errors in a calculator that didn’t have complex numbers. (For example, taking the square root or logarithm of a negative number produces a complex result.) Complex numbers are entered in the notation shown. The ( and , and ) keys manipulate “incomplete complex numbers.” 1:

( ... .

(

2: 1:

( ... 2 . 2

(2, ... .

(2, ... 3 . 3

(2, 3) .

)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

You can perform calculations while entering parts of incomplete objects. However, an incomplete object cannot actually participate in a calculation: 1:

( ... .

2: 1:

(

( ... 2 .

3: 2: 1:

2 RET

( ... 2 3 .

( ... 5 .

(error) +

Adding 5 to an incomplete object makes no sense, so the last command produces an error message and leaves the stack the same. Incomplete objects can’t participate in arithmetic, but they can be moved around by the regular stack commands. 2: 1:

2 3 .

3: 2: 1:

2 RET 3 RET

2 3 ( ... . (

3: 2: 1:

3 ( ... 2 . M-TAB

( ... 2 3 .

M-TAB

(2, 3) .

)

Note that the , (comma) key did not have to be used here. When you press ) all the stack entries between the incomplete entry and the top are collected, so there’s never really a reason to use the comma. It’s up to you. (•) Exercise 4. To enter the complex number (2, 3), your friend Joe typed ( 2 , SPC 3 ). What happened? (Joe thought of a clever way to correct his mistake in only two keystrokes, but it didn’t quite work. Try it to find out why.) See Section 2.7.4 [RPN Answer 4], page 70. (•) Vectors are entered the same way as complex numbers, but with square brackets in place of parentheses. We’ll meet vectors again later in the tutorial. Any Emacs command can be given a numeric prefix argument by typing a series of META-digits beforehand. If META is awkward for you, you can instead type C-u followed by the necessary digits. Numeric prefix arguments can be negative, as in M-- M-3 M-5 or C-u - 3 5. Calc commands use numeric prefix arguments in a variety of ways. For example, a numeric prefix on the + operator adds any number of stack entries at once: 1:

10 .

10 RET

2: 1:

10 20 .

20 RET

3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 .

30 RET

3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 .

C-u 3

60 .

For stack manipulation commands like RET, a positive numeric prefix argument operates on the top n stack entries at once. A negative argument operates on the entry in level n only. An argument of zero operates on the entire stack. In this example, we copy the second-to-top element of the stack: 1:

10 .

10 RET

2: 1:

10 20 .

20 RET

3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 .

30 RET

3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 .

C-u -2

4: 3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 20 . RET

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Another common idiom is M-0 DEL, which clears the stack. (The M-0 numeric prefix tells DEL to operate on the entire stack.)

2.1.2 Algebraic-Style Calculations If you are not used to RPN notation, you may prefer to operate the Calculator in Algebraic mode, which is closer to the way non-RPN calculators work. In Algebraic mode, you enter formulas in traditional 2 + 3 notation. Notice: Calc gives ‘/’ lower precedence than ‘*’, so that ‘a/b*c’ is interpreted as ‘a/(b*c)’; this is not standard across all computer languages. See below for details. You don’t really need any special “mode” to enter algebraic formulas. You can enter a formula at any time by pressing the apostrophe (’) key. Answer the prompt with the desired formula, then press RET. The formula is evaluated and the result is pushed onto the RPN stack. If you don’t want to think in RPN at all, you can enter your whole computation as a formula, read the result from the stack, then press DEL to delete it from the stack. Try pressing the apostrophe key, then 2+3+4, then RET. The result should be the number 9. Algebraic formulas use the operators ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’. You can use parentheses to make the order of evaluation clear. In the absence of parentheses, ‘^’ is evaluated first, then ‘*’, then ‘/’, then finally ‘+’ and ‘-’. For example, the expression 2 + 3*4*5 / 6*7^8 - 9 is equivalent to 2 + ((3*4*5) / (6*(7^8)) - 9 or, in large mathematical notation, 3×4×5 −9 2+ 6 × 78 The result of this expression will be the number −6.99999826533. Calc’s order of evaluation is the same as for most computer languages, except that ‘*’ binds more strongly than ‘/’, as the above example shows. As in normal mathematical notation, the ‘*’ symbol can often be omitted: ‘2 a’ is the same as ‘2*a’. Operators at the same level are evaluated from left to right, except that ‘^’ is evaluated from right to left. Thus, ‘2-3-4’ is equivalent to ‘(2-3)-4’ or −5, whereas ‘2^3^4’ is equivalent to ‘2^(3^4)’ (a very large integer; try it!). If you tire of typing the apostrophe all the time, there is Algebraic mode, where Calc automatically senses when you are about to type an algebraic expression. To enter this mode, press the two letters m a. (An ‘Alg’ indicator should appear in the Calc window’s mode line.) Press m a, then 2+3+4 with no apostrophe, then RET. In Algebraic mode, when you press any key that would normally begin entering a number (such as a digit, a decimal point, or the _ key), or if you press ( or [, Calc automatically begins an algebraic entry. Functions which do not have operator symbols like ‘+’ and ‘*’ must be entered in formulas using function-call notation. For example, the function name corresponding to the squareroot key Q is sqrt. To compute a square root in a formula, you would use the notation ‘sqrt(x)’.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

Press the apostrophe, then type sqrt(5*2) - 3. The result should be 0.16227766017. Note that if the formula begins with a function name, you need to use the apostrophe even if you are in Algebraic mode. If you type arcsin out of the blue, the a r will be taken as an Algebraic Rewrite command, and the csin will be taken as the name of the rewrite rule to use! Some people prefer to enter complex numbers and vectors in algebraic form because they find RPN entry with incomplete objects to be too distracting, even though they otherwise use Calc as an RPN calculator. Still in Algebraic mode, type: 1:

(2, 3) .

(2,3) RET

2: 1:

(2, 3) (1, -2) .

(1,-2) RET

(8, -1) .

2: 1:

(8, -1) 1 .

1 RET

(9, -1) .

Algebraic mode allows us to enter complex numbers without pressing an apostrophe first, but it also means we need to press RET after every entry, even for a simple number like 1. (You can type C-u m a to enable a special Incomplete Algebraic mode in which the ( and [ keys use algebraic entry even though regular numeric keys still use RPN numeric entry. There is also Total Algebraic mode, started by typing m t, in which all normal keys begin algebraic entry. You must then use the META key to type Calc commands: M-m t to get back out of Total Algebraic mode, M-q to quit, etc.) If you’re still in Algebraic mode, press m a again to turn it off. Actual non-RPN calculators use a mixture of algebraic and RPN styles. In general, operators of two numbers (like + and *) use algebraic form, but operators of one number (like n and Q) use RPN form. Also, a non-RPN calculator allows you to see the intermediate results of a calculation as you go along. You can accomplish this in Calc by performing your calculation as a series of algebraic entries, using the $ sign to tie them together. In an algebraic formula, $ represents the number on the top of the stack. Here, we perform the √ calculation 2 × 4 + 1, which on a traditional calculator would be done by pressing 2 * 4 + 1 = and then the square-root key. 1:

8 .

’ 2*4 RET

9 . $+1 RET

3 . Q

Notice that we didn’t need to press an apostrophe for the $+1, because the dollar sign always begins an algebraic entry. (•) Exercise 1. How could you get the same effect as pressing Q but using an algebraic entry instead? How about if the Q key on your keyboard were broken? See Section 2.7.5 [Algebraic Answer 1], page 70. (•) The notations $$, $$$, and so on stand for higher stack entries. For example, ’ $$+$ RET is just like typing +. Algebraic formulas can include variables. To store in a variable, press s s, then type the variable name, then press RET. (There are actually two flavors of store command: s s stores a number in a variable but also leaves the number on the stack, while s t removes

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

a number from the stack and stores it in the variable.) A variable name should consist of one or more letters or digits, beginning with a letter. 1:

17 . 17

s t a RET

a + a^2 .

’ a+a^2 RET

306 . =

The = key evaluates a formula by replacing all its variables by the values that were stored in them. For RPN calculations, you can recall a variable’s value on the stack either by entering its name as a formula and pressing =, or by using the s r command. 1:

17 .

s r a RET

2: 1:

17 17 .

3: 2: 1:

’ a RET =

17 17 2 . 2

2: 1:

17 289 .

306 .

If you press a single digit for a variable name (as in s t 3, you get one of ten quick variables q0 through q9. They are “quick” simply because you don’t have to type the letter q or the RET after their names. In fact, you can type simply s 3 as a shorthand for s s 3, and likewise for t 3 and r 3. Any variables in an algebraic formula for which you have not stored values are left alone, even when you evaluate the formula. 1:

2 a + 2 b .

’ 2a+2b RET

2 b + 34 . =

Calls to function names which are undefined in Calc are also left alone, as are calls for which the value is undefined. 1:

log10(0) + log10(x) + log10(5, 6) + foo(3) + 2 .

’ log10(100) + log10(0) + log10(x) + log10(5,6) + foo(3) RET

In this example, the first call to log10 works, but the other calls are not evaluated. In the second call, the logarithm is undefined for that value of the argument; in the third, the argument is symbolic, and in the fourth, there are too many arguments. In the fifth case, there is no function called foo. You will see a “Wrong number of arguments” message referring to ‘log10(5,6)’. Press the w (“why”) key to see any other messages that may have arisen from the last calculation. In this case you will get “logarithm of zero,” then “number expected: x”. Calc automatically displays the first message only if the message is sufficiently important; for example, Calc considers “wrong number of arguments” and “logarithm of zero” to be important enough to report automatically, while a message like “number expected: x” will only show up if you explicitly press the w key. (•) Exercise 2. Joe entered the formula ‘2 x y’, stored 5 in x, pressed =, and got the expected result, ‘10 y’. He then tried the same for the formula ‘2 x (1+y)’, expecting ‘10 (1+y)’, but it didn’t work. Why not? See Section 2.7.6 [Algebraic Answer 2], page 70. (•) (•) Exercise 3. What result would you expect 1 RET 0 / to give? What if you then type 0 *? See Section 2.7.7 [Algebraic Answer 3], page 70. (•)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

One interesting way to work with variables is to use the evaluates-to (‘=>’) operator. It works like this: Enter a formula algebraically in the usual way, but follow the formula with an ‘=>’ symbol. (There is also an s = command which builds an ‘=>’ formula using the stack.) On the stack, you will see two copies of the formula with an ‘=>’ between them. The lefthand formula is exactly like you typed it; the righthand formula has been evaluated as if by typing =. 2: 1:

2 + 3 => 5 2 a + 2 b => 34 + 2 b .

’ 2+3 => RET

2: 1:

’ 2a+2b RET s =

2 + 3 => 5 2 a + 2 b => 20 + 2 b . 10 s t a RET

Notice that the instant we stored a new value in a, all ‘=>’ operators already on the stack that referred to a were updated to use the new value. With ‘=>’, you can push a set of formulas on the stack, then change the variables experimentally to see the effects on the formulas’ values. You can also “unstore” a variable when you are through with it: 2: 1:

2 + 5 => 5 2 a + 2 b => 2 a + 2 b . s u a RET

We will encounter formulas involving variables and functions again when we discuss the algebra and calculus features of the Calculator.

2.1.3 Undo and Redo If you make a mistake, you can usually correct it by pressing shift-U, the “undo” command. First, clear the stack (M-0 DEL) and exit and restart Calc (C-x * * C-x * *) to make sure things start off with a clean slate. Now: 1:

2 .

2: 1:

2 RET

2 3 .

8 .

2: 1:

2 3 .

6 .

You can undo any number of times. Calc keeps a complete record of all you have done since you last opened the Calc window. After the above example, you could type: 1:

6 .

2: 1:

2 3 .

2 .

(error) U

You can also type D to “redo” a command that you have undone mistakenly. .

2 .

2: 1:

2 3 . D

6 .

(error) D

It was not possible to redo past the 6, since that was placed there by something other than an undo command. You can think of undo and redo as a sort of “time machine.” Press U to go backward in time, D to go forward. If you go backward and do something (like *) then, as any science

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

fiction reader knows, you have changed your future and you cannot go forward again. Thus, the inability to redo past the 6 even though there was an earlier undo command. You can always recall an earlier result using the Trail. We’ve ignored the trail so far, but it has been faithfully recording everything we did since we loaded the Calculator. If the Trail is not displayed, press t d now to turn it on. Let’s try grabbing an earlier result. The 8 we computed was undone by a U command, and was lost even to Redo when we pressed *, but it’s still there in the trail. There should be a little ‘>’ arrow (the trail pointer) resting on the last trail entry. If there isn’t, press t ] to reset the trail pointer. Now, press t p to move the arrow onto the line containing 8, and press t y to “yank” that number back onto the stack. If you press t ] again, you will see that even our Yank command went into the trail. Let’s go further back in time. Earlier in the tutorial we computed a huge integer using the formula ‘2^3^4’. We don’t remember what it was, but the first digits were “241”. Press t r (which stands for trail-search-reverse), then type 241. The trail cursor will jump back to the next previous occurrence of the string “241” in the trail. This is just a regular Emacs incremental search; you can now press C-s or C-r to continue the search forwards or backwards as you like. To finish the search, press RET. This halts the incremental search and leaves the trail pointer at the thing we found. Now we can type t y to yank that number onto the stack. If we hadn’t remembered the “241”, we could simply have searched for 2^3^4, then pressed RET t n to halt and then move to the next item. You may have noticed that all the trail-related commands begin with the letter t. (The store-and-recall commands, on the other hand, all began with s.) Calc has so many commands that there aren’t enough keys for all of them, so various commands are grouped into two-letter sequences where the first letter is called the prefix key. If you type a prefix key by accident, you can press C-g to cancel it. (In fact, you can press C-g to cancel almost anything in Emacs.) To get help on a prefix key, press that key followed by ?. Some prefixes have several lines of help, so you need to press ? repeatedly to see them all. You can also type h h to see all the help at once. Try pressing t ? now. You will see a line of the form, trail/time: Display; Fwd, Back; Next, Prev, Here, [, ]; Yank:

[MORE]

The word “trail” indicates that the t prefix key contains trail-related commands. Each entry on the line shows one command, with a single capital letter showing which letter you press to get that command. We have used t n, t p, t ], and t y so far. The ‘[MORE]’ means you can press ? again to see more t-prefix commands. Notice that the commands are roughly divided (by semicolons) into related groups. When you are in the help display for a prefix key, the prefix is still active. If you press another key, like y for example, it will be interpreted as a t y command. If all you wanted was to look at the help messages, press C-g afterwards to cancel the prefix. One more way to correct an error is by editing the stack entries. The actual Stack buffer is marked read-only and must not be edited directly, but you can press ‘ (the backquote or accent grave) to edit a stack entry. Try entering ‘3.141439’ now. If this is supposed to represent π, it’s got several errors. Press ‘ to edit this number. Now use the normal Emacs cursor motion and editing keys

Chapter 2: Tutorial

to change the second 4 to a 5, and to transpose the 3 and the 9. When you press RET, the number on the stack will be replaced by your new number. This works for formulas, vectors, and all other types of values you can put on the stack. The ‘ key also works during entry of a number or algebraic formula.

2.1.4 Mode-Setting Commands Calc has many types of modes that affect the way it interprets your commands or the way it displays data. We have already seen one mode, namely Algebraic mode. There are many others, too; we’ll try some of the most common ones here. Perhaps the most fundamental mode in Calc is the current precision. Notice the ‘12’ on the Calc window’s mode line: --%*-Calc: 12 Deg

(Calculator)----All------

Most of the symbols there are Emacs things you don’t need to worry about, but the ‘12’ and the ‘Deg’ are mode indicators. The ‘12’ means that calculations should always be carried to 12 significant figures. That is why, when we type 1 RET 7 /, we get 0.142857142857 with exactly 12 digits, not counting leading and trailing zeros. You can set the precision to anything you like by pressing p, then entering a suitable number. Try pressing p 30 RET, then doing 1 RET 7 / again: 1: 2:

0.142857142857 0.142857142857142857142857142857 .

Although the precision can be set arbitrarily high, Calc always has to have some value for the current precision. After all, the true value 1/7 is an infinitely repeating decimal; Calc has to stop somewhere. Of course, calculations are slower the more digits you request. Press p 12 now to set the precision back down to the default. Calculations always use the current precision. For example, even though we have a 30digit value for 1/7 on the stack, if we use it in a calculation in 12-digit mode it will be rounded down to 12 digits before it is used. Try it; press RET to duplicate the number, then 1 +. Notice that the RET key didn’t round the number, because it doesn’t do any calculation. But the instant we pressed +, the number was rounded down. 1: 2: 3:

0.142857142857 0.142857142857142857142857142857 1.14285714286 .

In fact, since we added a digit on the left, we had to lose one digit on the right from even the 12-digit value of 1/7. How did we get more than 12 digits when we computed ‘2^3^4’? The answer is that Calc makes a distinction between integers and floating-point numbers, or floats. An integer is a number that does not contain a decimal point. There is no such thing as an “infinitely repeating fraction integer,” so Calc doesn’t have to limit itself. If you asked for ‘2^10000’ (don’t try this!), you would have to wait a long time but you would eventually get an exact answer. If you ask for ‘2.^10000’, you will quickly get an answer which is correct only to 12 places. The decimal point tells Calc that it should use floating-point arithmetic to get the answer, not exact integer arithmetic.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

You can use the F (calc-floor) command to convert a floating-point value to an integer, and c f (calc-float) to convert an integer to floating-point form. Let’s try entering that last calculation: 1:

2. .

2: 1:

2.0 RET

2. 10000 .

10000 RET

1.99506311689e3010 .

Notice the letter ‘e’ in there. It represents “times ten to the power of,” and is used by Calc automatically whenever writing the number out fully would introduce more extra zeros than you probably want to see. You can enter numbers in this notation, too. 1:

2. .

2: 1:

2.0 RET

2. 10000. .

1e4 RET

1.99506311678e3010 .

Hey, the answer is different! Look closely at the middle columns of the two examples. In the first, the stack contained the exact integer 10000, but in the second it contained a floatingpoint value with a decimal point. When you raise a number to an integer power, Calc uses repeated squaring and multiplication to get the answer. When you use a floating-point power, Calc uses logarithms and exponentials. As you can see, a slight error crept in during one of these methods. Which one should we trust? Let’s raise the precision a bit and find out: .

p 16 RET

2. .

2. RET

2: 1:

2. 10000. . 1e4

1.995063116880828e3010 .

p 12 RET

Presumably, it doesn’t matter whether we do this higher-precision calculation using an integer or floating-point power, since we have added enough “guard digits” to trust the first 12 digits no matter what. And the verdict is. . . Integer powers were more accurate; in fact, the result was only off by one unit in the last place. Calc does many of its internal calculations to a slightly higher precision, but it doesn’t always bump the precision up enough. In each case, Calc added about two digits of precision during its calculation and then rounded back down to 12 digits afterward. In one case, it was enough; in the other, it wasn’t. If you really need x digits of precision, it never hurts to do the calculation with a few extra guard digits. What if we want guard digits but don’t want to look at them? We can set the float format. Calc supports four major formats for floating-point numbers, called normal, fixedpoint, scientific notation, and engineering notation. You get them by pressing d n, d f, d s, and d e, respectively. In each case, you can supply a numeric prefix argument which says how many digits should be displayed. As an example, let’s put a few numbers onto the stack and try some different display modes. First, use M-0 DEL to clear the stack, then enter the four numbers shown here:

Chapter 2: Tutorial

4: 3: 2: 1:

12345 12345. 123.45 12.345 . d n

4: 3: 2: 1:

12345 12300. 123. 12.3 .

4: 3: 2: 1:

M-3 d n

12345 1.2345e4 1.2345e2 1.2345e1 . d s

4: 3: 2: 1:

12345 1.23e4 1.23e2 1.23e1 .

M-3 d s

4: 3: 2: 1:

12345 12345.000 123.450 12.345 .

M-3 d f

Notice that when we typed M-3 d n, the numbers were rounded down to three significant digits, but then when we typed d s all five significant figures reappeared. The float format does not affect how numbers are stored, it only affects how they are displayed. Only the current precision governs the actual rounding of numbers in the Calculator’s memory. Engineering notation, not shown here, is like scientific notation except the exponent (the power-of-ten part) is always adjusted to be a multiple of three (as in “kilo,” “micro,” etc.). As a result there will be one, two, or three digits before the decimal point. Whenever you change a display-related mode, Calc redraws everything in the stack. This may be slow if there are many things on the stack, so Calc allows you to type shift-H before any mode command to prevent it from updating the stack. Anything Calc displays after the mode-changing command will appear in the new format. 4: 3: 2: 1:

12345 12345.000 123.450 12.345 . H d s

4: 3: 2: 1:

12345 12345.000 123.450 1.2345e1 .

4: 3: 2: 1:

DEL U

12345 12345.000 1.2345e1 1.2345e2 . TAB

4: 3: 2: 1:

12345 1.2345e4 1.2345e1 1.2345e2 . d SPC

4: 3: 2: 1:

12345 12345. 123.45 12.345 . d n

Here the H d s command changes to scientific notation but without updating the screen. Deleting the top stack entry and undoing it back causes it to show up in the new format; swapping the top two stack entries reformats both entries. The d SPC command refreshes the whole stack. The d n command changes back to the normal float format; since it doesn’t have an H prefix, it also updates all the stack entries to be in d n format. Notice that the integer 12345 was not affected by any of the float formats. Integers are integers, and are always displayed exactly. Large integers have their own problems. Let’s look back at the result of 2^3^4. 2417851639229258349412352 Quick—how many digits does this have? Try typing d g: 2,417,851,639,229,258,349,412,352 Now how many digits does this have? It’s much easier to tell! We can actually group digits into clumps of any size. Some people prefer M-5 d g: 24178,51639,22925,83494,12352 Let’s see what happens to floating-point numbers when they are grouped. First, type p 25 RET to make sure we have enough precision to get ourselves into trouble. Now, type 1e13 /: 24,17851,63922.9258349412352 The integer part is grouped but the fractional part isn’t. Now try M-- M-5 d g (that’s meta-minus-sign, meta-five):

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

24,17851,63922.92583,49412,352 If you find it hard to tell the decimal point from the commas, try changing the grouping character to a space with d , SPC: 24 17851 63922.92583 49412 352 Type d , , to restore the normal grouping character, then d g again to turn grouping off. Also, press p 12 to restore the default precision. Press U enough times to get the original big integer back. (Notice that U does not undo each mode-setting command; if you want to undo a mode-setting command, you have to do it yourself.) Now, type d r 16 RET: 16#200000000000000000000 The number is now displayed in hexadecimal, or “base-16” form. Suddenly it looks pretty simple; this should be no surprise, since we got this number by computing a power of two, and 16 is a power of 2. In fact, we can use d r 2 RET to see it in actual binary form: 2#1000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 ... We don’t have enough space here to show all the zeros! They won’t fit on a typical screen, either, so you will have to use horizontal scrolling to see them all. Press < and > to scroll the stack window left and right by half its width. Another way to view something large is to press ‘ (back-quote) to edit the top of stack in a separate window. (Press C-c C-c when you are done.) You can enter non-decimal numbers using the # symbol, too. Let’s see what the hexadecimal number ‘5FE’ looks like in binary. Type 16#5FE (the letters can be typed in upper or lower case; they will always appear in upper case). It will also help to turn grouping on with d g: 2#101,1111,1110 Notice that d g groups by fours by default if the display radix is binary or hexadecimal, but by threes if it is decimal, octal, or any other radix. Now let’s see that number in decimal; type d r 10: 1,534 Numbers are not stored with any particular radix attached. They’re just numbers; they can be entered in any radix, and are always displayed in whatever radix you’ve chosen with d r. The current radix applies to integers, fractions, and floats. (•) Exercise 1. Your friend Joe tried to enter one-third as ‘3#0.1’ in d r 3 mode with a precision of 12. He got ‘3#0.0222222...’ (with 25 2’s) in the display. When he multiplied that by three, he got ‘3#0.222222...’ instead of the expected ‘3#1’. Next, Joe entered ‘3#0.2’ and, to his great relief, saw ‘3#0.2’ on the screen. But when he typed 2 /, he got ‘3#0.10000001’ (some zeros omitted). What’s going on here? See Section 2.7.8 [Modes Answer 1], page 71. (•) (•) Exercise 2. Scientific notation works in non-decimal modes in the natural way (the exponent is a power of the radix instead of a power of ten, although the exponent itself is always written in decimal). Thus ‘8#1.23e3 = 8#1230.0’. Suppose we have the hexadecimal number ‘f.e8f’ times 16 to the 15th power: We write ‘16#f.e8fe15’. What is wrong with this picture? What could we write instead that would work better? See Section 2.7.9 [Modes Answer 2], page 71. (•)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

The m prefix key has another set of modes, relating to the way Calc interprets your inputs and does computations. Whereas d-prefix modes generally affect the way things look, m-prefix modes affect the way they are actually computed. The most popular m-prefix mode is the angular mode. Notice the ‘Deg’ indicator in the mode line. This means that if you use a command that interprets a number as an angle, it will assume the angle is measured in degrees. For example, 1:

45 .

0.707106781187 .

0.500000000001 .

2 ^

0.5 . c 1

√ The shift-S command computes the sine of an angle. The sine of 45 degrees is 2/2; squaring this yields 2/4 √ = 0.5. However, there has been a slight roundoff error because the representation of 2/2 wasn’t exact. The c 1 command is a handy way to clean up numbers in this case; it temporarily reduces the precision by one digit while it re-rounds the number on the top of the stack. (•) Exercise 3. Your friend Joe computed the sine of 45 degrees as shown above, then, hoping to avoid an inexact result, he increased the precision to 16 digits before squaring. What happened? See Section 2.7.10 [Modes Answer 3], page 72. (•) To do this calculation in radians, we would type m r first. (The indicator changes to ‘Rad’.) 45 degrees corresponds to π/4 radians. To get π, press the P key. (Once again, this is a shifted capital P. Remember, unshifted p sets the precision.) 1:

3.14159265359 .

0.785398163398 .

1: .

4 /

m r

0.707106781187

Likewise, inverse trigonometric functions generate results in either radians or degrees, depending on the current angular mode. 1:

0.707106781187 . .5 Q

m r

0.785398163398 . I S

Here we compute the Inverse Sine of

√

m d

45. . U I S

0.5, first in radians, then in degrees.

Use c d and c r to convert a number from radians to degrees and vice-versa. 1:

45 .

0.785398163397 .

c r

45. . c d

Another interesting mode is Fraction mode. Normally, dividing two integers produces a floating-point result if the quotient can’t be expressed as an exact integer. Fraction mode causes integer division to produce a fraction, i.e., a rational number, instead. 2: 1:

12 9 .

12 RET 9

1.33333333333 .

m f

4:3 .

U /

m f

In the first case, we get an approximate floating-point result. In the second case, we get an exact fractional result (four-thirds).

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

You can enter a fraction at any time using : notation. (Calc uses : instead of / as the fraction separator because / is already used to divide the top two stack elements.) Calculations involving fractions will always produce exact fractional results; Fraction mode only says what to do when dividing two integers. (•) Exercise 4. If fractional arithmetic is exact, why would you ever use floating-point numbers instead? See Section 2.7.11 [Modes Answer 4], page 72. (•) Typing m f doesn’t change any existing values in the stack. In the above example, we had to Undo the division and do it over again when we changed to Fraction mode. But if you use the evaluates-to operator you can get commands like m f to recompute for you. 1:

12 / 9 => 1.33333333333 .

’ 12/9 => RET

12 / 9 => 1.333 . p 4 RET

12 / 9 => 4:3 . m f

In this example, the righthand side of the ‘=>’ operator on the stack is recomputed when we change the precision, then again when we change to Fraction mode. All ‘=>’ expressions on the stack are recomputed every time you change any mode that might affect their values.

2.2 Arithmetic Tutorial In this section, we explore the arithmetic and scientific functions available in the Calculator. The standard arithmetic commands are +, -, *, /, and ^. Each normally takes two numbers from the top of the stack and pushes back a result. The n and & keys perform change-sign and reciprocal operations, respectively. 1:

5 .

0.2 .

5. .

-5. .

5. . n

You can apply a “binary operator” like + across any number of stack entries by giving it a numeric prefix. You can also apply it pairwise to several stack elements along with the top one if you use a negative prefix. 3: 2: 1:

2 3 4 .

2 RET 3 RET 4

9 .

3: 2: 1:

M-3 +

2 3 4 .

4: 3: 2: 1:

2 3 4 10 . 10

3: 2: 1:

12 13 14 .

M-- M-3 +

You can apply a “unary operator” like & to the top n stack entries with a numeric prefix, too. 3: 2: 1:

2 3 4 .

2 RET 3 RET 4

3: 2: 1:

0.5 0.333333333333 0.25 . M-3 &

3: 2: 1:

0.5 3. 4. . M-2 &

Notice that the results here are left in floating-point form. We can convert them back to integers by pressing F, the “floor” function. This function rounds down to the next lower integer. There is also R, which rounds to the nearest integer.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

7: 6: 5: 4: 3: 2: 1:

2. 2.4 2.5 2.6 -2. -2.4 -2.6 .

7: 6: 5: 4: 3: 2: 1:

2 2 2 2 -2 -3 -3 . M-7 F

7: 6: 5: 4: 3: 2: 1:

2 2 3 3 -2 -2 -3 .

U M-7 R

Since dividing-and-flooring (i.e., “integer quotient”) is such a common operation, Calc provides a special command for that purpose, the backslash \. Another common arithmetic operator is %, which computes the remainder that would arise from a \ operation, i.e., the “modulo” of two numbers. For example, 2: 1:

1234 100 .

1234 RET 100

12 .

2: 1:

1234 100 .

34 .

These commands actually work for any real numbers, not just integers. 2: 1:

3.1415 1 .

3.1415 RET 1

3 .

2: 1:

3.1415 1 .

0.1415 .

(•) Exercise 1. The \ command would appear to be a frill, since you could always do the same thing with / F. Think of a situation where this is not true—/ F would be inadequate. Now think of a way you could get around the problem if Calc didn’t provide a \ command. See Section 2.7.12 [Arithmetic Answer 1], page 73. (•) We’ve already seen the Q (square root) and S (sine) commands. Other commands along those lines are C (cosine), T (tangent), E (ex ) and L (natural logarithm). These can be modified by the I (inverse) and H (hyperbolic) prefix keys. Let’s compute the sine and cosine of an angle, and verify the identity sin2 x + cos2 x = 1. We’ll arbitrarily pick −64 degrees as a good value for x. With the angular mode set to degrees (type m d), do: 2: 1:

-64 -64 .

2: 1:

64 n RET RET

-64 -0.89879 .

2: 1:

-0.89879 -64 . TAB

2: 1:

-0.89879 0.43837 . C

1. .

f h

(For brevity, we’re showing only five digits of the results here. You can of course do these calculations to any precision you like.) Remember, f h is the calc-hypot, or square-root of sum of squares, command. sin x Another identity is tan x = . cos x 2: 1:

-0.89879 0.43837 . U

-2.0503 .

-64. .

I T

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

A physical interpretation of this calculation is that if you move 0.89879 units downward and 0.43837 units to the right, your direction of motion is −64 degrees from horizontal. Suppose we move in the opposite direction, up and to the left: 2: 1:

-0.89879 0.43837 .

2: 1:

U U

0.89879 -0.43837 .

M-2 n

-2.0503 .

-64. .

I T

How can the angle be the same? The answer is that the / operation loses information about the signs of its inputs. Because the quotient is negative, we know exactly one of the inputs was negative, but we can’t tell which one. There is an f T [arctan2] function which computes the inverse tangent of the quotient of a pair of numbers. Since you feed it the two original numbers, it has enough information to give you a full 360-degree answer. 2: 1:

0.89879 -0.43837 .

U U

116. .

f T

3: 2: 1:

116. -0.89879 0.43837 .

2: 1:

M-RET M-2 n

116. -64. .

f T

180. .

The resulting angles differ by 180 degrees; in other words, they point in opposite directions, just as we would expect. The META-RET we used in the third step is the “last-arguments” command. It is sort of like Undo, except that it restores the arguments of the last command to the stack without removing the command’s result. It is useful in situations like this one, where we need to do several operations on the same inputs. We could have accomplished the same thing by using M-2 RET to duplicate the top two stack elements right after the U U, then a pair of M-TAB commands to cycle the 116 up around the duplicates. A similar identity is supposed to hold for hyperbolic sines and cosines, except that it is the difference cosh2 x − sinh2 x that always equals one. Let’s try to verify this identity. 2: 1:

-64 -64 .

2: 1:

64 n RET RET

-64 2: -3.1175e27 1: .

-64 9.7192e54 .

H C

2 ^

2: 1:

9.7192e54 -64 . TAB

2: 1:

9.7192e54 9.7192e54 . H S 2 ^

Something’s obviously wrong, because when we subtract these numbers the answer will clearly be zero! But if you think about it, if these numbers did differ by one, it would be in the 55th decimal place. The difference we seek has been lost entirely to roundoff error. We could verify this hypothesis by doing the actual calculation with, say, 60 decimal places of precision. This will be slow, but not enormously so. Try it if you wish; sure enough, the answer is 0.99999, reasonably close to 1. Of course, a more reasonable way to verify the identity is to use a more reasonable value for x! Some Calculator commands use the Hyperbolic prefix for other purposes. The logarithm and exponential functions, for example, work to the base e normally but use base-10 instead if you use the Hyperbolic prefix. 1:

1000 . 1000

6.9077 . L

1000 . U

3 . H L

Chapter 2: Tutorial

First, we mistakenly compute a natural logarithm. Then we undo and compute a common logarithm instead. The B key computes a general base-b logarithm for any value of b. 2: 1:

1000 10 .

1000 RET 10

3 .

1000. .

2: 1:

H E

1000. 2.71828 .

H P

6.9077 .

Here we first use B to compute the base-10 logarithm, then use the “hyperbolic” exponential as a cheap hack to recover the number 1000, then use B again to compute the natural logarithm. Note that P with the hyperbolic prefix pushes the constant e onto the stack. You may have noticed that both times we took the base-10 logarithm of 1000, we got an exact integer result. Calc always tries to give an exact rational result for calculations involving rational numbers where possible. But when we used H E, the result was a floatingpoint number for no apparent reason. In fact, if we had computed 10 RET 3 ^ we would have gotten an exact integer 1000. But the H E command is rigged to generate a floatingpoint result all of the time so that 1000 H E will not waste time computing a thousand-digit integer when all you probably wanted was ‘1e1000’. (•) Exercise 2. Find a pair of integer inputs to the B command for which Calc could find an exact rational result but doesn’t. See Section 2.7.13 [Arithmetic Answer 2], page 73. (•) The Calculator also has a set of functions relating to combinatorics and statistics. You may be familiar with the factorial function, which computes the product of all the integers up to a given number. 1:

100 .

100

93326215443... .

100. .

U c f

9.3326e157 . !

Recall, the c f command converts the integer or fraction at the top of the stack to floatingpoint format. If you take the factorial of a floating-point number, you get a floating-point result accurate to the current precision. But if you give ! an exact integer, you get an exact integer result (158 digits long in this case). If you take the factorial of a non-integer, Calc uses a generalized factorial function defined in terms of Euler’s Gamma function Γ(n) (which is itself available as the f g command). 3: 2: 1:

4. 4.5 5. .

3: 2: 1:

24. 52.3427777847 120. . M-3 !

5.5 .

M-0 DEL 5.5

52.342777847 .

f g

Here we verify the identity n! = Γ(n + 1). !

n n! for all reals n The binomial coefficient n-choose-m or is defined by m m! (n − m)! and m. The intermediate results in this formula can become quite large even if the final result is small; the k c command computes a binomial coefficient in a way that avoids large intermediate values.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The k prefix key defines several common functions out of combinatorics and number theory. Here we compute the binomial coefficient 30-choose-20, then determine its prime factorization. 2: 1:

30 20 .

30 RET 20

30045015 .

k c

[3, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 23, 29] .

k f

You can verify these prime factors by using V R * to multiply together the elements of this vector. The result is the original number, 30045015. Suppose a program you are writing needs a hash table with at least 10000 entries. It’s best to use a prime number as the actual size of a hash table. Calc can compute the next prime number after 10000: 1:

10000 .

10000

10007 .

k n

9973 . I k n

Just for kicks we’ve also computed the next prime less than 10000. See Section 7.6 [Financial Functions], page 198, for a description of the Calculator commands that deal with business and financial calculations (functions like pv, rate, and sln). See Section 7.7 [Binary Functions], page 204, to read about the commands for operating on binary numbers (like and, xor, and lsh).

2.3 Vector/Matrix Tutorial A vector is a list of numbers or other Calc data objects. Calc provides a large set of commands that operate on vectors. Some are familiar operations from vector analysis. Others simply treat a vector as a list of objects.

2.3.1 Vector Analysis If you add two vectors, the result is a vector of the sums of the elements, taken pairwise. 1:

[1, 2, 3] .

[1,2,3]

2: 1:

s 1

[1, 2, 3] [7, 6, 0] . [7 6 0]

s 2

[8, 8, 3] .

Note that we can separate the vector elements with either commas or spaces. This is true whether we are using incomplete vectors or algebraic entry. The s 1 and s 2 commands save these vectors so we can easily reuse them later. If you multiply two vectors, the result is the sum of the products of the elements taken pairwise. This is called the dot product of the vectors. 2: 1:

[1, 2, 3] [7, 6, 0] . r 1 r 2

19 .

The dot product of two vectors is equal to the product of their lengths times the cosine of the angle between them. (Here the vector is interpreted as a line from the origin (0, 0, 0)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

to the specified point in three-dimensional space.) The A (absolute value) command can be used to compute the length of a vector. 3: 2: 1:

19 [1, 2, 3] [7, 6, 0] .

3: 2: 1:

M-RET

19 3.741657 9.219544 .

M-2 A

0.550782 .

* /

56.579 .

I C

First we recall the arguments to the dot product command, then we compute the absolute values of the top two stack entries to obtain the lengths of the vectors, then we divide the dot product by the product of the lengths to get the cosine of the angle. The inverse cosine finds that the angle between the vectors is about 56 degrees. The cross product of two vectors is a vector whose length is the product of the lengths of the inputs times the sine of the angle between them, and whose direction is perpendicular to both input vectors. Unlike the dot product, the cross product is defined only for three-dimensional vectors. Let’s double-check our computation of the angle using the cross product. 2: 1:

[1, 2, 3] [7, 6, 0] .

3: 2: 1:

r 1 r 2

[-18, 21, -8] [1, 2, 3] [7, 6, 0] . V C

s 3

M-RET

[-0.52, 0.61, -0.23] .

M-2 A * /

56.579 .

A I S

First we recall the original vectors and compute their cross product, which we also store for later reference. Now we divide the vector by the product of the lengths of the original vectors. The length of this vector should be the sine of the angle; sure enough, it is! Vector-related commands generally begin with the v prefix key. Some are uppercase letters and some are lowercase. To make it easier to type these commands, the shift-V prefix key acts the same as the v key. (See Section 6.1 [General Mode Commands], page 135, for a way to make all prefix keys have this property.) If we take the dot product of two perpendicular vectors we expect to get zero, since the cosine of 90 degrees is zero. Let’s check that the cross product is indeed perpendicular to both inputs: 2: 1:

[1, 2, 3] [-18, 21, -8] . r 1 r 3

0 .

2: 1:

[7, 6, 0] [-18, 21, -8] .

DEL r 2 r 3

0 .

(•) Exercise 1. Given a vector on the top of the stack, what keystrokes would you use to normalize the vector, i.e., to reduce its length to one without changing its direction? See Section 2.7.14 [Vector Answer 1], page 73. (•) (•) Exercise 2. Suppose a certain particle can be at any of several positions along a ruler. You have a list of those positions in the form of a vector, and another list of the probabilities for the particle to be at the corresponding positions. Find the average position of the particle. See Section 2.7.15 [Vector Answer 2], page 73. (•)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

2.3.2 Matrices A matrix is just a vector of vectors, all the same length. This means you can enter a matrix using nested brackets. You can also use the semicolon character to enter a matrix. We’ll show both methods here: 1:

[ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] ] .

[[1 2 3] [4 5 6]]

[ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] ] .

’ [1 2 3; 4 5 6] RET

We’ll be using this matrix again, so type s 4 to save it now. Note that semicolons work with incomplete vectors, but they work better in algebraic entry. That’s why we use the apostrophe in the second example. When two matrices are multiplied, the lefthand matrix must have the same number of columns as the righthand matrix has rows. Row i, column j of the result is effectively the dot product of row i of the left matrix by column j of the right matrix. If we try to duplicate this matrix and multiply it by itself, the dimensions are wrong and the multiplication cannot take place: 1:

[ [ 1, 2, 3 ] * [ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] ] . RET *

Though rather hard to read, this is a formula which shows the product of two matrices. The ‘*’ function, having invalid arguments, has been left in symbolic form. We can multiply the matrices if we transpose one of them first. 2: 1:

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ .

1, 4, 1, 2, 3,

2, 3 ] 5, 6 ] ] 4 ] 5 ] 6 ] ]

[ [ 14, 32 ] [ 32, 77 ] ] .

U v t

[ [ 17, 22, 27 ] [ 22, 29, 36 ] [ 27, 36, 45 ] ] .

U TAB *

Matrix multiplication is not commutative; indeed, switching the order of the operands can even change the dimensions of the result matrix, as happened here! If you multiply a plain vector by a matrix, it is treated as a single row or column depending on which side of the matrix it is on. The result is a plain vector which should also be interpreted as a row or column as appropriate. 2: 1:

[ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] ] [1, 2, 3] . r 4 r 1

[14, 32] .

Multiplying in the other order wouldn’t work because the number of rows in the matrix is different from the number of elements in the vector. (•) Exercise 1. Use ‘*’ to sum along the rows of the above 2 × 3 matrix to get [6, 15]. Now use ‘*’ to sum along the columns to get [5, 7, 9]. See Section 2.7.16 [Matrix Answer 1], page 73. (•)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

An identity matrix is a square matrix with ones along the diagonal and zeros elsewhere. It has the property that multiplication by an identity matrix, on the left or on the right, always produces the original matrix. 1:

[ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] ] .

2: 1:

r 4

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ .

1, 4, 1, 0, 0,

2, 5, 0, 1, 0,

3 6 0 0 1

] ] ] ] ] ] ]

v i 3 RET

[ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] ] .

If a matrix is square, it is often possible to find its inverse, that is, a matrix which, when multiplied by the original matrix, yields an identity matrix. The & (reciprocal) key also computes the inverse of a matrix. 1:

[ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] [ 7, 6, 0 ] ] . r 4 r 2 |

s 5

[ [ -2.4, 1.2, -0.2 ] [ 2.8, -1.4, 0.4 ] [ -0.73333, 0.53333, -0.2 ] ] . &

The vertical bar | concatenates numbers, vectors, and matrices together. Here we have used it to add a new row onto our matrix to make it square. We can multiply these two matrices in either order to get an identity. 1:

[ [ 1., 0., 0. ] [ 0., 1., 0. ] [ 0., 0., 1. ] ] . M-RET

[ [ 1., 0., 0. ] [ 0., 1., 0. ] [ 0., 0., 1. ] ] . U TAB *

Matrix inverses are related to systems of linear equations in algebra. Suppose we had the following set of equations: a + 2b + 3c = 6 4a + 5b + 6c = 2 7a + 6b =3 This can be cast into the matrix equation,       1 2 3 a 6 4 5 6 × b = 2 7 6 0 c 3 We can solve this system of equations by multiplying both sides by the inverse of the matrix. Calc can do this all in one step: 2: 1:

[6, [ [ [ [ .

2, 1, 4, 7,

3] 2, 3 ] 5, 6 ] 6, 0 ] ]

[6,2,3] r 5

[-12.6, 15.2, -3.93333] .

The result is the [a, b, c] vector that solves the equations. (Dividing by a square matrix is equivalent to multiplying by its inverse.) Let’s verify this solution:

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

[ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] [ 7, 6, 0 ] ] [-12.6, 15.2, -3.93333] . r 5

TAB

[6., 2., 3.] .

Note that we had to be careful about the order in which we multiplied the matrix and vector. If we multiplied in the other order, Calc would assume the vector was a row vector in order to make the dimensions come out right, and the answer would be incorrect. If you don’t feel safe letting Calc take either interpretation of your vectors, use explicit N × 1 or 1 × N matrices instead. In this case, you would enter the original column vector as ‘[[6], [2], [3]]’ or ‘[6; 2; 3]’. (•) Exercise 2. Algebraic entry allows you to make vectors and matrices that include variables. Solve the following system of equations to get expressions for x and y in terms of a and b. x + ay = 6 x + by = 10 See Section 2.7.17 [Matrix Answer 2], page 73. (•) (•) Exercise 3. A system of equations is “over-determined” if it has more equations than variables. It is often the case that there are no values for the variables that will satisfy all the equations at once, but it is still useful to find a set of values which “nearly” satisfy all the equations. In terms of matrix equations, you can’t solve AX = B directly because the matrix A is not square for an over-determined system. Matrix inversion works only for square matrices. One common trick is to multiply both sides on the left by the transpose of A: AT A X = AT B, where AT is the transpose ‘trn(A)’. Now AT A is a square matrix so a solution is possible. It turns out that the X vector you compute in this way will be a “least-squares” solution, which can be regarded as the “closest” solution to the set of equations. Use Calc to solve the following over-determined system: a + 2b + 3c = 6 4a + 5b + 6c = 2 7a + 6b =3 2a + 4b + 6c = 11 See Section 2.7.18 [Matrix Answer 3], page 74. (•)

2.3.3 Vectors as Lists Although Calc has a number of features for manipulating vectors and matrices as mathematical objects, you can also treat vectors as simple lists of values. For example, we saw that the k f command returns a vector which is a list of the prime factors of a number. You can pack and unpack stack entries into vectors: 3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 .

[10, 20, 30] .

M-3 v p

3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 . v u

Chapter 2: Tutorial

You can also build vectors out of consecutive integers, or out of many copies of a given value: 1:

[1, 2, 3, 4] .

2: 1:

v x 4 RET

[1, 2, 3, 4] 17 .

2: 1:

[1, 2, 3, 4] [17, 17, 17, 17] . v b 4 RET

You can apply an operator to every element of a vector using the map command. 1:

[17, 34, 51, 68] .

[289, 1156, 2601, 4624] .

V M *

2 V M ^

[17, 34, 51, 68] . V M Q

In the first step, we multiply the vector of integers by the vector of 17’s elementwise. In the second step, we raise each element to the power two. (The general rule is that both operands must be vectors of the same length, or else one must be a vector and the other a plain number.) In the final step, we take the square root of each element. (•) Exercise 1. Compute a vector of powers of two from 2−4 to 24 . See Section 2.7.19 [List Answer 1], page 75. (•) You can also reduce a binary operator across a vector. For example, reducing ‘*’ computes the product of all the elements in the vector: 1:

123123 . 123123

[3, 7, 11, 13, 41] .

k f

123123 . V R *

In this example, we decompose 123123 into its prime factors, then multiply those factors together again to yield the original number. We could compute a dot product “by hand” using mapping and reduction: 2: 1:

[1, 2, 3] [7, 6, 0] .

r 1 r 2

[7, 12, 0] .

V M *

19 .

V R +

Recalling two vectors from the previous section, we compute the sum of pairwise products of the elements to get the same answer for the dot product as before. A slight variant of vector reduction is the accumulate operation, V U. This produces a vector of the intermediate results from a corresponding reduction. Here we compute a table of factorials: 1:

[1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6] .

v x 6 RET

[1, 2, 6, 24, 120, 720] . V U *

Calc allows vectors to grow as large as you like, although it gets rather slow if vectors have more than about a hundred elements. Actually, most of the time is spent formatting these large vectors for display, not calculating on them. Try the following experiment (if your computer is very fast you may need to substitute a larger vector size). 1:

[1, 2, 3, 4, ... . v x 500 RET

[2, 3, 4, 5, ... . 1 V M +

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Now press v . (the letter v, then a period) and try the experiment again. In v . mode, long vectors are displayed “abbreviated” like this: 1:

[1, 2, 3, ..., 500] . v x 500 RET

[2, 3, 4, ..., 501] . 1 V M +

(where now the ‘...’ is actually part of the Calc display). You will find both operations are now much faster. But notice that even in v . mode, the full vectors are still shown in the Trail. Type t . to cause the trail to abbreviate as well, and try the experiment one more time. Operations on long vectors are now quite fast! (But of course if you use t . you will lose the ability to get old vectors back using the t y command.) An easy way to view a full vector when v . mode is active is to press ‘ (back-quote) to edit the vector; editing always works with the full, unabbreviated value. As a larger example, let’s try to fit a straight line to some data, using the method of least squares. (Calc has a built-in command for least-squares curve fitting, but we’ll do it by hand here just to practice working with vectors.) Suppose we have the following list of values in a file we have loaded into Emacs: x --1.34 1.41 1.49 1.56 1.64 1.73 1.82 1.91 2.01 2.11 2.22 2.33 2.45 2.58 2.71 2.85 3.00 3.15 3.32

y --0.234 0.298 0.402 0.412 0.466 0.473 0.601 0.519 0.603 0.637 0.645 0.705 0.917 1.009 0.971 1.062 1.148 1.157 1.354

If you are reading this tutorial in printed form, you will find it easiest to press C-x * i to enter the on-line Info version of the manual and find this table there. (Press g, then type List Tutorial, to jump straight to this section.) Position the cursor at the upper-left corner of this table, just to the left of the 1.34. Press C-@ to set the mark. (On your system this may be C-2, C-SPC, or NUL.) Now position the cursor to the lower-right, just after the 1.354. You have now defined this region as an Emacs “rectangle.” Still in the Info buffer, type C-x * r. This command (calc-grab-rectangle) will pop you back into the Calculator, with the contents of the rectangle you specified in the form of a matrix. 1:

[ [ 1.34, 0.234 ] [ 1.41, 0.298 ] ...

(You may wish to use v . mode to abbreviate the display of this large matrix.)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

We want to treat this as a pair of lists. The first step is to transpose this matrix into a pair of rows. Remember, a matrix is just a vector of vectors. So we can unpack the matrix into a pair of row vectors on the stack. 1:

[ [ 1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ] [ 0.234, 0.298, 0.402, ... ] ] .

2: 1:

v t

[1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ] [0.234, 0.298, 0.402, ... ] . v u

Let’s store these in quick variables 1 and 2, respectively. 1:

[1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ] .

t 2

t 1

(Recall that t 2 is a variant of s 2 that removes the stored value from the stack.) In a least squares fit, the slope m is given by the formula P P P N xy − x y m= P P 2 N x2 − ( x) P where x represents the sum of all the values of x. While there is an actual sum function in Calc, it’s easier to sum a vector using a simple reduction. First, let’s compute the four different sums that this formula uses. 1:

41.63 .

r 1 V R + 1:

t 3

98.0003 .

r 1 2 V M ^ V R +

13.613 .

r 2 V R +

t 5

t 4

33.36554 .

r 1 r 2 V M * V R + 2

t 6

These are x, x , y, and xy, respectively. (We could have used * to compute P 2 x and xy.) Finally, we also need N , the number of data points. This is just the length of either of our lists.

19 .

r 1 v l

t 7

(That’s v followed by a lower-case l.) Now we grind through the formula: 1:

633.94526 .

r 7 r 6 * 2: 1:

67.23607 1862.0057 .

r 7 r 4 *

2: 1:

633.94526 566.70919 .

r 3 r 5 * 3: 2: 1:

67.23607 1862.0057 1733.0569 .

r 3 2 ^

67.23607 .

2: 1:

67.23607 128.9488 .

0.52141679 .

t 8

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

That gives us the slope m. The y-intercept b can now be found with the simple formula, P P y−m x b= N 1:

13.613 .

r 5

2: 1:

13.613 21.70658 .

r 8 r 3 *

-8.09358 .

-0.425978 .

r 7 /

t 9

Let’s “plot” this straight line approximation, y ≈ mx + b, and compare it with the original data. 1:

[0.699, 0.735, ... ] .

r 1 r 8 *

[0.273, 0.309, ... ] . r 9 +

s 0

Notice that multiplying a vector by a constant, and adding a constant to a vector, can be done without mapping commands since these are common operations from vector algebra. As far as Calc is concerned, we’ve just been doing geometry in 19-dimensional space! We can subtract this vector from our original y vector to get a feel for the error of our fit. Let’s find the maximum error: 1:

[0.0387, 0.0112, ... ] .

r 2 -

[0.0387, 0.0112, ... ] . V M A

0.0897 . V R X

First we compute a vector of differences, then we take the absolute values of these differences, then we reduce the max function across the vector. (The max function is on the two-key sequence f x; because it is so common to use max in a vector operation, the letters X and N are also accepted for max and min in this context. In general, you answer the V M or V R prompt with the actual key sequence that invokes the function you want. You could have typed V R f x or even V R x max RET if you had preferred.) If your system has the GNUPLOT program, you can see graphs of your data and your straight line to see how well they match. (If you have GNUPLOT 3.0 or higher, the following instructions will work regardless of the kind of display you have. Some GNUPLOT 2.0, nonX-windows systems may require additional steps to view the graphs.) Let’s start by plotting the original data. Recall the “x” and “y” vectors onto the stack and press g f. This “fast” graphing command does everything you need to do for simple, straightforward plotting of data. 2: 1:

[1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ] [0.234, 0.298, 0.402, ... ] . r 1 r 2

g f

If all goes well, you will shortly get a new window containing a graph of the data. (If not, contact your GNUPLOT or Calc installer to find out what went wrong.) In the X window system, this will be a separate graphics window. For other kinds of displays, the default is to display the graph in Emacs itself using rough character graphics. Press q when you are done viewing the character graphics. Next, let’s add the line we got from our least-squares fit.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2: 1:

[1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ] [0.273, 0.309, 0.351, ... ] . DEL r 0

g a

g p

It’s not very useful to get symbols to mark the data points on this second curve; you can type g S g p to remove them. Type g q when you are done to remove the X graphics window and terminate GNUPLOT. (•) Exercise 2. An earlier exercise showed how to do least squares fitting to a general system of equations. Our 19 data points are really 19 equations of the form yi = mxi + b for different pairs of (xi , yi ). Use the matrix-transpose method to solve for m and b, duplicating the above result. See Section 2.7.20 [List Answer 2], page 75. (•) (•) Exercise 3. If the input data do not form a rectangle, you can use C-x * g (calc-grab-region) to grab the data the way Emacs normally works with regions—it reads left-to-right, top-to-bottom, treating line breaks the same as spaces. Use this command to find the geometric mean of the following numbers. (The geometric mean is the nth root of the product of n numbers.) 2.3 6 22 15.1 7 15 14 7.5 2.5 The C-x * g command accepts numbers separated by spaces or commas, with or without surrounding vector brackets. See Section 2.7.21 [List Answer 3], page 76. (•) As another example, a theorem about tells us that the alternating binomial coefficients sum of binomial coefficients n0 − n1 + n2 − · · · ± nn always comes out to zero. Let’s verify this for n=6. 1:

[1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7] .

v x 7 RET 1:

[1, -6, 15, -20, 15, -6, 1] . V M ’ (-1)^$ choose(6,$) RET

[0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6] . 1 1:

0 . V R +

The V M ’ command prompts you to enter any algebraic expression to define the function to map over the vector. The symbol ‘$’ inside this expression represents the argument to the function. The Calculator applies this formula to each element of the vector, substituting each element’s value for the ‘$’ sign(s) in turn. To define a two-argument function, use ‘$$’ for the first argument and ‘$’ for the second: V M ’ $$-$ RET is equivalent to V M -. This is analogous to regular algebraic entry, where ‘$$’ would refer to the next-to-top stack entry and ‘$’ would refer to the top stack entry, and ’ $$-$ RET would act exactly like -. Notice that the V M ’ command has recorded two things in the trail: The result, as usual, and also a funny-looking thing marked ‘oper’ that represents the operator function you typed in. The function is enclosed in ‘< >’ brackets, and the argument is denoted by a ‘#’ sign. If there were several arguments, they would be shown as ‘#1’, ‘#2’, and so on. (For example, V M ’ $$-$ will put the function ‘’ on the trail.) This

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

object is a “nameless function”; you can use nameless ‘< >’ notation to answer the V M ’ prompt if you like. Nameless function notation has the interesting, occasionally useful property that a nameless function is not actually evaluated until it is used. For example, V M ’ $+random(2.0) evaluates ‘random(2.0)’ once and adds that random number to all elements of the vector, but V M ’ evaluates the ‘random(2.0)’ separately for each vector element. Another group of operators that are often useful with V M are the relational operators: a =, for example, compares two numbers and gives the result 1 if they are equal, or 0 if not. Similarly, a < checks for one number being less than another. Other useful vector operations include v v, to reverse a vector end-for-end; V S, to sort the elements of a vector into increasing order; and v r and v c, to extract one row or column of a matrix, or (in both cases) to extract one element of a plain vector. With a negative argument, v r and v c instead delete one row, column, or vector element. (•) Exercise 4. The kth divisor function σk (n) is the sum of the kth powers of all the divisors of an integer n. Figure out a method for computing the divisor function for reasonably small values of n. As a test, the 0th and 1st divisor functions of 30 are 8 and 72, respectively. See Section 2.7.22 [List Answer 4], page 76. (•) (•) Exercise 5. The k f command produces a list of prime factors for a number. Sometimes it is important to know that a number is square-free, i.e., that no prime occurs more than once in its list of prime factors. Find a sequence of keystrokes to tell if a number is square-free; your method should leave 1 on the stack if it is, or 0 if it isn’t. See Section 2.7.23 [List Answer 5], page 76. (•) (•) Exercise 6. Build a list of lists that looks like the following diagram. (You may wish to use the v / command to enable multi-line display of vectors.) 1:

[ [1], [1, 2], [1, 2, 3], [1, 2, 3, 4], [1, 2, 3, 4, 5], [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6] ]

See Section 2.7.24 [List Answer 6], page 77. (•) (•) Exercise 7. Build the following list of lists. 1:

[ [0], [1, 2], [3, 4, 5], [6, 7, 8, 9], [10, 11, 12, 13, 14], [15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20] ]

See Section 2.7.25 [List Answer 7], page 77. (•) (•) Exercise 8. Compute a list of values of Bessel’s J1 (x) function ‘besJ(1,x)’ for x from 0 to 5 in steps of 0.25. Find the value of x (from among the above set of values) for which ‘besJ(1,x)’ is a maximum. Use an “automatic” method, i.e., just reading along the list by hand to find the largest value is not allowed! (There is an a X command which does this kind of thing automatically; see Section 10.7 [Numerical Solutions], page 270.) See Section 2.7.26 [List Answer 8], page 78. (•) (•) Exercise 9. You are given an integer in the range 0 ≤ N < 10m for m = 12 (i.e., an integer of less than twelve digits). Convert this integer into a vector of m digits, each in the

Chapter 2: Tutorial

range from 0 to 9. In vector-of-digits notation, add one to this integer to produce a vector of m + 1 digits (since there could be a carry out of the most significant digit). Convert this vector back into a regular integer. A good integer to try is 25129925999. See Section 2.7.27 [List Answer 9], page 78. (•) (•) Exercise 10. Your friend Joe tried to use V R a = to test if all numbers in a list were equal. What happened? How would you do this test? See Section 2.7.28 [List Answer 10], page 80. (•) (•) Exercise 11. The area of a circle of radius one is π. The area of the 2 × 2 square that encloses that circle is 4. So if we throw n darts at random points in the square, about π/4 of them will land inside the circle. This gives us an entertaining way to estimate the value of π. The k r command picks a random number between zero and the value on the stack. We could get a random floating-point number between −1 and 1 by typing 2.0 k r 1 -. Build a vector of 100 random (x, y) points in this square, then use vector mapping and reduction to count how many points lie inside the unit circle. Hint: Use the v b command. See Section 2.7.29 [List Answer 11], page 80. (•) (•) Exercise 12. The matchstick problem provides another way to calculate π. Say you have an infinite field of vertical lines with a spacing of one inch. Toss a one-inch matchstick onto the field. The probability that the matchstick will land crossing a line turns out to be 2/π. Toss 100 matchsticks to estimate π. (If you want still more fun, the probability that the GCD (k g) of two large integers is one turns out to be 6/π 2 . That provides yet another way to estimate π.) See Section 2.7.30 [List Answer 12], page 81. (•) (•) Exercise 13. An algebraic entry of a string in double-quote marks, ‘"hello"’, creates a vector of the numerical (ASCII) codes of the characters (here, [104, 101, 108, 108, 111]). Sometimes it is convenient to compute a hash code of a string, which is just an integer that represents the value of that string. Two equal strings have the same hash code; two different strings probably have different hash codes. (For example, Calc has over 400 function names, but Emacs can quickly find the definition for any given name because it has sorted the functions into “buckets” by their hash codes. Sometimes a few names will hash into the same bucket, but it is easier to search among a few names than among all the names.) One popular hash function is computed as follows: First set h = 0. Then, for each character from the string in turn, set h = 3h + ci where ci is the character’s ASCII code. If we have 511 buckets, we then take the hash code modulo 511 to get the bucket number. Develop a simple command or commands for converting string vectors into hash codes. The hash code for ‘"Testing, 1, 2, 3"’ is 1960915098, which modulo 511 is 121. See Section 2.7.31 [List Answer 13], page 82. (•) (•) Exercise 14. The H V R and H V U commands do nested function evaluations. H V U takes a starting value and a number of steps n from the stack; it then applies the function you give to the starting value 0, 1, 2, up to n times and returns a vector of the results. Use this command to create a “random walk” of 50 steps. Start with the two-dimensional point (0, 0); then take one step a random distance between −1 and 1 in both x and y; then take another step, and so on. Use the g f command to display this random walk. Now modify your random walk to walk a unit distance, but in a random direction, at each step. (Hint: The sincos function returns a vector of the cosine and sine of an angle.) See Section 2.7.32 [List Answer 14], page 83. (•)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

2.4 Types Tutorial Calc understands a variety of data types as well as simple numbers. In this section, we’ll experiment with each of these types in turn. The numbers we’ve been using so far have mainly been either integers or floats. We saw that floats are usually a good approximation to the mathematical concept of real numbers, but they are only approximations and are susceptible to roundoff error. Calc also supports fractions, which can exactly represent any rational number. 1:

3628800 .

2: 1:

10 !

3628800 49 .

49 RET

518400:7 .

518414:7 .

2 +

7:518414 .

The : command divides two integers to get a fraction; / would normally divide integers to get a floating-point result. Notice we had to type RET between the 49 and the : since the : would otherwise be interpreted as part of a fraction beginning with 49. You can convert between floating-point and fractional format using c f and c F: 1:

1.35027217629e-5 .

c f

7:518414 . c F

The c F command replaces a floating-point number with the “simplest” fraction whose floating-point representation is the same, to within the current precision. 1:

3.14159265359 .

1146408:364913 .

c F

DEL

3.1416 .

p 5 RET P

355:113 . c F

(•) Exercise 1. A calculation has produced the result 1.26508260337. You suspect it is the square root of the product of π and some rational number. Is it? (Be sure to allow for roundoff error!) See Section 2.7.33 [Types Answer 1], page 84. (•) Complex numbers can be stored in both rectangular and polar form. 1:

-9 .

9 n

(0, 3) .

(3; 90.) . c p

(6; 90.) . 2 *

(2.4495; 45.) . Q

The square root of −9 is by default rendered in rectangular form (0 + 3i), but we can convert it to polar form (3 with a phase angle of 90 degrees). All the usual arithmetic and scientific operations are defined on both types of complex numbers. Another generalized kind of number is infinity. Infinity isn’t really a number, but it can sometimes be treated like one. Calc uses the symbol inf to represent positive infinity, i.e., a value greater than any real number. Naturally, you can also write ‘-inf’ for minus infinity, a value less than any real number. The word inf can only be input using algebraic entry. 2: 1:

inf -17 .

’ inf RET 17 n

2: 1:

-inf -inf . *

RET

2: 1:

-inf -inf . 72 +

2: 1:

-inf inf . A

nan .

Since infinity is infinitely large, multiplying it by any finite number (like −17) has no effect, except that since −17 is negative, it changes a plus infinity to a minus infinity. (“A huge

Chapter 2: Tutorial

positive number, multiplied by −17, yields a huge negative number.”) Adding any finite number to infinity also leaves it unchanged. Taking an absolute value gives us plus infinity again. Finally, we add this plus infinity to the minus infinity we had earlier. If you work it out, you might expect the answer to be −72 for this. But the 72 has been completely lost next to the infinities; by the time we compute ‘inf - inf’ the finite difference between them, if any, is undetectable. So we say the result is indeterminate, which Calc writes with the symbol nan (for Not A Number). Dividing by zero is normally treated as an error, but you can get Calc to write an answer in terms of infinity by pressing m i to turn on Infinite mode. 3: 2: 1:

nan 1 0 .

2: 1:

1 RET 0

nan 1 / 0 .

2: 1:

m i

nan uinf .

2: 1:

U /

nan uinf .

17 n *

nan .

Dividing by zero normally is left unevaluated, but after m i it instead gives an infinite result. The answer is actually uinf, “undirected infinity.” If you look at a graph of 1/x around x = 0, you’ll see that it goes toward plus infinity as you approach zero from above, but toward minus infinity as you approach from below. Since we said only 1/0, Calc knows that the answer is infinite but not in which direction. That’s what uinf means. Notice that multiplying uinf by a negative number still leaves plain uinf; there’s no point in saying ‘-uinf’ because the sign of uinf is unknown anyway. Finally, we add uinf to our nan, yielding nan again. It’s easy to see that, because nan means “totally unknown” while uinf means “unknown sign but known to be infinite,” the more mysterious nan wins out when it is combined with uinf, or, for that matter, with anything else. (•) Exercise 2. Predict what Calc will answer for each of these formulas: ‘inf / inf’, ‘exp(inf)’, ‘exp(-inf)’, ‘sqrt(-inf)’, ‘sqrt(uinf)’, ‘abs(uinf)’, ‘ln(0)’. See Section 2.7.34 [Types Answer 2], page 84. (•) (•) Exercise 3. We saw that ‘inf - inf = nan’, which stands for an unknown value. Can nan stand for a complex number? Can it stand for infinity? See Section 2.7.35 [Types Answer 3], page 85. (•) HMS forms represent a value in terms of hours, minutes, and seconds. 1:

2@ 30’ 0" .

2@ 30’ RET

3@ 30’ 0" .

2: 1:

1 +

3@ 30’ 0" 1@ 45’ 0." .

RET 2 /

2. .

HMS forms can also be used to hold angles in degrees, minutes, and seconds. 1:

0.5 . 0.5

26.56505 . I T

26@ 33’ 54.18" . c h

0.44721 . S

First we convert the inverse tangent of 0.5 to degrees-minutes-seconds form, then we take the sine of that angle. Note that the trigonometric functions will accept HMS forms directly as input. (•) Exercise 4. The Beatles’ Abbey Road is 47 minutes and 26 seconds long, and contains 17 songs. What is the average length of a song on Abbey Road ? If the Extended Disco

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Version of Abbey Road added 20 seconds to the length of each song, how long would the album be? See Section 2.7.36 [Types Answer 4], page 85. (•) A date form represents a date, or a date and time. Dates must be entered using algebraic entry. Date forms are surrounded by ‘< >’ symbols; most standard formats for dates are recognized. 2: 1:

’ , RET

2.25 .

In this example, we enter two dates, then subtract to find the number of days between them. It is also possible to add an HMS form or a number (of days) to a date form to get another date form. 1:

t N

. 2 + 10@ 5’ +

The t N (“now”) command pushes the current date and time on the stack; then we add two days, ten hours and five minutes to the date and time. Other date-and-time related commands include t J, which does Julian day conversions, t W, which finds the beginning of the week in which a date form lies, and t I, which increments a date by one or several months. See Section 7.5 [Date Arithmetic], page 190, for more. (•) Exercise 5. How many days until the next Friday the 13th? See Section 2.7.37 [Types Answer 5], page 85. (•) (•) Exercise 6. How many leap years will there be between now and the year 10001 AD? See Section 2.7.38 [Types Answer 6], page 86. (•) An error form represents a mean value with an attached standard deviation, or error estimate. Suppose our measurements indicate that a certain telephone pole is about 30 meters away, with an estimated error of 1 meter, and 8 meters tall, with an estimated error of 0.2 meters. What is the slope of a line from here to the top of the pole, and what is the equivalent angle in degrees? 1:

8 +/- 0.2 .

8 p .2 RET

2: 1:

8 +/- 0.2 30 +/- 1 . 30 p 1

0.266 +/- 0.011 .

14.93 +/- 0.594 .

I T

This means that the angle is about 15 degrees, and, assuming our original error estimates were valid standard deviations, there is about a 60% chance that the result is correct within 0.59 degrees. (•) Exercise 7. The volume of a torus (a donut shape) is 2π 2 Rr2 where R is the radius of the circle that defines the center of the tube and r is the radius of the tube itself. Suppose R is 20 cm and r is 4 cm, each known to within 5 percent. What is the volume and the relative uncertainty of the volume? See Section 2.7.39 [Types Answer 7], page 86. (•) An interval form represents a range of values. While an error form is best for making statistical estimates, intervals give you exact bounds on an answer. Suppose we additionally know that our telephone pole is definitely between 28 and 31 meters away, and that it is between 7.7 and 8.1 meters tall.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

[7.7 .. 8.1] .

2: 1:

[ 7.7 .. 8.1 ]

[7.7 .. 8.1] [28 .. 31] .

[ 28 .. 31 ]

[0.24 .. 0.28] .

[13.9 .. 16.1] .

I T

If our bounds were correct, then the angle to the top of the pole is sure to lie in the range shown. The square brackets around these intervals indicate that the endpoints themselves are allowable values. In other words, the distance to the telephone pole is between 28 and 31, inclusive. You can also make an interval that is exclusive of its endpoints by writing parentheses instead of square brackets. You can even make an interval which is inclusive (“closed”) on one end and exclusive (“open”) on the other. 1:

[1 .. 10) .

[ 1 .. 10 )

(0.1 .. 1] .

2: 1:

(0.1 .. 1] [2 .. 3) .

[ 2 .. 3 )

(0.2 .. 3) .

The Calculator automatically keeps track of which end values should be open and which should be closed. You can also make infinite or semi-infinite intervals by using ‘-inf’ or ‘inf’ for one or both endpoints. (•) Exercise 8. What answer would you expect from ‘1 / (0 .. 10)’? What about ‘1 / (-10 .. 0)’? What about ‘1 / [0 .. 10]’ (where the interval actually includes zero)? What about ‘1 / (-10 .. 10)’? See Section 2.7.40 [Types Answer 8], page 87. (•) (•) Exercise 9. Two easy ways of squaring a number are RET * and 2 ^. Normally these produce the same answer. Would you expect this still to hold true for interval forms? If not, which of these will result in a larger interval? See Section 2.7.41 [Types Answer 9], page 87. (•) A modulo form is used for performing arithmetic modulo m. For example, arithmetic involving time is generally done modulo 12 or 24 hours. 1:

17 mod 24 .

17 M 24 RET

3 mod 24 .

10 +

21 mod 24 .

9 mod 24 . 5 /

In this last step, Calc has divided by 5 modulo 24; i.e., it has found a new number which, when multiplied by 5 modulo 24, produces the original number, 21. If m is prime and the divisor is not a multiple of m, it is always possible to find such a number. For non-prime m like 24, it is only sometimes possible. 1:

10 mod 24 . 10 M 24 RET

16 mod 24 . 100 ^

1000000... . 10 RET 100 ^

16 . 24 %

These two calculations get the same answer, but the first one is much more efficient because it avoids the huge intermediate value that arises in the second one. (•) Exercise 10. A theorem of Pierre de Fermat says that xn−1 mod n = 1 if n is a prime number and x is an integer less than n. If n is not a prime number, this will not be true for most values of x. Thus we can test informally if a number is prime by trying this formula for several values of x. Use this test to tell whether the following numbers are prime: 811749613, 15485863. See Section 2.7.42 [Types Answer 10], page 87. (•)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

It is possible to use HMS forms as parts of error forms, intervals, modulo forms, or as the phase part of a polar complex number. For example, the calc-time command pushes the current time of day on the stack as an HMS/modulo form. 1:

17@ 34’ 45" mod 24@ 0’ 0" .

x time RET

6@ 22’ 15" mod 24@ 0’ 0" . n

This calculation tells me it is six hours and 22 minutes until midnight. (•) Exercise 11. A rule of thumb is that one year is about π × 107 seconds. What time will it be that many seconds from right now? See Section 2.7.43 [Types Answer 11], page 88. (•) (•) Exercise 12. You are preparing to order packaging for the CD release of the Extended Disco Version of Abbey Road. You are told that the songs will actually be anywhere from 20 to 60 seconds longer than the originals. One CD can hold about 75 minutes of music. Should you order single or double packages? See Section 2.7.44 [Types Answer 12], page 88. (•) Another kind of data the Calculator can manipulate is numbers with units. This isn’t strictly a new data type; it’s simply an application of algebraic expressions, where we use variables with suggestive names like ‘cm’ and ‘in’ to represent units like centimeters and inches. 1:

2 in .

5.08 cm .

’ 2in RET

u c cm RET

0.027778 fath .

u c fath RET

0.0508 m . u b

We enter the quantity “2 inches” (actually an algebraic expression which means two times the variable ‘in’), then we convert it first to centimeters, then to fathoms, then finally to “base” units, which in this case means meters. 1:

9 acre .

’ 9 acre RET 1:

3 sqrt(acre) .

191.14 m .

u s

190.84 m .

u s 36536.3046 m^2 . 2 ^

190.84 m + 30 cm . ’ $+30 cm RET

365363046 cm^2 . u c cgs

Since units expressions are really just formulas, taking the square root of ‘acre’ is undefined. After all, acre might be an algebraic variable that you will someday assign a value. We use the “units-simplify” command to simplify the expression with variables being interpreted as unit names. In the final step, we have converted not to a particular unit, but to a units system. The “cgs” system uses centimeters instead of meters as its standard unit of length. There is a wide variety of units defined in the Calculator. 1:

55 mph .

’ 55 mph RET

88.5139 kph . u c kph RET

88.5139 km / hr . u c km/hr RET

8.201407e-8 c . u c c RET

Chapter 2: Tutorial

We express a speed first in miles per hour, then in kilometers per hour, then again using a slightly more explicit notation, then finally in terms of fractions of the speed of light. Temperature conversions are a bit more tricky. There are two ways to interpret “20 degrees Fahrenheit”—it could mean an actual temperature, or it could mean a change in temperature. For normal units there is no difference, but temperature units have an offset as well as a scale factor and so there must be two explicit commands for them. 1:

20 degF .

11.1111 degC .

’ 20 degF RET

u c degC RET

-6.666 degC .

U u t degC RET

First we convert a change of 20 degrees Fahrenheit into an equivalent change in degrees Celsius (or Centigrade). Then, we convert the absolute temperature 20 degrees Fahrenheit into Celsius. For simple unit conversions, you can put a plain number on the stack. Then u c and u t will prompt for both old and new units. When you use this method, you’re responsible for remembering which numbers are in which units: 1:

55 .

88.5139 .

u c mph RET kph RET

8.201407e-8 . u c km/hr RET c RET

To see a complete list of built-in units, type u v. Press C-x * c again to re-enter the Calculator when you’re done looking at the units table. (•) Exercise 13. How many seconds are there really in a year? See Section 2.7.45 [Types Answer 13], page 89. (•) (•) Exercise 14. Supercomputer designs are limited by the speed of light (and of electricity, which is nearly as fast). Suppose a computer has a 4.1 ns (nanosecond) clock cycle, and its cabinet is one meter across. Is speed of light going to be a significant factor in its design? See Section 2.7.46 [Types Answer 14], page 89. (•) (•) Exercise 15. Sam the Slug normally travels about five yards in an hour. He has obtained a supply of Power Pills; each Power Pill he eats doubles his speed. How many Power Pills can he swallow and still travel legally on most US highways? See Section 2.7.47 [Types Answer 15], page 89. (•)

2.5 Algebra and Calculus Tutorial This section shows how to use Calc’s algebra facilities to solve equations, do simple calculus problems, and manipulate algebraic formulas.

2.5.1 Basic Algebra If you enter a formula in Algebraic mode that refers to variables, the formula itself is pushed onto the stack. You can manipulate formulas as regular data objects. 1:

2 x^2 - 6 . ’ 2x^2-6 RET

6 - 2 x^2 . n

(3 x^2 + y) (6 - 2 x^2) . ’ 3x^2+y RET *

(•) Exercise 1. Do ’ x RET Q 2 ^ and ’ x RET 2 ^ Q both wind up with the same result (‘x’)? Why or why not? See Section 2.7.48 [Algebra Answer 1], page 89. (•)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

There are also commands for doing common algebraic operations on formulas. Continuing with the formula from the last example, 1:

18 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 6 y - 2 y x^2 .

a x

(18 - 2 y) x^2 - 6 x^4 + 6 y . a c x RET

First we “expand” using the distributive law, then we “collect” terms involving like powers of x. Let’s find the value of this expression when x is 2 and y is one-half. 1:

17 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 3 .

1:2 s l y RET

-25 . 2 s l x RET

The s l command means “let”; it takes a number from the top of the stack and temporarily assigns it as the value of the variable you specify. It then evaluates (as if by the = key) the next expression on the stack. After this command, the variable goes back to its original value, if any. (An earlier exercise in this tutorial involved storing a value in the variable x; if this value is still there, you will have to unstore it with s u x RET before the above example will work properly.) Let’s find the maximum value of our original expression when y is one-half and x ranges over all possible values. We can do this by taking the derivative with respect to x and examining values of x for which the derivative is zero. If the second derivative of the function at that value of x is negative, the function has a local maximum there. 1:

17 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 3 . U DEL

s 1

34 x - 24 x^3 . a d x RET

s 2

Well, the derivative is clearly zero when x is zero. To find the other root(s), let’s divide through by x and then solve: 1:

(34 x - 24 x^3) / x .

’ x RET / 1:

a x

0.70588 x^2 = 1 . 0 a =

34 - 24 x^2 .

s 3

x = 1.19023 . a S x RET

Now we compute the second derivative and plug in our values of x: 1:

1.19023 .

a .

2: 1:

1.19023 34 x - 24 x^3 . r 2

2: 1:

1.19023 34 - 72 x^2 . a d x RET s 4

(The a . command extracts just the righthand side of an equation. Another method would have been to use v u to unpack the equation ‘x = 1.19’ to ‘x’ and ‘1.19’, then use M-- M-2 DEL to delete the ‘x’.)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2: 1:

34 - 72 x^2 1.19023 .

TAB

-68. .

2: 1:

s l x RET

34 - 72 x^2 0 .

U DEL 0

34 .

s l x RET

The first of these second derivatives is negative, so we know the function has a maximum value at x = 1.19023. (The function also has a local minimum at x = 0.) When we solved for x, we got only one value even though 0.70588x2 = 1 is a quadratic equation that ought to have two solutions. The reason is that a S normally returns a single “principal” solution. If it needs to come up with an arbitrary sign (as occurs in the quadratic formula) it picks +. If it needs an arbitrary integer, it picks zero. We can get a full solution by pressing H (the Hyperbolic flag) before a S. 1:

0.70588 x^2 = 1 . r 3

x = 1.19023 s1 . H a S x RET

s 5

x = -1.19023 . 1 n

s l s1 RET

Calc has invented the variable ‘s1’ to represent an unknown sign; it is supposed to be either +1 or −1. Here we have used the “let” command to evaluate the expression when the sign is negative. If we plugged this into our second derivative we would get the same, negative, answer, so x = −1.19023 is also a maximum. To find the actual maximum value, we must plug our two values of x into the original formula. 2: 1:

17 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 3 x = 1.19023 s1 .

r 1 r 5

24.08333 s1^2 - 12.04166 s1^4 + 3 .

s l RET

(Here we see another way to use s l; if its input is an equation with a variable on the lefthand side, then s l treats the equation like an assignment to that variable if you don’t give a variable name.) It’s clear that this will have the same value for either sign of s1, but let’s work it out anyway, just for the exercise: 2: 1:

[-1, 1] 24.08333 s1^2 ... .

[ 1 n , 1 ] TAB

[15.04166, 15.04166] .

V M $ RET

Here we have used a vector mapping operation to evaluate the function at several values of ‘s1’ at once. V M $ is like V M ’ except that it takes the formula from the top of the stack. The formula is interpreted as a function to apply across the vector at the next-to-top stack level. Since a formula on the stack can’t contain ‘$’ signs, Calc assumes the variables in the formula stand for different arguments. It prompts you for an argument list, giving the list of all variables in the formula in alphabetical order as the default list. In this case the default is ‘(s1)’, which is just what we want so we simply press RET at the prompt. If there had been several different values, we could have used V R X to find the global maximum. Calc has a built-in a P command that solves an equation using H a S and returns a vector of all the solutions. It simply automates the job we just did by hand. Applied to our original

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

cubic polynomial, it would produce the vector of solutions [1.19023, −1.19023, 0]. (There is also an a X command which finds a local maximum of a function. It uses a numerical search method rather than examining the derivatives, and thus requires you to provide some kind of initial guess to show it where to look.) (•) Exercise 2. Given a vector of the roots of a polynomial (such as the output of an a P command), what sequence of commands would you use to reconstruct the original polynomial? (The answer will be unique to within a constant multiple; choose the solution where the leading coefficient is one.) See Section 2.7.49 [Algebra Answer 2], page 90. (•) The m s command enables Symbolic mode, in which formulas like ‘sqrt(5)’ that can’t be evaluated exactly are left in symbolic form rather than giving a floating-point approximate answer. Fraction mode (m f) is also useful when doing algebra. 2: 1:

34 x - 24 x^3 34 x - 24 x^3 . r 2

RET

m s

2: 1:

m f

34 x - 24 x^3 [sqrt(51) / 6, sqrt(51) / -6, 0] . a P x RET

One more mode that makes reading formulas easier is Big mode. 2:

3 34 x - 24 x ____ ____ V 51 V 51 [-----, -----, 0] 6 -6 . d B

Here things like powers, square roots, and quotients and fractions are displayed in a two-dimensional pictorial form. Calc has other language modes as well, such as C mode, FORTRAN mode, TEX mode and LATEX mode. 2: 1:

34*x - 24*pow(x, 3) {sqrt(51) / 6, sqrt(51) / -6, 0} . d C

3: 2: 1:

2: 1:

34*x - 24*x**3 /sqrt(51) / 6, sqrt(51) / -6, 0/ . d F

34 x - 24 x^3 [{\sqrt{51} \over 6}, {\sqrt{51} \over -6}, 0] {2 \over 3} \sqrt{5} . d T

’ 2 \sqrt{5} \over 3 RET

As you can see, language modes affect both entry and display of formulas. They affect such things as the names used for built-in functions, the set of arithmetic operators and their precedences, and notations for vectors and matrices. Notice that ‘sqrt(51)’ may cause problems with older implementations of C and FORTRAN, which would require something more like ‘sqrt(51.0)’. It is always wise to check over the formulas produced by the various language modes to make sure they are fully correct.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

Type m s, m f, and d N to reset these modes. (You may prefer to remain in Big mode, but all the examples in the tutorial are shown in normal mode.) What is the area under the portion of this curve from x = 1 to 2? This is simply the integral of the function: 1:

17 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 3 .

r 1

5.6666 x^3 - 1.2 x^5 + 3 x . a i x

We want to evaluate this at our two values for x and subtract. One way to do it is again with vector mapping and reduction: 2: 1:

[2, 1] 5.6666 x^3 ...

[ 2 , 1 ] TAB

[12.93333, 7.46666] .

V M $ RET

5.46666 . V R -

(•) Exercise 3. Find the integral from 1 to y of x sin πx (where the sine is calculated in radians). Find the values of the integral for integers y from 1 to 5. See Section 2.7.50 [Algebra Answer 3], page 90. (•) Calc’s integrator can do many simple integrals symbolically, but many others are beyond its capabilities. Suppose we wish to find the area under the curve sin x ln x over the same range of x. If you entered this formula and typed a i x RET (don’t bother to try this), Calc would work for a long time but would be unable to find a solution. In fact, there is no closed-form solution to this integral. Now what do we do? One approach would be to do the integral numerically. It is not hard to do this by hand using vector mapping and reduction. It is rather slow, though, since the sine and logarithm functions take a long time. We can save some time by reducing the working precision. 3: 2: 1:

10 1 0.1 .

10 RET 1 RET .1 RET

[1, 1.1, 1.2, .

...

, 1.8, 1.9]

C-u v x

(Note that we have used the extended version of v x; we could also have used plain v x as follows: v x 10 RET 9 + .1 *.) 2: 1:

[1, 1.1, ... ] ln(x) sin(x) . ’ sin(x) ln(x) RET

3.4195 .

0.34195 .

V R +

0.1 *

s 1

m r

[0., 0.084941, 0.16993, ... ] .

p 5 RET

V M $ RET

(If you got wildly different results, did you remember to switch to Radians mode?) Here we have divided the curve into ten segments of equal width; approximating these segments as rectangular boxes (i.e., assuming the curve is nearly flat at that resolution), we compute the areas of the boxes (height times width), then sum the areas. (It is faster to sum first, then multiply by the width, since the width is the same for every box.)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The true value of this integral turns out to be about 0.374, so we’re not doing too well. Let’s try another approach. 1:

ln(x) sin(x) .

r 1

0.84147 x + 0.11957 (x - 1)^2 - ... . a t x=1 RET 4 RET

Here we have computed the Taylor series expansion of the function about the point x = 1. We can now integrate this polynomial approximation, since polynomials are easy to integrate. 1:

0.42074 x^2 + ... .

[-0.0446, -0.42073] .

a i x RET

[ 2 , 1 ] TAB

V M $ RET

0.3761 . V R -

Better! By increasing the precision and/or asking for more terms in the Taylor series, we can get a result as accurate as we like. (Taylor series converge better away from singularities in the function such as the one at ln(0), so it would also help to expand the series about the points x = 2 or x = 1.5 instead of x = 1.) (•) Exercise 4. Our first method approximated the curve by stairsteps of width 0.1; the total area was then the sum of the areas of the rectangles under these stairsteps. Our second method approximated the function by a polynomial, which turned out to be a better approximation than stairsteps. A third method is Simpson’s rule, which is like the stairstep method except that the steps are not required to be flat. Simpson’s rule boils down to the formula, h (f (a) + 4f (a + h) + 2f (a + 2h) + 4f (a + 3h) + · · · 3 + 2f (a + (n − 2)h) + 4f (a + (n − 1)h) + f (a + nh)) where n (which must be even) is the number of slices and h is the width of each slice. These are 10 and 0.1 in our example. For reference, here is the corresponding formula for the stairstep method: h(f (a) + f (a + h) + f (a + 2h) + f (a + 3h) + · · · + f (a + (n − 2)h) + f (a + (n − 1)h)) Compute the integral from 1 to 2 of sin x ln x using Simpson’s rule with 10 slices. See Section 2.7.51 [Algebra Answer 4], page 91. (•) Calc has a built-in a I command for doing numerical integration. It uses Romberg’s method, which is a more sophisticated cousin of Simpson’s rule. In particular, it knows how to keep refining the result until the current precision is satisfied. Aside from the commands we’ve seen so far, Calc also provides a large set of commands for operating on parts of formulas. You indicate the desired sub-formula by placing the cursor on any part of the formula before giving a selection command. Selections won’t be covered in the tutorial; see Section 10.1 [Selecting Subformulas], page 241, for details and examples.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2.5.2 Rewrite Rules No matter how many built-in commands Calc provided for doing algebra, there would always be something you wanted to do that Calc didn’t have in its repertoire. So Calc also provides a rewrite rule system that you can use to define your own algebraic manipulations. Suppose we want to simplify this trigonometric formula: 1:

2 sec(x)^2 / tan(x)^2 - 2 / tan(x)^2 . ’ 2sec(x)^2/tan(x)^2 - 2/tan(x)^2 RET

s 1

If we were simplifying this by hand, we’d probably combine over the common denominator. The a n algebra command will do this, but we’ll do it with a rewrite rule just for practice. Rewrite rules are written with the ‘:=’ symbol. 1:

(2 sec(x)^2 - 2) / tan(x)^2 . a r a/x + b/x := (a+b)/x RET

(The “assignment operator” ‘:=’ has several uses in Calc. All by itself the formula ‘a/x + b/x := (a+b)/x’ doesn’t do anything, but when it is given to the a r command, that command interprets it as a rewrite rule.) The lefthand side, ‘a/x + b/x’, is called the pattern of the rewrite rule. Calc searches the formula on the stack for parts that match the pattern. Variables in a rewrite pattern are called meta-variables, and when matching the pattern each meta-variable can match any sub-formula. Here, the meta-variable ‘a’ matched the expression ‘2 sec(x)^2’, the metavariable ‘b’ matched the constant ‘-2’ and the meta-variable ‘x’ matched the expression ‘tan(x)^2’. This rule points out several interesting features of rewrite patterns. First, if a metavariable appears several times in a pattern, it must match the same thing everywhere. This rule detects common denominators because the same meta-variable ‘x’ is used in both of the denominators. Second, meta-variable names are independent from variables in the target formula. Notice that the meta-variable ‘x’ here matches the subformula ‘tan(x)^2’; Calc never confuses the two meanings of ‘x’. And third, rewrite patterns know a little bit about the algebraic properties of formulas. The pattern called for a sum of two quotients; Calc was able to match a difference of two quotients by matching ‘a = 2 sec(x)^2’, ‘b = -2’, and ‘x = tan(x)^2’. When the pattern part of a rewrite rule matches a part of the formula, that part is replaced by the righthand side with all the meta-variables substituted with the things they matched. So the result is ‘(2 sec(x)^2 - 2) / tan(x)^2’. We could just as easily have written ‘a/x - b/x := (a-b)/x’ for the rule. It would have worked just the same in all cases. (If we really wanted the rule to apply only to ‘+’ or only to ‘-’, we could have used the plain symbol. See Section 10.11.4 [Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules], page 292, for some examples of this.) One more rewrite will complete the job. We want to use the identity ‘tan(x)^2 + 1 = sec(x)^2’, but of course we must first rearrange the identity in a way that matches our formula. The obvious rule would be ‘2 sec(x)^2 - 2 := 2 tan(x)^2’, but a little thought

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

shows that the rule ‘sec(x)^2 := 1 + tan(x)^2’ will also work. The latter rule has a more general pattern so it will work in many other situations, too. 1:

2 . a r sec(x)^2 := 1 + tan(x)^2 RET

You may ask, what’s the point of using the most general rule if you have to type it in every time anyway? The answer is that Calc allows you to store a rewrite rule in a variable, then give the variable name in the a r command. In fact, this is the preferred way to use rewrites. For one, if you need a rule once you’ll most likely need it again later. Also, if the rule doesn’t work quite right you can simply Undo, edit the variable, and run the rule again without having to retype it. ’ a/x + b/x := (a+b)/x RET ’ sec(x)^2 := 1 + tan(x)^2 RET 1:

s t merge RET s t secsqr RET

2 sec(x)^2 / tan(x)^2 - 2 / tan(x)^2 . . r 1

a r merge RET

a r secsqr RET

To edit a variable, type s e and the variable name, use regular Emacs editing commands as necessary, then type C-c C-c to store the edited value back into the variable. You can also use s e to create a new variable if you wish. Notice that the first time you use each rule, Calc puts up a “compiling” message briefly. The pattern matcher converts rules into a special optimized pattern-matching language rather than using them directly. This allows a r to apply even rather complicated rules very efficiently. If the rule is stored in a variable, Calc compiles it only once and stores the compiled form along with the variable. That’s another good reason to store your rules in variables rather than entering them on the fly. (•) Exercise 1. Type m s to get Symbolic mode, then enter the formula ‘(2 + sqrt(2)) / (1 + sqrt(2))’. Using a rewrite rule, simplify this formula by multiplying the top and bottom by the conjugate ‘1 - sqrt(2)’. The result will have to be expanded by the distributive law; do this with another rewrite. See Section 2.7.52 [Rewrites Answer 1], page 91. (•) The a r command can also accept a vector of rewrite rules, or a variable containing a vector of rules. 1:

[merge, secsqr] . ’ [merge,sinsqr] RET

[a/x + b/x := (a + b)/x, ... ] . =

2 sec(x)^2 / tan(x)^2 - 2 / tan(x)^2 . . s t trig RET

r 1

a r trig RET

Calc tries all the rules you give against all parts of the formula, repeating until no further change is possible. (The exact order in which things are tried is rather complex, but for simple rules like the ones we’ve used here the order doesn’t really matter. See Section 10.11.7 [Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules], page 302.)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

Calc actually repeats only up to 100 times, just in case your rule set has gotten into an infinite loop. You can give a numeric prefix argument to a r to specify any limit. In particular, M-1 a r does only one rewrite at a time. 1:

(2 sec(x)^2 - 2) / tan(x)^2 . r 1

M-1 a r trig RET

2 . M-1 a r trig RET

You can type M-0 a r if you want no limit at all on the number of rewrites that occur. Rewrite rules can also be conditional. Simply follow the rule with a ‘::’ symbol and the desired condition. For example, 1:

sin(x + 2 pi) + sin(x + 3 pi) + sin(x + 4 pi) . ’ sin(x+2pi) + sin(x+3pi) + sin(x+4pi) RET

sin(x + 3 pi) + 2 sin(x) . a r sin(a + k pi) := sin(a) :: k % 2 = 0 RET

(Recall, ‘k % 2’ is the remainder from dividing ‘k’ by 2, which will be zero only when ‘k’ is an even integer.) An interesting point is that the variable ‘pi’ was matched literally rather than acting as a meta-variable. This is because it is a special-constant variable. The special constants ‘e’, ‘i’, ‘phi’, and so on also match literally. A common error with rewrite rules is to write, say, ‘f(a,b,c,d,e) := g(a+b+c+d+e)’, expecting to match any ‘f’ with five arguments but in fact matching only when the fifth argument is literally ‘e’! Rewrite rules provide an interesting way to define your own functions. Suppose we want to define ‘fib(n)’ to produce the nth Fibonacci number. The first two Fibonacci numbers are each 1; later numbers are formed by summing the two preceding numbers in the sequence. This is easy to express in a set of three rules: ’ [fib(1) := 1, fib(2) := 1, fib(n) := fib(n-1) + fib(n-2)] RET 1:

fib(7) . ’ fib(7) RET

s t fib

13 . a r fib RET

One thing that is guaranteed about the order that rewrites are tried is that, for any given subformula, earlier rules in the rule set will be tried for that subformula before later ones. So even though the first and third rules both match ‘fib(1)’, we know the first will be used preferentially. This rule set has one dangerous bug: Suppose we apply it to the formula ‘fib(x)’? (Don’t actually try this.) The third rule will match ‘fib(x)’ and replace it with ‘fib(x-1) + fib(x-2)’. Each of these will then be replaced to get ‘fib(x-2) + 2 fib(x-3) + fib(x-4)’, and so on, expanding forever. What we really want is to apply the third rule only when ‘n’ is an integer greater than two. Type s e fib RET, then edit the third rule to: fib(n) := fib(n-1) + fib(n-2) :: integer(n) :: n > 2

Now:

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

fib(6) + fib(x) + fib(0) . ’ fib(6)+fib(x)+fib(0) RET

fib(x) + fib(0) + 8 . a r fib RET

We’ve created a new function, fib, and a new command, a r fib RET, which means “evaluate all fib calls in this formula.” To make things easier still, we can tell Calc to apply these rules automatically by storing them in the special variable EvalRules. 1:

[fib(1) := ...] .

s r fib RET

s t EvalRules RET

[8, 13] . ’ [fib(6), fib(7)] RET

It turns out that this rule set has the problem that it does far more work than it needs to when ‘n’ is large. Consider the first few steps of the computation of ‘fib(6)’: fib(6) = fib(5) + fib(4) = fib(4) + fib(3) + fib(3) + fib(2) = fib(3) + fib(2) + fib(2) + fib(1) + fib(2) + fib(1) + 1 = ...

Note that ‘fib(3)’ appears three times here. Unless Calc’s algebraic simplifier notices the multiple ‘fib(3)’s and combines them (and, as it happens, it doesn’t), this rule set does lots of needless recomputation. To cure the problem, type s e EvalRules to edit the rules (or just s E, a shorthand command for editing EvalRules) and add another condition: fib(n) := fib(n-1) + fib(n-2) :: integer(n) :: n > 2 :: remember

If a ‘:: remember’ condition appears anywhere in a rule, then if that rule succeeds Calc will add another rule that describes that match to the front of the rule set. (Remembering works in any rule set, but for technical reasons it is most effective in EvalRules.) For example, if the rule rewrites ‘fib(7)’ to something that evaluates to 13, then the rule ‘fib(7) := 13’ will be added to the rule set. Type ’ fib(8) RET to compute the eighth Fibonacci number, then type s E again to see what has happened to the rule set. With the remember feature, our rule set can now compute ‘fib(n)’ in just n steps. In the process it builds up a table of all Fibonacci numbers up to n. After we have computed the result for a particular n, we can get it back (and the results for all smaller n) later in just one step. All Calc operations will run somewhat slower whenever EvalRules contains any rules. You should type s u EvalRules RET now to un-store the variable. (•) Exercise 2. Sometimes it is possible to reformulate a problem to reduce the amount of recursion necessary to solve it. Create a rule that, in about n simple steps and without recourse to the remember option, replaces ‘fib(n, 1, 1)’ with ‘fib(1, x, y)’ where x and y are the nth and n+1st Fibonacci numbers, respectively. This rule is rather clunky to use, so add a couple more rules to make the “user interface” the same as for our first version: enter ‘fib(n)’, get back a plain number. See Section 2.7.53 [Rewrites Answer 2], page 92. (•) There are many more things that rewrites can do. For example, there are ‘&&&’ and ‘|||’ pattern operators that create “and” and “or” combinations of rules. As one really simple example, we could combine our first two Fibonacci rules thusly: [fib(1 ||| 2) := 1, fib(n) := ... ]

Chapter 2: Tutorial

That means “fib of something matching either 1 or 2 rewrites to 1.” You can also make meta-variables optional by enclosing them in opt. For example, the pattern ‘a + b x’ matches ‘2 + 3 x’ but not ‘2 + x’ or ‘3 x’ or ‘x’. The pattern ‘opt(a) + opt(b) x’ matches all of these forms, filling in a default of zero for ‘a’ and one for ‘b’. (•) Exercise 3. Your friend Joe had ‘2 + 3 x’ on the stack and tried to use the rule ‘opt(a) + opt(b) x := f(a, b, x)’. What happened? See Section 2.7.54 [Rewrites Answer 3], page 92. (•) (•) Exercise 4. Starting with a positive integer a, divide a by two if it is even, otherwise compute 3a + 1. Now repeat this step over and over. A famous unproved conjecture is that for any starting a, the sequence always eventually reaches 1. Given the formula ‘seq(a, 0)’, write a set of rules that convert this into ‘seq(1, n)’ where n is the number of steps it took the sequence to reach the value 1. Now enhance the rules to accept ‘seq(a)’ as a starting configuration, and to stop with just the number n by itself. Now make the result be a vector of values in the sequence, from a to 1. (The formula ‘x|y’ appends the vectors x and y.) For example, rewriting ‘seq(6)’ should yield the vector [6, 3, 10, 5, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1]. See Section 2.7.55 [Rewrites Answer 4], page 92. (•) (•) Exercise 5. Define, using rewrite rules, a function ‘nterms(x)’ that returns the number of terms in the sum x, or 1 if x is not a sum. (A sum for our purposes is one or more non-sum terms separated by ‘+’ or ‘-’ signs, so that 2 − 3(x + y) + xy is a sum of three terms.) See Section 2.7.56 [Rewrites Answer 5], page 93. (•) (•) Exercise 6. A Taylor series for a function is an infinite series that exactly equals the value of that function at values of x near zero. x2 x4 x6 + − + ··· 2! 4! 6! The a t command produces a truncated Taylor series which is obtained by dropping all the terms higher than, say, x2 . Calc represents the truncated Taylor series as a polynomial in x. Mathematicians often write a truncated series using a “big-O” notation that records what was the lowest term that was truncated. cos x = 1 −

cos x = 1 −

x2 + O(x3 ) 2!

The meaning of O(x3 ) is “a quantity which is negligibly small if x3 is considered negligibly small as x goes to zero.” The exercise is to create rewrite rules that simplify sums and products of power series represented as ‘polynomial + O(var^n)’. For example, given ‘1 - x^2 / 2 + O(x^3)’ and ‘x - x^3 / 6 + O(x^4)’ on the stack, we want to be able to type * and get the result ‘x 2:3 x^3 + O(x^4)’. Don’t worry if the terms of the sum are rearranged. (This one is rather tricky; the solution at the end of this chapter uses 6 rewrite rules. Hint: The ‘constant(x)’ condition tests whether ‘x’ is a number.) See Section 2.7.57 [Rewrites Answer 6], page 93. (•) Just for kicks, try adding the rule 2+3 := 6 to EvalRules. What happens? (Be sure to remove this rule afterward, or you might get a nasty surprise when you use Calc to balance your checkbook!) See Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289, for the whole story on rewrite rules.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

2.6 Programming Tutorial The Calculator is written entirely in Emacs Lisp, a highly extensible language. If you know Lisp, you can program the Calculator to do anything you like. Rewrite rules also work as a powerful programming system. But Lisp and rewrite rules take a while to master, and often all you want to do is define a new function or repeat a command a few times. Calc has features that allow you to do these things easily. One very limited form of programming is defining your own functions. Calc’s Z F command allows you to define a function name and key sequence to correspond to any formula. Programming commands use the shift-Z prefix; the user commands they create use the lower case z prefix. 1:

x + x^2 / 2 + x^3 / 6 + 1 .

’ 1 + x + x^2/2! + x^3/3! RET

x + x^2 / 2 + x^3 / 6 + 1 . Z F e myexp RET RET RET y

This polynomial is a Taylor series approximation to ‘exp(x)’. The Z F command asks a number of questions. The above answers say that the key sequence for our function should be z e; the M-x equivalent should be calc-myexp; the name of the function in algebraic formulas should also be myexp; the default argument list ‘(x)’ is acceptable; and finally y answers the question “leave it in symbolic form for non-constant arguments?” 1:

1.3495 .

.3 z e

2: 1:

1.3495 1.34986 .

.3 E

3: 2: 1:

1.3495 1.34986 myexp(a + 1) . ’ a+1 RET z e

First we call our new exp approximation with 0.3 as an argument, and compare it with the true exp function. Then we note that, as requested, if we try to give z e an argument that isn’t a plain number, it leaves the myexp function call in symbolic form. If we had answered n to the final question, ‘myexp(a + 1)’ would have evaluated by plugging in ‘a + 1’ for ‘x’ in the defining formula. (•) Exercise 1. The “sine integral” function Si(x) is defined as the integral of ‘sin(t)/t’ for t = 0 to x in radians. (It was invented because this integral has no solution in terms of basic functions; if you give it to Calc’s a i command, it will ponder it for a long time and then give up.) We can use the numerical integration command, however, which in algebraic notation is written like ‘ninteg(f(t), t, 0, x)’ with any integrand ‘f(t)’. Define a z s command and Si function that implement this. You will need to edit the default argument list a bit. As a test, ‘Si(1)’ should return 0.946083. (If you don’t get this answer, you might want to check that Calc is in Radians mode. Also, ninteg will run a lot faster if you reduce the precision to, say, six digits beforehand.) See Section 2.7.58 [Programming Answer 1], page 94. (•) The simplest way to do real “programming” of Emacs is to define a keyboard macro. A keyboard macro is simply a sequence of keystrokes which Emacs has stored away and can play back on demand. For example, if you find yourself typing H a S x RET often, you may wish to program a keyboard macro to type this for you.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

y = sqrt(x) .

’ y=sqrt(x) RET 1:

x = y^2 .

C-x ( H a S x RET C-x )

y = cos(x) .

’ y=cos(x) RET

x = s1 arccos(y) + 2 n1 pi . X

When you type C-x (, Emacs begins recording. But it is also still ready to execute your keystrokes, so you’re really “training” Emacs by walking it through the procedure once. When you type C-x ), the macro is recorded. You can now type X to re-execute the same keystrokes. You can give a name to your macro by typing Z K. 1:

Z K x RET

y = x^4 .

’ y=x^4 RET

x = s2 sqrt(s1 sqrt(y)) . z x

Notice that we use shift-Z to define the command, and lower-case z to call it up. Keyboard macros can call other macros. 1:

abs(x) .

’ abs(x) RET

x = s1 y .

C-x ( ’ y RET a = z x C-x )

2 / x .

’ 2/x RET

x = 2 / y . X

(•) Exercise 2. Define a keyboard macro to negate the item in level 3 of the stack, without disturbing the rest of the stack. See Section 2.7.59 [Programming Answer 2], page 94. (•) (•) Exercise 3. Define keyboard macros to compute the following functions: sin x 1. Compute , where x is the number on the top of the stack. x 2. Compute the base-b logarithm, just like the B key except the arguments are taken in the opposite order. 3. Produce a vector of integers from 1 to the integer on the top of the stack. See Section 2.7.60 [Programming Answer 3], page 95. (•) (•) Exercise 4. Define a keyboard macro to compute the average (mean) value of a list of numbers. See Section 2.7.61 [Programming Answer 4], page 95. (•) In many programs, some of the steps must execute several times. Calc has looping commands that allow this. Loops are useful inside keyboard macros, but actually work at any time. 1:

x^6 .

’ x^6 RET

2: 1:

x^6 4 . 4

1: 360 x^2 .

Z < a d x RET Z >

Here we have computed the fourth derivative of x6 by enclosing a derivative command in a “repeat loop” structure. This structure pops a repeat count from the stack, then executes the body of the loop that many times. If you make a mistake while entering the body of the loop, type Z C-g to cancel the loop command.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Here’s another example: 3: 2: 1:

1 1 20 .

2: 1:

1 RET RET 20

10946 17711 .

Z < TAB C-j + Z >

The numbers in levels 2 and 1 should be the 21st and 22nd Fibonacci numbers, respectively. (To see what’s going on, try a few repetitions of the loop body by hand; C-j, also on the Line-Feed or LFD key if you have one, makes a copy of the number in level 2.) A fascinating property of the Fibonacci numbers is that the nth Fibonacci number can √ be found directly by computing φn√ / 5 and then rounding to the nearest integer, where φ (“phi”), the “golden ratio,” is (1 + 5)/2. (For convenience, this constant is available from the phi variable, or the I H P command.) 1:

1.61803 .

24476.0000409 .

I H P

21 ^

10945.9999817 .

5 Q /

10946 . R

(•) Exercise 5. The continued fraction representation of φ is 1 + 1/(1 + 1/(1 + 1/(. . .))). We can compute an approximate value by carrying this however far and then replacing the innermost 1/(. . .) by 1. Approximate φ using a twenty-term continued fraction. See Section 2.7.62 [Programming Answer 5], page 95. (•) (•) Exercise 6. Linear recurrences like the one for Fibonacci numbers can be expressed in terms of matrices. Given a vector [a, b] determine a matrix which, when multiplied by this vector, produces the vector [b, c], where a, b and c are three successive Fibonacci numbers. Now write a program that, given an integer n, computes the nth Fibonacci number using matrix arithmetic. See Section 2.7.63 [Programming Answer 6], page 95. (•) A more sophisticated kind of loop is the for loop. Suppose we wish to compute the 20th “harmonic” number, which is equal to the sum of the reciprocals of the integers from 1 to 20. 3: 2: 1:

0 1 20 .

0 RET 1 RET 20

3.597739 .

Z ( & + 1 Z )

The “for” loop pops two numbers, the lower and upper limits, then repeats the body of the loop as an internal counter increases from the lower limit to the upper one. Just before executing the loop body, it pushes the current loop counter. When the loop body finishes, it pops the “step,” i.e., the amount by which to increment the loop counter. As you can see, our loop always uses a step of one. This harmonic number function uses the stack to hold the running total as well as for the various loop housekeeping functions. If you find this disorienting, you can sum in a variable instead: 1:

0 .

0 t 7

2: 1:

1 20 .

1 RET 20

Z ( & s + 7 1 Z )

3.597739 .

r 7

Chapter 2: Tutorial

The s + command adds the top-of-stack into the value in a variable (and removes that value from the stack). It’s worth noting that many jobs that call for a “for” loop can also be done more easily by Calc’s high-level operations. Two other ways to compute harmonic numbers are to use vector mapping and reduction (v x 20, then V M &, then V R +), or to use the summation command a +. Both of these are probably easier than using loops. However, there are some situations where loops really are the way to go: (•) Exercise 7. Use a “for” loop to find the first harmonic number which is greater than 4.0. See Section 2.7.64 [Programming Answer 7], page 96. (•) Of course, if we’re going to be using variables in our programs, we have to worry about the programs clobbering values that the caller was keeping in those same variables. This is easy to fix, though: .

Z ‘

0.6667 .

p 4 RET 2 RET 3 /

0.6667 .

s 7 s s a RET

3: 2: 1:

0.6667 3.597739 0.6667 .

Z ’

r 7 s r a RET

When we type Z ‘ (that’s a back-quote character), Calc saves its mode settings and the contents of the ten “quick variables” for later reference. When we type Z ’ (that’s an apostrophe now), Calc restores those saved values. Thus the p 4 and s 7 commands have no effect outside this sequence. Wrapping this around the body of a keyboard macro ensures that it doesn’t interfere with what the user of the macro was doing. Notice that the contents of the stack, and the values of named variables, survive past the Z ’ command. The Bernoulli numbers are a sequence with the interesting property that all of the odd Bernoulli numbers are zero, and the even ones, while difficult to compute, can be 2n! roughly approximated by the formula . Let’s write a keyboard macro to compute (2π)n (approximate) Bernoulli numbers. (Calc has a command, k b, to compute exact Bernoulli numbers, but this command is very slow for large n since the higher Bernoulli numbers are very large fractions.) 1:

10 . 10

0.0756823 .

C-x ( RET 2 % Z [ DEL 0 Z : ’ 2 $! / (2 pi)^$ RET = Z ] C-x )

You can read Z [ as “then,” Z : as “else,” and Z ] as “end-if.” There is no need for an explicit “if” command. For the purposes of Z [, the condition is “true” if the value it pops from the stack is a nonzero number, or “false” if it pops zero or something that is not a number (like a formula). Here we take our integer argument modulo 2; this will be nonzero if we’re asking for an odd Bernoulli number. The actual tenth Bernoulli number is 5/66. 3: 2: 1:

0.0756823 5:66 0.0757575 .

10 k b RET c f

0 .

M-0 DEL 11 X

0.25305 .

DEL 12 X

0 .

DEL 13 X

1.16659 .

DEL 14 X

Just to exercise loops a bit more, let’s compute a table of even Bernoulli numbers.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

3: 2: 1:

[] 2 30 .

[ ] 2 RET 30

[0.10132, 0.03079, 0.02340, 0.033197, ...] .

Z ( X | 2 Z )

The vertical-bar | is the vector-concatenation command. When we execute it, the list we are building will be in stack level 2 (initially this is an empty list), and the next Bernoulli number will be in level 1. The effect is to append the Bernoulli number onto the end of the list. (To create a table of exact fractional Bernoulli numbers, just replace X with k b in the above sequence of keystrokes.) With loops and conditionals, you can program essentially anything in Calc. One other command that makes looping easier is Z /, which takes a condition from the stack and breaks out of the enclosing loop if the condition is true (non-zero). You can use this to make “while” and “until” style loops. If you make a mistake when entering a keyboard macro, you can edit it using Z E. First, you must attach it to a key with Z K. One technique is to enter a throwaway dummy definition for the macro, then enter the real one in the edit command. 1:

3 .

Calc Macro Edit Mode. Original keys: 1 2 + 1 RET 2 +

C-x ( 1 RET 2 + C-x )

Z K h RET

;; ;; ;; ;;

calc digits calc-enter calc digits calc-plus

Z E h

A keyboard macro is stored as a pure keystroke sequence. The edmacro package (invoked by Z E) scans along the macro and tries to decode it back into human-readable steps. Descriptions of the keystrokes are given as comments, which begin with ‘;;’, and which are ignored when the edited macro is saved. Spaces and line breaks are also ignored when the edited macro is saved. To enter a space into the macro, type SPC. All the special characters RET, LFD, TAB, SPC, DEL, and NUL must be written in all uppercase, as must the prefixes Cand M-. Let’s edit in a new definition, for computing harmonic numbers. First, erase the four lines of the old definition. Then, type in the new definition (or use Emacs M-w and C-y commands to copy it from this page of the Info file; you can of course skip typing the comments, which begin with ‘;;’). Z‘ 0 st 1 1 TAB Z( & s+ 1 1 Z) sr

;; ;; ;; ;; ;; ;; ;; ;; ;; ;; ;; ;; ;;

calc-kbd-push (Save local values) calc digits (Push a zero onto the stack) calc-store-into (Store it in the following variable) calc quick variable (Quick variable q1) calc digits (Initial value for the loop) calc-roll-down (Swap initial and final) calc-kbd-for (Begin the "for" loop) calc-inv (Take the reciprocal) calc-store-plus (Add to the following variable) calc quick variable (Quick variable q1) calc digits (The loop step is 1) calc-kbd-end-for (End the "for" loop) calc-recall (Recall the final accumulated value)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

1 Z’

;; calc quick variable (Quick variable q1) ;; calc-kbd-pop (Restore values)

Press C-c C-c to finish editing and return to the Calculator. 1:

20 . 20

3.597739 . z h

The edmacro package defines a handy read-kbd-macro command which reads the current region of the current buffer as a sequence of keystroke names, and defines that sequence on the X (and C-x e) key. Because this is so useful, Calc puts this command on the C-x * m key. Try reading in this macro in the following form: Press C-@ (or C-SPC) at one end of the text below, then type C-x * m at the other. Z ‘ 0 1 Z r Z ’

t 1 TAB ( & s + 1 1

1 Z )

(•) Exercise 8. A general algorithm for solving equations numerically is Newton’s Method. Given the equation f (x) = 0 for any function f , and an initial guess x0 which is reasonably close to the desired solution, apply this formula over and over: xnew = x −

f (x) f 0 (x)

where f 0 (x) is the derivative of f . The x values will quickly converge to a solution, i.e., eventually xnew and x will be equal to within the limits of the current precision. Write a program which takes a formula involving the variable x, and an initial guess x0 , on the stack, and produces a value of x for which the formula is zero. Use it to find a solution of sin(cos x) = 0.5 near x = 4.5. (Use angles measured in radians.) Note that the built-in a R (calc-find-root) command uses Newton’s method when it is able. See Section 2.7.65 [Programming Answer 8], page 96. (•) (•) Exercise 9. The digamma function ψ(z)(“psi00 ) is defined as the derivative of ln Γ(z). For large values of z, it can be approximated by the infinite sum ∞ X bern(2n) 1 ψ(z) ≈ ln z − − 2z n=1 2nz 2n

where represents the sum over n from 1 to infinity (or to some limit high enough to give the desired accuracy), and the bern function produces (exact) Bernoulli numbers. While this sum is not guaranteed to converge, in practice it is safe. An interesting mathematical constant is Euler’s gamma, which is equal to about 0.5772. One way to compute it is by the formula, γ = −ψ(1). Unfortunately, 1 isn’t a large enough argument for the above formula to work (5 is a much safer value for z). Fortunately, we can compute ψ(1) from ψ(5) using the recurrence ψ(z + 1) = ψ(z) + z1 . Your task: Develop a program to compute ψ(z); it should “pump up” z if necessary to be greater than 5, then use the above summation formula. Use looping commands to compute the sum. Use your function to compute γ to twelve decimal places. (Calc has a built-in command for Euler’s constant, I P, which you can use to check your answer.) See Section 2.7.66 [Programming Answer 9], page 97. (•)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

(•) Exercise 10. Given a polynomial in x and a number m on the stack, where the polynomial is of degree m or less (i.e., does not have any terms higher than xm ), write a program to convert the polynomial into a list-of-coefficients notation. For example, 5x4 + (x + 1)2 with m = 6 should produce the list [1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0]. Also develop a way to convert from this form back to the standard algebraic form. See Section 2.7.67 [Programming Answer 10], page 99. (•) (•) Exercise 11. The Stirling numbers of the first kind are defined by the recurrences, s(n, n) = 1 for n ≥ 0, s(n, 0) = 0 for n > 0, s(n + 1, m) = s(n, m − 1) − n s(n, m)

for n ≥ m ≥ 1.

" #

(These numbers are also sometimes written

n .) m

This can be implemented using a recursive program in Calc; the program must invoke itself in order to calculate the two righthand terms in the general formula. Since it always invokes itself with “simpler” arguments, it’s easy to see that it must eventually finish the computation. Recursion is a little difficult with Emacs keyboard macros since the macro is executed before its definition is complete. So here’s the recommended strategy: Create a “dummy macro” and assign it to a key with, e.g., Z K s. Now enter the true definition, using the z s command to call itself recursively, then assign it to the same key with Z K s. Now the z s command will run the complete recursive program. (Another way is to use Z E or C-x * m (read-kbd-macro) to read the whole macro at once, thus avoiding the “training” phase.) The task: Write a program that computes Stirling numbers of the first kind, given n and m on the stack. Test it with small inputs like s(4, 2). (There is a built-in command for Stirling numbers, k s, which you can use to check your answers.) See Section 2.7.68 [Programming Answer 11], page 100. (•) The programming commands we’ve seen in this part of the tutorial are low-level, generalpurpose operations. Often you will find that a higher-level function, such as vector mapping or rewrite rules, will do the job much more easily than a detailed, step-by-step program can: (•) Exercise 12. Write another program for computing Stirling numbers of the first kind, this time using rewrite rules. Once again, n and m should be taken from the stack. See Section 2.7.69 [Programming Answer 12], page 101. (•) This ends the tutorial section of the Calc manual. Now you know enough about Calc to use it effectively for many kinds of calculations. But Calc has many features that were not even touched upon in this tutorial. The rest of this manual tells the whole story.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2.7 Answers to Exercises This section includes answers to all the exercises in the Calc tutorial.

2.7.1 RPN Tutorial Exercise 1 1 RET 2 RET 3 RET 4 + * The result is 1 − (2 × (3 + 4)) = −13.

2.7.2 RPN Tutorial Exercise 2 2 × 4 + 7 × 9.5 +

5 4

= 75.75

After computing the intermediate term 2 × 4 = 8, you can leave that result on the stack while you compute the second term. With both of these results waiting on the stack you can then compute the final term, then press + + to add everything up. 2: 1:

2 4 .

2 RET 4 4: 3: 2: 1:

8 66.5 5 4 .

3: 2: 1:

5 RET 4

8 .

3: 2: 1:

7 RET 9.5

8 66.5 1.25 .

2: 1:

8 7 9.5 .

8 67.75 .

2: 1:

8 66.5 .

* 1:

75.75 .

Alternatively, you could add the first two terms before going on with the third term. 2: 1:

8 66.5 .

...

74.5 .

3: 2: 1:

74.5 5 4 .

2: 1:

5 RET 4

74.5 1.25 .

75.75 .

On an old-style RPN calculator this second method would have the advantage of using only three stack levels. But since Calc’s stack can grow arbitrarily large this isn’t really an issue. Which method you choose is purely a matter of taste.

2.7.3 RPN Tutorial Exercise 3 The TAB key provides a way to operate on the number in level 2. 3: 2: 1:

10 20 30 .

3: 2: 1:

10 30 20 .

TAB

4: 3: 2: 1:

10 30 20 1 . 1

3: 2: 1:

10 30 21 .

Similarly, M-TAB gives you access to the number in level 3.

3: 2: 1:

10 21 30 .

TAB

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

3: 2: 1:

10 21 30 .

3: 2: 1:

21 30 10 .

3: 2: 1:

M-TAB

21 30 11 .

3: 2: 1:

1 +

30 11 21 .

3: 2: 1:

M-TAB

11 21 30 . M-TAB

2.7.4 RPN Tutorial Exercise 4 Either ( 2 , 3 ) or ( 2 SPC 3 ) would have worked, but using both the comma and the space at once yields: 1:

( ... .

2: 1:

(

( ... 2 .

(2, ... .

2: 1:

(2, ... (2, ... . SPC

2: 1:

(2, ... (2, 3) . 3 )

Joe probably tried to type TAB DEL to swap the extra incomplete object to the top of the stack and delete it. But a feature of Calc is that DEL on an incomplete object deletes just one component out of that object, so he had to press DEL twice to finish the job. 2: 1:

(2, ... (2, 3) .

2: 1:

(2, 3) (2, ... . TAB

2: 1:

(2, 3) ( ... . DEL

(2, 3) .

DEL

(As it turns out, deleting the second-to-top stack entry happens often enough that Calc provides a special key, M-DEL, to do just that. M-DEL is just like TAB DEL, except that it doesn’t exhibit the “feature” that tripped poor Joe.)

2.7.5 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 1 Type ’ sqrt($) RET. If the Q key is broken, you could use ’ $^0.5 RET. Or, RPN style, 0.5 ^. (Actually, ‘$^1:2’, using the fraction one-half as the power, is a closer equivalent, since ‘9^0.5’ yields 3.0 whereas ‘sqrt(9)’ and ‘9^1:2’ yield the exact integer 3.)

2.7.6 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 2 In the formula ‘2 x (1+y)’, ‘x’ was interpreted as a function name with ‘1+y’ as its argument. Assigning a value to a variable has no relation to a function by the same name. Joe needed to use an explicit ‘*’ symbol here: ‘2 x*(1+y)’.

2.7.7 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 3 The result from 1 RET 0 / will be the formula 1/0. The “function” ‘/’ cannot be evaluated when its second argument is zero, so it is left in symbolic form. When you now type 0 *, the result will be zero because Calc uses the general rule that “zero times anything is zero.” The m i command enables an Infinite mode in which 1/0 results in a special symbol that represents “infinity.” If you multiply infinity by zero, Calc uses another special new symbol to show that the answer is “indeterminate.” See Section 4.5 [Infinities], page 117, for further discussion of infinite and indeterminate values.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2.7.8 Modes Tutorial Exercise 1 Calc always stores its numbers in decimal, so even though one-third has an exact base-3 representation (‘3#0.1’), it is still stored as 0.3333333 (chopped off after 12 or however many decimal digits) inside the calculator’s memory. When this inexact number is converted back to base 3 for display, it may still be slightly inexact. When we multiply this number by 3, we get 0.999999, also an inexact value. When Calc displays a number in base 3, it has to decide how many digits to show. If the current precision is 12 (decimal) digits, that corresponds to ‘12 / log10(3) = 25.15’ base-3 digits. Because 25.15 is not an exact integer, Calc shows only 25 digits, with the result that stored numbers carry a little bit of extra information that may not show up on the screen. When Joe entered ‘3#0.2’, the stored number 0.666666 happened to round to a pleasing value when it lost that last 0.15 of a digit, but it was still inexact in Calc’s memory. When he divided by 2, he still got the dreaded inexact value 0.333333. (Actually, he divided 0.666667 by 2 to get 0.333334, which is why he got something a little higher than 3#0.1 instead of a little lower.) If Joe didn’t want to be bothered with all this, he could have typed M-24 d n to display with one less digit than the default. (If you give d n a negative argument, it uses defaultminus-that, so M-- d n would be an easier way to get the same effect.) Those inexact results would still be lurking there, but they would now be rounded to nice, natural-looking values for display purposes. (Remember, ‘0.022222’ in base 3 is like ‘0.099999’ in base 10; rounding off one digit will round the number up to ‘0.1’.) Depending on the nature of your work, this hiding of the inexactness may be a benefit or a danger. With the d n command, Calc gives you the choice. Incidentally, another consequence of all this is that if you type M-30 d n to display more digits than are “really there,” you’ll see garbage digits at the end of the number. (In decimal display mode, with decimally-stored numbers, these garbage digits are always zero so they vanish and you don’t notice them.) Because Calc rounds off that 0.15 digit, there is the danger that two numbers could be slightly different internally but still look the same. If you feel uneasy about this, set the d n precision to be a little higher than normal; you’ll get ugly garbage digits, but you’ll always be able to tell two distinct numbers apart. An interesting side note is that most computers store their floating-point numbers in binary, and convert to decimal for display. Thus everyday programs have the same problem: Decimal 0.1 cannot be represented exactly in binary (try it: 0.1 d 2), so ‘0.1 * 10’ comes out as an inexact approximation to 1 on some machines (though they generally arrange to hide it from you by rounding off one digit as we did above). Because Calc works in decimal instead of binary, you can be sure that numbers that look exact are exact as long as you stay in decimal display mode. It’s not hard to show that any number that can be represented exactly in binary, octal, or hexadecimal is also exact in decimal, so the kinds of problems we saw in this exercise are likely to be severe only when you use a relatively unusual radix like 3.

2.7.9 Modes Tutorial Exercise 2 If the radix is 15 or higher, we can’t use the letter ‘e’ to mark the exponent because ‘e’ is interpreted as a digit. When Calc needs to display scientific notation in a high radix, it writes ‘16#F.E8F*16.^15’. You can enter a number like this as an algebraic entry. Also,

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

pressing e without any digits before it normally types 1e, but in a high radix it types 16.^ and puts you in algebraic entry: 16#f.e8f RET e 15 RET * is another way to enter this number. The reason Calc puts a decimal point in the ‘16.^’ is to prevent huge integers from being generated if the exponent is large (consider ‘16#1.23*16^1000’, where we compute ‘16^1000’ as a giant exact integer and then throw away most of the digits when we multiply it by the floating-point ‘16#1.23’). While this wouldn’t normally matter for display purposes, it could give you a nasty surprise if you copied that number into a file and later moved it back into Calc.

2.7.10 Modes Tutorial Exercise 3 The answer he got was 0.5000000000006399. The problem is not that the square operation is inexact, but that the sine of 45 that was already on the stack was accurate to only 12 places. Arbitrary-precision calculations still only give answers as good as their inputs. The real problem is that there is no 12-digit number which, when squared, comes out to 0.5 exactly. The f [ and f ] commands decrease or increase a number by one unit in the last place (according to the current precision). They are useful for determining facts like this. 1:

0.707106781187 .

45 S 1:

0.707106781187 . U

DEL

0.500000000001 . 2 ^

0.707106781186 . f [

0.499999999999 . 2 ^

A high-precision calculation must be carried out in high precision all the way. The only number in the original problem which was known exactly was the quantity 45 degrees, so the precision must be raised before anything is done after the number 45 has been entered in order for the higher precision to be meaningful.

2.7.11 Modes Tutorial Exercise 4 Many calculations involve real-world quantities, like the width and height of a piece of wood or the volume of a jar. Such quantities can’t be measured exactly anyway, and if the data that is input to a calculation is inexact, doing exact arithmetic on it is a waste of time. Fractions become unwieldy after too many calculations have been done with them. For example, the sum of the reciprocals of the integers from 1 to 10 is 7381:2520. The sum from 1 to 30 is 9304682830147:2329089562800. After a point it will take a long time to add even one more term to this sum, but a floating-point calculation of the sum will not have this problem. Also, rational numbers cannot express the results of all calculations. There is no fractional form for the square root of two, so if you type 2 Q, Calc has no choice but to give you a floating-point answer.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2.7.12 Arithmetic Tutorial Exercise 1 Dividing two integers that are larger than the current precision may give a floating-point result that is inaccurate even when rounded down to an integer. Consider 123456789/2 when the current precision is 6 digits. The true answer is 61728394.5, but with a precision of 6 this will be rounded to 12345700.0/2.0 = 61728500.0. The result, when converted to an integer, will be off by 106. Here are two solutions: Raise the precision enough that the floating-point round-off error is strictly to the right of the decimal point. Or, convert to Fraction mode so that 123456789/2 produces the exact fraction 123456789:2, which can be rounded down by the F command without ever switching to floating-point format.

2.7.13 Arithmetic Tutorial Exercise 2 27 RET 9 B could give the exact result 3:2, but it does a floating-point calculation instead and produces 1.5. Calc will find an exact result for a logarithm if the result is an integer or (when in Fraction mode) the reciprocal of an integer. But there is no efficient way to search the space of all possible rational numbers for an exact answer, so Calc doesn’t try.

2.7.14 Vector Tutorial Exercise 1 Duplicate the vector, compute its length, then divide the vector by its length: RET A /. 1:

[1, 2, 3] .

2: 1:

r 1

[1, 2, 3] 3.74165738677 .

RET A

[0.27, 0.53, 0.80] .

1. .

The final A command shows that the normalized vector does indeed have unit length.

2.7.15 Vector Tutorial Exercise 2 The average position is equal to the sum of the products of the positions times their corresponding probabilities. This is the definition of the dot product operation. So all you need to do is to put the two vectors on the stack and press *.

2.7.16 Matrix Tutorial Exercise 1 The trick is to multiply by a vector of ones. Use r 4 [1 1 1] * to get the row sum. Similarly, use [1 1] r 4 * to get the column sum.

2.7.17 Matrix Tutorial Exercise 2 x + ay = 6 x + by = 10 Just enter the righthand side vector, then divide by the lefthand side matrix as usual. 1:

[6, 10] .

’ [6 10] RET

2: 1:

[6, 10] [ [ 1, a ] [ 1, b ] ] . ’ [1 a; 1 b] RET

[4 a / (a - b) + 6, 4 / (b - a) ] .

This can be made more readable using d B to enable Big display mode:

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

4 a 4 [----- + 6, -----] a - b b - a

Type d N to return to Normal display mode afterwards.

2.7.18 Matrix Tutorial Exercise 3 To solve AT A X = AT B, first we compute A0 = AT A and B 0 = AT B; now, we have a system A0 X = B 0 which we can solve using Calc’s ‘/’ command. a + 2b + 3c = 6 4a + 5b + 6c = 2 7a + 6b =3 2a + 4b + 6c = 11 The first step is to enter the coefficient matrix. We’ll store it in quick variable number 7 for later reference. Next, we compute the B 0 vector. 1:

[ [ [ [ [ .

1, 4, 7, 2,

2, 5, 6, 4,

3 6 0 6

] ] ] ] ]

[ [ [ [ [6, .

’ [1 2 3; 4 5 6; 7 6 0; 2 4 6] RET

1, 2, 3, 2,

s 7

4, 5, 6, 3,

7, 2 ] 6, 4 ] 0, 6 ] ] 11]

v t

[6 2 3 11]

[57, 84, 96] .

Now we compute the matrix A0 and divide. 2: 1:

[57, 84, 96] [ [ 70, 72, 39 ] [ 72, 81, 60 ] [ 39, 60, 81 ] ] . r 7 v t r 7 *

[-11.64, 14.08, -3.64] .

(The actual computed answer will be slightly inexact due to round-off error.) Notice that the answers are similar to those for the 3 × 3 system solved in the text. That’s because the fourth equation that was added to the system is almost identical to the first one multiplied by two. (If it were identical, we would have gotten the exact same answer since the 4 × 3 system would be equivalent to the original 3 × 3 system.) Since the first and fourth equations aren’t quite equivalent, they can’t both be satisfied at once. Let’s plug our answers back into the original system of equations to see how well they match. 2: 1:

[-11.64, 14.08, -3.64] [ [ 1, 2, 3 ] [ 4, 5, 6 ] [ 7, 6, 0 ] [ 2, 4, 6 ] ] . r 7

[5.6, 2., 3., 11.2] .

TAB *

This is reasonably close to our original B vector, [6, 2, 3, 11].

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2.7.19 List Tutorial Exercise 1 We can use v x to build a vector of integers. This needs to be adjusted to get the range of integers we desire. Mapping ‘-’ across the vector will accomplish this, although it turns out the plain ‘-’ key will work just as well. 2: 1:

2 [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9] . 2

2: 1:

v x 9 RET

2 [-4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4] . 5 V M -

5 -

Now we use V M ^ to map the exponentiation operator across the vector. 1:

[0.0625, 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16] . V M ^

2.7.20 List Tutorial Exercise 2 Given x and y vectors in quick variables 1 and 2 as before, the first job is to form the matrix that describes the problem. m×x+b×1=y Thus we want a 19 × 2 matrix with our x vector as one column and ones as the other column. So, first we build the column of ones, then we combine the two columns to form our A matrix. 2: 1:

[1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ] [1, 1, 1, ...] .

r 1 1 v b 19 RET T

[ [ 1.34, 1 ] [ 1.41, 1 ] [ 1.49, 1 ] ... M-2 v p v t

s 3

Now we compute A y and A A and divide. 1:

[33.36554, 13.613] .

2: 1:

v t r 2 *

[33.36554, 13.613] [ [ 98.0003, 41.63 ] [ 41.63, 19 ] ] . r 3 v t r 3 *

(Hey, those numbers look familiar!) 1:

[0.52141679, -0.425978] . /

Since we were solving equations of the form m × x + b × 1 = y, these numbers should be m and b, respectively. Sure enough, they agree exactly with the result computed using V M and V R! The moral of this story: V M and V R will probably solve your problem, but there is often an easier way using the higher-level arithmetic functions! In fact, there is a built-in a F command that does least-squares fits. See Section 10.8 [Curve Fitting], page 273.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

2.7.21 List Tutorial Exercise 3 Move to one end of the list and press C-@ (or C-SPC or whatever) to set the mark, then move to the other end of the list and type C-x * g. 1:

[2.3, 6, 22, 15.1, 7, 15, 14, 7.5, 2.5] .

To make things interesting, let’s assume we don’t know at a glance how many numbers are in this list. Then we could type: 2: 1:

[2.3, 6, 22, ... ] [2.3, 6, 22, ... ] .

2: 1:

RET 2: 1:

[2.3, 6, 22, ... ] 126356422.5 . V R *

126356422.5 [2.3, 6, 22, ... ] .

2: 1:

TAB

126356422.5 9 .

v l

7.94652913734 .

I ^

(The I ^ command computes the nth root of a number. You could also type & ^ to take the reciprocal of 9 and then raise the number to that power.)

2.7.22 List Tutorial Exercise 4 A number j is a divisor of n if n % j = 0. The first step is to get a vector that identifies the divisors. 2: 1:

30 [1, 2, 3, 4, ...] .

30 RET v x 30 RET

2: 1:

s 1

[0, 0, 0, 2, ...] 0 . V M %

[1, 1, 1, 0, ...] .

V M a =

s 2

This vector has 1’s marking divisors of 30 and 0’s marking non-divisors. The zeroth divisor function is just the total number of divisors. The first divisor function is the sum of the divisors. 1:

3: 2: 1:

V R +

8 [1, 2, 3, 4, ...] [1, 1, 1, 0, ...] . r 1 r 2

2: 1:

8 [1, 2, 3, 0, ...] .

V M *

2: 1:

8 72 .

V R +

Once again, the last two steps just compute a dot product for which a simple * would have worked equally well.

2.7.23 List Tutorial Exercise 5 The obvious first step is to obtain the list of factors with k f. This list will always be in sorted order, so if there are duplicates they will be right next to each other. A suitable method is to compare the list with a copy of itself shifted over by one. 1:

[3, 7, 7, 7, 19] .

19551 k f

2: 1:

[3, 7, 7, 7, 19] [3, 7, 7, 7, 19, 0] . RET 0 |

2: 1:

[3, 7, 7, 7, 19, 0] [0, 3, 7, 7, 7, 19] . TAB 0 TAB |

Chapter 2: Tutorial

[0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0] . V M a =

2 .

V R +

0 . 0 a =

Note that we have to arrange for both vectors to have the same length so that the mapping operation works; no prime factor will ever be zero, so adding zeros on the left and right is safe. From then on the job is pretty straightforward. Incidentally, Calc provides the M¨obius µ function which is zero if and only if its argument is square-free. It would be a much more convenient way to do the above test in practice.

2.7.24 List Tutorial Exercise 6 First use v x 6 RET to get a list of integers, then V M v x to get a list of lists of integers!

2.7.25 List Tutorial Exercise 7 Here’s one solution. First, compute the triangular list from the previous exercise and type 1 - to subtract one from all the elements. 1:

[ [0], [0, 1], [0, 1, 2], ... 1 -

The numbers down the lefthand edge of the list we desire are called the “triangular numbers” (now you know why!). The nth triangular number is the sum of the integers from 1 to n, and can be computed directly by the formula n(n+1) . 2 2: 1:

[ [0], [0, 1], ... ] [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5] .

2: 1:

v x 6 RET 1 -

[ [0], [0, 1], ... ] [0, 1, 3, 6, 10, 15] . V M ’ $ ($+1)/2 RET

Adding this list to the above list of lists produces the desired result: 1:

[ [0], [1, 2], [3, 4, 5], [6, 7, 8, 9], [10, 11, 12, 13, 14], [15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20] ] . V M +

If we did not know the formula for triangular numbers, we could have computed them using a V U + command. We could also have gotten them the hard way by mapping a reduction across the original triangular list. 2: 1:

[ [0], [0, 1], ... ] [ [0], [0, 1], ... ] . RET

2: 1:

[ [0], [0, 1], ... ] [0, 1, 3, 6, 10, 15] . V M V R +

(This means “map a V R + command across the vector,” and since each element of the main vector is itself a small vector, V R + computes the sum of its elements.)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

2.7.26 List Tutorial Exercise 8 The first step is to build a list of values of x. 1:

[1, 2, 3, ..., 21] .

v x 21 RET

[0, 1, 2, ..., 20] .

1 -

[0, 0.25, 0.5, ..., 5] . 4 /

s 1

Next, we compute the Bessel function values. 1:

[0., 0.124, 0.242, ..., -0.328] . V M ’ besJ(1,$) RET

(Another way to do this would be 1 TAB V M f j.) A way to isolate the maximum value is to compute the maximum using V R X, then compare all the Bessel values with that maximum. 2: 1:

[0., 0.124, 0.242, ... ] 0.5801562 .

RET V R X

[0, 0, 0, ... ] .

2: 1:

V M a =

[0, 0, 0, ... ] 1 . RET V R +

DEL

It’s a good idea to verify, as in the last step above, that only one value is equal to the maximum. (After all, a plot of sin x might have many points all equal to the maximum value, 1.) The vector we have now has a single 1 in the position that indicates the maximum value of x. Now it is a simple matter to convert this back into the corresponding value itself. 2: 1:

[0, 0, 0, ... ] [0, 0.25, 0.5, ... ] . r 1

[0, 0., 0., ... ] .

V M *

1.75 .

V R +

If a = had produced more than one 1 value, this method would have given the sum of all maximum x values; not very useful! In this case we could have used v m (calc-maskvector) instead. This command deletes all elements of a “data” vector that correspond to zeros in a “mask” vector, leaving us with, in this example, a vector of maximum x values. The built-in a X command maximizes a function using more efficient methods. Just for illustration, let’s use a X to maximize ‘besJ(1,x)’ over this same interval. 2: 1:

besJ(1, x) [0 .. 5] .

’ besJ(1,x), [0..5] RET

[1.84115, 0.581865] .

a X x RET

The output from a X is a vector containing the value of x that maximizes the function, and the function’s value at that maximum. As you can see, our simple search got quite close to the right answer.

2.7.27 List Tutorial Exercise 9 Step one is to convert our integer into vector notation.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

25129925999 .

3: 2: 1:

25129925999 RET 1: 2:

10 RET 12 RET v x 12 RET -

25129925999 [100000000000, ... ] . V M ^

25129925999 10 [11, 10, 9, ..., 1, 0] .

s 1

[0, 2, 25, 251, 2512, ... ] .

V M \

(Recall, the \ command computes an integer quotient.) 1:

[0, 2, 5, 1, 2, 9, 9, 2, 5, 9, 9, 9] . 10 V M %

s 2

Next we must increment this number. This involves adding one to the last digit, plus handling carries. There is a carry to the left out of a digit if that digit is a nine and all the digits to the right of it are nines. 1:

[0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1] .

[1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, ... ] .

9 V M a = 1:

v v

[1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, ... ] .

[0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1] .

V U *

v v 1 |

Accumulating * across a vector of ones and zeros will preserve only the initial run of ones. These are the carries into all digits except the rightmost digit. Concatenating a one on the right takes care of aligning the carries properly, and also adding one to the rightmost digit. 2: 1:

[0, 0, 0, 0, ... ] [0, 0, 2, 5, ... ] . 0 r 2 |

[0, 0, 2, 5, 1, 2, 9, 9, 2, 6, 0, 0, 0] .

V M +

10 V M %

Here we have concatenated 0 to the left of the original number; this takes care of shifting the carries by one with respect to the digits that generated them. Finally, we must convert this list back into an integer. 3: 2: 1:

[0, 0, 2, 5, ... ] 1000000000000 [100000000000, ... ] . 10 RET 12 ^

r 1

2: 1:

[0, 0, 2, 5, ... ] [1000000000000, 100000000000, ... ] .

[0, 0, 20000000000, 5000000000, ... ] . V M *

25129926000 . V R +

Another way to do this final step would be to reduce the formula ‘10 $$ + $’ across the vector of digits.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

[0, 0, 2, 5, ... ] .

25129926000 . V R ’ 10 $$ + $ RET

2.7.28 List Tutorial Exercise 10 For the list [a, b, c, d], the result is ((a = b) = c) = d, which will compare a and b to produce a 1 or 0, which is then compared with c to produce another 1 or 0, which is then compared with d. This is not at all what Joe wanted. Here’s a more correct method: 1:

[7, 7, 7, 8, 7] .

2: 1:

’ [7,7,7,8,7] RET 1:

[7, 7, 7, 8, 7] 7 . RET v r 1 RET

[1, 1, 1, 0, 1] .

V M a =

0 . V R *

2.7.29 List Tutorial Exercise 11 The circle of unit radius consists of those points (x, y) for which x2 + y 2 < 1. We start by generating a vector of x2 and a vector of y 2 . We can make this go a bit faster by using the v . and t . commands. 2: 1:

[2., 2., ..., 2.] [2., 2., ..., 2.] .

v . t . 2: 1:

2: 1:

2. v b 100 RET RET

[2., 2., ..., 2.] [0.026, 0.96, ..., 0.036] . 1 -

[2., 2., ..., 2.] [1.16, 1.98, ..., 0.81] . V M k r

1: 2:

2 V M ^

[0.026, 0.96, ..., 0.036] [0.53, 0.81, ..., 0.094] . TAB

V M k r

1 -

2 V M ^

Now we sum the x and y values, compare with 1 to get a vector of 1/0 truth values, then sum the truth values. 1:

[0.56, 1.78, ..., 0.13] .

[1, 0, ..., 1] .

1 V M a <

84 . V R +

The ratio 84/100 should approximate the ratio π/4. 1:

0.84 . 100 /

3.36 . 4 *

2: 1:

3.36 3.14159 P

1.0695 . /

Our estimate, 3.36, is off by about 7%. We could get a better estimate by taking more points (say, 1000), but it’s clear that this method is not very efficient! (Naturally, since this example uses random numbers your own answer will be slightly different from the one shown here!)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

If you typed v . and t . before, type them again to return to full-sized display of vectors.

2.7.30 List Tutorial Exercise 12 This problem can be made a lot easier by taking advantage of some symmetries. First of all, after some thought it’s clear that the y axis can be ignored altogether. Just pick a random x component for one end of the match, pick a random direction θ, and see if x and x + cos θ (which is the x coordinate of the other endpoint) cross a line. The lines are at integer coordinates, so this happens when the two numbers surround an integer. Since the two endpoints are equivalent, we may as well choose the leftmost of the two endpoints as x. Then theta is an angle pointing to the right, in the range -90 to 90 degrees. (We could use radians, but it would feel like cheating to refer to π/2 radians while trying to estimate π!) In fact, since the field of lines is infinite we can choose the coordinates 0 and 1 for the lines on either side of the leftmost endpoint. The rightmost endpoint will be between 0 and 1 if the match does not cross a line, or between 1 and 2 if it does. So: Pick random x and θ, compute x + cos θ, and count how many of the results are greater than one. Simple! We can make this go a bit faster by using the v . and t . commands. 1:

[0.52, 0.71, ..., 0.72] .

v . t . 1. v b 100 RET

2: 1:

V M k r

[0.52, 0.71, ..., 0.72] [78.4, 64.5, ..., -42.9] . 180. v b 100 RET

V M k r

90 -

(The next step may be slow, depending on the speed of your computer.) 2: 1:

[0.52, 0.71, ..., 0.72] [0.20, 0.43, ..., 0.73] . m d

V M C

[0.72, 1.14, ..., 1.45] .

[0, 1, ..., 1] .

1 V M a >

0.64 .

V R + 100 /

3.125 . 2 TAB /

Let’s try the third method, too. We’ll use random integers up to one million. The k r command with an integer argument picks a random integer. 2: 1:

[1000000, 1000000, ..., 1000000] [1000000, 1000000, ..., 1000000] .

2: 1:

[78489, 527587, ..., 814975] [324014, 358783, ..., 955450] .

1000000 v b 100 RET RET 1:

[1, 1, ..., 25] .

V M k g 1:

10.714 . 6 TAB /

V M k r [1, 1, ..., 0] . 1 V M a =

3.273 . Q

TAB

V M k r

0.56 . V R + 100 /

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

For a proof of this property of the GCD function, see section 4.5.2, exercise 10, of Knuth’s Art of Computer Programming, volume II. If you typed v . and t . before, type them again to return to full-sized display of vectors.

2.7.31 List Tutorial Exercise 13 First, we put the string on the stack as a vector of ASCII codes. 1:

[84, 101, 115, ..., 51] . "Testing, 1, 2, 3 RET

Note that the " key, like $, initiates algebraic entry so there was no need to type an apostrophe. Also, Calc didn’t mind that we omitted the closing ". (The same goes for all closing delimiters like ) and ] at the end of a formula. We’ll show two different approaches here. In the first, we note that if the input vector is [a, b, c, d], then the hash code is 3(3(3a + b) + c) + d = 27a + 9b + 3c + d. In other words, it’s a sum of descending powers of three times the ASCII codes. 2: 1:

[84, 101, 115, ..., 51] 16 .

2: 1:

RET v l 2: 1:

[84, 101, 115, ..., 51] [14348907, ..., 1] .

[84, 101, 115, ..., 51] [15, 14, 13, ..., 0] . v x 16 RET -

3 TAB V M ^

1960915098 .

121 .

511 %

Once again, * elegantly summarizes most of the computation. But there’s an even more elegant approach: Reduce the formula 3 $$ + $ across the vector. Recall that this represents a function of two arguments that computes its first argument times three plus its second argument. 1:

[84, 101, 115, ..., 51] .

"Testing, 1, 2, 3 RET

1960915098 . V R ’ 3$$+$ RET

If you did the decimal arithmetic exercise, this will be familiar. Basically, we’re turning a base-3 vector of digits into an integer, except that our “digits” are much larger than real digits. Instead of typing 511 % again to reduce the result, we can be cleverer still and notice that rather than computing a huge integer and taking the modulo at the end, we can take the modulo at each step without affecting the result. While this means there are more arithmetic operations, the numbers we operate on remain small so the operations are faster. 1:

[84, 101, 115, ..., 51] . "Testing, 1, 2, 3 RET

121 . V R ’ (3$$+$)%511 RET

Why does this work? Think about a two-step computation: 3(3a + b) + c. Taking a result modulo 511 basically means subtracting off enough 511’s to put the result in the desired range. So the result when we take the modulo after every step is,

Chapter 2: Tutorial

3(3a + b − 511m) + c − 511n for some suitable integers m and n. Expanding out by the distributive law yields 9a + 3b + c − 511 × 3m − 511n The m term in the latter formula is redundant because any contribution it makes could just as easily be made by the n term. So we can take it out to get an equivalent formula with n0 = 3m + n, 9a + 3b + c − 511n0 which is just the formula for taking the modulo only at the end of the calculation. Therefore the two methods are essentially the same. Later in the tutorial we will encounter modulo forms, which basically automate the idea of reducing every intermediate result modulo some value m.

2.7.32 List Tutorial Exercise 14 We want to use H V U to nest a function which adds a random step to an (x, y) coordinate. The function is a bit long, but otherwise the problem is quite straightforward. 2: 1:

[0, 0] 50 .

[0,0] 50

[ [ 0, 0 ] [ 0.4288, -0.1695 ] [ -0.4787, -0.9027 ] ... H V U ’ RET

Just as the text recommended, we used ‘< >’ nameless function notation to keep the two random calls from being evaluated before nesting even begins. We now have a vector of [x, y] sub-vectors, which by Calc’s rules acts like a matrix. We can transpose this matrix and unpack to get a pair of vectors, x and y, suitable for graphing. 2: 1:

[ 0, 0.4288, -0.4787, ... ] [ 0, -0.1696, -0.9027, ... ] . v t

v u

g f

Incidentally, because the x and y are completely independent in this case, we could have done two separate commands to create our x and y vectors of numbers directly. To make a random walk of unit steps, we note that sincos of a random direction exactly gives us an [x, y] step of unit length; in fact, the new nesting function is even briefer, though we might want to lower the precision a bit for it. 2: 1:

[0, 0] 50 .

[0,0] 50

m d

[ [ 0, 0 ] [ 0.1318, 0.9912 ] [ -0.5965, 0.3061 ] ... p 6 RET

H V U ’ RET

Another v t v u g f sequence will graph this new random walk. An interesting twist on these random walk functions would be to use complex numbers instead of 2-vectors to represent points on the plane. In the first example, we’d use something like ‘random + random*(0,1)’, and in the second we could use polar complex numbers with random phase angles. (This exercise was first suggested in this form by Randal Schwartz.)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

2.7.33 Types Tutorial Exercise 1 If the number is the square root of π times a rational number, then its square, divided by π, should be a rational number. 1:

1.26508260337 .

0.509433962268 . 2 ^ P /

2486645810:4881193627 . c F

Technically speaking this is a rational number, but not one that is likely to have arisen in the original problem. More likely, it just happens to be the fraction which most closely represents some irrational number to within 12 digits. But perhaps our result was not quite exact. Let’s reduce the precision slightly and try again: 1:

0.509433962268 . U p 10 RET

27:53 . c F

Aha! It’s unlikely that an irrational number would p equal a fraction this simple to within ten digits, so our original number was probably 27π/53. Notice that we didn’t need to re-round the number when we reduced the precision. Remember, arithmetic operations always round their inputs to the current precision before they begin.

2.7.34 Types Tutorial Exercise 2 ‘inf / inf = nan’. Perhaps ‘1’ is the “obvious” answer. But if ‘17 inf = inf’, then ‘17 inf / inf = inf / inf = 17’, too. ‘exp(inf) = inf’. It’s tempting to say that the exponential of infinity must be “bigger” than “regular” infinity, but as far as Calc is concerned all infinities are the same size. In other words, as x goes to infinity, ex also goes to infinity, but the fact the ex grows much faster than x is not relevant here. ‘exp(-inf) = 0’. Here we have a finite answer even though the input is infinite. ‘sqrt(-inf) = (0, 1) inf’. Remember that (0, 1) represents the imaginary number i. Here’s a derivation: ‘sqrt(-inf) = sqrt((-1) * inf) = sqrt(-1) * sqrt(inf)’. The first part is, by definition, i; the second is inf because, once again, all infinities are the same size. ‘sqrt(uinf) = uinf’. In fact, we do know something about the direction because sqrt is defined to return a value in the right half of the complex plane. But Calc has no notation for this, so it settles for the conservative answer uinf. ‘abs(uinf) = inf’. No matter which direction x points, ‘abs(x)’ always points along the positive real axis. ‘ln(0) = -inf’. Here we have an infinite answer to a finite input. As in the 1/0 case, Calc will only use infinities here if you have turned on Infinite mode. Otherwise, it will treat ‘ln(0)’ as an error.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2.7.35 Types Tutorial Exercise 3 We can make ‘inf - inf’ be any real number we like, say, a, just by claiming that we added a to the first infinity but not to the second. This is just as true for complex values of a, so nan can stand for a complex number. (And, similarly, uinf can stand for an infinity that points in any direction in the complex plane, such as ‘(0, 1) inf’). In fact, we can multiply the first inf by two. Surely ‘2 inf - inf = inf’, but also ‘2 inf - inf = inf - inf = nan’. So nan can even stand for infinity. Obviously it’s just as easy to make it stand for minus infinity as for plus infinity. The moral of this story is that “infinity” is a slippery fish indeed, and Calc tries to handle it by having a very simple model for infinities (only the direction counts, not the “size”); but Calc is careful to write nan any time this simple model is unable to tell what the true answer is.

2.7.36 Types Tutorial Exercise 4 2: 1:

0@ 47’ 26" 17 .

0@ 47’ 26" RET 17

0@ 2’ 47.411765" .

The average song length is two minutes and 47.4 seconds. 2: 1:

0@ 2’ 47.411765" 0@ 0’ 20" .

0@ 3’ 7.411765" .

20"

0@ 53’ 6.000005" .

17 *

The album would be 53 minutes and 6 seconds long.

2.7.37 Types Tutorial Exercise 5 Let’s suppose it’s January 14, 1991. The easiest thing to do is to keep trying 13ths of months until Calc reports a Friday. We can do this by manually entering dates, or by using t I: 1:

. ’ RET

DEL

’ RET

. t I

(Calc assumes the current year if you don’t say otherwise.) This is getting tedious—we can keep advancing the date by typing t I over and over again, but let’s automate the job by using vector mapping. The t I command actually takes a second “how-many-months” argument, which defaults to one. This argument is exactly what we want to map over: 2: 1:

[1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6] .

v x 6 RET

[, , , , , ] . V M t I

Et voil`a, September 13, 1991 is a Friday.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

242 .

’ - RET

And the answer to our original question: 242 days to go.

2.7.38 Types Tutorial Exercise 6 The full rule for leap years is that they occur in every year divisible by four, except that they don’t occur in years divisible by 100, except that they do in years divisible by 400. We could work out the answer by carefully counting the years divisible by four and the exceptions, but there is a much simpler way that works even if we don’t know the leap year rule. Let’s assume the present year is 1991. Years have 365 days, except that leap years (whenever they occur) have 366 days. So let’s count the number of days between now and then, and compare that to the number of years times 365. The number of extra days we find must be equal to the number of leap years there were. 1:

2: 1:

’ RET 3: 2: 1:

2925593 10001 1991 .

10001 RET 1991

2: 1:

’ RET 2925593 8010 .

2: 1:

2925593 2923650 .

365 *

2925593 .

1943 .

There will be 1943 leap years before the year 10001. (Assuming, of course, that the algorithm for computing leap years remains unchanged for that long. See Section 4.9 [Date Forms], page 120, for some interesting background information in that regard.)

2.7.39 Types Tutorial Exercise 7 The relative errors must be converted to absolute errors so that ‘+/-’ notation may be used. 1:

1. .

2: 1:

20 RET .05 *

1. 0.2 . 4 RET .05 *

Now we simply chug through the formula. 1:

19.7392088022 . 2 P 2 ^ *

394.78 +/- 19.739 . 20 p 1 *

6316.5 +/- 706.21 . 4 p .2 RET 2 ^ *

It turns out the v u command will unpack an error form as well as a vector. This saves us some retyping of numbers.

Chapter 2: Tutorial

3: 2: 1:

6316.5 +/- 706.21 6316.5 706.21 .

2: 1:

RET v u

6316.5 +/- 706.21 0.1118 .

TAB /

Thus the volume is 6316 cubic centimeters, within about 11 percent.

2.7.40 Types Tutorial Exercise 8 The first answer is pretty simple: ‘1 / (0 .. 10) = (0.1 .. inf)’. Since a number in the interval ‘(0 .. 10)’ can get arbitrarily close to zero, its reciprocal can get arbitrarily large, so the answer is an interval that effectively means, “any number greater than 0.1” but with no upper bound. The second answer, similarly, is ‘1 / (-10 .. 0) = (-inf .. -0.1)’. Calc normally treats division by zero as an error, so that the formula ‘1 / 0’ is left unsimplified. Our third problem, ‘1 / [0 .. 10]’, also (potentially) divides by zero because zero is now a member of the interval. So Calc leaves this one unevaluated, too. If you turn on Infinite mode by pressing m i, you will instead get the answer ‘[0.1 .. inf]’, which includes infinity as a possible value. The fourth calculation, ‘1 / (-10 .. 10)’, has the same problem. Zero is buried inside the interval, but it’s still a possible value. It’s not hard to see that the actual result of ‘1 / (-10 .. 10)’ will be either greater than 0.1, or less than −0.1. Thus the interval goes from minus infinity to plus infinity, with a “hole” in it from −0.1 to 0.1. Calc doesn’t have any way to represent this, so it just reports ‘[-inf .. inf]’ as the answer. It may be disappointing to hear “the answer lies somewhere between minus infinity and plus infinity, inclusive,” but that’s the best that interval arithmetic can do in this case.

2.7.41 Types Tutorial Exercise 9 1:

[-3 .. 3] .

2: 1:

[ 3 n .. 3 ]

[-3 .. 3] [0 .. 9] .

2: 1:

RET 2 ^

[0 .. 9] [-9 .. 9] . TAB RET *

In the first case the result says, “if a number is between −3 and 3, its square is between 0 and 9.” The second case says, “the product of two numbers each between −3 and 3 is between −9 and 9.” An interval form is not a number; it is a symbol that can stand for many different numbers. Two identical-looking interval forms can stand for different numbers. The same issue arises when you try to square an error form.

2.7.42 Types Tutorial Exercise 10 Testing the first number, we might arbitrarily choose 17 for x. 1:

17 mod 811749613 .

17 M 811749613 RET

17 mod 811749613 811749612 . 811749612

533694123 mod 811749613 .

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Since 533694123 is (considerably) different from 1, the number 811749613 must not be prime. It’s awkward to type the number in twice as we did above. There are various ways to avoid this, and algebraic entry is one. In fact, using a vector mapping operation we can perform several tests at once. Let’s use this method to test the second number. 2: 1:

[17, 42, 100000] 15485863 .

[1 mod 15485863, 1 mod ... ] .

[17 42 100000] 15485863 RET

V M ’ ($$ mod $)^($-1) RET

The result is three ones (modulo n), so it’s very probable that 15485863 is prime. (In fact, this number is the millionth prime.) Note that the functions ‘($$^($-1)) mod $’ or ‘$$^($-1) % $’ would have been hopelessly inefficient, since they would have calculated the power using full integer arithmetic. Calc has a k p command that does primality testing. For small numbers it does an exact test; for large numbers it uses a variant of the Fermat test we used here. You can use k p repeatedly to prove that a large integer is prime with any desired probability.

2.7.43 Types Tutorial Exercise 11 There are several ways to insert a calculated number into an HMS form. One way to convert a number of seconds to an HMS form is simply to multiply the number by an HMS form representing one second: 1:

31415926.5359 .

2: 1:

P 1e7 * 2: 1:

31415926.5359 0@ 0’ 1" .

0@ 0’ 1"

8726@ 38’ 46.5359" 15@ 27’ 16" mod 24@ 0’ 0" .

8726@ 38’ 46.5359" .

* 1:

6@ 6’ 2.5359" mod 24@ 0’ 0" .

x time RET

It will be just after six in the morning. The algebraic hms function can also be used to build an HMS form: 1:

hms(0, 0, 10000000. pi) .

’ hms(0, 0, 1e7 pi) RET

8726@ 38’ 46.5359" . =

The = key is necessary to evaluate the symbol ‘pi’ to the actual number 3.14159...

2.7.44 Types Tutorial Exercise 12 As we recall, there are 17 songs of about 2 minutes and 47 seconds each. 2: 1:

0@ 2’ 47" [0@ 0’ 20" .. 0@ 1’ 0"] . [ 0@ 20" .. 0@ 1’ ]

[0@ 3’ 7" .. 0@ 3’ 47"] .

Chapter 2: Tutorial

[0@ 52’ 59." .. 1@ 4’ 19."] . 17 *

No matter how long it is, the album will fit nicely on one CD.

2.7.45 Types Tutorial Exercise 13 Type ’ 1 yr RET u c s RET. The answer is 31557600 seconds.

2.7.46 Types Tutorial Exercise 14 How long will it take for a signal to get from one end of the computer to the other? 1:

m / c .

3.3356 ns .

’ 1 m / c RET

u c ns RET

(Recall, ‘c’ is a “unit” corresponding to the speed of light.) 1: 2:

3.3356 ns 4.1 ns .

0.81356 .

’ 4.1 ns RET

Thus a signal could take up to 81 percent of a clock cycle just to go from one place to another inside the computer, assuming the signal could actually attain the full speed of light. Pretty tight!

2.7.47 Types Tutorial Exercise 15 The speed limit is 55 miles per hour on most highways. We want to find the ratio of Sam’s speed to the US speed limit. 1:

55 mph .

2: 1:

’ 55 mph RET

55 mph 5 yd / hr .

’ 5 yd/hr RET

11 hr mph / yd .

The u s command cancels out these units to get a plain number. Now we take the logarithm base two to find the final answer, assuming that each successive pill doubles his speed. 1:

19360. .

u s

2: 1:

19360. 2 . 2

14.24 .

Thus Sam can take up to 14 pills without a worry.

2.7.48 Algebra Tutorial Exercise 1 The result ‘sqrt(x)^2’ is simplified back to x by the Calculator, but ‘sqrt(x^2)’ is not. (Consider what happens if x = −4.) If x is real, this formula could be simplified to ‘abs(x)’, but for general complex arguments even that is not safe. (See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141, for a way to tell Calc that x is known to be real.)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

2.7.49 Algebra Tutorial Exercise 2 Suppose our roots are [a, b, c]. We want a polynomial which is zero when x is any of these values. The trivial polynomial x − a is zero when x = a, so the product (x − a)(x − b)(x − c) will do the job. We can use a c x to write this in a more familiar form. 1:

34 x - 24 x^3 .

r 2 1:

[1.19023, -1.19023, 0] . a P x RET

[x - 1.19023, x + 1.19023, x] .

x*(x + 1.19023) (x - 1.19023) .

V M ’ x-$ RET 1:

V R *

x^3 - 1.41666 x .

a c x RET

34 x - 24 x^3 . 24 n *

a x

Sure enough, our answer (multiplied by a suitable constant) is the same as the original polynomial.

2.7.50 Algebra Tutorial Exercise 3 1:

x sin(pi x) .

’ x sin(pi x) RET 1: 2:

m r

sin(pi x) / pi^2 - x cos(pi x) / pi . a i x RET

[y, 1] sin(pi x) / pi^2 - x cos(pi x) / pi . ’ [y,1] RET TAB

[sin(pi y) / pi^2 - y cos(pi y) / pi, 1 / pi] . V M $ RET

sin(pi y) / pi^2 - y cos(pi y) / pi - 1 / pi . V R -

sin(3.14159 y) / 9.8696 - y cos(3.14159 y) / 3.14159 - 0.3183 . =

[0., -0.95493, 0.63662, -1.5915, 1.2732] . v x 5 RET

TAB

V M $ RET

Chapter 2: Tutorial

2.7.51 Algebra Tutorial Exercise 4 The hard part is that V R + is no longer sufficient to add up all the contributions from the slices, since the slices have varying coefficients. So first we must come up with a vector of these coefficients. Here’s one way: 2: 1:

-1 [1, 2, ..., 9] .

2: 1:

3 [-1, 1, ..., -1] .

1 n v x 9 RET

V M ^

[4, 2, ..., 4, 1] .

1 |

3 TAB

[4, 2, ..., 4] .

[1, 4, 2, ..., 4, 1] . 1 TAB |

Now we compute the function values. Note that for this method we need eleven values, including both endpoints of the desired interval. 2: 1:

[1, 4, 2, ..., 4, 1] [1, 1.1, 1.2, ... , 1.8, 1.9, 2.] .

11 RET 1 RET .1 RET 2: 1:

C-u v x

[1, 4, 2, ..., 4, 1] [0., 0.084941, 0.16993, ... ] . ’ sin(x) ln(x) RET

m r

p 5 RET

V M $ RET

Once again this calls for V M * V R +; a simple * does the same thing. 1:

11.22 . *

1.122 .

.1 *

0.374 . 3 /

Wow! That’s even better than the result from the Taylor series method.

2.7.52 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 1 We’ll use Big mode to make the formulas more readable.

(2 + sqrt(2)) / (1 + sqrt(2)) .

___ V 2 + 2 --------___ V 2 + 1 .

’ (2+sqrt(2)) / (1+sqrt(2)) RET

d B

Multiplying by the conjugate helps because (a + b)(a − b) = a2 − b2 . 1:

___ ___ (2 + V 2 ) (V 2 - 1) .

a r a/(b+c) := a*(b-c) / (b^2-c^2) RET

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

___ V 2 .

a r a*(b+c) := a*b + a*c

(We could have used a x instead of a rewrite rule for the second step.) The multiply-by-conjugate rule turns out to be useful in many different circ*mstances, such as when the denominator involves sines and cosines or the imaginary constant i.

2.7.53 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 2 Here is the rule set: [ fib(n) := fib(n, 1, 1) :: integer(n) :: n >= 1, fib(1, x, y) := x, fib(n, x, y) := fib(n-1, y, x+y) ]

The first rule turns a one-argument fib that people like to write into a three-argument fib that makes computation easier. The second rule converts back from three-argument form once the computation is done. The third rule does the computation itself. It basically says that if x and y are two consecutive Fibonacci numbers, then y and x + y are the next (overlapping) pair of Fibonacci numbers. Notice that because the number n was “validated” by the conditions on the first rule, there is no need to put conditions on the other rules because the rule set would never get that far unless the input were valid. That further speeds computation, since no extra conditions need to be checked at every step. Actually, a user with a nasty sense of humor could enter a bad three-argument fib call directly, say, ‘fib(0, 1, 1)’, which would get the rules into an infinite loop. One thing that would help keep this from happening by accident would be to use something like ‘ZzFib’ instead of fib as the name of the three-argument function.

2.7.54 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 3 He got an infinite loop. First, Calc did as expected and rewrote ‘2 + 3 x’ to ‘f(2, 3, x)’. Then it looked for ways to apply the rule again, and found that ‘f(2, 3, x)’ looks like ‘a + b x’ with ‘a = 0’ and ‘b = 1’, so it rewrote to ‘f(0, 1, f(2, 3, x))’. It then wrapped another ‘f(0, 1, ...)’ around that, and so on, ad infinitum. Joe should have used M-1 a r to make sure the rule applied only once. (Actually, even the first step didn’t work as he expected. What Calc really gives for M-1 a r in this situation is ‘f(3 x, 1, 2)’, treating 2 as the “variable,” and ‘3 x’ as a constant being added to it. While this may seem odd, it’s just as valid a solution as the “obvious” one. One way to fix this would be to add the condition ‘:: variable(x)’ to the rule, to make sure the thing that matches ‘x’ is indeed a variable, or to change ‘x’ to ‘quote(x)’ on the lefthand side, so that the rule matches the actual variable ‘x’ rather than letting ‘x’ stand for something else.)

2.7.55 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 4 Here is a suitable set of rules to solve the first part of the problem: [ seq(n, c) := seq(n/2, c+1) :: n%2 = 0, seq(n, c) := seq(3n+1, c+1) :: n%2 = 1 :: n > 1 ]

Chapter 2: Tutorial

Given the initial formula ‘seq(6, 0)’, application of these rules produces the following sequence of formulas: seq( 3, 1) seq(10, 2) seq( 5, 3) seq(16, 4) seq( 8, 5) seq( 4, 6) seq( 2, 7) seq( 1, 8) whereupon neither of the rules match, and rewriting stops. We can pretty this up a bit with a couple more rules: [ seq(n) := seq(n, 0), seq(1, c) := c, ... ]

Now, given ‘seq(6)’ as the starting configuration, we get 8 as the result. The change to return a vector is quite simple: [ seq(n) seq(1, seq(n, seq(n,

:= v) v) v)

seq(n, []) :: integer(n) :: n > 0, := v | 1, := seq(n/2, v | n) :: n%2 = 0, := seq(3n+1, v | n) :: n%2 = 1 ]

Given ‘seq(6)’, the result is ‘[6, 3, 10, 5, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1]’. Notice that the n > 1 guard is no longer necessary on the last rule since the n = 1 case is now detected by another rule. But a guard has been added to the initial rule to make sure the initial value is suitable before the computation begins. While still a good idea, this guard is not as vitally important as it was for the fib function, since calling, say, ‘seq(x, [])’ will not get into an infinite loop. Calc will not be able to prove the symbol ‘x’ is either even or odd, so none of the rules will apply and the rewrites will stop right away.

2.7.56 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 5 If x is the sum a + b, then ‘nterms(x)’ must be ‘nterms(a)’ plus ‘nterms(b)’. If x is not a sum, then ‘nterms(x)’ = 1. [ nterms(a + b) := nterms(a) + nterms(b), nterms(x) := 1 ]

Here we have taken advantage of the fact that earlier rules always match before later rules; ‘nterms(x)’ will only be tried if we already know that ‘x’ is not a sum.

2.7.57 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 6 Here is a rule set that will do the job: [ a*(b + c) := a*b + a*c, opt(a) O(x^n) + opt(b) O(x^m) := O(x^n) :: n

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

solution had much simpler steps, it would have required so many steps that it would not have been practical.

2.7.64 Programming Tutorial Exercise 7 The trick here is to compute the harmonic numbers differently, so that the loop counter itself accumulates the sum of reciprocals. We use a separate variable to hold the integer counter. 1:

1 .

2: 1:

1 t 1

1 4 .

1 RET 4

Z ( t 2 r 1 1 + s 1 & Z )

The body of the loop goes as follows: First save the harmonic sum so far in variable 2. Then delete it from the stack; the for loop itself will take care of remembering it for us. Next, recall the count from variable 1, add one to it, and feed its reciprocal to the for loop to use as the step value. The for loop will increase the “loop counter” by that amount and keep going until the loop counter exceeds 4. 2: 1:

31 3.99498713092 .

3: 2: 1:

r 1 r 2

31 3.99498713092 4.02724519544 . RET 31 & +

Thus we find that the 30th harmonic number is 3.99, and the 31st harmonic number is 4.02.

2.7.65 Programming Tutorial Exercise 8 The first step is to compute the derivative f 0 (x) and thus the formula x −

f (x) . f 0 (x)

(Because this definition is long, it will be repeated in concise form below. You can use C-x * m to load it from there. While you are entering a Z ‘ Z ’ body in a macro, Calc simply collects keystrokes without executing them. In the following diagrams we’ll pretend Calc actually executed the keystrokes as you typed them, just for purposes of illustration.) 2: 1:

sin(cos(x)) - 0.5 4.5 .

3: 2: 1:

’ sin(cos(x))-0.5 RET 4.5 2: 1:

m r

4.5 sin(cos(x)) - 0.5 -(sin(x) cos(cos(x))) .

C-x ( Z ‘

TAB RET a d x RET

4.5 x + (sin(cos(x)) - 0.5) / sin(x) cos(cos(x)) . /

’ x RET TAB -

t 1

Now, we enter the loop. We’ll use a repeat loop with a 20-repetition limit just in case the method fails to converge for some reason. (Normally, the Z / command will stop the loop before all 20 repetitions are done.)

Chapter 2: Tutorial

4.5 .

3: 2: 1:

20 Z <

4.5 x + (sin(cos(x)) ... 4.5 .

RET r 1 TAB

2: 1:

4.5 5.24196456928 .

s l x RET

This is the new guess for x. Now we compare it with the old one to see if we’ve converged. 3: 2: 1:

5.24196 5.24196 4.5 .

2: 1:

RET M-TAB

5.24196 0 .

a =

5.24196 .

Z /

5.26345856348 .

Z > Z ’ C-x )

The loop converges in just a few steps to this value. To check the result, we can simply substitute it back into the equation. 2: 1:

5.26345856348 0.499999999997 .

RET ’ sin(cos($)) RET

Let’s test the new definition again: 2: 1:

x^2 - 9 1 .

’ x^2-9 RET 1

3. .

Once again, here’s the full Newton’s Method definition: C-x ( Z ‘

TAB RET a d x RET / ’ x RET TAB 20 Z < RET r 1 TAB s l x RET RET M-TAB a = Z / Z >

t 1

Z ’ C-x ) It turns out that Calc has a built-in command for applying a formula repeatedly until it converges to a number. See Section 9.8.4 [Nesting and Fixed Points], page 237, to see how to use it. Also, of course, a R is a built-in command that uses Newton’s method (among others) to look for numerical solutions to any equation. See Section 10.7.1 [Root Finding], page 271.

2.7.66 Programming Tutorial Exercise 9 The first step is to adjust z to be greater than 5. A simple “for” loop will do the job here. If z is less than 5, we reduce the problem using ψ(z) = ψ(z + 1) − 1/z. on to compute ψ(z + 1), and remember to add back a factor of −1/z when we’re done. This step is repeated until z > 5. (Because this definition is long, it will be repeated in concise form below. You can use C-x * m to load it from there. While you are entering a Z ‘ Z ’ body in a macro, Calc simply collects keystrokes without executing them. In the following diagrams we’ll pretend Calc actually executed the keystrokes as you typed them, just for purposes of illustration.)

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

1. .

1.0 RET

C-x ( Z ‘

s 1

0 t 2

Here, variable 1 holds z and variable 2 holds the adjustment factor. If z < 5, we use a loop to increase it. (By the way, we started with ‘1.0’ instead of the integer 1 because otherwise the calculation below will try to do exact fractional arithmetic, and will never converge because fractions compare equal only if they are exactly equal, not just equal to within the current precision.) 3: 2: 1:

1. 1. 5 .

2: 1:

RET 5

1. 1 .

a <

Z [

6. .

5 Z (

& s + 2

1 s + 1

Now we compute the initial part of the sum: ln z − 2: 1:

1.79175946923 0.0833333333333 . L

r 1 2 * &

2: 1:

1.7084261359 2.28333333333 . -

r 2

1 Z ) r 1

1 2z

Z ]

minus the adjustment factor.

-0.57490719743 .

Now we evaluate the series. We’ll use another “for” loop counting up the value of 2n. (Calc does have a summation command, a +, but we’ll use loops just to get more practice with them.) 3: 2: 1:

-0.5749 2 40 .

2 RET 40

3: 2: 1:

-0.5749 -0.5749 2.3148e-3 .

3: 2: 1:

-0.5749 1:6 2 .

4: 3: 2: 1:

Z ( RET k b TAB

3: 2: 1:

TAB RET M-TAB

-0.5772 -0.5772 -0.5749 .

2: 1:

RET r 1 TAB ^

2: 1:

- RET M-TAB

-0.5749 1:6 2 36. .

-0.5772 0 .

a =

* /

Z /

-0.5749 2.3148e-3 .

-0.577215664892 .

Z )

Z ’ C-x )

This is the value of −γ, with a slight bit of roundoff error. To get a full 12 digits, let’s use a higher precision: 2: 1:

-0.577215664892 1. 1. RET

2: 1:

-0.577215664892 -0.577215664901532 p 16 RET X

Here’s the complete sequence of keystrokes:

Chapter 2: Tutorial

C-x ( Z ‘

s 1 0 t 2 RET 5 a < Z [ 5 Z ( & s + 2 1 s + 1 1 Z ) r 1 L r 1 2 * & - r 2 2 RET 40 Z ( RET k b TAB RET r 1 TAB ^ * / TAB RET M-TAB - RET M-TAB a = Z / 2 Z )

Z ]

Z ’ C-x )

2.7.67 Programming Tutorial Exercise 10 Taking the derivative of a term of the form xn will produce a term like nxn−1 . Taking the derivative of a constant produces zero. From this it is easy to see that the nth derivative of a polynomial, evaluated at x = 0, will equal the coefficient on the xn term times n!. (Because this definition is long, it will be repeated in concise form below. You can use C-x * m to load it from there. While you are entering a Z ‘ Z ’ body in a macro, Calc simply collects keystrokes without executing them. In the following diagrams we’ll pretend Calc actually executed the keystrokes as you typed them, just for purposes of illustration.) 2: 1:

5 x^4 + (x + 1)^2 6 .

3: 2: 1:

’ 5 x^4 + (x+1)^2 RET 6

5 x^4 + (x + 1)^2 0 6 .

C-x ( Z ‘

[ ] t 1

0 TAB

Variable 1 will accumulate the vector of coefficients. 2: 1:

0 5 x^4 + ... .

Z ( TAB

3: 2: 1:

0 5 x^4 + ... 1 .

2: 1:

RET 0 s l x RET

5 x^4 + ... 1 .

M-TAB ! /

s | 1

Note that s | 1 appends the top-of-stack value to the vector in a variable; it is completely analogous to s + 1. We could have written instead, r 1 TAB | t 1. 1:

20 x^3 + 2 x + 2 . a d x RET

0 .

1 Z )

[1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0] . DEL r 1

Z ’ C-x )

To convert back, a simple method is just to map the coefficients against a table of powers of x. 2: 1:

[1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0] 6 .

2: 1:

6 RET 2: 1:

[1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0] [1, x, x^2, x^3, ... ] . ’ x RET TAB V M ^

[1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0] [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6] . 1 + 0 RET 1 C-u v x

1 + 2 x + x^2 + 5 x^4 .

Once again, here are the whole polynomial to/from vector programs:

100

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

C-x ( Z ‘

[ ] t 1 0 TAB Z ( TAB RET 0 s l x RET M-TAB ! / a d x RET 1 Z ) r 1 Z ’

s | 1

C-x ) C-x (

1 + 0 RET 1 C-u v x ’ x RET TAB V M ^ *

C-x )

2.7.68 Programming Tutorial Exercise 11 First we define a dummy program to go on the z s key. The true z s key is supposed to take two numbers from the stack and return one number, so DEL as a dummy definition will make sure the stack comes out right. 2: 1:

4 2 .

4 RET 2

4 .

2: 1:

C-x ( DEL C-x )

Z K s RET

4 2 . 2

The last step replaces the 2 that was eaten during the creation of the dummy z s command. Now we move on to the real definition. The recurrence needs to be rewritten slightly, to the form s(n, m) = s(n − 1, m − 1) − (n − 1)s(n − 1, m). (Because this definition is long, it will be repeated in concise form below. You can use C-x * m to load it from there.) 2: 1:

4 2 .

4: 3: 2: 1:

C-x ( 4: 3: 2: 1:

4 2 4 2 .

3: 2: 1:

M-2 RET

4 2 2 0 .

2: 1:

RET 0

a = Z [

4 2 0 .

2: 1:

4 2 .

a =

4 2 .

Z [

DEL DEL 1

Z :

3 2 .

4: 3: 2: 1:

2: 1:

DEL DEL 0

Z :

TAB 1 - TAB

3 2 3 2 .

M-2 RET

3 2 3 1 . 1 -

3: 2: 1:

3 2 3 .

z s

(Note that the value 3 that our dummy z s produces is not correct; it is merely a placeholder that will do just as well for now.) 3: 2: 1:

3 3 2 .

M-TAB M-TAB

4: 3: 2: 1:

3 3 3 2 .

TAB RET M-TAB

3: 2: 1:

3 3 3 .

z s

2: 1:

3 9 .

-6 .

Chapter 2: Tutorial

101

-6 .

2: 1:

Z ] Z ] C-x )

Z K s RET

4 2 .

DEL 4 RET 2

11 .

z s

2: 1:

11 11 .

M-RET k s

Even though the result that we got during the definition was highly bogus, once the definition is complete the z s command gets the right answers. Here’s the full program once again: C-x ( M-2 RET a = Z [ DEL DEL 1 Z : RET 0 a = Z [ DEL DEL 0 Z : TAB 1 - TAB M-2 RET 1 - z s M-TAB M-TAB TAB RET M-TAB z s * Z ] Z ] C-x ) You can read this definition using C-x * m (read-kbd-macro) followed by Z K s, without having to make a dummy definition first, because read-kbd-macro doesn’t need to execute the definition as it reads it in. For this reason, C-x * m is often the easiest way to create recursive programs in Calc.

2.7.69 Programming Tutorial Exercise 12 This turns out to be a much easier way to solve the problem. Let’s denote Stirling numbers as calls of the function ‘s’. First, we store the rewrite rules corresponding to the definition of Stirling numbers in a convenient variable: s e StirlingRules RET [ s(n,n) := 1 :: n >= 0, s(n,0) := 0 :: n > 0, s(n,m) := s(n-1,m-1) - (n-1) s(n-1,m) :: n >= m :: m >= 1 ] C-c C-c

Now, it’s just a matter of applying the rules: 2: 1:

4 2 . 4 RET 2

s(4, 2) .

C-x (

’ s($$,$) RET

11 .

a r StirlingRules RET

C-x )

As in the case of the fib rules, it would be useful to put these rules in EvalRules and to add a ‘:: remember’ condition to the last rule.

Chapter 3: Introduction

103

3 Introduction This chapter is the beginning of the Calc reference manual. It covers basic concepts such as the stack, algebraic and numeric entry, undo, numeric prefix arguments, etc.

3.1 Basic Commands To start the Calculator in its standard interface, type M-x calc. By default this creates a pair of small windows, *Calculator* and *Calc Trail*. The former displays the contents of the Calculator stack and is manipulated exclusively through Calc commands. It is possible (though not usually necessary) to create several Calc mode buffers each of which has an independent stack, undo list, and mode settings. There is exactly one Calc Trail buffer; it records a list of the results of all calculations that have been done. The Calc Trail buffer uses a variant of Calc mode, so Calculator commands still work when the trail buffer’s window is selected. It is possible to turn the trail window off, but the *Calc Trail* buffer itself still exists and is updated silently. See Section 5.3 [Trail Commands], page 133. In most installations, the C-x * c key sequence is a more convenient way to start the Calculator. Also, C-x * * is a synonym for C-x * c unless you last used Calc in its Keypad mode. Most Calc commands use one or two keystrokes. Lower- and upper-case letters are distinct. Commands may also be entered in full M-x form; for some commands this is the only form. As a convenience, the x key (calc-execute-extended-command) is like M-x except that it enters the initial string ‘calc-’ for you. For example, the following key sequences are equivalent: S, M-x calc-sin RET, x sin RET. Although Calc is designed to be used from the keyboard, some of Calc’s more common commands are available from a menu. In the menu, the arguments to the functions are given by referring to their stack level numbers. The Calculator exists in many parts. When you type C-x * c, the Emacs “auto-load” mechanism will bring in only the first part, which contains the basic arithmetic functions. The other parts will be auto-loaded the first time you use the more advanced commands like trig functions or matrix operations. This is done to improve the response time of the Calculator in the common case when all you need to do is a little arithmetic. If for some reason the Calculator fails to load an extension module automatically, you can force it to load all the extensions by using the C-x * L (calc-load-everything) command. See Chapter 6 [Mode Settings], page 135. If you type M-x calc or C-x * c with any numeric prefix argument, the Calculator is loaded if necessary, but it is not actually started. If the argument is positive, the calc-ext extensions are also loaded if necessary. User-written Lisp code that wishes to make use of Calc’s arithmetic routines can use ‘(calc 0)’ or ‘(calc 1)’ to auto-load the Calculator. If you type C-x * b, then next time you use C-x * c you will get a Calculator that uses the full height of the Emacs screen. When full-screen mode is on, C-x * c runs the full-calc command instead of calc. From the Unix shell you can type ‘emacs -f full-calc’ to start a new Emacs specifically for use as a calculator. When Calc is started from the Emacs command line like this, Calc’s normal “quit” commands actually quit Emacs itself. The C-x * o command is like C-x * c except that the Calc window is not actually selected. If you are already in the Calc window, C-x * o switches you out of it. (The regular

104

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Emacs C-x o command would also work for this, but it has a tendency to drop you into the Calc Trail window instead, which C-x * o takes care not to do.) For one quick calculation, you can type C-x * q (quick-calc) which prompts you for a formula (like ‘2+3/4’). The result is displayed at the bottom of the Emacs screen without ever creating any special Calculator windows. See Section 3.6 [Quick Calculator], page 108. Finally, if you are using the X window system you may want to try C-x * k (calc-keypad) which runs Calc with a “calculator keypad” picture as well as a stack display. Click on the keys with the mouse to operate the calculator. See Chapter 15 [Keypad Mode], page 343. The q key (calc-quit) exits Calc mode and closes the Calculator’s window(s). It does not delete the Calculator buffers. If you type M-x calc again, the Calculator will reappear with the contents of the stack intact. Typing C-x * c or C-x * * again from inside the Calculator buffer is equivalent to executing calc-quit; you can think of C-x * * as toggling the Calculator on and off. The C-x * x command also turns the Calculator off, no matter which user interface (standard, Keypad, or Embedded) is currently active. It also cancels calc-edit mode if used from there. The d SPC key sequence (calc-refresh) redraws the contents of the Calculator buffer from memory. Use this if the contents of the buffer have been damaged somehow. The o key (calc-realign) moves the cursor back to its “home” position at the bottom of the Calculator buffer. The < and > keys are bound to calc-scroll-left and calc-scroll-right. These are just like the normal horizontal scrolling commands except that they scroll one half-screen at a time by default. (Calc formats its output to fit within the bounds of the window whenever it can.) The { and } keys are bound to calc-scroll-down and calc-scroll-up. They scroll up or down by one-half the height of the Calc window. The C-x * 0 command (calc-reset; that’s C-x * followed by a zero) resets the Calculator to its initial state. This clears the stack, resets all the modes to their initial values (the values that were saved with m m (calc-save-modes)), clears the caches (see Section 3.11.3 [Caches], page 112), and so on. (It does not erase the values of any variables.) With an argument of 0, Calc will be reset to its default state; namely, the modes will be given their default values. With a positive prefix argument, C-x * 0 preserves the contents of the stack but resets everything else to its initial state; with a negative prefix argument, C-x * 0 preserves the contents of the stack but resets everything else to its default state.

3.2 Help Commands The ? key (calc-help) displays a series of brief help messages. Some keys (such as b and d) are prefix keys, like Emacs’s ESC and C-x prefixes. You can type ? after a prefix to see a list of commands beginning with that prefix. (If the message includes ‘[MORE]’, press ? again to see additional commands for that prefix.) The h h (calc-full-help) command displays all the ? responses at once. When printed, this makes a nice, compact (three pages) summary of Calc keystrokes.

Chapter 3: Introduction

105

In general, the h key prefix introduces various commands that provide help within Calc. Many of the h key functions are Calc-specific analogues to the C-h functions for Emacs help. The h i (calc-info) command runs the Emacs Info system to read this manual on-line. This is basically the same as typing C-h i (the regular way to run the Info system), then, if Info is not already in the Calc manual, selecting the beginning of the manual. The C-x * i command is another way to read the Calc manual; it is different from h i in that it works any time, not just inside Calc. The plain i key is also equivalent to h i, though this key is obsolete and may be replaced with a different command in a future version of Calc. The h t (calc-tutorial) command runs the Info system on the Tutorial section of the Calc manual. It is like h i, except that it selects the starting node of the tutorial rather than the beginning of the whole manual. (It actually selects the node “Interactive Tutorial” which tells a few things about using the Info system before going on to the actual tutorial.) The C-x * t key is equivalent to h t (but it works at all times). The h s (calc-info-summary) command runs the Info system on the Summary node of the Calc manual. See Appendix E [Summary], page 443. The C-x * s key is equivalent to h s. The h k (calc-describe-key) command looks up a key sequence in the Calc manual. For example, h k H a S looks up the documentation on the H a S (calc-solve-for) command. This works by looking up the textual description of the key(s) in the Key Index of the manual, then jumping to the node indicated by the index. Most Calc commands do not have traditional Emacs documentation strings, since the h k command is both more convenient and more instructive. This means the regular Emacs C-h k (describe-key) command will not be useful for Calc keystrokes. The h c (calc-describe-key-briefly) command reads a key sequence and displays a brief one-line description of it at the bottom of the screen. It looks for the key sequence in the Summary node of the Calc manual; if it doesn’t find the sequence there, it acts just like its regular Emacs counterpart C-h c (describe-key-briefly). For example, h c H a S gives the description: H a S runs calc-solve-for:

a ‘H a S’ v

=> fsolve(a,v)

(?=notes)

which means the command H a S or H M-x calc-solve-for takes a value a from the stack, prompts for a value v, then applies the algebraic function fsolve to these values. The ‘?=notes’ message means you can now type ? to see additional notes from the summary that apply to this command. The h f (calc-describe-function) command looks up an algebraic function or a command name in the Calc manual. Enter an algebraic function name to look up that function in the Function Index or enter a command name beginning with ‘calc-’ to look it up in the Command Index. This command will also look up operator symbols that can appear in algebraic formulas, like ‘%’ and ‘=>’. The h v (calc-describe-variable) command looks up a variable in the Calc manual. Enter a variable name like pi or PlotRejects. The h b (calc-describe-bindings) command is just like C-h b, except that only local (Calc-related) key bindings are listed. The h n or h C-n (calc-view-news) command displays the “news” or change history of Emacs, and jumps to the most recent portion concerning Calc (if present). For older history, see the file etc/CALC-NEWS in the Emacs distribution.

106

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The h C-c, h C-d, and h C-w keys display copying, distribution, and warranty information about Calc. These work by pulling up the appropriate parts of the “Copying” or “Reporting Bugs” sections of the manual.

3.3 Stack Basics Calc uses RPN notation. If you are not familiar with RPN, see Section 2.1.1 [RPN Tutorial], page 15. To add the numbers 1 and 2 in Calc you would type the keys: 1 RET 2 +. (RET corresponds to the ENTER key on most calculators.) The first three keystrokes “push” the numbers 1 and 2 onto the stack. The + key always “pops” the top two numbers from the stack, adds them, and pushes the result (3) back onto the stack. This number is ready for further calculations: 5 - pushes 5 onto the stack, then pops the 3 and 5, subtracts them, and pushes the result (−2). Note that the “top” of the stack actually appears at the bottom of the buffer. A line containing a single ‘.’ character signifies the end of the buffer; Calculator commands operate on the number(s) directly above this line. The d t (calc-truncate-stack) command allows you to move the ‘.’ marker up and down in the stack; see Section 6.7.8 [Truncating the Stack], page 155. Stack elements are numbered consecutively, with number 1 being the top of the stack. These line numbers are ordinarily displayed on the lefthand side of the window. The d l (calc-line-numbering) command controls whether these numbers appear. (Line numbers may be turned off since they slow the Calculator down a bit and also clutter the display.) The unshifted letter o (calc-realign) command repositions the cursor to its top-ofstack “home” position. It also undoes any horizontal scrolling in the window. If you give it a numeric prefix argument, it instead moves the cursor to the specified stack element. The RET (or equivalent SPC) key is only required to separate two consecutive numbers. (After all, if you typed 1 2 by themselves the Calculator would enter the number 12.) If you press RET or SPC not right after typing a number, the key duplicates the number on the top of the stack. RET * is thus a handy way to square a number. The DEL key pops and throws away the top number on the stack. The TAB key swaps the top two objects on the stack. See Chapter 5 [Stack and Trail], page 131, for descriptions of these and other stack-related commands.

3.4 Numeric Entry Pressing a digit or other numeric key begins numeric entry using the minibuffer. The number is pushed on the stack when you press the RET or SPC keys. If you press any other non-numeric key, the number is pushed onto the stack and the appropriate operation is performed. If you press a numeric key which is not valid, the key is ignored. There are three different concepts corresponding to the word “minus,” typified by a − b (subtraction), −x (change-sign), and −5 (negative number). Calc uses three different keys for these operations, respectively: -, n, and _ (the underscore). The - key subtracts the two numbers on the top of the stack. The n key changes the sign of the number on the top of the stack or the number currently being entered. The _ key begins entry of a negative

Chapter 3: Introduction

107

number or changes the sign of the number currently being entered. The following sequences all enter the number −5 onto the stack: 0 RET 5 -, 5 n RET, 5 RET n, _ 5 RET, 5 _ RET. Some other keys are active during numeric entry, such as # for non-decimal numbers, : for fractions, and @ for HMS forms. These notations are described later in this manual with the corresponding data types. See Chapter 4 [Data Types], page 115. During numeric entry, the only editing key available is DEL.

3.5 Algebraic Entry The ’ (calc-algebraic-entry) command can be used to enter calculations in algebraic form. This is accomplished by typing the apostrophe key, ’, followed by the expression in standard format: ’ 2+3*4 RET. This will compute 2 + (3 × 4) = 14 and push it on the stack. If you wish you can ignore the RPN aspect of Calc altogether and simply enter algebraic expressions in this way. You may want to use DEL every so often to clear previous results off the stack. You can press the apostrophe key during normal numeric entry to switch the half-entered number into Algebraic entry mode. One reason to do this would be to fix a typo, as the full Emacs cursor motion and editing keys are available during algebraic entry but not during numeric entry. In the same vein, during either numeric or algebraic entry you can press ‘ (backquote) to switch to calc-edit mode, where you complete your half-finished entry in a separate buffer. See Section 5.2 [Editing Stack Entries], page 132. If you prefer algebraic entry, you can use the command m a (calc-algebraic-mode) to set Algebraic mode. In this mode, digits and other keys that would normally start numeric entry instead start full algebraic entry; as long as your formula begins with a digit you can omit the apostrophe. Open parentheses and square brackets also begin algebraic entry. You can still do RPN calculations in this mode, but you will have to press RET to terminate every number: 2 RET 3 RET * 4 RET + would accomplish the same thing as 2*3+4 RET. If you give a numeric prefix argument like C-u to the m a command, it enables Incomplete Algebraic mode; this is like regular Algebraic mode except that it applies to the ( and [ keys only. Numeric keys still begin a numeric entry in this mode. The m t (calc-total-algebraic-mode) gives you an even stronger algebraic-entry mode, in which all regular letter and punctuation keys begin algebraic entry. Use this if you prefer typing sqrt( ) instead of Q, factor( ) instead of a f, and so on. To type regular Calc commands when you are in Total Algebraic mode, hold down the META key. Thus M-q is the command to quit Calc, M-p sets the precision, and M-m t (or M-m M-t, if you prefer) turns Total Algebraic mode back off again. Meta keys also terminate algebraic entry, so that 2+3 M-S is equivalent to 2+3 RET M-S. The symbol ‘Alg*’ will appear in the mode line whenever you are in this mode. Pressing ’ (the apostrophe) a second time re-enters the previous algebraic formula. You can then use the normal Emacs editing keys to modify this formula to your liking before pressing RET. Within a formula entered from the keyboard, the symbol $ represents the number on the top of the stack. If an entered formula contains any $ characters, the Calculator replaces

108

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

the top of stack with that formula rather than simply pushing the formula onto the stack. Thus, ’ 1+2 RET pushes 3 on the stack, and $*2 RET replaces it with 6. Note that the $ key always initiates algebraic entry; the ’ is unnecessary if $ is the first character in the new formula. Higher stack elements can be accessed from an entered formula with the symbols $$, $$$, and so on. The number of stack elements removed (to be replaced by the entered values) equals the number of dollar signs in the longest such symbol in the formula. For example, ‘$$+$$$’ adds the second and third stack elements, replacing the top three elements with the answer. (All information about the top stack element is thus lost since no single ‘$’ appears in this formula.) A slightly different way to refer to stack elements is with a dollar sign followed by a number: ‘$1’, ‘$2’, and so on are much like ‘$’, ‘$$’, etc., except that stack entries referred to numerically are not replaced by the algebraic entry. That is, while ‘$+1’ replaces 5 on the stack with 6, ‘$1+1’ leaves the 5 on the stack and pushes an additional 6. If a sequence of formulas are entered separated by commas, each formula is pushed onto the stack in turn. For example, ‘1,2,3’ pushes those three numbers onto the stack (leaving the 3 at the top), and ‘$+1,$-1’ replaces a 5 on the stack with 4 followed by 6. Also, ‘$,$$’ exchanges the top two elements of the stack, just like the TAB key. You can finish an algebraic entry with M-= or M-RET instead of RET. This uses = to evaluate the variables in each formula that goes onto the stack. (Thus ’ pi RET pushes the variable ‘pi’, but ’ pi M-RET pushes 3.1415.) If you finish your algebraic entry by pressing LFD (or C-j) instead of RET, Calc disables simplification (as if by m O; see Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140) while the entry is being pushed on the stack. Thus ’ 1+2 RET pushes 3 on the stack, but ’ 1+2 LFD pushes the formula 1 + 2; you might then press = when it is time to evaluate this formula.

3.6 “Quick Calculator” Mode There is another way to invoke the Calculator if all you need to do is make one or two quick calculations. Type C-x * q (or M-x quick-calc), then type any formula as an algebraic entry. The Calculator will compute the result and display it in the echo area, without ever actually putting up a Calc window. You can use the $ character in a Quick Calculator formula to refer to the previous Quick Calculator result. Older results are not retained; the Quick Calculator has no effect on the full Calculator’s stack or trail. If you compute a result and then forget what it was, just run C-x * q again and enter ‘$’ as the formula. If this is the first time you have used the Calculator in this Emacs session, the C-x * q command will create the *Calculator* buffer and perform all the usual initializations; it simply will refrain from putting that buffer up in a new window. The Quick Calculator refers to the *Calculator* buffer for all mode settings. Thus, for example, to set the precision that the Quick Calculator uses, simply run the full Calculator momentarily and use the regular p command. If you use C-x * q from inside the Calculator buffer, the effect is the same as pressing the apostrophe key (algebraic entry). The result of a Quick calculation is placed in the Emacs “kill ring” as well as being displayed. A subsequent C-y command will yank the result into the editing buffer. You can

Chapter 3: Introduction

109

also use this to yank the result into the next C-x * q input line as a more explicit alternative to $ notation, or to yank the result into the Calculator stack after typing C-x * c. If you finish your formula by typing LFD (or C-j) instead of RET, the result is inserted immediately into the current buffer rather than going into the kill ring. Quick Calculator results are actually evaluated as if by the = key (which replaces variable names by their stored values, if any). If the formula you enter is an assignment to a variable using the ‘:=’ operator, say, ‘foo := 2 + 3’ or ‘foo := foo + 1’, then the result of the evaluation is stored in that Calc variable. See Chapter 12 [Store and Recall], page 321. If the result is an integer and the current display radix is decimal, the number will also be displayed in hex, octal and binary formats. If the integer is in the range from 1 to 126, it will also be displayed as an ASCII character. For example, the quoted character ‘"x"’ produces the vector result ‘[120]’ (because 120 is the ASCII code of the lower-case ‘x’; see Section 4.7 [Strings], page 118). Since this is a vector, not an integer, it is displayed only according to the current mode settings. But running Quick Calc again and entering ‘120’ will produce the result ‘120 (16#78, 8#170, x)’ which shows the number in its decimal, hexadecimal, octal, and ASCII forms. Please note that the Quick Calculator is not any faster at loading or computing the answer than the full Calculator; the name “quick” merely refers to the fact that it’s much less hassle to use for small calculations.

3.7 Numeric Prefix Arguments Many Calculator commands use numeric prefix arguments. Some, such as d s (calc-scinotation), set a parameter to the value of the prefix argument or use a default if you don’t use a prefix. Others (like d f (calc-fix-notation)) require an argument and prompt for a number if you don’t give one as a prefix. As a rule, stack-manipulation commands accept a numeric prefix argument which is interpreted as an index into the stack. A positive argument operates on the top n stack entries; a negative argument operates on the nth stack entry in isolation; and a zero argument operates on the entire stack. Most commands that perform computations (such as the arithmetic and scientific functions) accept a numeric prefix argument that allows the operation to be applied across many stack elements. For unary operations (that is, functions of one argument like absolute value or complex conjugate), a positive prefix argument applies that function to the top n stack entries simultaneously, and a negative argument applies it to the nth stack entry only. For binary operations (functions of two arguments like addition, GCD, and vector concatenation), a positive prefix argument “reduces” the function across the top n stack elements (for example, C-u 5 + sums the top 5 stack entries; see Section 9.8 [Reducing and Mapping], page 233), and a negative argument maps the next-to-top n stack elements with the top stack element as a second argument (for example, 7 c-u -5 + adds 7 to the top 5 stack elements). This feature is not available for operations which use the numeric prefix argument for some other purpose. Numeric prefixes are specified the same way as always in Emacs: Press a sequence of META-digits, or press ESC followed by digits, or press C-u followed by digits. Some commands treat plain C-u (without any actual digits) specially.

110

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

You can type ~ (calc-num-prefix) to pop an integer from the top of the stack and enter it as the numeric prefix for the next command. For example, C-u 16 p sets the precision to 16 digits; an alternate (silly) way to do this would be 2 RET 4 ^ ~ p, i.e., compute 2 to the fourth power and set the precision to that value. Conversely, if you have typed a numeric prefix argument the ~ key pushes it onto the stack in the form of an integer.

3.8 Undoing Mistakes The shift-U key (calc-undo) undoes the most recent operation. If that operation added or dropped objects from the stack, those objects are removed or restored. If it was a “store” operation, you are queried whether or not to restore the variable to its original value. The U key may be pressed any number of times to undo successively farther back in time; with a numeric prefix argument it undoes a specified number of operations. When the Calculator is quit, as with the q (calc-quit) command, the undo history will be truncated to the length of the customizable variable calc-undo-length (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433), which by default is 100. (Recall that C-x * c is synonymous with calc-quit while inside the Calculator; this also truncates the undo history.) Currently the mode-setting commands (like calc-precision) are not undoable. You can undo past a point where you changed a mode, but you will need to reset the mode yourself. The shift-D key (calc-redo) redoes an operation that was mistakenly undone. Pressing U with a negative prefix argument is equivalent to executing calc-redo. You can redo any number of times, up to the number of recent consecutive undo commands. Redo information is cleared whenever you give any command that adds new undo information, i.e., if you undo, then enter a number on the stack or make any other change, then it will be too late to redo. The M-RET key (calc-last-args) is like undo in that it restores the arguments of the most recent command onto the stack; however, it does not remove the result of that command. Given a numeric prefix argument, this command applies to the nth most recent command which removed items from the stack; it pushes those items back onto the stack. The K (calc-keep-args) command provides a related function to M-RET. See Chapter 5 [Stack and Trail], page 131. It is also possible to recall previous results or inputs using the trail. See Section 5.3 [Trail Commands], page 133. The standard Emacs C-_ undo key is recognized as a synonym for U.

3.9 Error Messages Many situations that would produce an error message in other calculators simply create unsimplified formulas in the Emacs Calculator. For example, 1 RET 0 / pushes the formula 1/0; 0 L pushes the formula ‘ln(0)’. Floating-point overflow and underflow are also reasons for this to happen. When a function call must be left in symbolic form, Calc usually produces a message explaining why. Messages that are probably surprising or indicative of user errors are displayed automatically. Other messages are simply kept in Calc’s memory and are displayed

Chapter 3: Introduction

111

only if you type w (calc-why). You can also press w if the same computation results in several messages. (The first message will end with ‘[w=more]’ in this case.) The d w (calc-auto-why) command controls when error messages are displayed automatically. (Calc effectively presses w for you after your computation finishes.) By default, this occurs only for “important” messages. The other possible modes are to report all messages automatically, or to report none automatically (so that you must always press w yourself to see the messages).

3.10 Multiple Calculators It is possible to have any number of Calc mode buffers at once. Usually this is done by executing M-x another-calc, which is similar to C-x * c except that if a *Calculator* buffer already exists, a new, independent one with a name of the form *Calculator* is created. You can also use the command calc-mode to put any buffer into Calculator mode, but this would ordinarily never be done. The q (calc-quit) command does not destroy a Calculator buffer; it only closes its window. Use M-x kill-buffer to destroy a Calculator buffer. Each Calculator buffer keeps its own stack, undo list, and mode settings such as precision, angular mode, and display formats. In Emacs terms, variables such as calc-stack are buffer-local variables. The global default values of these variables are used only when a new Calculator buffer is created. The calc-quit command saves the stack and mode settings of the buffer being quit as the new defaults. There is only one trail buffer, *Calc Trail*, used by all Calculator buffers.

3.11 Troubleshooting Commands This section describes commands you can use in case a computation incorrectly fails or gives the wrong answer. See Appendix D [Reporting Bugs], page 441, if you find a problem that appears to be due to a bug or deficiency in Calc.

3.11.1 Autoloading Problems The Calc program is split into many component files; components are loaded automatically as you use various commands that require them. Occasionally Calc may lose track of when a certain component is necessary; typically this means you will type a command and it won’t work because some function you’ve never heard of was undefined. If this happens, the easiest workaround is to type C-x * L (calc-load-everything) to force all the parts of Calc to be loaded right away. This will cause Emacs to take up a lot more memory than it would otherwise, but it’s guaranteed to fix the problem.

3.11.2 Recursion Depth Calc uses recursion in many of its calculations. Emacs Lisp keeps a variable max-lispeval-depth which limits the amount of recursion possible in an attempt to recover from program bugs. If a calculation ever halts incorrectly with the message “Computation got stuck or ran too long,” use the M command (calc-more-recursion-depth) to increase this

112

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

limit. (Of course, this will not help if the calculation really did get stuck due to some problem inside Calc.) The limit is always increased (multiplied) by a factor of two. There is also an I M (calc-less-recursion-depth) command which decreases this limit by a factor of two, down to a minimum value of 200. The default value is 1000. These commands also double or halve max-specpdl-size, another internal Lisp recursion limit. The minimum value for this limit is 600.

3.11.3 Caches Calc saves certain values after they have been computed once. For example, the P (calc-pi) command initially “knows” the constant π to about 20 decimal places; if the current precision is greater than this, it will recompute π using a series approximation. This value will not need to be recomputed ever again unless you raise the precision still further. Many operations such as logarithms and sines make use of similarly cached values such as π/4 and ln 2. The visible effect of caching is that high-precision computations may seem to do extra work the first time. Other things cached include powers of two (for the binary arithmetic functions), matrix inverses and determinants, symbolic integrals, and data points computed by the graphing commands. If you suspect a Calculator cache has become corrupt, you can use the calc-flushcaches command to reset all caches to the empty state. (This should only be necessary in the event of bugs in the Calculator.) The C-x * 0 (with the zero key) command also resets caches along with all other aspects of the Calculator’s state.

3.11.4 Debugging Calc A few commands exist to help in the debugging of Calc commands. See Chapter 17 [Programming], page 361, to see the various ways that you can write your own Calc commands. The Z T (calc-timing) command turns on and off a mode in which the timing of slow commands is reported in the Trail. Any Calc command that takes two seconds or longer writes a line to the Trail showing how many seconds it took. This value is accurate only to within one second. All steps of executing a command are included; in particular, time taken to format the result for display in the stack and trail is counted. Some prompts also count time taken waiting for them to be answered, while others do not; this depends on the exact implementation of the command. For best results, if you are timing a sequence that includes prompts or multiple commands, define a keyboard macro to run the whole sequence at once. Calc’s X command (see Section 17.2 [Keyboard Macros], page 362) will then report the time taken to execute the whole macro. Another advantage of the X command is that while it is executing, the stack and trail are not updated from step to step. So if you expect the output of your test sequence to leave a result that may take a long time to format and you don’t wish to count this formatting time, end your sequence with a DEL keystroke to clear the result from the stack. When you run the sequence with X, Calc will never bother to format the large result. Another thing Z T does is to increase the Emacs variable gc-cons-threshold to a much higher value (two million; the usual default in Calc is 250,000) for the duration of each command. This generally prevents garbage collection during the timing of the command,

Chapter 3: Introduction

113

though it may cause your Emacs process to grow abnormally large. (Garbage collection time is a major unpredictable factor in the timing of Emacs operations.) Another command that is useful when debugging your own Lisp extensions to Calc is M-x calc-pass-errors, which disables the error handler that changes the “max-lispeval-depth exceeded” message to the much more friendly “Computation got stuck or ran too long.” This handler interferes with the Emacs Lisp debugger’s debug-on-error mode. Errors are reported in the handler itself rather than at the true location of the error. After you have executed calc-pass-errors, Lisp errors will be reported correctly but the userfriendly message will be lost.

Chapter 4: Data Types

115

4 Data Types This chapter discusses the various types of objects that can be placed on the Calculator stack, how they are displayed, and how they are entered. (See Section 17.5.7.1 [Data Type Formats], page 383, for information on how these data types are represented as underlying Lisp objects.) Integers, fractions, and floats are various ways of describing real numbers. HMS forms also for many purposes act as real numbers. These types can be combined to form complex numbers, modulo forms, error forms, or interval forms. (But these last four types cannot be combined arbitrarily: error forms may not contain modulo forms, for example.) Finally, all these types of numbers may be combined into vectors, matrices, or algebraic formulas.

4.1 Integers The Calculator stores integers to arbitrary precision. Addition, subtraction, and multiplication of integers always yields an exact integer result. (If the result of a division or exponentiation of integers is not an integer, it is expressed in fractional or floating-point form according to the current Fraction mode. See Section 6.4.3 [Fraction Mode], page 138.) A decimal integer is represented as an optional sign followed by a sequence of digits. Grouping (see Section 6.7.2 [Grouping Digits], page 147) can be used to insert a comma at every third digit for display purposes, but you must not type commas during the entry of numbers. A non-decimal integer is represented as an optional sign, a radix between 2 and 36, a ‘#’ symbol, and one or more digits. For radix 11 and above, the letters A through Z (upperor lower-case) count as digits and do not terminate numeric entry mode. See Section 6.7.1 [Radix Modes], page 146, for how to set the default radix for display of integers. Numbers of any radix may be entered at any time. If you press # at the beginning of a number, the current display radix is used.

4.2 Fractions A fraction is a ratio of two integers. Fractions are traditionally written “2/3” but Calc uses the notation ‘2:3’. (The / key performs RPN division; the following two sequences push the number ‘2:3’ on the stack: 2 : 3 RET, or 2 RET 3 / assuming Fraction mode has been enabled.) When the Calculator produces a fractional result it always reduces it to simplest form, which may in fact be an integer. Fractions may also be entered in a three-part form, where ‘2:3:4’ represents two-andthree-quarters. See Section 6.7.5 [Fraction Formats], page 149, for fraction display formats. Non-decimal fractions are entered and displayed as ‘radix#num:denom’ (or in the analogous three-part form). The numerator and denominator always use the same radix.

4.3 Floats A floating-point number or float is a number stored in scientific notation. The number of significant digits in the fractional part is governed by the current floating precision (see Section 6.2 [Precision], page 136). The range of acceptable values is from 10−3999999 (inclusive) to 104000000 (exclusive), plus the corresponding negative values and zero.

116

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Calculations that would exceed the allowable range of values (such as ‘exp(exp(20))’) are left in symbolic form by Calc. The messages “floating-point overflow” or “floating-point underflow” indicate that during the calculation a number would have been produced that was too large or too close to zero, respectively, to be represented by Calc. This does not necessarily mean the final result would have overflowed, just that an overflow occurred while computing the result. (In fact, it could report an underflow even though the final result would have overflowed!) If a rational number and a float are mixed in a calculation, the result will in general be expressed as a float. Commands that require an integer value (such as k g [gcd]) will also accept integer-valued floats, i.e., floating-point numbers with nothing after the decimal point. Floats are identified by the presence of a decimal point and/or an exponent. In general a float consists of an optional sign, digits including an optional decimal point, and an optional exponent consisting of an ‘e’, an optional sign, and up to seven exponent digits. For example, ‘23.5e-2’ is 23.5 times ten to the minus-second power, or 0.235. Floating-point numbers are normally displayed in decimal notation with all significant figures shown. Exceedingly large or small numbers are displayed in scientific notation. Various other display options are available. See Section 6.7.3 [Float Formats], page 148. Floating-point numbers are stored in decimal, not binary. The result of each operation is rounded to the nearest value representable in the number of significant digits specified by the current precision, rounding away from zero in the case of a tie. Thus (in the default display mode) what you see is exactly what you get. Some operations such as square roots and transcendental functions are performed with several digits of extra precision and then rounded down, in an effort to make the final result accurate to the full requested precision. However, accuracy is not rigorously guaranteed. If you suspect the validity of a result, try doing the same calculation in a higher precision. The Calculator’s arithmetic is not intended to be IEEE-conformant in any way. While floats are always stored in decimal, they can be entered and displayed in any radix just like integers and fractions. Since a float that is entered in a radix other that 10 will be converted to decimal, the number that Calc stores may not be exactly the number that was entered, it will be the closest decimal approximation given the current precision. The notation ‘radix#ddd.ddd’ is a floating-point number whose digits are in the specified radix. Note that the ‘.’ is more aptly referred to as a “radix point” than as a decimal point in this case. The number ‘8#123.4567’ is defined as ‘8#1234567 * 8^-4’. If the radix is 14 or less, you can use ‘e’ notation to write a non-decimal number in scientific notation. The exponent is written in decimal, and is considered to be a power of the radix: ‘8#1234567e-4’. If the radix is 15 or above, the letter ‘e’ is a digit, so scientific notation must be written out, e.g., ‘16#123.4567*16^2’. The first two exercises of the Modes Tutorial explore some of the properties of non-decimal floats.

4.4 Complex Numbers There are two supported formats for complex numbers: rectangular and polar. The default format is rectangular, displayed in the form ‘(real,imag)’ where real is the real part and imag is the imaginary part, each of which may be any real number. Rectangular complex

Chapter 4: Data Types

117

numbers can also be displayed in ‘a+bi’ notation; see Section 6.7.4 [Complex Formats], page 148. Polar complex numbers are displayed in the form ‘(r;θ)’ where r is the nonnegative magnitude and θ is the argument or phase angle. The range of θ depends on the current angular mode (see Section 6.4.1 [Angular Modes], page 137); it is generally between −180 and +180 degrees or the equivalent range in radians. Complex numbers are entered in stages using incomplete objects. See Section 4.13 [Incomplete Objects], page 125. Operations on rectangular complex numbers yield rectangular complex results, and similarly for polar complex numbers. Where the two types are mixed, or where new complex numbers arise (as for the square root of a negative real), the current Polar mode is used to determine the type. See Section 6.4.2 [Polar Mode], page 137. A complex result in which the imaginary part is zero (or the phase angle is 0 or 180 degrees or π radians) is automatically converted to a real number.

4.5 Infinities The word inf represents the mathematical concept of infinity. Calc actually has three slightly different infinity-like values: inf, uinf, and nan. These are just regular variable names (see Section 4.14 [Variables], page 126); you should avoid using these names for your own variables because Calc gives them special treatment. Infinities, like all variable names, are normally entered using algebraic entry. Mathematically speaking, it is not rigorously correct to treat “infinity” as if it were a number, but mathematicians often do so informally. When they say that ‘1 / inf = 0’, what they really mean is that 1/x, as x becomes larger and larger, becomes arbitrarily close to zero. So you can imagine that if x got “all the way to infinity,” then 1/x would go all the way to zero. Similarly, when they say that ‘exp(inf) = inf’, they mean that ex grows without bound as x grows. The symbol ‘-inf’ likewise stands for an infinitely negative real value; for example, we say that ‘exp(-inf) = 0’. You can have an infinity pointing in any direction on the complex plane: ‘sqrt(-inf) = i inf’. The same concept of limits can be used to define 1/0. We really want the value that 1/x approaches as x approaches zero. But if all we have is 1/0, we can’t tell which direction x was coming from. If x was positive and decreasing toward zero, then we should say that ‘1 / 0 = inf’. But if x was negative and increasing toward zero, the answer is ‘1 / 0 = -inf’. In fact, x could be an imaginary number, giving the answer ‘i inf’ or ‘-i inf’. Calc uses the special symbol ‘uinf’ to mean undirected infinity, i.e., a value which is infinitely large but with an unknown sign (or direction on the complex plane). Calc actually has three modes that say how infinities are handled. Normally, infinities never arise from calculations that didn’t already have them. Thus, 1/0 is treated simply as an error and left unevaluated. The m i (calc-infinite-mode) command (see Section 6.4.4 [Infinite Mode], page 138) enables a mode in which 1/0 evaluates to uinf instead. There is also an alternative type of infinite mode which says to treat zeros as if they were positive, so that ‘1 / 0 = inf’. While this is less mathematically correct, it may be the answer you want in some cases. Since all infinities are “as large” as all others, Calc simplifies, e.g., ‘5 inf’ to ‘inf’. Another example is ‘5 - inf = -inf’, where the ‘-inf’ is so large that adding a finite number

118

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

like five to it does not affect it. Note that ‘a - inf’ also results in ‘-inf’; Calc assumes that variables like a always stand for finite quantities. Just to show that infinities really are all the same size, note that ‘sqrt(inf) = inf^2 = exp(inf) = inf’ in Calc’s notation. It’s not so easy to define certain formulas like ‘0 * inf’ and ‘inf / inf’. Depending on where these zeros and infinities came from, the answer could be literally anything. The latter formula could be the limit of x/x (giving a result of one), or 2x/x (giving two), or x2 /x (giving inf), or x/x2 (giving zero). Calc uses the symbol nan to represent such an indeterminate value. (The name “nan” comes from analogy with the “NAN” concept of IEEE standard arithmetic; it stands for “Not A Number.” This is somewhat of a misnomer, since nan does stand for some number or infinity, it’s just that which number it stands for cannot be determined.) In Calc’s notation, ‘0 * inf = nan’ and ‘inf / inf = nan’. A few other common indeterminate expressions are ‘inf - inf’ and ‘inf ^ 0’. Also, ‘0 / 0 = nan’ if you have turned on Infinite mode (as described above). Infinities are especially useful as parts of intervals. See Section 4.12 [Interval Forms], page 124.

4.6 Vectors and Matrices The vector data type is flexible and general. A vector is simply a list of zero or more data objects. When these objects are numbers, the whole is a vector in the mathematical sense. When these objects are themselves vectors of equal (nonzero) length, the whole is a matrix. A vector which is not a matrix is referred to here as a plain vector. A vector is displayed as a list of values separated by commas and enclosed in square brackets: ‘[1, 2, 3]’. Thus the following is a 2 row by 3 column matrix: ‘[[1, 2, 3], [4, 5, 6]]’. Vectors, like complex numbers, are entered as incomplete objects. See Section 4.13 [Incomplete Objects], page 125. During algebraic entry, vectors are entered all at once in the usual brackets-and-commas form. Matrices may be entered algebraically as nested vectors, or using the shortcut notation ‘[1, 2, 3; 4, 5, 6]’, with rows separated by semicolons. The commas may usually be omitted when entering vectors: ‘[1 2 3]’. Curly braces may be used in place of brackets: ‘{1, 2, 3}’, but the commas are required in this case. Traditional vector and matrix arithmetic is also supported; see Section 7.1 [Basic Arithmetic], page 183 and see Chapter 9 [Matrix Functions], page 219. Many other operations are applied to vectors element-wise. For example, the complex conjugate of a vector is a vector of the complex conjugates of its elements. Algebraic functions for building vectors include ‘vec(a, b, c)’ to build ‘[a, b, c]’, ‘cvec(a, n, m)’ to build an n × m matrix of ‘a’s, and ‘index(n)’ to build a vector of integers from 1 to ‘n’.

4.7 Strings Character strings are not a special data type in the Calculator. Rather, a string is represented simply as a vector all of whose elements are integers in the range 0 to 255 (ASCII codes). You can enter a string at any time by pressing the " key. Quotation marks and backslashes are written ‘\"’ and ‘\\’, respectively, inside strings. Other notations introduced by backslashes are:

Chapter 4: Data Types

\a \b \e \f \n \r \t

7 8 27 12 10 13 9

119

\^@ \^a-z \^[ \^\\ \^] \^^ \^_ \^?

0 1-26 27 28 29 30 31 127

Finally, a backslash followed by three octal digits produces any character from its ASCII code. Strings are normally displayed in vector-of-integers form. The d " (calc-displaystrings) command toggles a mode in which any vectors of small integers are displayed as quoted strings instead. The backslash notations shown above are also used for displaying strings. Characters 128 and above are not translated by Calc; unless you have an Emacs modified for 8-bit fonts, these will show up in backslash-octal-digits notation. For characters below 32, and for character 127, Calc uses the backslash-letter combination if there is one, or otherwise uses a ‘\^’ sequence. The only Calc feature that uses strings is compositions; see Section 6.8.10 [Compositions], page 166. Strings also provide a convenient way to do conversions between ASCII characters and integers. There is a string function which provides a different display format for strings. Basically, ‘string(s)’, where s is a vector of integers in the proper range, is displayed as the corresponding string of characters with no surrounding quotation marks or other modifications. Thus ‘string("ABC")’ (or ‘string([65 66 67])’) will look like ‘ABC’ on the stack. This happens regardless of whether d " has been used. The only way to turn it off is to use d U (unformatted language mode) which will display ‘string("ABC")’ instead. Control characters are displayed somewhat differently by string. Characters below 32, and character 127, are shown using ‘^’ notation (same as shown above, but without the backslash). The quote and backslash characters are left alone, as are characters 128 and above. The bstring function is just like string except that the resulting string is breakable across multiple lines if it doesn’t fit all on one line. Potential break points occur at every space character in the string.

4.8 HMS Forms HMS stands for Hours-Minutes-Seconds; when used as an angular argument, the interpretation is Degrees-Minutes-Seconds. All functions that operate on angles accept HMS forms. These are interpreted as degrees regardless of the current angular mode. It is also possible to use HMS as the angular mode so that calculated angles are expressed in degrees, minutes, and seconds. The default format for HMS values is ‘hours@ mins’ secs"’. During entry, the letters ‘h’ (for “hours”) or ‘o’ (approximating the “degrees” symbol) are accepted as well as ‘@’, ‘m’ is accepted in place of ‘’’, and ‘s’ is accepted in place of ‘"’. The hours value is an integer (or

120

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

integer-valued float). The mins value is an integer or integer-valued float between 0 and 59. The secs value is a real number between 0 (inclusive) and 60 (exclusive). A positive HMS form is interpreted as hours + mins/60 + secs/3600. A negative HMS form is interpreted as −hours − mins/60 − secs/3600. Display format for HMS forms is quite flexible. See Section 6.7.6 [HMS Formats], page 149. HMS forms can be added and subtracted. When they are added to numbers, the numbers are interpreted according to the current angular mode. HMS forms can also be multiplied and divided by real numbers. Dividing two HMS forms produces a real-valued ratio of the two angles. Just for kicks, M-x calc-time pushes the current time of day on the stack as an HMS form.

4.9 Date Forms A date form represents a date and possibly an associated time. Simple date arithmetic is supported: Adding a number to a date produces a new date shifted by that many days; adding an HMS form to a date shifts it by that many hours. Subtracting two date forms computes the number of days between them (represented as a simple number). Many other operations, such as multiplying two date forms, are nonsensical and are not allowed by Calc. Date forms are entered and displayed enclosed in ‘< >’ brackets. The default format is, e.g., ‘’ for dates, or ‘’ for dates with times. Input is flexible; date forms can be entered in any of the usual notations for dates and times. See Section 6.7.7 [Date Formats], page 149. Date forms are stored internally as numbers, specifically the number of days since midnight on the morning of December 31 of the year 1 BC. If the internal number is an integer, the form represents a date only; if the internal number is a fraction or float, the form represents a date and time. For example, ‘’ is represented by the number 726842.25. The standard precision of 12 decimal digits is enough to ensure that a (reasonable) date and time can be stored without roundoff error. If the current precision is greater than 12, date forms will keep additional digits in the seconds position. For example, if the precision is 15, the seconds will keep three digits after the decimal point. Decreasing the precision below 12 may cause the time part of a date form to become inaccurate. This can also happen if astronomically high years are used, though this will not be an issue in everyday (or even everymillennium) use. Note that date forms without times are stored as exact integers, so roundoff is never an issue for them. You can use the v p (calc-pack) and v u (calc-unpack) commands to get at the numerical representation of a date form. See Section 9.1 [Packing and Unpacking], page 219. Date forms can go arbitrarily far into the future or past. Negative year numbers represent years BC. There is no “year 0”; the day before ‘’ is ‘’. These are days 1 and 0 respectively in Calc’s internal numbering scheme. The Gregorian calendar is used for all dates, including dates before the Gregorian calendar was invented (although that can be configured; see below). Thus Calc’s use of the day number −10000 to represent August 15, 28 BC should be taken with a grain of salt. Some historical background: The Julian calendar was created by Julius Caesar in the year 46 BC as an attempt to fix the confusion caused by the irregular Roman calendar that

Chapter 4: Data Types

121

was used before that time. The Julian calendar introduced an extra day in all years divisible by four. After some initial confusion, the calendar was adopted around the year we call 8 AD. Some centuries later it became apparent that the Julian year of 365.25 days was itself not quite right. In 1582 Pope Gregory XIII introduced the Gregorian calendar, which added the new rule that years divisible by 100, but not by 400, were not to be considered leap years despite being divisible by four. Many countries delayed adoption of the Gregorian calendar because of religious differences. For example, Great Britain and the British colonies switched to the Gregorian calendar in September 1752, when the Julian calendar was eleven days behind the Gregorian calendar. That year in Britain, the day after September 2 was September 14. To take another example, Russia did not adopt the Gregorian calendar until 1918, and that year in Russia the day after January 31 was February 14. Calc’s reckoning therefore matches English practice starting in 1752 and Russian practice starting in 1918, but disagrees with earlier dates in both countries. When the Julian calendar was introduced, it had January 1 as the first day of the year. By the Middle Ages, many European countries had changed the beginning of a new year to a different date, often to a religious festival. Almost all countries reverted to using January 1 as the beginning of the year by the time they adopted the Gregorian calendar. Some calendars attempt to mimic the historical situation by using the Gregorian calendar for recent dates and the Julian calendar for older dates. The cal program in most Unix implementations does this, for example. While January 1 wasn’t always the beginning of a calendar year, these hybrid calendars still use January 1 as the beginning of the year even for older dates. The customizable variable calc-gregorian-switch (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433) can be set to have Calc’s date forms switch from the Julian to Gregorian calendar at any specified date. Today’s timekeepers introduce an occasional “leap second”. These do not occur regularly and Calc does not take these minor effects into account. (If it did, it would have to report a non-integer number of days between, say, ‘’ and ‘’.) Another day counting system in common use is, confusingly, also called “Julian.” Julian days go from noon to noon. The Julian day number is the numbers of days since 12:00 noon (GMT) on November 24, 4714 BC in the Gregorian calendar (i.e., January 1, 4713 BC in the Julian calendar). In Calc’s scheme (in GMT) the Julian day origin is −1721422.5, because Calc starts at midnight instead of noon. Thus to convert a Calc date code obtained by unpacking a date form into a Julian day number, simply add 1721422.5 after compensating for the time zone difference. The built-in t J command performs this conversion for you. The Julian day number is based on the Julian cycle, which was invented in 1583 by Joseph Justus Scaliger. Scaliger named it the Julian cycle since it involves the Julian calendar, but some have suggested that Scaliger named it in honor of his father, Julius Caesar Scaliger. The Julian cycle is based on three other cycles: the indiction cycle, the Metonic cycle, and the solar cycle. The indiction cycle is a 15 year cycle originally used by the Romans for tax purposes but later used to date medieval documents. The Metonic cycle is a 19 year cycle; 19 years is close to being a common multiple of a solar year and a lunar month, and so every 19 years the phases of the moon will occur on the same days of the year. The solar cycle is a 28 year cycle; the Julian calendar repeats itself every 28 years. The smallest time period which contains multiples of all three cycles is the least common multiple of 15 years, 19 years and 28 years, which (since they’re pairwise relatively prime)

122

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

is 15 × 19 × 28 = 7980 years. This is the length of a Julian cycle. Working backwards, the previous year in which all three cycles began was 4713 BC, and so Scaliger chose that year as the beginning of a Julian cycle. Since at the time there were no historical records from before 4713 BC, using this year as a starting point had the advantage of avoiding negative year numbers. In 1849, the astronomer John Herschel (son of William Herschel) suggested using the number of days since the beginning of the Julian cycle as an astronomical dating system; this idea was taken up by other astronomers. (At the time, noon was the start of the astronomical day. Herschel originally suggested counting the days since Jan 1, 4713 BC at noon Alexandria time; this was later amended to noon GMT.) Julian day numbering is largely used in astronomy. The Unix operating system measures time as an integer number of seconds since midnight, Jan 1, 1970. To convert a Calc date value into a Unix time stamp, first subtract 719164 (the code for ‘’), then multiply by 86400 (the number of seconds in a day) and press R to round to the nearest integer. If you have a date form, you can simply subtract the day ‘’ instead of unpacking and subtracting 719164. Likewise, divide by 86400 and add ‘’ to convert from Unix time to a Calc date form. (Note that Unix normally maintains the time in the GMT time zone; you may need to subtract five hours to get New York time, or eight hours for California time. The same is usually true of Julian day counts.) The built-in t U command performs these conversions.

4.10 Modulo Forms A modulo form is a real number which is taken modulo (i.e., within an integer multiple of) some value M. Arithmetic modulo M often arises in number theory. Modulo forms are written ‘a mod M ’, where a and M are real numbers or HMS forms, and 0 ≤ a < M . In many applications a and M will be integers but this is not required. To create a modulo form during numeric entry, press the shift-M key to enter the word ‘mod’. As a special convenience, pressing shift-M a second time automatically enters the value of M that was most recently used before. During algebraic entry, either type ‘mod’ by hand or press M-m (that’s META-m). Once again, pressing this a second time enters the current modulo. Modulo forms are not to be confused with the modulo operator ‘%’. The expression ‘27 % 10’ means to compute 27 modulo 10 to produce the result 7. Further computations treat this 7 as just a regular integer. The expression ‘27 mod 10’ produces the result ‘7 mod 10’; further computations with this value are again reduced modulo 10 so that the result always lies in the desired range. When two modulo forms with identical M ’s are added or multiplied, the Calculator simply adds or multiplies the values, then reduces modulo M . If one argument is a modulo form and the other a plain number, the plain number is treated like a compatible modulo form. It is also possible to raise modulo forms to powers; the result is the value raised to the power, then reduced modulo M . (When all values involved are integers, this calculation is done much more efficiently than actually computing the power and then reducing.) Two modulo forms ‘a mod M ’ and ‘b mod M ’ can be divided if a, b, and M are all integers. The result is the modulo form which, when multiplied by ‘b mod M ’, produces ‘a mod M ’. If there is no solution to this equation (which can happen only when M is nonprime), or if any of the arguments are non-integers, the division is left in symbolic form.

Chapter 4: Data Types

123

Other operations, such as square roots, are not yet supported for modulo forms. (Note that, √ although ‘(a mod M )^.5’ will compute a “modulo square root” in the sense of reducing a modulo M , this is not a useful definition from the number-theoretical point of view.) It is possible to mix HMS forms and modulo forms. For example, an HMS form modulo 24 could be used to manipulate clock times; an HMS form modulo 360 would be suitable for angles. Making the modulo M also be an HMS form eliminates troubles that would arise if the angular mode were inadvertently set to Radians, in which case ‘2@ 0’ 0" mod 24’ would be interpreted as two degrees modulo 24 radians! Modulo forms cannot have variables or formulas for components. If you enter the formula ‘(x + 2) mod 5’, Calc propagates the modulus to each of the coefficients: ‘(1 mod 5) x + (2 mod 5)’. You can use v p and % to modify modulo forms. See Section 9.1 [Packing and Unpacking], page 219. See Section 7.1 [Basic Arithmetic], page 183. The algebraic function ‘makemod(a, m)’ builds the modulo form ‘a mod m’.

4.11 Error Forms An error form is a number with an associated standard deviation, as in ‘2.3 +/- 0.12’. The notation ‘x +/- σ’ stands for an uncertain value which follows a normal or Gaussian distribution of mean x and standard deviation or “error” σ. Both the mean and the error can be either numbers or formulas. Generally these are real numbers but the mean may also be complex. If the error is negative or complex, it is changed to its absolute value. An error form with zero error is converted to a regular number by the Calculator. All arithmetic and transcendental functions accept error forms as input. Operations on the mean-value part work just like operations on regular numbers. The error part for any function f (x) (such as sin x is defined by the error of x times the derivative of f evaluated at the mean value of x. For a two-argument function f (x, y) (such as addition) the error is the square root of the sum of the squares of the errors due to x and y. df (x) f (x +/- σ) = f (x) +/- σ dx s 2 ∂f (x, y) 2 + σy ∂f (x, y) f (x +/- σx , y +/- σy ) = f (x, y) +/σx ∂x ∂y

Note that this definition assumes the errors in x and y are uncorrelated. A side effect of this definition is that ‘(2 +/- 1) * (2 +/- 1)’ is not the same as ‘(2 +/- 1)^2’; the former represents the product of two independent values which happen to have the same probability distributions, and the latter is the product of one random value with itself. The former will produce an answer with less error, since on the average the two independent errors can be expected to cancel out. Consult a good text on error analysis for a discussion of the proper use of standard deviations. Actual errors often are neither Gaussian-distributed nor uncorrelated, and the above formulas are valid only when errors are small. As an example, the error arising from ‘sin(x +/- σ)’ is ‘σ abs(cos(x))’. When x is close to zero, cos x is close to one so the error in the sine is close to σ; this makes sense, since sin x is approximately x near zero, so a given error in x will produce about the same error in the sine. Likewise, near 90 degrees

124

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

cos x is nearly zero and so the computed error is small: The sine curve is nearly flat in that region, so an error in x has relatively little effect on the value of sin x. However, consider ‘sin(90 +/- 1000)’. The cosine of 90 is zero, so Calc will report zero error! We get an obviously wrong result because we have violated the small-error approximation underlying the error analysis. If the error in x had been small, the error in sin x would indeed have been negligible. To enter an error form during regular numeric entry, use the p (“plus-or-minus”) key to type the ‘+/-’ symbol. (If you try actually typing ‘+/-’ the + key will be interpreted as the Calculator’s + command!) Within an algebraic formula, you can press M-+ to type the ‘+/-’ symbol, or type it out by hand. Error forms and complex numbers can be mixed; the formulas shown above are used for complex numbers, too; note that if the error part evaluates to a complex number its absolute value (or the square root of the sum of the squares of the absolute values of the two error contributions) is used. Mathematically, this corresponds to a radially symmetric Gaussian distribution of numbers on the complex plane. However, note that Calc considers an error form with real components to represent a real number, not a complex distribution around a real mean. Error forms may also be composed of HMS forms. For best results, both the mean and the error should be HMS forms if either one is. The algebraic function ‘sdev(a, b)’ builds the error form ‘a +/- b’.

4.12 Interval Forms An interval is a subset of consecutive real numbers. For example, the interval ‘[2 .. 4]’ represents all the numbers from 2 to 4, inclusive. If you multiply it by the interval ‘[0.5 .. 2]’ you obtain ‘[1 .. 8]’. This calculation represents the fact that if you multiply some number in the range ‘[2 .. 4]’ by some other number in the range ‘[0.5 .. 2]’, your result will lie in the range from 1 to 8. Interval arithmetic is used to get a worst-case estimate of the possible range of values a computation will produce, given the set of possible values of the input. Calc supports several varieties of intervals, including closed intervals of the type shown above, open intervals such as ‘(2 .. 4)’, which represents the range of numbers from 2 to 4 exclusive, and semi-open intervals in which one end uses a round parenthesis and the other a square bracket. In mathematical terms, [2..4] means 2 ≤ x ≤ 4 [2..4) means 2 ≤ x < 4 (2..4] means 2 < x ≤ 4 (2..4) means 2 < x < 4 The lower and upper limits of an interval must be either real numbers (or HMS or date forms), or symbolic expressions which are assumed to be real-valued, or ‘-inf’ and ‘inf’. In general the lower limit must be less than the upper limit. A closed interval containing only one value, ‘[3 .. 3]’, is converted to a plain number (3) automatically. An interval containing no values at all (such as ‘[3 .. 2]’ or ‘[2 .. 2)’) can be represented but is not guaranteed to behave well when used in arithmetic. Note that the interval ‘[3 .. inf)’

Chapter 4: Data Types

125

represents all real numbers greater than or equal to 3, and ‘(-inf .. inf)’ represents all real numbers. In fact, ‘[-inf .. inf]’ represents all real numbers including the real infinities. Intervals are entered in the notation shown here, either as algebraic formulas, or using incomplete forms. (See Section 4.13 [Incomplete Objects], page 125.) In algebraic formulas, multiple periods in a row are collected from left to right, so that ‘1...1e2’ is interpreted as ‘1.0 .. 1e2’ rather than ‘1 .. 0.1e2’. Add spaces or zeros if you want to get the other interpretation. If you omit the lower or upper limit, a default of ‘-inf’ or ‘inf’ (respectively) is furnished. Infinite mode also affects operations on intervals (see Section 4.5 [Infinities], page 117). Calc will always introduce an open infinity, as in ‘1 / (0 .. 2] = [0.5 .. inf)’. But closed infinities, ‘1 / [0 .. 2] = [0.5 .. inf]’, arise only in Infinite mode; otherwise they are left unevaluated. Note that the “direction” of a zero is not an issue in this case since the zero is always assumed to be continuous with the rest of the interval. For intervals that contain zero inside them Calc is forced to give the result, ‘1 / (-2 .. 2) = [-inf .. inf]’. While it may seem that intervals and error forms are similar, they are based on entirely different concepts of inexact quantities. An error form ‘x +/- σ’ means a variable is random, and its value could be anything but is “probably” within one σ of the mean value x. An interval ‘[a .. b]’ means a variable’s value is unknown, but guaranteed to lie in the specified range. Error forms are statistical or “average case” approximations; interval arithmetic tends to produce “worst case” bounds on an answer. Intervals may not contain complex numbers, but they may contain HMS forms or date forms. See Section 9.6 [Set Operations], page 227, for commands that interpret interval forms as subsets of the set of real numbers. The algebraic function ‘intv(n, a, b)’ builds an interval form from ‘a’ to ‘b’; ‘n’ is an integer code which must be 0 for ‘(..)’, 1 for ‘(..]’, 2 for ‘[..)’, or 3 for ‘[..]’. Please note that in fully rigorous interval arithmetic, care would be taken to make sure that the computation of the lower bound rounds toward minus infinity, while upper bound computations round toward plus infinity. Calc’s arithmetic always uses a round-to-nearest mode, which means that roundoff errors could creep into an interval calculation to produce intervals slightly smaller than they ought to be. For example, entering ‘[1..2]’ and pressing Q 2 ^ should yield the interval ‘[1..2]’ again, but in fact it yields the (slightly too small) interval ‘[1..1.9999999]’ due to roundoff error.

4.13 Incomplete Objects When ( or [ is typed to begin entering a complex number or vector, respectively, the effect is to push an incomplete complex number or vector onto the stack. The , key adds the value(s) at the top of the stack onto the current incomplete object. The ) and ] keys “close” the incomplete object after adding any values on the top of the stack in front of the incomplete object. As a result, the sequence of keystrokes [ 2 , 3 RET 2 * , 9 ] pushes the vector ‘[2, 6, 9]’ onto the stack. Likewise, ( 1 , 2 Q ) pushes the complex number ‘(1, 1.414)’ (approximately).

126

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

If several values lie on the stack in front of the incomplete object, all are collected and appended to the object. Thus the , key is redundant: [ 2 RET 3 RET 2 * 9 ]. Some people prefer the equivalent SPC key to RET. As a special case, typing , immediately after (, [, or , adds a zero or duplicates the preceding value in the list being formed. Typing DEL during incomplete entry removes the last item from the list. The ; key is used in the same way as , to create polar complex numbers: ( 1 ; 2 ). When entering a vector, ; is useful for creating a matrix. In particular, [ [ 1 , 2 ; 3 , 4 ; 5 , 6 ] ] is equivalent to [ [ 1 , 2 ] , [ 3 , 4 ] , [ 5 , 6 ] ]. Incomplete entry is also used to enter intervals. For example, [ 2 .. 4 ) enters a semiopen interval. Note that when you type the first period, it will be interpreted as a decimal point, but when you type a second period immediately afterward, it is re-interpreted as part of the interval symbol. Typing .. corresponds to executing the calc-dots command. If you find incomplete entry distracting, you may wish to enter vectors and complex numbers as algebraic formulas by pressing the apostrophe key.

4.14 Variables A variable is somewhere between a storage register on a conventional calculator, and a variable in a programming language. (In fact, a Calc variable is really just an Emacs Lisp variable that contains a Calc number or formula.) A variable’s name is normally composed of letters and digits. Calc also allows apostrophes and # signs in variable names. (The Calc variable foo corresponds to the Emacs Lisp variable var-foo, but unless you access the variable from within Emacs Lisp, you don’t need to worry about it. Variable names in algebraic formulas implicitly have ‘var-’ prefixed to their names. The ‘#’ character in variable names used in algebraic formulas corresponds to a dash ‘-’ in the Lisp variable name. If the name contains any dashes, the prefix ‘var-’ is not automatically added. Thus the two formulas ‘foo + 1’ and ‘var#foo + 1’ both refer to the same variable.) In a command that takes a variable name, you can either type the full name of a variable, or type a single digit to use one of the special convenience variables q0 through q9. For example, 3 s s 2 stores the number 3 in variable q2, and 3 s s foo RET stores that number in variable foo. To push a variable itself (as opposed to the variable’s value) on the stack, enter its name as an algebraic expression using the apostrophe (’) key. The = (calc-evaluate) key “evaluates” a formula by replacing all variables in the formula which have been given values by a calc-store or calc-let command by their stored values. Other variables are left alone. Thus a variable that has not been stored acts like an abstract variable in algebra; a variable that has been stored acts more like a register in a traditional calculator. With a positive numeric prefix argument, = evaluates the top n stack entries; with a negative argument, = evaluates the nth stack entry. A few variables are called special constants. Their names are ‘e’, ‘pi’, ‘i’, ‘phi’, and ‘gamma’. (See Chapter 8 [Scientific Functions], page 207.) When they are evaluated with =, their values are calculated if necessary according to the current precision or complex polar mode. If you wish to use these symbols for other purposes, simply undefine or redefine them using calc-store.

Chapter 4: Data Types

127

The variables ‘inf’, ‘uinf’, and ‘nan’ stand for infinite or indeterminate values. It’s best not to use them as regular variables, since Calc uses special algebraic rules when it manipulates them. Calc displays a warning message if you store a value into any of these special variables. See Chapter 12 [Store and Recall], page 321, for a discussion of commands dealing with variables.

4.15 Formulas When you press the apostrophe key you may enter any expression or formula in algebraic form. (Calc uses the terms “expression” and “formula” interchangeably.) An expression is built up of numbers, variable names, and function calls, combined with various arithmetic operators. Parentheses may be used to indicate grouping. Spaces are ignored within formulas, except that spaces are not permitted within variable names or numbers. Arithmetic operators, in order from highest to lowest precedence, and with their equivalent function names, are: ‘_’ [subscr] (subscripts); postfix ‘%’ [percent] (as in ‘25% = 0.25’); prefix ‘!’ [lnot] (logical “not,” as in ‘!x’); ‘+/-’ [sdev] (the standard deviation symbol) and ‘mod’ [makemod] (the symbol for modulo forms); postfix ‘!’ [fact] (factorial, as in ‘n!’) and postfix ‘!!’ [dfact] (double factorial); ‘^’ [pow] (raised-to-the-power-of); prefix ‘+’ and ‘-’ [neg] (as in ‘-x’); ‘*’ [mul]; ‘/’ [div], ‘%’ [mod] (modulo), and ‘\’ [idiv] (integer division); infix ‘+’ [add] and ‘-’ [sub] (as in ‘x-y’); ‘|’ [vconcat] (vector concatenation); relations ‘=’ [eq], ‘!=’ [neq], ‘’ [gt], ‘=’ [geq]; ‘&&’ [land] (logical “and”); ‘||’ [lor] (logical “or”); the C-style “if” operator ‘a?b:c’ [if]; ‘!!!’ [pnot] (rewrite pattern “not”); ‘&&&’ [pand] (rewrite pattern “and”); ‘|||’ [por] (rewrite pattern “or”); ‘:=’ [assign] (for assignments and rewrite rules); ‘::’ [condition] (rewrite pattern condition); ‘=>’ [evalto]. Note that, unlike in usual computer notation, multiplication binds more strongly than division: ‘a*b/c*d’ is equivalent to ab . cd The multiplication sign ‘*’ may be omitted in many cases. In particular, if the righthand side is a number, variable name, or parenthesized expression, the ‘*’ may be omitted. Implicit multiplication has the same precedence as the explicit ‘*’ operator. The one exception

128

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

to the rule is that a variable name followed by a parenthesized expression, as in ‘f(x)’, is interpreted as a function call, not an implicit ‘*’. In many cases you must use a space if you omit the ‘*’: ‘2a’ is the same as ‘2*a’, and ‘a b’ is the same as ‘a*b’, but ‘ab’ is a variable called ab, not the product of ‘a’ and ‘b’! Also note that ‘f (x)’ is still a function call. The rules are slightly different for vectors written with square brackets. In vectors, the space character is interpreted (like the comma) as a separator of elements of the vector. Thus ‘[ 2a b+c d ]’ is equivalent to ‘[2*a, b+c, d]’, whereas ‘2a b+c d’ is equivalent to ‘2*a*b + c*d’. Note that spaces around the brackets, and around explicit commas, are ignored. To force spaces to be interpreted as multiplication you can enclose a formula in parentheses as in ‘[(a b) 2(c d)]’, which is interpreted as ‘[a*b, 2*c*d]’. An implicit comma is also inserted between ‘][’, as in the matrix ‘[[1 2][3 4]]’. Vectors that contain commas (not embedded within nested parentheses or brackets) do not treat spaces specially: ‘[a b, 2 c d]’ is a vector of two elements. Also, if it would be an error to treat spaces as separators, but not otherwise, then Calc will ignore spaces: ‘[a - b]’ is a vector of one element, but ‘[a -b]’ is a vector of two elements. Finally, vectors entered with curly braces instead of square brackets do not give spaces any special treatment. When Calc displays a vector that does not contain any commas, it will insert parentheses if necessary to make the meaning clear: ‘[(a b)]’. The expression ‘5%-2’ is ambiguous; is this five-percent minus two, or five modulo minustwo? Calc always interprets the leftmost symbol as an infix operator preferentially (modulo, in this case), so you would need to write ‘(5%)-2’ to get the former interpretation. A function call is, e.g., ‘sin(1+x)’. (The Calc algebraic function foo corresponds to the Emacs Lisp function calcFunc-foo, but unless you access the function from within Emacs Lisp, you don’t need to worry about it.) Most mathematical Calculator commands like calc-sin have function equivalents like sin. If no Lisp function is defined for a function called by a formula, the call is left as it is during algebraic manipulation: ‘f(x+y)’ is left alone. Beware that many innocent-looking short names like in and re have predefined meanings which could surprise you; however, single letters or single letters followed by digits are always safe to use for your own function names. See [Function Index], page 477. In the documentation for particular commands, the notation H S (calc-sinh) [sinh] means that the key sequence H S, the command M-x calc-sinh, and the algebraic function sinh(x) all represent the same operation. Commands that interpret (“parse”) text as algebraic formulas include algebraic entry (’), editing commands like ‘ which parse the contents of the editing buffer when you finish, the C-x * g and C-x * r commands, the C-y command, the X window system “paste” mouse operation, and Embedded mode. All of these operations use the same rules for parsing formulas; in particular, language modes (see Section 6.8 [Language Modes], page 156) affect them all in the same way. When you read a large amount of text into the Calculator (say a vector which represents a big set of rewrite rules; see Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289), you may wish to include comments in the text. Calc’s formula parser ignores the symbol ‘%%’ and anything following it on a line: [ a + b, %% the sum of "a" and "b" c + d, %% last line is coming up:

Chapter 4: Data Types

129

e + f ] This is parsed exactly the same as ‘[ a + b, c + d, e + f ]’. See Section 6.8.11 [Syntax Tables], page 172, for a way to create your own operators and other input notations. See Section 6.8.10 [Compositions], page 166, for a way to create new display formats. See Chapter 10 [Algebra], page 241, for commands for manipulating formulas symbolically.

Chapter 5: Stack and Trail Commands

131

5 Stack and Trail Commands This chapter describes the Calc commands for manipulating objects on the stack and in the trail buffer. (These commands operate on objects of any type, such as numbers, vectors, formulas, and incomplete objects.)

5.1 Stack Manipulation Commands To duplicate the top object on the stack, press RET or SPC (two equivalent keys for the calc-enter command). Given a positive numeric prefix argument, these commands duplicate several elements at the top of the stack. Given a negative argument, these commands duplicate the specified element of the stack. Given an argument of zero, they duplicate the entire stack. For example, with ‘10 20 30’ on the stack, RET creates ‘10 20 30 30’, C-u 2 RET creates ‘10 20 30 20 30’, C-u - 2 RET creates ‘10 20 30 20’, and C-u 0 RET creates ‘10 20 30 10 20 30’. The LFD (calc-over) command (on a key marked Line-Feed if you have it, else on Cj) is like calc-enter except that the sign of the numeric prefix argument is interpreted oppositely. Also, with no prefix argument the default argument is 2. Thus with ‘10 20 30’ on the stack, LFD and C-u 2 LFD are both equivalent to C-u - 2 RET, producing ‘10 20 30 20’. To remove the top element from the stack, press DEL (calc-pop). The C-d key is a synonym for DEL. (If the top element is an incomplete object with at least one element, the last element is removed from it.) Given a positive numeric prefix argument, several elements are removed. Given a negative argument, the specified element of the stack is deleted. Given an argument of zero, the entire stack is emptied. For example, with ‘10 20 30’ on the stack, DEL leaves ‘10 20’, C-u 2 DEL leaves ‘10’, C-u - 2 DEL leaves ‘10 30’, and C-u 0 DEL leaves an empty stack. The M-DEL (calc-pop-above) command is to DEL what LFD is to RET: It interprets the sign of the numeric prefix argument in the opposite way, and the default argument is 2. Thus M-DEL by itself removes the second-from-top stack element, leaving the first, third, fourth, and so on; M-3 M-DEL deletes the third stack element. The above commands do not depend on the location of the cursor. If the customizable variable calc-context-sensitive-enter is non-nil (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433), these commands will become context sensitive. For example, instead of duplicating the top of the stack, RET will copy the element at the cursor to the top of the stack. With a positive numeric prefix, a copy of the element at the cursor and the appropriate number of preceding elements will be placed at the top of the stack. A negative prefix will still duplicate the specified element of the stack regardless of the cursor position. Similarly, DEL will remove the corresponding elements from the stack. To exchange the top two elements of the stack, press TAB (calc-roll-down). Given a positive numeric prefix argument, the specified number of elements at the top of the stack are rotated downward. Given a negative argument, the entire stack is rotated downward the specified number of times. Given an argument of zero, the entire stack is reversed top-for-bottom. For example, with ‘10 20 30 40 50’ on the stack, TAB creates ‘10 20 30 50 40’, C-u 3 TAB creates ‘10 20 50 30 40’, C-u - 2 TAB creates ‘40 50 10 20 30’, and C-u 0 TAB creates ‘50 40 30 20 10’.

132

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The command M-TAB (calc-roll-up) is analogous to TAB except that it rotates upward instead of downward. Also, the default with no prefix argument is to rotate the top 3 elements. For example, with ‘10 20 30 40 50’ on the stack, M-TAB creates ‘10 20 40 50 30’, C-u 4 M-TAB creates ‘10 30 40 50 20’, C-u - 2 M-TAB creates ‘30 40 50 10 20’, and C-u 0 M-TAB creates ‘50 40 30 20 10’. A good way to view the operation of TAB and M-TAB is in terms of moving a particular element to a new position in the stack. With a positive argument n, TAB moves the top stack element down to level n, making room for it by pulling all the intervening stack elements toward the top. M-TAB moves the element at level n up to the top. (Compare with LFD, which copies instead of moving the element in level n.) With a negative argument −n, TAB rotates the stack to move the object in level n to the deepest place in the stack, and the object in level n + 1 to the top. M-TAB rotates the deepest stack element to be in level n, also putting the top stack element in level n + 1. See Section 10.1 [Selecting Subformulas], page 241, for a way to apply these commands to any portion of a vector or formula on the stack. The command C-x C-t (calc-transpose-lines) will transpose the stack object determined by the point with the stack object at the next higher level. For example, with ‘10 20 30 40 50’ on the stack and the point on the line containing ‘30’, C-x C-t creates ‘10 20 40 30 50’. More generally, C-x C-t acts on the stack objects determined by the current point (and mark) similar to how the text-mode command transpose-lines acts on lines. With argument n, C-x C-t will move the stack object at the level above the current point and move it past N other objects; for example, with ‘10 20 30 40 50’ on the stack and the point on the line containing ‘30’, C-u 2 C-x C-t creates ‘10 40 20 30 50’. With an argument of 0, C-x C-t will switch the stack objects at the levels determined by the point and the mark.

5.2 Editing Stack Entries The ‘ (calc-edit) command creates a temporary buffer (*Calc Edit*) for editing the topof-stack value using regular Emacs commands. Note that ‘ is a backquote, not a quote. With a numeric prefix argument, it edits the specified number of stack entries at once. (An argument of zero edits the entire stack; a negative argument edits one specific stack entry.) When you are done editing, press C-c C-c to finish and return to Calc. The RET and LFD keys also work to finish most sorts of editing, though in some cases Calc leaves RET with its usual meaning (“insert a newline”) if it’s a situation where you might want to insert new lines into the editing buffer. When you finish editing, the Calculator parses the lines of text in the *Calc Edit* buffer as numbers or formulas, replaces the original stack elements in the original buffer with these new values, then kills the *Calc Edit* buffer. The original Calculator buffer continues to exist during editing, but for best results you should be careful not to change it until you have finished the edit. You can also cancel the edit by killing the buffer with C-x k. The formula is normally reevaluated as it is put onto the stack. For example, editing ‘a + 2’ to ‘3 + 2’ and pressing C-c C-c will push 5 on the stack. If you use LFD to finish, Calc will put the result on the stack without evaluating it. If you give a prefix argument to C-c C-c, Calc will not kill the *Calc Edit* buffer. You can switch back to that buffer and continue editing if you wish. However, you should

Chapter 5: Stack and Trail Commands

133

understand that if you initiated the edit with ‘, the C-c C-c operation will be programmed to replace the top of the stack with the new edited value, and it will do this even if you have rearranged the stack in the meanwhile. This is not so much of a problem with other editing commands, though, such as s e (calc-edit-variable; see Section 12.3 [Operations on Variables], page 323). If the calc-edit command involves more than one stack entry, each line of the *Calc Edit* buffer is interpreted as a separate formula. Otherwise, the entire buffer is interpreted as one formula, with line breaks ignored. (You can use C-o or C-q C-j to insert a newline in the buffer without pressing RET.) The ‘ key also works during numeric or algebraic entry. The text entered so far is moved to the *Calc Edit* buffer for more extensive editing than is convenient in the minibuffer.

5.3 Trail Commands The commands for manipulating the Calc Trail buffer are two-key sequences beginning with the t prefix. The t d (calc-trail-display) command turns display of the trail on and off. Normally the trail display is toggled on if it was off, off if it was on. With a numeric prefix of zero, this command always turns the trail off; with a prefix of one, it always turns the trail on. The other trail-manipulation commands described here automatically turn the trail on. Note that when the trail is off values are still recorded there; they are simply not displayed. To set Emacs to turn the trail off by default, type t d and then save the mode settings with m m (calc-save-modes). The t i (calc-trail-in) and t o (calc-trail-out) commands switch the cursor into and out of the Calc Trail window. In practice they are rarely used, since the commands shown below are a more convenient way to move around in the trail, and they work “by remote control” when the cursor is still in the Calculator window. There is a trail pointer which selects some entry of the trail at any given time. The trail pointer looks like a ‘>’ symbol right before the selected number. The following commands operate on the trail pointer in various ways. The t y (calc-trail-yank) command reads the selected value in the trail and pushes it onto the Calculator stack. It allows you to re-use any previously computed value without retyping. With a numeric prefix argument n, it yanks the value n lines above the current trail pointer. The t < (calc-trail-scroll-left) and t > (calc-trail-scroll-right) commands horizontally scroll the trail window left or right by one half of its width. The t n (calc-trail-next) and t p (calc-trail-previous) commands move the trail pointer down or up one line. The t f (calc-trail-forward) and t b (calc-trailbackward) commands move the trail pointer down or up one screenful at a time. All of these commands accept numeric prefix arguments to move several lines or screenfuls at a time. The t [ (calc-trail-first) and t ] (calc-trail-last) commands move the trail pointer to the first or last line of the trail. The t h (calc-trail-here) command moves the trail pointer to the cursor position; unlike the other trail commands, t h works only when Calc Trail is the selected window.

134

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The t s (calc-trail-isearch-forward) and t r (calc-trail-isearch-backward) commands perform an incremental search forward or backward through the trail. You can press RET to terminate the search; the trail pointer moves to the current line. If you cancel the search with C-g, the trail pointer stays where it was when the search began. The t m (calc-trail-marker) command allows you to enter a line of text of your own choosing into the trail. The text is inserted after the line containing the trail pointer; this usually means it is added to the end of the trail. Trail markers are useful mainly as the targets for later incremental searches in the trail. The t k (calc-trail-kill) command removes the selected line from the trail. The line is saved in the Emacs kill ring suitable for yanking into another buffer, but it is not easy to yank the text back into the trail buffer. With a numeric prefix argument, this command kills the n lines below or above the selected one. The t . (calc-full-trail-vectors) command is described elsewhere; see Section 9.9 [Vector and Matrix Formats], page 238.

5.4 Keep Arguments The K (calc-keep-args) command acts like a prefix for the following command. It prevents that command from removing its arguments from the stack. For example, after 2 RET 3 +, the stack contains the sole number 5, but after 2 RET 3 K +, the stack contains the arguments and the result: ‘2 3 5’. With the exception of keyboard macros, this works for all commands that take arguments off the stack. (To avoid potentially unpleasant behavior, a K prefix before a keyboard macro will be ignored. A K prefix called within the keyboard macro will still take effect.) As another example, K a s simplifies a formula, pushing the simplified version of the formula onto the stack after the original formula (rather than replacing the original formula). Note that you could get the same effect by typing RET a s, copying the formula and then simplifying the copy. One difference is that for a very large formula the time taken to format the intermediate copy in RET a s could be noticeable; K a s would avoid this extra work. Even stack manipulation commands are affected. TAB works by popping two values and pushing them back in the opposite order, so 2 RET 3 K TAB produces ‘2 3 3 2’. A few Calc commands provide other ways of doing the same thing. For example, ’ sin($) replaces the number on the stack with its sine using algebraic entry; to push the sine and keep the original argument you could use either ’ sin($1) or K ’ sin($). See Section 3.5 [Algebraic Entry], page 107. Also, the s s command is effectively the same as K s t. See Section 12.1 [Storing Variables], page 321. If you execute a command and then decide you really wanted to keep the argument, you can press M-RET (calc-last-args). This command pushes the last arguments that were popped by any command onto the stack. Note that the order of things on the stack will be different than with K: 2 RET 3 + M-RET leaves ‘5 2 3’ on the stack instead of ‘2 3 5’. See Section 3.8 [Undo], page 110.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

135

6 Mode Settings This chapter describes commands that set modes in the Calculator. They do not affect the contents of the stack, although they may change the appearance or interpretation of the stack’s contents.

6.1 General Mode Commands You can save all of the current mode settings in your Calc init file (the file given by the variable calc-settings-file, typically ~/.emacs.d/calc.el) with the m m (calc-savemodes) command. This will cause Emacs to reestablish these modes each time it starts up. The modes saved in the file include everything controlled by the m and d prefix keys, the current precision and binary word size, whether or not the trail is displayed, the current height of the Calc window, and more. The current interface (used when you type C-x * *) is also saved. If there were already saved mode settings in the file, they are replaced. Otherwise, the new mode information is appended to the end of the file. The m R (calc-mode-record-mode) command tells Calc to record all the mode settings (as if by pressing m m) every time a mode setting changes. If the modes are saved this way, then this “automatic mode recording” mode is also saved. Type m R again to disable this method of recording the mode settings. To turn it off permanently, the m m command will also be necessary. (If Embedded mode is enabled, other options for recording the modes are available; see Section 16.4 [Mode Settings in Embedded Mode], page 356.) The m F (calc-settings-file-name) command allows you to choose a different file than the current value of calc-settings-file for m m, Z P, and similar commands to save permanent information. You are prompted for a file name. All Calc modes are then reset to their default values, then settings from the file you named are loaded if this file exists, and this file becomes the one that Calc will use in the future for commands like m m. The default settings file name is ~/.emacs.d/calc.el. You can see the current file name by giving a blank response to the m F prompt. See also the discussion of the calc-settings-file variable; see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433. If the file name you give is your user init file (typically ~/.emacs), m F will not automatically load the new file. This is because your user init file may contain other things you don’t want to reread. You can give a numeric prefix argument of 1 to m F to force it to read the file no matter what. Conversely, an argument of −1 tells m F not to read the new file. An argument of 2 or −2 tells m F not to reset the modes to their defaults beforehand, which is useful if you intend your new file to have a variant of the modes present in the file you were using before. The m x (calc-always-load-extensions) command enables a mode in which the first use of Calc loads the entire program, including all extensions modules. Otherwise, the extensions modules will not be loaded until the various advanced Calc features are used. Since this mode only has effect when Calc is first loaded, m x is usually followed by m m to make the mode-setting permanent. To load all of Calc just once, rather than always in the future, you can press C-x * L. The m S (calc-shift-prefix) command enables a mode in which all of Calc’s letter prefix keys may be typed shifted as well as unshifted. If you are typing, say, a S (calc-solvefor) quite often you might find it easier to turn this mode on so that you can type A S

136

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

instead. When this mode is enabled, the commands that used to be on those single shifted letters (e.g., A (calc-abs)) can now be invoked by pressing the shifted letter twice: A A. Note that the v prefix key always works both shifted and unshifted, and the z and Z prefix keys are always distinct. Also, the h prefix is not affected by this mode. Press m S again to disable shifted-prefix mode.

6.2 Precision The p (calc-precision) command controls the precision to which floating-point calculations are carried. The precision must be at least 3 digits and may be arbitrarily high, within the limits of memory and time. This affects only floats: Integer and rational calculations are always carried out with as many digits as necessary. The p key prompts for the current precision. If you wish you can instead give the precision as a numeric prefix argument. Many internal calculations are carried to one or two digits higher precision than normal. Results are rounded down afterward to the current precision. Unless a special display mode has been selected, floats are always displayed with their full stored precision, i.e., what you see is what you get. Reducing the current precision does not round values already on the stack, but those values will be rounded down before being used in any calculation. The c 0 through c 9 commands (see Section 7.4 [Conversions], page 188) can be used to round an existing value to a new precision. It is important to distinguish the concepts of precision and accuracy. In the normal usage of these words, the number 123.4567 has a precision of 7 digits but an accuracy of 4 digits. The precision is the total number of digits not counting leading or trailing zeros (regardless of the position of the decimal point). The accuracy is simply the number of digits after the decimal point (again not counting trailing zeros). In Calc you control the precision, not the accuracy of computations. If you were to set the accuracy instead, then calculations like ‘exp(100)’ would generate many more digits than you would typically need, while ‘exp(-100)’ would probably round to zero! In Calc, both these computations give you exactly 12 (or the requested number of) significant digits. The only Calc features that deal with accuracy instead of precision are fixed-point display mode for floats (d f; see Section 6.7.3 [Float Formats], page 148), and the rounding functions like floor and round (see Section 7.2 [Integer Truncation], page 187). Also, c 0 through c 9 deal with both precision and accuracy depending on the magnitudes of the numbers involved. If you need to work with a particular fixed accuracy (say, dollars and cents with two digits after the decimal point), one solution is to work with integers and an “implied” decimal point. For example, $8.99 divided by 6 would be entered 899 RET 6 /, yielding 149.833 (actually $1.49833 with our implied decimal point); pressing R would round this to 150 cents, i.e., $1.50. See Section 4.3 [Floats], page 115, for still more on floating-point precision and related issues.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

137

6.3 Inverse and Hyperbolic Flags There is no single-key equivalent to the calc-arcsin function. Instead, you must first press I (calc-inverse) to set the Inverse Flag, then press S (calc-sin). The I key actually toggles the Inverse Flag. When this flag is set, the word ‘Inv’ appears in the mode line. Likewise, the H key (calc-hyperbolic) sets or clears the Hyperbolic Flag, which transforms calc-sin into calc-sinh. If both of these flags are set at once, the effect will be calc-arcsinh. (The Hyperbolic flag is also used by some non-trigonometric commands; for example H L computes a base-10, instead of base-e, logarithm.) Command names like calc-arcsin are provided for completeness, and may be executed with x or M-x. Their effect is simply to toggle the Inverse and/or Hyperbolic flags and then execute the corresponding base command (calc-sin in this case). The O key (calc-option) sets another flag, the Option Flag, which also can alter the subsequent Calc command in various ways. The Inverse, Hyperbolic and Option flags apply only to the next Calculator command, after which they are automatically cleared. (They are also cleared if the next keystroke is not a Calc command.) Digits you type after I, H or O (or K) are treated as prefix arguments for the next command, not as numeric entries. The same is true of C-u, but not of the minus sign (K - means to subtract and keep arguments). Another Calc prefix flag, K (keep-arguments), is discussed elsewhere. See Section 5.4 [Keep Arguments], page 134.

6.4 Calculation Modes The commands in this section are two-key sequences beginning with the m prefix. (That’s the letter m, not the META key.) The ‘m a’ (calc-algebraic-mode) command is described elsewhere (see Section 3.5 [Algebraic Entry], page 107).

6.4.1 Angular Modes The Calculator supports three notations for angles: radians, degrees, and degrees-minutesseconds. When a number is presented to a function like sin that requires an angle, the current angular mode is used to interpret the number as either radians or degrees. If an HMS form is presented to sin, it is always interpreted as degrees-minutes-seconds. Functions that compute angles produce a number in radians, a number in degrees, or an HMS form depending on the current angular mode. If the result is a complex number and the current mode is HMS, the number is instead expressed in degrees. (Complexnumber calculations would normally be done in Radians mode, though. Complex numbers are converted to degrees by calculating the complex result in radians and then multiplying by 180 over π.) The m r (calc-radians-mode), m d (calc-degrees-mode), and m h (calc-hms-mode) commands control the angular mode. The current angular mode is displayed on the Emacs mode line. The default angular mode is Degrees.

6.4.2 Polar Mode The Calculator normally “prefers” rectangular complex numbers in the sense that rectangular form is used when the proper form can not be decided from the input. This might

138

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

happen by multiplying a rectangular number by a polar one, by taking the square root of a negative real number, or by entering ( 2 SPC 3 ). The m p (calc-polar-mode) command toggles complex-number preference between rectangular and polar forms. In Polar mode, all of the above example situations would produce polar complex numbers.

6.4.3 Fraction Mode Division of two integers normally yields a floating-point number if the result cannot be expressed as an integer. In some cases you would rather get an exact fractional answer. One way to accomplish this is to use the : (calc-fdiv) [fdiv] command, which divides the two integers on the top of the stack to produce a fraction: 6 RET 4 : produces 3:2 even though 6 RET 4 / produces 1.5. To set the Calculator to produce fractional results for normal integer divisions, use the m f (calc-frac-mode) command. For example, 8/4 produces 2 in either mode, but 6/4 produces 3:2 in Fraction mode, 1.5 in Float mode. At any time you can use c f (calc-float) to convert a fraction to a float, or c F (calc-fraction) to convert a float to a fraction. See Section 7.4 [Conversions], page 188.

6.4.4 Infinite Mode The Calculator normally treats results like 1/0 as errors; formulas like this are left in unsimplified form. But Calc can be put into a mode where such calculations instead produce “infinite” results. The m i (calc-infinite-mode) command turns this mode on and off. When the mode is off, infinities do not arise except in calculations that already had infinities as inputs. (One exception is that infinite open intervals like ‘[0 .. inf)’ can be generated; however, intervals closed at infinity (‘[0 .. inf]’) will not be generated when Infinite mode is off.) With Infinite mode turned on, ‘1 / 0’ will generate uinf, an undirected infinity. See Section 4.5 [Infinities], page 117, for a discussion of the difference between inf and uinf. Also, 0/0 evaluates to nan, the “indeterminate” symbol. Various other functions can also return infinities in this mode; for example, ‘ln(0) = -inf’, and ‘gamma(-7) = uinf’. Once again, note that ‘exp(inf) = inf’ regardless of Infinite mode because this calculation has infinity as an input. The m i command with a numeric prefix argument of zero, i.e., C-u 0 m i, turns on a Positive Infinite mode in which zero is treated as positive instead of being directionless. Thus, ‘1 / 0 = inf’ and ‘-1 / 0 = -inf’ in this mode. Note that zero never actually has a sign in Calc; there are no separate representations for +0 and −0. Positive Infinite mode merely changes the interpretation given to the single symbol, ‘0’. One consequence of this is that, while you might expect ‘1 / -0 = -inf’, actually ‘1 / -0’ is equivalent to ‘1 / 0’, which is equal to positive inf.

6.4.5 Symbolic Mode Calculations are normally performed numerically wherever possible. For example, the calc-sqrt command, or sqrt function in an algebraic expression, produces a numeric answer if the argument is a number or a symbolic expression if the argument is an expression: 2 Q pushes 1.4142 but ’ x+1 RET Q pushes ‘sqrt(x+1)’.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

139

In Symbolic mode, controlled by the m s (calc-symbolic-mode) command, functions which would produce inexact, irrational results are left in symbolic form. Thus 16 Q pushes 4, but 2 Q pushes ‘sqrt(2)’. The shift-N (calc-eval-num) command evaluates numerically the expression at the top of the stack, by temporarily disabling calc-symbolic-mode and executing = (calc-evaluate). Given a numeric prefix argument, it also sets the floating-point precision to the specified value for the duration of the command. To evaluate a formula numerically without expanding the variables it contains, you can use the key sequence m s a v m s (this uses calc-alg-evaluate, which resimplifies but doesn’t evaluate variables.)

6.4.6 Matrix and Scalar Modes Calc sometimes makes assumptions during algebraic manipulation that are awkward or incorrect when vectors and matrices are involved. Calc has two modes, Matrix mode and Scalar mode, which modify its behavior around vectors in useful ways. Press m v (calc-matrix-mode) once to enter Matrix mode. In this mode, all objects are assumed to be matrices unless provably otherwise. One major effect is that Calc will no longer consider multiplication to be commutative. (Recall that in matrix arithmetic, ‘A*B’ is not the same as ‘B*A’.) This assumption affects rewrite rules and algebraic simplification. Another effect of this mode is that calculations that would normally produce constants like 0 and 1 (e.g., a − a and a/a, respectively) will now produce function calls that represent “generic” zero or identity matrices: ‘idn(0)’, ‘idn(1)’. The idn function ‘idn(a,n)’ returns a times an nxn identity matrix; if n is omitted, it doesn’t know what dimension to use and so the idn call remains in symbolic form. However, if this generic identity matrix is later combined with a matrix whose size is known, it will be converted into a true identity matrix of the appropriate size. On the other hand, if it is combined with a scalar (as in ‘idn(1) + 2’), Calc will assume it really was a scalar after all and produce, e.g., 3. Press m v a second time to get Scalar mode. Here, objects are assumed not to be vectors or matrices unless provably so. For example, normally adding a variable to a vector, as in ‘[x, y, z] + a’, will leave the sum in symbolic form because as far as Calc knows, ‘a’ could represent either a number or another 3-vector. In Scalar mode, ‘a’ is assumed to be a non-vector, and the addition is evaluated to ‘[x+a, y+a, z+a]’. Press m v a third time to return to the normal mode of operation. If you press m v with a numeric prefix argument n, you get a special “dimensioned” Matrix mode in which matrices of unknown size are assumed to be nxn square matrices. Then, the function call ‘idn(1)’ will expand into an actual matrix rather than representing a “generic” matrix. Simply typing C-u m v will get you a square Matrix mode, in which matrices of unknown size are assumed to be square matrices of unspecified size. Of course these modes are approximations to the true state of affairs, which is probably that some quantities will be matrices and others will be scalars. One solution is to “declare” certain variables or functions to be scalar-valued. See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141, to see how to make declarations in Calc. There is nothing stopping you from declaring a variable to be scalar and then storing a matrix in it; however, if you do, the results you get from Calc may not be valid. Suppose you let Calc get the result ‘[x+a, y+a, z+a]’ shown above, and then stored ‘[1, 2, 3]’ in

140

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

‘a’. The result would not be the same as for ‘[x, y, z] + [1, 2, 3]’, but that’s because you have broken your earlier promise to Calc that ‘a’ would be scalar. Another way to mix scalars and matrices is to use selections (see Section 10.1 [Selecting Subformulas], page 241). Use Matrix mode when operating on your formula normally; then, to apply Scalar mode to a certain part of the formula without affecting the rest just select that part, change into Scalar mode and press = to resimplify the part under this mode, then change back to Matrix mode before deselecting.

6.4.7 Automatic Recomputation The evaluates-to operator, ‘=>’, has the special property that any ‘=>’ formulas on the stack are recomputed whenever variable values or mode settings that might affect them are changed. See Section 12.5 [Evaluates-To Operator], page 325. The m C (calc-auto-recompute) command turns this automatic recomputation on and off. If you turn it off, Calc will not update ‘=>’ operators on the stack (nor those in the attached Embedded mode buffer, if there is one). They will not be updated unless you explicitly do so by pressing = or until you press m C to turn recomputation back on. (While automatic recomputation is off, you can think of m C m C as a command to update all ‘=>’ operators while leaving recomputation off.) To update ‘=>’ operators in an Embedded buffer while automatic recomputation is off, use C-x * u. See Chapter 16 [Embedded Mode], page 349.

6.4.8 Working Messages Since the Calculator is written entirely in Emacs Lisp, which is not designed for heavy numerical work, many operations are quite slow. The Calculator normally displays the message ‘Working...’ in the echo area during any command that may be slow. In addition, iterative operations such as square roots and trigonometric functions display the intermediate result at each step. Both of these types of messages can be disabled if you find them distracting. Type m w (calc-working) with a numeric prefix of 0 to disable all “working” messages. Use a numeric prefix of 1 to enable only the plain ‘Working...’ message. Use a numeric prefix of 2 to see intermediate results as well. With no numeric prefix this displays the current mode. While it may seem that the “working” messages will slow Calc down considerably, experiments have shown that their impact is actually quite small. But if your terminal is slow you may find that it helps to turn the messages off.

6.5 Simplification Modes The current simplification mode controls how numbers and formulas are “normalized” when being taken from or pushed onto the stack. Some normalizations are unavoidable, such as rounding floating-point results to the current precision, and reducing fractions to simplest form. Others, such as simplifying a formula like a + a (or 2 + 3), are done automatically but can be turned off when necessary. When you press a key like + when 2 and 3 are on the stack, Calc pops these numbers, normalizes them, creates the formula 2 + 3, normalizes it, and pushes the result. Of course the standard rules for normalizing 2 + 3 will produce the result 5.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

141

Simplification mode commands consist of the lower-case m prefix key followed by a shifted letter. The m O (calc-no-simplify-mode) command turns off all optional simplifications. These would leave a formula like 2 + 3 alone. In fact, nothing except simple numbers are ever affected by normalization in this mode. Explicit simplification commands, such as = or a s, can still be given to simplify any formulas. See Section 17.4 [Algebraic Definitions], page 367, for a sample use of No-Simplification mode. The m N (calc-num-simplify-mode) command turns off simplification of any formulas except those for which all arguments are constants. For example, 1 + 2 is simplified to 3, and a + (2 − 2) is simplified to a + 0 but no further, since one argument of the sum is not a constant. Unfortunately, (a + 2) − 2 is not simplified because the top-level ‘-’ operator’s arguments are not both constant numbers (one of them is the formula a + 2). A constant is a number or other numeric object (such as a constant error form or modulo form), or a vector all of whose elements are constant. The m I (calc-basic-simplify-mode) command does some basic simplifications for all formulas. This includes many easy and fast algebraic simplifications such as a + 0 to a, and a + 2a to 3a, as well as evaluating functions like deriv(x2 , x) to 2x. The m B (calc-bin-simplify-mode) mode applies the basic simplifications to a result and then, if the result is an integer, uses the b c (calc-clip) command to clip the integer according to the current binary word size. See Section 7.7 [Binary Functions], page 204. Real numbers are rounded to the nearest integer and then clipped; other kinds of results (after the basic simplifications) are left alone. The m A (calc-alg-simplify-mode) mode does standard algebraic simplifications. See Section 10.3.2 [Algebraic Simplifications], page 255. The m E (calc-ext-simplify-mode) mode does “extended”, or “unsafe”, algebraic simplification. See Section 10.3.3 [Unsafe Simplifications], page 258. The m U (calc-units-simplify-mode) mode does units simplification. See Section 10.3.4 [Simplification of Units], page 259. These include the algebraic simplifications, plus variable names which are identifiable as unit names (like ‘mm’ for “millimeters”) are simplified with their unit definitions in mind. A common technique is to set the simplification mode down to the lowest amount of simplification you will allow to be applied automatically, then use manual commands like a s and c c (calc-clean) to perform higher types of simplifications on demand.

6.6 Declarations A declaration is a statement you make that promises you will use a certain variable or function in a restricted way. This may give Calc the freedom to do things that it couldn’t do if it had to take the fully general situation into account.

6.6.1 Declaration Basics The s d (calc-declare-variable) command is the easiest way to make a declaration for a variable. This command prompts for the variable name, then prompts for the declaration. The default at the declaration prompt is the previous declaration, if any. You can edit this

142

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

declaration, or press C-k to erase it and type a new declaration. (Or, erase it and press RET to clear the declaration, effectively “undeclaring” the variable.) A declaration is in general a vector of type symbols and range values. If there is only one type symbol or range value, you can write it directly rather than enclosing it in a vector. For example, s d foo RET real RET declares foo to be a real number, and s d bar RET [int, const, [1..6]] RET declares bar to be a constant integer between 1 and 6. (Actually, you can omit the outermost brackets and Calc will provide them for you: s d bar RET int, const, [1..6] RET.) Declarations in Calc are kept in a special variable called Decls. This variable encodes the set of all outstanding declarations in the form of a matrix. Each row has two elements: A variable or vector of variables declared by that row, and the declaration specifier as described above. You can use the s D command to edit this variable if you wish to see all the declarations at once. See Section 12.3 [Operations on Variables], page 323, for a description of this command and the s p command that allows you to save your declarations permanently if you wish. Items being declared can also be function calls. The arguments in the call are ignored; the effect is to say that this function returns values of the declared type for any valid arguments. The s d command declares only variables, so if you wish to make a function declaration you will have to edit the Decls matrix yourself. For example, the declaration matrix [ [ foo, real ] [ [j, k, n], int ] [ f(1,2,3), [0 .. inf) ] ]

declares that foo represents a real number, j, k and n represent integers, and the function f always returns a real number in the interval shown. If there is a declaration for the variable All, then that declaration applies to all variables that are not otherwise declared. It does not apply to function names. For example, using the row ‘[All, real]’ says that all your variables are real unless they are explicitly declared without real in some other row. The s d command declares All if you give a blank response to the variable-name prompt.

6.6.2 Kinds of Declarations The type-specifier part of a declaration (that is, the second prompt in the s d command) can be a type symbol, an interval, or a vector consisting of zero or more type symbols followed by zero or more intervals or numbers that represent the set of possible values for the variable. [ [ a, [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] ] [ b, [1 .. 5] ] [ c, [int, 1 .. 5] ] ]

Here a is declared to contain one of the five integers shown; b is any number in the interval from 1 to 5 (any real number since we haven’t specified), and c is any integer in that interval. Thus the declarations for a and c are nearly equivalent (see below). The type-specifier can be the empty vector ‘[]’ to say that nothing is known about a given variable’s value. This is the same as not declaring the variable at all except that it overrides any All declaration which would otherwise apply.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

143

The initial value of Decls is the empty vector ‘[]’. If Decls has no stored value or if the value stored in it is not valid, it is ignored and there are no declarations as far as Calc is concerned. (The s d command will replace such a malformed value with a fresh empty matrix, ‘[]’, before recording the new declaration.) Unrecognized type symbols are ignored. The following type symbols describe what sorts of numbers will be stored in a variable: int

Integers.

numint

Numerical integers. (Integers or integer-valued floats.)

frac

Fractions. (Rational numbers which are not integers.)

rat

Rational numbers. (Either integers or fractions.)

float

Floating-point numbers.

real

Real numbers. (Integers, fractions, or floats. Actually, intervals and error forms with real components also count as reals here.)

pos

Positive real numbers. (Strictly greater than zero.)

nonneg

Nonnegative real numbers. (Greater than or equal to zero.)

number

Numbers. (Real or complex.)

Calc uses this information to determine when certain simplifications of formulas are safe. For example, ‘(x^y)^z’ cannot be simplified to ‘x^(y z)’ in general; for example, ‘((-3)^2)^1:2’ is 3, but ‘(-3)^(2*1:2) = (-3)^1’ is −3. However, this simplification is safe if z is known to be an integer, or if x is known to be a nonnegative real number. If you have given declarations that allow Calc to deduce either of these facts, Calc will perform this simplification of the formula. Calc can apply a certain amount of logic when using declarations. For example, ‘(x^y)^(2n+1)’ will be simplified if n has been declared int; Calc knows that an integer times an integer, plus an integer, must always be an integer. (In fact, Calc would simplify ‘(-x)^(2n+1)’ to ‘-(x^(2n+1))’ since it is able to determine that ‘2n+1’ must be an odd integer.) Similarly, ‘(abs(x)^y)^z’ will be simplified to ‘abs(x)^(y z)’ because Calc knows that the abs function always returns a nonnegative real. If you had a myabs function that also had this property, you could get Calc to recognize it by adding the row ‘[myabs(), nonneg]’ to the Decls matrix. One instance of this simplification is ‘sqrt(x^2)’ (since the sqrt function is effectively a one-half power). Normally Calc leaves this formula alone. After the command s d x RET real RET, however, it can simplify the formula to ‘abs(x)’. And after s d x RET nonneg RET, Calc can simplify this formula all the way to ‘x’. If there are any intervals or real numbers in the type specifier, they comprise the set of possible values that the variable or function being declared can have. In particular, the type symbol real is effectively the same as the range ‘[-inf .. inf]’ (note that infinity is included in the range of possible values); pos is the same as ‘(0 .. inf]’, and nonneg is the same as ‘[0 .. inf]’. Saying ‘[real, [-5 .. 5]]’ is redundant because the fact that the variable is real can be deduced just from the interval, but ‘[int, [-5 .. 5]]’ and ‘[rat, [-5 .. 5]]’ are useful combinations.

144

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Note that the vector of intervals or numbers is in the same format used by Calc’s setmanipulation commands. See Section 9.6 [Set Operations], page 227. The type specifier ‘[1, 2, 3]’ is equivalent to ‘[numint, 1, 2, 3]’, not to ‘[int, 1, 2, 3]’. In other words, the range of possible values means only that the variable’s value must be numerically equal to a number in that range, but not that it must be equal in type as well. Calc’s set operations act the same way; ‘in(2, [1., 2., 3.])’ and ‘in(1.5, [1:2, 3:2, 5:2])’ both report “true.” If you use a conflicting combination of type specifiers, the results are unpredictable. An example is ‘[pos, [0 .. 5]]’, where the interval does not lie in the range described by the type symbol. “Real” declarations mostly affect simplifications involving powers like the one described above. Another case where they are used is in the a P command which returns a list of all roots of a polynomial; if the variable has been declared real, only the real roots (if any) will be included in the list. “Integer” declarations are used for simplifications which are valid only when certain values are integers (such as ‘(x^y)^z’ shown above). Calc’s algebraic simplifications also make use of declarations when simplifying equations and inequalities. They will cancel x from both sides of ‘a x = b x’ only if it is sure x is non-zero, say, because it has a pos declaration. To declare specifically that x is real and non-zero, use ‘[[-inf .. 0), (0 .. inf]]’. (There is no way in the current notation to say that x is nonzero but not necessarily real.) The a e command does “unsafe” simplifications, including canceling ‘x’ from the equation when ‘x’ is not known to be nonzero. Another set of type symbols distinguish between scalars and vectors. scalar

The value is not a vector.

vector

The value is a vector.

matrix

The value is a matrix (a rectangular vector of vectors).

sqmatrix

The value is a square matrix.

These type symbols can be combined with the other type symbols described above; ‘[int, matrix]’ describes an object which is a matrix of integers. Scalar/vector declarations are used to determine whether certain algebraic operations are safe. For example, ‘[a, b, c] + x’ is normally not simplified to ‘[a + x, b + x, c + x]’, but it will be if x has been declared scalar. On the other hand, multiplication is usually assumed to be commutative, but the terms in ‘x y’ will never be exchanged if both x and y are known to be vectors or matrices. (Calc currently never distinguishes between vector and matrix declarations.) See Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139, for a discussion of Matrix mode and Scalar mode, which are similar to declaring ‘[All, matrix]’ or ‘[All, scalar]’ but much more convenient. One more type symbol that is recognized is used with the H a d command for taking total derivatives of a formula. See Section 10.5 [Calculus], page 262. const

The value is a constant with respect to other variables.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

145

Calc does not check the declarations for a variable when you store a value in it. However, storing −3.5 in a variable that has been declared pos, int, or matrix may have unexpected effects; Calc may evaluate ‘sqrt(x^2)’ to 3.5 if it substitutes the value first, or to −3.5 if x was declared pos and the formula ‘sqrt(x^2)’ is simplified to ‘x’ before the value is substituted. Before using a variable for a new purpose, it is best to use s d or s D to check to make sure you don’t still have an old declaration for the variable that will conflict with its new meaning.

6.6.3 Functions for Declarations Calc has a set of functions for accessing the current declarations in a convenient manner. These functions return 1 if the argument can be shown to have the specified property, or 0 if the argument can be shown not to have that property; otherwise they are left unevaluated. These functions are suitable for use with rewrite rules (see Section 10.11.3 [Conditional Rewrite Rules], page 291) or programming constructs (see Section 17.2.2 [Conditionals in Macros], page 363). They can be entered only using algebraic notation. See Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286, for functions that perform other tests not related to declarations. For example, ‘dint(17)’ returns 1 because 17 is an integer, as do ‘dint(n)’ and ‘dint(2 n - 3)’ if n has been declared int, but ‘dint(2.5)’ and ‘dint(n + 0.5)’ return 0. Calc consults knowledge of its own built-in functions as well as your own declarations: ‘dint(floor(x))’ returns 1. The dint function checks if its argument is an integer. The dnatnum function checks if its argument is a natural number, i.e., a nonnegative integer. The dnumint function checks if its argument is numerically an integer, i.e., either an integer or an integer-valued float. Note that these and the other data type functions also accept vectors or matrices composed of suitable elements, and that real infinities ‘inf’ and ‘-inf’ are considered to be integers for the purposes of these functions. The drat function checks if its argument is rational, i.e., an integer or fraction. Infinities count as rational, but intervals and error forms do not. The dreal function checks if its argument is real. This includes integers, fractions, floats, real error forms, and intervals. The dimag function checks if its argument is imaginary, i.e., is mathematically equal to a real number times i. The dpos function checks for positive (but nonzero) reals. The dneg function checks for negative reals. The dnonneg function checks for nonnegative reals, i.e., reals greater than or equal to zero. Note that Calc’s algebraic simplifications, which are effectively applied to all conditions in rewrite rules, can simplify an expression like x > 0 to 1 or 0 using dpos. So the actual functions dpos, dneg, and dnonneg are rarely necessary. The dnonzero function checks that its argument is nonzero. This includes all nonzero real or complex numbers, all intervals that do not include zero, all nonzero modulo forms, vectors all of whose elements are nonzero, and variables or formulas whose values can be deduced to be nonzero. It does not include error forms, since they represent values which could be anything including zero. (This is also the set of objects considered “true” in conditional contexts.)

146

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The deven function returns 1 if its argument is known to be an even integer (or integervalued float); it returns 0 if its argument is known not to be even (because it is known to be odd or a non-integer). Calc’s algebraic simplifications use this to simplify a test of the form ‘x % 2 = 0’. There is also an analogous dodd function. The drange function returns a set (an interval or a vector of intervals and/or numbers; see Section 9.6 [Set Operations], page 227) that describes the set of possible values of its argument. If the argument is a variable or a function with a declaration, the range is copied from the declaration. Otherwise, the possible signs of the expression are determined using a method similar to dpos, etc., and a suitable set like ‘[0 .. inf]’ is returned. If the expression is not provably real, the drange function remains unevaluated. The dscalar function returns 1 if its argument is provably scalar, or 0 if its argument is provably non-scalar. It is left unevaluated if this cannot be determined. (If Matrix mode or Scalar mode is in effect, this function returns 1 or 0, respectively, if it has no other information.) When Calc interprets a condition (say, in a rewrite rule) it considers an unevaluated formula to be “false.” Thus, ‘dscalar(a)’ is “true” only if a is provably scalar, and ‘!dscalar(a)’ is “true” only if a is provably non-scalar; both are “false” if there is insufficient information to tell.

6.7 Display Modes The commands in this section are two-key sequences beginning with the d prefix. The d l (calc-line-numbering) and d b (calc-line-breaking) commands are described elsewhere; see Section 3.3 [Stack Basics], page 106 and see Section 6.8.1 [Normal Language Modes], page 157, respectively. Display formats for vectors and matrices are also covered elsewhere; see Section 9.9 [Vector and Matrix Formats], page 238. One thing all display modes have in common is their treatment of the H prefix. This prefix causes any mode command that would normally refresh the stack to leave the stack display alone. The word “Dirty” will appear in the mode line when Calc thinks the stack display may not reflect the latest mode settings. The d RET (calc-refresh-top) command reformats the top stack entry according to all the current modes. Positive prefix arguments reformat the top n entries; negative prefix arguments reformat the specified entry, and a prefix of zero is equivalent to d SPC (calc-refresh), which reformats the entire stack. For example, H d s M-2 d RET changes to scientific notation but reformats only the top two stack entries in the new mode. The I prefix has another effect on the display modes. The mode is set only temporarily; the top stack entry is reformatted according to that mode, then the original mode setting is restored. In other words, I d s is equivalent to H d s d RET H d (old mode).

6.7.1 Radix Modes Calc normally displays numbers in decimal (base-10 or radix-10) notation. Calc can actually display in any radix from two (binary) to 36. When the radix is above 10, the letters A to Z are used as digits. When entering such a number, letter keys are interpreted as potential digits rather than terminating numeric entry mode. The key sequences d 2, d 8, d 6, and d 0 select binary, octal, hexadecimal, and decimal as the current display radix, respectively. Numbers can always be entered in any radix,

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

147

though the current radix is used as a default if you press # without any initial digits. A number entered without a # is always interpreted as decimal. To set the radix generally, use d r (calc-radix) and enter an integer from 2 to 36. You can specify the radix as a numeric prefix argument; otherwise you will be prompted for it. Integers normally are displayed with however many digits are necessary to represent the integer and no more. The d z (calc-leading-zeros) command causes integers to be padded out with leading zeros according to the current binary word size. (See Section 7.7 [Binary Functions], page 204, for a discussion of word size.) If the absolute value of the word size is w, all integers are displayed with at least enough digits to represent 2w − 1 in the current radix. (Larger integers will still be displayed in their entirety.) Calc can display w-bit integers using two’s complement notation, although this is most useful with the binary, octal and hexadecimal display modes. This option is selected by using the O option prefix before setting the display radix, and a negative word size might be appropriate (see Section 7.7 [Binary Functions], page 204). In two’s complement notation, the integers in the (nearly) symmetric interval from −2w−1 to 2w−1 − 1 are represented by the integers from 0 to 2w − 1: the integers from 0 to 2w−1 − 1 are represented by themselves and the integers from −2w−1 to −1 are represented by the integers from 2w−1 to 2w − 1 (the integer k is represented by k + 2w ). Calc will display a two’s complement integer by the radix (either 2, 8 or 16), two # symbols, and then its representation (including any leading zeros necessary to include all w bits). In a two’s complement display mode, numbers that are not displayed in two’s complement notation (i.e., that aren’t integers from −2w−1 to 2w−1 − 1) will be represented using Calc’s usual notation (in the appropriate radix).

6.7.2 Grouping Digits Long numbers can be hard to read if they have too many digits. For example, the factorial of 30 is 33 digits long! Press d g (calc-group-digits) to enable Grouping mode, in which digits are displayed in clumps of 3 or 4 (depending on the current radix) separated by commas. The d g command toggles grouping on and off. With a numeric prefix of 0, this command displays the current state of the grouping flag; with an argument of minus one it disables grouping; with a positive argument N it enables grouping on every N digits. For floatingpoint numbers, grouping normally occurs only before the decimal point. A negative prefix argument −N enables grouping every N digits both before and after the decimal point. The d , (calc-group-char) command allows you to choose any character as the grouping separator. The default is the comma character. If you find it difficult to read vectors of large integers grouped with commas, you may wish to use spaces or some other character instead. This command takes the next character you type, whatever it is, and uses it as the digit separator. As a special case, d , \ selects ‘\,’ (TEX’s thin-space symbol) as the digit separator. Please note that grouped numbers will not generally be parsed correctly if re-read in textual form, say by the use of C-x * y and C-x * g. (See Chapter 14 [Kill and Yank], page 337, for details on these commands.) One exception is the ‘\,’ separator, which doesn’t interfere with parsing because it is ignored by TEX language mode.

148

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

6.7.3 Float Formats Floating-point quantities are normally displayed in standard decimal form, with scientific notation used if the exponent is especially high or low. All significant digits are normally displayed. The commands in this section allow you to choose among several alternative display formats for floats. The d n (calc-normal-notation) command selects the normal display format. All significant figures in a number are displayed. With a positive numeric prefix, numbers are rounded if necessary to that number of significant digits. With a negative numerix prefix, the specified number of significant digits less than the current precision is used. (Thus C-u -2 d n displays 10 digits if the current precision is 12.) The d f (calc-fix-notation) command selects fixed-point notation. The numeric argument is the number of digits after the decimal point, zero or more. This format will relax into scientific notation if a nonzero number would otherwise have been rounded all the way to zero. Specifying a negative number of digits is the same as for a positive number, except that small nonzero numbers will be rounded to zero rather than switching to scientific notation. The d s (calc-sci-notation) command selects scientific notation. A positive argument sets the number of significant figures displayed, of which one will be before and the rest after the decimal point. A negative argument works the same as for d n format. The default is to display all significant digits. The d e (calc-eng-notation) command selects engineering notation. This is similar to scientific notation except that the exponent is rounded down to a multiple of three, with from one to three digits before the decimal point. An optional numeric prefix sets the number of significant digits to display, as for d s. It is important to distinguish between the current precision and the current display format. After the commands C-u 10 p and C-u 6 d n the Calculator computes all results to ten significant figures but displays only six. (In fact, intermediate calculations are often carried to one or two more significant figures, but values placed on the stack will be rounded down to ten figures.) Numbers are never actually rounded to the display precision for storage, except by commands like C-k and C-x * y which operate on the actual displayed text in the Calculator buffer. The d . (calc-point-char) command selects the character used as a decimal point. Normally this is a period; users in some countries may wish to change this to a comma. Note that this is only a display style; on entry, periods must always be used to denote floating-point numbers, and commas to separate elements in a list.

6.7.4 Complex Formats There are three supported notations for complex numbers in rectangular form. The default is as a pair of real numbers enclosed in parentheses and separated by a comma: ‘(a,b)’. The d c (calc-complex-notation) command selects this style. The other notations are d i (calc-i-notation), in which numbers are displayed in ‘a+bi’ form, and d j (calc-j-notation) which displays the form ‘a+bj’ preferred in some disciplines. Complex numbers are normally entered in ‘(a,b)’ format. If you enter ‘2+3i’ as an algebraic formula, it will be stored as the formula ‘2 + 3 * i’. However, if you use = to

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

149

evaluate this formula and you have not changed the variable ‘i’, the ‘i’ will be interpreted as ‘(0,1)’ and the formula will be simplified to ‘(2,3)’. Other commands (like calc-sin) will not interpret the formula ‘2 + 3 * i’ as a complex number. See Section 4.14 [Variables], page 126, under “special constants.”

6.7.5 Fraction Formats Display of fractional numbers is controlled by the d o (calc-over-notation) command. By default, a number like eight thirds is displayed in the form ‘8:3’. The d o command prompts for a one- or two-character format. If you give one character, that character is used as the fraction separator. Common separators are ‘:’ and ‘/’. (During input of numbers, the : key must be used regardless of the display format; in particular, the / is used for RPN-style division, not for entering fractions.) If you give two characters, fractions use “integer-plus-fractional-part” notation. For example, the format ‘+/’ would display eight thirds as ‘2+2/3’. If two colons are present in a number being entered, the number is interpreted in this form (so that the entries 2:2:3 and 8:3 are equivalent). It is also possible to follow the one- or two-character format with a number. For example: ‘:10’ or ‘+/3’. In this case, Calc adjusts all fractions that are displayed to have the specified denominator, if possible. Otherwise it adjusts the denominator to be a multiple of the specified value. For example, in ‘:6’ mode the fraction 1:6 will be unaffected, but 2:3 will be displayed as 4:6, 1:2 will be displayed as 3:6, and 1:8 will be displayed as 3:24. Integers are also affected by this mode: 3 is displayed as 18:6. Note that the format ‘:1’ writes fractions the same as ‘:’, but it writes integers as n:1. The fraction format does not affect the way fractions or integers are stored, only the way they appear on the screen. The fraction format never affects floats.

6.7.6 HMS Formats The d h (calc-hms-notation) command controls the display of HMS (hours-minutesseconds) forms. It prompts for a string which consists basically of an “hours” marker, optional punctuation, a “minutes” marker, more optional punctuation, and a “seconds” marker. Punctuation is zero or more spaces, commas, or semicolons. The hours marker is one or more non-punctuation characters. The minutes and seconds markers must be single non-punctuation characters. The default HMS format is ‘@ ’ "’, producing HMS values of the form ‘23@ 30’ 15.75"’. The format ‘deg, ms’ would display this same value as ‘23deg, 30m15.75s’. During numeric entry, the h or o keys are recognized as synonyms for @ regardless of display format. The m and s keys are recognized as synonyms for ’ and ", respectively, but only if an @ (or h or o) has already been typed; otherwise, they have their usual meanings (m- prefix and sprefix). Thus, 5 ", 0 @ 5 ", and 0 h 5 s are some of the ways to enter the quantity “five seconds.” The ’ key is recognized as “minutes” only if @ (or h or o) has already been pressed; otherwise it means to switch to algebraic entry.

6.7.7 Date Formats The d d (calc-date-notation) command controls the display of date forms (see Section 4.9 [Date Forms], page 120). It prompts for a string which contains letters that represent the various parts of a date and time. To show which parts should be omitted when the form

150

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

represents a pure date with no time, parts of the string can be enclosed in ‘< >’ marks. If you don’t include ‘< >’ markers in the format, Calc guesses at which parts, if any, should be omitted when formatting pure dates. The default format is: ‘Www Mmm D, YYYY’. An example string in this format is ‘3:32pm Wed Jan 9, 1991’. If you enter a blank format string, this default format is reestablished. Calc uses ‘< >’ notation for nameless functions as well as for dates. See Section 9.8.1 [Specifying Operators], page 233. To avoid confusion with nameless functions, your date formats should avoid using the ‘#’ character.

6.7.7.1 ISO 8601 The same date can be written down in different formats and Calc tries to allow you to choose your preferred format. Some common formats are ambiguous, however; for example, 10/11/2012 means October 11, 2012 in the United States but it means November 10, 2012 in Europe. To help avoid such ambiguities, the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) provides the ISO 8601 standard, which provides three different but easily distinguishable and unambiguous ways to represent a date. The ISO 8601 calendar date representation is YYYY-MM-DD where YYYY is the four digit year, MM is the two-digit month number (01 for January to 12 for December), and DD is the two-digit day of the month (01 to 31). (Note that YYYY does not correspond to Calc’s date formatting code, which will be introduced later.) The year, which should be padded with zeros to ensure it has at least four digits, is the Gregorian year, except that the year before 0001 (1 AD) is the year 0000 (1 BC). The date October 11, 2012 is written 2012-10-11 in this representation and November 10, 2012 is written 2012-11-10. The ISO 8601 ordinal date representation is YYYY-DDD where YYYY is the year, as above, and DDD is the day of the year. The date December 31, 2011 is written 2011-365 in this representation and January 1, 2012 is written 2012-001. The ISO 8601 week date representation is YYYY-Www-D where YYYY is the ISO week-numbering year, ww is the two digit week number (preceded by a literal “W”), and D is the day of the week (1 for Monday through 7 for Sunday). The ISO week-numbering year is based on the Gregorian year but can differ slightly. The first week of an ISO week-numbering year is the week with the Gregorian year’s first Thursday in it (equivalently, the week containing January 4); any day of that week (Monday through Sunday) is part of the same ISO week-numbering year, any day from the previous week is part of the previous year. For example, January 4, 2013 is on a Friday, and so the first week for the ISO week-numbering year 2013 starts on Monday, December 31, 2012. The day December 31, 2012 is then part of the Gregorian year 2012 but ISO week-numbering year 2013. In the week date representation, this week goes from 2013-W01-1 (December 31, 2012) to 2013-W01-7 (January 6, 2013).

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

151

All three ISO 8601 representations arrange the numbers from most significant to least significant; as well as being unambiguous representations, they are easy to sort since chronological order in this formats corresponds to lexicographical order. The hyphens are sometimes omitted. The ISO 8601 standard uses a 24 hour clock; a particular time is represented by hh:mm:ss where hh is the two-digit hour (from 00 to 24), mm is the two-digit minute (from 00 to 59) and ss is the two-digit second. The seconds or minutes and seconds can be omitted, and decimals can be added. If a date with a time is represented, they should be separated by a literal “T”, so noon on December 13, 2012 can be represented as 2012-12-13T12:00.

6.7.7.2 Date Formatting Codes When displaying a date, the current date format is used. All characters except for letters and ‘’ are copied literally when dates are formatted. The portion between ‘< >’ markers is omitted for pure dates, or included for date/time forms. Letters are interpreted according to the table below. When dates are read in during algebraic entry, Calc first tries to match the input string to the current format either with or without the time part. The punctuation characters (including spaces) must match exactly; letter fields must correspond to suitable text in the input. If this doesn’t work, Calc checks if the input is a simple number; if so, the number is interpreted as a number of days since Dec 31, 1 BC. Otherwise, Calc tries a much more relaxed and flexible algorithm which is described in the next section. Weekday names are ignored during reading. Two-digit year numbers are interpreted as lying in the range from 1941 to 2039. Years outside that range are always entered and displayed in full. Year numbers with a leading ‘+’ sign are always interpreted exactly, allowing the entry and display of the years 1 through 99 AD. Here is a complete list of the formatting codes for dates: Y

Year: “91” for 1991, “7” for 2007, “+23” for 23 AD.

Year: “91” for 1991, “07” for 2007, “+23” for 23 AD.

Year: “91” for 1991, “ 7” for 2007, “+23” for 23 AD.

YYY

Year: “1991” for 1991, “23” for 23 AD.

YYYY

Year: “1991” for 1991, “+23” for 23 AD.

ZYYY

Year: “1991” for 1991, “0023” for 23 AD, “0000” for 1 BC.

IYYY

Year: ISO 8601 week-numbering year.

Year: “ad” or blank.

Year: “AD” or blank.

aaa

Year: “ad ” or blank. (Note trailing space.)

AAA

Year: “AD ” or blank.

aaaa

Year: “a.d.” or blank.

AAAA

Year: “A.D.” or blank.

152

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Year: “bc” or blank.

Year: “BC” or blank.

bbb

Year: “ bc” or blank. (Note leading space.)

BBB

Year: “ BC” or blank.

bbbb

Year: “b.c.” or blank.

BBBB

Year: “B.C.” or blank.

Month: “8” for August.

Month: “08” for August.

Month: “ 8” for August.

MMM

Month: “AUG” for August.

Mmm

Month: “Aug” for August.

mmm

Month: “aug” for August.

MMMM

Month: “AUGUST” for August.

Mmmm

Month: “August” for August.

Day: “7” for 7th day of month.

Day: “07” for 7th day of month.

Day: “ 7” for 7th day of month.

Weekday: “0” for Sunday, “6” for Saturday.

Weekday: “1” for Monday, “7” for Sunday.

WWW

Weekday: “SUN” for Sunday.

Www

Weekday: “Sun” for Sunday.

www

Weekday: “sun” for Sunday.

WWWW

Weekday: “SUNDAY” for Sunday.

Wwww

Weekday: “Sunday” for Sunday.

Iww

Week number: ISO 8601 week number, “W01” for week 1.

Day of year: “34” for Feb. 3.

ddd

Day of year: “034” for Feb. 3.

bdd

Day of year: “ 34” for Feb. 3.

Letter: Literal “T”.

Hour: “5” for 5 AM; “17” for 5 PM.

Hour: “05” for 5 AM; “17” for 5 PM.

Hour: “ 5” for 5 AM; “17” for 5 PM.

Hour: “5” for 5 AM and 5 PM.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

153

Hour: “05” for 5 AM and 5 PM.

Hour: “ 5” for 5 AM and 5 PM.

AM/PM: “a” or “p”.

AM/PM: “A” or “P”.

AM/PM: “am” or “pm”.

AM/PM: “AM” or “PM”.

pppp

AM/PM: “a.m.” or “p.m.”.

PPPP

AM/PM: “A.M.” or “P.M.”.

Minutes: “7” for 7.

Minutes: “07” for 7.

Minutes: “ 7” for 7.

Seconds: “7” for 7; “7.23” for 7.23.

Seconds: “07” for 7; “07.23” for 7.23.

Seconds: “ 7” for 7; “ 7.23” for 7.23.

Optional seconds: “07” for 7; blank for 0.

Optional seconds: “ 7” for 7; blank for 0.

Numeric date/time: “726842.25” for 6:00am Wed Jan 9, 1991.

Numeric date: “726842” for any time on Wed Jan 9, 1991.

Julian date/time: “2448265.75” for 6:00am Wed Jan 9, 1991.

Julian date: “2448266” for any time on Wed Jan 9, 1991.

Unix time: “663400800” for 6:00am Wed Jan 9, 1991.

Brackets suppression. An “X” at the front of the format causes the surrounding ‘< >’ delimiters to be omitted when formatting dates. Note that the brackets are still required for algebraic entry.

If “SS” or “BS” (optional seconds) is preceded by a colon, the colon is also omitted if the seconds part is zero. If “bb,” “bbb” or “bbbb” or their upper-case equivalents appear in the format, then negative year numbers are displayed without a minus sign. Note that “aa” and “bb” are mutually exclusive. Some typical usages would be ‘YYYY AABB’; ‘AAAYYYYBBB’; ‘YYYYBBB’. The formats “YY,” “YYYY,” “MM,” “DD,” “ddd,” “hh,” “HH,” “mm,” “ss,” and “SS” actually match any number of digits during reading unless several of these codes are strung together with no punctuation in between, in which case the input must have exactly as many digits as there are letters in the format. The “j,” “J,” and “U” formats do not make any time zone adjustment. They effectively use ‘julian(x,0)’ and ‘unixtime(x,0)’ to make the conversion; see Section 7.5 [Date Arithmetic], page 190.

154

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

6.7.7.3 Free-Form Dates When reading a date form during algebraic entry, Calc falls back on the algorithm described here if the input does not exactly match the current date format. This algorithm generally “does the right thing” and you don’t have to worry about it, but it is described here in full detail for the curious. Calc does not distinguish between upper- and lower-case letters while interpreting dates. First, the time portion, if present, is located somewhere in the text and then removed. The remaining text is then interpreted as the date. A time is of the form ‘hh:mm:ss’, possibly with the seconds part omitted and possibly with an AM/PM indicator added to indicate 12-hour time. If the AM/PM is present, the minutes may also be omitted. The AM/PM part may be any of the words ‘am’, ‘pm’, ‘noon’, or ‘midnight’; each of these may be abbreviated to one letter, and the alternate forms ‘a.m.’, ‘p.m.’, and ‘mid’ are also understood. Obviously ‘noon’ and ‘midnight’ are allowed only on 12:00:00. The words ‘noon’, ‘mid’, and ‘midnight’ are also recognized with no number attached. Midnight will represent the beginning of a day. If there is no AM/PM indicator, the time is interpreted in 24-hour format. When reading the date portion, Calc first checks to see if it is an ISO 8601 weeknumbering date; if the string contains an integer representing the year, a “W” followed by two digits for the week number, and an integer from 1 to 7 representing the weekday (in that order), then all other characters are ignored and this information determines the date. Otherwise, all words and numbers are isolated from the string; other characters are ignored. All words must be either month names or day-of-week names (the latter of which are ignored). Names can be written in full or as three-letter abbreviations. Large numbers, or numbers with ‘+’ or ‘-’ signs, are interpreted as years. If one of the other numbers is greater than 12, then that must be the day and the remaining number in the input is therefore the month. Otherwise, Calc assumes the month, day and year are in the same order that they appear in the current date format. If the year is omitted, the current year is taken from the system clock. If there are too many or too few numbers, or any unrecognizable words, then the input is rejected. If there are any large numbers (of five digits or more) other than the year, they are ignored on the assumption that they are something like Julian dates that were included along with the traditional date components when the date was formatted. One of the words ‘ad’, ‘a.d.’, ‘bc’, or ‘b.c.’ may optionally be used; the latter two are equivalent to a minus sign on the year value. If you always enter a four-digit year, and use a name instead of a number for the month, there is no danger of ambiguity.

6.7.7.4 Standard Date Formats There are actually ten standard date formats, numbered 0 through 9. Entering a blank line at the d d command’s prompt gives you format number 1, Calc’s usual format. You can enter any digit to select the other formats. To create your own standard date formats, give a numeric prefix argument from 0 to 9 to the d d command. The format you enter will be recorded as the new standard format of

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

155

that number, as well as becoming the new current date format. You can save your formats permanently with the m m command (see Chapter 6 [Mode Settings], page 135). 0

‘N’ (Numerical format)

‘Www Mmm D, YYYY’ (American format)

‘D Mmm YYYY’ (European format)

‘Www Mmm BD< hh:mm:ss> YYYY’ (Unix written date format)

‘M/D/Y< H:mm:SSpp>’ (American slashed format)

‘D.M.Y< h:mm:SS>’ (European dotted format)

‘M-D-Y< H:mm:SSpp>’ (American dashed format)

‘D-M-Y< h:mm:SS>’ (European dashed format)

‘j’ (Julian day plus time)

‘YYddd< hh:mm:ss>’ (Year-day format)

‘ZYYY-MM-DD Www< hh:mm>’ (Org mode format)

‘IYYY-Iww-w’ (ISO 8601 week numbering format)

6.7.8 Truncating the Stack The d t (calc-truncate-stack) command moves the ‘.’ line that marks the top-of-stack up or down in the Calculator buffer. The number right above that line is considered to the be at the top of the stack. Any numbers below that line are “hidden” from all stack operations (although still visible to the user). This is similar to the Emacs “narrowing” feature, except that the values below the ‘.’ are visible, just temporarily frozen. This feature allows you to keep several independent calculations running at once in different parts of the stack, or to apply a certain command to an element buried deep in the stack. Pressing d t by itself moves the ‘.’ to the line the cursor is on. Thus, this line and all those below it become hidden. To un-hide these lines, move down to the end of the buffer and press d t. With a positive numeric prefix argument n, d t hides the bottom n values in the buffer. With a negative argument, it hides all but the top n values. With an argument of zero, it hides zero values, i.e., moves the ‘.’ all the way down to the bottom. The d [ (calc-truncate-up) and d ] (calc-truncate-down) commands move the ‘.’ up or down one line at a time (or several lines with a prefix argument).

6.7.9 Justification Values on the stack are normally left-justified in the window. You can control this arrangement by typing d < (calc-left-justify), d > (calc-right-justify), or d = (calc-center-justify). For example, in Right-Justification mode, stack entries are displayed flush-right against the right edge of the window. If you change the width of the Calculator window you may have to type d SPC (calc-refresh) to re-align right-justified or centered text. Right-justification is especially useful together with fixed-point notation (see d f; calc-fix-notation). With these modes together, the decimal points on numbers will always line up.

156

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

With a numeric prefix argument, the justification commands give you a little extra control over the display. The argument specifies the horizontal “origin” of a display line. It is also possible to specify a maximum line width using the d b command (see Section 6.8.1 [Normal Language Modes], page 157). For reference, the precise rules for formatting and breaking lines are given below. Notice that the interaction between origin and line width is slightly different in each justification mode. In Left-Justified mode, the line is indented by a number of spaces given by the origin (default zero). If the result is longer than the maximum line width, if given, or too wide to fit in the Calc window otherwise, then it is broken into lines which will fit; each broken line is indented to the origin. In Right-Justified mode, lines are shifted right so that the rightmost character is just before the origin, or just before the current window width if no origin was specified. If the line is too long for this, then it is broken; the current line width is used, if specified, or else the origin is used as a width if that is specified, or else the line is broken to fit in the window. In Centering mode, the origin is the column number of the center of each stack entry. If a line width is specified, lines will not be allowed to go past that width; Calc will either indent less or break the lines if necessary. If no origin is specified, half the line width or Calc window width is used. Note that, in each case, if line numbering is enabled the display is indented an additional four spaces to make room for the line number. The width of the line number is taken into account when positioning according to the current Calc window width, but not when positioning by explicit origins and widths. In the latter case, the display is formatted as specified, and then uniformly shifted over four spaces to fit the line numbers.

6.7.10 Labels The d { (calc-left-label) command prompts for a string, then displays that string to the left of every stack entry. If the entries are left-justified (see Section 6.7.9 [Justification], page 155), then they will appear immediately after the label (unless you specified an origin greater than the length of the label). If the entries are centered or right-justified, the label appears on the far left and does not affect the horizontal position of the stack entry. Give a blank string (with d { RET) to turn the label off. The d } (calc-right-label) command similarly adds a label on the righthand side. It does not affect positioning of the stack entries unless they are right-justified. Also, if both a line width and an origin are given in Right-Justified mode, the stack entry is justified to the origin and the righthand label is justified to the line width. One application of labels would be to add equation numbers to formulas you are manipulating in Calc and then copying into a document (possibly using Embedded mode). The equations would typically be centered, and the equation numbers would be on the left or right as you prefer.

6.8 Language Modes The commands in this section change Calc to use a different notation for entry and display of formulas, corresponding to the conventions of some other common language such as Pascal

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

157

or LATEX. Objects displayed on the stack or yanked from the Calculator to an editing buffer will be formatted in the current language; objects entered in algebraic entry or yanked from another buffer will be interpreted according to the current language. The current language has no effect on things written to or read from the trail buffer, nor does it affect numeric entry. Only algebraic entry is affected. You can make even algebraic entry ignore the current language and use the standard notation by giving a numeric prefix, e.g., C-u ’. For example, suppose the formula ‘2*a[1] + atan(a[2])’ occurs in a C program; elsewhere in the program you need the derivatives of this formula with respect to ‘a[1]’ and ‘a[2]’. First, type d C to switch to C notation. Now use C-u C-x * g to grab the formula into the Calculator, a d a[1] RET to differentiate with respect to the first variable, and C-x * y to yank the formula for the derivative back into your C program. Press U to undo the differentiation and repeat with a d a[2] RET for the other derivative. Without being switched into C mode first, Calc would have misinterpreted the brackets in ‘a[1]’ and ‘a[2]’, would not have known that atan was equivalent to Calc’s built-in arctan function, and would have written the formula back with notations (like implicit multiplication) which would not have been valid for a C program. As another example, suppose you are maintaining a C program and a LATEX document, each of which needs a copy of the same formula. You can grab the formula from the program in C mode, switch to LATEX mode, and yank the formula into the document in LATEX math-mode format. Language modes are selected by typing the letter d followed by a shifted letter key.

6.8.1 Normal Language Modes The d N (calc-normal-language) command selects the usual notation for Calc formulas, as described in the rest of this manual. Matrices are displayed in a multi-line tabular format, but all other objects are written in linear form, as they would be typed from the keyboard. The d O (calc-flat-language) command selects a language identical with the normal one, except that matrices are written in one-line form along with everything else. In some applications this form may be more suitable for yanking data into other buffers. Even in one-line mode, long formulas or vectors will still be split across multiple lines if they exceed the width of the Calculator window. The d b (calc-line-breaking) command turns this line-breaking feature on and off. (It works independently of the current language.) If you give a numeric prefix argument of five or greater to the d b command, that argument will specify the line width used when breaking long lines. The d B (calc-big-language) command selects a language which uses textual approximations to various mathematical notations, such as powers, quotients, and square roots: ____________ | a + 1 2 | ----- + c \| b in place of ‘sqrt((a+1)/b + c^2)’. Subscripts like ‘a_i’ are displayed as actual subscripts in Big mode. Double subscripts, ‘a_i_j’ (‘subscr(subscr(a, i), j)’) are displayed as ‘a’ with subscripts separated by commas: ‘i, j’. They must still be entered in the usual underscore notation.

158

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

One slight ambiguity of Big notation is that 3 - 4 can represent either the negative rational number −3:4, or the actual expression ‘-(3/4)’; but the latter formula would normally never be displayed because it would immediately be evaluated to −3:4 or −0.75, so this ambiguity is not a problem in typical use. Non-decimal numbers are displayed with subscripts. Thus there is no way to tell the difference between ‘16#C2’ and ‘C2_16’, though generally you will know which interpretation is correct. Logarithms ‘log(x,b)’ and ‘log10(x)’ also use subscripts in Big mode. In Big mode, stack entries often take up several lines. To aid readability, stack entries are separated by a blank line in this mode. You may find it useful to expand the Calc window’s height using C-x ^ (enlarge-window) or to make the Calc window the only one on the screen with C-x 1 (delete-other-windows). Long lines are currently not rearranged to fit the window width in Big mode, so you may need to use the < and > keys to scroll across a wide formula. For really big formulas, you may even need to use { and } to scroll up and down. The d U (calc-unformatted-language) command altogether disables the use of operator notation in formulas. In this mode, the formula shown above would be displayed: sqrt(add(div(add(a, 1), b), pow(c, 2))) These four modes differ only in display format, not in the format expected for algebraic entry. The standard Calc operators work in all four modes, and unformatted notation works in any language mode (except that Mathematica mode expects square brackets instead of parentheses).

6.8.2 C, FORTRAN, and Pascal Modes The d C (calc-c-language) command selects the conventions of the C language for display and entry of formulas. This differs from the normal language mode in a variety of (mostly minor) ways. In particular, C language operators and operator precedences are used in place of Calc’s usual ones. For example, ‘a^b’ means ‘xor(a,b)’ in C mode; a value raised to a power is written as a function call, ‘pow(a,b)’. In C mode, vectors and matrices use curly braces instead of brackets. Octal and hexadecimal values are written with leading ‘0’ or ‘0x’ rather than using the ‘#’ symbol. Array subscripting is translated into subscr calls, so that ‘a[i]’ in C mode is the same as ‘a_i’ in Normal mode. Assignments turn into the assign function, which Calc normally displays using the ‘:=’ symbol. The variables pi and e would be displayed ‘pi’ and ‘e’ in Normal mode, but in C mode they are displayed as ‘M_PI’ and ‘M_E’, corresponding to the names of constants typically provided in the header. Functions whose names are different in C are translated automatically for entry and display purposes. For example, entering ‘asin(x)’ will push the formula ‘arcsin(x)’ onto the stack; this formula will be displayed as ‘asin(x)’ as long as C mode is in effect. The d P (calc-pascal-language) command selects Pascal conventions. Like C mode, Pascal mode interprets array brackets and uses a different table of operators. Hexadecimal

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

159

numbers are entered and displayed with a preceding dollar sign. (Thus the regular meaning of $2 during algebraic entry does not work in Pascal mode, though $ (and $$, etc.) not followed by digits works the same as always.) No special provisions are made for other non-decimal numbers, vectors, and so on, since there is no universally accepted standard way of handling these in Pascal. The d F (calc-fortran-language) command selects FORTRAN conventions. Various function names are transformed into FORTRAN equivalents. Vectors are written as ‘/1, 2, 3/’, and may be entered this way or using square brackets. Since FORTRAN uses round parentheses for both function calls and array subscripts, Calc displays both in the same way; ‘a(i)’ is interpreted as a function call upon reading, and subscripts must be entered as ‘subscr(a, i)’. If the variable a has been declared to have type vector or matrix, however, then ‘a(i)’ will be parsed as a subscript. (See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141.) Usually it doesn’t matter, though; if you enter the subscript expression ‘a(i)’ and Calc interprets it as a function call, you’ll never know the difference unless you switch to another language mode or replace a with an actual vector (or unless a happens to be the name of a built-in function!). Underscores are allowed in variable and function names in all of these language modes. The underscore here is equivalent to the ‘#’ in Normal mode, or to hyphens in the underlying Emacs Lisp variable names. FORTRAN and Pascal modes normally do not adjust the case of letters in formulas. Most built-in Calc names use lower-case letters. If you use a positive numeric prefix argument with d P or d F, these modes will use upper-case letters exclusively for display, and will convert to lower-case on input. With a negative prefix, these modes convert to lower-case for display and input.

6.8.3 TEX and LATEX Language Modes The d T (calc-tex-language) command selects the conventions of “math mode” in Donald Knuth’s TEX typesetting language, and the d L (calc-latex-language) command selects the conventions of “math mode” in LATEX, a typesetting language that uses TEX as its formatting engine. Calc’s LATEX language mode can read any formula that the TEX language mode can, although LATEX mode may display it differently. Formulas are entered and displayed in the appropriate notation; sin(a/b) will appear as ‘\sin\left( {a \over b} \right)’ in TEX mode and ‘\sin\left(\frac{a}{b}\right)’ in LATEX mode. Math formulas are often enclosed by ‘$ $’ signs in TEX and LATEX; these should be omitted when interfacing with Calc. To Calc, the ‘$’ sign has the same meaning it always does in algebraic formulas (a reference to an existing entry on the stack). Complex numbers are displayed as in ‘3 + 4i’. Fractions and quotients are written using \over in TEX mode (as in {a \over b}) and \frac in LATEX mode (as in \frac{a}{b}); binomial coefficients are written with \choose in TEX mode (as in {a \choose b}) and \binom in LATEX mode (as in \binom{a}{b}). Interval forms are written with \ldots, and error forms are written with \pm. Absolute values are written as in ‘|x + 1|’, and the floor and ceiling functions are written with \lfloor, \rfloor, etc. The words \left and \right are ignored when reading formulas in TEX and LATEX modes. Both inf and uinf are written as \infty; when read, \infty always translates to inf. Function calls are written the usual way, with the function name followed by the arguments in parentheses. However, functions for which TEX and LATEX have special names (like

160

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

\sin) will use curly braces instead of parentheses for very simple arguments. During input, curly braces and parentheses work equally well for grouping, but when the document is formatted the curly braces will be invisible. Thus the printed result is sin 2x but sin(2 + x). The TEX specific unit names (see Section 11.3 [Predefined Units], page 314) will not use the ‘tex’ prefix; the unit name for a TEX point will be ‘pt’ instead of ‘texpt’, for example. Function and variable names not treated specially by TEX and LATEX are simply written out as-is, which will cause them to come out in italic letters in the printed document. If you invoke d T or d L with a positive numeric prefix argument, names of more than one character will instead be enclosed in a protective commands that will prevent them from being typeset in the math italics; they will be written ‘\hbox{name}’ in TEX mode and ‘\text{name}’ in LATEX mode. The ‘\hbox{ }’ and ‘\text{ }’ notations are ignored during reading. If you use a negative prefix argument, such function names are written ‘\name’, and function names that begin with \ during reading have the \ removed. (Note that in this mode, long variable names are still written with \hbox or \text. However, you can always make an actual variable name like \bar in any TEX mode.) During reading, text of the form ‘\matrix{ ... }’ is replaced by ‘[ ... ]’. The same also applies to \pmatrix and \bmatrix. In LATEX mode this also applies to ‘\begin{matrix} ... \end{matrix}’, ‘\begin{bmatrix} ... \end{bmatrix}’, ‘\begin{pmatrix} ... \end{pmatrix}’, as well as ‘\begin{smallmatrix} ... \end{smallmatrix}’. The symbol ‘&’ is interpreted as a comma, and the symbols ‘\cr’ and ‘\\’ are interpreted as semicolons. During output, matrices are displayed in ‘\matrix{ a & b \\ c & d}’ format in TEX mode and in ‘\begin{pmatrix} a & b \\ c & d \end{pmatrix}’ format in LATEX mode; you may need to edit this afterwards to change to your preferred matrix form. If you invoke d T or d L with an argument of 2 or -2, then matrices will be displayed in two-dimensional form, such as \begin{pmatrix} a & b \\ c & d \end{pmatrix} This may be convenient for isolated matrices, but could lead to expressions being displayed like \begin{pmatrix} \times x a & b \\ c & d \end{pmatrix} While this wouldn’t bother Calc, it is incorrect LATEX. (Similarly for TEX.) Accents like \tilde and \bar translate into function calls internally (‘tilde(x)’, ‘bar(x)’). The \underline sequence is treated as an accent. The \vec accent corresponds to the function name Vec, because vec is the name of a built-in Calc function. The following table shows the accents in Calc, TEX, LATEX and eqn (described in the next section): Calc TeX LaTeX eqn -----------acute \acute \acute Acute \Acute

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

bar Bar breve Breve check Check dddot ddddot dot Dot dotdot DotDot dyad grave Grave hat Hat Prime tilde Tilde under Vec VEC

\bar \breve \check

\dot \ddot

161

\bar \Bar \breve \Breve \check \Check \dddot \ddddot \dot \Dot \ddot \Ddot

bar

dot dotdot dyad

\grave \hat

\tilde \underline \vec

\grave \Grave \hat \Hat \tilde \Tilde \underline \vec \Vec

hat prime tilde under vec

The ‘=>’ (evaluates-to) operator appears as a \to symbol: ‘{a \to b}’. TEX defines \to as an alias for \rightarrow. However, if the ‘=>’ is the top-level expression being formatted, a slightly different notation is used: ‘\evalto a \to b’. The \evalto word is ignored by Calc’s input routines, and is undefined in TEX. You will typically want to include one of the following definitions at the top of a TEX file that uses \evalto: \def\evalto{} \def\evalto#1\to{} The first definition formats evaluates-to operators in the usual way. The second causes only the b part to appear in the printed document; the a part and the arrow are hidden. Another definition you may wish to use is ‘\let\to=\Rightarrow’ which causes \to to appear more like Calc’s ‘=>’ symbol. See Section 12.5 [Evaluates-To Operator], page 325, for a discussion of evalto. The complete set of TEX control sequences that are ignored during reading is: \hbox \mbox \text \left \right \, \> \: \; \! \quad \qquad \hfil \hfill \displaystyle \textstyle \dsize \tsize \scriptstyle \scriptscriptstyle \ssize \ssize \rm \bf \it \sl \roman \bold \italic \slanted \cal \mit \Cal \Bbb \frak \goth \evalto Note that, because these symbols are ignored, reading a TEX or LATEX formula into Calc and writing it back out may lose spacing and font information.

162

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Also, the “discretionary multiplication sign” ‘\*’ is read the same as ‘*’. Here are some examples of how various Calc formulas are formatted in TEX: sin(a^2 / b_i) \sin\left( a^2 \over b_i \right)

sin

a2 bi

[(3, 4), 3:4, 3 +/- 4, [3 .. inf)] [3 + 4i, {3 \over 4}, 3 \pm 4, [3 \ldots \infty)] 3 [3 + 4i, , 3 ± 4, [3 . . . ∞)] 4 [abs(a), abs(a / b), floor(a), ceil(a / b)] [|a|, \left| a \over b \right|, \lfloor a \rfloor, \left\lceil a \over b \right\rceil]

a a ] [|a|, , bac, b b

[sin(a), sin(2 a), sin(2 + a), sin(a / b)] [\sin{a}, \sin{2 a}, \sin(2 + a), \sin\left( {a \over b} \right)] a ] b

[sin a, sin 2a, sin(2 + a), sin

First with plain d T, then with C-u d T, then finally with C-u - d T (using the example definition ‘\def\foo#1{\tilde F(#1)}’: [f(a), [f(a), [f(a), [f(a),

foo(bar), sin(pi)] foo(bar), \sin\pi] \hbox{foo}(\hbox{bar}), \sin{\pi}] \foo{\hbox{bar}}, \sin{\pi}] [f (a), f oo(bar), sin π] [f (a), foo(bar), sin π] ~ (bar), sin π] [f (a), F

First with ‘\def\evalto{}’, then with ‘\def\evalto#1\to{}’:

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

163

2 + 3 => 5 \evalto 2 + 3 \to 5 2+3→5 5

First with standard \to, then with ‘\let\to\Rightarrow’: [2 + 3 => 5, a / 2 => (b + c) / 2] [{2 + 3 \to 5}, {{a \over 2} \to {b + c \over 2}}] [2 + 3 → 5,

a b+c → ] 2 2

[2 + 3 ⇒ 5,

a b+c ⇒ ] 2 2

Matrices normally, then changing \matrix to \pmatrix: [ [ a / b, 0 ], [ 0, 2^(x + 1) ] ] \matrix{ {a \over b} & 0 \\ 0 & 2^{(x + 1)} } \pmatrix{ {a \over b} & 0 \\ 0 & 2^{(x + 1)} } a b

0 2(x+1)

a b

2(x+1)

6.8.4 Eqn Language Mode Eqn is another popular formatter for math formulas. It is designed for use with the TROFF text formatter, and comes standard with many versions of Unix. The d E (calc-eqnlanguage) command selects eqn notation. The eqn language’s main idiosyncrasy is that whitespace plays a significant part in the parsing of the language. For example, ‘sqrt x+1 + y’ treats ‘x+1’ as the argument of the sqrt operator. Eqn also understands more conventional grouping using curly braces: ‘sqrt{x+1} + y’. Braces are required only when the argument contains spaces. In Calc’s eqn mode, however, curly braces are required to delimit arguments of operators like sqrt. The first of the above examples would treat only the ‘x’ as the argument of sqrt, and in fact ‘sin x+1’ would be interpreted as ‘sin * x + 1’, because sin is not a special operator in the eqn language. If you always surround the argument with curly braces, Calc will never misunderstand.

164

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Calc also understands parentheses as grouping characters. Another peculiarity of eqn’s syntax makes it advisable to separate words with spaces from any surrounding characters that aren’t curly braces, so Calc writes ‘sin ( x + y )’ in eqn mode. (The spaces around sin are important to make eqn recognize that sin should be typeset in a roman font, and the spaces around x and y are a good idea just in case the eqn document has defined special meanings for these names, too.) Powers and subscripts are written with the sub and sup operators, respectively. Note that the caret symbol ‘^’ is treated the same as a space in eqn mode, as is the ‘~’ symbol (these are used to introduce spaces of various widths into the typeset output of eqn). As in LATEX mode, Calc’s formatter omits parentheses around the arguments of functions like ln and sin if they are “simple-looking”; in this case Calc surrounds the argument with braces, separated by a ‘~’ from the function name: ‘sin~{x}’. Font change codes (like ‘roman x’) and positioning codes (like ‘~’ and ‘down n x’) are ignored by the eqn reader. Also ignored are the words left, right, mark, and lineup. Quotation marks in eqn mode input are treated the same as curly braces: ‘sqrt "1+x"’ is equivalent to ‘sqrt {1+x}’; this is only an approximation to the true meaning of quotes in eqn, but it is good enough for most uses. Accent codes (‘x dot’) are handled by treating them as function calls (‘dot(x)’) internally. See Section 6.8.3 [TeX and LaTeX Language Modes], page 159, for a table of these accent functions. The prime accent is treated specially if it occurs on a variable or function name: ‘f prime prime ( x prime )’ is stored internally as ‘f’’(x’)’. For example, taking the derivative of ‘f(2 x)’ with a d x will produce ‘2 f’(2 x)’, which eqn mode will display as ‘2 f prime ( 2 x )’. Assignments are written with the ‘’ or ‘evalto ... ->’ (see Section 6.8.3 [TeX and LaTeX Language Modes], page 159, for a discussion of this). The regular Calc symbols ‘:=’ and ‘=>’ are also recognized for these operators during reading. Vectors in eqn mode use regular Calc square brackets, but matrices are formatted as ‘matrix { ccol { a above b } ... }’. The words lcol and rcol are recognized as synonyms for ccol during input, and are generated instead of ccol if the matrix justification mode so specifies.

6.8.5 Yacas Language Mode The d Y (calc-yacas-language) command selects the conventions of Yacas, a free computer algebra system. While the operators and functions in Yacas are similar to those of Calc, the names of built-in functions in Yacas are capitalized. The Calc formula ‘sin(2 x)’, for example, is entered and displayed ‘Sin(2 x)’ in Yacas mode, and ‘‘arcsin(x^2)’ is ‘ArcSin(x^2)’ in Yacas mode. Complex numbers are written are written ‘3 + 4 I’. The standard special constants are written Pi, E, I, GoldenRatio and Gamma. Infinity represents both inf and uinf, and Undefined represents nan. Certain operators on functions, such as D for differentiation and Integrate for integration, take a prefix form in Yacas. For example, the derivative of ‘e^x sin(x)’ can be computed with ‘D(x) Exp(x)*Sin(x)’.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

165

Other notable differences between Yacas and standard Calc expressions are that vectors and matrices use curly braces in Yacas, and subscripts use square brackets. If, for example, ‘A’ represents the list ‘{a,2,c,4}’, then ‘A[3]’ would equal ‘c’.

6.8.6 Maxima Language Mode The d X (calc-maxima-language) command selects the conventions of Maxima, another free computer algebra system. The function names in Maxima are similar, but not always identical, to Calc. For example, instead of ‘arcsin(x)’, Maxima will use ‘asin(x)’. Complex numbers are written ‘3 + 4 %i’. The standard special constants are written %pi, %e, %i, %phi and %gamma. In Maxima, inf means the same as in Calc, but infinity represents Calc’s uinf. Underscores as well as percent signs are allowed in function and variable names in Maxima mode. The underscore again is equivalent to the ‘#’ in Normal mode, and the percent sign is equivalent to ‘o’o’. Maxima uses square brackets for lists and vectors, and matrices are written as calls to the function matrix, given the row vectors of the matrix as arguments. Square brackets are also used as subscripts.

6.8.7 Giac Language Mode The d A (calc-giac-language) command selects the conventions of Giac, another free computer algebra system. The function names in Giac are similar to Maxima. Complex numbers are written ‘3 + 4 i’. The standard special constants in Giac are the same as in Calc, except that infinity represents both Calc’s inf and uinf. Underscores are allowed in function and variable names in Giac mode. Brackets are used for subscripts. In Giac, indexing of lists begins at 0, instead of 1 as in Calc. So if ‘A’ represents the list ‘[a,2,c,4]’, then ‘A[2]’ would equal ‘c’. In general, ‘A[n]’ in Giac mode corresponds to ‘A_(n+1)’ in Normal mode. The Giac interval notation ‘2 .. 3’ has no surrounding brackets; Calc reads ‘2 .. 3’ as the closed interval ‘[2 .. 3]’ and writes any kind of interval as ‘2 .. 3’. This means you cannot see the difference between an open and a closed interval while in Giac mode.

6.8.8 Mathematica Language Mode The d M (calc-mathematica-language) command selects the conventions of Mathematica. Notable differences in Mathematica mode are that the names of built-in functions are capitalized, and function calls use square brackets instead of parentheses. Thus the Calc formula ‘sin(2 x)’ is entered and displayed ‘Sin[2 x]’ in Mathematica mode. Vectors and matrices use curly braces in Mathematica. Complex numbers are written ‘3 + 4 I’. The standard special constants in Calc are written Pi, E, I, GoldenRatio, EulerGamma, Infinity, ComplexInfinity, and Indeterminate in Mathematica mode. Non-decimal numbers are written, e.g., ‘16^^7fff’. Floating-point numbers in scientific notation are written ‘1.23*10.^3’. Subscripts use double square brackets: ‘a[[i]]’.

6.8.9 Maple Language Mode The d W (calc-maple-language) command selects the conventions of Maple.

166

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Maple’s language is much like C. Underscores are allowed in symbol names; square brackets are used for subscripts; explicit ‘*’s for multiplications are required. Use either ‘^’ or ‘**’ to denote powers. Maple uses square brackets for lists and curly braces for sets. Calc interprets both notations as vectors, and displays vectors with square brackets. This means Maple sets will be converted to lists when they pass through Calc. As a special case, matrices are written as calls to the function matrix, given a list of lists as the argument, and can be read in this form or with all-capitals MATRIX. The Maple interval notation ‘2 .. 3’ is like Giac’s interval notation, and is handled the same by Calc. Maple writes complex numbers as ‘3 + 4*I’. Its special constants are Pi, E, I, and infinity (all three of inf, uinf, and nan display as infinity). Floating-point numbers are written ‘1.23*10.^3’. Among things not currently handled by Calc’s Maple mode are the various quote symbols, procedures and functional operators, and inert (‘&’) operators.

6.8.10 Compositions There are several composition functions which allow you to get displays in a variety of formats similar to those in Big language mode. Most of these functions do not evaluate to anything; they are placeholders which are left in symbolic form by Calc’s evaluator but are recognized by Calc’s display formatting routines. Two of these, string and bstring, are described elsewhere. See Section 4.7 [Strings], page 118. For example, ‘string("ABC")’ is displayed as ‘ABC’. When viewed on the stack it will be indistinguishable from the variable ABC, but internally it will be stored as ‘string([65, 66, 67])’ and can still be manipulated this way; for example, the selection and vector commands j 1 v v j u would select the vector portion of this object and reverse the elements, then deselect to reveal a string whose characters had been reversed. The composition functions do the same thing in all language modes (although their components will of course be formatted in the current language mode). The one exception is Unformatted mode (d U), which does not give the composition functions any special treatment. The functions are discussed here because of their relationship to the language modes.

6.8.10.1 Composition Basics Compositions are generally formed by stacking formulas together horizontally or vertically in various ways. Those formulas are themselves compositions. TEX users will find this analogous to TEX’s “boxes.” Each multi-line composition has a baseline; horizontal compositions use the baselines to decide how formulas should be positioned relative to one another. For example, in the Big mode formula 2 a + b 17 + -----c the second term of the sum is four lines tall and has line three as its baseline. Thus when the term is combined with 17, line three is placed on the same level as the baseline of 17.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

167

Another important composition concept is precedence. This is an integer that represents the binding strength of various operators. For example, ‘*’ has higher precedence (195) than ‘+’ (180), which means that ‘(a * b) + c’ will be formatted without the parentheses, but ‘a * (b + c)’ will keep the parentheses. The operator table used by normal and Big language modes has the following precedences: _ 1200 % 1100 ! 1000 mod 400 +/300 !! 210 ! 210 ^ 200 197 * 195 / % \ 190 + 180 | 170 < = 160 && 110 || 100 ? : 90 !!! 85 &&& 80 ||| 75 := 50 :: 45 => 40

(subscripts) (as in n%) (as in !n)

(as in n!!) (as in n!) (as in -n) (or implicit multiplication) (as in a+b) (and other relations)

The general rule is that if an operator with precedence n occurs as an argument to an operator with precedence m, then the argument is enclosed in parentheses if n < m. Toplevel expressions and expressions which are function arguments, vector components, etc., are formatted with precedence zero (so that they normally never get additional parentheses). For binary left-associative operators like ‘+’, the righthand argument is actually formatted with one-higher precedence than shown in the table. This makes sure ‘(a + b) + c’ omits the parentheses, but the unnatural form ‘a + (b + c)’ keeps its parentheses. Rightassociative operators like ‘^’ format the lefthand argument with one-higher precedence. The cprec function formats an expression with an arbitrary precedence. For example, ‘cprec(abc, 185)’ will combine into sums and products as follows: ‘7 + abc’, ‘7 (abc)’ (because this cprec form has higher precedence than addition, but lower precedence than multiplication). A final composition issue is line breaking. Calc uses two different strategies for “flat” and “non-flat” compositions. A non-flat composition is anything that appears on multiple lines (not counting line breaking). Examples would be matrices and Big mode powers and

168

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

quotients. Non-flat compositions are displayed exactly as specified. If they come out wider than the current window, you must use horizontal scrolling (< and >) to view them. Flat compositions, on the other hand, will be broken across several lines if they are too wide to fit the window. Certain points in a composition are noted internally as break points. Calc’s general strategy is to fill each line as much as possible, then to move down to the next line starting at the first break point that didn’t fit. However, the line breaker understands the hierarchical structure of formulas. It will not break an “inner” formula if it can use an earlier break point from an “outer” formula instead. For example, a vector of sums might be formatted as: [ a + b + c, d + e + f, g + h + i, j + k + l, m ] If the ‘m’ can fit, then so, it seems, could the ‘g’. But Calc prefers to break at the comma since the comma is part of a “more outer” formula. Calc would break at a plus sign only if it had to, say, if the very first sum in the vector had itself been too large to fit. Of the composition functions described below, only choriz generates break points. The bstring function (see Section 4.7 [Strings], page 118) also generates breakable items: A break point is added after every space (or group of spaces) except for spaces at the very beginning or end of the string. Composition functions themselves count as levels in the formula hierarchy, so a choriz that is a component of a larger choriz will be less likely to be broken. As a special case, if a bstring occurs as a component of a choriz or choriz-like object (such as a vector or a list of arguments in a function call), then the break points in that bstring will be on the same level as the break points of the surrounding object.

6.8.10.2 Horizontal Compositions The choriz function takes a vector of objects and composes them horizontally. For example, ‘choriz([17, a b/c, d])’ formats as ‘17a b / cd’ in Normal language mode, or as a b 17---d c in Big language mode. This is actually one case of the general function ‘choriz(vec, sep, prec)’, where either or both of sep and prec may be omitted. Prec gives the precedence to use when formatting each of the components of vec. The default precedence is the precedence from the surrounding environment. Sep is a string (i.e., a vector of character codes as might be entered with " " notation) which should separate components of the composition. Also, if sep is given, the line breaker will allow lines to be broken after each occurrence of sep. If sep is omitted, the composition will not be breakable (unless any of its component compositions are breakable). For example, ‘2 choriz([a, b c, d = e], " + ", 180)’ is formatted as ‘2 a + b c + (d = e)’. To get the choriz to have precedence 180 “outwards” as well as “inwards,” enclose it in a cprec form: ‘2 cprec(choriz(...), 180)’ formats as ‘2 (a + b c + (d = e))’. The baseline of a horizontal composition is the same as the baselines of the component compositions, which are all aligned.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

169

6.8.10.3 Vertical Compositions The cvert function makes a vertical composition. Each component of the vector is centered in a column. The baseline of the result is by default the top line of the resulting composition. For example, ‘f(cvert([a, bb, ccc]), cvert([a^2 + 1, b^2]))’ formats in Big mode as f( a , 2 ) bb a + 1 ccc 2 b There are several special composition functions that work only as components of a vertical composition. The cbase function controls the baseline of the vertical composition; the baseline will be the same as the baseline of whatever component is enclosed in cbase. Thus ‘f(cvert([a, cbase(bb), ccc]), cvert([a^2 + 1, cbase(b^2)]))’ displays as 2 a + 1 a 2 f(bb , b ) ccc There are also ctbase and cbbase functions which make the baseline of the vertical composition equal to the top or bottom line (rather than the baseline) of that component. Thus ‘cvert([cbase(a / b)]) + cvert([ctbase(a / b)]) + cvert([cbbase(a / b)])’ gives a a - + a + b b b There should be only one cbase, ctbase, or cbbase function in a given vertical composition. These functions can also be written with no arguments: ‘ctbase()’ is a zero-height object which means the baseline is the top line of the following item, and ‘cbbase()’ means the baseline is the bottom line of the preceding item. The crule function builds a “rule,” or horizontal line, across a vertical composition. By itself ‘crule()’ uses ‘-’ characters to build the rule. You can specify any other character, e.g., ‘crule("=")’. The argument must be a character code or vector of exactly one character code. It is repeated to match the width of the widest item in the stack. For example, a quotient with a thick line is ‘cvert([a + 1, cbase(crule("=")), b^2])’: a + 1 ===== 2 b Finally, the functions clvert and crvert act exactly like cvert except that the items are left- or right-justified in the stack. Thus ‘clvert([a, bb, ccc]) + crvert([a, bb, ccc])’ gives: a + a bb bb ccc ccc

170

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Like choriz, the vertical compositions accept a second argument which gives the precedence to use when formatting the components. Vertical compositions do not support separator strings.

6.8.10.4 Other Compositions The csup function builds a superscripted expression. For example, ‘csup(a, b)’ looks the same as ‘a^b’ does in Big language mode. This is essentially a horizontal composition of ‘a’ and ‘b’, where ‘b’ is shifted up so that its bottom line is one above the baseline. Likewise, the csub function builds a subscripted expression. This shifts ‘b’ down so that its top line is one below the bottom line of ‘a’ (note that this is not quite analogous to csup). Other arrangements can be obtained by using choriz and cvert directly. The cflat function formats its argument in “flat” mode, as obtained by ‘d O’, if the current language mode is normal or Big. It has no effect in other language modes. For example, ‘a^(b/c)’ is formatted by Big mode like ‘csup(a, cflat(b/c))’ to improve its readability. The cspace function creates horizontal space. For example, ‘cspace(4)’ is effectively the same as ‘string(" ")’. A second string (i.e., vector of characters) argument is repeated instead of the space character. For example, ‘cspace(4, "ab")’ looks like ‘abababab’. If the second argument is not a string, it is formatted in the normal way and then several copies of that are composed together: ‘cspace(4, a^2)’ yields 2 2 2 2 a a a a If the number argument is zero, this is a zero-width object. The cvspace function creates vertical space, or a vertical stack of copies of a certain string or formatted object. The baseline is the center line of the resulting stack. A numerical argument of zero will produce an object which contributes zero height if used in a vertical composition. There are also ctspace and cbspace functions which create vertical space with the baseline the same as the baseline of the top or bottom copy, respectively, of the second argument. Thus ‘cvspace(2, a/b) + ctspace(2, a/b) + cbspace(2, a/b)’ displays as: a a b a a b + - + a b b a b b

6.8.10.5 Information about Compositions The functions in this section are actual functions; they compose their arguments according to the current language and other display modes, then return a certain measurement of the composition as an integer.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

171

The cwidth function measures the width, in characters, of a composition. For example, ‘cwidth(a + b)’ is 5, and ‘cwidth(a / b)’ is 5 in Normal mode, 1 in Big mode, and 11 in TEX mode (for ‘{a \over b}’). The argument may involve the composition functions described in this section. The cheight function measures the height of a composition. This is the total number of lines in the argument’s printed form. The functions cascent and cdescent measure the amount of the height that is above (and including) the baseline, or below the baseline, respectively. Thus ‘cascent(x) + cdescent(x)’ always equals ‘cheight(x)’. For a one-line formula like ‘a + b’, cascent returns 1 and cdescent returns 0. For ‘a / b’ in Big mode, cascent returns 2 and cdescent returns 1. The only formula for which cascent will return zero is ‘cvspace(0)’ or equivalents.

6.8.10.6 User-Defined Compositions The Z C (calc-user-define-composition) command lets you define the display format for any algebraic function. You provide a formula containing a certain number of argument variables on the stack. Any time Calc formats a call to the specified function in the current language mode and with that number of arguments, Calc effectively replaces the function call with that formula with the arguments replaced. Calc builds the default argument list by sorting all the variable names that appear in the formula into alphabetical order. You can edit this argument list before pressing RET if you wish. Any variables in the formula that do not appear in the argument list will be displayed literally; any arguments that do not appear in the formula will not affect the display at all. You can define formats for built-in functions, for functions you have defined with Z F (see Section 17.4 [Algebraic Definitions], page 367), or for functions which have no definitions but are being used as purely syntactic objects. You can define different formats for each language mode, and for each number of arguments, using a succession of Z C commands. When Calc formats a function call, it first searches for a format defined for the current language mode (and number of arguments); if there is none, it uses the format defined for the Normal language mode. If neither format exists, Calc uses its built-in standard format for that function (usually just ‘func(args)’). If you execute Z C with the number 0 on the stack instead of a formula, any defined formats for the function in the current language mode will be removed. The function will revert to its standard format. For example, the default format for the binomial coefficient function ‘choose(n, m)’ in the Big language mode is n ( ) m You might prefer the notation, C n m To define this notation, first make sure you are in Big mode, then put the formula choriz([cvert([cvspace(1), n]), C, cvert([cvspace(1), m])])

172

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

on the stack and type Z C. Answer the first prompt with choose. The second prompt will be the default argument list of ‘(C m n)’. Edit this list to be ‘(n m)’ and press RET. Now, try it out: For example, turn simplification off with m O and enter ‘choose(a,b) + choose(7,3)’ as an algebraic entry. C + C a b 7 3 As another example, let’s define the usual notation for Stirling numbers of the first kind, ‘stir1(n, m)’. This is just like the regular format for binomial coefficients but with square brackets instead of parentheses. choriz([string("["), cvert([n, cbase(cvspace(1)), m]), string("]")])

Now type Z C stir1 RET, edit the argument list to ‘(n m)’, and type RET. The formula provided to Z C usually will involve composition functions, but it doesn’t have to. Putting the formula ‘a + b + c’ onto the stack and typing Z C foo RET RET would define the function ‘foo(x,y,z)’ to display like ‘x + y + z’. This “sum” will act exactly like a real sum for all formatting purposes (it will be parenthesized the same, and so on). However it will be computationally unrelated to a sum. For example, the formula ‘2 * foo(1, 2, 3)’ will display as ‘2 (1 + 2 + 3)’. Operator precedences have caused the “sum” to be written in parentheses, but the arguments have not actually been summed. (Generally a display format like this would be undesirable, since it can easily be confused with a real sum.) The special function eval can be used inside a Z C composition formula to cause all or part of the formula to be evaluated at display time. For example, if the formula is ‘a + eval(b + c)’, then ‘foo(1, 2, 3)’ will be displayed as ‘1 + 5’. Evaluation will use the default simplifications, regardless of the current simplification mode. There are also evalsimp and evalextsimp which simplify as if by a s and a e (respectively). Note that these “functions” operate only in the context of composition formulas (and also in rewrite rules, where they serve a similar purpose; see Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289). On the stack, a call to eval will be left in symbolic form. It is not a good idea to use eval except as a last resort. It can cause the display of formulas to be extremely slow. For example, while ‘eval(a + b)’ might seem quite fast and simple, there are several situations where it could be slow. For example, ‘a’ and/or ‘b’ could be polar complex numbers, in which case doing the sum requires trigonometry. Or, ‘a’ could be the factorial ‘fact(100)’ which is unevaluated because you have typed m O; eval will evaluate it anyway to produce a large, unwieldy integer. You can save your display formats permanently using the Z P command (see Section 17.1 [Creating User Keys], page 361).

6.8.11 Syntax Tables Syntax tables do for input what compositions do for output: They allow you to teach custom notations to Calc’s formula parser. Calc keeps a separate syntax table for each language mode. (Note that the Calc “syntax tables” discussed here are completely unrelated to the syntax tables described in the Emacs manual.) The Z S (calc-edit-user-syntax) command edits the syntax table for the current language mode. If you want your syntax to work in any language, define it in the Normal

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

173

language mode. Type C-c C-c to finish editing the syntax table, or C-x k to cancel the edit. The m m command saves all the syntax tables along with the other mode settings; see Section 6.1 [General Mode Commands], page 135.

6.8.11.1 Syntax Table Basics Parsing is the process of converting a raw string of characters, such as you would type in during algebraic entry, into a Calc formula. Calc’s parser works in two stages. First, the input is broken down into tokens, such as words, numbers, and punctuation symbols like ‘+’, ‘:=’, and ‘+/-’. Space between tokens is ignored (except when it serves to separate adjacent words). Next, the parser matches this string of tokens against various built-in syntactic patterns, such as “an expression followed by ‘+’ followed by another expression” or “a name followed by ‘(’, zero or more expressions separated by commas, and ‘)’.” A syntax table is a list of user-defined syntax rules, which allow you to specify new patterns to define your own favorite input notations. Calc’s parser always checks the syntax table for the current language mode, then the table for the Normal language mode, before it uses its built-in rules to parse an algebraic formula you have entered. Each syntax rule should go on its own line; it consists of a pattern, a ‘:=’ symbol, and a Calc formula with an optional condition. (Syntax rules resemble algebraic rewrite rules, but the notation for patterns is completely different.) A syntax pattern is a list of tokens, separated by spaces. Except for a few special symbols, tokens in syntax patterns are matched literally, from left to right. For example, the rule, foo ( ) := 2+3 would cause Calc to parse the formula ‘4+foo()*5’ as if it were ‘4+(2+3)*5’. Notice that the parentheses were written as two separate tokens in the rule. As a result, the rule works for both ‘foo()’ and ‘foo ( )’. If we had written the rule as ‘foo () := 2+3’, then Calc would treat ‘()’ as a single, indivisible token, so that ‘foo( )’ would not be recognized by the rule. (It would be parsed as a regular zero-argument function call instead.) In fact, this rule would also make trouble for the rest of Calc’s parser: An unrelated formula like ‘bar()’ would now be tokenized into ‘bar ()’ instead of ‘bar ( )’, so that the standard parser for function calls would no longer recognize it! While it is possible to make a token with a mixture of letters and punctuation symbols, this is not recommended. It is better to break it into several tokens, as we did with ‘foo()’ above. The symbol ‘#’ in a syntax pattern matches any Calc expression. On the righthand side, the things that matched the ‘#’s can be referred to as ‘#1’, ‘#2’, and so on (where ‘#1’ matches the leftmost ‘#’ in the pattern). For example, these rules match a user-defined function, prefix operator, infix operator, and postfix operator, respectively: foo ( # ) := myfunc(#1) foo # := myprefix(#1) # foo # := myinfix(#1,#2) # foo := mypostfix(#1) Thus ‘foo(3)’ will parse as ‘myfunc(3)’, and ‘2+3 foo’ will parse as ‘mypostfix(2+3)’. It is important to write the first two rules in the order shown, because Calc tries rules in order from first to last. If the pattern ‘foo #’ came first, it would match anything that could

174

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

match the ‘foo ( # )’ rule, since an expression in parentheses is itself a valid expression. Thus the ‘foo ( # )’ rule would never get to match anything. Likewise, the last two rules must be written in the order shown or else ‘3 foo 4’ will be parsed as ‘mypostfix(3) * 4’. (Of course, the best way to avoid these ambiguities is not to use the same symbol in more than one way at the same time! In case you’re not convinced, try the following exercise: How will the above rules parse the input ‘foo(3,4)’, if at all? Work it out for yourself, then try it in Calc and see.) Calc is quite flexible about what sorts of patterns are allowed. The only rule is that every pattern must begin with a literal token (like ‘foo’ in the first two patterns above), or with a ‘#’ followed by a literal token (as in the last two patterns). After that, any mixture is allowed, although putting two ‘#’s in a row will not be very useful since two expressions with nothing between them will be parsed as one expression that uses implicit multiplication. As a more practical example, Maple uses the notation ‘sum(a(i), i=1..10)’ for sums, which Calc’s Maple mode doesn’t recognize at present. To handle this syntax, we simply add the rule, sum ( # , # = # .. # ) := sum(#1,#2,#3,#4) to the Maple mode syntax table. As another example, C mode can’t read assignment operators like ‘++’ and ‘*=’. We can define these operators quite easily: # *= # := muleq(#1,#2) # ++ := postinc(#1) ++ # := preinc(#1) To complete the job, we would use corresponding composition functions and Z C to cause these functions to display in their respective Maple and C notations. (Note that the C example ignores issues of operator precedence, which are discussed in the next section.) You can enclose any token in quotes to prevent its usual interpretation in syntax patterns: # ":=" # := becomes(#1,#2) Quotes also allow you to include spaces in a token, although once again it is generally better to use two tokens than one token with an embedded space. To include an actual quotation mark in a quoted token, precede it with a backslash. (This also works to include backslashes in tokens.) # "bad token" # "/\"\\" # := silly(#1,#2,#3) This will parse ‘3 bad token 4 /"\ 5’ to ‘silly(3,4,5)’. The token # has a predefined meaning in Calc’s formula parser; it is not valid to use ‘"#"’ in a syntax rule. However, longer tokens that include the ‘#’ character are allowed. Also, while ‘"$"’ and ‘"\""’ are allowed as tokens, their presence in the syntax table will prevent those characters from working in their usual ways (referring to stack entries and quoting strings, respectively). Finally, the notation ‘%%’ anywhere in a syntax table causes the rest of the line to be ignored as a comment.

6.8.11.2 Precedence Different operators are generally assigned different precedences. By default, an operator defined by a rule like

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

175

# foo # := foo(#1,#2) will have an extremely low precedence, so that ‘2*3+4 foo 5 == 6’ will be parsed as ‘(2*3+4) foo (5 == 6)’. To change the precedence of an operator, use the notation ‘#/p’ in place of ‘#’, where p is an integer precedence level. For example, 185 lies between the precedences for ‘+’ and ‘*’, so if we change this rule to #/185 foo #/186 := foo(#1,#2) then ‘2+3 foo 4*5’ will be parsed as ‘2+(3 foo (4*5))’. Also, because we’ve given the righthand expression slightly higher precedence, our new operator will be left-associative: ‘1 foo 2 foo 3’ will be parsed as ‘(1 foo 2) foo 3’. By raising the precedence of the lefthand expression instead, we can create a right-associative operator. See Section 6.8.10.1 [Composition Basics], page 166, for a table of precedences of the standard Calc operators. For the precedences of operators in other language modes, look in the Calc source file calc-lang.el.

6.8.11.3 Advanced Syntax Patterns To match a function with a variable number of arguments, you could write foo ( # ) := myfunc(#1) foo ( # , # ) := myfunc(#1,#2) foo ( # , # , # ) := myfunc(#1,#2,#3) but this isn’t very elegant. To match variable numbers of items, Calc uses some notations inspired regular expressions and the “extended BNF” style used by some language designers. foo ( { # }*, ) := apply(myfunc,#1) The token ‘{’ introduces a repeated or optional portion. One of the three tokens ‘}*’, ‘}+’, or ‘}?’ ends the portion. These will match zero or more, one or more, or zero or one copies of the enclosed pattern, respectively. In addition, ‘}*’ and ‘}+’ can be followed by a separator token (with no space in between, as shown above). Thus ‘{ # }*,’ matches nothing, or one expression, or several expressions separated by commas. A complete ‘{ ... }’ item matches as a vector of the items that matched inside it. For example, the above rule will match ‘foo(1,2,3)’ to get ‘apply(myfunc,[1,2,3])’. The Calc apply function takes a function name and a vector of arguments and builds a call to the function with those arguments, so the net result is the formula ‘myfunc(1,2,3)’. If the body of a ‘{ ... }’ contains several ‘#’s (or nested ‘{ ... }’ constructs), then the items will be strung together into the resulting vector. If the body does not contain anything but literal tokens, the result will always be an empty vector. foo ( { # , # }+, ) := bar(#1) foo ( { { # }*, }*; ) := matrix(#1) will parse ‘foo(1, 2, 3, 4)’ as ‘bar([1, 2, 3, 4])’, and ‘foo(1, 2; 3, 4)’ as ‘matrix([[1, 2], [3, 4]])’. Also, after some thought it’s easy to see how this pair of rules will parse ‘foo(1, 2, 3)’ as ‘matrix([[1, 2, 3]])’, since the first rule will only match an even number of arguments. The rule foo ( # { , # , # }? ) := bar(#1,#2) will parse ‘foo(2,3,4)’ as ‘bar(2,[3,4])’, and ‘foo(2)’ as ‘bar(2,[])’. The notation ‘{ ... }?.’ (note the trailing period) works just the same as regular ‘{ ... }?’, except that it does not count as an argument; the following two rules are equivalent:

176

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

foo ( # , { also }? # ) := bar(#1,#3) foo ( # , { also }?. # ) := bar(#1,#2) Note that in the first case the optional text counts as ‘#2’, which will always be an empty vector, but in the second case no empty vector is produced. Another variant is ‘{ ... }?$’, which means the body is optional only at the end of the input formula. All built-in syntax rules in Calc use this for closing delimiters, so that during algebraic entry you can type [sqrt(2), sqrt(3 RET, omitting the closing parenthesis and bracket. Calc does this automatically for trailing ‘)’, ‘]’, and ‘>’ tokens in syntax rules, but you can use ‘{ ... }?$’ explicitly to get this effect with any token (such as ‘"}"’ or ‘end’). Like ‘{ ... }?.’, this notation does not count as an argument. Conversely, you can use quotes, as in ‘")"’, to prevent a closing-delimiter token from being automatically treated as optional. Calc’s parser does not have full backtracking, which means some patterns will not work as you might expect: foo ( { # , }? # , # ) := bar(#1,#2,#3) Here we are trying to make the first argument optional, so that ‘foo(2,3)’ parses as ‘bar([],2,3)’. Unfortunately, Calc first tries to match ‘2,’ against the optional part of the pattern, finds a match, and so goes ahead to match the rest of the pattern. Later on it will fail to match the second comma, but it doesn’t know how to go back and try the other alternative at that point. One way to get around this would be to use two rules: foo ( # , # , # ) := bar([#1],#2,#3) foo ( # , # ) := bar([],#1,#2) More precisely, when Calc wants to match an optional or repeated part of a pattern, it scans forward attempting to match that part. If it reaches the end of the optional part without failing, it “finalizes” its choice and proceeds. If it fails, though, it backs up and tries the other alternative. Thus Calc has “partial” backtracking. A fully backtracking parser would go on to make sure the rest of the pattern matched before finalizing the choice.

6.8.11.4 Conditional Syntax Rules It is possible to attach a condition to a syntax rule. For example, the rules foo ( # ) := ifoo(#1) :: integer(#1) foo ( # ) := gfoo(#1) will parse ‘foo(3)’ as ‘ifoo(3)’, but will parse ‘foo(3.5)’ and ‘foo(x)’ as calls to gfoo. Any number of conditions may be attached; all must be true for the rule to succeed. A condition is “true” if it evaluates to a nonzero number. See Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286, for a list of Calc functions like integer that perform logical tests. The exact sequence of events is as follows: When Calc tries a rule, it first matches the pattern as usual. It then substitutes ‘#1’, ‘#2’, etc., in the conditions, if any. Next, the conditions are simplified and evaluated in order from left to right, using the algebraic simplifications (see Section 10.3 [Simplifying Formulas], page 251). Each result is true if it is a nonzero number, or an expression that can be proven to be nonzero (see Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141). If the results of all conditions are true, the expression (such as ‘ifoo(#1)’) has its ‘#’s substituted, and that is the result of the parse. If the result of any condition is false, Calc goes on to try the next rule in the syntax table.

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

177

Syntax rules also support let conditions, which operate in exactly the same way as they do in algebraic rewrite rules. See Section 10.11.5 [Other Features of Rewrite Rules], page 296, for details. A let condition is always true, but as a side effect it defines a variable which can be used in later conditions, and also in the expression after the ‘:=’ sign: foo ( # ) := hifoo(x) :: let(x := #1 + 0.5) :: dnumint(x) The dnumint function tests if a value is numerically an integer, i.e., either a true integer or an integer-valued float. This rule will parse foo with a half-integer argument, like ‘foo(3.5)’, to a call like ‘hifoo(4.)’. The lefthand side of a syntax rule let must be a simple variable, not the arbitrary pattern that is allowed in rewrite rules. The matches function is also treated specially in syntax rule conditions (again, in the same way as in rewrite rules). See Section 10.11.10 [Matching Commands], page 306. If the matching pattern contains meta-variables, then those meta-variables may be used in later conditions and in the result expression. The arguments to matches are not evaluated in this situation. sum ( # , # ) := sum(#1,a,b,c) :: matches(#2, a=[b..c]) This is another way to implement the Maple mode sum notation. In this approach, we allow ‘#2’ to equal the whole expression ‘i=1..10’. Then, we use matches to break it apart into its components. If the expression turns out not to match the pattern, the syntax rule will fail. Note that Z S always uses Calc’s Normal language mode for editing expressions in syntax rules, so we must use regular Calc notation for the interval ‘[b..c]’ that will correspond to the Maple mode interval ‘1..10’.

6.9 The Modes Variable The m g (calc-get-modes) command pushes onto the stack a vector of numbers that describes the various mode settings that are in effect. With a numeric prefix argument, it pushes only the nth mode, i.e., the nth element of this vector. Keyboard macros can use the m g command to modify their behavior based on the current mode settings. The modes vector is also available in the special variable Modes. In other words, m g is like s r Modes RET. It will not work to store into this variable; in fact, if you do, Modes will cease to track the current modes. (The m g command will continue to work, however.) In general, each number in this vector is suitable as a numeric prefix argument to the associated mode-setting command. (Recall that the ~ key takes a number from the stack and gives it as a numeric prefix to the next command.) The elements of the modes vector are as follows: 1. Current precision. Default is 12; associated command is p. 2. Binary word size. Default is 32; associated command is b w. 3. Stack size (not counting the value about to be pushed by m g). This is zero if m g is executed with an empty stack. 4. Number radix. Default is 10; command is d r. 5. Floating-point format. This is the number of digits, plus the constant 0 for normal notation, 10000 for scientific notation, 20000 for engineering notation, or 30000 for

178

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

fixed-point notation. These codes are acceptable as prefix arguments to the d n command, but note that this may lose information: For example, d s and C-u 12 d s have similar (but not quite identical) effects if the current precision is 12, but they both produce a code of 10012, which will be treated by d n as C-u 12 d s. If the precision then changes, the float format will still be frozen at 12 significant figures. Angular mode. Default is 1 (degrees). Other values are 2 (radians) and 3 (HMS). The m d command accepts these prefixes. Symbolic mode. Value is 0 or 1; default is 0. Command is m s. Fraction mode. Value is 0 or 1; default is 0. Command is m f. Polar mode. Value is 0 (rectangular) or 1 (polar); default is 0. Command is m p. Matrix/Scalar mode. Default value is −1. Value is 0 for Scalar mode, −2 for Matrix mode, −3 for square Matrix mode, or N for N × N Matrix mode. Command is m v. Simplification mode. Default is 1. Value is −1 for off (m O), 0 for m N, 2 for m B, 3 for m A, 4 for m E, or 5 for m U. The m D command accepts these prefixes. Infinite mode. Default is −1 (off). Value is 1 if the mode is on, or 0 if the mode is on with positive zeros. Command is m i.

For example, the sequence M-1 m g RET 2 + ~ p increases the precision by two, leaving a copy of the old precision on the stack. Later, ~ p will restore the original precision using that stack value. (This sequence might be especially useful inside a keyboard macro.) As another example, M-3 m g 1 - ~ DEL deletes all but the oldest (bottommost) stack entry. Yet another example: The HP-48 “round” command rounds a number to the current displayed precision. You could roughly emulate this in Calc with the sequence M-5 m g 10000 % ~ c c. (This would not work for fixed-point mode, but it wouldn’t be hard to do a full emulation with the help of the Z [ and Z ] programming commands. See Section 17.2.2 [Conditionals in Macros], page 363.)

6.10 The Calc Mode Line This section is a summary of all symbols that can appear on the Calc mode line, the highlighted bar that appears under the Calc stack window (or under an editing window in Embedded mode). The basic mode line format is: --%*-Calc: 12 Deg other modes (Calculator) The ‘%*’ indicates that the buffer is “read-only”; it shows that regular Emacs commands are not allowed to edit the stack buffer as if it were text. The word ‘Calc:’ changes to ‘CalcEmbed:’ if Embedded mode is enabled. The words after this describe the various Calc modes that are in effect. The first mode is always the current precision, an integer. The second mode is always the angular mode, either Deg, Rad, or Hms. Here is a complete list of the remaining symbols that can appear on the mode line: Alg

Algebraic mode (m a; see Section 3.5 [Algebraic Entry], page 107).

Alg[(

Incomplete algebraic mode (C-u m a).

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

179

Alg*

Total algebraic mode (m t).

Symb

Symbolic mode (m s; see Section 6.4.5 [Symbolic Mode], page 138).

Matrix

Matrix mode (m v; see Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139).

Matrixn

Dimensioned Matrix mode (C-u n m v; see Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139).

SqMatrix

Square Matrix mode (C-u m v; see Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139).

Scalar

Scalar mode (m v; see Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139).

Polar

Polar complex mode (m p; see Section 6.4.2 [Polar Mode], page 137).

Frac

Fraction mode (m f; see Section 6.4.3 [Fraction Mode], page 138).

Inf

Infinite mode (m i; see Section 6.4.4 [Infinite Mode], page 138).

+Inf

Positive Infinite mode (C-u 0 m i).

NoSimp

Default simplifications off (m O; see Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140).

NumSimp

Default simplifications for numeric arguments only (m N).

BinSimpw

Binary-integer simplification mode; word size w (m B, b w).

BasicSimp Basic simplification mode (m I). ExtSimp

Extended algebraic simplification mode (m E).

UnitSimp

Units simplification mode (m U).

Bin

Current radix is 2 (d 2; see Section 6.7.1 [Radix Modes], page 146).

Oct

Current radix is 8 (d 8).

Hex

Current radix is 16 (d 6).

Radixn

Current radix is n (d r).

Zero

Leading zeros (d z; see Section 6.7.1 [Radix Modes], page 146).

Big

Big language mode (d B; see Section 6.8.1 [Normal Language Modes], page 157).

Flat

One-line normal language mode (d O).

Unform

Unformatted language mode (d U).

C language mode (d C; see Section 6.8.2 [C FORTRAN Pascal], page 158).

Pascal

Pascal language mode (d P).

Fortran

FORTRAN language mode (d F).

TeX

TEX language mode (d T; see Section 6.8.3 [TeX and LaTeX Language Modes], page 159).

LaTeX

LATEX language mode (d L; see Section 6.8.3 [TeX and LaTeX Language Modes], page 159).

180

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Eqn

Eqn language mode (d E; see Section 6.8.4 [Eqn Language Mode], page 163).

Math

Mathematica language mode (d M; see Section 6.8.8 [Mathematica Language Mode], page 165).

Maple

Maple language mode (d W; see Section 6.8.9 [Maple Language Mode], page 165).

Normn

Normal float mode with n digits (d n; see Section 6.7.3 [Float Formats], page 148).

Fixn

Fixed point mode with n digits after the point (d f).

Sci

Scientific notation mode (d s).

Scin

Scientific notation with n digits (d s).

Eng

Engineering notation mode (d e).

Engn

Engineering notation with n digits (d e).

Leftn

Left-justified display indented by n (d ).

Rightn

Right-justified display with width n (d >).

Center

Centered display (d =).

Centern

Centered display with center column n (d =).

Widn

Line breaking with width n (d b; see Section 6.8.1 [Normal Language Modes], page 157).

Wide

No line breaking (d b).

Break

Selections show deep structure (j b; see Section 10.1.1 [Making Selections], page 241).

Save

Record modes in ~/.emacs.d/calc.el (m R; see Section 6.1 [General Mode Commands], page 135).

Local

Record modes in Embedded buffer (m R).

LocEdit

Record modes as editing-only in Embedded buffer (m R).

LocPerm

Record modes as permanent-only in Embedded buffer (m R).

Global

Record modes as global in Embedded buffer (m R).

Manual

Automatic recomputation turned off (m C; see Section 6.4.7 [Automatic Recomputation], page 140).

Graph

GNUPLOT process is alive in background (see Chapter 13 [Graphics], page 327).

Sel

Top-of-stack has a selection (Embedded only; see Section 10.1.1 [Making Selections], page 241).

Dirty

The stack display may not be up-to-date (see Section 6.7 [Display Modes], page 146).

Chapter 6: Mode Settings

181

Inv

“Inverse” prefix was pressed (I; see Section 6.3 [Inverse and Hyperbolic], page 137).

Hyp

“Hyperbolic” prefix was pressed (H).

Keep

“Keep-arguments” prefix was pressed (K).

Narrow

Stack is truncated (d t; see Section 6.7.8 [Truncating the Stack], page 155).

In addition, the symbols Active and ~Active can appear as minor modes on an Embedded buffer’s mode line. See Chapter 16 [Embedded Mode], page 349.

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

183

7 Arithmetic Functions This chapter describes the Calc commands for doing simple calculations on numbers, such as addition, absolute value, and square roots. These commands work by removing the top one or two values from the stack, performing the desired operation, and pushing the result back onto the stack. If the operation cannot be performed, the result pushed is a formula instead of a number, such as ‘2/0’ (because division by zero is invalid) or ‘sqrt(x)’ (because the argument ‘x’ is a formula). Most of the commands described here can be invoked by a single keystroke. Some of the more obscure ones are two-letter sequences beginning with the f (“functions”) prefix key. See Section 3.7 [Prefix Arguments], page 109, for a discussion of the effect of numeric prefix arguments on commands in this chapter which do not otherwise interpret a prefix argument.

7.1 Basic Arithmetic The + (calc-plus) command adds two numbers. The numbers may be any of the standard Calc data types. The resulting sum is pushed back onto the stack. If both arguments of + are vectors or matrices (of matching dimensions), the result is a vector or matrix sum. If one argument is a vector and the other a scalar (i.e., a non-vector), the scalar is added to each of the elements of the vector to form a new vector. If the scalar is not a number, the operation is left in symbolic form: Suppose you added ‘x’ to the vector ‘[1,2]’. You may want the result ‘[1+x,2+x]’, or you may plan to substitute a 2-vector for ‘x’ in the future. Since the Calculator can’t tell which interpretation you want, it makes the safest assumption. See Section 9.8 [Reducing and Mapping], page 233, for a way to add ‘x’ to every element of a vector. If either argument of + is a complex number, the result will in general be complex. If one argument is in rectangular form and the other polar, the current Polar mode determines the form of the result. If Symbolic mode is enabled, the sum may be left as a formula if the necessary conversions for polar addition are non-trivial. If both arguments of + are HMS forms, the forms are added according to the usual conventions of hours-minutes-seconds notation. If one argument is an HMS form and the other is a number, that number is converted from degrees or radians (depending on the current Angular mode) to HMS format and then the two HMS forms are added. If one argument of + is a date form, the other can be either a real number, which advances the date by a certain number of days, or an HMS form, which advances the date by a certain amount of time. Subtracting two date forms yields the number of days between them. Adding two date forms is meaningless, but Calc interprets it as the subtraction of one date form and the negative of the other. (The negative of a date form can be understood by remembering that dates are stored as the number of days before or after Jan 1, 1 AD.) If both arguments of + are error forms, the result is an error form with an appropriately computed standard deviation. If one argument is an error form and the other is a number, the number is taken to have zero error. Error forms may have symbolic formulas as their mean and/or error parts; adding these will produce a symbolic error form result. However, adding an error form to a plain symbolic formula (as in ‘(a +/- b) + c’) will not work, for

184

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

the same reasons just mentioned for vectors. Instead you must write ‘(a +/- b) + (c +/0)’. If both arguments of + are modulo forms with equal values of M , or if one argument is a modulo form and the other a plain number, the result is a modulo form which represents the sum, modulo M , of the two values. If both arguments of + are intervals, the result is an interval which describes all possible sums of the possible input values. If one argument is a plain number, it is treated as the interval ‘[x .. x]’. If one argument of + is an infinity and the other is not, the result is that same infinity. If both arguments are infinite and in the same direction, the result is the same infinity, but if they are infinite in different directions the result is nan. The - (calc-minus) command subtracts two values. The top number on the stack is subtracted from the one behind it, so that the computation 5 RET 2 - produces 3, not −3. All options available for + are available for - as well. The * (calc-times) command multiplies two numbers. If one argument is a vector and the other a scalar, the scalar is multiplied by the elements of the vector to produce a new vector. If both arguments are vectors, the interpretation depends on the dimensions of the vectors: If both arguments are matrices, a matrix multiplication is done. If one argument is a matrix and the other a plain vector, the vector is interpreted as a row vector or column vector, whichever is dimensionally correct. If both arguments are plain vectors, the result is a single scalar number which is the dot product of the two vectors. If one argument of * is an HMS form and the other a number, the HMS form is multiplied by that amount. It is an error to multiply two HMS forms together, or to attempt any multiplication involving date forms. Error forms, modulo forms, and intervals can be multiplied; see the comments for addition of those forms. When two error forms or intervals are multiplied they are considered to be statistically independent; thus, ‘[-2 .. 3] * [-2 .. 3]’ is ‘[-6 .. 9]’, whereas ‘[-2 .. 3] ^ 2’ is ‘[0 .. 9]’. The / (calc-divide) command divides two numbers. When combining multiplication and division in an algebraic formula, it is good style to use parentheses to distinguish between possible interpretations; the expression ‘a/b*c’ should be written ‘(a/b)*c’ or ‘a/(b*c)’, as appropriate. Without the parentheses, Calc will interpret ‘a/b*c’ as ‘a/(b*c)’, since in algebraic entry Calc gives division a lower precedence than multiplication. (This is not standard across all computer languages, and Calc may change the precedence depending on the language mode being used. See Section 6.8 [Language Modes], page 156.) This default ordering can be changed by setting the customizable variable calc-multiplication-has-precedence to nil (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433); this will give multiplication and division equal precedences. Note that Calc’s default choice of precedence allows ‘a b / c d’ to be used as a shortcut for a b ---. c d

When dividing a scalar B by a square matrix A, the computation performed is B times the inverse of A. This also occurs if B is itself a vector or matrix, in which case the effect is to solve the set of linear equations represented by B. If B is a matrix with the same number of rows as A, or a plain vector (which is interpreted here as a column vector), then

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

185

the equation AX = B is solved for the vector or matrix X. Otherwise, if B is a non-square matrix with the same number of columns as A, the equation XA = B is solved. If you wish a vector B to be interpreted as a row vector to be solved as XA = B, make it into a one-row matrix with C-u 1 v p first. To force a left-handed solution with a square matrix B, transpose A and B before dividing, then transpose the result. HMS forms can be divided by real numbers or by other HMS forms. Error forms can be divided in any combination of ways. Modulo forms where both values and the modulo are integers can be divided to get an integer modulo form result. Intervals can be divided; dividing by an interval that encompasses zero or has zero as a limit will result in an infinite interval. The ^ (calc-power) command raises a number to a power. If the power is an integer, an exact result is computed using repeated multiplications. For non-integer powers, Calc uses Newton’s method or logarithms and exponentials. Square matrices can be raised to integer powers. If either argument is an error (or interval or modulo) form, the result is also an error (or interval or modulo) form. If you press the I (inverse) key first, the I ^ command computes an Nth root: 125 RET 3 I ^ computes the number 5. (This is entirely equivalent to 125 RET 1:3 ^.) The \ (calc-idiv) command divides two numbers on the stack to produce an integer result. It is equivalent to dividing with /, then rounding down with F (calc-floor), only a bit more convenient and efficient. Also, since it is an all-integer operation when the arguments are integers, it avoids problems that / F would have with floating-point roundoff. The % (calc-mod) command performs a “modulo” (or “remainder”) operation. Mathematically, ‘a%b = a - (a\b)*b’, and is defined for all real numbers a and b (except b = 0). For positive b, the result will always be between 0 (inclusive) and b (exclusive). Modulo does not work for HMS forms and error forms. If a is a modulo form, its modulo is changed to b, which must be positive real number. The : (calc-fdiv) [fdiv] command divides the two integers on the top of the stack to produce a fractional result. This is a convenient shorthand for enabling Fraction mode (with m f) temporarily and using ‘/’. Note that during numeric entry the : key is interpreted as a fraction separator, so to divide 8 by 6 you would have to type 8 RET 6 RET :. (Of course, in this case, it would be much easier simply to enter the fraction directly as 8:6 RET!) The n (calc-change-sign) command negates the number on the top of the stack. It works on numbers, vectors and matrices, HMS forms, date forms, error forms, intervals, and modulo forms. The A (calc-abs) [abs] command computes the absolute value of a number. The result of abs is always a nonnegative real number: With a complex argument, it computes the complex magnitude. With a vector or matrix argument, it computes the Frobenius norm, i.e., the square root of the sum of the squares of the absolute values of the elements. The absolute value of an error form is defined by replacing the mean part with its absolute value and leaving the error part the same. The absolute value of a modulo form is undefined. The absolute value of an interval is defined in the obvious way. The f A (calc-abssqr) [abssqr] command computes the absolute value squared of a number, vector or matrix, or error form. The f s (calc-sign) [sign] command returns 1 if its argument is positive, −1 if its argument is negative, or 0 if its argument is zero. In algebraic form, you can also write

186

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

‘sign(a,x)’ which evaluates to ‘x * sign(a)’, i.e., either ‘x’, ‘-x’, or zero depending on the sign of ‘a’. The & (calc-inv) [inv] command computes the reciprocal of a number, i.e., 1/x. Operating on a square matrix, it computes the inverse of that matrix. The Q (calc-sqrt) [sqrt] command computes the square root of a number. For a negative real argument, the result will be a complex number whose form is determined by the current Polar mode. The f h (calc-hypot) [hypot] command computes the square root of the sum of the squares of two numbers. That is, ‘hypot(a,b)’ is the length of the hypotenuse of a right triangle with sides a and b. If the arguments are complex numbers, their squared magnitudes are used. The f Q (calc-isqrt) [isqrt] command computes the integer square root of an integer. This is the true square root of the number, rounded down to an integer. For example, ‘isqrt(10)’ produces 3. Note that, like \ [idiv], this uses exact integer arithmetic throughout to avoid roundoff problems. If the input is a floating-point number or other non-integer value, this is exactly the same as ‘floor(sqrt(x))’. The f n (calc-min) [min] and f x (calc-max) [max] commands take the minimum or maximum of two real numbers, respectively. These commands also work on HMS forms, date forms, intervals, and infinities. (In algebraic expressions, these functions take any number of arguments and return the maximum or minimum among all the arguments.) The f M (calc-mant-part) [mant] function extracts the “mantissa” part m of its floatingpoint argument; f X (calc-xpon-part) [xpon] extracts the “exponent” part e. The original number is equal to m × 10e , where m is in the interval ‘[1.0 .. 10.0)’ except that m = e = 0 if the original number is zero. For integers and fractions, mant returns the number unchanged and xpon returns zero. The v u (calc-unpack) command can also be used to “unpack” a floating-point number; this produces an integer mantissa and exponent, with the constraint that the mantissa is not a multiple of ten (again except for the m = e = 0 case). The f S (calc-scale-float) [scf] function scales a number by a given power of ten. Thus, ‘scf(mant(x), xpon(x)) = x’ for any real ‘x’. The second argument must be an integer, but the first may actually be any numeric value. For example, ‘scf(5,-2) = 0.05’ or ‘1:20’ depending on the current Fraction mode. The f [ (calc-decrement) [decr] and f ] (calc-increment) [incr] functions decrease or increase a number by one unit. For integers, the effect is obvious. For floating-point numbers, the change is by one unit in the last place. For example, incrementing ‘12.3456’ when the current precision is 6 digits yields ‘12.3457’. If the current precision had been 8 digits, the result would have been ‘12.345601’. Incrementing ‘0.0’ produces 10−p , where p is the current precision. These operations are defined only on integers and floats. With numeric prefix arguments, they change the number by n units. Note that incrementing followed by decrementing, or vice-versa, will almost but not quite always cancel out. Suppose the precision is 6 digits and the number ‘9.99999’ is on the stack. Incrementing will produce ‘10.0000’; decrementing will produce ‘9.9999’. One digit has been dropped. This is an unavoidable consequence of the way floating-point numbers work.

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

187

Incrementing a date/time form adjusts it by a certain number of seconds. Incrementing a pure date form adjusts it by a certain number of days.

7.2 Integer Truncation There are four commands for truncating a real number to an integer, differing mainly in their treatment of negative numbers. All of these commands have the property that if the argument is an integer, the result is the same integer. An integer-valued floating-point argument is converted to integer form. If you press H (calc-hyperbolic) first, the result will be expressed as an integer-valued floating-point number. The F (calc-floor) [floor or ffloor] command truncates a real number to the next lower integer, i.e., toward minus infinity. Thus 3.6 F produces 3, but _3.6 F produces −4. The I F (calc-ceiling) [ceil or fceil] command truncates toward positive infinity. Thus 3.6 I F produces 4, and _3.6 I F produces −3. The R (calc-round) [round or fround] command rounds to the nearest integer. When the fractional part is .5 exactly, this command rounds away from zero. (All other rounding in the Calculator uses this convention as well.) Thus 3.5 R produces 4 but 3.4 R produces 3; _3.5 R produces −4. The I R (calc-trunc) [trunc or ftrunc] command truncates toward zero. In other words, it “chops off” everything after the decimal point. Thus 3.6 I R produces 3 and _3.6 I R produces −3. These functions may not be applied meaningfully to error forms, but they do work for intervals. As a convenience, applying floor to a modulo form floors the value part of the form. Applied to a vector, these functions operate on all elements of the vector one by one. Applied to a date form, they operate on the internal numerical representation of dates, converting a date/time form into a pure date. There are two more rounding functions which can only be entered in algebraic notation. The roundu function is like round except that it rounds up, toward plus infinity, when the fractional part is .5. This distinction matters only for negative arguments. Also, rounde rounds to an even number in the case of a tie, rounding up or down as necessary. For example, ‘rounde(3.5)’ and ‘rounde(4.5)’ both return 4, but ‘rounde(5.5)’ returns 6. The advantage of round-to-even is that the net error due to rounding after a long calculation tends to cancel out to zero. An important subtle point here is that the number being fed to rounde will already have been rounded to the current precision before rounde begins. For example, ‘rounde(2.500001)’ with a current precision of 6 will incorrectly, or at least surprisingly, yield 2 because the argument will first have been rounded down to 2.5 (which rounde sees as an exact tie between 2 and 3). Each of these functions, when written in algebraic formulas, allows a second argument which specifies the number of digits after the decimal point to keep. For example, ‘round(123.4567, 2)’ will produce the answer 123.46, and ‘round(123.4567, -1)’ will produce 120 (i.e., the cutoff is one digit to the left of the decimal point). A second argument of zero is equivalent to no second argument at all. To compute the fractional part of a number (i.e., the amount which, when added to ‘floor(n)’, will produce n) just take n modulo 1 using the % command.

188

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Note also the \ (integer quotient), f I (integer logarithm), and f Q (integer square root) commands, which are analogous to /, B, and Q, respectively, except that they take integer arguments and return the result rounded down to an integer.

7.3 Complex Number Functions The J (calc-conj) [conj] command computes the complex conjugate of a number. For complex number a + bi, the complex conjugate is a − bi. If the argument is a real number, this command leaves it the same. If the argument is a vector or matrix, this command replaces each element by its complex conjugate. The G (calc-argument) [arg] command computes the “argument” or polar angle of a complex number. For a number in polar notation, this is simply the second component of the pair ‘(r;θ)’. The result is expressed according to the current angular mode and will be in the range −180 degrees (exclusive) to +180 degrees (inclusive), or the equivalent range in radians. The calc-imaginary command multiplies the number on the top of the stack by the imaginary number i = (0, 1). This command is not normally bound to a key in Calc, but it is available on the IMAG button in Keypad mode. The f r (calc-re) [re] command replaces a complex number by its real part. This command has no effect on real numbers. (As an added convenience, re applied to a modulo form extracts the value part.) The f i (calc-im) [im] command replaces a complex number by its imaginary part; real numbers are converted to zero. With a vector or matrix argument, these functions operate element-wise. The v p (calc-pack) command can pack the top two numbers on the stack into a composite object such as a complex number. With a prefix argument of −1, it produces a rectangular complex number; with an argument of −2, it produces a polar complex number. (Also, see Section 9.2 [Building Vectors], page 221.) The v u (calc-unpack) command takes the complex number (or other composite object) on the top of the stack and unpacks it into its separate components.

7.4 Conversions The commands described in this section convert numbers from one form to another; they are two-key sequences beginning with the letter c. The c f (calc-float) [pfloat] command converts the number on the top of the stack to floating-point form. For example, 23 is converted to 23.0, 3:2 is converted to 1.5, and 2.3 is left the same. If the value is a composite object such as a complex number or vector, each of the components is converted to floating-point. If the value is a formula, all numbers in the formula are converted to floating-point. Note that depending on the current floating-point precision, conversion to floating-point format may lose information. As a special exception, integers which appear as powers or subscripts are not floated by c f. If you really want to float a power, you can use a j s command to select the power followed by c f. Because c f cannot examine the formula outside of the selection, it does not notice that the thing being floated is a power. See Section 10.1 [Selecting Subformulas], page 241.

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

189

The normal c f command is “pervasive” in the sense that it applies to all numbers throughout the formula. The pfloat algebraic function never stays around in a formula; ‘pfloat(a + 1)’ changes to ‘a + 1.0’ as soon as it is evaluated. With the Hyperbolic flag, H c f [float] operates only on the number or vector of numbers at the top level of its argument. Thus, ‘float(1)’ is 1.0, but ‘float(a + 1)’ is left unevaluated because its argument is not a number. You should use H c f if you wish to guarantee that the final value, once all the variables have been assigned, is a float; you would use c f if you wish to do the conversion on the numbers that appear right now. The c F (calc-fraction) [pfrac] command converts a floating-point number into a fractional approximation. By default, it produces a fraction whose decimal representation is the same as the input number, to within the current precision. You can also give a numeric prefix argument to specify a tolerance, either directly, or, if the prefix argument is zero, by using the number on top of the stack as the tolerance. If the tolerance is a positive integer, the fraction is correct to within that many significant figures. If the tolerance is a non-positive integer, it specifies how many digits fewer than the current precision to use. If the tolerance is a floating-point number, the fraction is correct to within that absolute amount. The pfrac function is pervasive, like pfloat. There is also a non-pervasive version, H c F [frac], which is analogous to H c f discussed above. The c d (calc-to-degrees) [deg] command converts a number into degrees form. The value on the top of the stack may be an HMS form (interpreted as degrees-minutes-seconds), or a real number which will be interpreted in radians regardless of the current angular mode. The c r (calc-to-radians) [rad] command converts an HMS form or angle in degrees into an angle in radians. The c h (calc-to-hms) [hms] command converts a real number, interpreted according to the current angular mode, to an HMS form describing the same angle. In algebraic notation, the hms function also accepts three arguments: ‘hms(h, m, s)’. (The three-argument version is independent of the current angular mode.) The calc-from-hms command converts the HMS form on the top of the stack into a real number according to the current angular mode. The c p (calc-polar) command converts the complex number on the top of the stack from polar to rectangular form, or from rectangular to polar form, whichever is appropriate. Real numbers are left the same. This command is equivalent to the rect or polar functions in algebraic formulas, depending on the direction of conversion. (It uses polar, except that if the argument is already a polar complex number, it uses rect instead. The I c p command always uses rect.) The c c (calc-clean) [pclean] command “cleans” the number on the top of the stack. Floating point numbers are re-rounded according to the current precision. Polar numbers whose angular components have strayed from the −180 to +180 degree range are normalized. (Note that results will be undesirable if the current angular mode is different from the one under which the number was produced!) Integers and fractions are generally unaffected by this operation. Vectors and formulas are cleaned by cleaning each component number (i.e., pervasively).

190

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

If the simplification mode is set below basic simplification, it is raised for the purposes of this command. Thus, c c applies the basic simplifications even if their automatic application is disabled. See Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140. A numeric prefix argument to c c sets the floating-point precision to that value for the duration of the command. A positive prefix (of at least 3) sets the precision to the specified value; a negative or zero prefix decreases the precision by the specified amount. The keystroke sequences c 0 through c 9 are equivalent to c c with the corresponding negative prefix argument. If roundoff errors have changed 2.0 into 1.999999, typing c 1 to clip off one decimal place often conveniently does the trick. The c c command with a numeric prefix argument, and the c 0 through c 9 commands, also “clip” very small floating-point numbers to zero. If the exponent is less than or equal to the negative of the specified precision, the number is changed to 0.0. For example, if the current precision is 12, then c 2 changes the vector ‘[1e-8, 1e-9, 1e-10, 1e-11]’ to ‘[1e-8, 1e-9, 0, 0]’. Numbers this small generally arise from roundoff noise. If the numbers you are using really are legitimately this small, you should avoid using the c 0 through c 9 commands. (The plain c c command rounds to the current precision but does not clip small numbers.) One more property of c 0 through c 9, and of c c with a prefix argument, is that integervalued floats are converted to plain integers, so that c 1 on ‘[1., 1.5, 2., 2.5, 3.]’ produces ‘[1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3]’. This is not done for huge numbers (‘1e100’ is technically an integer-valued float, but you wouldn’t want it automatically converted to a 100-digit integer). With the Hyperbolic flag, H c c and H c 0 through H c 9 operate non-pervasively [clean].

7.5 Date Arithmetic The commands described in this section perform various conversions and calculations involving date forms (see Section 4.9 [Date Forms], page 120). They use the t (for time/date) prefix key followed by shifted letters. The simplest date arithmetic is done using the regular + and - commands. In particular, adding a number to a date form advances the date form by a certain number of days; adding an HMS form to a date form advances the date by a certain amount of time; and subtracting two date forms produces a difference measured in days. The commands described here provide additional, more specialized operations on dates. Many of these commands accept a numeric prefix argument; if you give plain C-u as the prefix, these commands will instead take the additional argument from the top of the stack.

7.5.1 Date Conversions The t D (calc-date) [date] command converts a date form into a number, measured in days since Jan 1, 1 AD. The result will be an integer if date is a pure date form, or a fraction or float if date is a date/time form. Or, if its argument is a number, it converts this number into a date form. With a numeric prefix argument, t D takes that many objects (up to six) from the top of the stack and interprets them in one of the following ways:

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

191

The ‘date(year, month, day)’ function builds a pure date form out of the specified year, month, and day, which must all be integers. Year is a year number, such as 1991 (not the same as 91!). Month must be an integer in the range 1 to 12; day must be in the range 1 to 31. If the specified month has fewer than 31 days and day is too large, the equivalent day in the following month will be used. The ‘date(month, day)’ function builds a pure date form using the current year, as determined by the real-time clock. The ‘date(year, month, day, hms)’ function builds a date/time form using an hms form. The ‘date(year, month, day, hour, minute, second)’ function builds a date/time form. hour should be an integer in the range 0 to 23; minute should be an integer in the range 0 to 59; second should be any real number in the range ‘[0 .. 60)’. The last two arguments default to zero if omitted. The t J (calc-julian) [julian] command converts a date form into a Julian day count, which is the number of days since noon (GMT) on Jan 1, 4713 BC. A pure date is converted to an integer Julian count representing noon of that day. A date/time form is converted to an exact floating-point Julian count, adjusted to interpret the date form in the current time zone but the Julian day count in Greenwich Mean Time. A numeric prefix argument allows you to specify the time zone; see Section 7.5.4 [Time Zones], page 195. Use a prefix of zero to suppress the time zone adjustment. Note that pure date forms are never time-zone adjusted. This command can also do the opposite conversion, from a Julian day count (either an integer day, or a floating-point day and time in the GMT zone), into a pure date form or a date/time form in the current or specified time zone. The t U (calc-unix-time) [unixtime] command converts a date form into a Unix time value, which is the number of seconds since midnight on Jan 1, 1970, or vice-versa. The numeric result will be an integer if the current precision is 12 or less; for higher precision, the result may be a float with (precision−12) digits after the decimal. Just as for t J, the numeric time is interpreted in the GMT time zone and the date form is interpreted in the current or specified zone. Some systems use Unix-like numbering but with the local time zone; give a prefix of zero to suppress the adjustment if so. The t C (calc-convert-time-zones) [tzconv] command converts a date form from one time zone to another. You are prompted for each time zone name in turn; you can answer with any suitable Calc time zone expression (see Section 7.5.4 [Time Zones], page 195). If you answer either prompt with a blank line, the local time zone is used for that prompt. You can also answer the first prompt with $ to take the two time zone names from the stack (and the date to be converted from the third stack level).

7.5.2 Date Functions The t N (calc-now) [now] command pushes the current date and time on the stack as a date form. The time is reported in terms of the specified time zone; with no numeric prefix argument, t N reports for the current time zone. The t P (calc-date-part) command extracts one part of a date form. The prefix argument specifies the part; with no argument, this command prompts for a part code from 1 to 9. The various part codes are described in the following paragraphs.

192

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The M-1 t P [year] function extracts the year number from a date form as an integer, e.g., 1991. This and the following functions will also accept a real number for an argument, which is interpreted as a standard Calc day number. Note that this function will never return zero, since the year 1 BC immediately precedes the year 1 AD. The M-2 t P [month] function extracts the month number from a date form as an integer in the range 1 to 12. The M-3 t P [day] function extracts the day number from a date form as an integer in the range 1 to 31. The M-4 t P [hour] function extracts the hour from a date form as an integer in the range 0 (midnight) to 23. Note that 24-hour time is always used. This returns zero for a pure date form. This function (and the following two) also accept HMS forms as input. The M-5 t P [minute] function extracts the minute from a date form as an integer in the range 0 to 59. The M-6 t P [second] function extracts the second from a date form. If the current precision is 12 or less, the result is an integer in the range 0 to 59. For higher precision, the result may instead be a floating-point number. The M-7 t P [weekday] function extracts the weekday number from a date form as an integer in the range 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday). The M-8 t P [yearday] function extracts the day-of-year number from a date form as an integer in the range 1 (January 1) to 366 (December 31 of a leap year). The M-9 t P [time] function extracts the time portion of a date form as an HMS form. This returns ‘0@ 0’ 0"’ for a pure date form. The t M (calc-new-month) [newmonth] command computes a new date form that represents the first day of the month specified by the input date. The result is always a pure date form; only the year and month numbers of the input are retained. With a numeric prefix argument n in the range from 1 to 31, t M computes the nth day of the month. (If n is greater than the actual number of days in the month, or if n is zero, the last day of the month is used.) The t Y (calc-new-year) [newyear] command computes a new pure date form that represents the first day of the year specified by the input. The month, day, and time of the input date form are lost. With a numeric prefix argument n in the range from 1 to 366, t Y computes the nth day of the year (366 is treated as 365 in non-leap years). A prefix argument of 0 computes the last day of the year (December 31). A negative prefix argument from −1 to −12 computes the first day of the nth month of the year. The t W (calc-new-week) [newweek] command computes a new pure date form that represents the Sunday on or before the input date. With a numeric prefix argument, it can be made to use any day of the week as the starting day; the argument must be in the range from 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday). This function always subtracts between 0 and 6 days from the input date. Here’s an example use of newweek: Find the date of the next Wednesday after a given date. Using M-3 t W or ‘newweek(d, 3)’ will give you the preceding Wednesday, so ‘newweek(d+7, 3)’ will give you the following Wednesday. A further look at the definition of newweek shows that if the input date is itself a Wednesday, this formula will return the Wednesday one week in the future. An exercise for the reader is to modify this formula to

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

193

yield the same day if the input is already a Wednesday. Another interesting exercise is to preserve the time-of-day portion of the input (newweek resets the time to midnight; hint: how can newweek be defined in terms of the weekday function?). The ‘pwday(date)’ function (not on any key) computes the day-of-month number of the Sunday on or before date. With two arguments, ‘pwday(date, day)’ computes the day number of the Sunday on or before day number day of the month specified by date. The day must be in the range from 7 to 31; if the day number is greater than the actual number of days in the month, the true number of days is used instead. Thus ‘pwday(date, 7)’ finds the first Sunday of the month, and ‘pwday(date, 31)’ finds the last Sunday of the month. With a third weekday argument, pwday can be made to look for any day of the week instead of Sunday. The t I (calc-inc-month) [incmonth] command increases a date form by one month, or by an arbitrary number of months specified by a numeric prefix argument. The time portion, if any, of the date form stays the same. The day also stays the same, except that if the new month has fewer days the day number may be reduced to lie in the valid range. For example, ‘incmonth()’ produces ‘’. Because of this, t I t I and M-2 t I do not always give the same results (‘’ versus ‘’ in this case). The ‘incyear(date, step)’ function increases a date form by the specified number of years, which may be any positive or negative integer. Note that ‘incyear(d, n)’ is equivalent to ‘incmonth(d, 12*n)’, but these do not have simple equivalents in terms of day arithmetic because months and years have varying lengths. If the step argument is omitted, 1 year is assumed. There is no keyboard command for this function; use C-u 12 t I instead. There is no newday function at all because F [floor] serves this purpose. Similarly, instead of incday and incweek simply use d + n or d + 7n. See Section 7.1 [Basic Arithmetic], page 183, for the f ] [incr] command which can adjust a date/time form by a certain number of seconds.

7.5.3 Business Days Often time is measured in “business days” or “working days,” where weekends and holidays are skipped. Calc’s normal date arithmetic functions use calendar days, so that subtracting two consecutive Mondays will yield a difference of 7 days. By contrast, subtracting two consecutive Mondays would yield 5 business days (assuming two-day weekends and the absence of holidays). The t + (calc-business-days-plus) [badd] and t - (calc-business-days-minus) [bsub] commands perform arithmetic using business days. For t +, one argument must be a date form and the other must be a real number (positive or negative). If the number is not an integer, then a certain amount of time is added as well as a number of days; for example, adding 0.5 business days to a time in Friday evening will produce a time in Monday morning. It is also possible to add an HMS form; adding ‘12@ 0’ 0"’ also adds half a business day. For t -, the arguments are either a date form and a number or HMS form, or two date forms, in which case the result is the number of business days between the two dates.

194

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

By default, Calc considers any day that is not a Saturday or Sunday to be a business day. You can define any number of additional holidays by editing the variable Holidays. (There is an s H convenience command for editing this variable.) Initially, Holidays contains the vector ‘[sat, sun]’. Entries in the Holidays vector may be any of the following kinds of objects: • Date forms (pure dates, not date/time forms). These specify particular days which are to be treated as holidays. • Intervals of date forms. These specify a range of days, all of which are holidays (e.g., Christmas week). See Section 4.12 [Interval Forms], page 124. • Nested vectors of date forms. Each date form in the vector is considered to be a holiday. • Any Calc formula which evaluates to one of the above three things. If the formula involves the variable y, it stands for a yearly repeating holiday; y will take on various year numbers like 1992. For example, ‘date(y, 12, 25)’ specifies Christmas day, and ‘newweek(date(y, 11, 7), 4) + 21’ specifies Thanksgiving (which is held on the fourth Thursday of November). If the formula involves the variable m, that variable takes on month numbers from 1 to 12: ‘date(y, m, 15)’ is a holiday that takes place on the 15th of every month. • A weekday name, such as sat or sun. This is really a variable whose name is a threeletter, lower-case day name. • An interval of year numbers (integers). This specifies the span of years over which this holiday list is to be considered valid. Any business-day arithmetic that goes outside this range will result in an error message. Use this if you are including an explicit list of holidays, rather than a formula to generate them, and you want to make sure you don’t accidentally go beyond the last point where the holidays you entered are complete. If there is no limiting interval in the Holidays vector, the default ‘[1 .. 2737]’ is used. (This is the absolute range of years for which Calc’s business-day algorithms will operate.) • An interval of HMS forms. This specifies the span of hours that are to be considered one business day. For example, if this range is ‘[9@ 0’ 0" .. 17@ 0’ 0"]’ (i.e., 9am to 5pm), then the business day is only eight hours long, so that 1.5 t + on ‘’ will add one business day and four business hours to produce ‘’. Likewise, t - will now express differences in time as fractions of an eight-hour day. Times before 9am will be treated as 9am by business date arithmetic, and times at or after 5pm will be treated as 4:59:59pm. If there is no HMS interval in Holidays, the full 24-hour day ‘[0 0’ 0" .. 24 0’ 0"]’ is assumed. (Regardless of the type of bounds you specify, the interval is treated as inclusive on the low end and exclusive on the high end, so that the work day goes from 9am up to, but not including, 5pm.) If the Holidays vector is empty, then t + and t - will act just like + and - because there will then be no difference between business days and calendar days. Calc expands the intervals and formulas you give into a complete list of holidays for internal use. This is done mainly to make sure it can detect multiple holidays. (For example, ‘’ is both New Year’s Day and a Sunday, but Calc’s algorithms take care to count it only once when figuring the number of holidays between two dates.)

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

195

Since the complete list of holidays for all the years from 1 to 2737 would be huge, Calc actually computes only the part of the list between the smallest and largest years that have been involved in business-day calculations so far. Normally, you won’t have to worry about this. Keep in mind, however, that if you do one calculation for 1992, and another for 1792, even if both involve only a small range of years, Calc will still work out all the holidays that fall in that 200-year span. If you add a (positive) number of days to a date form that falls on a weekend or holiday, the date form is treated as if it were the most recent business day. (Thus adding one business day to a Friday, Saturday, or Sunday will all yield the following Monday.) If you subtract a number of days from a weekend or holiday, the date is effectively on the following business day. (So subtracting one business day from Saturday, Sunday, or Monday yields the preceding Friday.) The difference between two dates one or both of which fall on holidays equals the number of actual business days between them. These conventions are consistent in the sense that, if you add n business days to any date, the difference between the result and the original date will come out to n business days. (It can’t be completely consistent though; a subtraction followed by an addition might come out a bit differently, since t + is incapable of producing a date that falls on a weekend or holiday.) There is a holiday function, not on any keys, that takes any date form and returns 1 if that date falls on a weekend or holiday, as defined in Holidays, or 0 if the date is a business day.

7.5.4 Time Zones Time zones and daylight saving time are a complicated business. The conversions to and from Julian and Unix-style dates automatically compute the correct time zone and daylight saving adjustment to use, provided they can figure out this information. This section describes Calc’s time zone adjustment algorithm in detail, in case you want to do conversions in different time zones or in case Calc’s algorithms can’t determine the right correction to use. Adjustments for time zones and daylight saving time are done by t U, t J, t N, and t C, but not by any other commands. In particular, ‘ - ’ evaluates to exactly 30 days even though there is a daylight-saving transition in between. This is also true for Julian pure dates: ‘julian() - julian()’. But Julian and Unix date/times will adjust for daylight saving time: using Calc’s default daylight saving time rule (see the explanation below), ‘julian() - julian()’ evaluates to ‘29.95833’ (that’s 29 days and 23 hours) because one hour was lost when daylight saving commenced on April 7, 1991. In brief, the idiom ‘julian(date1) - julian(date2)’ computes the actual number of 24-hour periods between two dates, whereas ‘date1 - date2’ computes the number of calendar days between two dates without taking daylight saving into account. The calc-time-zone [tzone] command converts the time zone specified by its numeric prefix argument into a number of seconds difference from Greenwich mean time (GMT). If the argument is a number, the result is simply that value multiplied by 3600. Typical arguments for North America are 5 (Eastern) or 8 (Pacific). If Daylight Saving time is in effect, one hour should be subtracted from the normal difference. If you give a prefix of plain C-u, calc-time-zone (like other date arithmetic commands that include a time zone argument) takes the zone argument from the top of the stack.

196

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

(In the case of t J and t U, the normal argument is then taken from the second-to-top stack position.) This allows you to give a non-integer time zone adjustment. The time-zone argument can also be an HMS form, or it can be a variable which is a time zone name in upper- or lower-case. For example ‘tzone(PST) = tzone(8)’ and ‘tzone(pdt) = tzone(7)’ (for Pacific standard and daylight saving times, respectively). North American and European time zone names are defined as follows; note that for each time zone there is one name for standard time, another for daylight saving time, and a third for “generalized” time in which the daylight saving adjustment is computed from context. YST 9

PST 8

MST 7

CST 6

EST 5

AST 4

NST 3.5

GMT 0

WET -1

MET -2

MEZ -2

YDT 8

PDT 7

MDT 6

CDT 5

EDT 4

ADT 3

NDT 2.5

BST -1

WETDST -2

METDST -3

MESZ -3

YGT 9/8

PGT 8/7

MGT 7/6

CGT 6/5

EGT 5/4

AGT 4/3

NGT 3.5/2.5

MEGT -2/-3

MEGZ -2/-3

BGT WEGT 0/-1 -1/-2

To define time zone names that do not appear in the above table, you must modify the Lisp variable math-tzone-names. This is a list of lists describing the different time zone names; its structure is best explained by an example. The three entries for Pacific Time look like this: ( ( "PST" 8 0 ) ; Name as an upper-case string, then standard ( "PDT" 8 -1 ) ; adjustment, then daylight saving adjustment. ( "PGT" 8 "PST" "PDT" ) ) ; Generalized time zone.

With no arguments, calc-time-zone or ‘tzone()’ will by default get the time zone and daylight saving information from the calendar (see Section “The Calendar and the Diary” in The GNU Emacs Manual). To use a different time zone, or if the calendar does not give the desired result, you can set the Calc variable TimeZone (which is by default nil) to an appropriate time zone name. (The easiest way to do this is to edit the TimeZone variable using Calc’s s T command, then use the s p (calc-permanent-variable) command to save the value of TimeZone permanently.) If the time zone given by TimeZone is a generalized time zone, e.g., EGT, Calc examines the date being converted to tell whether to use standard or daylight saving time. But if the current time zone is explicit, e.g., EST or EDT, then that adjustment is used exactly and Calc’s daylight saving algorithm is not consulted. The special time zone name local is equivalent to no argument; i.e., it uses the information obtained from the calendar. The t J and t U commands with no numeric prefix arguments do the same thing as ‘tzone()’; namely, use the information from the calendar if TimeZone is nil, otherwise use the time zone given by TimeZone. When Calc computes the daylight saving information itself (i.e., when the TimeZone variable is set), it will by default consider daylight saving time to begin at 2 a.m. on the second Sunday of March (for years from 2007 on) or on the last Sunday in April (for years before 2007), and to end at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday of November. (for years from 2007 on) or the last Sunday in October (for years before 2007). These are the rules that have been in effect in much of North America since 1966 and take into account the rule change that began in 2007. If you are in a country that uses different rules for computing daylight saving time, you have two choices: Write your own daylight saving hook, or control time zones

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

197

explicitly by setting the TimeZone variable and/or always giving a time-zone argument for the conversion functions. The Lisp variable math-daylight-savings-hook holds the name of a function that is used to compute the daylight saving adjustment for a given date. The default is math-stddaylight-savings, which computes an adjustment (either 0 or −1) using the North American rules given above. The daylight saving hook function is called with four arguments: The date, as a floatingpoint number in standard Calc format; a six-element list of the date decomposed into year, month, day, hour, minute, and second, respectively; a string which contains the generalized time zone name in upper-case, e.g., "WEGT"; and a special adjustment to be applied to the hour value when converting into a generalized time zone (see below). The Lisp function math-prev-weekday-in-month is useful for daylight saving computations. This is an internal version of the user-level pwday function described in the previous section. It takes four arguments: The floating-point date value, the corresponding sixelement date list, the day-of-month number, and the weekday number (0–6). The default daylight saving hook ignores the time zone name, but a more sophisticated hook could use different algorithms for different time zones. It would also be possible to use different algorithms depending on the year number, but the default hook always uses the algorithm for 1987 and later. Here is a listing of the default daylight saving hook: (defun math-std-daylight-savings (date dt zone bump) (cond ((< (nth 1 dt) 4) 0) ((= (nth 1 dt) 4) (let ((sunday (math-prev-weekday-in-month date dt 7 0))) (cond ((< (nth 2 dt) sunday) 0) ((= (nth 2 dt) sunday) (if (>= (nth 3 dt) (+ 3 bump)) -1 0)) (t -1)))) ((< (nth 1 dt) 10) -1) ((= (nth 1 dt) 10) (let ((sunday (math-prev-weekday-in-month date dt 31 0))) (cond ((< (nth 2 dt) sunday) -1) ((= (nth 2 dt) sunday) (if (>= (nth 3 dt) (+ 2 bump)) 0 -1)) (t 0)))) (t 0)) )

The bump parameter is equal to zero when Calc is converting from a date form in a generalized time zone into a GMT date value. It is −1 when Calc is converting in the other direction. The adjustments shown above ensure that the conversion behaves correctly and reasonably around the 2 a.m. transition in each direction. There is a “missing” hour between 2 a.m. and 3 a.m. at the beginning of daylight saving time; converting a date/time form that falls in this hour results in a time value for the following hour, from 3 a.m. to 4 a.m. At the end of daylight saving time, the hour from 1 a.m. to 2 a.m. repeats itself; converting a date/time form that falls in this hour results in a time value for the first manifestation of that time (not the one that occurs one hour later). If math-daylight-savings-hook is nil, then the daylight saving adjustment is always taken to be zero. In algebraic formulas, ‘tzone(zone, date)’ computes the time zone adjustment for a given zone name at a given date. The date is ignored unless zone is a generalized time zone.

198

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

If date is a date form, the daylight saving computation is applied to it as it appears. If date is a numeric date value, it is adjusted for the daylight-saving version of zone before being given to the daylight saving hook. This odd-sounding rule ensures that the daylight-saving computation is always done in local time, not in the GMT time that a numeric date is typically represented in. The ‘dsadj(date, zone)’ function computes the daylight saving adjustment that is appropriate for date in time zone zone. If zone is explicitly in or not in daylight saving time (e.g., PDT or PST) the date is ignored. If zone is a generalized time zone, the algorithms described above are used. If zone is omitted, the computation is done for the current time zone.

7.6 Financial Functions Calc’s financial or business functions use the b prefix key followed by a shifted letter. (The b prefix followed by a lower-case letter is used for operations on binary numbers.) Note that the rate and the number of intervals given to these functions must be on the same time scale, e.g., both months or both years. Mixing an annual interest rate with a time expressed in months will give you very wrong answers! It is wise to compute these functions to a higher precision than you really need, just to make sure your answer is correct to the last penny; also, you may wish to check the definitions at the end of this section to make sure the functions have the meaning you expect.

7.6.1 Percentages The M-% (calc-percent) command takes a percentage value, say 5.4, and converts it to an equivalent actual number. For example, 5.4 M-% enters 0.054 on the stack. (That’s the META or ESC key combined with %.) Actually, M-% creates a formula of the form ‘5.4%’. You can enter ‘5.4%’ yourself during algebraic entry. The ‘%’ operator simply means, “the preceding value divided by 100.” The ‘%’ operator has very high precedence, so that ‘1+8%’ is interpreted as ‘1+(8%)’, not as ‘(1+8)%’. (The ‘%’ operator is just a postfix notation for the percent function, just like ‘20!’ is the notation for ‘fact(20)’, or twenty-factorial.) The formula ‘5.4%’ would normally evaluate immediately to 0.054, but the M-% command suppresses evaluation as it puts the formula onto the stack. However, the next Calc command that uses the formula ‘5.4%’ will evaluate it as its first step. The net effect is that you get to look at ‘5.4%’ on the stack, but Calc commands see it as ‘0.054’, which is what they expect. In particular, ‘5.4%’ and ‘0.054’ are suitable values for the rate arguments of the various financial functions, but the number ‘5.4’ is probably not suitable—it represents a rate of 540 percent! The key sequence M-% * effectively means “percent-of.” For example, 68 RET 25 M-% * computes 17, which is 25% of 68 (and also 68% of 25, which comes out to the same thing). The c % (calc-convert-percent) command converts the value on the top of the stack from numeric to percentage form. For example, if 0.08 is on the stack, c % converts it to ‘8%’. The quantity is the same, it’s just represented differently. (Contrast this with M-%,

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

199

which would convert this number to ‘0.08%’.) The = key is a convenient way to convert a formula like ‘8%’ back to numeric form, 0.08. To compute what percentage one quantity is of another quantity, use / c %. For example, 17 RET 68 / c % displays ‘25%’. The b % (calc-percent-change) [relch] command calculates the percentage change from one number to another. For example, 40 RET 50 b % produces the answer ‘25%’, since 50 is 25% larger than 40. A negative result represents a decrease: 50 RET 40 b % produces ‘-20%’, since 40 is 20% smaller than 50. (The answers are different in magnitude because, in the first case, we’re increasing by 25% of 40, but in the second case, we’re decreasing by 20% of 50.) The effect of 40 RET 50 b % is to compute (50 − 40)/40, converting the answer to percentage form as if by c %.

7.6.2 Future Value The b F (calc-fin-fv) [fv] command computes the future value of an investment. It takes three arguments from the stack: ‘fv(rate, n, payment)’. If you give payments of payment every year for n years, and the money you have paid earns interest at rate per year, then this function tells you what your investment would be worth at the end of the period. (The actual interval doesn’t have to be years, as long as n and rate are expressed in terms of the same intervals.) This function assumes payments occur at the end of each interval. The I b F [fvb] command does the same computation, but assuming your payments are at the beginning of each interval. Suppose you plan to deposit $1000 per year in a savings account earning 5.4% interest, starting right now. How much will be in the account after five years? fvb(5.4%, 5, 1000) = 5870.73. Thus you will have earned $870 worth of interest over the years. Using the stack, this calculation would have been 5.4 M-% 5 RET 1000 I b F. Note that the rate is expressed as a number between 0 and 1, not as a percentage. The H b F [fvl] command computes the future value of an initial lump sum investment. Suppose you could deposit those five thousand dollars in the bank right now; how much would they be worth in five years? fvl(5.4%, 5, 5000) = 6503.89. The algebraic functions fv and fvb accept an optional fourth argument, which is used as an initial lump sum in the sense of fvl. In other words, fv(rate, n, payment, initial) = fv(rate, n, payment) + fvl(rate, n, initial). To illustrate the relationships between these functions, we could do the fvb calculation “by hand” using fvl. The final balance will be the sum of the contributions of our five deposits at various times. The first deposit earns interest for five years: fvl(5.4%, 5, 1000) = 1300.78. The second deposit only earns interest for four years: fvl(5.4%, 4, 1000) = 1234.13. And so on down to the last deposit, which earns one year’s interest: fvl(5.4%, 1, 1000) = 1054.00. The sum of these five values is, sure enough, $5870.73, just as was computed by fvb directly. What does fv(5.4%, 5, 1000) = 5569.96 mean? The payments are now at the ends of the periods. The end of one year is the same as the beginning of the next, so what this really means is that we’ve lost the payment at year zero (which contributed $1300.78), but we’re now counting the payment at year five (which, since it didn’t have a chance to earn interest, counts as $1000). Indeed, 5569.96 = 5870.73 − 1300.78 + 1000 (give or take a bit of roundoff error).

200

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

7.6.3 Present Value The b P (calc-fin-pv) [pv] command computes the present value of an investment. Like fv, it takes three arguments: pv(rate, n, payment). It computes the present value of a series of regular payments. Suppose you have the chance to make an investment that will pay $2000 per year over the next four years; as you receive these payments you can put them in the bank at 9% interest. You want to know whether it is better to make the investment, or to keep the money in the bank where it earns 9% interest right from the start. The calculation pv(9%, 4, 2000) gives the result 6479.44. If your initial investment must be less than this, say, $6000, then the investment is worthwhile. But if you had to put up $7000, then it would be better just to leave it in the bank. Here is the interpretation of the result of pv: You are trying to compare the return from the investment you are considering, which is fv(9%, 4, 2000) = 9146.26, with the return from leaving the money in the bank, which is fvl(9%, 4, x) where x is the amount of money you would have to put up in advance. The pv function finds the break-even point, x = 6479.44, at which fvl(9%, 4, 6479.44) is also equal to 9146.26. This is the largest amount you should be willing to invest. The I b P [pvb] command solves the same problem, but with payments occurring at the beginning of each interval. It has the same relationship to fvb as pv has to fv. For example pvb(9%, 4, 2000) = 7062.59, a larger number than pv produced because we get to start earning interest on the return from our investment sooner. The H b P [pvl] command computes the present value of an investment that will pay off in one lump sum at the end of the period. For example, if we get our $8000 all at the end of the four years, pvl(9%, 4, 8000) = 5667.40. This is much less than pv reported, because we don’t earn any interest on the return from this investment. Note that pvl and fvl are simple inverses: fvl(9%, 4, 5667.40) = 8000. You can give an optional fourth lump-sum argument to pv and pvb; this is handled in exactly the same way as the fourth argument for fv and fvb. The b N (calc-fin-npv) [npv] command computes the net present value of a series of irregular investments. The first argument is the interest rate. The second argument is a vector which represents the expected return from the investment at the end of each interval. For example, if the rate represents a yearly interest rate, then the vector elements are the return from the first year, second year, and so on. Thus, npv(9%, [2000,2000,2000,2000]) = pv(9%, 4, 2000) = 6479.44. this function is more interesting when the payments are not all the same!

Obviously

The npv function can actually have two or more arguments. Multiple arguments are interpreted in the same way as for the vector statistical functions like vsum. See Section 9.7.1 [Single-Variable Statistics], page 230. Basically, if there are several payment arguments, each either a vector or a plain number, all these values are collected left-to-right into the complete list of payments. A numeric prefix argument on the b N command says how many payment values or vectors to take from the stack. The I b N [npvb] command computes the net present value where payments occur at the beginning of each interval rather than at the end.

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

201

7.6.4 Related Financial Functions The functions in this section are basically inverses of the present value functions with respect to the various arguments. The b M (calc-fin-pmt) [pmt] command computes the amount of periodic payment necessary to amortize a loan. Thus pmt(rate, n, amount) equals the value of payment such that pv(rate, n, payment) = amount. The I b M [pmtb] command does the same computation but using pvb instead of pv. Like pv and pvb, these functions can also take a fourth argument which represents an initial lump-sum investment. The H b M key just invokes the fvl function, which is the inverse of pvl. There is no explicit pmtl function. The b # (calc-fin-nper) [nper] command computes the number of regular payments necessary to amortize a loan. Thus nper(rate, payment, amount) equals the value of n such that pv(rate, n, payment) = amount. If payment is too small ever to amortize a loan for amount at interest rate rate, the nper function is left in symbolic form. The I b # [nperb] command does the same computation but using pvb instead of pv. You can give a fourth lump-sum argument to these functions, but the computation will be rather slow in the four-argument case. The H b # [nperl] command does the same computation using pvl. By exchanging payment and amount you can also get the solution for fvl. For example, nperl(8%, 2000, 1000) = 9.006, so if you place $1000 in a bank account earning 8%, it will take nine years to grow to $2000. The b T (calc-fin-rate) [rate] command computes the rate of return on an investment. This is also an inverse of pv: rate(n, payment, amount) computes the value of rate such that pv(rate, n, payment) = amount. The result is expressed as a formula like ‘6.3%’. The I b T [rateb] and H b T [ratel] commands solve the analogous equations with pvb or pvl in place of pv. Also, rate and rateb can accept an optional fourth argument just like pv and pvb. To redo the above example from a different perspective, ratel(9, 2000, 1000) = 8.00597%, which says you will need an interest rate of 8% in order to double your account in nine years. The b I (calc-fin-irr) [irr] command is the analogous function to rate but for net present value. Its argument is a vector of payments. Thus irr(payments) computes the rate such that npv(rate, payments) = 0; this rate is known as the internal rate of return. The I b I [irrb] command computes the internal rate of return assuming payments occur at the beginning of each period.

7.6.5 Depreciation Functions The functions in this section calculate depreciation, which is the amount of value that a possession loses over time. These functions are characterized by three parameters: cost, the original cost of the asset; salvage, the value the asset will have at the end of its expected “useful life”; and life, the number of years (or other periods) of the expected useful life. There are several methods for calculating depreciation that differ in the way they spread the depreciation over the lifetime of the asset.

202

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The b S (calc-fin-sln) [sln] command computes the “straight-line” depreciation. In this method, the asset depreciates by the same amount every year (or period). For example, ‘sln(12000, 2000, 5)’ returns 2000. The asset costs $12000 initially and will be worth $2000 after five years; it loses $2000 per year. The b Y (calc-fin-syd) [syd] command computes the accelerated “sum-of-years’-digits” depreciation. Here the depreciation is higher during the early years of the asset’s life. Since the depreciation is different each year, b Y takes a fourth period parameter which specifies which year is requested, from 1 to life. If period is outside this range, the syd function will return zero. The b D (calc-fin-ddb) [ddb] command computes an accelerated depreciation using the double-declining balance method. It also takes a fourth period parameter. For symmetry, the sln function will accept a period parameter as well, although it will ignore its value except that the return value will as usual be zero if period is out of range. For example, pushing the vector [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] (perhaps with v x 5) and then mapping V M ’ [sln(12000,2000,5,$), syd(12000,2000,5,$), ddb(12000,2000,5,$)] RET produces a matrix that allows us to compare the three depreciation methods: [ [ 2000, 3333, 4800 ] [ 2000, 2667, 2880 ] [ 2000, 2000, 1728 ] [ 2000, 1333, 592 ] [ 2000, 667, 0 ] ] (Values have been rounded to nearest integers in this figure.) We see that sln depreciates by the same amount each year, syd depreciates more at the beginning and less at the end, and ddb weights the depreciation even more toward the beginning. Summing columns with V R : + yields [10000, 10000, 10000]; the total depreciation in any method is (by definition) the difference between the cost and the salvage value.

7.6.6 Definitions For your reference, here are the actual formulas used to compute Calc’s financial functions. Calc will not evaluate a financial function unless the rate or n argument is known. However, payment or amount can be a variable. Calc expands these functions according to the formulas below for symbolic arguments only when you use the a " (calc-expandformula) command, or when taking derivatives or integrals or solving equations involving the functions. (1 + r)n − 1 r n ((1 + r) − 1)(1 + r) fvb(r, n, p) = p r fvl(r, n, p) = p(1 + r)n fv(r, n, p) = p

1 − (1 + r)−n r (1 − (1 + r)−n )(1 + r) pvb(r, n, p) = p r pv(r, n, p) = p

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

203

pvl(r, n, p) = p(1 + r)−n npv(r, [a, b, c]) = a(1 + r)−1 + b(1 + r)−2 + c(1 + r)−3 npvb(r, [a, b, c]) = a + b(1 + r)−1 + c(1 + r)−2 pmt(r, n, a, x) =

(a − x(1 + r)−n )r 1 − (1 + r)−n

(a − x(1 + r)−n )r (1 − (1 + r)−n )(1 + r) ar nper(r, p, a) = −log(1 − , 1 + r) p ar nperb(r, p, a) = −log(1 − , 1 + r) p(1 + r) a nperl(r, p, a) = −log( , 1 + r) p pmtb(r, n, a, x) =

p1/n −1 a1/n c−s sln(c, s, l) = l (c − s)(l − p + 1) syd(c, s, l, p) = l(l + 1)/2 ratel(n, p, a) =

ddb(c, s, l, p) =

2(c − depreciation so far) l

In pmt and pmtb, x = 0 if omitted. These functions accept any numeric objects, including error forms, intervals, and even (though not very usefully) complex numbers. The above formulas specify exactly the behavior of these functions with all sorts of inputs. Note that if the first argument to the log in nper is negative, nper leaves itself in symbolic form rather than returning a (financially meaningless) complex number. ‘rate(num, pmt, amt)’ solves the equation ‘pv(rate, num, pmt) = amt’ for ‘rate’ using H a R (calc-find-root), with the interval ‘[.01% .. 100%]’ for an initial guess. The rateb function is the same except that it uses pvb. Note that ratel can be solved directly; its formula is shown in the above list. Similarly, ‘irr(pmts)’ solves the equation ‘npv(rate, pmts) = 0’ for ‘rate’. If you give a fourth argument to nper or nperb, Calc will also use H a R to solve the equation using an initial guess interval of ‘[0 .. 100]’. A fourth argument to fv simply sums the two components calculated from the above formulas for fv and fvl. The same is true of fvb, pv, and pvb. The ddb function is computed iteratively; the “book” value starts out equal to cost, and decreases according to the above formula for the specified number of periods. If the book value would decrease below salvage, it only decreases to salvage and the depreciation is zero for all subsequent periods. The ddb function returns the amount the book value decreased in the specified period.

204

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

7.7 Binary Number Functions The commands in this chapter all use two-letter sequences beginning with the b prefix. The “binary” operations actually work regardless of the currently displayed radix, although their results make the most sense in a radix like 2, 8, or 16 (as obtained by the d 2, d 8, or d 6 commands, respectively). You may also wish to enable display of leading zeros with d z. See Section 6.7.1 [Radix Modes], page 146. The Calculator maintains a current word size w, an arbitrary positive or negative integer. For a positive word size, all of the binary operations described here operate modulo 2w . In particular, negative arguments are converted to positive integers modulo 2w by all binary functions. If the word size is negative, binary operations produce twos-complement integers from −2 to 2−w−1 − 1 inclusive. Either mode accepts inputs in any range; the sign of w affects only the results produced. −w−1

The b c (calc-clip) [clip] command can be used to clip a number by reducing it modulo 2w . The commands described in this chapter automatically clip their results to the current word size. Note that other operations like addition do not use the current word size, since integer addition generally is not “binary.” (However, see Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140, calc-bin-simplify-mode.) For example, with a word size of 8 bits b c converts a number to the range 0 to 255; with a word size of −8 b c converts to the range −128 to 127. The default word size is 32 bits. All operations except the shifts and rotates allow you to specify a different word size for that one operation by giving a numeric prefix argument: C-u 8 b c clips the top of stack to the range 0 to 255 regardless of the current word size. To set the word size permanently, use b w (calc-word-size). This command displays a prompt with the current word size; press RET immediately to keep this word size, or type a new word size at the prompt. When the binary operations are written in symbolic form, they take an optional second (or third) word-size parameter. When a formula like ‘and(a,b)’ is finally evaluated, the word size current at that time will be used, but when ‘and(a,b,-8)’ is evaluated, a word size of −8 will always be used. A symbolic binary function will be left in symbolic form unless the all of its argument(s) are integers or integer-valued floats. If either or both arguments are modulo forms for which M is a power of two, that power of two is taken as the word size unless a numeric prefix argument overrides it. The current word size is never consulted when modulo-power-of-two forms are involved. The b a (calc-and) [and] command computes the bitwise AND of the two numbers on the top of the stack. In other words, for each of the w binary digits of the two numbers (pairwise), the corresponding bit of the result is 1 if and only if both input bits are 1: ‘and(2#1100, 2#1010) = 2#1000’. The b o (calc-or) [or] command computes the bitwise inclusive OR of two numbers. A bit is 1 if either of the input bits, or both, are 1: ‘or(2#1100, 2#1010) = 2#1110’. The b x (calc-xor) [xor] command computes the bitwise exclusive OR of two numbers. A bit is 1 if exactly one of the input bits is 1: ‘xor(2#1100, 2#1010) = 2#0110’.

Chapter 7: Arithmetic Functions

205

The b d (calc-diff) [diff] command computes the bitwise difference of two numbers; this is defined by ‘diff(a,b) = and(a,not(b))’, so that ‘diff(2#1100, 2#1010) = 2#0100’. The b n (calc-not) [not] command computes the bitwise NOT of a number. A bit is 1 if the input bit is 0 and vice-versa. The b l (calc-lshift-binary) [lsh] command shifts a number left by one bit, or by the number of bits specified in the numeric prefix argument. A negative prefix argument performs a logical right shift, in which zeros are shifted in on the left. In symbolic form, ‘lsh(a)’ is short for ‘lsh(a,1)’, which in turn is short for ‘lsh(a,n,w)’. Bits shifted “off the end,” according to the current word size, are lost. The H b l command also does a left shift, but it takes two arguments from the stack (the value to shift, and, at top-of-stack, the number of bits to shift). This version interprets the prefix argument just like the regular binary operations, i.e., as a word size. The Hyperbolic flag has a similar effect on the rest of the binary shift and rotate commands. The b r (calc-rshift-binary) [rsh] command shifts a number right by one bit, or by the number of bits specified in the numeric prefix argument: ‘rsh(a,n) = lsh(a,-n)’. The b L (calc-lshift-arith) [ash] command shifts a number left. It is analogous to lsh, except that if the shift is rightward (the prefix argument is negative), an arithmetic shift is performed as described below. The b R (calc-rshift-arith) [rash] command performs an “arithmetic” shift to the right, in which the leftmost bit (according to the current word size) is duplicated rather than shifting in zeros. This corresponds to dividing by a power of two where the input is interpreted as a signed, twos-complement number. (The distinction between the ‘rsh’ and ‘rash’ operations is totally independent from whether the word size is positive or negative.) With a negative prefix argument, this performs a standard left shift. The b t (calc-rotate-binary) [rot] command rotates a number one bit to the left. The leftmost bit (according to the current word size) is dropped off the left and shifted in on the right. With a numeric prefix argument, the number is rotated that many bits to the left or right. See Section 9.6 [Set Operations], page 227, for the b p and b u commands that pack and unpack binary integers into sets. (For example, b u unpacks the number ‘2#11001’ to the set of bit-numbers ‘[0, 3, 4]’.) Type b u V # to count the number of “1” bits in a binary integer. Another interesting use of the set representation of binary integers is to reverse the bits in, say, a 32-bit integer. Type b u to unpack; type 31 TAB - to replace each bit-number in the set with 31 minus that bit-number; type b p to pack the set back into a binary integer.

Chapter 8: Scientific Functions

207

8 Scientific Functions The functions described here perform trigonometric and other transcendental calculations. They generally produce floating-point answers correct to the full current precision. The H (Hyperbolic) and I (Inverse) flag keys must be used to get some of these functions from the keyboard. One miscellaneous command is shift-P (calc-pi), which pushes the value of π (at the current precision) onto the stack. With the Hyperbolic flag, it pushes the value e, the base of natural logarithms. With the Inverse flag, it pushes Euler’s constant γ (about 0.5772). With both Inverse and Hyperbolic, it pushes the “golden ratio” φ (about 1.618). (At present, Euler’s constant is not available to unlimited precision; Calc knows only the first 100 digits.) In Symbolic mode, these commands push the actual variables ‘pi’, ‘e’, ‘gamma’, and ‘phi’, respectively, instead of their values; see Section 6.4.5 [Symbolic Mode], page 138. The Q (calc-sqrt) [sqrt] function is described elsewhere; see Section 7.1 [Basic Arithmetic], page 183. With the Inverse flag [sqr], this command computes the square of the argument. See Section 3.7 [Prefix Arguments], page 109, for a discussion of the effect of numeric prefix arguments on commands in this chapter which do not otherwise interpret a prefix argument.

8.1 Logarithmic Functions The shift-L (calc-ln) [ln] command computes the natural logarithm of the real or complex number on the top of the stack. With the Inverse flag it computes the exponential function instead, although this is redundant with the E command. The shift-E (calc-exp) [exp] command computes the exponential, i.e., e raised to the power of the number on the stack. The meanings of the Inverse and Hyperbolic flags follow from those for the calc-ln command. The H L (calc-log10) [log10] command computes the common (base-10) logarithm of a number. (With the Inverse flag [exp10], it raises ten to a given power.) Note that the common logarithm of a complex number is computed by taking the natural logarithm and dividing by ln 10. The B (calc-log) [log] command computes a logarithm to any base. For example, 1024 RET 2 B produces 10, since 210 = 1024. In certain cases like ‘log(3,9)’, the result will be either 1:2 or 0.5 depending on the current Fraction mode setting. With the Inverse flag [alog], this command is similar to ^ except that the order of the arguments is reversed. The f I (calc-ilog) [ilog] command computes the integer logarithm of a number to any base. The number and the base must themselves be positive integers. This is the true logarithm, rounded down to an integer. Thus ilog(x,10) is 3 for all x in the range from 1000 to 9999. If both arguments are positive integers, exact integer arithmetic is used; otherwise, this is equivalent to ‘floor(log(x,b))’. The f E (calc-expm1) [expm1] command computes ex − 1, but using an algorithm that produces a more accurate answer when the result is close to zero, i.e., when ex is close to one.

208

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The f L (calc-lnp1) [lnp1] command computes ln(x + 1), producing a more accurate answer when x is close to zero.

8.2 Trigonometric/Hyperbolic Functions The shift-S (calc-sin) [sin] command computes the sine of an angle or complex number. If the input is an HMS form, it is interpreted as degrees-minutes-seconds; otherwise, the input is interpreted according to the current angular mode. It is best to use Radians mode when operating on complex numbers. Calc’s “units” mechanism includes angular units like deg, rad, and grad. While ‘sin(45 deg)’ is not evaluated all the time, the u s (calc-simplify-units) command will simplify ‘sin(45 deg)’ by taking the sine of 45 degrees, regardless of the current angular mode. See Section 11.1 [Basic Operations on Units], page 311. Also, the symbolic variable pi is not ordinarily recognized in arguments to trigonometric functions, as in ‘sin(3 pi / 4)’, but the default algebraic simplifications recognize many such formulas when the current angular mode is Radians and Symbolic mode is enabled; this example would be replaced by ‘sqrt(2) / 2’. See Section 6.4.5 [Symbolic Mode], page 138. Beware, this simplification occurs even if you have stored a different value in the variable ‘pi’; this is one reason why changing built-in variables is a bad idea. Arguments of the form x plus a multiple of π/2 are also simplified. Calc includes similar formulas for cos and tan. Calc’s algebraic simplifications know all angles which are integer multiples of π/12, π/10, or π/8 radians. In Degrees mode, analogous simplifications occur for integer multiples of 15 or 18 degrees, and for arguments plus multiples of 90 degrees. With the Inverse flag, calc-sin computes an arcsine. This is also available as the calc-arcsin command or arcsin algebraic function. The returned argument is converted to degrees, radians, or HMS notation depending on the current angular mode. With the Hyperbolic flag, calc-sin computes the hyperbolic sine, also available as calc-sinh [sinh]. With the Hyperbolic and Inverse flags, it computes the hyperbolic arcsine (calc-arcsinh) [arcsinh]. The shift-C (calc-cos) [cos] command computes the cosine of an angle or complex number, and shift-T (calc-tan) [tan] computes the tangent, along with all the various inverse and hyperbolic variants of these functions. The f T (calc-arctan2) [arctan2] command takes two numbers from the stack and computes the arc tangent of their ratio. The result is in the full range from −180 (exclusive) to +180 (inclusive) degrees, or the analogous range in radians. A similar result would be obtained with / followed by I T, but the value would only be in the range from −90 to +90 degrees since the division loses information about the signs of the two components, and an error might result from an explicit division by zero which arctan2 would avoid. By (arbitrary) definition, ‘arctan2(0,0)=0’. The calc-sincos [sincos] command computes the sine and cosine of a number, returning them as a vector of the form ‘[cos, sin]’. With the Inverse flag [arcsincos], this command takes a two-element vector as an argument and computes arctan2 of the elements. (This command does not accept the Hyperbolic flag.) The remaining trigonometric functions, calc-sec [sec], calc-csc [csc] and calc-cot [cot], are also available. With the Hyperbolic flag, these compute their hyperbolic coun-

Chapter 8: Scientific Functions

209

terparts, which are also available separately as calc-sech [sech], calc-csch [csch] and calc-coth [coth]. (These commands do not accept the Inverse flag.)

8.3 Advanced Mathematical Functions Calc can compute a variety of less common functions that arise in various branches of mathematics. All of the functions described in this section allow arbitrary complex arguments and, except as noted, will work to arbitrarily large precision. They can not at present handle error forms or intervals as arguments. NOTE: These functions are still experimental. In particular, their accuracy is not guaranteed in all domains. It is advisable to set the current precision comfortably higher than you actually need when using these functions. Also, these functions may be impractically slow for some values of the arguments. The f g (calc-gamma) [gamma] command computes the Euler gamma function. For positive integer arguments, this is related to the factorial function: ‘gamma(n+1) = fact(n)’. For general complex R ∞ arguments the gamma function can be defined by the following definite integral: Γ(a) = 0 ta−1 et dt. (The actual implementation uses far more efficient computational methods.) The f G (calc-inc-gamma) [gammaP] command computes the incomplete func R x a−1 t gamma tion, denoted ‘P(a,x)’. This is defined by the integral, P (a, x) = 0 t e dt /Γ(a). This implies that ‘gammaP(a,inf) = 1’ for any a (see the definition of the normal gamma function). Several other varieties of incomplete gamma function are defined. The complement of P (a, x), called Q(a, x) = 1 − P (a, x) by some authors, is computed by the I f G [gammaQ] command. You can think of this as taking the other half of the integral, from x to infinity. The functions corresponding to the integrals that define P (a, x) and Q(a, x) but without the normalizing 1/Γ(a) factor are called γ(a, x) and Γ(a, x), respectively. You can obtain these using the H f G [gammag] and I H f G [gammaG] commands. The f b (calc-beta) [beta] command computes the Euler beta function, which defined R 1is a−1 in terms of the gamma function as B(a, b) = Γ(a)Γ(b)/Γ(a + b), or by B(a, b) = 0 t (1 − t)b−1 dt. The f B (calc-inc-beta) [betaI] command computes the incomplete beta function Rx I(x, a, b). It is defined by I(x, a, b) = 0 ta−1 (1 − t)b−1 dt /B(a, b). Once again, the H (hyperbolic) prefix gives the corresponding un-normalized version [betaB]. Rx

The f e (calc-erf) [erf] command computes the error function erf(x) = √2π 0 e−t dt. The complementary error function I f e (calc-erfc) [erfc] is the corresponding integral from ‘x’ to infinity; the sum erf(x) + erfc(x) = 1. The f j (calc-bessel-J) [besJ] and f y (calc-bessel-Y) [besY] commands compute the Bessel functions of the first and second kinds, respectively. In ‘besJ(n,x)’ and ‘besY(n,x)’ the “order” parameter n is often an integer, but is not required to be one. Calc’s implementation of the Bessel functions currently limits the precision to 8 digits, and may not be exact even to that precision. Use with care!

210

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

8.4 Branch Cuts and Principal Values All of the logarithmic, trigonometric, and other scientific functions are defined for complex numbers as well as for reals. This section describes the values returned in cases where the general result is a family of possible values. Calc follows section 12.5.3 of Steele’s Common Lisp, the Language, second edition, in these matters. This section will describe each function briefly; for a more detailed discussion (including some nifty diagrams), consult Steele’s book. Note that the branch cuts for arctan and arctanh were changed between the first and second editions of Steele. Recent versions of Calc follow the second edition. The new branch cuts exactly match those of the HP-28/48 calculators. They also match those of Mathematica 1.2, except that Mathematica’s arctan cut is always in the right half of the complex plane, and its arctanh cut is always in the top half of the plane. Calc’s cuts are continuous with quadrants I and III for arctan, or II and IV for arctanh. Note: The current implementations of these functions with complex arguments are designed with proper behavior around the branch cuts in mind, not efficiency or accuracy. You may need to increase the floating precision and wait a while to get suitable answers from them. For ‘sqrt(a+bi)’: When a < 0 and b is small but positive or zero, the result is close to the +i axis. For b small and negative, the result is close to the −i axis. The result always lies in the right half of the complex plane. For ‘ln(a+bi)’: The real part is defined as ‘ln(abs(a+bi))’. The imaginary part is defined as ‘arg(a+bi) = arctan2(b,a)’. Thus the branch cuts for sqrt and ln both lie on the negative real axis. The following table describes these branch cuts in another way. If the real and imaginary parts of z are as shown, then the real and imaginary parts of f (z) will be as shown. Here eps stands for a small positive value; each occurrence of eps may stand for a different small value. z sqrt(z) ln(z) ---------------------------------------+, 0 +, 0 any, 0 -, 0 0, + any, pi -, +eps +eps, + +eps, + -, -eps +eps, +eps, -

For ‘z1^z2’: This is defined by ‘exp(ln(z1)*z2)’. One interesting consequence of this is that ‘(-8)^1:3’ does not evaluate to −2 as you might expect, but to the complex number (1., 1.732). Both of these are valid cube roots of −8 (as is (1., −1.732)); Calc chooses a perhaps less-obvious root for the sake of mathematical consistency. For ‘arcsin(z)’: This is defined by ‘-i*ln(i*z + sqrt(1-z^2))’. The branch cuts are on the real axis, less than −1 and greater than 1. For ‘arccos(z)’: This is defined by ‘-i*ln(z + i*sqrt(1-z^2))’, or equivalently by ‘pi/2 - arcsin(z)’. The branch cuts are on the real axis, less than −1 and greater than 1. For ‘arctan(z)’: This is defined by ‘(ln(1+i*z) - ln(1-i*z)) / (2*i)’. The branch cuts are on the imaginary axis, below −i and above i. For ‘arcsinh(z)’: This is defined by ‘ln(z + sqrt(1+z^2))’. The branch cuts are on the imaginary axis, below −i and above i.

Chapter 8: Scientific Functions

211

For ‘arccosh(z)’: This is defined by ‘ln(z + (z+1)*sqrt((z-1)/(z+1)))’. The branch cut is on the real axis less than 1. For ‘arctanh(z)’: This is defined by ‘(ln(1+z) - ln(1-z)) / 2’. The branch cuts are on the real axis, less than −1 and greater than 1. The following tables for arcsin, arccos, and arctan assume the current angular mode is Radians. The hyperbolic functions operate independently of the angular mode. z arcsin(z) arccos(z) ------------------------------------------------------(-1..1), 0 (-pi/2..pi/2), 0 (0..pi), 0 (-1..1), +eps (-pi/2..pi/2), +eps (0..pi), -eps (-1..1), -eps (-pi/2..pi/2), -eps (0..pi), +eps 1, -eps pi/2 - eps, +eps, + z arccosh(z) arctanh(z) ----------------------------------------------------(-1..1), 0 0, (0..pi) any, 0 (-1..1), +eps +eps, (0..pi) any, +eps (-1..1), -eps +eps, (-pi..0) any, -eps 1, -eps +, -eps +, -pi/2 + eps z arcsinh(z) arctan(z) ----------------------------------------------------0, (-1..1) 0, (-pi/2..pi/2) 0, any 0, 1 -, pi/2 - eps -pi/2 + eps, +

Finally, the following identities help to illustrate the relationship between the complex trigonometric and hyperbolic functions. They are valid everywhere, including on the branch cuts. sin(i*z) cos(i*z) tan(i*z) sinh(i*z)

= i*sinh(z) = cosh(z) = i*tanh(z) = i*sin(z)

arcsin(i*z) arcsinh(i*z) arctan(i*z) cosh(i*z)

= i*arcsinh(z) = i*arcsin(z) = i*arctanh(z) = cos(z)

The “advanced math” functions (gamma, Bessel, etc.) are also defined for general complex arguments, but their branch cuts and principal values are not rigorously specified at present.

8.5 Random Numbers The k r (calc-random) [random] command produces random numbers of various sorts. Given a positive numeric prefix argument M , it produces a random integer N in the range 0 ≤ N < M . Each possible value N appears with equal probability.

212

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

With no numeric prefix argument, the k r command takes its argument from the stack instead. Once again, if this is a positive integer M the result is a random integer less than M . However, note that while numeric prefix arguments are limited to six digits or so, an M taken from the stack can be arbitrarily large. If M is negative, the result is a random integer in the range M < N ≤ 0. If the value on the stack is a floating-point number M , the result is a random floatingpoint number N in the range 0 ≤ N < M or M < N ≤ 0, according to the sign of M. If M is zero, the result is a Gaussian-distributed random real number; the distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. The algorithm used generates random numbers in pairs; thus, every other call to this function will be especially fast. If M is an error form m +/- σ where m and σ are both real numbers, the result uses a Gaussian distribution with mean m and standard deviation σ. If M is an interval form, the lower and upper bounds specify the acceptable limits of the random numbers. If both bounds are integers, the result is a random integer in the specified range. If either bound is floating-point, the result is a random real number in the specified range. If the interval is open at either end, the result will be sure not to equal that end value. (This makes a big difference for integer intervals, but for floating-point intervals it’s relatively minor: with a precision of 6, ‘random([1.0..2.0))’ will return any of one million numbers from 1.00000 to 1.99999; ‘random([1.0..2.0])’ may additionally return 2.00000, but the probability of this happening is extremely small.) If M is a vector, the result is one element taken at random from the vector. All elements of the vector are given equal probabilities. The sequence of numbers produced by k r is completely random by default, i.e., the sequence is seeded each time you start Calc using the current time and other information. You can get a reproducible sequence by storing a particular “seed value” in the Calc variable RandSeed. Any integer will do for a seed; integers of from 1 to 12 digits are good. If you later store a different integer into RandSeed, Calc will switch to a different pseudo-random sequence. If you “unstore” RandSeed, Calc will re-seed itself from the current time. If you store the same integer that you used before back into RandSeed, you will get the exact same sequence of random numbers as before. The calc-rrandom command (not on any key) produces a random real number between zero and one. It is equivalent to ‘random(1.0)’. The k a (calc-random-again) command produces another random number, re-using the most recent value of M . With a numeric prefix argument n, it produces n more random numbers using that value of M . The k h (calc-shuffle) command produces a vector of several random values with no duplicates. The value on the top of the stack specifies the set from which the random values are drawn, and may be any of the M formats described above. The numeric prefix argument gives the length of the desired list. (If you do not provide a numeric prefix argument, the length of the list is taken from the top of the stack, and M from second-to-top.) If M is a floating-point number, zero, or an error form (so that the random values are being drawn from the set of real numbers) there is little practical difference between using k h and using k r several times. But if the set of possible values consists of just a few integers, or the elements of a vector, then there is a very real chance that multiple k r’s will produce

Chapter 8: Scientific Functions

213

the same number more than once. The k h command produces a vector whose elements are always distinct. (Actually, there is a slight exception: If M is a vector, no given vector element will be drawn more than once, but if several elements of M are equal, they may each make it into the result vector.) One use of k h is to rearrange a list at random. This happens if the prefix argument is equal to the number of values in the list: [1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3] 5 k h might produce the permuted list ‘[2.5, 1, 1.5, 3, 2]’. As a convenient feature, if the argument n is negative it is replaced by the size of the set represented by M . Naturally, this is allowed only when M specifies a small discrete set of possibilities. To do the equivalent of k h but with duplications allowed, given M on the stack and with n just entered as a numeric prefix, use v b to build a vector of copies of M , then use V M k r to “map” the normal k r function over the elements of this vector. See Chapter 9 [Matrix Functions], page 219.

8.5.1 Random Number Generator Calc’s random number generator uses several methods to ensure that the numbers it produces are highly random. Knuth’s Art of Computer Programming, Volume II, contains a thorough description of the theory of random number generators and their measurement and characterization. If RandSeed has no stored value, Calc calls Emacs’s built-in random function to get a stream of random numbers, which it then treats in various ways to avoid problems inherent in the simple random number generators that many systems use to implement random. When Calc’s random number generator is first invoked, it “seeds” the low-level random sequence using the time of day, so that the random number sequence will be different every time you use Calc. Since Emacs Lisp doesn’t specify the range of values that will be returned by its random function, Calc exercises the function several times to estimate the range. When Calc subsequently uses the random function, it takes only 10 bits of the result near the most-significant end. (It avoids at least the bottom four bits, preferably more, and also tries to avoid the top two bits.) This strategy works well with the linear congruential generators that are typically used to implement random. If RandSeed contains an integer, Calc uses this integer to seed an “additive congruential” method (Knuth’s algorithm 3.2.2A, computing Xn−55 − Xn−24 . This method expands the seed value into a large table which is maintained internally; the variable RandSeed is changed from, e.g., 42 to the vector [42] to indicate that the seed has been absorbed into this table. When RandSeed contains a vector, k r and related commands continue to use the same internal table as last time. There is no way to extract the complete state of the random number generator so that you can restart it from any point; you can only restart it from the same initial seed value. A simple way to restart from the same seed is to type s r RandSeed to get the seed vector, v u to unpack it back into a number, then s t RandSeed to reseed the generator with that number. Calc uses a “shuffling” method as described in algorithm 3.2.2B of Knuth. It fills a table with 13 random 10-bit numbers. Then, to generate a new random number, it uses the previous number to index into the table, picks the value it finds there as the new random number, then replaces that table entry with a new value obtained from a call to the

214

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

base random number generator (either the additive congruential generator or the random function supplied by the system). If there are any flaws in the base generator, shuffling will tend to even them out. But if the system provides an excellent random function, shuffling will not damage its randomness. To create a random integer of a certain number of digits, Calc builds the integer three decimal digits at a time. For each group of three digits, Calc calls its 10-bit shuffling random number generator (which returns a value from 0 to 1023); if the random value is 1000 or more, Calc throws it out and tries again until it gets a suitable value. To create a random floating-point number with precision p, Calc simply creates a random p-digit integer and multiplies by 10−p . The resulting random numbers should be very clean, but note that relatively small numbers will have few significant random digits. In other words, with a precision of 12, you will occasionally get numbers on the order of 10−9 or 10−10 , but those numbers will only have two or three random digits since they correspond to small integers times 10−12 . To create a random integer in the interval ‘[0 .. m)’, Calc counts the digits in m, creates a random integer with three additional digits, then reduces modulo m. Unless m is a power of ten the resulting values will be very slightly biased toward the lower numbers, but this bias will be less than 0.1%. (For example, if m is 42, Calc will reduce a random integer less than 100000 modulo 42 to get a result less than 42. It is easy to show that the numbers 40 and 41 will be only 2380/2381 as likely to result from this modulo operation as numbers 39 and below.) If m is a power of ten, however, the numbers should be completely unbiased. The Gaussian random numbers generated by ‘random(0.0)’ use the “polar” method described in Knuth section 3.4.1C. This method generates a pair of Gaussian random numbers at a time, so only every other call to ‘random(0.0)’ will require significant calculations.

8.6 Combinatorial Functions Commands relating to combinatorics and number theory begin with the k key prefix. The k g (calc-gcd) [gcd] command computes the Greatest Common Divisor of two integers. It also accepts fractions; the GCD of two fractions is defined by taking the GCD of the numerators, and the LCM of the denominators. This definition is consistent with the idea that ‘a / gcd(a,x)’ should yield an integer for any ‘a’ and ‘x’. For other types of arguments, the operation is left in symbolic form. The k l (calc-lcm) [lcm] command computes the Least Common Multiple of two integers or fractions. The product of the LCM and GCD of two numbers is equal to the product of the numbers. The k E (calc-extended-gcd) [egcd] command computes the GCD of two integers x and y and returns a vector [g, a, b] where g = gcd(x, y) = ax + by. The ! (calc-factorial) [fact] command computes the factorial of the number at the top of the stack. If the number is an integer, the result is an exact integer. If the number is an integer-valued float, the result is a floating-point approximation. If the number is a non-integral real number, the generalized factorial is used, as defined by the Euler Gamma function. Please note that computation of large factorials can be slow; using floating-point format will help since fewer digits must be maintained. The same is true of many of the commands in this section.

Chapter 8: Scientific Functions

215

The k d (calc-double-factorial) [dfact] command computes the “double factorial” of an integer. For an even integer, this is the product of even integers from 2 to N . For an odd integer, this is the product of odd integers from 3 to N . If the argument is an integer-valued float, the result is a floating-point approximation. This function is undefined for negative even integers. The notation N !! is also recognized for double factorials. The k c (calc-choose) [choose] command computes the binomial coefficient N -chooseM , where M is the number on the top of the stack and N is second-to-top. If both arguments are integers, the result is an exact integer. Otherwise, the result is a floating! point approximation. The binomial coefficient is defined for all real numbers by M !(NN−M . )! The H k c (calc-perm) [perm] command computes the number-of-permutations function .

N! (N −M )!

The k b (calc-bernoulli-number) [bern] command computes a given Bernoulli number. The value at the top of the stack is a nonnegative integer n that specifies which Bernoulli number is desired. The H k b command computes a Bernoulli polynomial, taking n from the second-to-top position and x from the top of the stack. If x is a variable or formula the result is a polynomial in x; if x is a number the result is a number. The k e (calc-euler-number) [euler] command similarly computes an Euler number, and H k e computes an Euler polynomial. Bernoulli and Euler numbers occur in the Taylor expansions of several functions. The k s (calc-stirling-number) [stir1] command computes a Stirling number of the n first kind m , given two integers n and m on the n stack. The H k s [stir2] command computes a Stirling number of the second kind m . These are the number of m-cycle permutations of n objects, and the number of ways to partition n objects into m non-empty sets, respectively. The k p (calc-prime-test) command checks if the integer on the top of the stack is prime. For integers less than eight million, the answer is always exact and reasonably fast. For larger integers, a probabilistic method is used (see Knuth vol. II, section 4.5.4, algorithm P). The number is first checked against small prime factors (up to 13). Then, any number of iterations of the algorithm are performed. Each step either discovers that the number is non-prime, or substantially increases the certainty that the number is prime. After a few steps, the chance that a number was mistakenly described as prime will be less than one percent. (Indeed, this is a worst-case estimate of the probability; in practice even a single iteration is quite reliable.) After the k p command, the number will be reported as definitely prime or non-prime if possible, or otherwise “probably” prime with a certain probability of error. The normal k p command performs one iteration of the primality test. Pressing k p repeatedly for the same integer will perform additional iterations. Also, k p with a numeric prefix performs the specified number of iterations. There is also an algebraic function ‘prime(n)’ or ‘prime(n,iters)’ which returns 1 if n is (probably) prime and 0 if not. The k f (calc-prime-factors) [prfac] command attempts to decompose an integer into its prime factors. For numbers up to 25 million, the answer is exact although it may take some time. The result is a vector of the prime factors in increasing order. For larger inputs, prime factors above 5000 may not be found, in which case the last number in the vector will be an unfactored integer greater than 25 million (with a warning message). For

216

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

negative integers, the first element of the list will be −1. For inputs −1, 0, and 1, the result is a list of the same number. The k n (calc-next-prime) [nextprime] command finds the next prime above a given number. Essentially, it searches by calling calc-prime-test on successive integers until it finds one that passes the test. This is quite fast for integers less than eight million, but once the probabilistic test comes into play the search may be rather slow. Ordinarily this command stops for any prime that passes one iteration of the primality test. With a numeric prefix argument, a number must pass the specified number of iterations before the search stops. (This only matters when searching above eight million.) You can always use additional k p commands to increase your certainty that the number is indeed prime. The I k n (calc-prev-prime) [prevprime] command analogously finds the next prime less than a given number. The k t (calc-totient) [totient] command computes the Euler “totient” function φ(n), the number of integers less than n which are relatively prime to n. The k m (calc-moebius) [moebius] command computes the M¨obius µ function. If the input number is a product of k distinct factors, this is (−1)k . If the input number has any duplicate factors (i.e., can be divided by the same prime more than once), the result is zero.

8.7 Probability Distribution Functions The functions in this section compute various probability distributions. For continuous distributions, this is the integral of the probability density function from x to infinity. (These are the “upper tail” distribution functions; there are also corresponding “lower tail” functions which integrate from minus infinity to x.) For discrete distributions, the upper tail function gives the sum from x to infinity; the lower tail function gives the sum from minus infinity up to, but not including, x. To integrate from x to y, just use the distribution function twice and subtract. For example, the probability that a Gaussian random variable with mean 2 and standard deviation 1 will lie in the range from 2.5 to 2.8 is ‘utpn(2.5,2,1) - utpn(2.8,2,1)’ (“the probability that it is greater than 2.5, but not greater than 2.8”), or equivalently ‘ltpn(2.8,2,1) ltpn(2.5,2,1)’. The k B (calc-utpb) [utpb] function uses the binomial distribution. Push the parameters n, p, and then x onto the stack; the result (‘utpb(x,n,p)’) is the probability that an event will occur x or more times out of n trials, if its probability of occurring in any given trial is p. The I k B [ltpb] function is the probability that the event will occur fewer than x times. The other probability distribution functions similarly take the form k X (calc-utpx) [utpx] and I k X [ltpx], for various letters x. The arguments to the algebraic functions are the value of the random variable first, then whatever other parameters define the distribution. Note these are among the few Calc functions where the order of the arguments in algebraic form differs from the order of arguments as found on the stack. (The random variable comes last on the stack, so that you can type, e.g., 2 RET 1 RET 2.5 k N M-RET DEL 2.8 k N -, using M-RET DEL to recover the original arguments but substitute a new value for x.) The ‘utpc(x,v)’ function uses the chi-square distribution with ν degrees of freedom. It is the probability that a model is correct if its chi-square statistic is x.

Chapter 8: Scientific Functions

217

The ‘utpf(F,v1,v2)’ function uses the F distribution, used in various statistical tests. The parameters ν1 and ν2 are the degrees of freedom in the numerator and denominator, respectively, used in computing the statistic F . The ‘utpn(x,m,s)’ function uses a normal (Gaussian) distribution with mean m and standard deviation σ. It is the probability that such a normal-distributed random variable would exceed x. The ‘utpp(n,x)’ function uses a Poisson distribution with mean x. It is the probability that n or more such Poisson random events will occur. The ‘utpt(t,v)’ function uses the Student’s “t” distribution with ν degrees of freedom. It is the probability that a t-distributed random variable will be greater than t. (Note: This computes the distribution function A(t|ν) where A(0|ν) = 1 and A(∞|ν) → 0. The UTPT operation on the HP-48 uses a different definition which returns half of Calc’s value: ‘UTPT(t,v) = .5*utpt(t,v)’.) While Calc does not provide inverses of the probability distribution functions, the a R command can be used to solve for the inverse. Since the distribution functions are monotonic, a R is guaranteed to be able to find a solution given any initial guess. See Section 10.7 [Numerical Solutions], page 270.

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

219

9 Vector/Matrix Functions Many of the commands described here begin with the v prefix. (For convenience, the shift-V prefix is equivalent to v.) The commands usually apply to both plain vectors and matrices; some apply only to matrices or only to square matrices. If the argument has the wrong dimensions the operation is left in symbolic form. Vectors are entered and displayed using ‘[a,b,c]’ notation. Matrices are vectors of which all elements are vectors of equal length. (Though none of the standard Calc commands use this concept, a three-dimensional matrix or rank-3 tensor could be defined as a vector of matrices, and so on.)

9.1 Packing and Unpacking Calc’s “pack” and “unpack” commands collect stack entries to build composite objects such as vectors and complex numbers. They are described in this chapter because they are most often used to build vectors. The v p (calc-pack) [pack] command collects several elements from the stack into a matrix, complex number, HMS form, error form, etc. It uses a numeric prefix argument to specify the kind of object to be built; this argument is referred to as the “packing mode.” If the packing mode is a nonnegative integer, a vector of that length is created. For example, C-u 5 v p will pop the top five stack elements and push back a single vector of those five elements. (C-u 0 v p simply creates an empty vector.) The same effect can be had by pressing [ to push an incomplete vector on the stack, using TAB (calc-roll-down) to sneak the incomplete object up past a certain number of elements, and then pressing ] to complete the vector. Negative packing modes create other kinds of composite objects: -1

Two values are collected to build a complex number. For example, 5 RET 7 C-u -1 v p creates the complex number (5, 7). The result is always a rectangular complex number. The two input values must both be real numbers, i.e., integers, fractions, or floats. If they are not, Calc will instead build a formula like ‘a + (0, 1) b’. (The other packing modes also create a symbolic answer if the components are not suitable.)

-2

Two values are collected to build a polar complex number. The first is the magnitude; the second is the phase expressed in either degrees or radians according to the current angular mode.

-3

Three values are collected into an HMS form. The first two values (hours and minutes) must be integers or integer-valued floats. The third value may be any real number.

-4

Two values are collected into an error form. The inputs may be real numbers or formulas.

-5

Two values are collected into a modulo form. The inputs must be real numbers.

-6

Two values are collected into the interval ‘[a .. b]’. The inputs may be real numbers, HMS or date forms, or formulas.

220

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

-7

Two values are collected into the interval ‘[a .. b)’.

-8

Two values are collected into the interval ‘(a .. b]’.

-9

Two values are collected into the interval ‘(a .. b)’.

-10

Two integer values are collected into a fraction.

-11

Two values are collected into a floating-point number. The first is the mantissa; the second, which must be an integer, is the exponent. The result is the mantissa times ten to the power of the exponent.

-12

This is treated the same as −11 by the v p command. When unpacking, −12 specifies that a floating-point mantissa is desired.

-13

A real number is converted into a date form.

-14

Three numbers (year, month, day) are packed into a pure date form.

-15

Six numbers are packed into a date/time form.

With any of the two-input negative packing modes, either or both of the inputs may be vectors. If both are vectors of the same length, the result is another vector made by packing corresponding elements of the input vectors. If one input is a vector and the other is a plain number, the number is packed along with each vector element to produce a new vector. For example, C-u -4 v p could be used to convert a vector of numbers and a vector of errors into a single vector of error forms; C-u -5 v p could convert a vector of numbers and a single number M into a vector of numbers modulo M. If you don’t give a prefix argument to v p, it takes the packing mode from the top of the stack. The elements to be packed then begin at stack level 2. Thus 1 RET 2 RET 4 n v p is another way to enter the error form ‘1 +/- 2’. If the packing mode taken from the stack is a vector, the result is a matrix with the dimensions specified by the elements of the vector, which must each be integers. For example, if the packing mode is ‘[2, 3]’, then six numbers will be taken from the stack and returned in the form ‘[[a, b, c], [d, e, f]]’. If any elements of the vector are negative, other kinds of packing are done at that level as described above. For example, ‘[2, 3, -4]’ takes 12 objects and creates a 2 × 3 matrix of error forms: ‘[[a +/- b, c +/- d ... ]]’. Also, ‘[-4, -10]’ will convert four integers into an error form consisting of two fractions: ‘a:b +/- c:d’. There is an equivalent algebraic function, ‘pack(mode, items)’ where mode is a packing mode (an integer or a vector of integers) and items is a vector of objects to be packed (repacked, really) according to that mode. For example, ‘pack([3, -4], [a,b,c,d,e,f])’ yields ‘[a +/- b, c +/- d, e +/- f]’. The function is left in symbolic form if the packing mode is invalid, or if the number of data items does not match the number of items required by the mode. The v u (calc-unpack) command takes the vector, complex number, HMS form, or other composite object on the top of the stack and “unpacks” it, pushing each of its elements onto the stack as separate objects. Thus, it is the “inverse” of v p. If the value at the top of the stack is a formula, v u unpacks it by pushing each of the arguments of the top-level operator onto the stack.

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

221

You can optionally give a numeric prefix argument to v u to specify an explicit (un)packing mode. If the packing mode is negative and the input is actually a vector or matrix, the result will be two or more similar vectors or matrices of the elements. For example, given the vector ‘[a +/- b, c^2, d +/- 7]’, the result of C-u -4 v u will be the two vectors ‘[a, c^2, d]’ and ‘[b, 0, 7]’. Note that the prefix argument can have an effect even when the input is not a vector. For example, if the input is the number −5, then c-u -1 v u yields −5 and 0 (the components of −5 when viewed as a rectangular complex number); C-u -2 v u yields 5 and 180 (assuming Degrees mode); and C-u -10 v u yields −5 and 1 (the numerator and denominator of −5, viewed as a rational number). Plain v u with this input would complain that the input is not a composite object. Unpacking mode −11 converts a float into an integer mantissa and an integer exponent, where the mantissa is not divisible by 10 (except that 0.0 is represented by a mantissa and exponent of 0). Unpacking mode −12 converts a float into a floating-point mantissa and integer exponent, where the mantissa (for non-zero numbers) is guaranteed to lie in the range [1 .. 10). In both cases, the mantissa is shifted left or right (and the exponent adjusted to compensate) in order to satisfy these constraints. Positive unpacking modes are treated differently than for v p. A mode of 1 is much like plain v u with no prefix argument, except that in addition to the components of the input object, a suitable packing mode to re-pack the object is also pushed. Thus, C-u 1 v u followed by v p will re-build the original object. A mode of 2 unpacks two levels of the object; the resulting re-packing mode will be a vector of length 2. This might be used to unpack a matrix, say, or a vector of error forms. Higher unpacking modes unpack the input even more deeply. There are two algebraic functions analogous to v u. The ‘unpack(mode, item)’ function unpacks the item using the given mode, returning the result as a vector of components. Here the mode must be an integer, not a vector. For example, ‘unpack(-4, a +/- b)’ returns ‘[a, b]’, as does ‘unpack(1, a +/- b)’. The unpackt function is like unpack but instead of returning a simple vector of items, it returns a vector of two things: The mode, and the vector of items. For example, ‘unpackt(1, 2:3 +/- 1:4)’ returns ‘[-4, [2:3, 1:4]]’, and ‘unpackt(2, 2:3 +/- 1:4)’ returns ‘[[-4, -10], [2, 3, 1, 4]]’. The identity for re-building the original object is ‘apply(pack, unpackt(n, x)) = x’. (The apply function builds a function call given the function name and a vector of arguments.) Subscript notation is a useful way to extract a particular part of an object. For example, to get the numerator of a rational number, you can use ‘unpack(-10, x)_1’.

9.2 Building Vectors Vectors and matrices can be added, subtracted, multiplied, and divided; see Section 7.1 [Basic Arithmetic], page 183. The | (calc-concat) [vconcat] command “concatenates” two vectors into one. For example, after [ 1 , 2 ] [ 3 , 4 ] |, the stack will contain the single vector ‘[1, 2, 3, 4]’. If the arguments are matrices, the rows of the first matrix are concatenated with the rows of the second. (In other words, two matrices are just two vectors of row-vectors as far as | is concerned.)

222

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

If either argument to | is a scalar (a non-vector), it is treated like a one-element vector for purposes of concatenation: 1 [ 2 , 3 ] | produces the vector ‘[1, 2, 3]’. Likewise, if one argument is a matrix and the other is a plain vector, the vector is treated as a one-row matrix. The H | (calc-append) [append] command concatenates two vectors without any special cases. Both inputs must be vectors. Whether or not they are matrices is not taken into account. If either argument is a scalar, the append function is left in symbolic form. See also cons and rcons below. The I | and H I | commands are similar, but they use their two stack arguments in the opposite order. Thus I | is equivalent to TAB |, but possibly more convenient and also a bit faster. The v d (calc-diag) [diag] function builds a diagonal square matrix. The optional numeric prefix gives the number of rows and columns in the matrix. If the value at the top of the stack is a vector, the elements of the vector are used as the diagonal elements; the prefix, if specified, must match the size of the vector. If the value on the stack is a scalar, it is used for each element on the diagonal, and the prefix argument is required. To build a constant square matrix, e.g., a 3 × 3 matrix filled with ones, use 0 M-3 v d 1 +, i.e., build a zero matrix first and then add a constant value to that matrix. (Another alternative would be to use v b and v a; see below.) The v i (calc-ident) [idn] function builds an identity matrix of the specified size. It is a convenient form of v d where the diagonal element is always one. If no prefix argument is given, this command prompts for one. In algebraic notation, ‘idn(a,n)’ acts much like ‘diag(a,n)’, except that a is required to be a scalar (non-vector) quantity. If n is omitted, ‘idn(a)’ represents a times an identity matrix of unknown size. Calc can operate algebraically on such generic identity matrices, and if one is combined with a matrix whose size is known, it is converted automatically to an identity matrix of a suitable matching size. The v i command with an argument of zero creates a generic identity matrix, ‘idn(1)’. Note that in dimensioned Matrix mode (see Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139), generic identity matrices are immediately expanded to the current default dimensions. The v x (calc-index) [index] function builds a vector of consecutive integers from 1 to n, where n is the numeric prefix argument. If you do not provide a prefix argument, you will be prompted to enter a suitable number. If n is negative, the result is a vector of negative integers from n to −1. With a prefix argument of just C-u, the v x command takes three values from the stack: n, start, and incr (with incr at top-of-stack). Counting starts at start and increases by incr for successive vector elements. If start or n is in floating-point format, the resulting vector elements will also be floats. Note that start and incr may in fact be any kind of numbers or formulas. When start and incr are specified, a negative n has a different interpretation: It causes a geometric instead of arithmetic sequence to be generated. For example, ‘index(-3, a, b)’ produces ‘[a, a b, a b^2]’. If you omit incr in the algebraic form, ‘index(n, start)’, the default value for incr is one for positive n or two for negative n. The v b (calc-build-vector) [cvec] function builds a vector of n copies of the value on the top of the stack, where n is the numeric prefix argument. In algebraic formulas,

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

223

‘cvec(x,n,m)’ can also be used to build an n-by-m matrix of copies of x. (Interactively, just use v b twice: once to build a row, then again to build a matrix of copies of that row.) The v h (calc-head) [head] function returns the first element of a vector. The I v h (calc-tail) [tail] function returns the vector with its first element removed. In both cases, the argument must be a non-empty vector. The v k (calc-cons) [cons] function takes a value h and a vector t from the stack, and produces the vector whose head is h and whose tail is t. This is similar to |, except if h is itself a vector, | will concatenate the two vectors whereas cons will insert h at the front of the vector t. Each of these three functions also accepts the Hyperbolic flag [rhead, rtail, rcons] in which case t instead represents the last single element of the vector, with h representing the remainder of the vector. Thus the vector ‘[a, b, c, d] = cons(a, [b, c, d]) = rcons([a, b, c], d)’. Also, ‘head([a, b, c, d]) = a’, ‘tail([a, b, c, d]) = [b, c, d]’, ‘rhead([a, b, c, d]) = [a, b, c]’, and ‘rtail([a, b, c, d]) = d’.

9.3 Extracting Vector Elements The v r (calc-mrow) [mrow] command extracts one row of the matrix on the top of the stack, or one element of the plain vector on the top of the stack. The row or element is specified by the numeric prefix argument; the default is to prompt for the row or element number. The matrix or vector is replaced by the specified row or element in the form of a vector or scalar, respectively. With a prefix argument of C-u only, v r takes the index of the element or row from the top of the stack, and the vector or matrix from the second-to-top position. If the index is itself a vector of integers, the result is a vector of the corresponding elements of the input vector, or a matrix of the corresponding rows of the input matrix. This command can be used to obtain any permutation of a vector. With C-u, if the index is an interval form with integer components, it is interpreted as a range of indices and the corresponding subvector or submatrix is returned. Subscript notation in algebraic formulas (‘a_b’) stands for the Calc function subscr, which is synonymous with mrow. Thus, ‘[x, y, z]_k’ produces x, y, or z if k is one, two, or three, respectively. A double subscript (‘M_i_j’, equivalent to ‘subscr(subscr(M, i), j)’) will access the element at row i, column j of a matrix. The a _ (calc-subscript) command creates a subscript formula ‘a_b’ out of two stack entries. (It is on the a “algebra” prefix because subscripted variables are often used purely as an algebraic notation.) Given a negative prefix argument, v r instead deletes one row or element from the matrix or vector on the top of the stack. Thus C-u 2 v r replaces a matrix with its second row, but C-u -2 v r replaces the matrix with the same matrix with its second row removed. In algebraic form this function is called mrrow. Given a prefix argument of zero, v r extracts the diagonal elements of a square matrix in the form of a vector. In algebraic form this function is called getdiag. The v c (calc-mcol) [mcol or mrcol] command is the analogous operation on columns of a matrix. Given a plain vector it extracts (or removes) one element, just like v r. If the index in C-u v c is an interval or vector and the argument is a matrix, the result is a

224

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

submatrix with only the specified columns retained (and possibly permuted in the case of a vector index). To extract a matrix element at a given row and column, use v r to extract the row as a vector, then v c to extract the column element from that vector. In algebraic formulas, it is often more convenient to use subscript notation: ‘m_i_j’ gives row i, column j of matrix m. The v s (calc-subvector) [subvec] command extracts a subvector of a vector. The arguments are the vector, the starting index, and the ending index, with the ending index in the top-of-stack position. The starting index indicates the first element of the vector to take. The ending index indicates the first element past the range to be taken. Thus, ‘subvec([a, b, c, d, e], 2, 4)’ produces the subvector ‘[b, c]’. You could get the same result using ‘mrow([a, b, c, d, e], [2 .. 4))’. If either the start or the end index is zero or negative, it is interpreted as relative to the end of the vector. Thus ‘subvec([a, b, c, d, e], 2, -2)’ also produces ‘[b, c]’. In the algebraic form, the end index can be omitted in which case it is taken as zero, i.e., elements from the starting element to the end of the vector are used. The infinity symbol, inf, also has this effect when used as the ending index. With the Inverse flag, I v s [rsubvec] removes a subvector from a vector. The arguments are interpreted the same as for the normal v s command. Thus, ‘rsubvec([a, b, c, d, e], 2, 4)’ produces ‘[a, d, e]’. It is always true that subvec and rsubvec return complementary parts of the input vector. See Section 10.1 [Selecting Subformulas], page 241, for an alternative way to operate on vectors one element at a time.

9.4 Manipulating Vectors The v l (calc-vlength) [vlen] command computes the length of a vector. The length of a non-vector is considered to be zero. Note that matrices are just vectors of vectors for the purposes of this command. With the Hyperbolic flag, H v l [mdims] computes a vector of the dimensions of a vector, matrix, or higher-order object. For example, ‘mdims([[a,b,c],[d,e,f]])’ returns ‘[2, 3]’ since its argument is a 2 × 3 matrix. The v f (calc-vector-find) [find] command searches along a vector for the first element equal to a given target. The target is on the top of the stack; the vector is in the second-to-top position. If a match is found, the result is the index of the matching element. Otherwise, the result is zero. The numeric prefix argument, if given, allows you to select any starting index for the search. The v a (calc-arrange-vector) [arrange] command rearranges a vector to have a certain number of columns and rows. The numeric prefix argument specifies the number of columns; if you do not provide an argument, you will be prompted for the number of columns. The vector or matrix on the top of the stack is flattened into a plain vector. If the number of columns is nonzero, this vector is then formed into a matrix by taking successive groups of n elements. If the number of columns does not evenly divide the number of elements in the vector, the last row will be short and the result will not be suitable for use as a matrix. For example, with the matrix ‘[[1, 2], [3, 4]]’ on the stack, v a 4 produces

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

225

‘[[1, 2, 3, 4]]’ (a 1 × 4 matrix), v a 1 produces ‘[[1], [2], [3], [4]]’ (a 4 × 1 matrix), v a 2 produces ‘[[1, 2], [3, 4]]’ (the original 2 × 2 matrix), v a 3 produces ‘[[1, 2, 3], [4]]’ (not a matrix), and v a 0 produces the flattened list ‘[1, 2, 3, 4]’. The V S (calc-sort) [sort] command sorts the elements of a vector into increasing order. Real numbers, real infinities, and constant interval forms come first in this ordering; next come other kinds of numbers, then variables (in alphabetical order), then finally come formulas and other kinds of objects; these are sorted according to a kind of lexicographic ordering with the useful property that one vector is less or greater than another if the first corresponding unequal elements are less or greater, respectively. Since quoted strings are stored by Calc internally as vectors of ASCII character codes (see Section 4.7 [Strings], page 118), this means vectors of strings are also sorted into alphabetical order by this command. The I V S [rsort] command sorts a vector into decreasing order. The V G (calc-grade) [grade, rgrade] command produces an index table or permutation vector which, if applied to the input vector (as the index of C-u v r, say), would sort the vector. A permutation vector is just a vector of integers from 1 to n, where each integer occurs exactly once. One application of this is to sort a matrix of data rows using one column as the sort key; extract that column, grade it with V G, then use the result to reorder the original matrix with C-u v r. Another interesting property of the V G command is that, if the input is itself a permutation vector, the result will be the inverse of the permutation. The inverse of an index table is a rank table, whose kth element says where the kth original vector element will rest when the vector is sorted. To get a rank table, just use V G V G. With the Inverse flag, I V G produces an index table that would sort the input into decreasing order. Note that V S and V G use a “stable” sorting algorithm, i.e., any two elements which are equal will not be moved out of their original order. Generally there is no way to tell with V S, since two elements which are equal look the same, but with V G this can be an important issue. In the matrix-of-rows example, suppose you have names and telephone numbers as two columns and you wish to sort by phone number primarily, and by name when the numbers are equal. You can sort the data matrix by names first, and then again by phone numbers. Because the sort is stable, any two rows with equal phone numbers will remain sorted by name even after the second sort. The V H (calc-histogram) [histogram] command builds a histogram of a vector of numbers. Vector elements are assumed to be integers or real numbers in the range [0..n) for some “number of bins” n, which is the numeric prefix argument given to the command. The result is a vector of n counts of how many times each value appeared in the original vector. Non-integers in the input are rounded down to integers. Any vector elements outside the specified range are ignored. (You can tell if elements have been ignored by noting that the counts in the result vector don’t add up to the length of the input vector.) If no prefix is given, then you will be prompted for a vector which will be used to determine the bins. (If a positive integer is given at this prompt, it will be still treated as if it were given as a prefix.) Each bin will consist of the interval of numbers closest to the corresponding number of this new vector; if the vector [a, b, c, ...] is entered at the prompt, the bins will be (−inf, (a + b)/2], ((a + b)/2, (b + c)/2], etc. The result of this command will be a vector counting how many elements of the original vector are in each bin.

226

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The result will then be a vector with the same length as this new vector; each element of the new vector will be replaced by the number of elements of the original vector which are closest to it. With the Hyperbolic flag, H V H pulls two vectors from the stack. The second-to-top vector is the list of numbers as before. The top vector is an equal-sized list of “weights” to attach to the elements of the data vector. For example, if the first data element is 4.2 and the first weight is 10, then 10 will be added to bin 4 of the result vector. Without the hyperbolic flag, every element has a weight of one. The v t (calc-transpose) [trn] command computes the transpose of the matrix at the top of the stack. If the argument is a plain vector, it is treated as a row vector and transposed into a one-column matrix. The v v (calc-reverse-vector) [rev] command reverses a vector end-for-end. Given a matrix, it reverses the order of the rows. (To reverse the columns instead, just use v t v v v t. The same principle can be used to apply other vector commands to the columns of a matrix.) The v m (calc-mask-vector) [vmask] command uses one vector as a mask to extract elements of another vector. The mask is in the second-to-top position; the target vector is on the top of the stack. These vectors must have the same length. The result is the same as the target vector, but with all elements which correspond to zeros in the mask vector deleted. Thus, for example, ‘vmask([1, 0, 1, 0, 1], [a, b, c, d, e])’ produces ‘[a, c, e]’. See Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286. The v e (calc-expand-vector) [vexp] command expands a vector according to another mask vector. The result is a vector the same length as the mask, but with nonzero elements replaced by successive elements from the target vector. The length of the target vector is normally the number of nonzero elements in the mask. If the target vector is longer, its last few elements are lost. If the target vector is shorter, the last few nonzero mask elements are left unreplaced in the result. Thus ‘vexp([2, 0, 3, 0, 7], [a, b])’ produces ‘[a, 0, b, 0, 7]’. With the Hyperbolic flag, H v e takes a filler value from the top of the stack; the mask and target vectors come from the third and second elements of the stack. This filler is used where the mask is zero: ‘vexp([2, 0, 3, 0, 7], [a, b], z)’ produces ‘[a, z, c, z, 7]’. If the filler value is itself a vector, then successive values are taken from it, so that the effect is to interleave two vectors according to the mask: ‘vexp([2, 0, 3, 7, 0, 0], [a, b], [x, y])’ produces ‘[a, x, b, 7, y, 0]’. Another variation on the masking idea is to combine ‘[a, b, c, d, e]’ with the mask ‘[1, 0, 1, 0, 1]’ to produce ‘[a, 0, c, 0, e]’. You can accomplish this with V M a &, mapping the logical “and” operation across the two vectors. See Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286. Note that the ? : operation also discussed there allows other types of masking using vectors.

9.5 Vector and Matrix Arithmetic Basic arithmetic operations like addition and multiplication are defined for vectors and matrices as well as for numbers. Division of matrices, in the sense of multiplying by the inverse, is supported. (Division by a matrix actually uses LU-decomposition for greater accuracy and speed.) See Section 7.1 [Basic Arithmetic], page 183.

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

227

The following functions are applied element-wise if their arguments are vectors or matrices: change-sign, conj, arg, re, im, polar, rect, clean, float, frac. See [Function Index], page 477. The V J (calc-conj-transpose) [ctrn] command computes the conjugate transpose of its argument, i.e., ‘conj(trn(x))’. The A (calc-abs) [abs] command computes the Frobenius norm of a vector or matrix argument. This is the square root of the sum of the squares of the absolute values of the elements of the vector or matrix. If the vector is interpreted as a point in two- or three-dimensional space, this is the distance from that point to the origin. The v n (calc-rnorm) [rnorm] command computes the infinity-norm of a vector, or the row norm of a matrix. For a plain vector, this is the maximum of the absolute values of the elements. For a matrix, this is the maximum of the row-absolute-value-sums, i.e., of the sums of the absolute values of the elements along the various rows. The V N (calc-cnorm) [cnorm] command computes the one-norm of a vector, or column norm of a matrix. For a plain vector, this is the sum of the absolute values of the elements. For a matrix, this is the maximum of the column-absolute-value-sums. General k-norms for k other than one or infinity are not provided. However, the 2-norm (or Frobenius norm) is provided for vectors by the A (calc-abs) command. The V C (calc-cross) [cross] command computes the right-handed cross product of two vectors, each of which must have exactly three elements. The & (calc-inv) [inv] command computes the inverse of a square matrix. If the matrix is singular, the inverse operation is left in symbolic form. Matrix inverses are recorded so that once an inverse (or determinant) of a particular matrix has been computed, the inverse and determinant of the matrix can be recomputed quickly in the future. If the argument to & is a plain number x, this command simply computes 1/x. This is okay, because the ‘/’ operator also does a matrix inversion when dividing one by a matrix. The V D (calc-mdet) [det] command computes the determinant of a square matrix. The V L (calc-mlud) [lud] command computes the LU decomposition of a matrix. The result is a list of three matrices which, when multiplied together left-to-right, form the original matrix. The first is a permutation matrix that arises from pivoting in the algorithm, the second is lower-triangular with ones on the diagonal, and the third is upper-triangular. The V T (calc-mtrace) [tr] command computes the trace of a square matrix. This is defined as the sum of the diagonal elements of the matrix. The V K (calc-kron) [kron] command computes the Kronecker product of two matrices.

9.6 Set Operations using Vectors Calc includes several commands which interpret vectors as sets of objects. A set is a collection of objects; any given object can appear only once in the set. Calc stores sets as vectors of objects in sorted order. Objects in a Calc set can be any of the usual things, such as numbers, variables, or formulas. Two set elements are considered equal if they are identical, except that numerically equal numbers like the integer 4 and the float 4.0 are considered equal even though they are not “identical.” Variables are treated like plain symbols without attached values by the set operations; subtracting the set ‘[b]’ from ‘[a,

228

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

b]’ always yields the set ‘[a]’ even though if the variables ‘a’ and ‘b’ both equaled 17, you might expect the answer ‘[]’. If a set contains interval forms, then it is assumed to be a set of real numbers. In this case, all set operations require the elements of the set to be only things that are allowed in intervals: Real numbers, plus and minus infinity, HMS forms, and date forms. If there are variables or other non-real objects present in a real set, all set operations on it will be left in unevaluated form. If the input to a set operation is a plain number or interval form a, it is treated like the one-element vector ‘[a]’. The result is always a vector, except that if the set consists of a single interval, the interval itself is returned instead. See Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286, for the in function which tests if a certain value is a member of a given set. To test if the set A is a subset of the set B, use ‘vdiff(A, B) = []’. The V + (calc-remove-duplicates) [rdup] command converts an arbitrary vector into set notation. It works by sorting the vector as if by V S, then removing duplicates. (For example, [a, 5, 4, a, 4.0] is sorted to ‘[4, 4.0, 5, a, a]’ and then reduced to ‘[4, 5, a]’). Overlapping intervals are merged as necessary. You rarely need to use V + explicitly, since all the other set-based commands apply V + to their inputs before using them. The V V (calc-set-union) [vunion] command computes the union of two sets. An object is in the union of two sets if and only if it is in either (or both) of the input sets. (You could accomplish the same thing by concatenating the sets with |, then using V +.) The V ^ (calc-set-intersect) [vint] command computes the intersection of two sets. An object is in the intersection if and only if it is in both of the input sets. Thus if the input sets are disjoint, i.e., if they share no common elements, the result will be the empty vector ‘[]’. Note that the characters V and ^ were chosen to be close to the conventional mathematical notation for set union (A ∪ B) and intersection (A ∩ B). The V - (calc-set-difference) [vdiff] command computes the difference between two sets. An object is in the difference A − B if and only if it is in A but not in B. Thus subtracting ‘[y,z]’ from a set will remove the elements ‘y’ and ‘z’ if they are present. You can also think of this as a general set complement operator; if A is the set of all possible values, then A − B is the “complement” of B. Obviously this is only practical if the set of all possible values in your problem is small enough to list in a Calc vector (or simple enough to express in a few intervals). The V X (calc-set-xor) [vxor] command computes the “exclusive-or,” or “symmetric difference” of two sets. An object is in the symmetric difference of two sets if and only if it is in one, but not both, of the sets. Objects that occur in both sets “cancel out.” The V ~ (calc-set-complement) [vcompl] command computes the complement of a set with respect to the real numbers. Thus ‘vcompl(x)’ is equivalent to ‘vdiff([-inf .. inf], x)’. For example, ‘vcompl([2, (3 .. 4]])’ evaluates to ‘[[-inf .. 2), (2 .. 3], (4 .. inf]]’. The V F (calc-set-floor) [vfloor] command reinterprets a set as a set of integers. Any non-integer values, and intervals that do not enclose any integers, are removed. Open intervals are converted to equivalent closed intervals. Successive integers are converted into intervals of integers. For example, the complement of the set ‘[2, 6, 7, 8]’ is messy, but

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

229

if you wanted the complement with respect to the set of integers you could type V ~ V F to get ‘[[-inf .. 1], [3 .. 5], [9 .. inf]]’. The V E (calc-set-enumerate) [venum] command converts a set of integers into an explicit vector. Intervals in the set are expanded out to lists of all integers encompassed by the intervals. This only works for finite sets (i.e., sets which do not involve ‘-inf’ or ‘inf’). The V : (calc-set-span) [vspan] command converts any set of reals into an interval form that encompasses all its elements. The lower limit will be the smallest element in the set; the upper limit will be the largest element. For an empty set, ‘vspan([])’ returns the empty interval ‘[0 .. 0)’. The V # (calc-set-cardinality) [vcard] command counts the number of integers in a set. The result is the length of the vector that would be produced by V E, although the computation is much more efficient than actually producing that vector. Another representation for sets that may be more appropriate in some cases is binary numbers. If you are dealing with sets of integers in the range 0 to 49, you can use a 50-bit binary number where a particular bit is 1 if the corresponding element is in the set. See Section 7.7 [Binary Functions], page 204, for a list of commands that operate on binary numbers. Note that many of the above set operations have direct equivalents in binary arithmetic: b o (calc-or), b a (calc-and), b d (calc-diff), b x (calc-xor), and b n (calc-not), respectively. You can use whatever representation for sets is most convenient to you. The b u (calc-unpack-bits) [vunpack] command converts an integer that represents a set in binary into a set in vector/interval notation. For example, ‘vunpack(67)’ returns ‘[[0 .. 1], 6]’. If the input is negative, the set it represents is semi-infinite: ‘vunpack(-4) = [2 .. inf)’. Use V E afterwards to expand intervals to individual values if you wish. Note that this command uses the b (binary) prefix key. The b p (calc-pack-bits) [vpack] command converts the other way, from a vector or interval representing a set of nonnegative integers into a binary integer describing the same set. The set may include positive infinity, but must not include any negative numbers. The input is interpreted as a set of integers in the sense of V F (vfloor). Beware that a simple input like ‘[100]’ can result in a huge integer representation (2100 , a 31-digit integer, in this case).

9.7 Statistical Operations on Vectors The commands in this section take vectors as arguments and compute various statistical measures on the data stored in the vectors. The references used in the definitions of these functions are Bevington’s Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences, and Numerical Recipes by Press, Flannery, Teukolsky and Vetterling. The statistical commands use the u prefix key followed by a shifted letter or other character. See Section 9.4 [Manipulating Vectors], (calc-histogram).

page 224,

for a description of V H

See Section 10.8 [Curve Fitting], page 273, for the a F command for doing least-squares fits to statistical data.

230

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

See Section 8.7 [Probability Distribution Functions], page 216, for several common probability distribution functions.

9.7.1 Single-Variable Statistics These functions do various statistical computations on single vectors. Given a numeric prefix argument, they actually pop n objects from the stack and combine them into a data vector. Each object may be either a number or a vector; if a vector, any sub-vectors inside it are “flattened” as if by v a 0; see Section 9.4 [Manipulating Vectors], page 224. By default one object is popped, which (in order to be useful) is usually a vector. If an argument is a variable name, and the value stored in that variable is a vector, then the stored vector is used. This method has the advantage that if your data vector is large, you can avoid the slow process of manipulating it directly on the stack. These functions are left in symbolic form if any of their arguments are not numbers or vectors, e.g., if an argument is a formula, or a non-vector variable. However, formulas embedded within vector arguments are accepted; the result is a symbolic representation of the computation, based on the assumption that the formula does not itself represent a vector. All varieties of numbers such as error forms and interval forms are acceptable. Some of the functions in this section also accept a single error form or interval as an argument. They then describe a property of the normal or uniform (respectively) statistical distribution described by the argument. The arguments are interpreted in the same way as the M argument of the random number function k r. In particular, an interval with integer limits is considered an integer distribution, so that ‘[2 .. 6)’ is the same as ‘[2 .. 5]’. An interval with at least one floating-point limit is a continuous distribution: ‘[2.0 .. 6.0)’ is not the same as ‘[2.0 .. 5.0]’! The u # (calc-vector-count) [vcount] command computes the number of data values represented by the inputs. For example, ‘vcount(1, [2, 3], [[4, 5], [], x, y])’ returns 7. If the argument is a single vector with no sub-vectors, this simply computes the length of the vector. The u + (calc-vector-sum) [vsum] command computes the sum of the data values. The u * (calc-vector-prod) [vprod] command computes the product of the data values. If the input is a single flat vector, these are the same as V R + and V R * (see Section 9.8 [Reducing and Mapping], page 233). The u X (calc-vector-max) [vmax] command computes the maximum of the data values, and the u N (calc-vector-min) [vmin] command computes the minimum. If the argument is an interval, this finds the minimum or maximum value in the interval. (Note that ‘vmax([2..6)) = 5’ as described above.) If the argument is an error form, this returns plus or minus infinity. The u M (calc-vector-mean) [vmean] command computes the average (arithmetic mean) of the data values. If the inputs are error forms x ± σ, this is the weighted mean of the x values with weights 1/σ 2 . X xi σ2 µ= X i 1 σi2 If the inputs are not error forms, this is simply the sum of the values divided by the count of the values.

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

231

Note that a plain number can be considered an error form with error σ = 0. If the input to u M is a mixture of plain numbers and error forms, the result is the mean of the plain numbers, ignoring all values with non-zero errors. (By the above definitions it’s clear that a plain number effectively has an infinite weight, next to which an error form with a finite weight is completely negligible.) This function also works for distributions (error forms or intervals). The mean of an error form ‘a +/- b’ is simply a. The mean of an interval is the mean of the minimum and maximum values of the interval. The I u M (calc-vector-mean-error) [vmeane] command computes the mean of the data points expressed as an error form. This includes the estimated error associated with the mean. If the inputs are error forms, the error is the square root of the reciprocal of the sum of the reciprocals of the squares of the input errors. (I.e., the variance is the reciprocal of the sum of the reciprocals of the variances.) 1 σµ2 = X 1 σi2 If the inputs are plain numbers, the error is equal to the standard deviation of the values divided by the square root of the number of values. (This works out to be equivalent to calculating the standard deviation and then assuming each value’s error is equal to this standard deviation.) σ2 σµ2 = N The H u M (calc-vector-median) [vmedian] command computes the median of the data values. The values are first sorted into numerical order; the median is the middle value after sorting. (If the number of data values is even, the median is taken to be the average of the two middle values.) The median function is different from the other functions in this section in that the arguments must all be real numbers; variables are not accepted even when nested inside vectors. (Otherwise it is not possible to sort the data values.) If any of the input values are error forms, their error parts are ignored. The median function also accepts distributions. For both normal (error form) and uniform (interval) distributions, the median is the same as the mean. The H I u M (calc-vector-harmonic-mean) [vhmean] command computes the harmonic mean of the data values. This is defined as the reciprocal of the arithmetic mean of the reciprocals of the values. N X 1 xi The u G (calc-vector-geometric-mean) [vgmean] command computes the geometric mean of the data values. This is the nth root of the product of the values. This is also equal to the exp of the arithmetic mean of the logarithms of the data values. exp

ln xi =

1/N

232

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The H u G [agmean] command computes the “arithmetic-geometric mean” of two numbers taken from the stack. This is computed by replacing the two numbers with their arithmetic mean and geometric mean, then repeating until the two values converge. ai+1 =

ai + bi , 2

bi+1 =

ai bi

The u S (calc-vector-sdev) [vsdev] command computes the standard deviation σ of the data values. If the values are error forms, the errors are used as weights just as for u M. This is the sample standard deviation, whose value is the square root of the sum of the squares of the differences between the values and the mean of the N values, divided by N − 1. 1 X σ2 = (xi − µ)2 N −1 This function also applies to distributions. The standard deviation of a single error form is simply the error part. The standard deviation √ of a continuous interval happens to equal the difference between the limits, divided by 12. The standard deviation of an integer interval is the same as the standard deviation of a vector of those integers. The I u S (calc-vector-pop-sdev) [vpsdev] command computes the population standard deviation. It is defined by the same formula as above but dividing by N instead of by N − 1. The population standard deviation is used when the input represents the entire set of data values in the distribution; the sample standard deviation is used when the input represents a sample of the set of all data values, so that the mean computed from the input is itself only an estimate of the true mean. σ2 =

1 X (xi − µ)2 N

For error forms and continuous intervals, vpsdev works exactly like vsdev. For integer intervals, it computes the population standard deviation of the equivalent vector of integers. The H u S (calc-vector-variance) [vvar] and H I u S (calc-vector-pop-variance) [vpvar] commands compute the variance of the data values. The variance is the square σ 2 of the standard deviation, i.e., the sum of the squares of the deviations of the data values from the mean. (This definition also applies when the argument is a distribution.) The vflat algebraic function returns a vector of its arguments, interpreted in the same way as the other functions in this section. For example, ‘vflat(1, [2, [3, 4]], 5)’ returns ‘[1, 2, 3, 4, 5]’.

9.7.2 Paired-Sample Statistics The functions in this section take two arguments, which must be vectors of equal size. The vectors are each flattened in the same way as by the single-variable statistical functions. Given a numeric prefix argument of 1, these functions instead take one object from the stack, which must be an N × 2 matrix of data values. Once again, variable names can be used in place of actual vectors and matrices. The u C (calc-vector-covariance) [vcov] command computes the sample covariance of two vectors. The covariance of vectors x and y is the sum of the products of the

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

233

differences between the elements of x and the mean of x times the differences between the corresponding elements of y and the mean of y, all divided by N − 1. Note that the variance of a vector is just the covariance of the vector with itself. Once again, if the inputs are error forms the errors are used as weight factors. If both x and y are composed of error forms, the error for a given data point is taken as the square root of the sum of the squares of the two input errors. 1 X 2 σxy = (xi − µx )(yi − µy ) N −1

2 σxy

1 X (xi − µx )(yi − µy ) N −1 σi2 = 1 X 1 N σi2

The I u C (calc-vector-pop-covariance) [vpcov] command computes the population covariance, which is the same as the sample covariance computed by u C except dividing by N instead of N − 1. The H u C (calc-vector-correlation) [vcorr] command computes the linear correlation coefficient of two vectors. This is defined by the covariance of the vectors divided by the product of their standard deviations. (There is no difference between sample or population statistics here.) 2 σxy rxy = 2 2 σx σy

9.8 Reducing and Mapping Vectors The commands in this section allow for more general operations on the elements of vectors. The simplest of these operations is V A (calc-apply) [apply], which applies a given operator to the elements of a vector. For example, applying the hypothetical function f to the vector ‘[1, 2, 3]’ would produce the function call ‘f(1, 2, 3)’. Applying the + function to the vector ‘[a, b]’ gives ‘a + b’. Applying + to the vector ‘[a, b, c]’ is an error, since the + function expects exactly two arguments. While V A is useful in some cases, you will usually find that either V R or V M, described below, is closer to what you want.

9.8.1 Specifying Operators Commands in this section (like V A) prompt you to press the key corresponding to the desired operator. Press ? for a partial list of the available operators. Generally, an operator is any key or sequence of keys that would normally take one or more arguments from the stack and replace them with a result. For example, V A H C uses the hyperbolic cosine operator, cosh. (Since cosh expects one argument, V A H C requires a vector with a single element as its argument.) You can press x at the operator prompt to select any algebraic function by name to use as the operator. This includes functions you have defined yourself using the Z F command. (See Section 17.4 [Algebraic Definitions], page 367.) If you give a name for which no function has been defined, the result is left in symbolic form, as in ‘f(1, 2, 3)’. Calc will prompt for the number of arguments the function takes if it can’t figure it out on its own (say, because

234

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

you named a function that is currently undefined). It is also possible to type a digit key before the function name to specify the number of arguments, e.g., V M 3 x f RET calls f with three arguments even if it looks like it ought to have only two. This technique may be necessary if the function allows a variable number of arguments. For example, the v e [vexp] function accepts two or three arguments; if you want to map with the three-argument version, you will have to type V M 3 v e. It is also possible to apply any formula to a vector by treating that formula as a function. When prompted for the operator to use, press ’ (the apostrophe) and type your formula as an algebraic entry. You will then be prompted for the argument list, which defaults to a list of all variables that appear in the formula, sorted into alphabetic order. For example, suppose you enter the formula ‘x + 2y^x’. The default argument list would be ‘(x y)’, which means that if this function is applied to the arguments ‘[3, 10]’ the result will be ‘3 + 2*10^3’. (If you plan to use a certain formula in this way often, you might consider defining it as a function with Z F.) Another way to specify the arguments to the formula you enter is with $, $$, and so on. For example, V A ’ $$ + 2$^$$ has the same effect as the previous example. The argument list is automatically taken to be ‘($$ $)’. (The order of the arguments may seem backwards, but it is analogous to the way normal algebraic entry interacts with the stack.) If you press $ at the operator prompt, the effect is similar to the apostrophe except that the relevant formula is taken from top-of-stack instead. The actual vector arguments of the V A $ or related command then start at the second-to-top stack position. You will still be prompted for an argument list. A function can be written without a name using the notation ‘’, which means “a function of two arguments that computes the first argument minus the second argument.” The symbols ‘#1’ and ‘#2’ are placeholders for the arguments. You can use any names for these placeholders if you wish, by including an argument list followed by a colon: ‘’. When you type V A ’ $$ + 2$^$$ RET, Calc builds the nameless function ‘’ as the function to map across the vectors. When you type V A ’ x + 2y^x RET RET, Calc builds the nameless function ‘’. In both cases, Calc also writes the nameless function to the Trail so that you can get it back later if you wish. If there is only one argument, you can write ‘#’ in place of ‘#1’. (Note that ‘< >’ notation is also used for date forms. Calc tells that ‘’ is a nameless function by the presence of ‘#’ signs inside stuff, or by the fact that stuff begins with a list of variables followed by a colon.) You can type a nameless function directly to V A ’, or put one on the stack and use it with V A $. Calc will not prompt for an argument list in this case, since the nameless function specifies the argument list as well as the function itself. In V A ’, you can omit the ‘< >’ marks if you use ‘#’ notation for the arguments, so that V A ’ #1+#2 RET is the same as V A ’ RET, which in turn is the same as V A ’ $$+$ RET. The internal format for ‘’ is ‘lambda(x, y, x + y)’. (The word lambda derives from Lisp notation and the theory of functions.) The internal format for ‘’ is ‘lambda(ArgA, ArgB, ArgA + ArgB)’. Note that there is no actual Calc function called lambda; the whole point is that the lambda expression is used in its symbolic form, not evaluated for an answer until it is applied to specific arguments by a command like V A or V M.

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

235

(Actually, lambda does have one special property: Its arguments are never evaluated; for example, putting ‘’ on the stack will not simplify the ‘2/3’ until the nameless function is actually called.) As usual, commands like V A have algebraic function name equivalents. For example, V A k g with an argument of ‘v’ is equivalent to ‘apply(gcd, v)’. The first argument specifies the operator name, and is either a variable whose name is the same as the function name, or a nameless function like ‘’. Operators that are normally written as algebraic symbols have the names add, sub, mul, div, pow, neg, mod, and vconcat. The call function builds a function call out of several arguments: ‘call(gcd, x, y)’ is the same as ‘apply(gcd, [x, y])’, which in turn is the same as ‘gcd(x, y)’. The first argument of call, like the other functions described here, may be either a variable naming a function, or a nameless function (‘call(, x, y)’ is the same as ‘x + 2y’). (Experts will notice that it’s not quite proper to use a variable to name a function, since the name gcd corresponds to the Lisp variable var-gcd but to the Lisp function calcFunc-gcd. Calc automatically makes this translation, so you don’t have to worry about it.)

9.8.2 Mapping The V M (calc-map) [map] command applies a given operator elementwise to one or more vectors. For example, mapping A [abs] produces a vector of the absolute values of the elements in the input vector. Mapping + pops two vectors from the stack, which must be of equal length, and produces a vector of the pairwise sums of the elements. If either argument is a non-vector, it is duplicated for each element of the other vector. For example, [1,2,3] 2 V M ^ squares the elements of the specified vector. With the 2 listed first, it would have computed a vector of powers of two. Mapping a user-defined function pops as many arguments from the stack as the function requires. If you give an undefined name, you will be prompted for the number of arguments to use. If any argument to V M is a matrix, the operator is normally mapped across all elements of the matrix. For example, given the matrix [[1, −2, 3], [−4, 5, −6]], V M A takes six absolute values to produce another 3 × 2 matrix, [[1, 2, 3], [4, 5, 6]]. The command V M _ [mapr] (i.e., type an underscore at the operator prompt) maps by rows instead. For example, V M _ A views the above matrix as a vector of two 3-element row vectors. It produces a new vector which contains the absolute values of those row vectors, namely [3.74, 8.77]. (Recall, the absolute value of a vector is defined as the square root of the sum of the squares of the elements.) Some operators accept vectors and return new vectors; for example, v v reverses a vector, so V M _ v v would reverse each row of the matrix to get a new matrix, [[3, −2, 1], [−6, 5, −4]]. Sometimes a vector of vectors (representing, say, strings, sets, or lists) happens to look like a matrix. If so, remember to use V M _ if you want to map a function across the whole strings or sets rather than across their individual elements. The command V M : [mapc] maps by columns. Basically, it transposes the input matrix, maps by rows, and then, if the result is a matrix, transposes again. For example, V M : A takes the absolute values of the three columns of the matrix, treating each as a 2-vector, and V M : v v reverses the columns to get the matrix [[−4, 5, −6], [1, −2, 3]].

236

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

(The symbols _ and : were chosen because they had row-like and column-like appearances, and were not already taken by useful operators. Also, they appear shifted on most keyboards so they are easy to type after V M.) The _ and : modifiers have no effect on arguments that are not matrices (so if none of the arguments are matrices, they have no effect at all). If some of the arguments are matrices and others are plain numbers, the plain numbers are held constant for all rows of the matrix (so that 2 V M _ ^ squares every row of a matrix; squaring a vector takes a dot product of the vector with itself). If some of the arguments are vectors with the same lengths as the rows (for V M _) or columns (for V M :) of the matrix arguments, those vectors are also held constant for every row or column. Sometimes it is useful to specify another mapping command as the operator to use with V M. For example, V M _ V A + applies V A + to each row of the input matrix, which in turn adds the two values on that row. If you give another vector-operator command as the operator for V M, it automatically uses map-by-rows mode if you don’t specify otherwise; thus V M V A + is equivalent to V M _ V A +. (If you really want to map-by-elements another mapping command, you can use a triple-nested mapping command: V M V M V A + means to map V M V A + over the rows of the matrix; in turn, V A + is mapped over the elements of each row.) Previous versions of Calc had “map across” and “map down” modes that are now considered obsolete; the old “map across” is now simply V M V A, and “map down” is now V M : V A. The algebraic functions mapa and mapd are still supported, though. Note also that, while the old mapping modes were persistent (once you set the mode, it would apply to later mapping commands until you reset it), the new : and _ modifiers apply only to the current mapping command. The default V M always means map-by-elements. See Section 10.2 [Algebraic Manipulation], page 249, for the a M command, which is like V M but for equations and inequalities instead of vectors. See Section 12.1 [Storing Variables], page 321, for the s m command which modifies a variable’s stored value using a V M-like operator.

9.8.3 Reducing The V R (calc-reduce) [reduce] command applies a given binary operator across all the elements of a vector. A binary operator is a function such as + or max which takes two arguments. For example, reducing + over a vector computes the sum of the elements of the vector. Reducing - computes the first element minus each of the remaining elements. Reducing max computes the maximum element and so on. In general, reducing f over the vector ‘[a, b, c, d]’ produces ‘f(f(f(a, b), c), d)’. The I V R [rreduce] command is similar to V R except that works from right to left through the vector. For example, plain V R - on the vector ‘[a, b, c, d]’ produces ‘a b - c - d’ but I V R - on the same vector produces ‘a - (b - (c - d))’, or ‘a - b + c - d’. This “alternating sum” occurs frequently in power series expansions. The V U (calc-accumulate) [accum] command does an accumulation operation. Here Calc does the corresponding reduction operation, but instead of producing only the final result, it produces a vector of all the intermediate results. Accumulating + over the vector ‘[a, b, c, d]’ produces the vector ‘[a, a + b, a + b + c, a + b + c + d]’.

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

237

The I V U [raccum] command does a right-to-left accumulation. For example, I V U - on the vector ‘[a, b, c, d]’ produces the vector ‘[a - b + c - d, b - c + d, c - d, d]’. As for V M, V R normally reduces a matrix elementwise. For example, given the matrix [[a, b, c], [d, e, f ]], V R + will compute a + b + c + d + e + f . You can type V R _ or V R : to modify this behavior. The V R _ [reducea] command reduces “across” the matrix; it reduces each row of the matrix as a vector, then collects the results. Thus V R _ + of this matrix would produce [a + b + c, d + e + f ]. Similarly, V R : [reduced] reduces down; V R : + would produce [a + d, b + e, c + f ]. There is a third “by rows” mode for reduction that is occasionally useful; V R = [reducer] simply reduces the operator over the rows of the matrix themselves. Thus V R = + on the above matrix would get the same result as V R : +, since adding two row vectors is equivalent to adding their elements. But V R = * would multiply the two rows (to get a single number, their dot product), while V R : * would produce a vector of the products of the columns. These three matrix reduction modes work with V R and I V R, but they are not currently supported with V U or I V U. The obsolete reduce-by-columns function, reducec, is still supported but there is no way to get it through the V R command. The commands C-x * : and C-x * _ are equivalent to typing C-x * r to grab a rectangle of data into Calc, and then typing V R : + or V R _ +, respectively, to sum the columns or rows of the matrix. See Section 14.5 [Grabbing From Buffers], page 338.

9.8.4 Nesting and Fixed Points The H V R [nest] command applies a function to a given argument repeatedly. It takes two values, ‘a’ and ‘n’, from the stack, where ‘n’ must be an integer. It then applies the function nested ‘n’ times; if the function is ‘f’ and ‘n’ is 3, the result is ‘f(f(f(a)))’. The number ‘n’ may be negative if Calc knows an inverse for the function ‘f’; for example, ‘nest(sin, a, -2)’ returns ‘arcsin(arcsin(a))’. The H V U [anest] command is an accumulating version of nest: It returns a vector of ‘n+1’ values, e.g., ‘[a, f(a), f(f(a)), f(f(f(a)))]’. If ‘n’ is negative and ‘F’ is the inverse of ‘f’, then the result is of the form ‘[a, F(a), F(F(a)), F(F(F(a)))]’. The H I V R [fixp] command is like H V R, except that it takes only an ‘a’ value from the stack; the function is applied until it reaches a “fixed point,” i.e., until the result no longer changes. The H I V U [afixp] command is an accumulating fixp. The first element of the return vector will be the initial value ‘a’; the last element will be the final result that would have been returned by fixp. For example, 0.739085 is a fixed point of the cosine function (in radians): ‘cos(0.739085) = 0.739085’. You can find this value by putting, say, 1.0 on the stack and typing H I V U C. (We use the accumulating version so we can see the intermediate results: ‘[1, 0.540302, 0.857553, 0.65329, ...]’. With a precision of six, this command will take 36 steps to converge to 0.739085.) Newton’s method for finding roots is a classic example of iteration to a fixed point. To find the square root of five starting with an initial guess, Newton’s method would look for a fixed point of the function ‘(x + 5/x) / 2’. Putting a guess of 1 on the stack and typing

238

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

H I V R ’ ($ + 5/$)/2 RET quickly yields the result 2.23607. This is equivalent to using the a R (calc-find-root) command to find a root of the equation ‘x^2 = 5’. These examples used numbers for ‘a’ values. Calc keeps applying the function until two successive results are equal to within the current precision. For complex numbers, both the real parts and the imaginary parts must be equal to within the current precision. If ‘a’ is a formula (say, a variable name), then the function is applied until two successive results are exactly the same formula. It is up to you to ensure that the function will eventually converge; if it doesn’t, you may have to press C-g to stop the Calculator. The algebraic fixp function takes two optional arguments, ‘n’ and ‘tol’. The first is the maximum number of steps to be allowed, and must be either an integer or the symbol ‘inf’ (infinity, the default). The second is a convergence tolerance. If a tolerance is specified, all results during the calculation must be numbers, not formulas, and the iteration stops when the magnitude of the difference between two successive results is less than or equal to the tolerance. (This implies that a tolerance of zero iterates until the results are exactly equal.) Putting it all together, ‘fixp(, B, 20, 1e-10)’ computes the square root of ‘A’ given the initial guess ‘B’, stopping when the result is correct within the specified tolerance, or when 20 steps have been taken, whichever is sooner.

9.8.5 Generalized Products The V O (calc-outer-product) [outer] command applies a given binary operator to all possible pairs of elements from two vectors, to produce a matrix. For example, V O * with ‘[a, b]’ and ‘[x, y, z]’ on the stack produces a multiplication table: ‘[[a x, a y, a z], [b x, b y, b z]]’. Element r,c of the result matrix is obtained by applying the operator to element r of the lefthand vector and element c of the righthand vector. The V I (calc-inner-product) [inner] command computes the generalized inner product of two vectors or matrices, given a “multiplicative” operator and an “additive” operator. These can each actually be any binary operators; if they are ‘*’ and ‘+’, respectively, the result is a standard matrix multiplication. Element r,c of the result matrix is obtained by mapping the multiplicative operator across row r of the lefthand matrix and column c of the righthand matrix, and then reducing with the additive operator. Just as for the standard * command, this can also do a vector-matrix or matrix-vector inner product, or a vector-vector generalized dot product. Since V I requires two operators, it prompts twice. In each case, you can use any of the usual methods for entering the operator. If you use $ twice to take both operator formulas from the stack, the first (multiplicative) operator is taken from the top of the stack and the second (additive) operator is taken from second-to-top.

9.9 Vector and Matrix Display Formats Commands for controlling vector and matrix display use the v prefix instead of the usual d prefix. But they are display modes; in particular, they are influenced by the I and H prefix keys in the same way (see Section 6.7 [Display Modes], page 146). Matrix display is also influenced by the d O (calc-flat-language) mode; see Section 6.8.1 [Normal Language Modes], page 157.

Chapter 9: Vector/Matrix Functions

239

The commands v < (calc-matrix-left-justify), v > (calc-matrix-right-justify), and v = (calc-matrix-center-justify) control whether matrix elements are justified to the left, right, or center of their columns. The v [ (calc-vector-brackets) command turns the square brackets that surround vectors and matrices displayed in the stack on and off. The v { (calc-vector-braces) and v ( (calc-vector-parens) commands use curly braces or parentheses, respectively, instead of square brackets. For example, v { might be used in preparation for yanking a matrix into a buffer running Mathematica. (In fact, the Mathematica language mode uses this mode; see Section 6.8.8 [Mathematica Language Mode], page 165.) Note that, regardless of the display mode, either brackets or braces may be used to enter vectors, and parentheses may never be used for this purpose. The v ] (calc-matrix-brackets) command controls the “big” style display of matrices, for matrices which have more than one row. It prompts for a string of code letters; currently implemented letters are R, which enables brackets on each row of the matrix; O, which enables outer brackets in opposite corners of the matrix; and C, which enables commas or semicolons at the ends of all rows but the last. The default format is ‘RO’. (Before Calc 2.00, the format was fixed at ‘ROC’.) Here are some example matrices: [ [ 123, 0, 0 ] [ 0, 123, 0 ] [ 0, 0, 123 ] ]

[ [ 123, 0, 0 ], [ 0, 123, 0 ], [ 0, 0, 123 ] ]

ROC

[ 123, 0, 0 0, 123, 0 0, 0, 123 ]

[ 123, 0, 0 ; 0, 123, 0 ; 0, 0, 123 ]

[ 123, 0, 0 ] [ 0, 123, 0 ] [ 0, 0, 123 ]

123, 0, 0 0, 123, 0 0, 0, 123

blank

Note that of the formats shown here, ‘RO’, ‘ROC’, and ‘OC’ are all recognized as matrices during reading, while the others are useful for display only. The v , (calc-vector-commas) command turns commas on and off in vector and matrix display. In vectors of length one, and in all vectors when commas have been turned off, Calc adds extra parentheses around formulas that might otherwise be ambiguous. For example, ‘[a b]’ could be a vector of the one formula ‘a b’, or it could be a vector of two variables with commas turned off. Calc will display the former case as ‘[(a b)]’. You can disable these extra parentheses (to make the output less cluttered at the expense of allowing some ambiguity) by adding the letter P to the control string you give to v ] (as described above).

240

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The v . (calc-full-vectors) command turns abbreviated display of long vectors on and off. In this mode, vectors of six or more elements, or matrices of six or more rows or columns, will be displayed in an abbreviated form that displays only the first three elements and the last element: ‘[a, b, c, ..., z]’. When very large vectors are involved this will substantially improve Calc’s display speed. The t . (calc-full-trail-vectors) command controls a similar mode for recording vectors in the Trail. If you turn on this mode, vectors of six or more elements and matrices of six or more rows or columns will be abbreviated when they are put in the Trail. The t y (calc-trail-yank) command will be unable to recover those vectors. If you are working with very large vectors, this mode will improve the speed of all operations that involve the trail. The v / (calc-break-vectors) command turns multi-line vector display on and off. Normally, matrices are displayed with one row per line but all other types of vectors are displayed in a single line. This mode causes all vectors, whether matrices or not, to be displayed with a single element per line. Sub-vectors within the vectors will still use the normal linear form.

Chapter 10: Algebra

241

10 Algebra This section covers the Calc features that help you work with algebraic formulas. First, the general sub-formula selection mechanism is described; this works in conjunction with any Calc commands. Then, commands for specific algebraic operations are described. Finally, the flexible rewrite rule mechanism is discussed. The algebraic commands use the a key prefix; selection commands use the j (for “just a letter that wasn’t used for anything else”) prefix. See Section 5.2 [Editing Stack Entries], page 132, to see how to manipulate formulas using regular Emacs editing commands. When doing algebraic work, you may find several of the Calculator’s modes to be helpful, including Algebraic Simplification mode (m A) or No-Simplification mode (m O), Algebraic entry mode (m a), Fraction mode (m f), and Symbolic mode (m s). See Chapter 6 [Mode Settings], page 135, for discussions of these modes. You may also wish to select Big display mode (d B). See Section 6.8.1 [Normal Language Modes], page 157.

10.1 Selecting Sub-Formulas When working with an algebraic formula it is often necessary to manipulate a portion of the formula rather than the formula as a whole. Calc allows you to “select” a portion of any formula on the stack. Commands which would normally operate on that stack entry will now operate only on the sub-formula, leaving the surrounding part of the stack entry alone. One common non-algebraic use for selection involves vectors. To work on one element of a vector in-place, simply select that element as a “sub-formula” of the vector.

10.1.1 Making Selections To select a sub-formula, move the Emacs cursor to any character in that sub-formula, and press j s (calc-select-here). Calc will highlight the smallest portion of the formula that contains that character. By default the sub-formula is highlighted by blanking out all of the rest of the formula with dots. Selection works in any display mode but is perhaps easiest in Big mode (d B). Suppose you enter the following formula: 1:

3 ___ (a + b) + V c --------------2 x + 1

(by typing ’ ((a+b)^3 + sqrt(c)) / (2x+1)). If you move the cursor to the letter ‘b’ and press j s, the display changes to 1*

. ... .. . b. . . . ............... . . . .

Every character not part of the sub-formula ‘b’ has been changed to a dot. (If the customizable variable calc-highlight-selections-with-faces is non-nil, then the characters not part of the sub-formula are de-emphasized by using a less noticeable face instead of using dots. see Section 10.1.3 [Displaying Selections], page 244.) The ‘*’ next to the line number is to remind you that the formula has a portion of it selected. (In this case, it’s very obvious,

242

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

but it might not always be. If Embedded mode is enabled, the word ‘Sel’ also appears in the mode line because the stack may not be visible. see Chapter 16 [Embedded Mode], page 349.) If you had instead placed the cursor on the parenthesis immediately to the right of the ‘b’, the selection would have been:

. ... (a + b) . . . ............... . . . .

The portion selected is always large enough to be considered a complete formula all by itself, so selecting the parenthesis selects the whole formula that it encloses. Putting the cursor on the ‘+’ sign would have had the same effect. (Strictly speaking, the Emacs cursor is really the manifestation of the Emacs “point,” which is a position between two characters in the buffer. So purists would say that Calc selects the smallest sub-formula which contains the character to the right of “point.”) If you supply a numeric prefix argument n, the selection is expanded to the nth enclosing sub-formula. Thus, positioning the cursor on the ‘b’ and typing C-u 1 j s will select ‘a + b’; typing C-u 2 j s will select ‘(a + b)^3’, and so on. If the cursor is not on any part of the formula, or if you give a numeric prefix that is too large, the entire formula is selected. If the cursor is on the ‘.’ line that marks the top of the stack (i.e., its normal “rest position”), this command selects the entire formula at stack level 1. Most selection commands similarly operate on the formula at the top of the stack if you haven’t positioned the cursor on any stack entry. The j a (calc-select-additional) command enlarges the current selection to encompass the cursor. To select the smallest sub-formula defined by two different points, move to the first and press j s, then move to the other and press j a. This is roughly analogous to using C-@ (set-mark-command) to select the two ends of a region of text during normal Emacs editing. The j o (calc-select-once) command selects a formula in exactly the same way as j s, except that the selection will last only as long as the next command that uses it. For example, j o 1 + is a handy way to add one to the sub-formula indicated by the cursor. (A somewhat more precise definition: The j o command sets a flag such that the next command involving selected stack entries will clear the selections on those stack entries afterwards. All other selection commands except j a and j O clear this flag.) The j S (calc-select-here-maybe) and j O (calc-select-once-maybe) commands are equivalent to j s and j o, respectively, except that if the formula already has a selection they have no effect. This is analogous to the behavior of some commands such as j r (calc-rewrite-selection; see Section 10.11.9 [Selections with Rewrite Rules], page 305) and is mainly intended to be used in keyboard macros that implement your own selectionoriented commands. Selection of sub-formulas normally treats associative terms like ‘a + b - c + d’ and ‘x * y * z’ as single levels of the formula. If you place the cursor anywhere inside ‘a + b - c + d’ except on one of the variable names and use j s, you will select the entire four-term sum.

Chapter 10: Algebra

243

The j b (calc-break-selections) command controls a mode in which the “deep structure” of these associative formulas shows through. Calc actually stores the above formulas as ‘((a + b) - c) + d’ and ‘x * (y * z)’. (Note that for certain obscure reasons, by default Calc treats multiplication as right-associative.) Once you have enabled j b mode, selecting with the cursor on the ‘-’ sign would only select the ‘a + b - c’ portion, which makes sense when the deep structure of the sum is considered. There is no way to select the ‘b - c + d’ portion; although this might initially look like just as legitimate a sub-formula as ‘a + b c’, the deep structure shows that it isn’t. The d U command can be used to view the deep structure of any formula (see Section 6.8.1 [Normal Language Modes], page 157). When j b mode has not been enabled, the deep structure is generally hidden by the selection commands—what you see is what you get. The j u (calc-unselect) command unselects the formula that the cursor is on. If there was no selection in the formula, this command has no effect. With a numeric prefix argument, it unselects the nth stack element rather than using the cursor position. The j c (calc-clear-selections) command unselects all stack elements.

10.1.2 Changing Selections Once you have selected a sub-formula, you can expand it using the j m (calc-select-more) command. If ‘a + b’ is selected, pressing j m repeatedly works as follows: 1*

3 ... (a + b) . . . ............... . . . .

3 ___ (a + b) + V c ............... . . . .

3 ___ (a + b) + V c --------------2 x + 1

In the last example, the entire formula is selected. This is roughly the same as having no selection at all, but because there are subtle differences the ‘*’ character is still there on the line number. With a numeric prefix argument n, j m expands n times (or until the entire formula is selected). Note that j s with argument n is equivalent to plain j s followed by j m with argument n. If j m is used when there is no current selection, it is equivalent to j s. Even though j m does not explicitly use the location of the cursor within the formula, it nevertheless uses the cursor to determine which stack element to operate on. As usual, j m when the cursor is not on any stack element operates on the top stack element. The j l (calc-select-less) command reduces the current selection around the cursor position. That is, it selects the immediate sub-formula of the current selection which contains the cursor, the opposite of j m. If the cursor is not inside the current selection, the command de-selects the formula. The j 1 through j 9 (calc-select-part) commands select the nth sub-formula of the current selection. They are like j l (calc-select-less) except they use counting rather than the cursor position to decide which sub-formula to select. For example, if the current selection is a + b + c or f(a, b, c) or [a, b, c], then j 1 selects ‘a’, j 2 selects ‘b’, and j 3 selects ‘c’; in each of these cases, j 4 through j 9 would be errors. If there is no current selection, j 1 through j 9 select the nth top-level sub-formula. (In other words, they act as if the entire stack entry were selected first.) To select the nth sub-formula where n is greater than nine, you must instead invoke j 1 with n as a numeric prefix argument.

244

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The j n (calc-select-next) and j p (calc-select-previous) commands change the current selection to the next or previous sub-formula at the same level. For example, if ‘b’ is selected in ‘2 + a*b*c + x’, then j n selects ‘c’. Further j n commands would be in error because, even though there is something to the right of ‘c’ (namely, ‘x’), it is not at the same level; in this case, it is not a term of the same product as ‘b’ and ‘c’. However, j m (to select the whole product ‘a*b*c’ as a term of the sum) followed by j n would successfully select the ‘x’. Similarly, j p moves the selection from the ‘b’ in this sample formula to the ‘a’. Both commands accept numeric prefix arguments to move several steps at a time. It is interesting to compare Calc’s selection commands with the Emacs Info system’s commands for navigating through hierarchically organized documentation. Calc’s j n command is completely analogous to Info’s n command. Likewise, j p maps to p, j 2 maps to 2, and Info’s u is like j m. (Note that j u stands for calc-unselect, not “up”.) The Info m command is somewhat similar to Calc’s j s and j l; in each case, you can jump directly to a sub-component of the hierarchy simply by pointing to it with the cursor.

10.1.3 Displaying Selections The j d (calc-show-selections) command controls how selected sub-formulas are displayed. One of the alternatives is illustrated in the above examples; if we press j d we switch to the other style in which the selected portion itself is obscured by ‘#’ signs:

3 ... (a + b) . . . ............... . . . .

# ___ ## # ## + V c --------------2 x + 1

If the customizable variable calc-highlight-selections-with-faces is non-nil, then the non-selected portion of the formula will be de-emphasized by using a less noticeable face (calc-nonselected-face) instead of dots and the selected sub-formula will be highlighted by using a more noticeable face (calc-selected-face) instead of ‘#’ signs. (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433.)

10.1.4 Operating on Selections Once a selection is made, all Calc commands that manipulate items on the stack will operate on the selected portions of the items instead. (Note that several stack elements may have selections at once, though there can be only one selection at a time in any given stack element.) The j e (calc-enable-selections) command disables the effect that selections have on Calc commands. The current selections still exist, but Calc commands operate on whole stack elements anyway. This mode can be identified by the fact that the ‘*’ markers on the line numbers are gone, even though selections are visible. To reactivate the selections, press j e again. To extract a sub-formula as a new formula, simply select the sub-formula and press RET. This normally duplicates the top stack element; here it duplicates only the selected portion of that element. To replace a sub-formula with something different, you can enter the new value onto the stack and press TAB. This normally exchanges the top two stack elements; here it swaps

Chapter 10: Algebra

245

the value you entered into the selected portion of the formula, returning the old selected portion to the top of the stack.

3 ... (a + b) . . . ............... . . . .

17 x y

... 17 x y . . . ............. . . . .

3 (a + b)

___ 17 x y + V c ------------2 x + 1 3 (a + b)

In this example we select a sub-formula of our original example, enter a new formula, TAB it into place, then deselect to see the complete, edited formula. If you want to swap whole formulas around even though they contain selections, just use j e before and after. The j ’ (calc-enter-selection) command is another way to replace a selected subformula. This command does an algebraic entry just like the regular ’ key. When you press RET, the formula you type replaces the original selection. You can use the ‘$’ symbol in the formula to refer to the original selection. If there is no selection in the formula under the cursor, the cursor is used to make a temporary selection for the purposes of the command. Thus, to change a term of a formula, all you have to do is move the Emacs cursor to that term and press j ’. The j ‘ (calc-edit-selection) command is a similar analogue of the ‘ (calc-edit) command. It edits the selected sub-formula in a separate buffer. If there is no selection, it edits the sub-formula indicated by the cursor. To delete a sub-formula, press DEL. This generally replaces the sub-formula with the constant zero, but in a few suitable contexts it uses the constant one instead. The DEL key automatically deselects and re-simplifies the entire formula afterwards. Thus:

### 17 x y + # # ------------2 x + 1

17 x y ------2 x + 1

17 # y ------2 x + 1

17 y ------2 x + 1

In this example, we first delete the ‘sqrt(c)’ term; Calc accomplishes this by replacing ‘sqrt(c)’ with zero and resimplifying. We then delete the x in the numerator; since this is part of a product, Calc replaces it with ‘1’ and resimplifies. If you select an element of a vector and press DEL, that element is deleted from the vector. If you delete one side of an equation or inequality, only the opposite side remains. The j DEL (calc-del-selection) command is like DEL but with the auto-selecting behavior of j ’ and j ‘. It deletes the selected portion of the formula indicated by the cursor, or, in the absence of a selection, it deletes the sub-formula indicated by the cursor position. (There is also an auto-selecting j RET (calc-copy-selection) command.) Normal arithmetic operations also apply to sub-formulas. Here we select the denominator, press 5 - to subtract five from the denominator, press n to negate the denominator, then press Q to take the square root. 1*

.. . ....... 2 x + 1

.. . ....... 2 x - 4

.. . ....... 4 - 2 x

.. . .......... _________ V 4 - 2 x

246

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Certain types of operations on selections are not allowed. For example, for an arithmetic function like - no more than one of the arguments may be a selected sub-formula. (As the above example shows, the result of the subtraction is spliced back into the argument which had the selection; if there were more than one selection involved, this would not be welldefined.) If you try to subtract two selections, the command will abort with an error message. Operations on sub-formulas sometimes leave the formula as a whole in an “un-natural” state. Consider negating the ‘2 x’ term of our sample formula by selecting it and pressing n (calc-change-sign). 1*

.. . .......... ......... . . . 2 x

.. . ........... .......... . . . -2 x

Unselecting the sub-formula reveals that the minus sign, which would normally have canceled out with the subtraction automatically, has not been able to do so because the subtraction was not part of the selected portion. Pressing = (calc-evaluate) or doing any other mathematical operation on the whole formula will cause it to be simplified. 1:

17 y ----------__________ V 4 - -2 x

17 y ---------_________ V 4 + 2 x

10.1.5 Rearranging Formulas using Selections The j R (calc-commute-right) command moves the selected sub-formula to the right in its surrounding formula. Generally the selection is one term of a sum or product; the sum or product is rearranged according to the commutative laws of algebra. As with j ’ and j DEL, the term under the cursor is used if there is no selection in the current formula. All commands described in this section share this property. In this example, we place the cursor on the ‘a’ and type j R, then repeat. 1:

a + b - c

b + a - c

b - c + a

Note that in the final step above, the ‘a’ is switched with the ‘c’ but the signs are adjusted accordingly. When moving terms of sums and products, j R will never change the mathematical meaning of the formula. The selected term may also be an element of a vector or an argument of a function. The term is exchanged with the one to its right. In this case, the “meaning” of the vector or function may of course be drastically changed. 1:

[a, b, c]

[b, a, c]

[b, c, a]

f(a, b, c)

f(b, a, c)

f(b, c, a)

The j L (calc-commute-left) command is like j R except that it swaps the selected term with the one to its left. With numeric prefix arguments, these commands move the selected term several steps at a time. It is an error to try to move a term left or right past the end of its enclosing formula. With numeric prefix arguments of zero, these commands move the selected term as far as possible in the given direction. The j D (calc-sel-distribute) command mixes the selected sum or product into the surrounding formula using the distributive law. For example, in ‘a * (b - c)’ with the

Chapter 10: Algebra

247

‘b - c’ selected, the result is ‘a b - a c’. This also distributes products or quotients into surrounding powers, and can also do transformations like ‘exp(a + b)’ to ‘exp(a) exp(b)’, where ‘a + b’ is the selected term, and ‘ln(a ^ b)’ to ‘ln(a) b’, where ‘a ^ b’ is the selected term. For multiple-term sums or products, j D takes off one term at a time: ‘a * (b + c - d)’ goes to ‘a * (c - d) + a b’ with the ‘c - d’ selected so that you can type j D repeatedly to expand completely. The j D command allows a numeric prefix argument which specifies the maximum number of times to expand at once; the default is one time only. The j D command is implemented using rewrite rules. See Section 10.11.9 [Selections with Rewrite Rules], page 305. The rules are stored in the Calc variable DistribRules. A convenient way to view these rules is to use s e (calc-edit-variable) which displays and edits the stored value of a variable. Press C-c C-c to return from editing mode; be careful not to make any actual changes or else you will affect the behavior of future j D commands! To extend j D to handle new cases, just edit DistribRules as described above. You can then use the s p command to save this variable’s value permanently for future Calc sessions. See Section 12.3 [Operations on Variables], page 323. The j M (calc-sel-merge) command is the complement of j D; given ‘a b - a c’ with either ‘a b’ or ‘a c’ selected, the result is ‘a * (b - c)’. Once again, j M can also merge calls to functions like exp and ln; examine the variable MergeRules to see all the relevant rules. The j C (calc-sel-commute) command swaps the arguments of the selected sum, product, or equation. It always behaves as if j b mode were in effect, i.e., the sum ‘a + b + c’ is treated as the nested sums ‘(a + b) + c’ by this command. If you put the cursor on the first ‘+’, the result is ‘(b + a) + c’; if you put the cursor on the second ‘+’, the result is ‘c + (a + b)’ (which the default simplifications will rearrange to ‘(c + a) + b’). The relevant rules are stored in the variable CommuteRules. You may need to turn default simplifications off (with the m O command) in order to get the full benefit of j C. For example, commuting ‘a - b’ produces ‘-b + a’, but the default simplifications will “simplify” this right back to ‘a - b’ if you don’t turn them off. The same is true of some of the other manipulations described in this section. The j N (calc-sel-negate) command replaces the selected term with the negative of that term, then adjusts the surrounding formula in order to preserve the meaning. For example, given ‘exp(a - b)’ where ‘a - b’ is selected, the result is ‘1 / exp(b - a)’. By contrast, selecting a term and using the regular n (calc-change-sign) command negates the term without adjusting the surroundings, thus changing the meaning of the formula as a whole. The rules variable is NegateRules. The j & (calc-sel-invert) command is similar to j N except it takes the reciprocal of the selected term. For example, given ‘a - ln(b)’ with ‘b’ selected, the result is ‘a + ln(1/b)’. The rules variable is InvertRules. The j E (calc-sel-jump-equals) command moves the selected term from one side of an equation to the other. Given ‘a + b = c + d’ with ‘c’ selected, the result is ‘a + b - c = d’. This command also works if the selected term is part of a ‘*’, ‘/’, or ‘^’ formula. The relevant rules variable is JumpRules. The j I (calc-sel-isolate) command isolates the selected term on its side of an equation. It uses the a S (calc-solve-for) command to solve the equation, and the Hyperbolic flag affects it in the same way. See Section 10.6 [Solving Equations], page 266. When it

248

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

applies, j I is often easier to use than j E. It understands more rules of algebra, and works for inequalities as well as equations. The j * (calc-sel-mult-both-sides) command prompts for a formula using algebraic entry, then multiplies both sides of the selected quotient or equation by that formula. It performs the default algebraic simplifications before re-forming the quotient or equation. You can suppress this simplification by providing a prefix argument: C-u j *. There is also a j / (calc-sel-div-both-sides) which is similar to j * but dividing instead of multiplying by the factor you enter. If the selection is a quotient with numerator 1, then Calc’s default simplifications would normally cancel the new factors. To prevent this, when the j * command is used on a selection whose numerator is 1 or -1, the denominator is expanded at the top level using the distributive law (as if using the C-u 1 a x command). Suppose the formula on the stack is ‘1 / (a + 1)’ and you wish to multiplying the top and bottom by ‘a - 1’. Calc’s default simplifications would normally change the result ‘(a - 1) /(a + 1) (a - 1)’ back to the original form by cancellation; when j * is used, Calc expands the denominator to ‘a (a - 1) + a - 1’ to prevent this. If you wish the j * command to completely expand the denominator of a quotient you can call it with a zero prefix: C-u 0 j *. For example, if the formula on the stack is ‘1 / (sqrt(a) + 1)’, you may wish to eliminate the square root in the denominator by multiplying the top and bottom by ‘sqrt(a) - 1’. If you did this simply by using a simple j * command, you would get ‘(sqrt(a)-1)/ (sqrt(a) (sqrt(a) - 1) + sqrt(a) - 1)’. Instead, you would probably want to use C-u 0 j *, which would expand the bottom and give you the desired result ‘(sqrt(a)-1)/(a-1)’. More generally, if j * is called with an argument of a positive integer n, then the denominator of the expression will be expanded n times (as if with the C-u n a x command). If the selection is an inequality, j * and j / will accept any factor, but will warn unless they can prove the factor is either positive or negative. (In the latter case the direction of the inequality will be switched appropriately.) See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141, for ways to inform Calc that a given variable is positive or negative. If Calc can’t tell for sure what the sign of the factor will be, it will assume it is positive and display a warning message. For selections that are not quotients, equations, or inequalities, these commands pull out a multiplicative factor: They divide (or multiply) by the entered formula, simplify, then multiply (or divide) back by the formula. The j + (calc-sel-add-both-sides) and j - (calc-sel-sub-both-sides) commands analogously add to or subtract from both sides of an equation or inequality. For other types of selections, they extract an additive factor. A numeric prefix argument suppresses simplification of the intermediate results. The j U (calc-sel-unpack) command replaces the selected function call with its argument. For example, given ‘a + sin(x^2)’ with ‘sin(x^2)’ selected, the result is ‘a + x^2’. (The ‘x^2’ will remain selected; if you wanted to change the sin to cos, just press C now to take the cosine of the selected part.) The j v (calc-sel-evaluate) command performs the basic simplifications on the selected sub-formula. These simplifications would normally be done automatically on all results, but may have been partially inhibited by previous selection-related operations, or

Chapter 10: Algebra

249

turned off altogether by the m O command. This command is just an auto-selecting version of the a v command (see Section 10.2 [Algebraic Manipulation], page 249). With a numeric prefix argument of 2, C-u 2 j v applies the default algebraic simplifications to the selected sub-formula. With a prefix argument of 3 or more, e.g., C-u j v applies the a e (calc-simplify-extended) command. See Section 10.3 [Simplifying Formulas], page 251. With a negative prefix argument it simplifies at the top level only, just as with a v. Here the “top” level refers to the top level of the selected sub-formula. The j " (calc-sel-expand-formula) command is to a " (see Section 10.2 [Algebraic Manipulation], page 249) what j v is to a v. You can use the j r (calc-rewrite-selection) command to define other algebraic operations on sub-formulas. See Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289.

10.2 Algebraic Manipulation The commands in this section perform general-purpose algebraic manipulations. They work on the whole formula at the top of the stack (unless, of course, you have made a selection in that formula). Many algebra commands prompt for a variable name or formula. If you answer the prompt with a blank line, the variable or formula is taken from top-of-stack, and the normal argument for the command is taken from the second-to-top stack level. The a v (calc-alg-evaluate) command performs the normal default simplifications on a formula; for example, ‘a - -b’ is changed to ‘a + b’. These simplifications are normally done automatically on all Calc results, so this command is useful only if you have turned default simplifications off with an m O command. See Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140. It is often more convenient to type =, which is like a v but which also substitutes stored values for variables in the formula. Use a v if you want the variables to ignore their stored values. If you give a numeric prefix argument of 2 to a v, it simplifies using Calc’s algebraic simplifications; see Section 10.3 [Simplifying Formulas], page 251. If you give a numeric prefix of 3 or more, it uses Extended Simplification mode (a e). If you give a negative prefix argument −1, −2, or −3, it simplifies in the corresponding mode but only works on the top-level function call of the formula. For example, ‘(2 + 3) * (2 + 3)’ will simplify to ‘(2 + 3)^2’, without simplifying the sub-formulas ‘2 + 3’. As another example, typing V R + to sum the vector ‘[1, 2, 3, 4]’ produces the formula ‘reduce(add, [1, 2, 3, 4])’ in No-Simplify mode. Using a v will evaluate this all the way to 10; using C-u - a v will evaluate it only to ‘1 + 2 + 3 + 4’. (See Section 9.8 [Reducing and Mapping], page 233.) The = command corresponds to the evalv function, and the related N command, which is like = but temporarily disables Symbolic mode (m s) during the evaluation, corresponds to the evalvn function. (These commands interpret their prefix arguments differently than a v; = treats the prefix as the number of stack elements to evaluate at once, and N treats it as a temporary different working precision.) The evalvn function can take an alternate working precision as an optional second argument. This argument can be either an integer, to set the precision absolutely, or a vector

250

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

containing a single integer, to adjust the precision relative to the current precision. Note that evalvn with a larger than current precision will do the calculation at this higher precision, but the result will as usual be rounded back down to the current precision afterward. For example, ‘evalvn(pi - 3.1415)’ at a precision of 12 will return ‘9.265359e-5’; ‘evalvn(pi - 3.1415, 30)’ will return ‘9.26535897932e-5’ (computing a 25-digit result which is then rounded down to 12); and ‘evalvn(pi - 3.1415, [-2])’ will return ‘9.2654e-5’. The a " (calc-expand-formula) command expands functions into their defining formulas wherever possible. For example, ‘deg(x^2)’ is changed to ‘180 x^2 / pi’. Most functions, like sin and gcd, are not defined by simple formulas and so are unaffected by this command. One important class of functions which can be expanded is the user-defined functions created by the Z F command. See Section 17.4 [Algebraic Definitions], page 367. Other functions which a " can expand include the probability distribution functions, most of the financial functions, and the hyperbolic and inverse hyperbolic functions. A numeric prefix argument affects a " in the same way as it does a v: A positive argument expands all functions in the formula and then simplifies in various ways; a negative argument expands and simplifies only the top-level function call. The a M (calc-map-equation) [mapeq] command applies a given function or operator to one or more equations. It is analogous to V M, which operates on vectors instead of equations. see Section 9.8 [Reducing and Mapping], page 233. For example, a M S changes ‘x = y+1’ to ‘sin(x) = sin(y+1)’, and a M + with ‘x = y+1’ and 6 on the stack produces ‘x+6 = y+7’. With two equations on the stack, a M + would add the lefthand sides together and the righthand sides together to get the two respective sides of a new equation. Mapping also works on inequalities. Mapping two similar inequalities produces another inequality of the same type. Mapping an inequality with an equation produces an inequality of the same type. Mapping a ‘ 0.5. (This change is mathematically incorrect, but perhaps you were fixing an inequality which was already incorrect.) With the Inverse flag, I a M [mapeqr] always reverses the direction of the inequality. You might use I a M C to change ‘x < y’ to ‘cos(x) > cos(y)’ if you know you are working with small positive angles. The a b (calc-substitute) [subst] command substitutes all occurrences of some variable or sub-expression of an expression with a new sub-expression. For example, substituting ‘sin(x)’ with ‘cos(y)’ in ‘2 sin(x)^2 + x sin(x) + sin(2 x)’ produces ‘2 cos(y)^2 + x cos(y) + sin(2 x)’. Note that this is a purely structural substitution; the lone ‘x’ and

Chapter 10: Algebra

251

the ‘sin(2 x)’ stayed the same because they did not look like ‘sin(x)’. See Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289, for a more general method for doing substitutions. The a b command normally prompts for two formulas, the old one and the new one. If you enter a blank line for the first prompt, all three arguments are taken from the stack (new, then old, then target expression). If you type an old formula but then enter a blank line for the new one, the new formula is taken from top-of-stack and the target from second-to-top. If you answer both prompts, the target is taken from top-of-stack as usual. Note that a b has no understanding of commutativity or associativity. The pattern ‘x+y’ will not match the formula ‘y+x’. Also, ‘y+z’ will not match inside the formula ‘x+y+z’ because the ‘+’ operator is left-associative, so the “deep structure” of that formula is ‘(x+y) + z’. Use d U (calc-unformatted-language) mode to see the true structure of a formula. The rewrite rule mechanism, discussed later, does not have these limitations. As an algebraic function, subst takes three arguments: Target expression, old, new. Note that subst is always evaluated immediately, even if its arguments are variables, so if you wish to put a call to subst onto the stack you must turn the default simplifications off first (with m O).

10.3 Simplifying Formulas The sections below describe all the various kinds of simplifications Calc provides in full detail. None of Calc’s simplification commands are designed to pull rabbits out of hats; they simply apply certain specific rules to put formulas into less redundant or more pleasing forms. Serious algebra in Calc must be done manually, usually with a combination of selections and rewrite rules. See Section 10.1.5 [Rearranging with Selections], page 246. See Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289. See Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140, for commands to control what level of simplification occurs automatically. Normally the algebraic simplifications described below occur. If you have turned on a simplification mode which does not do these algebraic simplifications, you can still apply them to a formula with the a s (calc-simplify) [simplify] command. There are some simplifications that, while sometimes useful, are never done automatically. For example, the I prefix can be given to a s; the I a s command will change any trigonometric function to the appropriate combination of ‘sin’s and ‘cos’s before simplifying. This can be useful in simplifying even mildly complicated trigonometric expressions. For example, while the algebraic simplifications can reduce ‘sin(x) csc(x)’ to ‘1’, they will not simplify ‘sin(x)^2 csc(x)’. The command I a s can be used to simplify this latter expression; it will transform ‘sin(x)^2 csc(x)’ into ‘sin(x)’. However, I a s will also perform some “simplifications” which may not be desired; for example, it will transform ‘tan(x)^2’ into ‘sin(x)^2 / cos(x)^2’. The Hyperbolic prefix H can be used similarly; the H a s will replace any hyperbolic functions in the formula with the appropriate combinations of ‘sinh’s and ‘cosh’s before simplifying.

10.3.1 Basic Simplifications This section describes basic simplifications which Calc performs in many situations. For example, both binary simplifications and algebraic simplifications begin by performing these

252

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

basic simplifications. You can type m I to restrict the simplifications done on the stack to these simplifications. The most basic simplification is the evaluation of functions. For example, 2 + 3 is evaluated to 5, and sqrt(9) is evaluated to 3. Evaluation does not occur if the arguments to a function are somehow of the wrong type tan([2, 3, 4])), range (tan(90)), or number (tan(3, 5)), or if the function name is not recognized (f(5)), or if Symbolic mode (see Section 6.4.5 [Symbolic Mode], page 138) prevents evaluation (sqrt(2)). Calc simplifies (evaluates) the arguments to a function before it simplifies the function itself. Thus sqrt(5 + 4) is simplified to sqrt(9) before the sqrt function itself is applied. There are very few exceptions to this rule: quote, lambda, and condition (the :: operator) do not evaluate their arguments, if (the ? : operator) does not evaluate all of its arguments, and evalto does not evaluate its lefthand argument. Most commands apply at least these basic simplifications to all arguments they take from the stack, perform a particular operation, then simplify the result before pushing it back on the stack. In the common special case of regular arithmetic commands like + and Q [sqrt], the arguments are simply popped from the stack and collected into a suitable function call, which is then simplified (the arguments being simplified first as part of the process, as described above). Even the basic set of simplifications are too numerous to describe completely here, but this section will describe the ones that apply to the major arithmetic operators. This list will be rather technical in nature, and will probably be interesting to you only if you are a serious user of Calc’s algebra facilities. As well as the simplifications described here, if you have stored any rewrite rules in the variable EvalRules then these rules will also be applied before any of the basic simplifications. See Section 10.11.11 [Automatic Rewrites], page 307, for details. And now, on with the basic simplifications: Arithmetic operators like + and * always take two arguments in Calc’s internal form. Sums and products of three or more terms are arranged by the associative law of algebra into a left-associative form for sums, ((a + b) + c) + d, and (by default) a right-associative form for products, a ∗ (b ∗ (c ∗ d)). Formulas like (a + b) + (c + d) are rearranged to leftassociative form, though this rarely matters since Calc’s algebra commands are designed to hide the inner structure of sums and products as much as possible. Sums and products in their proper associative form will be written without parentheses in the examples below. Sums and products are not rearranged according to the commutative law (a + b to b + a) except in a few special cases described below. Some algebra programs always rearrange terms into a canonical order, which enables them to see that ab + ba can be simplified to 2ab. If you are using Basic Simplification mode, Calc assumes you have put the terms into the order you want and generally leaves that order alone, with the consequence that formulas like the above will only be simplified if you explicitly give the a s command. See Section 10.3.2 [Algebraic Simplifications], page 255. Differences a − b are treated like sums a + (−b) for purposes of simplification; one of the default simplifications is to rewrite a + (−b) or (−b) + a, where −b represents a

Chapter 10: Algebra

253

“negative-looking” term, into a − b form. “Negative-looking” means negative numbers, negated formulas like −x, and products or quotients in which either term is negative-looking. Other simplifications involving negation are −(−x) to x; −(ab) or −(a/b) where either a or b is negative-looking, simplified by negating that term, or else where a or b is any number, by negating that number; −(a + b) to −a − b, and −(b − a) to a − b. (This, and rewriting (−b) + a to a − b, are the only cases where the order of terms in a sum is changed by the default simplifications.) The distributive law is used to simplify sums in some cases: ax + bx to (a + b)x, where a represents a number or an implicit 1 or −1 (as in x or −x) and similarly for b. Use the a c, a f, or j M commands to merge sums with non-numeric coefficients using the distributive law. The distributive law is only used for sums of two terms, or for adjacent terms in a larger sum. Thus a+b+b+c is simplified to a+2b+c, but a+b+c+b is not simplified. The reason is that comparing all terms of a sum with one another would require time proportional to the square of the number of terms; Calc omits potentially slow operations like this in basic simplification mode. Finally, a + 0 and 0 + a are simplified to a. A consequence of the above rules is that 0 − a is simplified to −a. The products 1a and a1 are simplified to a; (−1)a and a(−1) are simplified to −a; 0a and a0 are simplified to 0, except that in Matrix mode where a is not provably scalar the result is the generic zero matrix ‘idn(0)’, and that if a is infinite the result is ‘nan’. Also, (−a)b and a(−b) are simplified to −(ab), where this occurs for negated formulas but not for regular negative numbers. Products are commuted only to move numbers to the front: ab2 is commuted to 2ab. The product a(b + c) is distributed over the sum only if a and at least one of b and c are numbers: 2(x + 3) goes to 2x + 6. The formula (−a)(b − c), where −a is a negative number, is rewritten to a(c − b). The distributive law of products and powers is used for adjacent terms of the product: a b x x goes to xa+b where a is a number, or an implicit 1 (as in x), or the implicit one-half of sqrt(x), and similarly for b. The result is written using ‘sqrt’ or ‘1/sqrt’ if the sum of the powers is 1/2 or −1/2, respectively. If the sum of the powers is zero, the product is simplified to 1 or to ‘idn(1)’ if Matrix mode is enabled. The product of a negative power times anything but another negative power is changed to use division: x−2 y goes to y/x2 unless Matrix mode is in effect and neither x nor y are scalar (in which case it is considered unsafe to rearrange the order of the terms). Finally, a(b/c) is rewritten to (ab)/c, and also (a/b)c is changed to (ac)/b unless in Matrix mode. Simplifications for quotients are analogous to those for products. The quotient 0/x is simplified to 0, with the same exceptions that were noted for 0x. Likewise, x/1 and x/(−1) are simplified to x and −x, respectively. The quotient x/0 is left unsimplified or changed to an infinite quantity, as directed by the current infinite mode. See Section 6.4.4 [Infinite Mode], page 138.

254

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The expression a/b−c is changed to abc , where −c is any negative-looking power. Also, 1/bc is changed to b−c for any power c. Also, (−a)/b and a/(−b) go to −(a/b); (a/b)/c goes to a/(bc); and a/(b/c) goes to (ac)/b unless Matrix mode prevents this rearrangement. Similarly, a/(b:c) is simplified to (c:b)a for any fraction b:c. The distributive law is applied to (a+b)/c only if c and at least one of a and b are numbers. Quotients of powers and square roots are distributed just as described for multiplication. Quotients of products cancel only in the leading terms of the numerator and denominator. In other words, axb/ayb is canceled to xb/yb but not to x/y. Once again this is because full cancellation can be slow; use a s to cancel all terms of the quotient. Quotients of negative-looking values are simplified according to (−a)/(−b) to a/b, (−a)/(b − c) to a/(c − b), and (a − b)/(−c) to (b − a)/c. The formula x0 is simplified to 1, or to ‘idn(1)’ in Matrix mode. The formula 0x is simplified to 0 unless x is a negative number, complex number or zero. If x is negative, complex or 0.0, 0x is an infinity or an unsimplified formula according to the current infinite mode. The expression 00 is simplified to 1. Powers of products or quotients (ab)c , (a/b)c are distributed to ac bc , ac /bc only if c is an integer, or if either a or b are nonnegative real numbers. Powers of powers (ab )c are simplified to abc only when c is an integer and bc also evaluates to an integer. Without these restrictions these simplifications would not be safe because of problems with principal values. (In other words, ((−3)1/2 )2 is safe to simplify, but ((−3)2 )1/2 is not.) See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141, for ways to inform Calc that your variables satisfy these requirements. As a special case of this rule, sqrt(x)n is simplified to xn/2 only for even integers n. If a is known to be real, b is an even integer, and c is a half- or quarter-integer, then (ab )c is simplified to abs(a( bc)). Also, (−a)b is simplified to ab if b is an even integer, or to −(ab ) if b is an odd integer, for any negative-looking expression −a. Square roots sqrt(x) generally act like one-half powers x1:2 for the purposes of the above-listed simplifications. Also, note that 1/x1:2 is changed to x−1:2 , but 1/sqrt(x) is left alone. Generic identity matrices (see Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139) are simplified by the following rules: idn(a)+b to a+b if b is provably scalar, or expanded out if b is a matrix; idn(a)+idn(b) to idn(a+b); −idn(a) to idn(−a); aidn(b) to idn(ab) if a is provably scalar, or to ab if a is provably non-scalar; idn(a)idn(b) to idn(ab); analogous simplifications for quotients involving idn; and idn(a)n to idn(an ) where n is an integer. The floor function and other integer truncation functions vanish if the argument is provably integer-valued, so that floor(round(x)) simplifies to round(x). Also, combinations of float, floor and its friends, and ffloor and its friends, are simplified in appropriate ways. See Section 7.2 [Integer Truncation], page 187. The expression abs(−x) changes to abs(x). The expression abs(abs(x)) changes to abs(x); in fact, abs(x) changes to x or −x if x is provably nonnegative or nonpositive (see Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141).

Chapter 10: Algebra

255

While most functions do not recognize the variable i as an imaginary number, the arg function does handle the two cases arg(i) and arg(−i) just for convenience. The expression conj(conj(x)) simplifies to x. Various other expressions involving conj, re, and im are simplified, especially if some of the arguments are provably real or involve the constant i. For example, conj(a + bi) is changed to conj(a) − conj(b)i, or to a − bi if a and b are known to be real. Functions like sin and arctan generally don’t have any default simplifications beyond simply evaluating the functions for suitable numeric arguments and infinity. The algebraic simplifications described in the next section do provide some simplifications for these functions, though. One important simplification that does occur is that ln(e) is simplified to 1, and ln(ex ) is simplified to x for any x. This occurs even if you have stored a different value in the Calc variable ‘e’; but this would be a bad idea in any case if you were also using natural logarithms! Among the logical functions, !(a b and so on. Equations and inequalities where both sides are either negative-looking or zero are simplified by negating both sides and reversing the inequality. While it might seem reasonable to simplify !!x to x, this would not be valid in general because !!2 is 1, not 2. Most other Calc functions have few if any basic simplifications defined, aside of course from evaluation when the arguments are suitable numbers.

10.3.2 Algebraic Simplifications This section describes all simplifications that are performed by the algebraic simplification mode, which is the default simplification mode. If you have switched to a different simplification mode, you can switch back with the m A command. Even in other simplification modes, the a s command will use these algebraic simplifications to simplify the formula. There is a variable, AlgSimpRules, in which you can put rewrites to be applied. Its use is analogous to EvalRules, but without the special restrictions. Basically, the simplifier does ‘a r AlgSimpRules’ with an infinite repeat count on the whole expression being simplified, then it traverses the expression applying the built-in rules described below. If the result is different from the original expression, the process repeats with the basic simplifications (including EvalRules), then AlgSimpRules, then the built-in simplifications, and so on. Sums are simplified in two ways. Constant terms are commuted to the end of the sum, so that a + 2 + b changes to a + b + 2. The only exception is that a constant will not be commuted away from the first position of a difference, i.e., 2 − x is not commuted to −x + 2. Also, terms of sums are combined by the distributive law, as in x + y + 2x to y + 3x. This always occurs for adjacent terms, but Calc’s algebraic simplifications compare all pairs of terms including non-adjacent ones. Products are sorted into a canonical order using the commutative law. For example, bca is commuted to abc. This allows easier comparison of products; for example, the basic simplifications will not change xy + yx to 2xy, but the algebraic simplifications; it first rewrites the sum to xy + xy which can then be recognized as a sum of identical terms.

256

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The canonical ordering used to sort terms of products has the property that real-valued numbers, interval forms and infinities come first, and are sorted into increasing order. The V S command uses the same ordering when sorting a vector. Sorting of terms of products is inhibited when Matrix mode is turned on; in this case, Calc will never exchange the order of two terms unless it knows at least one of the terms is a scalar. Products of powers are distributed by comparing all pairs of terms, using the same method that the default simplifications use for adjacent terms of products. Even though sums are not sorted, the commutative law is still taken into account when terms of a product are being compared. Thus (x + y)(y + x) will be simplified to (x + y)2 . A subtle point is that (x − y)(y − x) will not be simplified to −(x − y)2 ; Calc does not notice that one term can be written as a constant times the other, even if that constant is −1. A fraction times any expression, (a:b)x, is changed to a quotient involving integers: ax/b. This is not done for floating-point numbers like 0.5, however. This is one reason why you may find it convenient to turn Fraction mode on while doing algebra; see Section 6.4.3 [Fraction Mode], page 138. Quotients are simplified by comparing all terms in the numerator with all terms in the denominator for possible cancellation using the distributive law. For example, ax2 b/cx3 d will cancel x2 from the top and bottom to get ab/cxd. (The terms in the denominator will then be rearranged to cdx as described above.) If there is any common integer or fractional factor in the numerator and denominator, it is canceled out; for example, (4x + 6)/8x simplifies to (2x + 3)/4x. Non-constant common factors are not found even by algebraic simplifications. To cancel the factor a in (ax+a)/a2 you could first use j M on the product ax to Merge the numerator to a(1 + x), which can then be simplified successfully. Integer powers of the variable i are simplified according to the identity i2 = −1. If you store a new value other than the complex number (0, 1) in i, this simplification will no longer occur. This is not done by the basic simplifications; in case someone (unwisely) wants to use the name i for a variable unrelated to complex numbers, they can use basic simplification mode. Square roots of integer or rational arguments are simplified in several ways. (Note that these will be left unevaluated only in Symbolic mode.) First, square integer or rational factors are pulled out so that sqrt(8) is rewritten as 2 sqrt(2). Conceptually speaking this implies factoring the argument into primes and moving pairs of primes out of the square root, but for reasons of efficiency Calc only looks for primes up to 29. Square roots in the denominator of a quotient are moved to the numerator: 1/sqrt(3) changes to sqrt(3)/3. The same effect occurs for the square root of a fraction: sqrt(2:3) changes to sqrt(6)/3. The % (modulo) operator is simplified in several ways when the modulus M is a positive real number. First, if the argument is of the form x + n for some real number n, then n is itself reduced modulo M . For example, ‘(x - 23) % 10’ is simplified to ‘(x + 7) % 10’.

Chapter 10: Algebra

257

If the argument is multiplied by a constant, and this constant has a common integer divisor with the modulus, then this factor is canceled out. For example, ‘12 x % 15’ is changed to ‘3 (4 x % 5)’ by factoring out 3. Also, ‘(12 x + 1) % 15’ is changed to ‘3 ((4 x + 1:3) % 5)’. While these forms may not seem “simpler,” they allow Calc to discover useful information about modulo forms in the presence of declarations. If the modulus is 1, then Calc can use int declarations to evaluate the expression. For example, the idiom ‘x % 2’ is often used to check whether a number is odd or even. As described above, ‘2 n % 2’ and ‘(2 n + 1) % 2’ are simplified to ‘2 (n % 1)’ and ‘2 ((n + 1:2) % 1)’, respectively; Calc can simplify these to 0 and 1 (respectively) if n has been declared to be an integer. Trigonometric functions are simplified in several ways. Whenever a products of two trigonometric functions can be replaced by a single function, the replacement is made; for example, tan(x)cos(x) is simplified to sin(x). Reciprocals of trigonometric functions are replaced by their reciprocal function; for example, 1/sec(x) is simplified to cos(x). The corresponding simplifications for the hyperbolic functions are also handled. Trigonometric functions of their inverse functions are simplified. The expression sin(arcsin(x)) is simplified to x, and similarly for cos and tan. Trigonometric functions of inverses of different trigonometric functions can also be simplified, as in sin(arccos(x)) to sqrt(1 − x2 ). If the argument to sin is negative-looking, it is simplified to −sin(x), and similarly for cos and tan. Finally, certain special values of the argument are recognized; see Section 8.2 [Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions], page 208. Hyperbolic functions of their inverses and of negative-looking arguments are also handled, as are exponentials of inverse hyperbolic functions. No simplifications for inverse trigonometric and hyperbolic functions are known, except for negative arguments of arcsin, arctan, arcsinh, and arctanh. Note that arcsin(sin(x)) can not safely change to x, since this only correct within an integer multiple of 2π radians or 360 degrees. However, arcsinh(sinh(x)) is simplified to x if x is known to be real. Several simplifications that apply to logarithms and exponentials are that exp(ln(x)), ln(x) e , and 10log10(x) all reduce to x. Also, ln(exp(x)), etc., can reduce to x if x is provably real. The form exp(x)y is simplified to exp(xy). If x is a suitable multiple of πi (as described above for the trigonometric functions), then exp(x) or ex will be expanded. Finally, ln(x) is simplified to a form involving pi and i where x is provably negative, positive imaginary, or negative imaginary. The error functions erf and erfc are simplified when their arguments are negativelooking or are calls to the conj function. Equations and inequalities are simplified by canceling factors of products, quotients, or sums on both sides. Inequalities change sign if a negative multiplicative factor is canceled. Non-constant multiplicative factors as in ab = ac are canceled from equations only if they are provably nonzero (generally because they were declared so; see Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141). Factors are canceled from inequalities only if they are nonzero and their sign is known.

258

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Simplification also replaces an equation or inequality with 1 or 0 (“true” or “false”) if it can through the use of declarations. If x is declared to be an integer greater than 5, then x < 3, x = 3, and x = 7.5 are all simplified to 0, but x > 3 is simplified to 1. By a similar analysis, abs(x) >= 0 is simplified to 1, as is x2 >= 0 if x is known to be real.

10.3.3 “Unsafe” Simplifications Calc is capable of performing some simplifications which may sometimes be desired but which are not “safe” in all cases. The a e (calc-simplify-extended) [esimplify] command applies the algebraic simplifications as well as these extended, or “unsafe”, simplifications. Use this only if you know the values in your formula lie in the restricted ranges for which these simplifications are valid. You can use Extended Simplification mode (m E) to have these simplifications done automatically. The symbolic integrator uses these extended simplifications; one effect of this is that the integrator’s results must be used with caution. Where an integral table will often attach conditions like “for positive a only,” Calc (like most other symbolic integration programs) will simply produce an unqualified result. Because a e’s simplifications are unsafe, it is sometimes better to type C-u -3 a v, which does extended simplification only on the top level of the formula without affecting the subformulas. In fact, C-u -3 j v allows you to target extended simplification to any specific part of a formula. The variable ExtSimpRules contains rewrites to be applied when the extended simplifications are used. These are applied in addition to EvalRules and AlgSimpRules. (The a r AlgSimpRules step described above is simply followed by an a r ExtSimpRules step.) Following is a complete list of the “unsafe” simplifications. Inverse trigonometric or hyperbolic functions, called with their corresponding non-inverse functions as arguments, are simplified. For example, arcsin(sin(x)) changes to x. Also, arcsin(cos(x)) and arccos(sin(x)) both change to pi/2 − x. These simplifications are unsafe because they are valid only for values of x in a certain range; outside that range, values are folded down to the 360-degree range that the inverse trigonometric functions always produce. Powers of powers (xa )b are simplified to xab for all a and b. These results will be valid only in a restricted range of x; for example, in (x2 )1:2 the powers cancel to get x, which is valid for positive values of x but not for negative or complex values. Similarly, sqrt(xa ) and sqrt(x)a are both simplified (possibly unsafely) to xa/2 . Forms like sqrt(1 − sin(x)2 ) are simplified to, e.g., cos(x). Calc has identities of this sort for sin, cos, tan, sinh, and cosh. Arguments of square roots are partially factored to look for squared terms that can be extracted. For example, sqrt(a2 b3 + a3 b2 ) simplifies to absqrt(a + b). The simplifications of ln(exp(x)), ln(ex ), and log10(10x ) to x are also unsafe because of problems with principal values (although these simplifications are safe if x is known to be real). Common factors are canceled from products on both sides of an equation, even if those factors may be zero: ax/bx to a/b. Such factors are never canceled from inequalities: Even

Chapter 10: Algebra

259

the extended simplifications are not bold enough to reduce ax < bx to a < b (or a > b, depending on whether you believe x is positive or negative). The a M / command can be used to divide a factor out of both sides of an inequality.

10.3.4 Simplification of Units The simplifications described in this section (as well as the algebraic simplifications) are applied when units need to be simplified. They can be applied using the u s (calc-simplifyunits) command, or will be done automatically in Units Simplification mode (m U). See Section 11.1 [Basic Operations on Units], page 311. The variable UnitSimpRules contains rewrites to be applied by units simplifications. These are applied in addition to EvalRules and AlgSimpRules. Scalar mode is automatically put into effect when simplifying units. See Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139. Sums a + b involving units are simplified by extracting the units of a as if by the u x command (call the result ua ), then simplifying the expression b/ua using u b and u s. If the result has units then the sum is inconsistent and is left alone. Otherwise, it is rewritten in terms of the units ua . If units auto-ranging mode is enabled, products or quotients in which the first argument is a number which is out of range for the leading unit are modified accordingly. When canceling and combining units in products and quotients, Calc accounts for unit names that differ only in the prefix letter. For example, ‘2 km m’ is simplified to ‘2000 m^2’. However, compatible but different units like ft and in are not combined in this way. Quotients a/b are simplified in three additional ways. First, if b is a number or a product beginning with a number, Calc computes the reciprocal of this number and moves it to the numerator. Second, for each pair of unit names from the numerator and denominator of a quotient, if the units are compatible (e.g., they are both units of area) then they are replaced by the ratio between those units. For example, in ‘3 s in N / kg cm’ the units ‘in / cm’ will be replaced by 2.54. Third, if the units in the quotient exactly cancel out, so that a u b command on the quotient would produce a dimensionless number for an answer, then the quotient simplifies to that number. For powers and square roots, the “unsafe” simplifications (ab)c to ac bc , (a/b)c to ac /bc , and (ab )c to abc are done if the powers are real numbers. (These are safe in the context of units because all numbers involved can reasonably be assumed to be real.) Also, if a unit name is raised to a fractional power, and the base units in that unit name all occur to powers which are a multiple of the denominator of the power, then the unit name is expanded out into its base units, which can then be simplified according to the previous paragraph. For example, ‘acre^1.5’ is simplified by noting that 1.5 = 3:2, that ‘acre’ is defined in terms of ‘m^2’, and that the 2 in the power of m is a multiple of 2 in 3:2. Thus, acre^1.5 is replaced by approximately (4046m2 )1.5 which is then changed to 40461.5 (m2 )1.5 , then to 257440m3 . The functions float, frac, clean, abs, as well as floor and the other integer truncation functions, applied to unit names or products or quotients involving units, are simplified.

260

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

For example, ‘round(1.6 in)’ is changed to ‘round(1.6) round(in)’; the lefthand term evaluates to 2, and the righthand term simplifies to in. The functions sin, cos, and tan with arguments that have angular units like rad or arcmin are simplified by converting to base units (radians), then evaluating with the angular mode temporarily set to radians.

10.4 Polynomials A polynomial is a sum of terms which are coefficients times various powers of a “base” variable. For example, 2x2 + 3x − 4 is a polynomial in x. Some formulas can be considered polynomials in several different variables: 1 + 2x + 3y + 4xy 2 is a polynomial in both x and y. Polynomial coefficients are often numbers, but they may in general be any formulas not involving the base variable. The a f (calc-factor) [factor] command factors a polynomial into a product of terms. For example, the polynomial x3 + 2x2 + x is factored into ‘x*(x+1)^2’. As another example, ac + bd + bc + ad is factored into the product (a + b)(c + d). Calc currently has three algorithms for factoring. Formulas which are linear in several variables, such as the second example above, are merged according to the distributive law. Formulas which are polynomials in a single variable, with constant integer or fractional coefficients, are factored into irreducible linear and/or quadratic terms. The first example above factors into three linear terms (x, x + 1, and x + 1 again). Finally, formulas which do not fit the above criteria are handled by the algebraic rewrite mechanism. Calc’s polynomial factorization algorithm works by using the general root-finding command (a P) to solve for the roots of the polynomial. It then looks for roots which are rational numbers or complex-conjugate pairs, and converts these into linear and quadratic terms, respectively. Because it uses floating-point arithmetic, it may be unable to find terms that involve large integers (whose number of digits approaches the current precision). Also, irreducible factors of degree higher than quadratic are not found, and polynomials in more than one variable are not treated. (A more robust factorization algorithm may be included in a future version of Calc.) The rewrite-based factorization method uses rules stored in the variable FactorRules. See Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289, for a discussion of the operation of rewrite rules. The default FactorRules are able to factor quadratic forms symbolically into two linear terms, (ax + b)(cx + d). You can edit these rules to include other cases if you wish. To use the rules, Calc builds the formula ‘thecoefs(x, [a, b, c, ...])’ where x is the polynomial base variable and a, b, etc., are polynomial coefficients (which may be numbers or formulas). The constant term is written first, i.e., in the a position. When the rules complete, they should have changed the formula into the form ‘thefactors(x, [f1, f2, f3, ...])’ where each fi should be a factored term, e.g., ‘x - ai’. Calc then multiplies these terms together to get the complete factored form of the polynomial. If the rules do not change the thecoefs call to a thefactors call, a f leaves the polynomial alone on the assumption that it is unfactorable. (Note that the function names thecoefs and thefactors are used only as placeholders; there are no actual Calc functions by those names.) The H a f [factors] command also factors a polynomial, but it returns a list of factors instead of an expression which is the product of the factors. Each factor is represented by a

Chapter 10: Algebra

261

sub-vector of the factor, and the power with which it appears. For example, x5 +x4 −33x3 + 63x2 factors to (x + 7)x2 (x − 3)2 in a f, or to [[x, 2], [x + 7, 1], [x − 3, 2]] in H a f. If there is an overall numeric factor, it always comes first in the list. The functions factor and factors allow a second argument when written in algebraic form; ‘factor(x,v)’ factors x with respect to the specific variable v. The default is to factor with respect to all the variables that appear in x. The a c (calc-collect) [collect] command rearranges a formula as a polynomial in a given variable, ordered in decreasing powers of that variable. For example, given 1 + 2x + 3y + 4xy 2 on the stack, a c x would produce (2 + 4y 2 )x + (1 + 3y), and a c y would produce (4x)y 2 + 3y + (1 + 2x). The polynomial will be expanded out using the distributive law as necessary: Collecting x in (x − 1)3 produces x3 − 3x2 + 3x − 1. Terms not involving x will not be expanded. The “variable” you specify at the prompt can actually be any expression: a c ln(x+1) will collect together all terms multiplied by ‘ln(x+1)’ or integer powers thereof. If ‘x’ also appears in the formula in a context other than ‘ln(x+1)’, a c will treat those occurrences as unrelated to ‘ln(x+1)’, i.e., as constants. The a x (calc-expand) [expand] command expands an expression by applying the distributive law everywhere. It applies to products, quotients, and powers involving sums. By default, it fully distributes all parts of the expression. With a numeric prefix argument, the distributive law is applied only the specified number of times, then the partially expanded expression is left on the stack. The a x and j D commands are somewhat redundant. Use a x if you want to expand all products of sums in your formula. Use j D if you want to expand a particular specified term of the formula. There is an exactly analogous correspondence between a f and j M. (The j D and j M commands also know many other kinds of expansions, such as ‘exp(a + b) = exp(a) exp(b)’, which a x and a f do not do.) Calc’s automatic simplifications will sometimes reverse a partial expansion. For example, the first step in expanding (x + 1)3 is to write (x + 1)(x + 1)2 . If a x stops there and tries to put this formula onto the stack, though, Calc will automatically simplify it back to (x + 1)3 form. The solution is to turn simplification off first (see Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140), or to run a x without a numeric prefix argument so that it expands all the way in one step. The a a (calc-apart) [apart] command expands a rational function by partial fractions. A rational function is the quotient of two polynomials; apart pulls this apart into a sum of rational functions with simple denominators. In algebraic notation, the apart function allows a second argument that specifies which variable to use as the “base”; by default, Calc chooses the base variable automatically. The a n (calc-normalize-rat) [nrat] command attempts to arrange a formula into a quotient of two polynomials. For example, given 1 + (a + b/c)/d, the result would be (b + ac + cd)/cd. The quotient is reduced, so that a n will simplify (x2 + 2x + 1)/(x2 − 1) by dividing out the common factor x + 1, yielding (x + 1)/(x − 1). The a \ (calc-poly-div) [pdiv] command divides two polynomials u and v, yielding a new polynomial q. If several variables occur in the inputs, the inputs are considered multivariate polynomials. (Calc divides by the variable with the largest power in u first, or, in the case of equal powers, chooses the variables in alphabetical order.) For example,

262

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

dividing x2 + 3x + 2 by x + 2 yields x + 1. The remainder from the division, if any, is reported at the bottom of the screen and is also placed in the Trail along with the quotient. Using pdiv in algebraic notation, you can specify the particular variable to be used as the base: pdiv(a,b,x). If pdiv is given only two arguments (as is always the case with the a \ command), then it does a multivariate division as outlined above. The a % (calc-poly-rem) [prem] command divides two polynomials and keeps the remainder r. The quotient q is discarded. For any formulas a and b, the results of a \ and a % satisfy a = qb + r. (This is analogous to plain \ and %, which compute the integer quotient and remainder from dividing two numbers.) The a / (calc-poly-div-rem) [pdivrem] command divides two polynomials and reports both the quotient and the remainder as a vector [q, r]. The H a / [pdivide] command divides two polynomials and constructs the formula q+r/b on the stack. (Naturally if the remainder is zero, this will immediately simplify to q.) The a g (calc-poly-gcd) [pgcd] command computes the greatest common divisor of two polynomials. (The GCD actually is unique only to within a constant multiplier; Calc attempts to choose a GCD which will be unsurprising.) For example, the a n command uses a g to take the GCD of the numerator and denominator of a quotient, then divides each by the result using a \. (The definition of GCD ensures that this division can take place without leaving a remainder.) While the polynomials used in operations like a / and a g often have integer coefficients, this is not required. Calc can also deal with polynomials over the rationals or floating-point reals. Polynomials with modulo-form coefficients are also useful in many applications; if you enter ‘(x^2 + 3 x - 1) mod 5’, Calc automatically transforms this into a polynomial over the field of integers mod 5: ‘(1 mod 5) x^2 + (3 mod 5) x + (4 mod 5)’. Congratulations and thanks go to Ove Ewerlid ([emailprotected]), who contributed many of the polynomial routines used in the above commands. See Section 10.6.3 [Decomposing Polynomials], page 269, for several useful functions for extracting the individual coefficients of a polynomial.

10.5 Calculus The following calculus commands do not automatically simplify their inputs or outputs using calc-simplify. You may find it helps to do this by hand by typing a s or a e. It may also help to use a x and/or a c to arrange a result in the most readable way.

10.5.1 Differentiation The a d (calc-derivative) [deriv] command computes the derivative of the expression on the top of the stack with respect to some variable, which it will prompt you to enter. Normally, variables in the formula other than the specified differentiation variable are considered constant, i.e., ‘deriv(y,x)’ is reduced to zero. With the Hyperbolic flag, the tderiv (total derivative) operation is used instead, in which derivatives of variables are not reduced to zero unless those variables are known to be “constant,” i.e., independent of any other variables. (The built-in special variables like pi are considered constant, as are variables that have been declared const; see Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141.) With a numeric prefix argument n, this command computes the nth derivative.

Chapter 10: Algebra

263

When working with trigonometric functions, it is best to switch to Radians mode first (with m r). The derivative of ‘sin(x)’ in degrees is ‘(pi/180) cos(x)’, probably not the expected answer! If you use the deriv function directly in an algebraic formula, you can write ‘deriv(f,x,x0)’ which represents the derivative of f with respect to x, evaluated at the point x = x0 . If the formula being differentiated contains functions which Calc does not know, the derivatives of those functions are produced by adding primes (apostrophe characters). For example, ‘deriv(f(2x), x)’ produces ‘2 f’(2 x)’, where the function f’ represents the derivative of f. For functions you have defined with the Z F command, Calc expands the functions according to their defining formulas unless you have also defined f’ suitably. For example, suppose we define ‘sinc(x) = sin(x)/x’ using Z F. If we then differentiate the formula ‘sinc(2 x)’, the formula will be expanded to ‘sin(2 x) / (2 x)’ and differentiated. However, if we also define ‘sinc’(x) = dsinc(x)’, say, then Calc will write the result as ‘2 dsinc(2 x)’. See Section 17.4 [Algebraic Definitions], page 367. For multi-argument functions ‘f(x,y,z)’, the derivative with respect to the first argument is written ‘f’(x,y,z)’; derivatives with respect to the other arguments are ‘f’2(x,y,z)’ and ‘f’3(x,y,z)’. Various higher-order derivatives can be formed in the obvious way, e.g., ‘f’’(x)’ (the second derivative of f) or ‘f’’2’3(x,y,z)’ (f differentiated with respect to each argument once).

10.5.2 Integration The a i (calc-integral) [integ] command computes the indefinite integral of the expression on the top of the stack with respect to a prompted-for variable. The integrator is not guaranteed to work for all integrable functions, but it is able to integrate several large classes of formulas. In particular, any polynomial or rational function (a polynomial divided by a polynomial) is acceptable. (Rational functions don’t have to be in explicit quotient form, however; x/(1 + x−2 ) is not strictly a quotient of polynomials, but it is equivalent to x3 /(x2 + 1), which is.) Also, square roots of terms involving x and x2 may appear in rational functions being integrated. Finally, rational functions involving trigonometric or hyperbolic functions can be integrated. With an argument (C-u a i), this command will compute the definite integral of the expression on top of the stack. In this case, the command will again prompt for an integration variable, then prompt for a lower limit and an upper limit. If you use the integ function directly in an algebraic formula, you can also write ‘integ(f,x,v)’ which expresses the resulting indefinite integral in terms of variable v instead of x. With four arguments, ‘integ(f(x),x,a,b)’ represents a definite integral Rb f (x) dx. a Please note that the current implementation of Calc’s integrator sometimes produces results that are significantly more complex than they need to be. For example, the integral √ Calc finds for 1/(x+ x2 + 1) is several times more complicated than the answer Mathematica returns for the same input, although the two forms are numerically equivalent. Also, any indefinite integral should be considered to have an arbitrary constant of integration added to it, although Calc does not write an explicit constant of integration in its result.

264

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

For example, Calc’s solution for 1/(1 + tan x) differs from the solution given in the CRC Math Tables by a constant factor of πi/2 due to a different choice of constant of integration. The Calculator remembers all the integrals it has done. If conditions change in a way that would invalidate the old integrals, say, a switch from Degrees to Radians mode, then they will be thrown out. If you suspect this is not happening when it should, use the calc-flush-caches command; see Section 3.11.3 [Caches], page 112. Calc normally will pursue integration by substitution or integration by parts up to 3 nested times before abandoning an approach as fruitless. If the integrator is taking too long, you can lower this limit by storing a number (like 2) in the variable IntegLimit. (The s I command is a convenient way to edit IntegLimit.) If this variable has no stored value or does not contain a nonnegative integer, a limit of 3 is used. The lower this limit is, the greater the chance that Calc will be unable to integrate a function it could otherwise handle. Raising this limit allows the Calculator to solve more integrals, though the time it takes may grow exponentially. You can monitor the integrator’s actions by creating an Emacs buffer called *Trace*. If such a buffer exists, the a i command will write a log of its actions there. If you want to manipulate integrals in a purely symbolic way, you can set the integration nesting limit to 0 to prevent all but fast table-lookup solutions of integrals. You might then wish to define rewrite rules for integration by parts, various kinds of substitutions, and so on. See Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289.

10.5.3 Customizing the Integrator Calc has two built-in rewrite rules called IntegRules and IntegAfterRules which you can edit to define new integration methods. See Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289. At each step of the integration process, Calc wraps the current integrand in a call to the fictitious function ‘integtry(expr,var)’, where expr is the integrand and var is the integration variable. If your rules rewrite this to be a plain formula (not a call to integtry), then Calc will use this formula as the integral of expr. For example, the rule ‘integtry(mysin(x),x) := -mycos(x)’ would define a rule to integrate a function mysin that acts like the sine function. Then, putting ‘4 mysin(2y+1)’ on the stack and typing a i y will produce the integral ‘-2 mycos(2y+1)’. Note that Calc has automatically made various transformations on the integral to allow it to use your rule; integral tables generally give rules for ‘mysin(a x + b)’, but you don’t need to use this much generality in your IntegRules. As a more serious example, the expression ‘exp(x)/x’ cannot be integrated in terms of the standard functions, so the “exponential integral” function Ei(x) was invented to describe it. We can get Calc to do this integral in terms of a made-up Ei function by adding the rule ‘[integtry(exp(x)/x, x) := Ei(x)]’ to IntegRules. Now entering ‘exp(2x)/x’ on the stack and typing a i x yields ‘Ei(2 x)’. This new rule will work with Calc’s various built-in integration methods (such as integration by substitution) to solve a variety of other problems involving Ei: For example, now Calc will also be able to integrate ‘exp(exp(x))’ and ‘ln(ln(x))’ (to get ‘Ei(exp(x))’ and ‘x ln(ln(x)) - Ei(ln(x))’, respectively). Your rule may do further integration by calling integ. For example, ‘integtry(twice(u),x) := twice(integ(u))’ allows Calc to integrate ‘twice(sin(x))’ to get ‘twice(-cos(x))’. Note that integ was called with only one argument. This notation is allowed only within IntegRules; it means “integrate this with respect to the same integration variable.” If Calc is unable to integrate u, the integration that

Chapter 10: Algebra

265

invoked IntegRules also fails. Thus integrating ‘twice(f(x))’ fails, returning the unevaluated integral ‘integ(twice(f(x)), x)’. It is still valid to call integ with two or more arguments, however; in this case, if u is not integrable, twice itself will still be integrated: If the above rule is changed to ‘... := twice(integ(u,x))’, then integrating ‘twice(f(x))’ will yield ‘twice(integ(f(x),x))’. If a rule instead produces the formula ‘integsubst(sexpr, svar)’, either replacing the top-level integtry call or nested anywhere inside the expression, then Calc will apply the substitution ‘u = sexpr(svar)’ to try to integrate the original expr. For example, the rule ‘sqrt(a) := integsubst(sqrt(x),x)’ says that if Calc ever finds a square root in the integrand, it should attempt the substitution ‘u = sqrt(x)’. (This particular rule is unnecessary because Calc always tries “obvious” substitutions where sexpr actually appears in the integrand.) The variable svar may be the same as the var that appeared in the call to integtry, but it need not be. When integrating according to an integsubst, Calc uses the equation solver to find the inverse of sexpr (if the integrand refers to var anywhere except in subexpressions that exactly match sexpr). It uses the differentiator to find the derivative of sexpr and/or its inverse (it has two methods that use one derivative or the other). You can also specify these items by adding extra arguments to the integsubst your rules construct; the general form is ‘integsubst(sexpr, svar, sinv, sprime)’, where sinv is the inverse of sexpr (still written as a function of svar), and sprime is the derivative of sexpr with respect to svar. If you don’t specify these things, and Calc is not able to work them out on its own with the information it knows, then your substitution rule will work only in very specific, simple cases. Calc applies IntegRules as if by C-u 1 a r IntegRules; in other words, Calc stops rewriting as soon as any rule in your rule set succeeds. (If it weren’t for this, the ‘integsubst(sqrt(x),x)’ example above would keep on adding layers of integsubst calls forever!) Another set of rules, stored in IntegSimpRules, are applied every time the integrator uses algebraic simplifications to simplify an intermediate result. For example, putting the rule ‘twice(x) := 2 x’ into IntegSimpRules would tell Calc to convert the twice function into a form it knows whenever integration is attempted. One more way to influence the integrator is to define a function with the Z F command (see Section 17.4 [Algebraic Definitions], page 367). Calc’s integrator automatically expands such functions according to their defining formulas, even if you originally asked for the function to be left unevaluated for symbolic arguments. (Certain other Calc systems, such as the differentiator and the equation solver, also do this.) Sometimes Calc is able to find a solution to your integral, but it expresses the result in a way that is unnecessarily complicated. If this happens, you can either use integsubst as described above to try to hint at a more direct path to the desired result, or you can use IntegAfterRules. This is an extra rule set that runs after the main integrator returns its result; basically, Calc does an a r IntegAfterRules on the result before showing it to you. (It also does algebraic simplifications, without IntegSimpRules, after that to further simplify the result.) For example, Calc’s integrator sometimes produces expressions of the form ‘ln(1+x) - ln(1-x)’; the default IntegAfterRules rewrite this into the more readable form ‘2 arctanh(x)’. Note that, unlike IntegRules, IntegSimpRules and

266

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

IntegAfterRules are applied any number of times until no further changes are possible. Rewriting by IntegAfterRules occurs only after the main integrator has finished, not at every step as for IntegRules and IntegSimpRules.

10.5.4 Numerical Integration If you want a purely numerical answer to an integration problem, you can use the a I (calc-num-integral) [ninteg] command. This command prompts for an integration variable, a lower limit, and an upper limit. Except for the integration variable, all other variables that appear in the integrand formula must have stored values. (A stored value, if any, for the integration variable itself is ignored.) Numerical integration works by evaluating your formula at many points in the specified interval. Calc uses an “open Romberg” method; this means that it does not evaluate the formula actually at the endpoints (so that it is safe to integrate ‘sin(x)/x’ from zero, for example). Also, the Romberg method works especially well when the function being integrated is fairly smooth. If the function is not smooth, Calc will have to evaluate it at quite a few points before it can accurately determine the value of the integral. Integration is much faster when the current precision is small. It is best to set the precision to the smallest acceptable number of digits before you use a I. If Calc appears to be taking too long, press C-g to halt it and try a lower precision. If Calc still appears to need hundreds of evaluations, check to make sure your function is well-behaved in the specified interval. It is possible for the lower integration limit to be ‘-inf’ (minus infinity). Likewise, the upper limit may be plus infinity. Calc internally transforms the integral into an equivalent one with finite limits. However, integration to or across singularities is not supported: The integral of ‘1/sqrt(x)’ from 0 to 1 exists (it can be found by Calc’s symbolic integrator, for example), but a I will fail because the integrand goes to infinity at one of the endpoints.

10.5.5 Taylor Series The a t (calc-taylor) [taylor] command computes a power series expansion or Taylor series of a function. You specify the variable and the desired number of terms. You may give an expression of the form ‘var = a’ or ‘var - a’ instead of just a variable to produce a Taylor expansion about the point a. You may specify the number of terms with a numeric prefix argument; otherwise the command will prompt you for the number of terms. Note that many series expansions have coefficients of zero for some terms, so you may appear to get fewer terms than you asked for. If the a i command is unable to find a symbolic integral for a function, you can get an approximation by integrating the function’s Taylor series.

10.6 Solving Equations The a S (calc-solve-for) [solve] command rearranges an equation to solve for a specific variable. An equation is an expression of the form L = R. For example, the command a S x will rearrange y = 3x + 6 to the form, x = y/3 − 2. If the input is not an equation, it is treated like an equation of the form X = 0. This command also works for inequalities, as in y < 3x + 6. Some inequalities cannot be solved where the analogous equation could be; for example, solving a < b c for b is impossible

Chapter 10: Algebra

267

without knowing the sign of c. In this case, a S will produce the result b != a/c (using the not-equal-to operator) to signify that the direction of the inequality is now unknown. The inequality a ≤ b c is not even partially solved. See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141, for a way to tell Calc that the signs of the variables in a formula are in fact known. Two useful commands for working with the result of a S are a . (see Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286), which converts x = y/3 − 2 to y/3 − 2, and s l (see Section 12.4 [Let Command], page 325) which evaluates another formula with x set equal to y/3 − 2.

10.6.1 Multiple Solutions Some equations have more than one solution. The Hyperbolic flag (H a S) [fsolve] tells the solver to report the fully general family of solutions. It will invent variables n1, n2, . . . , which represent independent arbitrary integers, and s1, s2, . . . , which represent independent arbitrary signs (either +1 or −1). If you don’t use the Hyperbolic flag, Calc will use zero in place of all arbitrary integers, and plus one in place of all arbitrary signs. Note that variables like n1 and s1 are not given any special interpretation in Calc except by the equation solver itself. As usual, you can use the s l (calc-let) command to obtain solutions for various actual values of these variables. For example, ’ x^2 = y RET H a S x RET solves to get ‘x = s1 sqrt(y)’, indicating that the two solutions to the equation are ‘sqrt(y)’ and ‘-sqrt(y)’. Another way to think about it is that the square-root operation is really a two-valued function; since every Calc function must return a single result, sqrt chooses to return the positive result. Then H a S doctors this result using s1 to indicate the full set of possible values of the mathematical square-root. There is a similar phenomenon going the other direction: Suppose we solve ‘sqrt(y) = x’ for y. Calc squares both sides to get ‘y = x^2’. This is correct, except that it introduces some dubious solutions. Consider solving ‘sqrt(y) = -3’: Calc will report y = 9 as a valid solution, which is true in the mathematical sense of square-root, but false (there is no solution) for the actual Calc positive-valued sqrt. This happens for both a S and H a S. If you store a positive integer in the Calc variable GenCount, then Calc will generate formulas of the form ‘as(n)’ for arbitrary signs, and ‘an(n)’ for arbitrary integers, where n represents successive values taken by incrementing GenCount by one. While the normal arbitrary sign and integer symbols start over at s1 and n1 with each new Calc command, the GenCount approach will give each arbitrary value a name that is unique throughout the entire Calc session. Also, the arbitrary values are function calls instead of variables, which is advantageous in some cases. For example, you can make a rewrite rule that recognizes all arbitrary signs using a pattern like ‘as(n)’. The s l command only works on variables, but you can use the a b (calc-substitute) command to substitute actual values for function calls like ‘as(3)’. The s G (calc-edit-GenCount) command is a convenient way to create or edit this variable. Press C-c C-c to finish. If you have not stored a value in GenCount, or if the value in that variable is not a positive integer, the regular s1/n1 notation is used. With the Inverse flag, I a S [finv] treats the expression on top of the stack as a function of the specified variable and solves to find the inverse function, written in terms of the same

268

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

variable. For example, I a S x inverts 2x + 6 to x/2 − 3. You can use both Inverse and Hyperbolic [ffinv] to obtain a fully general inverse, as described above. Some equations, specifically polynomials, have a known, finite number of solutions. The a P (calc-poly-roots) [roots] command uses H a S to solve an equation in general form, then, for all arbitrary-sign variables like s1, and all arbitrary-integer variables like n1 for which n1 only usefully varies over a finite range, it expands these variables out to all their possible values. The results are collected into a vector, which is returned. For example, ‘roots(x^4 = 1, x)’ returns the four solutions ‘[1, -1, (0, 1), (0, -1)]’. Generally an nth degree polynomial will always have n roots on the complex plane. (If you have given a real declaration for the solution variable, then only the real-valued solutions, if any, will be reported; see Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141.) Note that because a P uses H a S, it is able to deliver symbolic solutions if the polynomial has symbolic coefficients. Also note that Calc’s solver is not able to get exact symbolic solutions to all polynomials. Polynomials containing powers up to x4 can always be solved exactly; polynomials of higher degree sometimes can be: x6 + x3 + 1 is converted to (x3 )2 + (x3 ) + 1, which can be solved for x3 using the quadratic equation, and then for x by taking cube roots. But in many cases, like x6 + x + 1, Calc does not know how to rewrite the polynomial into a form it can solve. The a P command can still deliver a list of numerical roots, however, provided that Symbolic mode (m s) is not turned on. (If you work with Symbolic mode on, recall that the N (calc-eval-num) key is a handy way to reevaluate the formula on the stack with Symbolic mode temporarily off.) Naturally, a P can only provide numerical roots if the polynomial coefficients are all numbers (real or complex).

10.6.2 Solving Systems of Equations You can also use the commands described above to solve systems of simultaneous equations. Just create a vector of equations, then specify a vector of variables for which to solve. (You can omit the surrounding brackets when entering the vector of variables at the prompt.) For example, putting ‘[x + y = a, x - y = b]’ on the stack and typing a S x,y RET produces the vector of solutions ‘[x = a - (a-b)/2, y = (a-b)/2]’. The result vector will have the same length as the variables vector, and the variables will be listed in the same order there. Note that the solutions are not always simplified as far as possible; the solution for x here could be improved by an application of the a n command. Calc’s algorithm works by trying to eliminate one variable at a time by solving one of the equations for that variable and then substituting into the other equations. Calc will try all the possibilities, but you can speed things up by noting that Calc first tries to eliminate the first variable with the first equation, then the second variable with the second equation, and so on. It also helps to put the simpler (e.g., more linear) equations toward the front of the list. Calc’s algorithm will solve any system of linear equations, and also many kinds of nonlinear systems. Normally there will be as many variables as equations. If you give fewer variables than equations (an “over-determined” system of equations), Calc will find a partial solution. For example, typing a S y RET with the above system of equations would produce ‘[y = a - x]’. There are now several ways to express this solution in terms of the original variables; Calc uses the first one that it finds. You can control the choice by adding variable specifiers of the form ‘elim(v)’ to the variables list. This says that v should be eliminated from

Chapter 10: Algebra

269

the equations; the variable will not appear at all in the solution. For example, typing a S y,elim(x) would yield ‘[y = a - (b+a)/2]’. If the variables list contains only elim specifiers, Calc simply eliminates those variables from the equations and then returns the resulting set of equations. For example, a S elim(x) produces ‘[a - 2 y = b]’. Every variable eliminated will reduce the number of equations in the system by one. Again, a S gives you one solution to the system of equations. If there are several solutions, you can use H a S to get a general family of solutions, or, if there is a finite number of solutions, you can use a P to get a list. (In the latter case, the result will take the form of a matrix where the rows are different solutions and the columns correspond to the variables you requested.) Another way to deal with certain kinds of overdetermined systems of equations is the a F command, which does least-squares fitting to satisfy the equations. See Section 10.8 [Curve Fitting], page 273.

10.6.3 Decomposing Polynomials The poly function takes a polynomial and a variable as arguments, and returns a vector of polynomial coefficients (constant coefficient first). For example, ‘poly(x^3 + 2 x, x)’ returns [0, 2, 0, 1]. If the input is not a polynomial in x, the call to poly is left in symbolic form. If the input does not involve the variable x, the input is returned in a list of length one, representing a polynomial with only a constant coefficient. The call ‘poly(x, x)’ returns the vector [0, 1]. The last element of the returned vector is guaranteed to be nonzero; note that ‘poly(0, x)’ returns the empty vector []. Note also that x may actually be any formula; for example, ‘poly(sin(x)^2 - sin(x) + 3, sin(x))’ returns [3, −1, 1]. To get the xk coefficient of polynomial p, use ‘poly(p, x)_(k+1)’. To get the degree of polynomial p, use ‘vlen(poly(p, x)) - 1’. For example, ‘poly((x+1)^4, x)’ returns ‘[1, 4, 6, 4, 1]’, so ‘poly((x+1)^4, x)_(2+1)’ gives the x2 coefficient of this polynomial, 6. One important feature of the solver is its ability to recognize formulas which are “essentially” polynomials. This ability is made available to the user through the gpoly function, which is used just like poly: ‘gpoly(expr, var)’. If expr is a polynomial in some term which includes var, then this function will return a vector ‘[x, c, a]’ where x is the term that depends on var, c is a vector of polynomial coefficients (like the one returned by poly), and a is a multiplier which is usually 1. Basically, ‘expr = a*(c_1 + c_2 x + c_3 x^2 + ...)’. The last element of c is guaranteed to be non-zero, and c will not equal ‘[1]’ (i.e., the trivial decomposition expr = x is not considered a polynomial). One side effect is that ‘gpoly(x, x)’ and ‘gpoly(6, x)’, both of which might be expected to recognize their arguments as polynomials, will not because the decomposition is considered trivial. For example, ‘gpoly((x-2)^2, x)’ returns ‘[x, [4, -4, 1], 1]’, since the expanded form of this polynomial is 4 − 4x + x2 . The term x may itself be a polynomial in var. This is done to reduce the size of the c vector. For example, ‘gpoly(x^4 + x^2 - 1, x)’ returns ‘[x^2, [-1, 1, 1], 1]’, since a quadratic polynomial in x2 is easier to solve than a quartic polynomial in x. A few more examples of the kinds of polynomials gpoly can discover: sin(x) - 1 x + 1/x - 1

[sin(x), [-1, 1], 1] [x, [1, -1, 1], 1/x]

270

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

x + 1/x x^3 + 2 x x + x^2:3 + sqrt(x) x^(2a) + 2 x^a + 5 (exp(-x) + exp(x)) / 2

[x^2, [1, 1], 1/x] [x^2, [2, 1], x] [x^1:6, [1, 1, 0, 1], x^1:2] [x^a, [5, 2, 1], 1] [e^(2 x), [0.5, 0.5], e^-x]

The poly and gpoly functions accept a third integer argument which specifies the largest degree of polynomial that is acceptable. If this is n, then only c vectors of length n + 1 or less will be returned. Otherwise, the poly or gpoly call will remain in symbolic form. For example, the equation solver can handle quartics and smaller polynomials, so it calls ‘gpoly(expr, var, 4)’ to discover whether expr can be treated by its linear, quadratic, cubic, or quartic formulas. The pdeg function computes the degree of a polynomial; ‘pdeg(p,x)’ is the highest power of x that appears in p. This is the same as ‘vlen(poly(p,x))-1’, but is much more efficient. If p is constant with respect to x, then ‘pdeg(p,x) = 0’. If p is not a polynomial in x (e.g., ‘pdeg(2 cos(x), x)’, the function remains unevaluated. It is possible to omit the second argument x, in which case ‘pdeg(p)’ returns the highest total degree of any term of the polynomial, counting all variables that appear in p. Note that pdeg(c) = pdeg(c,x) = 0 for any nonzero constant c; the degree of the constant zero is considered to be -inf (minus infinity). The plead function finds the leading term of a polynomial. Thus ‘plead(p,x)’ is equivalent to ‘poly(p,x)_vlen(poly(p,x))’, though again more efficient. In particular, ‘plead((2x+1)^10, x)’ returns 1024 without expanding out the list of coefficients. The value of plead(p,x) will be zero only if p = 0. The pcont function finds the content of a polynomial. This is the greatest common divisor of all the coefficients of the polynomial. With two arguments, pcont(p,x) effectively uses ‘poly(p,x)’ to get a list of coefficients, then uses pgcd (the polynomial GCD function) to combine these into an answer. For example, ‘pcont(4 x y^2 + 6 x^2 y, x)’ is ‘2 y’. The content is basically the “biggest” polynomial that can be divided into p exactly. The sign of the content is the same as the sign of the leading coefficient. With only one argument, ‘pcont(p)’ computes the numerical content of the polynomial, i.e., the gcd of the numerical coefficients of all the terms in the formula. Note that gcd is defined on rational numbers as well as integers; it computes the gcd of the numerators and the lcm of the denominators. Thus ‘pcont(4:3 x y^2 + 6 x^2 y)’ returns 2:3. Dividing the polynomial by this number will clear all the denominators, as well as dividing by any common content in the numerators. The numerical content of a polynomial is negative only if all the coefficients in the polynomial are negative. The pprim function finds the primitive part of a polynomial, which is simply the polynomial divided (using pdiv if necessary) by its content. If the input polynomial has rational coefficients, the result will have integer coefficients in simplest terms.

10.7 Numerical Solutions Not all equations can be solved symbolically. The commands in this section use numerical algorithms that can find a solution to a specific instance of an equation to any desired accuracy. Note that the numerical commands are slower than their algebraic cousins; it is a good idea to try a S before resorting to these commands.

Chapter 10: Algebra

271

(See Section 10.8 [Curve Fitting], page 273, for some other, more specialized, operations on numerical data.)

10.7.1 Root Finding The a R (calc-find-root) [root] command finds a numerical solution (or root) of an equation. (This command treats inequalities the same as equations. If the input is any other kind of formula, it is interpreted as an equation of the form X = 0.) The a R command requires an initial guess on the top of the stack, and a formula in the second-to-top position. It prompts for a solution variable, which must appear in the formula. All other variables that appear in the formula must have assigned values, i.e., when a value is assigned to the solution variable and the formula is evaluated with =, it should evaluate to a number. Any assigned value for the solution variable itself is ignored and unaffected by this command. When the command completes, the initial guess is replaced on the stack by a vector of two numbers: The value of the solution variable that solves the equation, and the difference between the lefthand and righthand sides of the equation at that value. Ordinarily, the second number will be zero or very nearly zero. (Note that Calc uses a slightly higher precision while finding the root, and thus the second number may be slightly different from the value you would compute from the equation yourself.) The v h (calc-head) command is a handy way to extract the first element of the result vector, discarding the error term. The initial guess can be a real number, in which case Calc searches for a real solution near that number, or a complex number, in which case Calc searches the whole complex plane near that number for a solution, or it can be an interval form which restricts the search to real numbers inside that interval. Calc tries to use a d to take the derivative of the equation. If this succeeds, it uses Newton’s method. If the equation is not differentiable Calc uses a bisection method. (If Newton’s method appears to be going astray, Calc switches over to bisection if it can, or otherwise gives up. In this case it may help to try again with a slightly different initial guess.) If the initial guess is a complex number, the function must be differentiable. If the formula (or the difference between the sides of an equation) is negative at one end of the interval you specify and positive at the other end, the root finder is guaranteed to find a root. Otherwise, Calc subdivides the interval into small parts looking for positive and negative values to bracket the root. When your guess is an interval, Calc will not look outside that interval for a root. The H a R [wroot] command is similar to a R, except that if the initial guess is an interval for which the function has the same sign at both ends, then rather than subdividing the interval Calc attempts to widen it to enclose a root. Use this mode if you are not sure if the function has a root in your interval. If the function is not differentiable, and you give a simple number instead of an interval as your initial guess, Calc uses this widening process even if you did not type the Hyperbolic flag. (If the function is differentiable, Calc uses Newton’s method which does not require a bounding interval in order to work.)

272

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

If Calc leaves the root or wroot function in symbolic form on the stack, it will normally display an explanation for why no root was found. If you miss this explanation, press w (calc-why) to get it back.

10.7.2 Minimization The a N (calc-find-minimum) [minimize] command finds a minimum value for a formula. It is very similar in operation to a R (calc-find-root): You give the formula and an initial guess on the stack, and are prompted for the name of a variable. The guess may be either a number near the desired minimum, or an interval enclosing the desired minimum. The function returns a vector containing the value of the variable which minimizes the formula’s value, along with the minimum value itself. Note that this command looks for a local minimum. Many functions have more than one minimum; some, like x sin x, have infinitely many. In fact, there is no easy way to define the “global” minimum of x sin x but Calc can still locate any particular local minimum for you. Calc basically goes downhill from the initial guess until it finds a point at which the function’s value is greater both to the left and to the right. Calc does not use derivatives when minimizing a function. If your initial guess is an interval and it looks like the minimum occurs at one or the other endpoint of the interval, Calc will return that endpoint only if that endpoint is closed; thus, minimizing 17x over [2..3] will return [2, 38], but minimizing over (2..3] would report no minimum found. In general, you should use closed intervals to find literally the minimum value in that range of x, or open intervals to find the local minimum, if any, that happens to lie in that range. Most functions are smooth and flat near their minimum values. Because of this flatness, if the current precision is, say, 12 digits, the variable can only be determined meaningfully to about six digits. Thus you should set the precision to twice as many digits as you need in your answer. The H a N [wminimize] command, analogously to H a R, expands the guess interval to enclose a minimum rather than requiring that the minimum lie inside the interval you supply. The a X (calc-find-maximum) [maximize] and H a X [wmaximize] commands effectively minimize the negative of the formula you supply. The formula must evaluate to a real number at all points inside the interval (or near the initial guess if the guess is a number). If the initial guess is a complex number the variable will be minimized over the complex numbers; if it is real or an interval it will be minimized over the reals.

10.7.3 Systems of Equations The a R command can also solve systems of equations. In this case, the equation should instead be a vector of equations, the guess should instead be a vector of numbers (intervals are not supported), and the variable should be a vector of variables. You can omit the brackets while entering the list of variables. Each equation must be differentiable by each variable for this mode to work. The result will be a vector of two vectors: The variable values that solved the system of equations, and the differences between the sides of the equations with those variable values. There must be the same number of equations as

Chapter 10: Algebra

273

variables. Since only plain numbers are allowed as guesses, the Hyperbolic flag has no effect when solving a system of equations. It is also possible to minimize over many variables with a N (or maximize with a X). Once again the variable name should be replaced by a vector of variables, and the initial guess should be an equal-sized vector of initial guesses. But, unlike the case of multidimensional a R, the formula being minimized should still be a single formula, not a vector. Beware that multidimensional minimization is currently very slow.

10.8 Curve Fitting The a F command fits a set of data to a model formula, such as y = mx + b where m and b are parameters to be determined. For a typical set of measured data there will be no single m and b that exactly fit the data; in this case, Calc chooses values of the parameters that provide the closest possible fit. The model formula can be entered in various ways after the key sequence a F is pressed. If the letter P is pressed after a F but before the model description is entered, the data as well as the model formula will be plotted after the formula is determined. This will be indicated by a “P” in the minibuffer after the help message.

10.8.1 Linear Fits The a F (calc-curve-fit) [fit] command attempts to fit a set of data (x and y vectors of numbers) to a straight line, polynomial, or other function of x. For the moment we will consider only the case of fitting to a line, and we will ignore the issue of whether or not the model was in fact a good fit for the data. In a standard linear least-squares fit, we have a set of (x, y) data points that we wish to fit to the model y = mx + b by adjusting the parameters m and b to make the y values calculated from the formula be as close as possible to the actual y values in the data set. (In a polynomial fit, the model is instead, say, y = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d. In a multilinear fit, we have data points of the form (x1 , x2 , x3 , y) and our model is y = ax1 + bx2 + cx3 + d. These will be discussed later.) In the model formula, variables like x and x2 are called the independent variables, and y is the dependent variable. Variables like m, a, and b are called the parameters of the model. The a F command takes the data set to be fitted from the stack. By default, it expects the data in the form of a matrix. For example, for a linear or polynomial fit, this would be a 2 × N matrix where the first row is a list of x values and the second row has the corresponding y values. For the multilinear fit shown above, the matrix would have four rows (x1 , x2 , x3 , and y, respectively). If you happen to have an N × 2 matrix instead of a 2 × N matrix, just press v t first to transpose the matrix. After you type a F, Calc prompts you to select a model. For a linear fit, press the digit 1. Calc then prompts for you to name the variables. By default it chooses high letters like x and y for independent variables and low letters like a and b for parameters. (The dependent variable doesn’t need a name.) The two kinds of variables are separated by a semicolon.

274

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Since you generally care more about the names of the independent variables than of the parameters, Calc also allows you to name only those and let the parameters use default names. For example, suppose the data matrix 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 9 11 13 is on the stack and we wish to do a simple linear fit. Type a F, then 1 for the model, then RET to use the default names. The result will be the formula 3. + 2.x on the stack. Calc has created the model expression a + b x, then found the optimal values of a and b to fit the data. (In this case, it was able to find an exact fit.) Calc then substituted those values for a and b in the model formula. The a F command puts two entries in the trail. One is, as always, a copy of the result that went to the stack; the other is a vector of the actual parameter values, written as equations: [a = 3, b = 2], in case you’d rather read them in a list than pick them out of the formula. (You can type t y to move this vector to the stack; see Section 5.3 [Trail Commands], page 133. Specifying a different independent variable name will affect the resulting formula: a F 1 k RET produces 3 + 2 k. Changing the parameter names (say, a F 1 k;b,m RET) will affect the equations that go into the trail. To see what happens when the fit is not exact, we could change the number 13 in the data matrix to 14 and try the fit again. The result is: 2.6 + 2.2 x Evaluating this formula, say with v x 5 RET TAB V M $ RET, shows a reasonably close match to the y-values in the data. [4.8, 7., 9.2, 11.4, 13.6] Since there is no line which passes through all the n data points, Calc has chosen a line that best approximates the data points using the method of least squares. The idea is to define the chi-square error measure 2

χ =

N X

(yi − (a + bxi ))2

i=1

which is clearly zero if a+bx exactly fits all data points, and increases as various a+bxi values fail to match the corresponding yi values. There are several reasons why the summand is squared, one of them being to ensure that χ2 ≥ 0. Least-squares fitting simply chooses the values of a and b for which the error χ2 is as small as possible. Other kinds of models do the same thing but with a different model formula in place of a + bxi . A numeric prefix argument causes the a F command to take the data in some other form than one big matrix. A positive argument n will take N items from the stack, corresponding to the n rows of a data matrix. In the linear case, n must be 2 since there is always one independent variable and one dependent variable. A prefix of zero or plain C-u is a compromise; Calc takes two items from the stack, an n-row matrix of x values, and a vector of y values. If there is only one independent variable,

Chapter 10: Algebra

275

the x values can be either a one-row matrix or a plain vector, in which case the C-u prefix is the same as a C-u 2 prefix.

10.8.2 Polynomial and Multilinear Fits To fit the data to higher-order polynomials, just type one of the digits 2 through 9 when prompted for a model. For example, we could fit the original data matrix from the previous section (with 13, not 14) to a parabola instead of a line by typing a F 2 RET. 2.00000000001 x - 1.5e-12 x^2 + 2.99999999999 Note that since the constant and linear terms are enough to fit the data exactly, it’s no surprise that Calc chose a tiny contribution for x2 . (The fact that it’s not exactly zero is due only to roundoff error. Since our data are exact integers, we could get an exact answer by typing m f first to get Fraction mode. Then the x2 term would vanish altogether. Usually, though, the data being fitted will be approximate floats so Fraction mode won’t help.) Doing the a F 2 fit on the data set with 14 instead of 13 gives a much larger x2 contribution, as Calc bends the line slightly to improve the fit. 0.142857142855 x^2 + 1.34285714287 x + 3.59999999998 An important result from the theory of polynomial fitting is that it is always possible to fit n data points exactly using a polynomial of degree n−1, sometimes called an interpolating polynomial. Using the modified (14) data matrix, a model number of 4 gives a polynomial that exactly matches all five data points: 0.04167 x^4 - 0.4167 x^3 + 1.458 x^2 - 0.08333 x + 4. The actual coefficients we get with a precision of 12, like 0.0416666663588, clearly suffer from loss of precision. It is a good idea to increase the working precision to several digits beyond what you need when you do a fitting operation. Or, if your data are exact, use Fraction mode to get exact results. You can type i instead of a digit at the model prompt to fit the data exactly to a polynomial. This just counts the number of columns of the data matrix to choose the degree of the polynomial automatically. Fitting data “exactly” to high-degree polynomials is not always a good idea, though. High-degree polynomials have a tendency to wiggle uncontrollably in between the fitting data points. Also, if the exact-fit polynomial is going to be used to interpolate or extrapolate the data, it is numerically better to use the a p command described below. See Section 10.8.6 [Interpolation], page 283. Another generalization of the linear model is to assume the y values are a sum of linear contributions from several x values. This is a multilinear fit, and it is also selected by the 1 digit key. (Calc decides whether the fit is linear or multilinear by counting the rows in the data matrix.) Given the data matrix, [ [ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ] [ 7, 2, 3, 5, 2 ] [ 14.5, 15, 18.5, 22.5, 24 ] ] the command a F 1 RET will call the first row x and the second row y, and will fit the values in the third row to the model a + bx + cy.

276

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

8. + 3. x + 0.5 y Calc can do multilinear fits with any number of independent variables (i.e., with any number of data rows). Yet another variation is hom*ogeneous linear models, in which the constant term is known to be zero. In the linear case, this means the model formula is simply ax; in the multilinear case, the model might be ax + by + cz; and in the polynomial case, the model could be ax + bx2 + cx3 . You can get a hom*ogeneous linear or multilinear model by pressing the letter h followed by a regular model key, like 1 or 2. This will be indicated by an “h” in the minibuffer after the help message. It is certainly possible to have other constrained linear models, like 2.3 + ax or a − 4x. While there is no single key to select models like these, a later section shows how to enter any desired model by hand. In the first case, for example, you would enter a F ’ 2.3 + a x. Another class of models that will work but must be entered by hand are multinomial fits, e.g., a + bx + cy + dx2 + ey 2 + f xy.

10.8.3 Error Estimates for Fits With the Hyperbolic flag, H a F [efit] performs the same fitting operation as a F, but reports the coefficients as error forms instead of plain numbers. Fitting our two data matrices (first with 13, then with 14) to a line with H a F gives the results, 3. + 2. x 2.6 +/- 0.382970843103 + 2.2 +/- 0.115470053838 x In the first case the estimated errors are zero because the linear fit is perfect. In the second case, the errors are nonzero but moderately small, because the data are still very close to linear. It is also possible for the input to a fitting operation to contain error forms. The data values must either all include errors or all be plain numbers. Error forms can go anywhere but generally go on the numbers in the last row of the data matrix. If the last row contains error forms ‘y i +/- σi ’, then the χ2 statistic is now, χ2 =

2 N X yi − (a + bxi ) i=1

σi

so that data points with larger error estimates contribute less to the fitting operation. If there are error forms on other rows of the data matrix, all the errors for a given data point are combined; the square root of the sum of the squares of the errors forms the σi used for the data point. Both a F and H a F can accept error forms in the input matrix, although if you are concerned about error analysis you will probably use H a F so that the output also contains error estimates. If the input contains error forms but all the σi values are the same, it is easy to see that the resulting fitted model will be the same as if the input did not have error forms at all (χ2 is simply scaled uniformly by 1/σ 2 , which doesn’t affect where it has a minimum). But there will be a difference in the estimated errors of the coefficients reported by H a F. Consult any text on statistical modeling of data for a discussion of where these error estimates come from and how they should be interpreted.

Chapter 10: Algebra

277

With the Inverse flag, I a F [xfit] produces even more information. The result is a vector of six items: 1. The model formula with error forms for its coefficients or parameters. This is the result that H a F would have produced. 2. A vector of “raw” parameter values for the model. These are the polynomial coefficients or other parameters as plain numbers, in the same order as the parameters appeared in the final prompt of the I a F command. For polynomials of degree d, this vector will have length M = d + 1 with the constant term first. 3. The covariance matrix C computed from the fit. This is an mxm symmetric matrix; the diagonal elements Cjj are the variances σj2 of the parameters. The other elements are 2 covariances σij that describe the correlation between pairs of parameters. (A related 2 set of numbers, the linear correlation coefficients rij , are defined as σij /σi σj .) 4. A vector of M “parameter filter” functions whose meanings are described below. If no filters are necessary this will instead be an empty vector; this is always the case for the polynomial and multilinear fits described so far. 5. The value of χ2 for the fit, calculated by the formulas shown above. This gives a measure of the quality of the fit; statisticians consider χ2 ≈ N − M to indicate a moderately good fit (where again N is the number of data points and M is the number of parameters). 6. A measure of goodness of fit expressed as a probability Q. This is computed from the utpc probability distribution function using χ2 with N − M degrees of freedom. A value of 0.5 implies a good fit; some texts recommend that often Q = 0.1 or even 0.001 can signify an acceptable fit. In particular, χ2 statistics assume the errors in your inputs follow a normal (Gaussian) distribution; if they don’t, you may have to accept smaller values of Q. The Q value is computed only if the input included error estimates. Otherwise, Calc will report the symbol nan for Q. The reason is that in this case the χ2 value has effectively been used to estimate the original errors in the input, and thus there is no redundant information left over to use for a confidence test.

10.8.4 Standard Nonlinear Models The a F command also accepts other kinds of models besides lines and polynomials. Some common models have quick single-key abbreviations; others must be entered by hand as algebraic formulas. Here is a complete list of the standard models recognized by a F: 1

Linear or multilinear. a + bx + cy + dz.

2-9

Polynomials. a + bx + cx2 + dx3 .

Exponential. a exp(bx) exp(cy).

Base-10 exponential. a 10^(bx) 10^(cy).

Exponential (alternate notation). exp(a + bx + cy).

Base-10 exponential (alternate). 10^(a + bx + cy).

Logarithmic. a + b ln(x) + c ln(y).

278

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Base-10 logarithmic. a + b log10(x) + c log10(y).

General exponential. abx cy .

Power law. axb y c .

Quadratic. a + b(x − c)2 + d(x − e)2 .

Gaussian.

Logistic s curve. a/(1 + eb(x−c) ).

Logistic bell curve. aeb(x−c) /(1 + eb(x−c) )2 .

Hubbert linearization.

All model shown find it

√a b 2π

exp − 12

y x

x−c 2 b

= a(1 − x/b).

of these models are used in the usual way; just press the appropriate letter at the prompt, and choose variable names if you wish. The result will be a formula as in the above table, with the best-fit values of the parameters substituted. (You may easier to read the parameter values from the vector that is placed in the trail.)

All models except Gaussian, logistics, Hubbert and polynomials can generalize as shown to any number of independent variables. Also, all the built-in models except for the logistic and Hubbert curves have an additive or multiplicative parameter shown as a in the above table which can be replaced by zero or one, as appropriate, by typing h before the model key. Note that many of these models are essentially equivalent, but express the parameters slightly differently. For example, abx and the other two exponential models are all algebraic rearrangements of each other. Also, the “quadratic” model is just a degree-2 polynomial with the parameters expressed differently. Use whichever form best matches the problem. The HP-28/48 calculators support four different models for curve fitting, called LIN, LOG, EXP, and PWR. These correspond to Calc models ‘a + b x’, ‘a + b ln(x)’, ‘a exp(b x)’, and ‘a x^b’, respectively. In each case, a is what the HP-48 identifies as the “intercept,” and b is what it calls the “slope.” If the model you want doesn’t appear on this list, press ’ (the apostrophe key) at the model prompt to enter any algebraic formula, such as m x - b, as the model. (Not all models will work, though—see the next section for details.) The model can also be an equation like y = mx + b. In this case, Calc thinks of all the rows of the data matrix on equal terms; this model effectively has two parameters (m and b) and two independent variables (x and y), with no “dependent” variables. Model equations do not need to take this y = form. For example, the implicit line equation ax + by = 1 works fine as a model. When you enter a model, Calc makes an alphabetical list of all the variables that appear in the model. These are used for the default parameters, independent variables, and dependent variable (in that order). If you enter a plain formula (not an equation), Calc assumes the dependent variable does not appear in the formula and thus does not need a name. For example, if the model formula has the variables a, mu, sigma, t, x, and the data matrix has three rows (meaning two independent variables), Calc will use a, mu, sigma as the default parameters, and the data rows will be named t and x, respectively. If you

Chapter 10: Algebra

279

enter an equation instead of a plain formula, Calc will use a, mu as the parameters, and sigma, t, x as the three independent variables. You can, of course, override these choices by entering something different at the prompt. If you leave some variables out of the list, those variables must have stored values and those stored values will be used as constants in the model. (Stored values for the parameters and independent variables are ignored by the a F command.) If you list only independent variables, all the remaining variables in the model formula will become parameters. If there are $ signs in the model you type, they will stand for parameters and all other variables (in alphabetical order) will be independent. Use $ for one parameter, $$ for another, and so on. Thus $ x + $$ is another way to describe a linear model. If you type a $ instead of ’ at the model prompt itself, Calc will take the model formula from the stack. (The data must then appear at the second stack level.) The same conventions are used to choose which variables in the formula are independent by default and which are parameters. Models taken from the stack can also be expressed as vectors of two or three elements, [model, vars] or [model, vars, params]. Each of vars and params may be either a variable or a vector of variables. (If params is omitted, all variables in model except those listed as vars are parameters.) When you enter a model manually with ’, Calc puts a 3-vector describing the model in the trail so you can get it back if you wish. Finally, you can store a model in one of the Calc variables Model1 or Model2, then use this model by typing a F u or a F U (respectively). The value stored in the variable can be any of the formats that a F $ would accept for a model on the stack. Calc uses the principal values of inverse functions like ln and arcsin when doing fits. For example, when you enter the model ‘y = sin(a t + b)’ Calc actually uses the easier form ‘arcsin(y) = a t + b’. The arcsin function always returns results in the range from −90 to 90 degrees (or the equivalent range in radians). Suppose you had data that you believed to represent roughly three oscillations of a sine wave, so that the argument of the sine might go from zero to 3 × 360 degrees. The above model would appear to be a good way to determine the true frequency and phase of the sine wave, but in practice it would fail utterly. The righthand side of the actual model ‘arcsin(y) = a t + b’ will grow smoothly with t, but the lefthand side will bounce back and forth between −90 and 90. No values of a and b can make the two sides match, even approximately. There is no good solution to this problem at present. You could restrict your data to small enough ranges so that the above problem doesn’t occur (i.e., not straddling any peaks in the sine wave). Or, in this case, you could use a totally different method such as Fourier analysis, which is beyond the scope of the a F command. (Unfortunately, Calc does not currently have any facilities for taking Fourier and related transforms.)

10.8.5 Curve Fitting Details Calc’s internal least-squares fitter can only handle multilinear models. More precisely, it can handle any model of the form af (x, y, z) + bg(x, y, z) + ch(x, y, z), where a, b, c are the parameters and x, y, z are the independent variables (of course there can be any number of each, not just three).

280

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

In a simple multilinear or polynomial fit, it is easy to see how to convert the model into this form. For example, if the model is a + bx + cx2 , then f (x) = 1, g(x) = x, and h(x) = x2 are suitable functions. For most other models, Calc uses a variety of algebraic manipulations to try to put the problem into the form Y(x,y,z) = A(a,b,c) F(x,y,z) + B(a,b,c) G(x,y,z) + C(a,b,c) H(x,y,z)

where Y, A, B, C, F, G, H are arbitrary functions. It computes Y , F , G, and H for all the data points, does a standard linear fit to find the values of A, B, and C, then uses the equation solver to solve for a, b, c in terms of A, B, C. A remarkable number of models can be cast into this general form. We’ll look at two examples here to see how it works. The power-law model y = axb with two independent variables and two parameters can be rewritten as follows: y = a x^b y = a exp(b ln(x)) y = exp(ln(a) + b ln(x)) ln(y) = ln(a) + b ln(x) which matches the desired form with Y = ln(y), A = ln(a), F = 1, B = b, and G = ln(x). Calc thus computes the logarithms of your y and x values, does a linear fit for A and B, then solves to get a = exp(A) and b = B. Another interesting example is the “quadratic” model, which can be handled by expanding according to the distributive law. y = a + b*(x - c)^2 y = a + b c^2 - 2 b c x + b x^2 which matches with Y = y, A = a + bc2 , F = 1, B = −2bc, G = x (the −2 factor could just as easily have been put into G instead of B), C = b, and H = x2 . The Gaussian model looks quite complicated, but a closer examination shows that it’s actually similar to the quadratic model but with an exponential that can be brought to the top and moved into Y . The logistic models cannot be put into general linear form. For these models, and the Hubbert linearization, Calc computes a rough approximation for the parameters, then uses the Levenberg-Marquardt iterative method to refine the approximations. Another model that cannot be put into general linear form is a Gaussian with a constant background added on, i.e., d + the regular Gaussian formula. If you have a model like this, your best bet is to replace enough of your parameters with constants to make the model linearizable, then adjust the constants manually by doing a series of fits. You can compare the fits by graphing them, by examining the goodness-of-fit measures returned by I a F, or by some other method suitable to your application. Note that some models can be linearized in several ways. The Gaussian-plus-d model can be linearized by setting d (the background) to a constant, or by setting b (the standard deviation) and c (the mean) to constants. To fit a model with constants substituted for some parameters, just store suitable values in those parameter variables, then omit them from the list of parameters when you answer the variables prompt. A last desperate step would be to use the general-purpose minimize function rather than fit. After all, both functions solve the problem of minimizing an expression (the χ2 sum)

Chapter 10: Algebra

281

by adjusting certain parameters in the expression. The a F command is able to use a vastly more efficient algorithm due to its special knowledge about linear chi-square sums, but the a N command can do the same thing by brute force. A compromise would be to pick out a few parameters without which the fit is linearizable, and use minimize on a call to fit which efficiently takes care of the rest of the parameters. The thing to be minimized would be the value of χ2 returned as the fifth result of the xfit function: minimize(xfit(gaus(a,b,c,d,x), x, [a,b,c], data)_5, d, guess)

where gaus represents the Gaussian model with background, data represents the data matrix, and guess represents the initial guess for d that minimize requires. This operation will only be, shall we say, extraordinarily slow rather than astronomically slow (as would be the case if minimize were used by itself to solve the problem). The I a F [xfit] command is somewhat trickier when nonlinear models are used. The second item in the result is the vector of “raw” parameters A, B, C. The covariance matrix is written in terms of those raw parameters. The fifth item is a vector of filter expressions. This is the empty vector ‘[]’ if the raw parameters were the same as the requested parameters, i.e., if A = a, B = b, and so on (which is always true if the model is already linear in the parameters as written, e.g., for polynomial fits). If the parameters had to be rearranged, the fifth item is instead a vector of one formula per parameter in the original model. The raw parameters are expressed in these “filter” formulas as ‘fitdummy(1)’ for A, ‘fitdummy(2)’ for B, and so on. When Calc needs to modify the model to return the result, it replaces ‘fitdummy(1)’ in all the filters with the first item in the raw parameters list, and so on for the other raw parameters, then evaluates the resulting filter formulas to get the actual parameter values to be substituted into the original model. In the case of H a F and I a F where the parameters must be error forms, Calc uses the square roots of the diagonal entries of the covariance matrix as error values for the raw parameters, then lets Calc’s standard error-form arithmetic take it from there. If you use I a F with a nonlinear model, be sure to remember that the covariance matrix is in terms of the raw parameters, not the actual requested parameters. It’s up to you to figure out how to interpret the covariances in the presence of nontrivial filter functions. Things are also complicated when the input contains error forms. Suppose there are three independent and dependent variables, x, y, and z, one or more of which are error forms in the data. Calc combines all the error values by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the errors. It then changes x and y to be plain numbers, and makes z into an error form with this combined error. The Y (x, y, z) part of the linearized model is evaluated, and the result should be an error form. The error part of that result is used for σi for the data point. If for some reason Y (x, y, z) does not return an error form, the combined error from z is used directly for σi . Finally, z is also stripped of its error for use in computing F (x, y, z), G(x, y, z) and so on; the righthand side of the linearized model is computed in regular arithmetic with no error forms. (While these rules may seem complicated, they are designed to do the most reasonable thing in the typical case that Y (x, y, z) depends only on the dependent variable z, and in fact is often simply equal to z. For common cases like polynomials and multilinear models, the combined error is simply used as the σ for the data point with no further ado.)

282

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

It may be the case that the model you wish to use is linearizable, but Calc’s built-in rules are unable to figure it out. Calc uses its algebraic rewrite mechanism to linearize a model. The rewrite rules are kept in the variable FitRules. You can edit this variable using the s e FitRules command; in fact, there is a special s F command just for editing FitRules. See Section 12.3 [Operations on Variables], page 323. See Section 10.11 [Rewrite Rules], page 289, for a discussion of rewrite rules. Calc uses FitRules as follows. First, it converts the model to an equation if necessary and encloses the model equation in a call to the function fitmodel (which is not actually a defined function in Calc; it is only used as a placeholder by the rewrite rules). Parameter variables are renamed to function calls ‘fitparam(1)’, ‘fitparam(2)’, and so on, and independent variables are renamed to ‘fitvar(1)’, ‘fitvar(2)’, etc. The dependent variable is the highest-numbered fitvar. For example, the power law model axb is converted to y = axb , then to fitmodel(fitvar(2) = fitparam(1) fitvar(1)^fitparam(2))

Calc then applies the rewrites as if by ‘C-u 0 a r FitRules’. (The zero prefix means that rewriting should continue until no further changes are possible.) When rewriting is complete, the fitmodel call should have been replaced by a fitsystem call that looks like this: fitsystem(Y, FGH, abc) where Y is a formula that describes the function Y (x, y, z), FGH is the vector of formulas [F (x, y, z), G(x, y, z), H(x, y, z)], and abc is the vector of parameter filters which refer to the raw parameters as ‘fitdummy(1)’ for A, ‘fitdummy(2)’ for B, etc. While the number of raw parameters (the length of the FGH vector) is usually the same as the number of original parameters (the length of the abc vector), this is not required. The power law model eventually boils down to fitsystem(ln(fitvar(2)), [1, ln(fitvar(1))], [exp(fitdummy(1)), fitdummy(2)])

The actual implementation of FitRules is complicated; it proceeds in four phases. First, common rearrangements are done to try to bring linear terms together and to isolate functions like exp and ln either all the way “out” (so that they can be put into Y ) or all the way “in” (so that they can be put into abc or FGH ). In particular, all non-constant powers are converted to logs-and-exponentials form, and the distributive law is used to expand products of sums. Quotients are rewritten to use the ‘fitinv’ function, where ‘fitinv(x)’ represents 1/x while the FitRules are operating. (The use of fitinv makes recognition of linear-looking forms easier.) If you modify FitRules, you will probably only need to modify the rules for this phase. Phase two, whose rules can actually also apply during phases one and three, first rewrites fitmodel to a two-argument form ‘fitmodel(Y, model)’, where Y is initially zero and model has been changed from a = b to a − b form. It then tries to peel off invertible functions from the outside of model and put them into Y instead, calling the equation solver to invert the functions. Finally, when this is no longer possible, the fitmodel is changed to a four-argument fitsystem, where the fourth argument is model and the FGH and abc vectors are initially empty. (The last vector is really ABC, corresponding to raw parameters, for now.)

Chapter 10: Algebra

283

Phase three converts a sum of items in the model to a sum of ‘fitpart(a, b, c)’ terms which represent terms ‘a*b*c’ of the sum, where a is all factors that do not involve any variables, b is all factors that involve only parameters, and c is the factors that involve only independent variables. (If this decomposition is not possible, the rule set will not complete and Calc will complain that the model is too complex.) Then fitparts with equal b or c components are merged back together using the distributive law in order to minimize the number of raw parameters needed. Phase four moves the fitpart terms into the FGH and ABC vectors. Also, some of the algebraic expansions that were done in phase 1 are undone now to make the formulas more computationally efficient. Finally, it calls the solver one more time to convert the ABC vector to an abc vector, and removes the fourth model argument (which by now will be zero) to obtain the three-argument fitsystem that the linear least-squares solver wants to see. Two functions which are useful in connection with FitRules are ‘hasfitparams(x)’ and ‘hasfitvars(x)’, which check whether x refers to any parameters or independent variables, respectively. Specifically, these functions return “true” if the argument contains any fitparam (or fitvar) function calls, and “false” otherwise. (Recall that “true” means a nonzero number, and “false” means zero. The actual nonzero number returned is the largest n from all the ‘fitparam(n)’s or ‘fitvar(n)’s, respectively, that appear in the formula.) The fit function in algebraic notation normally takes four arguments, ‘fit(model, vars, params, data)’, where model is the model formula as it would be typed after a F ’, vars is the independent variable or a vector of independent variables, params likewise gives the parameter(s), and data is the data matrix. Note that the length of vars must be equal to the number of rows in data if model is an equation, or one less than the number of rows if model is a plain formula. (Actually, a name for the dependent variable is allowed but will be ignored in the plain-formula case.) If params is omitted, the parameters are all variables in model except those that appear in vars. If vars is also omitted, Calc sorts all the variables that appear in model alphabetically and uses the higher ones for vars and the lower ones for params. Alternatively, ‘fit(modelvec, data)’ is allowed where modelvec is a 2- or 3-vector describing the model and variables, as discussed previously. If Calc is unable to do the fit, the fit function is left in symbolic form, ordinarily with an explanatory message. The message will be “Model expression is too complex” if the linearizer was unable to put the model into the required form. The efit (corresponding to H a F) and xfit (for I a F) functions are completely analogous.

10.8.6 Polynomial Interpolation The a p (calc-poly-interp) [polint] command does a polynomial interpolation at a particular x value. It takes two arguments from the stack: A data matrix of the sort used by a F, and a single number which represents the desired x value. Calc effectively does an exact polynomial fit as if by a F i, then substitutes the x value into the result in order to get an approximate y value based on the fit. (Calc does not actually use a F i, however; it uses a direct method which is both more efficient and more numerically stable.)

284

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The result of a p is actually a vector of two values: The y value approximation, and an error measure dy that reflects Calc’s estimation of the probable error of the approximation at that value of x. If the input x is equal to any of the x values in the data matrix, the output y will be the corresponding y value from the matrix, and the output dy will be exactly zero. A prefix argument of 2 causes a p to take separate x- and y-vectors from the stack instead of one data matrix. If x is a vector of numbers, a p will return a matrix of interpolated results for each of those x values. (The matrix will have two columns, the y values and the dy values.) If x is a formula instead of a number, the polint function remains in symbolic form; use the a " command to expand it out to a formula that describes the fit in symbolic terms. In all cases, the a p command leaves the data vectors or matrix on the stack. Only the x value is replaced by the result. The H a p [ratint] command does a rational function interpolation. It is used exactly like a p, except that it uses as its model the quotient of two polynomials. If there are N data points, the numerator and denominator polynomials will each have degree N/2 (if N is odd, the denominator will have degree one higher than the numerator). Rational approximations have the advantage that they can accurately describe functions that have poles (points at which the function’s value goes to infinity, so that the denominator polynomial of the approximation goes to zero). If x corresponds to a pole of the fitted rational function, then the result will be a division by zero. If Infinite mode is enabled, the result will be ‘[uinf, uinf]’. There is no way to get the actual coefficients of the rational function used by H a p. (The algorithm never generates these coefficients explicitly, and quotients of polynomials are beyond a F’s capabilities to fit.)

10.9 Summations The a + (calc-summation) [sum] command computes the sum of a formula over a certain range of index values. The formula is taken from the top of the stack; the command prompts for the name of the summation index variable, the lower limit of the sum (any formula), and the upper limit of the sum. If you enter a blank line at any of these prompts, that prompt and any later ones are answered by reading additional elements from the stack. Thus, ’ k^2 RET ’ k RET 1 RET 5 RET a + RET produces the result 55. 5 X

k 2 = 55

k=1

The choice of index variable is arbitrary, but it’s best not to use a variable with a stored value. In particular, while i is often a favorite index variable, it should be avoided in Calc because i has the imaginary constant (0, 1) as a value. If you pressed = on a sum over i, it would be changed to a nonsensical sum over the “variable” (0, 1)! If you really want to use i as an index variable, use s u i RET first to “unstore” this variable. (See Section 12.1 [Storing Variables], page 321.) A numeric prefix argument steps the index by that amount rather than by one. Thus ’ a_k RET C-u -2 a + k RET 10 RET 0 RET yields ‘a_10 + a_8 + a_6 + a_4 + a_2 + a_0’. A

Chapter 10: Algebra

285

prefix argument of plain C-u causes a + to prompt for the step value, in which case you can enter any formula or enter a blank line to take the step value from the stack. With the C-u prefix, a + can take up to five arguments from the stack: The formula, the variable, the lower limit, the upper limit, and (at the top of the stack), the step value. Calc knows how to do certain sums in closed form. For example, ‘sum(6 k^2, k, 1, n) = 2 n^3 + 3 n^2 + n’. In particular, this is possible if the formula being summed is polynomial or exponential in the index variable. Sums of logarithms are transformed into logarithms of products. Sums of trigonometric and hyperbolic functions are transformed to sums of exponentials and then done in closed form. Also, of course, sums in which the lower and upper limits are both numbers can always be evaluated just by grinding them out, although Calc will use closed forms whenever it can for the sake of efficiency. The notation for sums in algebraic formulas is ‘sum(expr, var, low, high, step)’. If step is omitted, it defaults to one. If high is omitted, low is actually the upper limit and the lower limit is one. If low is also omitted, the limits are ‘-inf’ and ‘inf’, respectively. Infinite sums can sometimes be evaluated: ‘sum(.5^k, k, 1, inf)’ returns 1. This is done by evaluating the sum in closed form (to ‘1. - 0.5^n’ in this case), then evaluating this formula with n set to inf. Calc’s usual rules for “infinite” arithmetic can find the answer from there. If infinite arithmetic yields a ‘nan’, or if the sum cannot be solved in closed form, Calc leaves the sum function in symbolic form. See Section 4.5 [Infinities], page 117. As a special feature, if the limits are infinite (or omitted, as described above) but the formula includes vectors subscripted by expressions that involve the iteration variable, Calc narrows the limits to include only the range of integers which result in valid subscripts for the vector. For example, the sum ‘sum(k [a,b,c,d,e,f,g]_(2k),k)’ evaluates to ‘b + 2 d + 3 f’. The limits of a sum do not need to be integers. For example, ‘sum(a_k, k, 0, 2 n, n)’ produces ‘a_0 + a_n + a_(2 n)’. Calc computes the number of iterations using the formula ‘1 + (high - low) / step’, which must, after algebraic simplification, evaluate to an integer. If the number of iterations according to the above formula does not come out to an integer, the sum is invalid and will be left in symbolic form. However, closed forms are still supplied, and you are on your honor not to misuse the resulting formulas by substituting mismatched bounds into them. For example, ‘sum(k, k, 1, 10, 2)’ is invalid, but Calc will go ahead and evaluate the closed form solution for the limits 1 and 10 to get the rather dubious answer, 29.25. If the lower limit is greater than the upper limit (assuming a positive step size), the result is generally zero. However, Calc only guarantees a zero result when the upper limit is exactly one step less than the lower limit, i.e., if the number of iterations is −1. Thus ‘sum(f(k), k, n, n-1)’ is zero but the sum from ‘n’ to ‘n-2’ may report a nonzero value if Calc used a closed form solution. Calc’s logical predicates like a < b return 1 for “true” and 0 for “false.” See Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286. This can be used to advantage for building conditional sums. For example, ‘sum(prime(k)*k^2, k, 1, 20)’ is the sum of the squares of all prime numbers from 1 to 20; the prime predicate returns 1 if its argument is prime and 0 otherwise. You can read this expression as “the sum of k 2 , where k is prime.” Indeed, ‘sum(prime(k)*k^2,

286

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

k)’ would represent the sum of all primes squared, since the limits default to plus and minus infinity, but there are no such sums that Calc’s built-in rules can do in closed form. As another example, ‘sum((k != k_0) * f(k), k, 1, n)’ is the sum of f (k) for all k from 1 to n, excluding one value k0 . Slightly more tricky is the summand ‘(k != k_0) / (k - k_0)’, which is an attempt to describe the sum of all 1/(k − k0 ) except at k = k0 , where this would be a division by zero. But at k = k0 , this formula works out to the indeterminate form 0/0, which Calc will not assume is zero. Better would be to use ‘(k != k_0) ? 1/(k-k_0) : 0’; the ‘? :’ operator does an “if-then-else” test: This expression says, “if k 6= k0 , then 1/(k − k0 ), else zero.” Now the formula 1/(k − k0 ) will not even be evaluated by Calc when k = k0 . The a - (calc-alt-summation) [asum] command computes an alternating sum. Successive terms of the sequence are given alternating signs, with the first term (corresponding to the lower index value) being positive. Alternating sums are converted to normal sums with an extra term of the form ‘(-1)^(k-low)’. This formula is adjusted appropriately if the step value is other than one. For example, the Taylor series for the sine function is ‘asum(x^k / k!, k, 1, inf, 2)’. (Calc cannot evaluate this infinite series, but it can approximate it if you replace inf with any particular odd number.) Calc converts this series to a regular sum with a step of one, namely ‘sum((-1)^k x^(2k+1) / (2k+1)!, k, 0, inf)’. The a * (calc-product) [prod] command is the analogous way to take a product of many terms. Calc also knows some closed forms for products, such as ‘prod(k, k, 1, n) = n!’. Conditional products can be written ‘prod(k^prime(k), k, 1, n)’ or ‘prod(prime(k) ? k : 1, k, 1, n)’. The a T (calc-tabulate) [table] command evaluates a formula at a series of iterated index values, just like sum and prod, but its result is simply a vector of the results. For example, ‘table(a_i, i, 1, 7, 2)’ produces ‘[a_1, a_3, a_5, a_7]’.

10.10 Logical Operations The following commands and algebraic functions return true/false values, where 1 represents “true” and 0 represents “false.” In cases where a truth value is required (such as for the condition part of a rewrite rule, or as the condition for a Z [ Z ] control structure), any nonzero value is accepted to mean “true.” (Specifically, anything for which dnonzero returns 1 is “true,” and anything for which dnonzero returns 0 or cannot decide is assumed “false.” Note that this means that Z [ Z ] will execute the “then” portion if its condition is provably true, but it will execute the “else” portion for any condition like a = b that is not provably true, even if it might be true. Algebraic functions that have conditions as arguments, like ? : and &&, remain unevaluated if the condition is neither provably true nor provably false. See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141.) The a = (calc-equal-to) command, or ‘eq(a,b)’ function (which can also be written ‘a = b’ or ‘a == b’ in an algebraic formula) is true if a and b are equal, either because they are identical expressions, or because they are numbers which are numerically equal. (Thus the integer 1 is considered equal to the float 1.0.) If the equality of a and b cannot be determined, the comparison is left in symbolic form. Note that as a command, this operation pops two values from the stack and pushes back either a 1 or a 0, or a formula ‘a = b’ if the values’ equality cannot be determined.

Chapter 10: Algebra

287

Many Calc commands use ‘=’ formulas to represent equations. For example, the a S (calc-solve-for) command rearranges an equation to solve for a given variable. The a M (calc-map-equation) command can be used to apply any function to both sides of an equation; for example, 2 a M * multiplies both sides of the equation by two. Note that just 2 * would not do the same thing; it would produce the formula ‘2 (a = b)’ which represents 2 if the equality is true or zero if not. The eq function with more than two arguments (e.g., C-u 3 a = or ‘a = b = c’) tests if all of its arguments are equal. In algebraic notation, the ‘=’ operator is unusual in that it is neither left- nor right-associative: ‘a = b = c’ is not the same as ‘(a = b) = c’ or ‘a = (b = c)’ (which each compare one variable with the 1 or 0 that results from comparing two other variables). The a # (calc-not-equal-to) command, or ‘neq(a,b)’ or ‘a != b’ function, is true if a and b are not equal. This also works with more than two arguments; ‘a != b != c != d’ tests that all four of a, b, c, and d are distinct numbers. The a < (calc-less-than) [‘lt(a,b)’ or ‘a < b’] operation is true if a is less than b. Similar functions are a > (calc-greater-than) [‘gt(a,b)’ or ‘a > b’], a [ (calc-lessequal) [‘leq(a,b)’ or ‘a = b’]. While the inequality functions like lt do not accept more than two arguments, the syntax ‘a ’ (evaluates-to) operators, always taking the lefthand side. The a & (calc-logical-and) [‘land(a,b)’ or ‘a && b’] function is true if both of its arguments are true, i.e., are non-zero numbers. In this case, the result will be either a or b, chosen arbitrarily. If either argument is zero, the result is zero. Otherwise, the formula is left in symbolic form. The a | (calc-logical-or) [‘lor(a,b)’ or ‘a || b’] function is true if either or both of its arguments are true (nonzero). The result is whichever argument was nonzero, choosing arbitrarily if both are nonzero. If both a and b are zero, the result is zero. The a ! (calc-logical-not) [‘lnot(a)’ or ‘! a’] function is true if a is false (zero), or false if a is true (nonzero). It is left in symbolic form if a is not a number. The a : (calc-logical-if) [‘if(a,b,c)’ or ‘a ? b : c’] function is equal to either b or c if a is a nonzero number or zero, respectively. If a is not a number, the test is left in symbolic form and neither b nor c is evaluated in any way. In algebraic formulas, this is one of the few Calc functions whose arguments are not automatically evaluated when the function itself is evaluated. The others are lambda, quote, and condition.

288

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

One minor surprise to watch out for is that the formula ‘a?3:4’ will not work because the ‘3:4’ is parsed as a fraction instead of as three separate symbols. Type something like ‘a ? 3 : 4’ or ‘a?(3):4’ instead. As a special case, if a evaluates to a vector, then both b and c are evaluated; the result is a vector of the same length as a whose elements are chosen from corresponding elements of b and c according to whether each element of a is zero or nonzero. Each of b and c must be either a vector of the same length as a, or a non-vector which is matched with all elements of a. The a { (calc-in-set) [‘in(a,b)’] function is true if the number a is in the set of numbers represented by b. If b is an interval form, a must be one of the values encompassed by the interval. If b is a vector, a must be equal to one of the elements of the vector. (If any vector elements are intervals, a must be in any of the intervals.) If b is a plain number, a must be numerically equal to b. See Section 9.6 [Set Operations], page 227, for a group of commands that manipulate sets of this sort. The ‘typeof(a)’ function produces an integer or variable which characterizes a. If a is a number, vector, or variable, the result will be one of the following numbers: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 100 101 102

Integer Fraction Floating-point number HMS form Rectangular complex number Polar complex number Error form Interval form Modulo form Date-only form Date/time form Infinity (inf, uinf, or nan) Variable Vector (but not a matrix) Matrix

Otherwise, a is a formula, and the result is a variable which represents the name of the top-level function call. The ‘integer(a)’ function returns true if a is an integer. The ‘real(a)’ function is true if a is a real number, either integer, fraction, or float. The ‘constant(a)’ function returns true if a is any of the objects for which typeof would produce an integer code result except for variables, and provided that the components of an object like a vector or error form are themselves constant. Note that infinities do not satisfy any of these tests, nor do special constants like pi and e. See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141, for a set of similar functions that recognize formulas as well as actual numbers. For example, ‘dint(floor(x))’ is true because ‘floor(x)’ is provably integer-valued, but ‘integer(floor(x))’ does not because ‘floor(x)’ is not literally an integer constant. The ‘refers(a,b)’ function is true if the variable (or sub-expression) b appears in a, or false otherwise. Unlike the other tests described here, this function returns a definite “no”

Chapter 10: Algebra

289

answer even if its arguments are still in symbolic form. The only case where refers will be left unevaluated is if a is a plain variable (different from b). The ‘negative(a)’ function returns true if a “looks” negative, because it is a negative number, because it is of the form −x, or because it is a product or quotient with a term that looks negative. This is most useful in rewrite rules. Beware that ‘negative(a)’ evaluates to 1 or 0 for any argument a, so it can only be stored in a formula if the default simplifications are turned off first with m O (or if it appears in an unevaluated context such as a rewrite rule condition). The ‘variable(a)’ function is true if a is a variable, or false if not. If a is a function call, this test is left in symbolic form. Built-in variables like pi and inf are considered variables like any others by this test. The ‘nonvar(a)’ function is true if a is a non-variable. If its argument is a variable it is left unsimplified; it never actually returns zero. However, since Calc’s condition-testing commands consider “false” anything not provably true, this is often good enough. The functions lin, linnt, islin, and islinnt check if an expression is “linear,” i.e., can be written in the form a+bx for some constants a and b, and some variable or subformula x. The function ‘islin(f,x)’ checks if formula f is linear in x, returning 1 if so. For example, ‘islin(x,x)’, ‘islin(-x,x)’, ‘islin(3,x)’, and ‘islin(x y / 3 - 2, x)’ all return 1. The ‘lin(f,x)’ function is similar, except that instead of returning 1 it returns the vector [a, b, x]. For the above examples, this vector would be [0, 1, x], [0, −1, x], [3, 0, x], and [−2, y/3, x], respectively. Both lin and islin generally remain unevaluated for expressions which are not linear, e.g., ‘lin(2 x^2, x)’ and ‘lin(sin(x), x)’. The second argument can also be a formula; ‘islin(2 + 3 sin(x), sin(x))’ returns true. The linnt and islinnt functions perform a similar check, but require a “non-trivial” linear form, which means that the b coefficient must be non-zero. For example, ‘lin(2,x)’ returns [2, 0, x] and ‘lin(y,x)’ returns [y, 0, x], but ‘linnt(2,x)’ and ‘linnt(y,x)’ are left unevaluated (in other words, these formulas are considered to be only “trivially” linear in x). All four linearity-testing functions allow you to omit the second argument, in which case the input may be linear in any non-constant formula. Here, the a = 0, b = 1 case is also considered trivial, and only constant values for a and b are recognized. Thus, ‘lin(2 x y)’ returns [0, 2, xy], ‘lin(2 - x y)’ returns [2, −1, xy], and ‘lin(x y)’ returns [0, 1, xy]. The linnt function would allow the first two cases but not the third. Also, neither lin nor linnt accept plain constants as linear in the one-argument case: ‘islin(2,x)’ is true, but ‘islin(2)’ is false. The ‘istrue(a)’ function returns 1 if a is a nonzero number or provably nonzero formula, or 0 if a is anything else. Calls to istrue can only be manipulated if m O mode is used to make sure they are not evaluated prematurely. (Note that declarations are used when deciding whether a formula is true; istrue returns 1 when dnonzero would return 1, and it returns 0 when dnonzero would return 0 or leave itself in symbolic form.)

10.11 Rewrite Rules The a r (calc-rewrite) [rewrite] command makes substitutions in a formula according to a specified pattern or patterns known as rewrite rules. Whereas a b (calc-substitute) matches literally, so that substituting ‘sin(x)’ with ‘cos(x)’ matches only the sin function

290

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

applied to the variable x, rewrite rules match general kinds of formulas; rewriting using the rule ‘sin(x) := cos(x)’ matches sin of any argument and replaces it with cos of that same argument. The only significance of the name x is that the same name is used on both sides of the rule. Rewrite rules rearrange formulas already in Calc’s memory. See Section 6.8.11 [Syntax Tables], page 172, to read about syntax rules, which are similar to algebraic rewrite rules but operate when new algebraic entries are being parsed, converting strings of characters into Calc formulas.

10.11.1 Entering Rewrite Rules Rewrite rules normally use the “assignment” operator ‘old := new’. This operator is equivalent to the function call ‘assign(old, new)’. The assign function is undefined by itself in Calc, so an assignment formula such as a rewrite rule will be left alone by ordinary Calc commands. But certain commands, like the rewrite system, interpret assignments in special ways. For example, the rule ‘sin(x)^2 := 1-cos(x)^2’ says to replace every occurrence of the sine of something, squared, with one minus the square of the cosine of that same thing. All by itself as a formula on the stack it does nothing, but when given to the a r command it turns that command into a sine-squared-to-cosine-squared converter. To specify a set of rules to be applied all at once, make a vector of rules. When a r prompts you to enter the rewrite rules, you can answer in several ways: 1. With a rule: f(x) := g(x) RET. 2. With a vector of rules: [f1(x) := g1(x), f2(x) := g2(x)] RET. (You can omit the enclosing square brackets if you wish.) 3. With the name of a variable that contains the rule or rules vector: myrules RET. 4. With any formula except a rule, a vector, or a variable name; this will be interpreted as the old half of a rewrite rule, and you will be prompted a second time for the new half: f(x) RET g(x) RET. 5. With a blank line, in which case the rule, rules vector, or variable will be taken from the top of the stack (and the formula to be rewritten will come from the second-to-top position). If you enter the rules directly (as opposed to using rules stored in a variable), those rules will be put into the Trail so that you can retrieve them later. See Section 5.3 [Trail Commands], page 133. It is most convenient to store rules you use often in a variable and invoke them by giving the variable name. The s e (calc-edit-variable) command is an easy way to create or edit a rule set stored in a variable. You may also wish to use s p (calc-permanentvariable) to save your rules permanently; see Section 12.3 [Operations on Variables], page 323. Rewrite rules are compiled into a special internal form for faster matching. If you enter a rule set directly it must be recompiled every time. If you store the rules in a variable and refer to them through that variable, they will be compiled once and saved away along with the variable for later reference. This is another good reason to store your rules in a variable.

Chapter 10: Algebra

291

Calc also accepts an obsolete notation for rules, as vectors ‘[old, new]’. But because it is easily confused with a vector of two rules, the use of this notation is no longer recommended.

10.11.2 Basic Rewrite Rules To match a particular formula x with a particular rewrite rule ‘old := new’, Calc compares the structure of x with the structure of old. Variables that appear in old are treated as meta-variables; the corresponding positions in x may contain any sub-formulas. For example, the pattern ‘f(x,y)’ would match the expression ‘f(12, a+1)’ with the metavariable ‘x’ corresponding to 12 and with ‘y’ corresponding to ‘a+1’. However, this pattern would not match ‘f(12)’ or ‘g(12, a+1)’, since there is no assignment of the meta-variables that will make the pattern match these expressions. Notice that if the pattern is a single meta-variable, it will match any expression. If a given meta-variable appears more than once in old, the corresponding sub-formulas of x must be identical. Thus the pattern ‘f(x,x)’ would match ‘f(12, 12)’ and ‘f(a+1, a+1)’ but not ‘f(12, a+1)’ or ‘f(a+b, b+a)’. (See Section 10.11.3 [Conditional Rewrite Rules], page 291, for a way to match the latter.) Things other than variables must match exactly between the pattern and the target formula. To match a particular variable exactly, use the pseudo-function ‘quote(v)’ in the pattern. For example, the pattern ‘x+quote(y)’ matches ‘x+y’, ‘2+y’, or ‘sin(a)+y’. The special variable names ‘e’, ‘pi’, ‘i’, ‘phi’, ‘gamma’, ‘inf’, ‘uinf’, and ‘nan’ always match literally. Thus the pattern ‘sin(d + e + f)’ acts exactly like ‘sin(d + quote(e) + f)’. If the old pattern is found to match a given formula, that formula is replaced by new, where any occurrences in new of meta-variables from the pattern are replaced with the sub-formulas that they matched. Thus, applying the rule ‘f(x,y) := g(y+x,x)’ to ‘f(12, a+1)’ would produce ‘g(a+13, 12)’. The normal a r command applies rewrite rules over and over throughout the target formula until no further changes are possible (up to a limit of 100 times). Use C-u 1 a r to make only one change at a time.

10.11.3 Conditional Rewrite Rules A rewrite rule can also be conditional, written in the form ‘old := new :: cond’. (There is also the obsolete form ‘[old, new, cond]’.) If a cond part is present in the rule, this is an additional condition that must be satisfied before the rule is accepted. Once old has been successfully matched to the target expression, cond is evaluated (with all the meta-variables substituted for the values they matched) and simplified with Calc’s algebraic simplifications. If the result is a nonzero number or any other object known to be nonzero (see Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141), the rule is accepted. If the result is zero or if it is a symbolic formula that is not known to be nonzero, the rule is rejected. See Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286, for a number of functions that return 1 or 0 according to the results of various tests. For example, the formula ‘n > 0’ simplifies to 1 or 0 if n is replaced by a positive or nonpositive number, respectively (or if n has been declared to be positive or nonpositive). Thus, the rule ‘f(x,y) := g(y+x,x) :: x+y > 0’ would apply to ‘f(0, 4)’ but not to ‘f(-3, 2)’ or ‘f(12, a+1)’ (assuming no outstanding declarations for a). In the case of ‘f(-3, 2)’,

292

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

the condition can be shown not to be satisfied; in the case of ‘f(12, a+1)’, the condition merely cannot be shown to be satisfied, but that is enough to reject the rule. While Calc will use declarations to reason about variables in the formula being rewritten, declarations do not apply to meta-variables. For example, the rule ‘f(a) := g(a+1)’ will match for any values of ‘a’, such as complex numbers, vectors, or formulas, even if ‘a’ has been declared to be real or scalar. If you want the meta-variable ‘a’ to match only literal real numbers, use ‘f(a) := g(a+1) :: real(a)’. If you want ‘a’ to match only reals and formulas which are provably real, use ‘dreal(a)’ as the condition. The ‘::’ operator is a shorthand for the condition function; ‘old := new :: cond’ is equivalent to the formula ‘condition(assign(old, new), cond)’. If you have several conditions, you can use ‘... :: c1 :: c2 :: c3’ or ‘... :: c1 && c2 && c3’. The two are entirely equivalent. It is also possible to embed conditions inside the pattern: ‘f(x :: x>0, y) := g(y+x, x)’. This is purely a notational convenience, though; where a condition appears in a rule has no effect on when it is tested. The rewrite-rule compiler automatically decides when it is best to test each condition while a rule is being matched. Certain conditions are handled as special cases by the rewrite rule system and are tested very efficiently: Where x is any meta-variable, these conditions are ‘integer(x)’, ‘real(x)’, ‘constant(x)’, ‘negative(x)’, ‘x >= y’ where y is either a constant or another meta-variable and ‘>=’ may be replaced by any of the six relational operators, and ‘x % a = b’ where a and b are constants. Other conditions, like ‘x >= y+1’ or ‘dreal(x)’, will be less efficient to check since Calc must bring the whole evaluator and simplifier into play. An interesting property of ‘::’ is that neither of its arguments will be touched by Calc’s default simplifications. This is important because conditions often are expressions that cannot safely be evaluated early. For example, the typeof function never remains in symbolic form; entering ‘typeof(a)’ will put the number 100 (the type code for variables like ‘a’) on the stack. But putting the condition ‘... :: typeof(a) = 6’ on the stack is safe since ‘::’ prevents the typeof from being evaluated until the condition is actually used by the rewrite system. Since ‘::’ protects its lefthand side, too, you can use a dummy condition to protect a rule that must itself not evaluate early. For example, it’s not safe to put ‘a(f,x) := apply(f, [x])’ on the stack because it will immediately evaluate to ‘a(f,x) := f(x)’, where the meta-variable-ness of f on the righthand side has been lost. But ‘a(f,x) := apply(f, [x]) :: 1’ is safe, and of course the condition ‘1’ is always true (nonzero) so it has no effect on the functioning of the rule. (The rewrite compiler will ensure that it doesn’t even impact the speed of matching the rule.)

10.11.4 Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules The rewrite mechanism understands the algebraic properties of functions like ‘+’ and ‘*’. In particular, pattern matching takes the associativity and commutativity of the following functions into account: + - *

= !=

&& ||

and or xor

For example, the rewrite rule: a x + b x := (a + b) x will match formulas of the form,

vint vunion vxor

gcd lcm

max min

beta

Chapter 10: Algebra

a x + b x,

293

x a + x b,

a x + x b,

x a + b x

Rewrites also understand the relationship between the ‘+’ and ‘-’ operators. The above rewrite rule will also match the formulas, a x - b x,

x a - x b,

a x - x b,

x a - b x

by matching ‘b’ in the pattern to ‘-b’ from the formula. Applied to a sum of many terms like ‘r + a x + s + b x + t’, this pattern will check all pairs of terms for possible matches. The rewrite will take whichever suitable pair it discovers first. In general, a pattern using an associative operator like ‘a + b’ will try 2 n different ways to match a sum of n terms like ‘x + y + z - w’. First, ‘a’ is matched against each of ‘x’, ‘y’, ‘z’, and ‘-w’ in turn, with ‘b’ being matched to the remainders ‘y + z - w’, ‘x + z - w’, etc. If none of these succeed, then ‘b’ is matched against each of the four terms with ‘a’ matching the remainder. Half-and-half matches, like ‘(x + y) + (z - w)’, are not tried. Note that ‘*’ is not commutative when applied to matrices, but rewrite rules pretend that it is. If you type m v to enable Matrix mode (see Section 6.4.6 [Matrix Mode], page 139), rewrite rules will match ‘*’ literally, ignoring its usual commutativity property. (In the current implementation, the associativity also vanishes—it is as if the pattern had been enclosed in a plain marker; see below.) If you are applying rewrites to formulas with matrices, it’s best to enable Matrix mode first to prevent algebraically incorrect rewrites from occurring. The pattern ‘-x’ will actually match any expression. For example, the rule f(-x)

-f(x)

will rewrite ‘f(a)’ to ‘-f(-a)’. To avoid this, either use a plain marker as described below, or add a ‘negative(x)’ condition. The negative function is true if its argument “looks” negative, for example, because it is a negative number or because it is a formula like ‘-x’. The new rule using this condition is: f(x) := -f(-x) f(-x) := -f(x)

:: negative(x) :: negative(-x)

or, equivalently,

In the same way, the pattern ‘x - y’ will match the sum ‘a + b’ by matching ‘y’ to ‘-b’. The pattern ‘a b’ will also match the formula ‘x/y’ if ‘y’ is a number. Thus the rule ‘a x + b x := (a+b) x’ will also convert ‘a x + x / 2’ to ‘(a + 0.5) x’ (or ‘(a + 1:2) x’, depending on the current fraction mode). Calc will not take other liberties with ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’. For example, the pattern ‘f(a b)’ will not match ‘f(x^2)’, and ‘f(a + b)’ will not match ‘f(2 x)’, even though conceivably these patterns could match with ‘a = b = x’. Nor will ‘f(a b)’ match ‘f(x / y)’ if ‘y’ is not a constant, even though it could be considered to match with ‘a = x’ and ‘b = 1/y’. The reasons are partly for efficiency, and partly because while few mathematical operations are substantively different for addition and subtraction, often it is preferable to treat the cases of multiplication, division, and integer powers separately. Even more subtle is the rule set [ f(a) + f(b) := f(a + b),

-f(a) := f(-a) ]

attempting to match ‘f(x) - f(y)’. You might think that Calc will view this subtraction as ‘f(x) + (-f(y))’ and then apply the above two rules in turn, but actually this will not work

294

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

because Calc only does this when considering rules for ‘+’ (like the first rule in this set). So it will see first that ‘f(x) + (-f(y))’ does not match ‘f(a) + f(b)’ for any assignments of the meta-variables, and then it will see that ‘f(x) - f(y)’ does not match ‘-f(a)’ for any assignment of ‘a’. Because Calc tries only one rule at a time, it will not be able to rewrite ‘f(x) - f(y)’ with this rule set. An explicit ‘f(a) - f(b)’ rule will have to be added. Another thing patterns will not do is break up complex numbers. The pattern ‘myconj(a + b i) := a - b i’ will work for formulas involving the special constant ‘i’ (such as ‘3 - 4 i’), but it will not match actual complex numbers like ‘(3, -4)’. A version of the above rule for complex numbers would be myconj(a)

re(a) - im(a) (0,1)

:: im(a) != 0

(Because the re and im functions understand the properties of the special constant ‘i’, this rule will also work for ‘3 - 4 i’. In fact, this particular rule would probably be better without the ‘im(a) != 0’ condition, since if ‘im(a) = 0’ the righthand side of the rule will still give the correct answer for the conjugate of a real number.) It is also possible to specify optional arguments in patterns. The rule opt(a) x + opt(b) (x^opt(c) + opt(d))

f(a, b, c, d)

will match the formula 5 (x^2 - 4) + 3 x in a fairly straightforward manner, but it will also match reduced formulas like x + x^2,

2(x + 1) - x,

x + x

producing, respectively, f(1, 1, 2, 0),

f(-1, 2, 1, 1),

f(1, 1, 1, 0)

(The latter two formulas can be entered only if default simplifications have been turned off with m O.) The default value for a term of a sum is zero. The default value for a part of a product, for a power, or for the denominator of a quotient, is one. Also, ‘-x’ matches the pattern ‘opt(a) b’ with ‘a = -1’. In particular, the distributive-law rule can be refined to opt(a) x + opt(b) x

(a + b) x

so that it will convert, e.g., ‘a x - x’, to ‘(a - 1) x’. The pattern ‘opt(a) + opt(b) x’ matches almost any formulas which are linear in ‘x’. You can also use the lin and islin functions with rewrite conditions to test for this; see Section 10.10 [Logical Operations], page 286. These functions are not as convenient to use in rewrite rules, but they recognize more kinds of formulas as linear: ‘x/z’ is considered linear with b = 1/z by lin, but it will not match the above pattern because that pattern calls for a multiplication, not a division. As another example, the obvious rule to replace ‘sin(x)^2 + cos(x)^2’ by 1, sin(x)^2 + cos(x)^2

misses many cases because the sine and cosine may both be multiplied by an equal factor. Here’s a more successful rule:

Chapter 10: Algebra

295

opt(a) sin(x)^2 + opt(a) cos(x)^2 := a Note that this rule will not match ‘sin(x)^2 + 6 cos(x)^2’ because one a would have “matched” 1 while the other matched 6. Calc automatically converts a rule like f(x-1, x) := g(x) into the form f(temp, x) := g(x) :: temp = x-1 (where temp stands for a new, invented meta-variable that doesn’t actually have a name). This modified rule will successfully match ‘f(6, 7)’, binding ‘temp’ and ‘x’ to 6 and 7, respectively, then verifying that they differ by one even though ‘6’ does not superficially look like ‘x-1’. However, Calc does not solve equations to interpret a rule. The following rule, f(x-1, x+1) := g(x) will not work. That is, it will match ‘f(a - 1 + b, a + 1 + b)’ but not ‘f(6, 8)’. Calc always interprets at least one occurrence of a variable by literal matching. If the variable appears “isolated” then Calc is smart enough to use it for literal matching. But in this last example, Calc is forced to rewrite the rule to ‘f(x-1, temp) := g(x) :: temp = x+1’ where the ‘x-1’ term must correspond to an actual “something-minus-one” in the target formula. A successful way to write this would be ‘f(x, x+2) := g(x+1)’. You could make this resemble the original form more closely by using let notation, which is described in the next section: f(xm1, x+1) := g(x) :: let(x := xm1+1) Calc does this rewriting or “conditionalizing” for any sub-pattern which involves only the functions in the following list, operating only on constants and meta-variables which have already been matched elsewhere in the pattern. When matching a function call, Calc is careful to match arguments which are plain variables before arguments which are calls to any of the functions below, so that a pattern like ‘f(x-1, x)’ can be conditionalized even though the isolated ‘x’ comes after the ‘x-1’. + - * / \ % ^ abs sign max min re im conj arg

round rounde roundu trunc floor ceil

You can suppress all of the special treatments described in this section by surrounding a function call with a plain marker. This marker causes the function call which is its argument to be matched literally, without regard to commutativity, associativity, negation, or conditionalization. When you use plain, the “deep structure” of the formula being matched can show through. For example, plain(a - a b) := f(a, b) will match only literal subtractions. However, the plain marker does not affect its arguments’ arguments. In this case, commutativity and associativity is still considered while matching the ‘a b’ sub-pattern, so the whole pattern will match ‘x - y x’ as well as ‘x - x y’. We could go still further and use plain(a - plain(a b)) := f(a, b) which would do a completely strict match for the pattern. By contrast, the quote marker means that not only the function name but also the arguments must be literally the same. The above pattern will match ‘x - x y’ but

296

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

quote(a - a b) := f(a, b) will match only the single formula ‘a - a b’. Also, quote(a - quote(a b)) := f(a, b) will match only ‘a - quote(a b)’—probably not the desired effect! A certain amount of algebra is also done when substituting the meta-variables on the righthand side of a rule. For example, in the rule a + f(b) := f(a + b) matching ‘f(x) - y’ would produce ‘f((-y) + x)’ if taken literally, but the rewrite mechanism will simplify the righthand side to ‘f(x - y)’ automatically. (Of course, the default simplifications would do this anyway, so this special simplification is only noticeable if you have turned the default simplifications off.) This rewriting is done only when a metavariable expands to a “negative-looking” expression. If this simplification is not desirable, you can use a plain marker on the righthand side: a + f(b) := f(plain(a + b)) In this example, we are still allowing the pattern-matcher to use all the algebra it can muster, but the righthand side will always simplify to a literal addition like ‘f((-y) + x)’.

10.11.5 Other Features of Rewrite Rules Certain “function names” serve as markers in rewrite rules. Here is a complete list of these markers. First are listed the markers that work inside a pattern; then come the markers that work in the righthand side of a rule. One kind of marker, ‘import(x)’, takes the place of a whole rule. Here x is the name of a variable containing another rule set; those rules are “spliced into” the rule set that imports them. For example, if ‘[f(a+b) := f(a) + f(b), f(a b) := a f(b) :: real(a)]’ is stored in variable ‘linearF’, then the rule set ‘[f(0) := 0, import(linearF)]’ will apply all three rules. It is possible to modify the imported rules slightly: ‘import(x, v1, x1, v2, x2, ...)’ imports the rule set x with all occurrences of v1 , as either a variable name or a function name, replaced with x1 and so on. (If v1 is used as a function name, then x1 must be either a function name itself or a ‘< >’ nameless function; see Section 9.8.1 [Specifying Operators], page 233.) For example, ‘[g(0) := 0, import(linearF, f, g)]’ applies the linearity rules to the function ‘g’ instead of ‘f’. Imports can be nested, but the import-with-renaming feature may fail to rename sub-imports properly. The special functions allowed in patterns are: ‘quote(x)’ This pattern matches exactly x; variable names in x are not interpreted as metavariables. The only flexibility is that numbers are compared for numeric equality, so that the pattern ‘f(quote(12))’ will match both ‘f(12)’ and ‘f(12.0)’. (Numbers are always treated this way by the rewrite mechanism: The rule ‘f(x,x) := g(x)’ will match ‘f(12, 12.0)’. The rewrite may produce either ‘g(12)’ or ‘g(12.0)’ as a result in this case.) ‘plain(x)’ Here x must be a function call ‘f(x1,x2,...)’. This pattern matches a call to function f with the specified argument patterns. No special knowledge of the properties of the function f is used in this case; ‘+’ is not commutative or

Chapter 10: Algebra

297

associative. Unlike quote, the arguments ‘x1,x2,...’ are treated as patterns. If you wish them to be treated “plainly” as well, you must enclose them with more plain markers: ‘plain(plain(-a) + plain(b c))’. ‘opt(x,def)’ Here x must be a variable name. This must appear as an argument to a function or an element of a vector; it specifies that the argument or element is optional. As an argument to ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘&&’, or ‘||’, or as the second argument to ‘/’ or ‘^’, the value def may be omitted. The pattern ‘x + opt(y)’ matches a sum by binding one summand to x and the other to y, and it matches anything else by binding the whole expression to x and zero to y. The other operators above work similarly. For general miscellaneous functions, the default value def must be specified. Optional arguments are dropped starting with the rightmost one during matching. For example, the pattern ‘f(opt(a,0), b, opt(c,b))’ will match ‘f(b)’, ‘f(a,b)’, or ‘f(a,b,c)’. Default values of zero and b are supplied in this example for the omitted arguments. Note that the literal variable b will be the default in the latter case, not the value that matched the meta-variable b. In other words, the default def is effectively quoted. ‘condition(x,c)’ This matches the pattern x, with the attached condition c. It is the same as ‘x :: c’. ‘pand(x,y)’ This matches anything that matches both pattern x and pattern y. It is the same as ‘x &&& y’. see Section 10.11.6 [Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules], page 301. ‘por(x,y)’ This matches anything that matches either pattern x or pattern y. It is the same as ‘x ||| y’. ‘pnot(x)’

This matches anything that does not match pattern x. It is the same as ‘!!! x’.

‘cons(h,t)’ This matches any vector of one or more elements. The first element is matched to h; a vector of the remaining elements is matched to t. Note that vectors of fixed length can also be matched as actual vectors: The rule ‘cons(a,cons(b,[])) := cons(a+b,[])’ is equivalent to the rule ‘[a,b] := [a+b]’. ‘rcons(t,h)’ This is like cons, except that the last element is matched to h, with the remaining elements matched to t. ‘apply(f,args)’ This matches any function call. The name of the function, in the form of a variable, is matched to f . The arguments of the function, as a vector of zero or more objects, are matched to ‘args’. Constants, variables, and vectors do not match an apply pattern. For example, ‘apply(f,x)’ matches

298

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

any function call, ‘apply(quote(f),x)’ matches any call to the function ‘f’, ‘apply(f,[a,b])’ matches any function call with exactly two arguments, and ‘apply(quote(f), cons(a,cons(b,x)))’ matches any call to the function ‘f’ with two or more arguments. Another way to implement the latter, if the rest of the rule does not need to refer to the first two arguments of ‘f’ by name, would be ‘apply(quote(f), x :: vlen(x) >= 2)’. Here’s a more interesting sample use of apply: apply(f,[x+n]) := n + apply(f,[x]) :: in(f, [floor,ceil,round,trunc]) :: integer(n) Note, however, that this will be slower to match than a rule set with four separate rules. The reason is that Calc sorts the rules of a rule set according to top-level function name; if the top-level function is apply, Calc must try the rule for every single formula and sub-formula. If the top-level function in the pattern is, say, floor, then Calc invokes the rule only for sub-formulas which are calls to floor. Formulas normally written with operators like + are still considered function calls: apply(f,x) matches ‘a+b’ with ‘f = add’, ‘x = [a,b]’. You must use apply for meta-variables with function names on both sides of a rewrite rule: ‘apply(f, [x]) := f(x+1)’ is not correct, because it rewrites ‘spam(6)’ into ‘f(7)’. The righthand side should be ‘apply(f, [x+1])’. Also note that you will have to use No-Simplify mode (m O) when entering this rule so that the apply isn’t evaluated immediately to get the new rule ‘f(x) := f(x+1)’. Or, use s e to enter the rule without going through the stack, or enter the rule as ‘apply(f, [x]) := apply(f, [x+1]) :: 1’. See Section 10.11.3 [Conditional Rewrite Rules], page 291. ‘select(x)’ This is used for applying rules to formulas with selections; see Section 10.11.9 [Selections with Rewrite Rules], page 305. Special functions for the righthand sides of rules are: ‘quote(x)’ The notation ‘quote(x)’ is changed to ‘x’ when the righthand side is used. As far as the rewrite rule is concerned, quote is invisible. However, quote has the special property in Calc that its argument is not evaluated. Thus, while it will not work to put the rule ‘t(a) := typeof(a)’ on the stack because ‘typeof(a)’ is evaluated immediately to produce ‘t(a) := 100’, you can use quote to protect the righthand side: ‘t(a) := quote(typeof(a))’. (See Section 10.11.3 [Conditional Rewrite Rules], page 291, for another trick for protecting rules from evaluation.) ‘plain(x)’ Special properties of and simplifications for the function call x are not used. One interesting case where plain is useful is the rule, ‘q(x) := quote(x)’, trying to expand a shorthand notation for the quote function. This rule will not work as shown; instead of replacing ‘q(foo)’ with ‘quote(foo)’, it will replace it with ‘foo’! The correct rule would be ‘q(x) := plain(quote(x))’.

Chapter 10: Algebra

299

‘cons(h,t)’ Where t is a vector, this is converted into an expanded vector during rewrite processing. Note that cons is a regular Calc function which normally does this anyway; the only way cons is treated specially by rewrites is that cons on the righthand side of a rule will be evaluated even if default simplifications have been turned off. ‘rcons(t,h)’ Analogous to cons except putting h at the end of the vector t. ‘apply(f,args)’ Where f is a variable and args is a vector, this is converted to a function call. Once again, note that apply is also a regular Calc function. ‘eval(x)’

The formula x is handled in the usual way, then the default simplifications are applied to it even if they have been turned off normally. This allows you to treat any function similarly to the way cons and apply are always treated. However, there is a slight difference: ‘cons(2+3, [])’ with default simplifications off will be converted to ‘[2+3]’, whereas ‘eval(cons(2+3, []))’ will be converted to ‘[5]’.

‘evalsimp(x)’ The formula x has meta-variables substituted in the usual way, then algebraically simplified. ‘evalextsimp(x)’ The formula x has meta-variables substituted in the normal way, then “extendedly” simplified as if by the a e command. ‘select(x)’ See Section 10.11.9 [Selections with Rewrite Rules], page 305. There are also some special functions you can use in conditions. ‘let(v := x)’ The expression x is evaluated with meta-variables substituted. The algebraic simplifications are not applied by default, but x can include calls to evalsimp or evalextsimp as described above to invoke higher levels of simplification. The result of x is then bound to the meta-variable v. As usual, if this meta-variable has already been matched to something else the two values must be equal; if the meta-variable is new then it is bound to the result of the expression. This variable can then appear in later conditions, and on the righthand side of the rule. In fact, v may be any pattern in which case the result of evaluating x is matched to that pattern, binding any meta-variables that appear in that pattern. Note that let can only appear by itself as a condition, or as one term of an ‘&&’ which is a whole condition: It cannot be inside an ‘||’ term or otherwise buried. The alternate, equivalent form ‘let(v, x)’ is also recognized. Note that the use of ‘:=’ by let, while still being assignment-like in character, is unrelated to the use of ‘:=’ in the main part of a rewrite rule.

300

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

As an example, ‘f(a) := g(ia) :: let(ia := 1/a) :: constant(ia)’ replaces ‘f(a)’ with ‘g’ of the inverse of ‘a’, if that inverse exists and is constant. For example, if ‘a’ is a singular matrix the operation ‘1/a’ is left unsimplified and ‘constant(ia)’ fails, but if ‘a’ is an invertible matrix then the rule succeeds. Without let there would be no way to express this rule that didn’t have to invert the matrix twice. Note that, because the meta-variable ‘ia’ is otherwise unbound in this rule, the let condition itself always “succeeds” because no matter what ‘1/a’ evaluates to, it can successfully be bound to ia. Here’s another example, for integrating cosines of linear terms: ‘myint(cos(y),x) := sin(y)/b :: let([a,b,x] := lin(y,x))’. The lin function returns a 3-vector if its argument is linear, or leaves itself unevaluated if not. But an unevaluated lin call will not match the 3-vector on the lefthand side of the let, so this let both verifies that y is linear, and binds the coefficients a and b for use elsewhere in the rule. (It would have been possible to use ‘sin(a x + b)/b’ for the righthand side instead, but using ‘sin(y)/b’ avoids gratuitous rearrangement of the argument of the sine.) Similarly, here is a rule that implements an inverse-erf function. It uses root to search for a solution. If root succeeds, it will return a vector of two numbers where the first number is the desired solution. If no solution is found, root remains in symbolic form. So we use let to check that the result was indeed a vector. ierf(x) := y :: let([y,z] := root(erf(a) = x, a, .5)) ‘matches(v,p)’ The meta-variable v, which must already have been matched to something elsewhere in the rule, is compared against pattern p. Since matches is a standard Calc function, it can appear anywhere in a condition. But if it appears alone or as a term of a top-level ‘&&’, then you get the special extra feature that meta-variables which are bound to things inside p can be used elsewhere in the surrounding rewrite rule. The only real difference between ‘let(p := v)’ and ‘matches(v, p)’ is that the former evaluates ‘v’ using the default simplifications, while the latter does not. ‘remember’ This is actually a variable, not a function. If remember appears as a condition in a rule, then when that rule succeeds the original expression and rewritten expression are added to the front of the rule set that contained the rule. If the rule set was not stored in a variable, remember is ignored. The lefthand side is enclosed in quote in the added rule if it contains any variables. For example, the rule ‘f(n) := n f(n-1) :: remember’ applied to ‘f(7)’ will add the rule ‘f(7) := 7 f(6)’ to the front of the rule set. The rule set EvalRules works slightly differently: There, the evaluation of ‘f(6)’ will complete before the result is added to the rule set, in this case as ‘f(7) := 5040’. Thus remember is most useful inside EvalRules. It is up to you to ensure that the optimization performed by remember is safe. For example, the rule ‘foo(n) := n :: evalv(eatfoo) > 0 :: remember’ is a bad idea (evalv is the function equivalent of the = command); if the variable

Chapter 10: Algebra

301

eatfoo ever contains 1, rules like ‘foo(7) := 7’ will be added to the rule set and will continue to operate even if eatfoo is later changed to 0. ‘remember(c)’ Remember the match as described above, but only if condition c is true. For example, ‘remember(n % 4 = 0)’ in the above factorial rule remembers only every fourth result. Note that ‘remember(1)’ is equivalent to ‘remember’, and ‘remember(0)’ has no effect.

10.11.6 Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules There are three operators, ‘&&&’, ‘|||’, and ‘!!!’, that combine rewrite patterns to make larger patterns. The combinations are “and,” “or,” and “not,” respectively, and these operators are the pattern equivalents of ‘&&’, ‘||’ and ‘!’ (which operate on zero-or-nonzero logical values). Note that ‘&&&’, ‘|||’, and ‘!!!’ are left in symbolic form by all regular Calc features; they have special meaning only in the context of rewrite rule patterns. The pattern ‘p1 &&& p2’ matches anything that matches both p1 and p2. One especially useful case is when one of p1 or p2 is a meta-variable. For example, here is a rule that operates on error forms: f(x &&& a +/- b, x) := g(x) This does the same thing, but is arguably simpler than, the rule f(a +/- b, a +/- b) := g(a +/- b) Here’s another interesting example: ends(cons(a, x) &&& rcons(y, b)) := [a, b] which effectively clips out the middle of a vector leaving just the first and last elements. This rule will change a one-element vector ‘[a]’ to ‘[a, a]’. The similar rule ends(cons(a, rcons(y, b))) := [a, b] would do the same thing except that it would fail to match a one-element vector. The pattern ‘p1 ||| p2’ matches anything that matches either p1 or p2. Calc first tries matching against p1; if that fails, it goes on to try p2. A simple example of ‘|||’ is curve(inf ||| -inf) := 0 which converts both ‘curve(inf)’ and ‘curve(-inf)’ to zero. Here is a larger example: log(a, b) ||| (ln(a) :: let(b := e)) := mylog(a, b) This matches both generalized and natural logarithms in a single rule. Note that the ‘::’ term must be enclosed in parentheses because that operator has lower precedence than ‘|||’ or ‘:=’. (In practice this rule would probably include a third alternative, omitted here for brevity, to take care of log10.) While Calc generally treats interior conditions exactly the same as conditions on the outside of a rule, it does guarantee that if all the variables in the condition are special

302

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

names like e, or already bound in the pattern to which the condition is attached (say, if ‘a’ had appeared in this condition), then Calc will process this condition right after matching the pattern to the left of the ‘::’. Thus, we know that ‘b’ will be bound to ‘e’ only if the ln branch of the ‘|||’ was taken. Note that this rule was careful to bind the same set of meta-variables on both sides of the ‘|||’. Calc does not check this, but if you bind a certain meta-variable only in one branch and then use that meta-variable elsewhere in the rule, results are unpredictable: f(a,b) ||| g(b) := h(a,b) Here if the pattern matches ‘g(17)’, Calc makes no promises about the value that will be substituted for ‘a’ on the righthand side. The pattern ‘!!! pat’ matches anything that does not match pat. Any meta-variables that are bound while matching pat remain unbound outside of pat. For example, f(x &&& !!! a +/- b, !!![]) := g(x) converts f whose first argument is anything except an error form, and whose second argument is not the empty vector, into a similar call to g (but without the second argument). If we know that the second argument will be a vector (empty or not), then an equivalent rule would be: f(x, y) := g(x) :: typeof(x) != 7 :: vlen(y) > 0 where of course 7 is the typeof code for error forms. Another final condition, that works for any kind of ‘y’, would be ‘!istrue(y == [])’. (The istrue function returns an explicit 0 if its argument was left in symbolic form; plain ‘!(y == [])’ or ‘y != []’ would not work to replace ‘!!![]’ since these would be left unsimplified, and thus cause the rule to fail, if ‘y’ was something like a variable name.) It is possible for a ‘!!!’ to refer to meta-variables bound elsewhere in the pattern. For example, f(a, !!!a) := g(a) matches any call to f with different arguments, changing this to g with only the first argument. If a function call is to be matched and one of the argument patterns contains a ‘!!!’ somewhere inside it, that argument will be matched last. Thus f(!!!a, a) := g(a) will be careful to bind ‘a’ to the second argument of f before testing the first argument. If Calc had tried to match the first argument of f first, the results would have been disastrous: since a was unbound so far, the pattern ‘a’ would have matched anything at all, and the pattern ‘!!!a’ therefore would not have matched anything at all!

10.11.7 Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules When a r (calc-rewrite) is used, it takes an expression from the top of the stack and attempts to match any of the specified rules to any part of the expression, starting with the whole expression and then, if that fails, trying deeper and deeper sub-expressions. For each part of the expression, the rules are tried in the order they appear in the rules vector.

Chapter 10: Algebra

303

The first rule to match the first sub-expression wins; it replaces the matched sub-expression according to the new part of the rule. Often, the rule set will match and change the formula several times. The top-level formula is first matched and substituted repeatedly until it no longer matches the pattern; then, sub-formulas are tried, and so on. Once every part of the formula has gotten its chance, the rewrite mechanism starts over again with the top-level formula (in case a substitution of one of its arguments has caused it again to match). This continues until no further matches can be made anywhere in the formula. It is possible for a rule set to get into an infinite loop. The most obvious case, replacing a formula with itself, is not a problem because a rule is not considered to “succeed” unless the righthand side actually comes out to something different than the original formula or sub-formula that was matched. But if you accidentally had both ‘ln(a b) := ln(a) + ln(b)’ and the reverse ‘ln(a) + ln(b) := ln(a b)’ in your rule set, Calc would run forever switching a formula back and forth between the two forms. To avoid disaster, Calc normally stops after 100 changes have been made to the formula. This will be enough for most multiple rewrites, but it will keep an endless loop of rewrites from locking up the computer forever. (On most systems, you can also type C-g to halt any Emacs command prematurely.) To change this limit, give a positive numeric prefix argument. In particular, M-1 a r applies only one rewrite at a time, useful when you are first testing your rule (or just if repeated rewriting is not what is called for by your application). You can also put a “function call” ‘iterations(n)’ in place of a rule anywhere in your rules vector (but usually at the top). Then, n will be used instead of 100 as the default number of iterations for this rule set. You can use ‘iterations(inf)’ if you want no iteration limit by default. A prefix argument will override the iterations limit in the rule set. [ iterations(1), f(x) := f(x+1) ] More precisely, the limit controls the number of “iterations,” where each iteration is a successful matching of a rule pattern whose righthand side, after substituting meta-variables and applying the default simplifications, is different from the original sub-formula that was matched. A prefix argument of zero sets the limit to infinity. Use with caution! Given a negative numeric prefix argument, a r will match and substitute the top-level expression up to that many times, but will not attempt to match the rules to any subexpressions. In a formula, rewrite(expr, rules, n) does a rewriting operation. Here expr is the expression being rewritten, rules is the rule, vector of rules, or variable containing the rules, and n is the optional iteration limit, which may be a positive integer, a negative integer, or ‘inf’ or ‘-inf’. If n is omitted the iterations value from the rule set is used; if both are omitted, 100 is used.

304

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

10.11.8 Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules It is possible to separate a rewrite rule set into several phases. During each phase, certain rules will be enabled while certain others will be disabled. A phase schedule controls the order in which phases occur during the rewriting process. If a call to the marker function phase appears in the rules vector in place of a rule, all rules following that point will be members of the phase(s) identified in the arguments to phase. Phases are given integer numbers. The markers ‘phase()’ and ‘phase(all)’ both mean the following rules belong to all phases; this is the default at the start of the rule set. If you do not explicitly schedule the phases, Calc sorts all phase numbers that appear in the rule set and executes the phases in ascending order. For example, the rule set [ f0(x) := g0(x), phase(1), f1(x) := g1(x), phase(2), f2(x) := g2(x), phase(3), f3(x) := g3(x), phase(1,2), f4(x) := g4(x) ] has three phases, 1 through 3. Phase 1 consists of the f0, f1, and f4 rules (in that order). Phase 2 consists of f0, f2, and f4. Phase 3 consists of f0 and f3. When Calc rewrites a formula using this rule set, it first rewrites the formula using only the phase 1 rules until no further changes are possible. Then it switches to the phase 2 rule set and continues until no further changes occur, then finally rewrites with phase 3. When no more phase 3 rules apply, rewriting finishes. (This is assuming a r with a large enough prefix argument to allow the rewriting to run to completion; the sequence just described stops early if the number of iterations specified in the prefix argument, 100 by default, is reached.) During each phase, Calc descends through the nested levels of the formula as described previously. (See Section 10.11.7 [Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules], page 302.) Rewriting starts at the top of the formula, then works its way down to the parts, then goes back to the top and works down again. The phase 2 rules do not begin until no phase 1 rules apply anywhere in the formula. A schedule marker appearing in the rule set (anywhere, but conventionally at the top) changes the default schedule of phases. In the simplest case, schedule has a sequence of phase numbers for arguments; each phase number is invoked in turn until the arguments to schedule are exhausted. Thus adding ‘schedule(3,2,1)’ at the top of the above rule set would reverse the order of the phases; ‘schedule(1,2,3)’ would have no effect since this is the default schedule; and ‘schedule(1,2,1,3)’ would give phase 1 a second chance after phase 2 has completed, before moving on to phase 3. Any argument to schedule can instead be a vector of phase numbers (or even of subvectors). Then the sub-sequence of phases described by the vector are tried repeatedly until no change occurs in any phase in the sequence. For example, ‘schedule([1, 2], 3)’ tries phase 1, then phase 2, then, if either phase made any changes to the formula, repeats

Chapter 10: Algebra

305

these two phases until they can make no further progress. Finally, it goes on to phase 3 for finishing touches. Also, items in schedule can be variable names as well as numbers. A variable name is interpreted as the name of a function to call on the whole formula. For example, ‘schedule(1, simplify)’ says to apply the phase-1 rules (presumably, all of them), then to call simplify which is the function name equivalent of a s. Likewise, ‘schedule([1, simplify])’ says to alternate between phase 1 and a s until no further changes occur. Phases can be used purely to improve efficiency; if it is known that a certain group of rules will apply only at the beginning of rewriting, and a certain other group will apply only at the end, then rewriting will be faster if these groups are identified as separate phases. Once the phase 1 rules are done, Calc can put them aside and no longer spend any time on them while it works on phase 2. There are also some problems that can only be solved with several rewrite phases. For a real-world example of a multi-phase rule set, examine the set FitRules, which is used by the curve-fitting command to convert a model expression to linear form. See Section 10.8.5 [Curve Fitting Details], page 279. This set is divided into four phases. The first phase rewrites certain kinds of expressions to be more easily linearizable, but less computationally efficient. After the linear components have been picked out, the final phase includes the opposite rewrites to put each component back into an efficient form. If both sets of rules were included in one big phase, Calc could get into an infinite loop going back and forth between the two forms. Elsewhere in FitRules, the components are first isolated, then recombined where possible to reduce the complexity of the linear fit, then finally packaged one component at a time into vectors. If the packaging rules were allowed to begin before the recombining rules were finished, some components might be put away into vectors before they had a chance to recombine. By putting these rules in two separate phases, this problem is neatly avoided.

10.11.9 Selections with Rewrite Rules If a sub-formula of the current formula is selected (as by j s; see Section 10.1 [Selecting Subformulas], page 241), the a r (calc-rewrite) command applies only to that sub-formula. Together with a negative prefix argument, you can use this fact to apply a rewrite to one specific part of a formula without affecting any other parts. The j r (calc-rewrite-selection) command allows more sophisticated operations on selections. This command prompts for the rules in the same way as a r, but it then applies those rules to the whole formula in question even though a sub-formula of it has been selected. However, the selected sub-formula will first have been surrounded by a ‘select( )’ function call. (Calc’s evaluator does not understand the function name select; this is only a tag used by the j r command.) For example, suppose the formula on the stack is ‘2 (a + b)^2’ and the sub-formula ‘a + b’ is selected. This formula will be rewritten to ‘2 select(a + b)^2’ and then the rewrite rules will be applied in the usual way. The rewrite rules can include references to select to tell where in the pattern the selected sub-formula should appear. If there is still exactly one ‘select( )’ function call in the formula after rewriting is done, it indicates which part of the formula should be selected afterwards. Otherwise, the formula will be unselected.

306

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

You can make j r act much like a r by enclosing both parts of the rewrite rule with ‘select()’. However, j r allows you to use the current selection in more flexible ways. Suppose you wished to make a rule which removed the exponent from the selected term; the rule ‘select(a)^x := select(a)’ would work. In the above example, it would rewrite ‘2 select(a + b)^2’ to ‘2 select(a + b)’. This would then be returned to the stack as ‘2 (a + b)’ with the ‘a + b’ selected. The j r command uses one iteration by default, unlike a r which defaults to 100 iterations. A numeric prefix argument affects j r in the same way as a r. See Section 10.11.7 [Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules], page 302. As with other selection commands, j r operates on the stack entry that contains the cursor. (If the cursor is on the top-of-stack ‘.’ marker, it works as if the cursor were on the formula at stack level 1.) If you don’t specify a set of rules, the rules are taken from the top of the stack, just as with a r. In this case, the cursor must indicate stack entry 2 or above as the formula to be rewritten (otherwise the same formula would be used as both the target and the rewrite rules). If the indicated formula has no selection, the cursor position within the formula temporarily selects a sub-formula for the purposes of this command. If the cursor is not on any sub-formula (e.g., it is in the line-number area to the left of the formula), the ‘select( )’ markers are ignored by the rewrite mechanism and the rules are allowed to apply anywhere in the formula. As a special feature, the normal a r command also ignores ‘select( )’ calls in rewrite rules. For example, if you used the above rule ‘select(a)^x := select(a)’ with a r, it would apply the rule as if it were ‘a^x := a’. Thus, you can write general purpose rules with ‘select( )’ hints inside them so that they will “do the right thing” in both a r and j r, both with and without selections.

10.11.10 Matching Commands The a m (calc-match) [match] function takes a vector of formulas and a rewrite-rule-style pattern, and produces a vector of all formulas which match the pattern. The command prompts you to enter the pattern; as for a r, you can enter a single pattern (i.e., a formula with meta-variables), or a vector of patterns, or a variable which contains patterns, or you can give a blank response in which case the patterns are taken from the top of the stack. The pattern set will be compiled once and saved if it is stored in a variable. If there are several patterns in the set, vector elements are kept if they match any of the patterns. For example, ‘match(a+b, [x, x+y, x-y, 7, x+y+z])’ will return ‘[x+y, x-y, x+y+z]’. The import mechanism is not available for pattern sets. The a m command can also be used to extract all vector elements which satisfy any condition: The pattern ‘x :: x>0’ will select all the positive vector elements. With the Inverse flag [matchnot], this command extracts all vector elements which do not match the given pattern. There is also a function ‘matches(x, p)’ which evaluates to 1 if expression x matches pattern p, or to 0 otherwise. This is sometimes useful for including into the conditional clauses of other rewrite rules.

Chapter 10: Algebra

307

The function vmatches is just like matches, except that if the match succeeds it returns a vector of assignments to the meta-variables instead of the number 1. For example, ‘vmatches(f(1,2), f(a,b))’ returns ‘[a := 1, b := 2]’. If the match fails, the function returns the number 0.

10.11.11 Automatic Rewrites It is possible to get Calc to apply a set of rewrite rules on all results, effectively adding to the built-in set of default simplifications. To do this, simply store your rule set in the variable EvalRules. There is a convenient s E command for editing EvalRules; see Section 12.3 [Operations on Variables], page 323. For example, suppose you want ‘sin(a + b)’ to be expanded out to ‘sin(b) cos(a) + cos(b) sin(a)’ wherever it appears, and similarly for ‘cos(a + b)’. The corresponding rewrite rule set would be, [ sin(a + b) cos(a + b)

:= :=

cos(a) sin(b) + sin(a) cos(b), cos(a) cos(b) - sin(a) sin(b) ]

To apply these manually, you could put them in a variable called trigexp and then use a r trigexp every time you wanted to expand trig functions. But if instead you store them in the variable EvalRules, they will automatically be applied to all sines and cosines of sums. Then, with ‘2 x’ and ‘45’ on the stack, typing + S will (assuming Degrees mode) result in ‘0.7071 sin(2 x) + 0.7071 cos(2 x)’ automatically. As each level of a formula is evaluated, the rules from EvalRules are applied before the default simplifications. Rewriting continues until no further EvalRules apply. Note that this is different from the usual order of application of rewrite rules: EvalRules works from the bottom up, simplifying the arguments to a function before the function itself, while a r applies rules from the top down. Because the EvalRules are tried first, you can use them to override the normal behavior of any built-in Calc function. It is important not to write a rule that will get into an infinite loop. For example, the rule set ‘[f(0) := 1, f(n) := n f(n-1)]’ appears to be a good definition of a factorial function, but it is unsafe. Imagine what happens if ‘f(2.5)’ is simplified. Calc will continue to subtract 1 from this argument forever without reaching zero. A safer second rule would be ‘f(n) := n f(n-1) :: n>0’. Another dangerous rule is ‘g(x, y) := g(y, x)’. Rewriting ‘g(2, 4)’, this would bounce back and forth between that and ‘g(4, 2)’ forever. If an infinite loop in EvalRules occurs, Emacs will eventually stop with a “Computation got stuck or ran too long” message. Another subtle difference between EvalRules and regular rewrites concerns rules that rewrite a formula into an identical formula. For example, ‘f(n) := f(floor(n))’ “fails to match” when n is already an integer. But in EvalRules this case is detected only if the righthand side literally becomes the original formula before any further simplification. This means that ‘f(n) := f(floor(n))’ will get into an infinite loop if it occurs in EvalRules. Calc will replace ‘f(6)’ with ‘f(floor(6))’, which is different from ‘f(6)’, so it will consider the rule to have matched and will continue simplifying that formula; first the argument is simplified to get ‘f(6)’, then the rule matches again to get ‘f(floor(6))’ again, ad infinitum. A much safer rule would check its argument first, say, with ‘f(n) := f(floor(n)) :: !dint(n)’.

308

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

(What really happens is that the rewrite mechanism substitutes the meta-variables in the righthand side of a rule, compares to see if the result is the same as the original formula and fails if so, then uses the default simplifications to simplify the result and compares again (and again fails if the formula has simplified back to its original form). The only special wrinkle for the EvalRules is that the same rules will come back into play when the default simplifications are used. What Calc wants to do is build ‘f(floor(6))’, see that this is different from the original formula, simplify to ‘f(6)’, see that this is the same as the original formula, and thus halt the rewriting. But while simplifying, ‘f(6)’ will again trigger the same EvalRules rule and Calc will get into a loop inside the rewrite mechanism itself.) The phase, schedule, and iterations markers do not work in EvalRules. If the rule set is divided into phases, only the phase 1 rules are applied, and the schedule is ignored. The rules are always repeated as many times as possible. The EvalRules are applied to all function calls in a formula, but not to numbers (and other number-like objects like error forms), nor to vectors or individual variable names. (Though they will apply to components of vectors and error forms when appropriate.) You might try to make a variable phihat which automatically expands to its definition without the need to press = by writing the rule ‘quote(phihat) := (1-sqrt(5))/2’, but unfortunately this rule will not work as part of EvalRules. Finally, another limitation is that Calc sometimes calls its built-in functions directly rather than going through the default simplifications. When it does this, EvalRules will not be able to override those functions. For example, when you take the absolute value of the complex number (2, 3), Calc computes ‘sqrt(2*2 + 3*3)’ by calling the multiplication, addition, and square root functions directly rather than applying the default simplifications to this formula. So an EvalRules rule that (perversely) rewrites ‘sqrt(13) := 6’ would not apply. (However, if you put Calc into Symbolic mode so that ‘sqrt(13)’ will be left in symbolic form by the built-in square root function, your rule will be able to apply. But if the complex number were (3, 4), so that ‘sqrt(25)’ must be calculated, then Symbolic mode will not help because ‘sqrt(25)’ can be evaluated exactly to 5.) One subtle restriction that normally only manifests itself with EvalRules is that while a given rewrite rule is in the process of being checked, that same rule cannot be recursively applied. Calc effectively removes the rule from its rule set while checking the rule, then puts it back once the match succeeds or fails. (The technical reason for this is that compiled pattern programs are not reentrant.) For example, consider the rule ‘foo(x) := x :: foo(x/2) > 0’ attempting to match ‘foo(8)’. This rule will be inactive while the condition ‘foo(4) > 0’ is checked, even though it might be an integral part of evaluating that condition. Note that this is not a problem for the more usual recursive type of rule, such as ‘foo(x) := foo(x/2)’, because there the rule has succeeded and been reactivated by the time the righthand side is evaluated. If EvalRules has no stored value (its default state), or if anything but a vector is stored in it, then it is ignored. Even though Calc’s rewrite mechanism is designed to compare rewrite rules to formulas as quickly as possible, storing rules in EvalRules may make Calc run substantially slower. This is particularly true of rules where the top-level call is a commonly used function, or is not fixed. The rule ‘f(n) := n f(n-1) :: n>0’ will only activate the rewrite mechanism for calls to the function f, but ‘lg(n) + lg(m) := lg(n m)’ will check every ‘+’ operator.

Chapter 10: Algebra

309

apply(f, [a*b]) := apply(f, [a]) + apply(f, [b]) :: in(f, [ln, log10])

may seem more “efficient” than two separate rules for ln and log10, but actually it is vastly less efficient because rules with apply as the top-level pattern must be tested against every function call that is simplified. Suppose you want ‘sin(a + b)’ to be expanded out not all the time, but only when algebraic simplifications are used to simplify the formula. The variable AlgSimpRules holds rules for this purpose. The a s command will apply EvalRules and AlgSimpRules to the formula, as well as all of its built-in simplifications. Most of the special limitations for EvalRules don’t apply to AlgSimpRules. Calc simply does an a r AlgSimpRules command with an infinite repeat count as the first step of algebraic simplifications. It then applies its own built-in simplifications throughout the formula, and then repeats these two steps (along with applying the default simplifications) until no further changes are possible. There are also ExtSimpRules and UnitSimpRules variables that are used by a e and u s, respectively; these commands also apply EvalRules and AlgSimpRules. The variable IntegSimpRules contains simplification rules that are used only during integration by a i.

10.11.12 Debugging Rewrites If a buffer named *Trace* exists, the rewrite mechanism will record some useful information there as it operates. The original formula is written there, as is the result of each successful rewrite, and the final result of the rewriting. All phase changes are also noted. Calc always appends to *Trace*. You must empty this buffer yourself periodically if it is in danger of growing unwieldy. Note that the rewriting mechanism is substantially slower when the *Trace* buffer exists, even if the buffer is not visible on the screen. Once you are done, you will probably want to kill this buffer (with C-x k *Trace* RET). If you leave it in existence and forget about it, all your future rewrite commands will be needlessly slow.

10.11.13 Examples of Rewrite Rules Returning to the example of substituting the pattern ‘sin(x)^2 + cos(x)^2’ with 1, we saw that the rule ‘opt(a) sin(x)^2 + opt(a) cos(x)^2 := a’ does a good job of finding suitable cases. Another solution would be to use the rule ‘cos(x)^2 := 1 - sin(x)^2’, followed by algebraic simplification if necessary. This rule will be the most effective way to do the job, but at the expense of making some changes that you might not desire. Another algebraic rewrite rule is ‘exp(x+y) := exp(x) exp(y)’. To make this work with the j r command so that it can be easily targeted to a particular exponential in a large formula, you might wish to write the rule as ‘select(exp(x+y)) := select(exp(x) exp(y))’. The ‘select’ markers will be ignored by the regular a r command (see Section 10.11.9 [Selections with Rewrite Rules], page 305). A surprisingly useful rewrite rule is ‘a/(b-c) := a*(b+c)/(b^2-c^2)’. This will simplify the formula whenever b and/or c can be made simpler by squaring. For example, applying this rule to ‘2 / (sqrt(2) + 3)’ yields ‘6:7 - 2:7 sqrt(2)’ (assuming Symbolic mode has been enabled to keep the square root from being evaluated to a floating-point approximation). This rule is also useful when working with symbolic complex numbers, e.g., ‘(a + b i) / (c + d i)’.

310

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

As another example, we could define our own “triangular numbers” function with the rules ‘[tri(0) := 0, tri(n) := n + tri(n-1) :: n>0]’. Enter this vector and store it in a variable: s t trirules. Now, given a suitable formula like ‘tri(5)’ on the stack, type ‘a r trirules’ to apply these rules repeatedly. After six applications, a r will stop with 15 on the stack. Once these rules are debugged, it would probably be most useful to add them to EvalRules so that Calc will evaluate the new tri function automatically. We could then use Z K on the keyboard macro ’ tri($) RET to make a command that applies tri to the value on the top of the stack. See Chapter 17 [Programming], page 361. The following rule set, contributed by Fran\c cois Pinard, implements quaternions, a generalization of the concept of complex numbers. Quaternions have four components, and are here represented by function calls ‘quat(w, [x, y, z])’ with “real part” w and the three “imaginary” parts collected into a vector. Various arithmetical operations on quaternions are supported. To use these rules, either add them to EvalRules, or create a command based on a r for simplifying quaternion formulas. A convenient way to enter quaternions would be a command defined by a keyboard macro containing: ’ quat($$$$, [$$$, $$, $]) RET. [ quat(w, x, y, z) := quat(w, [x, y, z]), quat(w, [0, 0, 0]) := w, abs(quat(w, v)) := hypot(w, v), -quat(w, v) := quat(-w, -v), r + quat(w, v) := quat(r + w, v) :: real(r), r - quat(w, v) := quat(r - w, -v) :: real(r), quat(w1, v1) + quat(w2, v2) := quat(w1 + w2, v1 + v2), r * quat(w, v) := quat(r * w, r * v) :: real(r), plain(quat(w1, v1) * quat(w2, v2)) := quat(w1 * w2 - v1 * v2, w1 * v2 + w2 * v1 + cross(v1, v2)), quat(w1, v1) / r := quat(w1 / r, v1 / r) :: real(r), z / quat(w, v) := z * quatinv(quat(w, v)), quatinv(quat(w, v)) := quat(w, -v) / (w^2 + v^2), quatsqr(quat(w, v)) := quat(w^2 - v^2, 2 * w * v), quat(w, v)^k := quatsqr(quat(w, v)^(k / 2)) :: integer(k) :: k > 0 :: k % 2 = 0, quat(w, v)^k := quatsqr(quat(w, v)^((k - 1) / 2)) * quat(w, v) :: integer(k) :: k > 2, quat(w, v)^-k := quatinv(quat(w, v)^k) :: integer(k) :: k > 0 ]

Quaternions, like matrices, have non-commutative multiplication. In other words, q1 ∗ q2 = q2 ∗ q1 is not necessarily true if q1 and q2 are quat forms. The ‘quat*quat’ rule above uses plain to prevent Calc from rearranging the product. It may also be wise to add the line ‘[quat(), matrix]’ to the Decls matrix, to ensure that Calc’s other algebraic operations will not rearrange a quaternion product. See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141. These rules also accept a four-argument quat form, converting it to the preferred form in the first rule. If you would rather see results in the four-argument form, just append the two items ‘phase(2), quat(w, [x, y, z]) := quat(w, x, y, z)’ to the end of the rule set. (But remember that multi-phase rule sets don’t work in EvalRules.)

Chapter 11: Operating on Units

311

11 Operating on Units One special interpretation of algebraic formulas is as numbers with units. For example, the formula ‘5 m / s^2’ can be read “five meters per second squared.” The commands in this chapter help you manipulate units expressions in this form. Units-related commands begin with the u prefix key.

11.1 Basic Operations on Units A units expression is a formula which is basically a number multiplied and/or divided by one or more unit names, which may optionally be raised to integer powers. Actually, the value part need not be a number; any product or quotient involving unit names is a units expression. Many of the units commands will also accept any formula, where the command applies to all units expressions which appear in the formula. A unit name is a variable whose name appears in the unit table, or a variable whose name is a prefix character like ‘k’ (for “kilo”) or ‘u’ (for “micro”) followed by a name in the unit table. A substantial table of built-in units is provided with Calc; see Section 11.3 [Predefined Units], page 314. You can also define your own unit names; see Section 11.4 [User-Defined Units], page 315. Note that if the value part of a units expression is exactly ‘1’, it will be removed by the Calculator’s automatic algebra routines: The formula ‘1 mm’ is “simplified” to ‘mm’. This is only a display anomaly, however; ‘mm’ will work just fine as a representation of one millimeter. You may find that Algebraic mode (see Section 3.5 [Algebraic Entry], page 107) makes working with units expressions easier. Otherwise, you will have to remember to hit the apostrophe key every time you wish to enter units. The u s (calc-simplify-units) [usimplify] command simplifies a units expression. It uses Calc’s algebraic simplifications to simplify the expression first as a regular algebraic formula; it then looks for features that can be further simplified by converting one object’s units to be compatible with another’s. For example, ‘5 m + 23 mm’ will simplify to ‘5.023 m’. When different but compatible units are added, the righthand term’s units are converted to match those of the lefthand term. See Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140, for a way to have this done automatically at all times. Units simplification also handles quotients of two units with the same dimensionality, as in ‘2 in s/L cm’ to ‘5.08 s/L’; fractional powers of unit expressions, as in ‘sqrt(9 mm^2)’ to ‘3 mm’ and ‘sqrt(9 acre)’ to a quantity in meters; and floor, ceil, round, rounde, roundu, trunc, float, frac, abs, and clean applied to units expressions, in which case the operation in question is applied only to the numeric part of the expression. Finally, trigonometric functions of quantities with units of angle are evaluated, regardless of the current angular mode. The u c (calc-convert-units) command converts a units expression to new, compatible units. For example, given the units expression ‘55 mph’, typing u c m/s RET produces ‘24.5872 m/s’. If you have previously converted a units expression with the same type of units (in this case, distance over time), you will be offered the previous choice of new units as a default. Continuing the above example, entering the units expression ‘100 km/hr’ and typing u c RET (without specifying new units) produces ‘27.7777777778 m/s’.

312

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The u c command treats temperature units (like ‘degC’ and ‘K’) as relative temperatures. For example, u c converts ‘10 degC’ to ‘18 degF’: A change of 10 degrees Celsius corresponds to a change of 18 degrees Fahrenheit. To convert absolute temperatures, you can use the u t (calc-convert-temperature) command. The value on the stack must be a simple units expression with units of temperature only. This command would convert ‘10 degC’ to ‘50 degF’, the equivalent temperature on the Fahrenheit scale. While many of Calc’s conversion factors are exact, some are necessarily approximate. If Calc is in fraction mode (see Section 6.4.3 [Fraction Mode], page 138), then unit conversions will try to give exact, rational conversions, but it isn’t always possible. Given ‘55 mph’ in fraction mode, typing u c m/s RET produces ‘15367:625 m/s’, for example, while typing u c au/yr RET produces ‘5.18665819999e-3 au/yr’. If the units you request are inconsistent with the original units, the number will be converted into your units times whatever “remainder” units are left over. (This can be disabled; see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433.) For example, converting ‘55 mph’ into acres produces ‘6.08e-3 acre / m s’. (Recall that multiplication binds more strongly than division in Calc formulas, so the units here are acres per meter-second.) Remainder units are expressed in terms of “fundamental” units like ‘m’ and ‘s’, regardless of the input units. One special exception is that if you specify a single unit name, and a compatible unit appears somewhere in the units expression, then that compatible unit will be converted to the new unit and the remaining units in the expression will be left alone. For example, given the input ‘980 cm/s^2’, the command u c ms will change the ‘s’ to ‘ms’ to get ‘9.8e-4 cm/ms^2’. The “remainder unit” ‘cm’ is left alone rather than being changed to the base unit ‘m’. You can use explicit unit conversion instead of the u s command to gain more control over the units of the result of an expression. For example, given ‘5 m + 23 mm’, you can type u c m or u c mm to express the result in either meters or millimeters. (For that matter, you could type u c fath to express the result in fathoms, if you preferred!) In place of a specific set of units, you can also enter one of the units system names si, mks (equivalent), or cgs. For example, u c si RET converts the expression into International System of Units (SI) base units. Also, u c base converts to Calc’s base units, which are the same as si units except that base uses ‘g’ as the fundamental unit of mass whereas si uses ‘kg’. The u c command also accepts composite units, which are expressed as the sum of several compatible unit names. For example, converting ‘30.5 in’ to units ‘mi+ft+in’ (miles, feet, and inches) produces ‘2 ft + 6.5 in’. Calc first sorts the unit names into order of decreasing relative size. It then accounts for as much of the input quantity as it can using an integer number times the largest unit, then moves on to the next smaller unit, and so on. Only the smallest unit may have a non-integer amount attached in the result. A few standard unit names exist for common combinations, such as mfi for ‘mi+ft+in’, and tpo for ‘ton+lb+oz’. Composite units are expanded as if by a x, so that ‘(ft+in)/hr’ is first converted to ‘ft/hr+in/hr’. If the value on the stack does not contain any units, u c will prompt first for the old units which this value should be considered to have, then for the new units. (If the value on the stack can be simplified so that it doesn’t contain any units, like ‘ft/in’ can be simplified

Chapter 11: Operating on Units

313

to 12, then u c will still prompt for both old units and new units. Assuming the old and new units you give are consistent with each other, the result also will not contain any units. For example, u c cm RET in RET converts the number 2 on the stack to 5.08. The u b (calc-base-units) command is shorthand for u c base; it converts the units expression on the top of the stack into base units. If u s does not simplify a units expression as far as you would like, try u b. Like the u c command, the u b command treats temperature units as relative temperatures. The u r (calc-remove-units) command removes units from the formula at the top of the stack. The u x (calc-extract-units) command extracts only the units portion of a formula. These commands essentially replace every term of the formula that does or doesn’t (respectively) look like a unit name by the constant 1, then resimplify the formula. The u a (calc-autorange-units) command turns on and off a mode in which unit prefixes like k (“kilo”) are automatically applied to keep the numeric part of a units expression in a reasonable range. This mode affects u s and all units conversion commands except u b. For example, with autoranging on, ‘12345 Hz’ will be simplified to ‘12.345 kHz’. Autoranging is useful for some kinds of units (like Hz and m), but is probably undesirable for non-metric units like ft and tbsp. (Composite units are more appropriate for those; see above.) Autoranging always applies the prefix to the leftmost unit name. Calc chooses the largest prefix that causes the number to be greater than or equal to 1.0. Thus an increasing sequence of adjusted times would be ‘1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1 s, 10 s, 100 s, 1 ks’. Generally the rule of thumb is that the number will be adjusted to be in the interval ‘[1 .. 1000)’, although there are several exceptions to this rule. First, if the unit has a power then this is not possible; ‘0.1 s^2’ simplifies to ‘100000 ms^2’. Second, the “centi-” prefix is allowed to form cm (centimeters), but will not apply to other units. The “deci-,” “deka-,” and “hecto-” prefixes are never used. Thus the allowable interval is ‘[1 .. 10)’ for millimeters and ‘[1 .. 100)’ for centimeters. Finally, a prefix will not be added to a unit if the resulting name is also the actual name of another unit; ‘1e-15 t’ would normally be considered a “femtoton,” but it is written as ‘1000 at’ (1000 atto-tons) instead because ft would be confused with feet.

11.2 The Units Table The u v (calc-enter-units-table) command displays the units table in another buffer called *Units Table*. Each entry in this table gives the unit name as it would appear in an expression, the definition of the unit in terms of simpler units, and a full name or description of the unit. Fundamental units are defined as themselves; these are the units produced by the u b command. The fundamental units are meters, seconds, grams, kelvins, amperes, candelas, moles, radians, and steradians. The Units Table buffer also displays the Unit Prefix Table. Note that two prefixes, “kilo” and “hecto,” accept either upper- or lower-case prefix letters. ‘Meg’ is also accepted as a synonym for the ‘M’ prefix. Whenever a unit name can be interpreted as either a built-in name or a prefix followed by another built-in name, the former interpretation wins. For example, ‘2 pt’ means two pints, not two pico-tons.

314

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The Units Table buffer, once created, is not rebuilt unless you define new units. To force the buffer to be rebuilt, give any numeric prefix argument to u v. The u V (calc-view-units-table) command is like u v except that the cursor is not moved into the Units Table buffer. You can type u V again to remove the Units Table from the display. To return from the Units Table buffer after a u v, type C-x * c again or use the regular Emacs C-x o (other-window) command. You can also kill the buffer with C-x k if you wish; the actual units table is safely stored inside the Calculator. The u g (calc-get-unit-definition) command retrieves a unit’s defining expression and pushes it onto the Calculator stack. For example, u g in will produce the expression ‘2.54 cm’. This is the same definition for the unit that would appear in the Units Table buffer. Note that this command works only for actual unit names; u g km will report that no such unit exists, for example, because km is really the unit m with a k (“kilo”) prefix. To see a definition of a unit in terms of base units, it is easier to push the unit name on the stack and then reduce it to base units with u b. The u e (calc-explain-units) command displays an English description of the units of the expression on the stack. For example, for the expression ‘62 km^2 g / s^2 mol K’, the description is “Square-Kilometer Gram per (Second-squared Mole Degree-Kelvin).” This command uses the English descriptions that appear in the righthand column of the Units Table.

11.3 Predefined Units The definitions of many units have changed over the years. For example, the meter was originally defined in 1791 as one ten-millionth of the distance from the equator to the north pole. In order to be more precise, the definition was adjusted several times, and now a meter is defined as the distance that light will travel in a vacuum in 1/299792458 of a second; consequently, the speed of light in a vacuum is exactly 299792458 m/s. Many other units have been redefined in terms of fundamental physical processes; a second, for example, is currently defined as 9192631770 periods of a certain radiation related to the cesium-133 atom. The only SI unit that is not based on a fundamental physical process (although there are efforts to change this) is the kilogram, which was originally defined as the mass of one liter of water, but is now defined as the mass of the international prototype of the kilogram (IPK), a cylinder of platinum-iridium kept at the Bureau international des poids et mesures in S`evres, France. (There are several copies of the IPK throughout the world.) The British imperial units, once defined in terms of physical objects, were redefined in 1963 in terms of SI units. The US customary units, which were the same as British units until the British imperial system was created in 1824, were also defined in terms of the SI units in 1893. Because of these redefinitions, conversions between metric, British Imperial, and US customary units can often be done precisely. Since the exact definitions of many kinds of units have evolved over the years, and since certain countries sometimes have local differences in their definitions, it is a good idea to examine Calc’s definition of a unit before depending on its exact value. For example, there are three different units for gallons, corresponding to the US (gal), Canadian (galC), and British (galUK) definitions. Also, note that oz is a standard ounce of mass, ozt is a Troy ounce, and ozfl is a fluid ounce.

Chapter 11: Operating on Units

315

The temperature units corresponding to degrees Kelvin and Centigrade (Celsius) are the same in this table, since most units commands treat temperatures as being relative. The calc-convert-temperature command has special rules for handling the different absolute magnitudes of the various temperature scales. The unit of volume “liters” can be referred to by either the lower-case l or the upper-case L. The unit A stands for Amperes; the name Ang is used for ˚ Angstroms. The unit pt stands for pints; the name point stands for a typographical point, defined by ‘72 point = 1 in’. This is slightly different than the point defined by the American Typefounder’s Association in 1886, but the point used by Calc has become standard largely due to its use by the PostScript page description language. There is also texpt, which stands for a printer’s point as defined by the TEX typesetting system: ‘72.27 texpt = 1 in’. Other units used by TEX are available; they are texpc (a pica), texbp (a “big point”, equal to a standard point which is larger than the point used by TEX), texdd (a Didot point), texcc (a Cicero) and texsp (a scaled TEX point, all dimensions representable in TEX are multiples of this value). When Calc is using the TEX or LATEX language mode (see Section 6.8.3 [TeX and LaTeX Language Modes], page 159), the TEX specific unit names will not use the ‘tex’ prefix; the unit name for a TEX point will be ‘pt’ instead of ‘texpt’, for example. To avoid conflicts, the unit names for pint and parsec will simply be ‘pint’ and ‘parsec’ instead of ‘pt’ and ‘pc’. The unit e stands for the elementary (electron) unit of charge; because algebra command could mistake this for the special constant e, Calc provides the alternate unit name ech which is preferable to e. The name g stands for one gram of mass; there is also gf, one gram of force. (Likewise for lb, pounds, and lbf.) Meanwhile, one “g” of acceleration is denoted ga. The unit ton is a U.S. ton of ‘2000 lb’, and t is a metric ton of ‘1000 kg’. The names s (or sec) and min refer to units of time; arcsec and arcmin are units of angle. Some “units” are really physical constants; for example, c represents the speed of light, and h represents Planck’s constant. You can use these just like other units: converting ‘.5 c’ to ‘m/s’ expresses one-half the speed of light in meters per second. You can also use this merely as a handy reference; the u g command gets the definition of one of these constants in its normal terms, and u b expresses the definition in base units. Two units, pi and alpha (the fine structure constant, approximately 1/137) are dimensionless. The units simplification commands simply treat these names as equivalent to their corresponding values. However you can, for example, use u c to convert a pure number into multiples of the fine structure constant, or u b to convert this back into a pure number. (When u c prompts for the “old units,” just enter a blank line to signify that the value really is unitless.)

11.4 User-Defined Units Calc provides ways to get quick access to your selected “favorite” units, as well as ways to define your own new units.

316

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

To select your favorite units, store a vector of unit names or expressions in the Calc variable Units. The u 1 through u 9 commands (calc-quick-units) provide access to these units. If the value on the top of the stack is a plain number (with no units attached), then u 1 gives it the specified units. (Basically, it multiplies the number by the first item in the Units vector.) If the number on the stack does have units, then u 1 converts that number to the new units. For example, suppose the vector ‘[in, ft]’ is stored in Units. Then 30 u 1 will create the expression ‘30 in’, and u 2 will convert that expression to ‘2.5 ft’. The u 0 command accesses the tenth element of Units. Only ten quick units may be defined at a time. If the Units variable has no stored value (the default), or if its value is not a vector, then the quick-units commands will not function. The s U command is a convenient way to edit the Units variable; see Section 12.3 [Operations on Variables], page 323. The u d (calc-define-unit) command records the units expression on the top of the stack as the definition for a new, user-defined unit. For example, putting ‘16.5 ft’ on the stack and typing u d rod defines the new unit ‘rod’ to be equivalent to 16.5 feet. The unit conversion and simplification commands will now treat rod just like any other unit of length. You will also be prompted for an optional English description of the unit, which will appear in the Units Table. If you wish the definition of this unit to be displayed in a special way in the Units Table buffer (such as with an asterisk to indicate an approximate value), then you can call this command with an argument, C-u u d; you will then also be prompted for a string that will be used to display the definition. The u u (calc-undefine-unit) command removes a user-defined unit. It is not possible to remove one of the predefined units, however. If you define a unit with an existing unit name, your new definition will replace the original definition of that unit. If the unit was a predefined unit, the old definition will not be replaced, only “shadowed.” The built-in definition will reappear if you later use u u to remove the shadowing definition. To create a new fundamental unit, use either 1 or the unit name itself as the defining expression. Otherwise the expression can involve any other units that you like (except for composite units like ‘mfi’). You can create a new composite unit with a sum of other units as the defining expression. The next unit operation like u c or u v will rebuild the internal unit table incorporating your modifications. Note that erroneous definitions (such as two units defined in terms of each other) will not be detected until the unit table is next rebuilt; u v is a convenient way to force this to happen. Temperature units are treated specially inside the Calculator; it is not possible to create user-defined temperature units. The u p (calc-permanent-units) command stores the user-defined units in your Calc init file (the file given by the variable calc-settings-file, typically ~/.emacs.d/calc.el), so that the units will still be available in subsequent Emacs sessions. If there was already a set of user-defined units in your Calc init file, it is replaced by the new set. (See Section 6.1 [General Mode Commands], page 135, for a way to tell Calc to use a different file for the Calc init file.)

Chapter 11: Operating on Units

317

11.5 Logarithmic Units The units dB (decibels) and Np (nepers) are logarithmic units which are manipulated differently than standard units. Calc provides commands to work with these logarithmic units. Decibels and nepers are used to measure power quantities as well as field quantities (quantities whose squares are proportional to power); these two types of quantities are handled slightly different from each other. By default the Calc commands work as if power quantities are being used; with the H prefix the Calc commands work as if field quantities are being used. The decibel level of a power P1 , relative to a reference power P0 , is defined to be 10 log10 (P1 /P0 )dB. (The factor of 10 is because a decibel, as its name implies, is onetenth of a bel. The bel, named after Alexander Graham Bell, was considered to be too large of a unit and was effectively replaced by the decibel.) If F is a field quantity with power P = kF 2 , then a reference quantity of F0 would correspond to a power of P0 = kF02 . If P1 = kF12 , then 10 log10 (P1 /P0 ) = 10 log10 (F12 /F02 ) = 20 log10 (F1 /F0 ) In order to get the same decibel level regardless of whether a field quantity or the corresponding power quantity is used, the decibel level of a field quantity F1 , relative to a reference F0 , is defined as 20 log10 (F1 /F0 )dB. For example, the decibel value of a sound pressure level of 60µPa relative to 20µPa (the threshold of human hearing) is 20 log10 (60µPa/20µPa)dB = 20 log10 (3)dB, which is about 9.54dB. Note that in taking the ratio, the original units cancel and so these logarithmic units are dimensionless. Nepers (named after John Napier, who is credited with inventing the logarithm) are similar to bels except they use natural logarithms instead of common logarithms. The neper level of a power P1 , relative to a reference power P0 , is (1/2) ln(P1 /P0 )Np. The neper level of a field F1 , relative to a reference field F0 , is ln(F1 /F0 )Np. For power quantities, Calc uses 1mW as the default reference quantity; this default can be changed by changing the value of the customizable variable calc-lu-power-reference (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433). For field quantities, Calc uses 20µPa as the default reference quantity; this is the value used in acoustics which is where decibels are commonly encountered. This default can be changed by changing the value of the customizable variable calc-lu-field-reference (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433). A non-default reference quantity will be read from the stack if the capital O prefix is used. The l q (calc-lu-quant) [lupquant] command computes the power quantity corresponding to a given number of logarithmic units. With the capital O prefix, O l q, the reference level will be read from the top of the stack. (In an algebraic formula, lupquant can be given an optional second argument which will be used for the reference level.) For example, 20 dB RET l q will return 100 mW; 20 dB RET 4 W RET O l q will return 400 W. The H l q [lufquant] command behaves like l q but computes field quantities instead of power quantities. The l d (calc-db) [dbpower] command will compute the decibel level of a power quantity using the default reference level; H l d [dbfield] will compute the decibel level of a field quantity. The commands l n (calc-np) [nppower] and H l n [npfield] will similarly compute neper levels. With the capital O prefix these commands will read a reference level

318

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

from the stack; in an algebraic formula the reference level can be given as an optional second argument. The sum of two power or field quantities doesn’t correspond to the sum of the corresponding decibel or neper levels. If the powers corresponding to decibel levels D1 and D2 are added, the corresponding decibel level “sum” will be 10 log10 (10D1 /10 + 10D2 /10 )dB. When field quantities are combined, it often means the corresponding powers are added and so the above formula might be used. In acoustics, for example, the sound pressure level is a field quantity and so the decibels are often defined using the field formula, but the sound pressure levels are combined as the sound power levels, and so the above formula should be used. If two field quantities themselves are added, the new decibel level will be 20 log10 (10D1 /20 + 10D2 /20 )dB. If the power corresponding to D dB is multiplied by a number N , then the corresponding decibel level will be D + 10 log10 (N )dB, if a field quantity is multiplied by N the corresponding decibel level will be D + 20 log10 (N )dB. There are similar formulas for combining nepers. The l + (calc-lu-plus) [lupadd] command will “add” two logarithmic unit power levels this way; with the H prefix, H l + [lufadd] will add logarithmic unit field levels. Similarly, logarithmic units can be “subtracted” with l - (calc-lu-minus) [lupsub] or H l - [lufsub]. The l * (calc-lu-times) [lupmul] and H l * [lufmul] commands will “multiply” a logarithmic unit by a number; the l / (calc-ludivide) [lupdiv] and H l / [lufdiv] commands will “divide” a logarithmic unit by a number. Note that the reference quantities don’t play a role in this arithmetic.

11.6 Musical Notes Calc can convert between musical notes and their associated frequencies. Notes can be given using either scientific pitch notation or midi numbers. Since these note systems are basically logarithmic scales, Calc uses the l prefix for functions operating on notes. Scientific pitch notation refers to a note by giving a letter A through G, possibly followed by a flat or sharp) with a subscript indicating an octave number. Each octave starts with C and ends with B and the octave numbered 0 was chosen to correspond to the lowest audible frequency. Using this system, middle C (about 261.625 Hz) corresponds to the note C in octave 4 and is denoted C4 . Any frequency can be described by giving a note plus an offset in cents (where a cent is a ratio of frequencies so that a semitone consists of 100 cents). The midi note number system assigns numbers to notes so that C( − 1) corresponds to the midi note number 0 and G9 corresponds to the midi note number 127. A midi controller

Chapter 11: Operating on Units

319

can have up to 128 keys and each midi note number from 0 to 127 corresponds to a possible key. The l s (calc-spn) [spn] command converts either a frequency or a midi number to scientific pitch notation. For example, 500 Hz gets converted to B_4 + 21.3094853649 cents and 84 to C_6. The l m (calc-midi) [midi] command converts either a frequency or a note given in scientific pitch notation to the corresponding midi number. For example, C_6 gets converted to 84 and 440 Hz to 69. The l f (calc-freq) [freq] command converts either either a midi number or a note given in scientific pitch notation to the corresponding frequency. For example, Asharp_2 + 30 cents gets converted to 118.578040134 Hz and 55 to 195.99771799 Hz. Since the frequencies of notes are not usually given exactly (and are typically irrational), the customizable variable calc-note-threshold determines how close (in cents) a frequency needs to be to a note to be recognized as that note (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433). This variable has a default value of 1. For example, middle C is approximately 261.625565302Hz; this frequency is often shortened to 261.625Hz. Without calc-note-threshold (or a value of 0), Calc would convert 261.625 Hz to scientific pitch notation B_3 + 99.9962592773 cents; with the default value of 1, Calc converts 261.625 Hz to C_4.

Chapter 12: Storing and Recalling

321

12 Storing and Recalling

Calculator variables are really just Lisp variables that contain numbers or formulas in a form that Calc can understand. The commands in this section allow you to manipulate variables conveniently. Commands related to variables use the s prefix key.

12.1 Storing Variables The s s (calc-store) command stores the value at the top of the stack into a specified variable. It prompts you to enter the name of the variable. If you press a single digit, the value is stored immediately in one of the “quick” variables q0 through q9. Or you can enter any variable name. The s s command leaves the stored value on the stack. There is also an s t (calc-storeinto) command, which removes a value from the stack and stores it in a variable. If the top of stack value is an equation ‘a = 7’ or assignment ‘a := 7’ with a variable on the lefthand side, then Calc will assign that variable with that value by default, i.e., if you type s s RET or s t RET. In this example, the value 7 would be stored in the variable ‘a’. (If you do type a variable name at the prompt, the top-of-stack value is stored in its entirety, even if it is an equation: ‘s s b RET’ with ‘a := 7’ on the stack stores ‘a := 7’ in b.) In fact, the top of stack value can be a vector of equations or assignments with different variables on their lefthand sides; the default will be to store all the variables with their corresponding righthand sides simultaneously. It is also possible to type an equation or assignment directly at the prompt for the s s or s t command: s s foo = 7. In this case the expression to the right of the = or := symbol is evaluated as if by the = command, and that value is stored in the variable. No value is taken from the stack; s s and s t are equivalent when used in this way. The prefix keys s and t may be followed immediately by a digit; s 9 is equivalent to s s 9, and t 9 is equivalent to s t 9. (The t prefix is otherwise used for trail and time/date commands.) There are also several “arithmetic store” commands. For example, s + removes a value from the stack and adds it to the specified variable. The other arithmetic stores are s -, s *, s /, s ^, and s | (vector concatenation), plus s n and s & which negate or invert the value in a variable, and s [ and s ] which decrease or increase a variable by one. All the arithmetic stores accept the Inverse prefix to reverse the order of the operands. If v represents the contents of the variable, and a is the value drawn from the stack, then regular s - assigns v := v − a, but I s - assigns v := a − v. While I s * might seem pointless, it is useful if matrix multiplication is involved. Actually, all the arithmetic stores use formulas designed to behave usefully both forwards and backwards:

322

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

s s s s s s s s s s

+ * / ^ | n & [ ]

v v v v v v v v v v

:= := := := := := := := := :=

v v v v v v v v v v

+ * / ^ | / ^ -

a a a a a a (-1) (-1) 1 (-1)

v v v v v v v v v v

:= := := := := := := := := :=

a + v a - v a * v a / v a ^ v a | v (-1) / v (-1) ^ v 1 - v (-1) - v

In the last four cases, a numeric prefix argument will be used in place of the number one. (For example, M-2 s ] increases a variable by 2, and M-2 I s ] replaces a variable by minus-two minus the variable. The first six arithmetic stores can also be typed s t +, s t -, etc. The commands s s +, s s -, and so on are analogous arithmetic stores that don’t remove the value a from the stack. All arithmetic stores report the new value of the variable in the Trail for your information. They signal an error if the variable previously had no stored value. If default simplifications have been turned off, the arithmetic stores temporarily turn them on for numeric arguments only (i.e., they temporarily do an m N command). See Section 6.5 [Simplification Modes], page 140. Large vectors put in the trail by these commands always use abbreviated (t .) mode. The s m command is a general way to adjust a variable’s value using any Calc function. It is a “mapping” command analogous to V M, V R, etc. See Section 9.8 [Reducing and Mapping], page 233, to see how to specify a function for a mapping command. Basically, all you do is type the Calc command key that would invoke that function normally. For example, s m n applies the n key to negate the contents of the variable, so s m n is equivalent to s n. Also, s m Q takes the square root of the value stored in a variable, s m v v uses v v to reverse the vector stored in the variable, and s m H I S takes the hyperbolic arcsine of the variable contents. If the mapping function takes two or more arguments, the additional arguments are taken from the stack; the old value of the variable is provided as the first argument. Thus s m - with a on the stack computes v − a, just like s -. With the Inverse prefix, the variable’s original value becomes the last argument instead of the first. Thus I s m - is also equivalent to I s -. The s x (calc-store-exchange) command exchanges the value of a variable with the value on the top of the stack. Naturally, the variable must already have a stored value for this to work. You can type an equation or assignment at the s x prompt. The command s x a=6 takes no values from the stack; instead, it pushes the old value of ‘a’ on the stack and stores ‘a = 6’. Until you store something in them, most variables are “void,” that is, they contain no value at all. If they appear in an algebraic formula they will be left alone even if you press = (calc-evaluate). The s u (calc-unstore) command returns a variable to the void state.

Chapter 12: Storing and Recalling

323

The s c (calc-copy-variable) command copies the stored value of one variable to another. One way it differs from a simple s r followed by an s t (aside from saving keystrokes) is that the value never goes on the stack and thus is never rounded, evaluated, or simplified in any way; it is not even rounded down to the current precision. The only variables with predefined values are the “special constants” pi, e, i, phi, and gamma. You are free to unstore these variables or to store new values into them if you like, although some of the algebraic-manipulation functions may assume these variables represent their standard values. Calc displays a warning if you change the value of one of these variables, or of one of the other special variables inf, uinf, and nan (which are normally void). Note that pi doesn’t actually have 3.14159265359 stored in it, but rather a special magic value that evaluates to π at the current precision. Likewise e, i, and phi evaluate according to the current precision or polar mode. If you recall a value from pi and store it back, this magic property will be lost. The magic property is preserved, however, when a variable is copied with s c. If one of the “special constants” is redefined (or undefined) so that it no longer has its magic property, the property can be restored with s k (calc-copy-special-constant). This command will prompt for a special constant and a variable to store it in, and so a special constant can be stored in any variable. Here, the special constant that you enter doesn’t depend on the value of the corresponding variable; pi will represent 3.14159. . . regardless of what is currently stored in the Calc variable pi. If one of the other special variables, inf, uinf or nan, is given a value, its original behavior can be restored by voiding it with s u.

12.2 Recalling Variables The most straightforward way to extract the stored value from a variable is to use the s r (calc-recall) command. This command prompts for a variable name (similarly to calc-store), looks up the value of the specified variable, and pushes that value onto the stack. It is an error to try to recall a void variable. It is also possible to recall the value from a variable by evaluating a formula containing that variable. For example, ’ a RET = is the same as s r a RET except that if the variable is void, the former will simply leave the formula ‘a’ on the stack whereas the latter will produce an error message. The r prefix may be followed by a digit, so that r 9 is equivalent to s r 9.

12.3 Other Operations on Variables The s e (calc-edit-variable) command edits the stored value of a variable without ever putting that value on the stack or simplifying or evaluating the value. It prompts for the name of the variable to edit. If the variable has no stored value, the editing buffer will start out empty. If the editing buffer is empty when you press C-c C-c to finish, the variable will be made void. See Section 5.2 [Editing Stack Entries], page 132, for a general description of editing. The s e command is especially useful for creating and editing rewrite rules which are stored in variables. Sometimes these rules contain formulas which must not be evaluated

324

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

until the rules are actually used. (For example, they may refer to ‘deriv(x,y)’, where x will someday become some expression involving y; if you let Calc evaluate the rule while you are defining it, Calc will replace ‘deriv(x,y)’ with 0 because the formula x does not itself refer to y.) By contrast, recalling the variable, editing with ‘, and storing will evaluate the variable’s value as a side effect of putting the value on the stack. There are several special-purpose variable-editing commands that use the s prefix followed by a shifted letter: sA

Edit AlgSimpRules. See Section 10.3.2 [Algebraic Simplifications], page 255.

Edit Decls. See Section 6.6 [Declarations], page 141.

Edit EvalRules. See Section 10.3.1 [Basic Simplifications], page 251.

Edit FitRules. See Section 10.8 [Curve Fitting], page 273.

Edit GenCount. See Section 10.6 [Solving Equations], page 266.

Edit Holidays. See Section 7.5.3 [Business Days], page 193.

Edit IntegLimit. See Section 10.5 [Calculus], page 262.

Edit LineStyles. See Chapter 13 [Graphics], page 327.

Edit PointStyles. See Chapter 13 [Graphics], page 327.

Edit PlotRejects. See Chapter 13 [Graphics], page 327.

Edit TimeZone. See Section 7.5.4 [Time Zones], page 195.

Edit Units. See Section 11.4 [User-Defined Units], page 315.

Edit ExtSimpRules. See Section 10.3.3 [Unsafe Simplifications], page 258.

These commands are just versions of s e that use fixed variable names rather than prompting for the variable name. The s p (calc-permanent-variable) command saves a variable’s value permanently in your Calc init file (the file given by the variable calc-settings-file, typically ~/.emacs.d/calc.el), so that its value will still be available in future Emacs sessions. You can re-execute s p later on to update the saved value, but the only way to remove a saved variable is to edit your calc init file by hand. (See Section 6.1 [General Mode Commands], page 135, for a way to tell Calc to use a different file for the Calc init file.) If you do not specify the name of a variable to save (i.e., s p RET), all Calc variables with defined values are saved except for the special constants pi, e, i, phi, and gamma; the variables TimeZone and PlotRejects; FitRules, DistribRules, and other built-in rewrite rules; and PlotDatan variables generated by the graphics commands. (You can still save these variables by explicitly naming them in an s p command.) The s i (calc-insert-variables) command writes the values of all Calc variables into a specified buffer. The variables are written with the prefix var- in the form of Lisp setq commands which store the values in string form. You can place these commands in your Calc init file (or .emacs) if you wish, though in this case it would be easier to use s p RET. (Note that s i omits the same set of variables as s p RET; the difference is that s i will store the variables in any buffer, and it also stores in a more human-readable format.)

Chapter 12: Storing and Recalling

325

12.4 The Let Command If you have an expression like ‘a+b^2’ on the stack and you wish to compute its value where b = 3, you can simply store 3 in b and then press = to reevaluate the formula. This has the side-effect of leaving the stored value of 3 in b for future operations. The s l (calc-let) command evaluates a formula under a temporary assignment of a variable. It stores the value on the top of the stack into the specified variable, then evaluates the second-to-top stack entry, then restores the original value (or lack of one) in the variable. Thus after ’ a+b^2 RET 3 s l b RET, the stack will contain the formula ‘a + 9’. The subsequent command 5 s l a RET will replace this formula with the number 14. The variables ‘a’ and ‘b’ are not permanently affected in any way by these commands. The value on the top of the stack may be an equation or assignment, or a vector of equations or assignments, in which case the default will be analogous to the case of s t RET. See Section 12.1 [Storing Variables], page 321. Also, you can answer the variable-name prompt with an equation or assignment: s l b=3 RET is the same as storing 3 on the stack and typing s l b RET. The a b (calc-substitute) command is another way to substitute a variable with a value in a formula. It does an actual substitution rather than temporarily assigning the variable and evaluating. For example, letting n = 2 in ‘f(n pi)’ with a b will produce ‘f(2 pi)’, whereas s l would give ‘f(6.28)’ since the evaluation step will also evaluate pi.

12.5 The Evaluates-To Operator The special algebraic symbol ‘=>’ is known as the evaluates-to operator. (It will show up as an evalto function call in other language modes like Pascal and LATEX.) This is a binary operator, that is, it has a lefthand and a righthand argument, although it can be entered with the righthand argument omitted. A formula like ‘a => b’ is evaluated by Calc as follows: First, a is not simplified or modified in any way. The previous value of argument b is thrown away; the formula a is then copied and evaluated as if by the = command according to all current modes and stored variable values, and the result is installed as the new value of b. For example, suppose you enter the algebraic formula ‘2 + 3 => 17’. The number 17 is ignored, and the lefthand argument is left in its unevaluated form; the result is the formula ‘2 + 3 => 5’. You can enter an ‘=>’ formula either directly using algebraic entry (in which case the righthand side may be omitted since it is going to be replaced right away anyhow), or by using the s = (calc-evalto) command, which takes a from the stack and replaces it with ‘a => b’. Calc keeps track of all ‘=>’ operators on the stack, and recomputes them whenever anything changes that might affect their values, i.e., a mode setting or variable value. This occurs only if the ‘=>’ operator is at the top level of the formula, or if it is part of a top-level vector. In other words, pushing ‘2 + (a => 17)’ will change the 17 to the actual value of ‘a’ when you enter the formula, but the result will not be dynamically updated when ‘a’ is changed later because the ‘=>’ operator is buried inside a sum. However, a vector of ‘=>’ operators will be recomputed, since it is convenient to push a vector like ‘[a =>, b =>, c =>]’ on the stack to make a concise display of all the variables in your problem. (Another

326

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

way to do this would be to use ‘[a, b, c] =>’, which provides a slightly different format of display. You can use whichever you find easiest to read.) The m C (calc-auto-recompute) command allows you to turn this automatic recomputation on or off. If you turn recomputation off, you must explicitly recompute an ‘=>’ operator on the stack in one of the usual ways, such as by pressing =. Turning recomputation off temporarily can save a lot of time if you will be changing several modes or variables before you look at the ‘=>’ entries again. Most commands are not especially useful with ‘=>’ operators as arguments. For example, given ‘x + 2 => 17’, it won’t work to type 1 + to get ‘x + 3 => 18’. If you want to operate on the lefthand side of the ‘=>’ operator on the top of the stack, type j 1 (that’s the digit “one”) to select the lefthand side, execute your commands, then type j u to unselect. All current modes apply when an ‘=>’ operator is computed, including the current simplification mode. Recall that the formula ‘arcsin(sin(x))’ will not be handled by Calc’s algebraic simplifications, but Calc’s unsafe simplifications will reduce it to ‘x’. If you enter ‘arcsin(sin(x)) =>’ normally, the result will be ‘arcsin(sin(x)) => arcsin(sin(x))’. If you change to Extended Simplification mode, the result will be ‘arcsin(sin(x)) => x’. However, just pressing a e once will have no effect on ‘arcsin(sin(x)) => arcsin(sin(x))’, because the righthand side depends only on the lefthand side and the current mode settings, and the lefthand side is not affected by commands like a e. The “let” command (s l) has an interesting interaction with the ‘=>’ operator. The s l command evaluates the second-to-top stack entry with the top stack entry supplying a temporary value for a given variable. As you might expect, if that stack entry is an ‘=>’ operator its righthand side will temporarily show this value for the variable. In fact, all ‘=>’s on the stack will be updated if they refer to that variable. But this change is temporary in the sense that the next command that causes Calc to look at those stack entries will make them revert to the old variable value. 2: 1:

a => a a + 1 => a + 1 .

2: 1:

a => 17 a + 1 => 18 . 17 s l a RET

2: 1:

a => a a + 1 => a + 1 . p 8 RET

Here the p 8 command changes the current precision, thus causing the ‘=>’ forms to be recomputed after the influence of the “let” is gone. The d SPC command (calc-refresh) is a handy way to force the ‘=>’ operators on the stack to be recomputed without any other side effects. Embedded mode also uses ‘=>’ operators. In Embedded mode, the lefthand side of an ‘=>’ operator can refer to variables assigned elsewhere in the file by ‘:=’ operators. The assignment operator ‘a := 17’ does not actually do anything by itself. But Embedded mode recognizes it and marks it as a sort of file-local definition of the variable. You can enter ‘:=’ operators in Algebraic mode, or by using the s : (calc-assign) [assign] command which takes a variable and value from the stack and replaces them with an assignment. See Section 6.8.3 [TeX and LaTeX Language Modes], page 159, for the way ‘=>’ appears in TEX language output. The eqn mode gives similar treatment to ‘=>’.

Chapter 13: Graphics

327

13 Graphics The commands for graphing data begin with the g prefix key. Calc uses GNUPLOT 2.0 or later to do graphics. These commands will only work if GNUPLOT is available on your system. (While GNUPLOT sounds like a relative of GNU Emacs, it is actually completely unrelated. However, it is free software. It can be obtained from ‘http://www.gnuplot.info’.) If you have GNUPLOT installed on your system but Calc is unable to find it, you may need to set the calc-gnuplot-name variable in your Calc init file or .emacs. You may also need to set some Lisp variables to show Calc how to run GNUPLOT on your system; these are described under g D and g O below. If you are using the X window system or MSWindows, Calc will configure GNUPLOT for you automatically. If you have GNUPLOT 3.0 or later and you are using a Unix or GNU system without X, Calc will configure GNUPLOT to display graphs using simple character graphics that will work on any Posix-compatible terminal.

13.1 Basic Graphics The easiest graphics command is g f (calc-graph-fast). This command takes two vectors of equal length from the stack. The vector at the top of the stack represents the “y” values of the various data points. The vector in the second-to-top position represents the corresponding “x” values. This command runs GNUPLOT (if it has not already been started by previous graphing commands) and displays the set of data points. The points will be connected by lines, and there will also be some kind of symbol to indicate the points themselves. The “x” entry may instead be an interval form, in which case suitable “x” values are interpolated between the minimum and maximum values of the interval (whether the interval is open or closed is ignored). The “x” entry may also be a number, in which case Calc uses the sequence of “x” values x, x + 1, x + 2, etc. (Generally the number 0 or 1 would be used for x in this case.) The “y” entry may be any formula instead of a vector. Calc effectively uses N (calc-eval-num) to evaluate variables in the formula; the result of this must be a formula in a single (unassigned) variable. The formula is plotted with this variable taking on the various “x” values. Graphs of formulas by default use lines without symbols at the computed data points. Note that if neither “x” nor “y” is a vector, Calc guesses at a reasonable number of data points to use. See the g N command below. (The “x” values must be either a vector or an interval if “y” is a formula.) If “y” is (or evaluates to) a formula of the form ‘xy(x, y)’ then the result is a parametric plot. The two arguments of the fictitious xy function are used as the “x” and “y” coordinates of the curve, respectively. In this case the “x” vector or interval you specified is not directly visible in the graph. For example, if “x” is the interval ‘[0..360]’ and “y” is the formula ‘xy(sin(t), cos(t))’, the resulting graph will be a circle. Also, “x” and “y” may each be variable names, in which case Calc looks for suitable vectors, intervals, or formulas stored in those variables. The “x” and “y” values for the data points (as pulled from the vectors, calculated from the formulas, or interpolated from the intervals) should be real numbers (integers, fractions,

328

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

or floats). One exception to this is that the “y” entry can consist of a vector of numbers combined with error forms, in which case the points will be plotted with the appropriate error bars. Other than this, if either the “x” value or the “y” value of a given data point is not a real number, that data point will be omitted from the graph. The points on either side of the invalid point will not be connected by a line. See the documentation for g a below for a description of the way numeric prefix arguments affect g f. If you store an empty vector in the variable PlotRejects (i.e., [ ] s t PlotRejects), Calc will append information to this vector for every data point which was rejected because its “x” or “y” values were not real numbers. The result will be a matrix where each row holds the curve number, data point number, “x” value, and “y” value for a rejected data point. See Section 12.5 [Evaluates-To Operator], page 325, for a handy way to keep tabs on the current value of PlotRejects. See Section 12.3 [Operations on Variables], page 323, for the s R command which is another easy way to examine PlotRejects. To clear the graphics display, type g c (calc-graph-clear). If the GNUPLOT output device is an X window, the window will go away. Effects on other kinds of output devices will vary. You don’t need to use g c if you don’t want to—if you give another g f or g p command later on, it will reuse the existing graphics window if there is one.

13.2 Three-Dimensional Graphics The g F (calc-graph-fast-3d) command makes a three-dimensional graph. It works only if you have GNUPLOT 3.0 or later; with GNUPLOT 2.0, you will see a GNUPLOT error message if you try this command. The g F command takes three values from the stack, called “x”, “y”, and “z”, respectively. As was the case for 2D graphs, there are several options for these values. In the first case, “x” and “y” are each vectors (not necessarily of the same length); either or both may instead be interval forms. The “z” value must be a matrix with the same number of rows as elements in “x”, and the same number of columns as elements in “y”. The result is a surface plot where zij is the height of the point at coordinate (xi , yj ) on the surface. The 3D graph will be displayed from a certain default viewpoint; you can change this viewpoint by adding a ‘set view’ to the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer as described later. See the GNUPLOT documentation for a description of the ‘set view’ command. Each point in the matrix will be displayed as a dot in the graph, and these points will be connected by a grid of lines (isolines). In the second case, “x”, “y”, and “z” are all vectors of equal length. The resulting graph displays a 3D line instead of a surface, where the coordinates of points along the line are successive triplets of values from the input vectors. In the third case, “x” and “y” are vectors or interval forms, and “z” is any formula involving two variables (not counting variables with assigned values). These variables are sorted into alphabetical order; the first takes on values from “x” and the second takes on values from “y” to form a matrix of results that are graphed as a 3D surface. If the “z” formula evaluates to a call to the fictitious function ‘xyz(x, y, z)’, then the result is a “parametric surface.” In this case, the axes of the graph are taken from the x and

Chapter 13: Graphics

329

y values in these calls, and the “x” and “y” values from the input vectors or intervals are used only to specify the range of inputs to the formula. For example, plotting ‘[0..360], [0..180], xyz(sin(x)*sin(y), cos(x)*sin(y), cos(y))’ will draw a sphere. (Since the default resolution for 3D plots is 5 steps in each of “x” and “y”, this will draw a very crude sphere. You could use the g N command, described below, to increase this resolution, or specify the “x” and “y” values as vectors with more than 5 elements. It is also possible to have a function in a regular g f plot evaluate to an xyz call. Since g f plots a line, not a surface, the result will be a 3D parametric line. For example, ‘[[0..720], xyz(sin(x), cos(x), x)]’ will plot two turns of a helix (a three-dimensional spiral). As for g f, each of “x”, “y”, and “z” may instead be variables containing the relevant data.

13.3 Managing Curves The g f command is really shorthand for the following commands: C-u g d g a g p. Likewise, g F is shorthand for C-u g d g A g p. You can gain more control over your graph by using these commands directly. The g a (calc-graph-add) command adds the “curve” represented by the two values on the top of the stack to the current graph. You can have any number of curves in the same graph. When you give the g p command, all the curves will be drawn superimposed on the same axes. The g a command (and many others that affect the current graph) will cause a special buffer, *Gnuplot Commands*, to be displayed in another window. This buffer is a template of the commands that will be sent to GNUPLOT when it is time to draw the graph. The first g a command adds a plot command to this buffer. Succeeding g a commands add extra curves onto that plot command. Other graph-related commands put other GNUPLOT commands into this buffer. In normal usage you never need to work with this buffer directly, but you can if you wish. The only constraint is that there must be only one plot command, and it must be the last command in the buffer. If you want to save and later restore a complete graph configuration, you can use regular Emacs commands to save and restore the contents of the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer. If the values on the stack are not variable names, g a will invent variable names for them (of the form ‘PlotDatan’) and store the values in those variables. The “x” and “y” variables are what go into the plot command in the template. If you add a curve that uses a certain variable and then later change that variable, you can replot the graph without having to delete and re-add the curve. That’s because the variable name, not the vector, interval or formula itself, is what was added by g a. A numeric prefix argument on g a or g f changes the way stack entries are interpreted as curves. With a positive prefix argument n, the top n stack entries are “y” values for n different curves which share a common “x” value in the n + 1st stack entry. (Thus g a with no prefix argument is equivalent to C-u 1 g a.) A prefix of zero or plain C-u means to take two stack entries, “x” and “y” as usual, but to interpret “y” as a vector of “y” values for several curves that share a common “x”. A negative prefix argument tells Calc to read n vectors from the stack; each vector [x, y] describes an independent curve. This is the only form of g a that creates several curves at

330

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

once that don’t have common “x” values. (Of course, the range of “x” values covered by all the curves ought to be roughly the same if they are to look nice on the same graph.) For example, to plot sin nx for integers n from 1 to 5, you could use v x to create a vector of integers (n), then V M ’ or V M $ to map ‘sin(n x)’ across this vector. The resulting vector of formulas is suitable for use as the “y” argument to a C-u g a or C-u g f command. The g A (calc-graph-add-3d) command adds a 3D curve to the graph. It is not valid to intermix 2D and 3D curves in a single graph. This command takes three arguments, “x”, “y”, and “z”, from the stack. With a positive prefix n, it takes n + 2 arguments (common “x” and “y”, plus n separate “z”s). With a zero prefix, it takes three stack entries but the “z” entry is a vector of curve values. With a negative prefix −n, it takes n vectors of the form [x, y, z]. The g A command works by adding a splot (surface-plot) command to the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer. (Although g a adds a 2D plot command to the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer, Calc changes this to splot before sending it to GNUPLOT if it notices that the data points are evaluating to xyz calls. It will not work to mix 2D and 3D g a curves in a single graph, although Calc does not currently check for this.) The g d (calc-graph-delete) command deletes the most recently added curve from the graph. It has no effect if there are no curves in the graph. With a numeric prefix argument of any kind, it deletes all of the curves from the graph. The g H (calc-graph-hide) command “hides” or “unhides” the most recently added curve. A hidden curve will not appear in the actual plot, but information about it such as its name and line and point styles will be retained. The g j (calc-graph-juggle) command moves the curve at the end of the list (the “most recently added curve”) to the front of the list. The next-most-recent curve is thus exposed for g d or similar commands to use. With g j you can work with any curve in the graph even though curve-related commands only affect the last curve in the list. The g p (calc-graph-plot) command uses GNUPLOT to draw the graph described in the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer. Any GNUPLOT parameters which are not defined by commands in this buffer are reset to their default values. The variables named in the plot command are written to a temporary data file and the variable names are then replaced by the file name in the template. The resulting plotting commands are fed to the GNUPLOT program. See the documentation for the GNUPLOT program for more specific information. All temporary files are removed when Emacs or GNUPLOT exits. If you give a formula for “y”, Calc will remember all the values that it calculates for the formula so that later plots can reuse these values. Calc throws out these saved values when you change any circ*mstances that may affect the data, such as switching from Degrees to Radians mode, or changing the value of a parameter in the formula. You can force Calc to recompute the data from scratch by giving a negative numeric prefix argument to g p. Calc uses a fairly rough step size when graphing formulas over intervals. This is to ensure quick response. You can “refine” a plot by giving a positive numeric prefix argument to g p. Calc goes through the data points it has computed and saved from previous plots of the function, and computes and inserts a new data point midway between each of the existing points. You can refine a plot any number of times, but beware that the amount of calculation involved doubles each time.

Chapter 13: Graphics

331

Calc does not remember computed values for 3D graphs. This means the numerix prefix argument, if any, to g p is effectively ignored if the current graph is three-dimensional. The g P (calc-graph-print) command is like g p, except that it sends the output to a printer instead of to the screen. More precisely, g p looks for ‘set terminal’ or ‘set output’ commands in the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer; lacking these it uses the default settings. However, g P ignores ‘set terminal’ and ‘set output’ commands and uses a different set of default values. All of these values are controlled by the g D and g O commands discussed below. Provided everything is set up properly, g p will plot to the screen unless you have specified otherwise and g P will always plot to the printer.

13.4 Graphics Options The g g (calc-graph-grid) command turns the “grid” on and off. It is off by default; tick marks appear only at the edges of the graph. With the grid turned on, dotted lines appear across the graph at each tick mark. Note that this command only changes the setting in *Gnuplot Commands*; to see the effects of the change you must give another g p command. The g b (calc-graph-border) command turns the border (the box that surrounds the graph) on and off. It is on by default. This command will only work with GNUPLOT 3.0 and later versions. The g k (calc-graph-key) command turns the “key” on and off. The key is a chart in the corner of the graph that shows the correspondence between curves and line styles. It is off by default, and is only really useful if you have several curves on the same graph. The g N (calc-graph-num-points) command allows you to select the number of data points in the graph. This only affects curves where neither “x” nor “y” is specified as a vector. Enter a blank line to revert to the default value (initially 15). With no prefix argument, this command affects only the current graph. With a positive prefix argument this command changes or, if you enter a blank line, displays the default number of points used for all graphs created by g a that don’t specify the resolution explicitly. With a negative prefix argument, this command changes or displays the default value (initially 5) used for 3D graphs created by g A. Note that a 3D setting of 5 means that a total of 52 = 25 points will be computed for the surface. Data values in the graph of a function are normally computed to a precision of five digits, regardless of the current precision at the time. This is usually more than adequate, but there are cases where it will not be. For example, plotting 1 +x with x in the interval ‘[0 .. 1e-6]’ will round all the data points down to 1.0! Putting the command ‘set precision n’ in the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer will cause the data to be computed at precision n instead of 5. Since this is such a rare case, there is no keystroke-based command to set the precision. The g h (calc-graph-header) command sets the title for the graph. This will show up centered above the graph. The default title is blank (no title). The g n (calc-graph-name) command sets the title of an individual curve. Like the other curve-manipulating commands, it affects the most recently added curve, i.e., the last curve on the list in the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer. To set the title of the other curves you must first juggle them to the end of the list with g j, or edit the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer by hand. Curve titles appear in the key; if the key is turned off they are not used.

332

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The g t (calc-graph-title-x) and g T (calc-graph-title-y) commands set the titles on the “x” and “y” axes, respectively. These titles appear next to the tick marks on the left and bottom edges of the graph, respectively. Calc does not have commands to control the tick marks themselves, but you can edit them into the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer if you wish. See the GNUPLOT documentation for details. The g r (calc-graph-range-x) and g R (calc-graph-range-y) commands set the range of values on the “x” and “y” axes, respectively. You are prompted to enter a suitable range. This should be either a pair of numbers of the form, ‘min:max’, or a blank line to revert to the default behavior of setting the range based on the range of values in the data, or ‘$’ to take the range from the top of the stack. Ranges on the stack can be represented as either interval forms or vectors: ‘[min .. max]’ or ‘[min, max]’. The g l (calc-graph-log-x) and g L (calc-graph-log-y) commands allow you to set either or both of the axes of the graph to be logarithmic instead of linear. For 3D plots, g C-t, g C-r, and g C-l (those are letters with the Control key held down) are the corresponding commands for the “z” axis. The g z (calc-graph-zero-x) and g Z (calc-graph-zero-y) commands control whether a dotted line is drawn to indicate the “x” and/or “y” zero axes. (These are the same dotted lines that would be drawn there anyway if you used g g to turn the “grid” feature on.) Zero-axis lines are on by default, and may be turned off only in GNUPLOT 3.0 and later versions. They are not available for 3D plots. The g s (calc-graph-line-style) command turns the connecting lines on or off for the most recently added curve, and optionally selects the style of lines to be used for that curve. Plain g s simply toggles the lines on and off. With a numeric prefix argument, g s turns lines on and sets a particular line style. Line style numbers start at one and their meanings vary depending on the output device. GNUPLOT guarantees that there will be at least six different line styles available for any device. The g S (calc-graph-point-style) command similarly turns the symbols at the data points on or off, or sets the point style. If you turn both lines and points off, the data points will show as tiny dots. If the “y” values being plotted contain error forms and the connecting lines are turned off, then this command will also turn the error bars on or off. Another way to specify curve styles is with the LineStyles and PointStyles variables. These variables initially have no stored values, but if you store a vector of integers in one of these variables, the g a and g f commands will use those style numbers instead of the defaults for new curves that are added to the graph. An entry should be a positive integer for a specific style, or 0 to let the style be chosen automatically, or −1 to turn off lines or points altogether. If there are more curves than elements in the vector, the last few curves will continue to have the default styles. Of course, you can later use g s and g S to change any of these styles. For example, ’[2 -1 3] RET s t LineStyles causes the first curve to have lines in style number 2, the second curve to have no connecting lines, and the third curve to have lines in style 3. Point styles will still be assigned automatically, but you could store another vector in PointStyles to define them, too.

Chapter 13: Graphics

333

13.5 Graphical Devices The g D (calc-graph-device) command sets the device name (or “terminal name” in GNUPLOT lingo) to be used by g p commands on this graph. It does not affect the permanent default device name. If you enter a blank name, the device name reverts to the default. Enter ‘?’ to see a list of supported devices. With a positive numeric prefix argument, g D instead sets the default device name, used by all plots in the future which do not override it with a plain g D command. If you enter a blank line this command shows you the current default. The special name default signifies that Calc should choose x11 if the X window system is in use (as indicated by the presence of a DISPLAY environment variable), windows on MS-Windows, or otherwise dumb under GNUPLOT 3.0 and later, or postscript under GNUPLOT 2.0. This is the initial default value. The dumb device is an interface to “dumb terminals,” i.e., terminals with no special graphics facilities. It writes a crude picture of the graph composed of characters like - and | to a buffer called *Gnuplot Trail*, which Calc then displays. The graph is made the same size as the Emacs screen, which on most dumb terminals will be 80 × 24 characters. The graph is displayed in an Emacs “recursive edit”; type q or C-c C-c to exit the recursive edit and return to Calc. Note that the dumb device is present only in GNUPLOT 3.0 and later versions. The word dumb may be followed by two numbers separated by spaces. These are the desired width and height of the graph in characters. Also, the device name big is like dumb but creates a graph four times the width and height of the Emacs screen. You will then have to scroll around to view the entire graph. In the *Gnuplot Trail* buffer, SPC, DEL, are defined to scroll by one screenful in each of the four directions. With a negative numeric prefix argument, g D sets or displays the device name used by g P (calc-graph-print). This is initially postscript. If you don’t have a PostScript printer, you may decide once again to use dumb to create a plot on any text-only printer. The g O (calc-graph-output) command sets the name of the output file used by GNUPLOT. For some devices, notably x11 and windows, there is no output file and this information is not used. Many other “devices” are really file formats like postscript; in these cases the output in the desired format goes into the file you name with g O. Type g O stdout RET to set GNUPLOT to write to its standard output stream, i.e., to *Gnuplot Trail*. This is the default setting. Another special output name is tty, which means that GNUPLOT is going to write graphics commands directly to its standard output, which you wish Emacs to pass through to your terminal. Tektronix graphics terminals, among other devices, operate this way. Calc does this by telling GNUPLOT to write to a temporary file, then running a sub-shell executing the command ‘cat tempfile >/dev/tty’. On typical Unix systems, this will copy the temporary file directly to the terminal, bypassing Emacs entirely. You will have to type C-l to Emacs afterwards to refresh the screen. Once again, g O with a positive or negative prefix argument sets the default or printer output file names, respectively. In each case you can specify auto, which causes Calc to invent a temporary file name for each g p (or g P) command. This temporary file will be deleted once it has been displayed or printed. If the output file name is not auto, the file is not automatically deleted.

334

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

The default and printer devices and output files can be saved permanently by the m m (calc-save-modes) command. The default number of data points (see g N) and the X geometry (see g X) are also saved. Other graph information is not saved; you can save a graph’s configuration simply by saving the contents of the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer. You may wish to configure the default and printer devices and output files for the whole system. The relevant Lisp variables are calc-gnuplot-default-device and -output, and calc-gnuplot-print-device and -output. The output file names must be either strings as described above, or Lisp expressions which are evaluated on the fly to get the output file names. Other important Lisp variables are calc-gnuplot-plot-command and calc-gnuplotprint-command, which give the system commands to display or print the output of GNUPLOT, respectively. These may be nil if no command is necessary, or strings which can include ‘%s’ to signify the name of the file to be displayed or printed. Or, these variables may contain Lisp expressions which are evaluated to display or print the output. These variables are customizable (see Appendix C [Customizing Calc], page 433). The g x (calc-graph-display) command lets you specify on which X window system display your graphs should be drawn. Enter a blank line to see the current display name. This command has no effect unless the current device is x11. The g X (calc-graph-geometry) command is a similar command for specifying the position and size of the X window. The normal value is default, which generally means your window manager will let you place the window interactively. Entering ‘800x500+0+0’ would create an 800-by-500 pixel window in the upper-left corner of the screen. This command has no effect if the current device is windows. The buffer called *Gnuplot Trail* holds a transcript of the session with GNUPLOT. This shows the commands Calc has “typed” to GNUPLOT and the responses it has received. Calc tries to notice when an error message has appeared here and display the buffer for you when this happens. You can check this buffer yourself if you suspect something has gone wrong1 . The g C (calc-graph-command) command prompts you to enter any line of text, then simply sends that line to the current GNUPLOT process. The *Gnuplot Trail* buffer looks deceptively like a Shell buffer but you can’t type commands in it yourself. Instead, you must use g C for this purpose. The g v (calc-graph-view-commands) and g V (calc-graph-view-trail) commands display the *Gnuplot Commands* and *Gnuplot Trail* buffers, respectively, in another window. This happens automatically when Calc thinks there is something you will want to see in either of these buffers. If you type g v or g V when the relevant buffer is already displayed, the buffer is hidden again. (Note that on MS-Windows, the *Gnuplot Trail* buffer will usually show nothing of interest, because GNUPLOT’s responses are not communicated back to Calc.) One reason to use g v is to add your own commands to the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer. Press g v, then use C-x o to switch into that window. For example, GNUPLOT has ‘set label’ and ‘set arrow’ commands that allow you to annotate your plots. Since Calc doesn’t 1

On MS-Windows, due to the peculiarities of how the Windows version of GNUPLOT (called wgnuplot) works, the GNUPLOT responses are not communicated back to Calc. Instead, you need to look them up in the GNUPLOT command window that is displayed as in normal interactive usage of GNUPLOT.

Chapter 13: Graphics

335

understand these commands, you have to add them to the *Gnuplot Commands* buffer yourself, then use g p to replot using these new commands. Note that your commands must appear before the plot command. To get help on any GNUPLOT feature, type, e.g., g C help set label. You may have to type g C RET a few times to clear the “press return for more” or “subtopic of . . . ” requests. Note that Calc always sends commands (like ‘set nolabel’) to reset all plotting parameters to the defaults before each plot, so to delete a label all you need to do is delete the ‘set label’ line you added (or comment it out with ‘#’) and then replot with g p. You can use g q (calc-graph-quit) to kill the GNUPLOT process that is running. The next graphing command you give will start a fresh GNUPLOT process. The word ‘Graph’ appears in the Calc window’s mode line whenever a GNUPLOT process is currently running. The GNUPLOT process is automatically killed when you exit Emacs if you haven’t killed it manually by then. The g K (calc-graph-kill) command is like g q except that it also views the *Gnuplot Trail* buffer so that you can see the process being killed. This is better if you are killing GNUPLOT because you think it has gotten stuck.

Chapter 14: Kill and Yank Functions

337

14 Kill and Yank Functions The commands in this chapter move information between the Calculator and other Emacs editing buffers. In many cases Embedded mode is an easier and more natural way to work with Calc from a regular editing buffer. See Chapter 16 [Embedded Mode], page 349.

14.1 Killing from the Stack Kill commands are Emacs commands that insert text into the “kill ring,” from which it can later be “yanked” by a C-y command. Three common kill commands in normal Emacs are C-k, which kills one line, C-w, which kills the region between mark and point, and M-w, which puts the region into the kill ring without actually deleting it. All of these commands work in the Calculator, too, although in the Calculator they operate on whole stack entries, so they “round up” the specified region to encompass full lines. (To copy only parts of lines, the M-C-w command in the Calculator will copy the region to the kill ring without any “rounding up”, just like the M-w command in normal Emacs.) Also, M-k has been provided to complete the set; it puts the current line into the kill ring without deleting anything. The kill commands are unusual in that they pay attention to the location of the cursor in the Calculator buffer. If the cursor is on or below the bottom line, the kill commands operate on the top of the stack. Otherwise, they operate on whatever stack element the cursor is on. The text is copied into the kill ring exactly as it appears on the screen, including line numbers if they are enabled. A numeric prefix argument to C-k or M-k affects the number of lines killed. A positive argument kills the current line and n − 1 lines below it. A negative argument kills the −n lines above the current line. Again this mirrors the behavior of the standard Emacs C-k command. Although a whole line is always deleted, C-k with no argument copies only the number itself into the kill ring, whereas C-k with a prefix argument of 1 copies the number with its trailing newline.

14.2 Yanking into the Stack The C-y command yanks the most recently killed text back into the Calculator. It pushes this value onto the top of the stack regardless of the cursor position. In general it re-parses the killed text as a number or formula (or a list of these separated by commas or newlines). However if the thing being yanked is something that was just killed from the Calculator itself, its full internal structure is yanked. For example, if you have set the floating-point display mode to show only four significant digits, then killing and re-yanking 3.14159 (which displays as 3.142) will yank the full 3.14159, even though yanking it into any other buffer would yank the number in its displayed form, 3.142. (Since the default display modes show all objects to their full precision, this feature normally makes no difference.)

14.3 Saving into Registers An alternative to killing and yanking stack entries is using registers in Calc. Saving stack entries in registers is like saving text in normal Emacs registers; although, like Calc’s kill commands, register commands always operate on whole stack entries.

338

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Registers in Calc are places to store stack entries for later use; each register is indexed by a single character. To store the current region (rounded up, of course, to include full stack entries) into a register, use the command r s (calc-copy-to-register). You will then be prompted for a register to use, the next character you type will be the index for the register. To store the region in register r, the full command will be r s r. With an argument, C-u r s r, the region being copied to the register will be deleted from the Calc buffer. It is possible to add additional stack entries to a register. The command M-x calcappend-to-register will prompt for a register, then add the stack entries in the region to the end of the register contents. The command M-x calc-prepend-to-register will similarly prompt for a register and add the stack entries in the region to the beginning of the register contents. Both commands take C-u arguments, which will cause the region to be deleted after being added to the register.

14.4 Inserting from Registers The command r i (calc-insert-register) will prompt for a register, then insert the contents of that register into the Calculator. If the contents of the register were placed there from within Calc, then the full internal structure of the contents will be inserted into the Calculator, otherwise whatever text is in the register is reparsed and then inserted into the Calculator.

14.5 Grabbing from Other Buffers The C-x * g (calc-grab-region) command takes the text between point and mark in the current buffer and attempts to parse it as a vector of values. Basically, it wraps the text in vector brackets ‘[ ]’ unless the text already is enclosed in vector brackets, then reads the text as if it were an algebraic entry. The contents of the vector may be numbers, formulas, or any other Calc objects. If the C-x * g command works successfully, it does an automatic C-x * c to enter the Calculator buffer. A numeric prefix argument grabs the specified number of lines around point, ignoring the mark. A positive prefix grabs from point to the nth following newline (so that M-1 C-x * g grabs from point to the end of the current line); a negative prefix grabs from point back to the n + 1st preceding newline. In these cases the text that is grabbed is exactly the same as the text that C-k would delete given that prefix argument. A prefix of zero grabs the current line; point may be anywhere on the line. A plain C-u prefix interprets the region between point and mark as a single number or formula rather than a vector. For example, C-x * g on the text ‘2 a b’ produces the vector of three values ‘[2, a, b]’, but C-u C-x * g on the same region reads a formula which is a product of three things: ‘2 a b’. (The text ‘a + b’, on the other hand, will be grabbed as a vector of one element by plain C-x * g because the interpretation ‘[a, +, b]’ would be a syntax error.) If a different language has been specified (see Section 6.8 [Language Modes], page 156), the grabbed text will be interpreted according to that language. The C-x * r (calc-grab-rectangle) command takes the text between point and mark and attempts to parse it as a matrix. If point and mark are both in the leftmost column, the

Chapter 14: Kill and Yank Functions

339

lines in between are parsed in their entirety. Otherwise, point and mark define the corners of a rectangle whose contents are parsed. Each line of the grabbed area becomes a row of the matrix. The result will actually be a vector of vectors, which Calc will treat as a matrix only if every row contains the same number of values. If a line contains a portion surrounded by square brackets (or curly braces), that portion is interpreted as a vector which becomes a row of the matrix. Any text surrounding the bracketed portion on the line is ignored. Otherwise, the entire line is interpreted as a row vector as if it were surrounded by square brackets. Leading line numbers (in the format used in the Calc stack buffer) are ignored. If you wish to force this interpretation (even if the line contains bracketed portions), give a negative numeric prefix argument to the C-x * r command. If you give a numeric prefix argument of zero or plain C-u, each line is instead interpreted as a single formula which is converted into a one-element vector. Thus the result of C-u C-x * r will be a one-column matrix. For example, suppose one line of the data is the expression ‘2 a’. A plain C-x * r will interpret this as ‘[2 a]’, which in turn is read as a two-element vector that forms one row of the matrix. But a C-u C-x * r will interpret this row as ‘[2*a]’. If you give a positive numeric prefix argument n, then each line will be split up into columns of width n; each column is parsed separately as a matrix element. If a line contained ‘2 +/- 3 4 +/- 5’, then grabbing with a prefix argument of 8 would correctly split the line into two error forms. See Chapter 9 [Matrix Functions], page 219, to see how to pull the matrix apart into its constituent rows and columns. (If it is a 1 × 1 matrix, just hit v u (calc-unpack) twice.) The C-x * : (calc-grab-sum-down) command is a handy way to grab a rectangle of data and sum its columns. It is equivalent to typing C-x * r, followed by V R : + (the vector reduction command that sums the columns of a matrix; see Section 9.8.3 [Reducing], page 236). The result of the command will be a vector of numbers, one for each column in the input data. The C-x * _ (calc-grab-sum-across) command similarly grabs a rectangle and sums its rows by executing V R _ +. As well as being more convenient, C-x * : and C-x * _ are also much faster because they don’t actually place the grabbed vector on the stack. In a C-x * r V R : + sequence, formatting the vector for display on the stack takes a large fraction of the total time (unless you have planned ahead and used v . and t . modes). For example, suppose we have a column of numbers in a file which we wish to sum. Go to one corner of the column and press C-@ to set the mark; go to the other corner and type C-x * :. Since there is only one column, the result will be a vector of one number, the sum. (You can type v u to unpack this vector into a plain number if you want to do further arithmetic with it.) To compute the product of the column of numbers, we would have to do it “by hand” since there’s no special grab-and-multiply command. Use C-x * r to grab the column of numbers into the calculator in the form of a column matrix. The statistics command u * is a handy way to find the product of a vector or matrix of numbers. See Section 9.7 [Statistical Operations], page 229. Another approach would be to use an explicit column reduction command, V R : *.

340

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

14.6 Yanking into Other Buffers The plain y (calc-copy-to-buffer) command inserts the number at the top of the stack into the most recently used normal editing buffer. (More specifically, this is the most recently used buffer which is displayed in a window and whose name does not begin with ‘*’. If there is no such buffer, this is the most recently used buffer except for Calculator and Calc Trail buffers.) The number is inserted exactly as it appears and without a newline. (If line-numbering is enabled, the line number is normally not included.) The number is not removed from the stack. With a prefix argument, y inserts several numbers, one per line. A positive argument inserts the specified number of values from the top of the stack. A negative argument inserts the nth value from the top of the stack. An argument of zero inserts the entire stack. Note that y with an argument of 1 is slightly different from y with no argument; the former always copies full lines, whereas the latter strips off the trailing newline. With a lone C-u as a prefix argument, y replaces the region in the other buffer with the yanked text, then quits the Calculator, leaving you in that buffer. A typical use would be to use C-x * g to read a region of data into the Calculator, operate on the data to produce a new matrix, then type C-u y to replace the original data with the new data. One might wish to alter the matrix display style (see Section 9.9 [Vector and Matrix Formats], page 238) or change the current display language (see Section 6.8 [Language Modes], page 156) before doing this. Also, note that this command replaces a linear region of text (as grabbed by C-x * g), not a rectangle (as grabbed by C-x * r). If the editing buffer is in overwrite (as opposed to insert) mode, and the C-u prefix was not used, then the yanked number will overwrite the characters following point rather than being inserted before those characters. The usual conventions of overwrite mode are observed; for example, characters will be inserted at the end of a line rather than overflowing onto the next line. Yanking a multi-line object such as a matrix in overwrite mode overwrites the next n lines in the buffer, lengthening or shortening each line as necessary. Finally, if the thing being yanked is a simple integer or floating-point number (like ‘-1.2345e-3’) and the characters following point also make up such a number, then Calc will replace that number with the new number, lengthening or shortening as necessary. The concept of “overwrite mode” has thus been generalized from overwriting characters to overwriting one complete number with another. The C-x * y key sequence is equivalent to y except that it can be typed anywhere, not just in Calc. This provides an easy way to guarantee that Calc knows which editing buffer you want to use!

14.7 X Cut and Paste If you are using Emacs with the X window system, there is an easier way to move small amounts of data into and out of the calculator: Use the mouse-oriented cut and paste facilities of X. The default bindings for a three-button mouse cause the left button to move the Emacs cursor to the given place, the right button to select the text between the cursor and the clicked location, and the middle button to yank the selection into the buffer at the clicked location. So, if you have a Calc window and an editing window on your Emacs screen, you can use left-click/right-click to select a number, vector, or formula from one window, then

Chapter 14: Kill and Yank Functions

341

middle-click to paste that value into the other window. When you paste text into the Calc window, Calc interprets it as an algebraic entry. It doesn’t matter where you click in the Calc window; the new value is always pushed onto the top of the stack. The xterm program that is typically used for general-purpose shell windows in X interprets the mouse buttons in the same way. So you can use the mouse to move data between Calc and any other Unix program. One nice feature of xterm is that a double left-click selects one word, and a triple left-click selects a whole line. So you can usually transfer a single number into Calc just by double-clicking on it in the shell, then middle-clicking in the Calc window.

Chapter 15: Keypad Mode

343

15 Keypad Mode The C-x * k (calc-keypad) command starts the Calculator and displays a picture of a calculator-style keypad. If you are using the X window system, you can click on any of the “keys” in the keypad using the left mouse button to operate the calculator. The original window remains the selected window; in Keypad mode you can type in your file while simultaneously performing calculations with the mouse. If you have used C-x * b first, C-x * k instead invokes the full-calc-keypad command, which takes over the whole Emacs screen and displays the keypad, the Calc stack, and the Calc trail all at once. This mode would normally be used when running Calc standalone (see Section 1.5.5 [Standalone Operation], page 9). If you aren’t using the X window system, you must switch into the *Calc Keypad* window, place the cursor on the desired “key,” and type SPC or RET. If you think this is easier than using Calc normally, go right ahead. Calc commands are more or less the same in Keypad mode. Certain keypad keys differ slightly from the corresponding normal Calc keystrokes; all such deviations are described below. Keypad mode includes many more commands than will fit on the keypad at once. Click the right mouse button [calc-keypad-menu] to switch to the next menu. The bottom five rows of the keypad stay the same; the top three rows change to a new set of commands. To return to earlier menus, click the middle mouse button [calc-keypad-menu-back] or simply advance through the menus until you wrap around. Typing TAB inside the keypad window is equivalent to clicking the right mouse button there. You can always click the EXEC button and type any normal Calc key sequence. This is equivalent to switching into the Calc buffer, typing the keys, then switching back to your original buffer.

15.1 Main Menu |----+----+--Calc---+----+----1 |FLR |CEIL|RND |TRNC|CLN2|FLT | |----+----+----+----+----+----| | LN |EXP | |ABS |IDIV|MOD | |----+----+----+----+----+----| |SIN |COS |TAN |SQRT|y^x |1/x | |----+----+----+----+----+----| | ENTER |+/- |EEX |UNDO| \n\\)*") (html-mode . "\n\$\n\$*") (nroff-mode . "\\\\\"Embed\n\$\\\\\" .*\n\$*") (pascal-mode . "{Embed}\n\${.*}\n\$*")

Appendix C: Customizing Calc

435

(sgml-mode . "\n\$\n\$*") (xml-mode . "\n\$\n\$*") (texinfo-mode . "@c Embed\n\$@c .*\n\$*")) Any major modes added to calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist should also be added to calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist and calc-embedded-openclose-mode-alist.

calc-embedded-open-formula calc-embedded-close-formula calc-embedded-open-close-formula-alist

[Variable] [Variable] [Variable]

See Section 16.5 [Customizing Embedded Mode], page 358. The variables calc-embedded-open-formula and calc-embedded-close-formula control the region that Calc will activate as a formula when Embedded mode is entered with C-x * e. They are regular expressions; Calc normally scans backward and forward in the buffer for the nearest text matching these regular expressions to be the “formula delimiters”. The simplest delimiters are blank lines. Other delimiters that Embedded mode understands by default are: 1. The TEX and LATEX math delimiters ‘$ $’, ‘$$ $$’, ‘\[ \]’, and ‘’; 2. Lines beginning with ‘\begin’ and ‘\end’ (except matrix delimiters); 3. Lines beginning with ‘@’ (Texinfo delimiters). 4. Lines beginning with ‘.EQ’ and ‘.EN’ (eqn delimiters); 5. Lines containing a single ‘%’ or ‘.\"’ symbol and nothing else. The variable calc-embedded-open-close-formula-alist is used to set calc-embedded-open-formula and calc-embedded-close-formula to different regular expressions depending on the major mode of the editing buffer. It consists of a list of lists of the form (MAJOR-MODE OPEN-FORMULA-REGEXP CLOSE-FORMULA-REGEXP), and its default value is nil.

calc-embedded-word-regexp calc-embedded-word-regexp-alist

[Variable] [Variable]

See Section 16.5 [Customizing Embedded Mode], page 358. The variable calc-embedded-word-regexp determines the expression that Calc will activate when Embedded mode is entered with C-x * w. It is a regular expressions. The default value of calc-embedded-word-regexp is "[-+]?[0-9]+\$\\.[09]+\$?\$[eE][-+]?[0-9]+\$?". The variable calc-embedded-word-regexp-alist is used to set calc-embeddedword-regexp to a different regular expression depending on the major mode of the editing buffer. It consists of a list of lists of the form (MAJOR-MODE WORD-REGEXP), and its default value is nil.

calc-embedded-open-plain calc-embedded-close-plain calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist

[Variable] [Variable] [Variable]

See Section 16.5 [Customizing Embedded Mode], page 358. The variables calc-embedded-open-plain and calc-embedded-open-plain are

436

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

used to delimit “plain” formulas. Note that these are actual strings, not regular expressions, because Calc must be able to write these string into a buffer as well as to recognize them. The default string for calc-embedded-open-plain is "%%% ", note the trailing space. The default string for calc-embedded-close-plain is " %%%\n", without the trailing newline here, the first line of a Big mode formula that followed might be shifted over with respect to the other lines. The variable calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist is used to set calc-embedded-open-plain and calc-embedded-close-plain to different strings depending on the major mode of the editing buffer. It consists of a list of lists of the form (MAJOR-MODE OPEN-PLAIN-STRING CLOSE-PLAIN-STRING), and its default value is ((c++-mode "// %% " " %%\n") (c-mode "/* %% " " %% */\n") (f90-mode "! %% " " %%\n") (fortran-mode "C %% " " %%\n") (html-helper-mode "\n") (html-mode "\n") (nroff-mode "\\\" %% " " %%\n") (pascal-mode "{%% " " %%}\n") (sgml-mode "\n") (xml-mode "\n") (texinfo-mode "@c %% " " %%\n")) Any major modes added to calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist should also be added to calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist and calc-embedded-openclose-mode-alist.

calc-embedded-open-new-formula calc-embedded-close-new-formula calc-embedded-open-close-new-formula-alist

[Variable] [Variable] [Variable]

See Section 16.5 [Customizing Embedded Mode], page 358. The variables calc-embedded-open-new-formula and calc-embedded-close-newformula are strings which are inserted before and after a new formula when you type C-x * f. The default value of calc-embedded-open-new-formula is "\n\n". If this string begins with a newline character and the C-x * f is typed at the beginning of a line, C-x * f will skip this first newline to avoid introducing unnecessary blank lines in the file. The default value of calc-embedded-close-new-formula is also "\n\n". The final newline is omitted by C-x * f if typed at the end of a line. (It follows that if C-x * f is typed on a blank line, both a leading opening newline and a trailing closing newline are omitted.) The variable calc-embedded-open-close-new-formula-alist is used to set calc-embedded-open-new-formula and calc-embedded-close-new-formula to different strings depending on the major mode of the editing buffer. It consists of a list of lists of the form (MAJOR-MODE OPEN-NEW-FORMULA-STRING CLOSE-NEW-FORMULA-STRING), and its default value is nil.

Appendix C: Customizing Calc

calc-embedded-open-mode calc-embedded-close-mode calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist

437

[Variable] [Variable] [Variable]

See Section 16.5 [Customizing Embedded Mode], page 358. The variables calc-embedded-open-mode and calc-embedded-close-mode are strings which Calc will place before and after any mode annotations that it inserts. Calc never scans for these strings; Calc always looks for the annotation itself, so it is not necessary to add them to user-written annotations. The default value of calc-embedded-open-mode is "% " and the default value of calc-embedded-close-mode is "\n". If you change the value of calc-embeddedclose-mode, it is a good idea still to end with a newline so that mode annotations will appear on lines by themselves. The variable calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist is used to set calc-embedded-open-mode and calc-embedded-close-mode to different strings expressions depending on the major mode of the editing buffer. It consists of a list of lists of the form (MAJOR-MODE OPEN-MODE-STRING CLOSE-MODE-STRING), and its default value is ((c++-mode "// " "\n") (c-mode "/* " " */\n") (f90-mode "! " "\n") (fortran-mode "C " "\n") (html-helper-mode "\n") (html-mode "\n") (nroff-mode "\\\" " "\n") (pascal-mode "{ " " }\n") (sgml-mode "\n") (xml-mode "\n") (texinfo-mode "@c " "\n")) Any major modes added to calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist should also be added to calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist and calc-embedded-openclose-plain-alist.

calc-lu-power-reference calc-lu-field-reference

[Variable] [Variable]

See Section 11.5 [Logarithmic Units], page 317. The variables calc-lu-power-reference and calc-lu-field-reference are unit expressions (written as strings) which Calc will use as reference quantities for logarithmic units. The default value of calc-lu-power-reference is "mW" and the default value of calc-lu-field-reference is "20 uPa". [Variable] See Section 11.6 [Musical Notes], page 318. The variable calc-note-threshold is a number (written as a string) which determines how close (in cents) a frequency needs to be to a note to be recognized as that note. The default value of calc-note-threshold is 1.

calc-note-threshold

438

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

calc-highlight-selections-with-faces calc-selected-face calc-nonselected-face

[Variable] [Variable] [Variable]

See Section 10.1.3 [Displaying Selections], page 244. The variable calc-highlight-selections-with-faces determines how selected sub-formulas are distinguished. If calc-highlight-selections-with-faces is nil, then a selected sub-formula is distinguished either by changing every character not part of the sub-formula with a dot or by changing every character in the sub-formula with a ‘#’ sign. If calc-highlight-selections-with-faces is t, then a selected sub-formula is distinguished either by displaying the non-selected portion of the formula with calc-nonselected-face or by displaying the selected sub-formula with calc-nonselected-face. [Variable] The variable calc-multiplication-has-precedence determines whether multiplication has precedence over division in algebraic formulas in normal language modes. If calc-multiplication-has-precedence is non-nil, then multiplication has precedence (and, for certain obscure reasons, is right associative), and so for example ‘a/b*c’ will be interpreted as ‘a/(b*c)’. If calc-multiplication-has-precedence is nil, then multiplication has the same precedence as division (and, like division, is left associative), and so for example ‘a/b*c’ will be interpreted as ‘(a/b)*c’. The default value of calc-multiplication-has-precedence is t.

calc-multiplication-has-precedence

[Variable] When converting units, the variable calc-ensure-consistent-units determines whether or not the target units need to be consistent with the original units. If calc-ensure-consistent-units is nil, then the target units don’t need to have the same dimensions as the original units; for example, converting ‘100 ft/s’ to ‘m’ will produce ‘30.48 m/s’. If calc-ensure-consistent-units is non-nil, then the target units need to have the same dimensions as the original units; for example, converting ‘100 ft/s’ to ‘m’ will result in an error, since ‘ft/s’ and ‘m’ have different dimensions. The default value of calc-ensure-consistent-units is nil.

calc-ensure-consistent-units

[Variable] The commands calc-enter and calc-pop will typically duplicate the top of the stack. If calc-context-sensitive-enter is non-nil, then the calc-enter will copy the element at the cursor to the top of the stack and calc-pop will delete the element at the cursor. The default value of calc-context-sensitive-enter is nil.

calc-context-sensitive-enter

[Variable] The variable calc-undo-length determines the number of undo steps that Calc will keep track of when calc-quit is called. If calc-undo-length is a non-negative integer, then this is the number of undo steps that will be preserved; if calc-undolength has any other value, then all undo steps will be preserved. The default value of calc-undo-length is 100.

calc-undo-length

[Variable] See Section 4.9 [Date Forms], page 120. The variable calc-gregorian-switch is either a list of integers (YEAR MONTH DAY) or

calc-gregorian-switch

Appendix C: Customizing Calc

439

nil. If it is nil, then Calc’s date forms always represent Gregorian dates. Otherwise, calc-gregorian-switch represents the date that the calendar switches from Julian dates to Gregorian dates; (YEAR MONTH DAY) will be the first Gregorian date. The customization buffer will offer several standard dates to choose from, or the user can enter their own date. The default value of calc-gregorian-switch is nil.

Appendix D: Reporting Bugs

441

Appendix D Reporting Bugs If you find a bug in Calc, send e-mail to Jay Belanger, [emailprotected] There is an automatic command M-x report-calc-bug which helps you to report bugs. This command prompts you for a brief subject line, then leaves you in a mail editing buffer. Type C-c C-c to send your mail. Make sure your subject line indicates that you are reporting a Calc bug; this command sends mail to the maintainer’s regular mailbox. If you have suggestions for additional features for Calc, please send them. Some have dared to suggest that Calc is already top-heavy with features; this obviously cannot be the case, so if you have ideas, send them right in. At the front of the source file, calc.el, is a list of ideas for future work. If any enthusiastic souls wish to take it upon themselves to work on these, please send a message (using M-x report-calc-bug) so any efforts can be coordinated. The latest version of Calc is available from Savannah, in the Emacs repository. See http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs.

Appendix E: Calc Summary

443

Appendix E Calc Summary This section includes a complete list of Calc keystroke commands. Each line lists the stack entries used by the command (top-of-stack last), the keystrokes themselves, the prompts asked by the command, and the result of the command (also with top-of-stack last). The result is expressed using the equivalent algebraic function. Commands which put no results on the stack show the full M-x command name in that position. Numbers preceding the result or command name refer to notes at the end. Algebraic functions and M-x commands that don’t have corresponding keystrokes are not listed in this summary. See [Command Index], page 471. See [Function Index], page 477.

a b c d e fformula g i j k l m n o p qformula r s t u w x y z : _ ‘editing 0(zero)

33 calc-embedded-activate calc-big-or-small calc calc-embedded-duplicate 34 calc-embedded calc-embedded-new-formula 35 calc-grab-region calc-info calc-embedded-select calc-keypad calc-load-everything read-kbd-macro 4 calc-embedded-next calc-other-window 4 calc-embedded-previous quick-calc 36 calc-grab-rectangle calc-info-summary calc-tutorial calc-embedded-update-formula calc-embedded-word calc-quit 1, 28, 49 calc-copy-to-buffer calc-user-invocation 36 calc-grab-sum-down 36 calc-grab-sum-across 30 calc-embedded-edit calc-reset

0-9 number . number _ number e number # number P (in number) M (in number) @ ’ " (in number) h m s (in number)

number 0.number -number 1e number current-radix#number +/mod HMS form HMS form

C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x C-x

’ $ " ab

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

formula formula string

37, 46 formula 37, 46 $formula 37, 46 string 2 add(a, b) a+b

444

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

a a a a a a a a a a a a

b b b b b b b b b b b b a a a a

... a ... a ... a b .abc ... a b ... a ... a b a ... a

[.. a b (.. a b

I H I H

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

* / ^ ^ % \ : | | | | & ! = M-%

2 1 1 1

RET SPC TAB M-TAB LFD DEL M-DEL M-RET ‘ editing

... a a ... a a ... b a ... b c a ... a b a ... ... b calc-last-args calc-edit

C-d C-k C-w C-y C-_ M-k M-w

1 ... 27 calc-kill 27 calc-kill-region calc-yank 4 calc-undo 27 calc-copy-as-kill 27 calc-copy-region-as-kill

[ ] ( ) , ; ..

[... [a, b] (... (a, b) vector or rect complex matrix or polar complex interval

~ < > { } ? a

1 1 3 3 1 1 1 4 1, 30

sub(a, b) a-b mul(a, b) a b, a*b div(a, b) a/b pow(a, b) a^b nroot(a, b) a^(1/b) mod(a, b) a%b idiv(a, b) a\b fdiv(a, b) vconcat(a, b) a|b vconcat(b, a) b|a append(a, b) append(b, a) inv(a) 1/a fact(a) a! evalv(a) percent(a) a%

n o p q w x y

a ab

A B

4 4 4 4

precision

command

calc-num-prefix calc-scroll-left calc-scroll-right calc-scroll-down calc-scroll-up calc-help

1 neg(a) -a 4 calc-realign 31 calc-precision calc-quit calc-why M-x calc-command 1, 28, 49 calc-copy-to-buffer 1 abs(a) 2 log(a, b)

Appendix E: Calc Summary

ab a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a

I a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

b b b b b b b b b a abc a a

I B C I C H C H C D E H E F I F H F H F G H I J K L H L M I M N O P I P H P H P Q I Q R I R H R H R S I S H S H S T I T H T H T U X a a a a a a a a a a a a a

command command command

command

= # < > [ ] { & | ! : . "

445

2 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1, 11 1, 11 1, 11 1, 11 1 32 32 1 32 1 1

1 1 1, 11 1, 11 1, 11 1, 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4

alog(a, b) b^a cos(a) arccos(a) cosh(a) arccosh(a) calc-redo exp(a) exp10(a) 10.^a floor(a, d) ceil(a, d) ffloor(a, d) fceil(a, d) arg(a) Hyperbolic Inverse conj(a) Keep-args ln(a) log10(a) calc-more-recursion-depth calc-less-recursion-depth evalvn(a) Option pi gamma e phi sqrt(a) sqr(a) a^2 round(a, d) trunc(a, d) fround(a, d) ftrunc(a, d) sin(a) arcsin(a) sinh(a) arcsinh(a) tan(a) arctan(a) tanh(a) arctanh(a) calc-undo calc-call-last-kbd-macro

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2, 45 2, 45 1, 45 45 1 7, 8

eq(a, b) a=b neq(a, b) a!=b lt(a, b) ab leq(a, b) a=b in(a, b) land(a, b) a&&b lor(a, b) a||b lnot(a) !a if(a, b, c) a?b:c rmeq(a) calc-expand-formula

5 32

446

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

a a a ab

a a a a

+ * _

b b b b

a a a H a

\ % / /

a a a a a a a a ab a a a data x data x a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a b c d d e f f g i m m p p n r s t v x

a a a a

I H

data data data a ab ab ab ag ag a ag ag a a a a a ag ag

a F I a F H a F a I a M I a M H a M a N H a N a P a R H a R a S I a S H a S I H a S a T a X H a X

ab a ab a an a ab v

b b b b H b b b b

a c d l l n o p

i, l, h i, l, h i, l, h

6, 38 6, 38 6, 38 2 2 2 2 2

old, new v v v

v pats pats

rules v, n

model, vars model, vars model, vars v, l, h op op op v v v v v v v v v i, l, h v v

1 38 38 4, 38 4, 38

sum(a, i, l, h) asum(a, i, l, h) prod(a, i, l, h) subscr(a, b) a b pdiv(a, b) prem(a, b) pdivrem(a, b) [q, r] pdivide(a, b) q+r/b

31, 39 7, 8 4, 8

apart(a) subst(a, old, new) collect(a, v) deriv(a, v) tderiv(a, v) esimplify(a) factor(a) factors(a) pgcd(a, b) integ(a, v) match(a, pats) matchnot(a, pats) polint(data, x) ratint(data, x) nrat(a) rewrite(a, rules, n) simplify(a) taylor(a, v, n) calc-alg-evaluate expand(a)

48 48 48 38 22 22 22 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 6, 38 38 38

fit(m, iv, pv, data) xfit(m, iv, pv, data) efit(m, iv, pv, data) ninteg(a, v, l, h) mapeq(op, a, b) mapeqr(op, a, b) mapeqp(op, a, b) minimize(a, v, g) wminimize(a, v, g) roots(a, v) root(a, v, g) wroot(a, v, g) solve(a, v) finv(a, v) fsolve(a, v) ffinv(a, v) table(a, i, l, h) maximize(a, v, g) wmaximize(a, v, g)

1 1 2 38 38 38 28 28 1 4, 8, 38

9 9 9 10 9 9 9 1

and(a, b, w) clip(a, w) diff(a, b, w) lsh(a, n, w) lsh(a, n, w) not(a, w) or(a, b, w) vpack(v)

Appendix E: Calc Summary

a an a an a ab csl rn rn rn

p p p p v v a an rna rna rna rv rv rnp rnp rnp a an csl npa npa npa cslp rpa rpa rpa ab a a a a a a a a a a a

b H b b H b b b b

r r t t u w x

b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

D F F F I I L L M M M N N P P P R R S T T T Y

I H I H I H I I H H

I H

447

10 9 10 9 1 9, 50 9

19 19 10 9

19 19

10 9

H H

c F H c F

c % d d d d d d

5 pclean(a, p) pclean(a, p) 5 clean(a, p) clean(a, p) 1 deg(a) 1 pfloat(a) 1 float(a) 1 hms(a) polar(a) rect(a) 1 rad(a)

c 0-9 c 0-9 d f f h p p r

a a

. , < = > {

ddb(c, s, l, p) fv(r, n, p) fvb(r, n, p) fvl(r, n, p) irr(v) irrb(v) ash(a, n, w) ash(a, n, w) pmt(r, n, a) pmtb(r, n, a) pmtl(r, n, a) npv(r, v) npvb(r, v) pv(r, n, p) pvb(r, n, p) pvl(r, n, p) rash(a, n, w) rash(a, n, w) sln(c, s, l) rate(n, p, a) rateb(n, p, a) ratel(n, p, a) syd(c, s, l, p) nper(r, p, a) nperb(r, p, a) nperl(r, p, a) relch(a, b)

b # I b # H b # b % c c c c c c c c c c c

rsh(a, n, w) rsh(a, n, w) rot(a, n, w) rot(a, n, w) vunpack(a) calc-word-size xor(a, b, w)

5 pfrac(a, p) 5 frac(a, p) percent(a*100) char char

label

50 50 13, 50 13, 50 13, 50 50

calc-point-char calc-group-char calc-left-justify calc-center-justify calc-right-justify calc-left-label

448

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

a a ab a a a ab a na ab a a ab na

d d d d d d

} label [ ] " SPC RET

d d d d

0 2 6 8

50 50 50 50

d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d

b c d e f g h i j l n o p r s t w z

12, 13, 50 50 50 5, 50 31, 50 12, 13, 50 50 50 50 12, 50 5, 50 50 12, 50 31, 50 5, 50 27 12, 13 12, 50

d d d d d d d d d d d d

B C E F M N O P T L U W

f [ f ] f f I f f f f f f f f f f

b e e g h i j n r s x y

format num format

format radix

50 4 4 12, 50

calc-right-label calc-truncate-up calc-truncate-down calc-display-strings calc-refresh 1 calc-refresh-top

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

calc-decimal-radix calc-binary-radix calc-hex-radix calc-octal-radix calc-line-breaking calc-complex-notation calc-date-notation calc-eng-notation calc-fix-notation calc-group-digits calc-hms-notation calc-i-notation calc-j-notation calc-line-numbering calc-normal-notation calc-over-notation calc-show-plain calc-radix calc-sci-notation calc-truncate-stack calc-auto-why calc-leading-zeros calc-big-language calc-c-language calc-eqn-language calc-fortran-language calc-mathematica-language calc-normal-language calc-flat-language calc-pascal-language calc-tex-language calc-latex-language calc-unformatted-language calc-maple-language

4 decr(a, n) 4 incr(a, n) 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2

beta(a, b) erf(a) erfc(a) gamma(a) hypot(a, b) im(a) besJ(n, a) min(a, b) re(a) sign(a) max(a, b) besY(n, a)

Appendix E: Calc Summary

a xab xab a ax ax ax ax ab ab a a a a an yx a xy

xyz

I H I H I

f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f

A B B E G G G G I I L M Q Q S T X

g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g

a b c d f g h j k l n p q r s t v x z

g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g

A C D F H K L N O P R S T V X Z

449

1 abssqr(a) betaI(x, a, b) betaB(x, a, b) 1 expm1(a) 2 gammaP(a, x) 2 gammaQ(a, x) 2 gammag(a, x) 2 gammaG(a, x) 2 ilog(a, b) 2 alog(a, b) b^a 1 lnp1(a) 1 mant(a) 1 isqrt(a) 1 sqr(a) a^2 2 scf(a, n) arctan2(y, x) 1 xpon(a)

title

name

range title display

command device

number filename range title format

g C-l g C-r range g C-t title

28, 40 calc-graph-add 12 calc-graph-border calc-graph-clear 41 calc-graph-delete 28, 40 calc-graph-fast 12 calc-graph-grid calc-graph-header 4 calc-graph-juggle 12 calc-graph-key 12 calc-graph-log-x calc-graph-name 42 calc-graph-plot calc-graph-quit calc-graph-range-x 12, 13 calc-graph-line-style calc-graph-title-x calc-graph-view-commands calc-graph-display 12 calc-graph-zero-x 28, 40 calc-graph-add-3d calc-graph-command 43, 44 calc-graph-device 28, 40 calc-graph-fast-3d 12 calc-graph-hide calc-graph-kill 12 calc-graph-log-y 43, 51 calc-graph-num-points 43, 44 calc-graph-output 42 calc-graph-print calc-graph-range-y 12, 13 calc-graph-point-style calc-graph-title-y calc-graph-view-trail calc-graph-geometry 12 calc-graph-zero-y 12 calc-graph-log-z calc-graph-range-z calc-graph-title-z

450

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

n nx nm nm n n nx

h h h h h h h h h h

b c f h i k n s t v

calc-describe-bindings calc-describe-key-briefly calc-describe-function calc-full-help calc-info calc-describe-key calc-view-news calc-info-summary calc-tutorial calc-describe-variable

j j j j j j

1-9 RET DEL ’ formula ‘ editing "

j j j j j

+ * / &

j j j j j j j j j j j j j j

a b c d e l m n o p r s u v

j j j j H j j j j j j j j

C D E I I L M N O R S U

27 4, 27 27 27 27 4, 27 27 27 4, 27 4, 27 4, 27 27

k k H k k H k k k H k

a b b c c d e e

1 2 2 2 1 1 2

key function

key

var

formula formula formula formula

rules

27 27 27 27, 30 7, 27

calc-select-part calc-copy-selection calc-del-selection calc-enter-selection calc-edit-selection calc-sel-expand-formula

27 27 27 27 27

calc-sel-add-both-sides calc-sel-sub-both-sides calc-sel-mul-both-sides calc-sel-div-both-sides calc-sel-invert

27 calc-select-additional 12 calc-break-selections calc-clear-selections 12, 50 calc-show-selections 12 calc-enable-selections 4, 27 calc-select-less 4, 27 calc-select-more 4 calc-select-next 4, 27 calc-select-once 4 calc-select-previous 4, 8, 27 calc-rewrite-selection 4, 27 calc-select-here 27 calc-unselect 7, 27 calc-sel-evaluate calc-sel-commute calc-sel-distribute calc-sel-jump-equals calc-sel-isolate calc-sel-isolate (full) calc-commute-left calc-sel-merge calc-sel-negate calc-select-once-maybe calc-commute-right calc-select-here-maybe calc-sel-unpack calc-random-again bern(n) bern(n, x) choose(n, m) perm(n, m) dfact(n) n!! euler(n) euler(n, x)

Appendix E: Calc Summary

451

n nm mn nm n n n n m nm nm n

k k k k k k I k k k k H k k

f g h l m n n p r s s t

npx npx vx vx nm v1 v2 x v1 v2 x msx msx mx mx vx vx

k I k k I k k k I k k I k k I k k I k

B B C C E F F N N P P T T

utpb(x, n, p) ltpb(x, n, p) utpc(x, v) ltpc(x, v) egcd(n, m) utpf(x, v1, v2) ltpf(x, v1, v2) utpn(x, m, s) ltpn(x, m, s) utpp(x, m) ltpp(x, m) utpt(x, v) ltpt(x, v)

l H l l H l l H l l H l l O l H l O H l l O l H l O H l l O l H l O H l l l l

+ + * * / / d d d d n n n n q q q q s m f

lupadd(a, b) lufadd(a, b) lupsub(a, b) lufsub(a, b) lupmul(a, b) lufmul(a, b) lupdiv(a, b) lufdiv(a, b) dbpower(a) dbpower(a, b) dbfield(a) dbfield(a, b) nppower(a) nppower(a, b) npfield(a) npfield(a, b) lupquant(a) lupquant(a, b) lufquant(a) lufquant(a, b) spn(a) midi(a) freq(a)

m m m m m m m m

a d e f g h i m

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

b b b b b b b b a b a b a b a b a b a b a a a

4 2 14 2 1 4 4 4, 28 14 2 2 1

prfac(n) gcd(n, m) shuffle(n, m) lcm(n, m) moebius(n) nextprime(n) prevprime(n) calc-prime-test random(m) stir1(n, m) stir2(n, m) totient(n)

12, 13 calc-algebraic-mode calc-degrees-mode calc-embedded-preserve-modes 12 calc-frac-mode 52 calc-get-modes calc-hms-mode 12, 13 calc-infinite-mode calc-save-modes

452

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

ab a ...

a a a a a

m m m m m m m

p r s t v w x

12 calc-polar-mode calc-radians-mode 12 calc-symbolic-mode 12 calc-total-algebraic-mode 12, 13 calc-matrix-mode 13 calc-working calc-always-load-extensions

m m m m m m m m m m m

A B C D E F N O R S U

12 calc-alg-simplify-mode 12 calc-bin-simplify-mode 12 calc-auto-recompute calc-default-simplify-mode 12 calc-ext-simplify-mode 13 calc-settings-file-name 12 calc-num-simplify-mode 12 calc-no-simplify-mode 12, 13 calc-mode-record-mode 12 calc-shift-prefix 12 calc-units-simplify-mode

filename

r s r i

s s s s s s s s s s r s s s t s s

c d e i k l m n p r 0-9 s 0-9 t 0-9 u x

var1, var2 var, decl var, editing buffer const, var var op, var var var var

s s s s s s s s s s s s s

A D E F G H I L P R T U X

editing editing editing editing editing editing editing editing editing editing editing editing editing

s s s s s

+ * / ^

var var var var var

var var var var

27 calc-copy-to-register calc-insert-register 29 calc-copy-variable calc-declare-variable 29, 30 calc-edit-variable calc-insert-variables 29 calc-copy-special-constant 29 a (letting var=b) 22, 29 calc-store-map 29, 47 calc-store-neg (v/-1) 29 calc-permanent-variable 29 v (recalled value) calc-recall-quick 28, 29 calc-store calc-store-quick 29 calc-store-into calc-store-into-quick 29 calc-unstore 29 calc-store-exchange 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

calc-edit-AlgSimpRules calc-edit-Decls calc-edit-EvalRules calc-edit-FitRules calc-edit-GenCount calc-edit-Holidays calc-edit-IntegLimit calc-edit-LineStyles calc-edit-PointStyles calc-edit-PlotRejects calc-edit-TimeZone calc-edit-Units calc-edit-ExtSimpRules

29, 47 29, 47 29, 47 29, 47 29, 47

calc-store-plus (v+a) calc-store-minus (v-a) calc-store-times (v*a) calc-store-div (v/a) calc-store-power (v^a)

Appendix E: Calc Summary

ab a

d d oz nz d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d ab ab a a defn

a a a

s s s s s s

| & [ ] : =

t t t t t

[ ] < > .

t t t t t t t t t t t t t

b d f h i k m n o p r s y

t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t

C C D I J M N P P P P P P P P P U W Y

var var var var

string

string string

a b c d e g p r s t

29, 47 29, 47 29, 47 29, 47 2 1

calc-store-concat (v|a) calc-store-inv (v^-1) calc-store-decr (v-1) calc-store-incr (v-(-1)) assign(a, b) a := b evalto(a, b) a =>

4 4 4 4 12

calc-trail-first calc-trail-last calc-trail-scroll-left calc-trail-scroll-right calc-full-trail-vectors

4 calc-trail-backward 12, 50 calc-trail-display 4 calc-trail-forward calc-trail-here calc-trail-in 4 calc-trail-kill calc-trail-marker 4 calc-trail-next calc-trail-out 4 calc-trail-previous calc-trail-isearch-backward calc-trail-isearch-forward 4 calc-trail-yank

oz, nz $

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

15 4 16 17 16 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 16 17 17

tzconv(d, oz, nz) tzconv(d, oz, nz) date(d) incmonth(d, n) julian(d, z) newmonth(d, n) now(z) year(d) month(d) day(d) hour(d) minute(d) second(d) weekday(d) yearday(d) time(d) unixtime(d, z) newweek(d, w) newyear(d, n)

2 badd(a, b) 2 bsub(a, b)

t + t u u u u u u u u u u

453

units unit, descr unit

units

12 calc-autorange-units calc-base-units 18 calc-convert-units calc-define-unit calc-explain-units calc-get-unit-definition calc-permanent-units calc-remove-units usimplify(a) 18 calc-convert-temperature

454

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

u u u u

a a v1 v2 v1 v2 v1 v2 v ab v v v v v v v v v

u unit v x 0-9

u C I u C H u C u G H u G u M I u M H u M I H u M u N u S I u S H u S I H u S u V u X

v v v

u + u * u # V V V V V V V V V V

( { [ ] , < = > / .

st st s s s s

V V V V V V

^ ~ # : +

V &

v a v v m v vm vmf va v v v v

I H I H

v v v v v v v v v v v v v v

a b c c c d e e f h h h h i

calc-undefine-unit calc-enter-units-table calc-extract-units calc-quick-units 20 20 20 19 2 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19

vcov(v1, v2) vpcov(v1, v2) vcorr(v1, v2) vgmean(v) agmean(a, b) vmean(v) vmeane(v) vmedian(v) vhmean(v) vmin(v) vsdev(v) vpsdev(v) vvar(v) vpvar(v) calc-view-units-table 19 vmax(v) 19 vsum(v) 19 vprod(v) 19 vcount(v)

ROCP

50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 12, 50 12, 50 2 2 1 1 1 1

calc-vector-parens calc-vector-braces calc-vector-brackets calc-matrix-brackets calc-vector-commas calc-matrix-left-justify calc-matrix-center-justify calc-matrix-right-justify calc-break-vectors calc-full-vectors vint(s, t) vdiff(s, t) vcompl(s) vcard(s) vspan(s) rdup(s)

1 inv(m) 1/m n n n >0 n 0 n ( )

calc-kbd-end-loop calc-kbd-repeat calc-kbd-end-repeat calc-kbd-for calc-kbd-end-for

Z C-g

cancel if/loop command

Z ‘ Z ’ Z #

calc-kbd-push calc-kbd-pop calc-kbd-query

Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z

C D E F G I K P S T U

func, args key, command key, editing k, c, f, a, n key key, command key

key

50 calc-user-define-composition calc-user-define 30 calc-user-define-edit 28 calc-user-define-formula calc-get-user-defn calc-user-define-invocation calc-user-define-kbd-macro calc-user-define-permanent 30 calc-edit-user-syntax 12 calc-timing calc-user-undefine

NOTES 1. Positive prefix arguments apply to n stack entries. Negative prefix arguments apply to the −nth stack entry. A prefix of zero applies to the entire stack. (For LFD and M-DEL, the meaning of the sign is reversed.) 2. Positive prefix arguments apply to n stack entries. Negative prefix arguments apply to the top stack entry and the next −n stack entries. 3. Positive prefix arguments rotate top n stack entries by one. Negative prefix arguments rotate the entire stack by −n. A prefix of zero reverses the entire stack. 4. Prefix argument specifies a repeat count or distance. 5. Positive prefix arguments specify a precision p. Negative prefix arguments reduce the current precision by −p. 6. A prefix argument is interpreted as an additional step-size parameter. A plain C-u prefix means to prompt for the step size. 7. A prefix argument specifies simplification level and depth. 1=Basic simplifications, 2=Algebraic simplifications, 3=Extended simplifications 8. A negative prefix operates only on the top level of the input formula. 9. Positive prefix arguments specify a word size of w bits, unsigned. Negative prefix arguments specify a word size of w bits, signed. 10. Prefix arguments specify the shift amount n. The w argument cannot be specified in the keyboard version of this command. 11. From the keyboard, d is omitted and defaults to zero. 12. Mode is toggled; a positive prefix always sets the mode, and a negative prefix always clears the mode. 13. Some prefix argument values provide special variations of the mode. 14. A prefix argument, if any, is used for m instead of taking m from the stack. M may take any of these values:

Appendix E: Calc Summary

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

22.

23.

24.

Integer

Random integer in the interval [0..m).

Float

Random floating-point number in the interval [0..m).

0.0

Gaussian with mean 1 and standard deviation 0.

Error form

Gaussian with specified mean and standard deviation.

Interval

Random integer or floating-point number in that interval.

457

Vector Random element from the vector. A prefix argument from 1 to 6 specifies number of date components to remove from the stack. See Section 7.5.1 [Date Conversions], page 190. A prefix argument specifies a time zone; C-u says to take the time zone number or name from the top of the stack. See Section 7.5.4 [Time Zones], page 195. A prefix argument specifies a day number (0–6, 0–31, or 0–366). If the input has no units, you will be prompted for both the old and the new units. With a prefix argument, collect that many stack entries to form the input data set. Each entry may be a single value or a vector of values. With a prefix argument of 1, take a single n×2 matrix from the stack instead of two separate data vectors. The row or column number n may be given as a numeric prefix argument instead. A plain C-u prefix says to take n from the top of the stack. If n is a vector or interval, a subvector/submatrix of the input is created. The op prompt can be answered with the key sequence for the desired function, or with x or z followed by a function name, or with $ to take a formula from the top of the stack, or with ’ and a typed formula. In the last two cases, the formula may be a nameless function like ‘’ or ‘’, or it may include $, $$, etc. (where $ will correspond to the last argument of the created function), or otherwise you will be prompted for an argument list. The number of vectors popped from the stack by V M depends on the number of arguments of the function. One of the mapping direction keys _ (horizontal, i.e., map by rows or reduce across), : (vertical, i.e., map by columns or reduce down), or = (map or reduce by rows) may be used before entering op; these modify the function name by adding the letter r for “rows, ” c for “columns, ” a for “across, ” or d for “down.” The prefix argument specifies a packing mode. A nonnegative mode is the number of items (for v p) or the number of levels (for v u). A negative mode is as described below. With no prefix argument, the mode is taken from the top of the stack and may be an integer or a vector of integers. -1

(2) Rectangular complex number.

-2

(2) Polar complex number.

-3

(3) HMS form.

-4

(2) Error form.

-5

(2) Modulo form.

-6

(2) Closed interval.

458

25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

31. 32. 33. 34.

35.

36.

37. 38. 39. 40.

41.

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

-7

(2) Closed .. open interval.

-8

(2) Open .. closed interval.

-9

(2) Open interval.

-10

(2) Fraction.

-11

(2) Float with integer mantissa.

-12

(2) Float with mantissa in [1..10).

-13

(1) Date form (using date numbers).

-14

(3) Date form (using year, month, day).

-15 (6) Date form (using year, month, day, hour, minute, second). A prefix argument specifies the size n of the matrix. With no prefix argument, n is omitted and the size is inferred from the input vector. The prefix argument specifies the starting position n (default 1). Cursor position within stack buffer affects this command. Arguments are not actually removed from the stack by this command. Variable name may be a single digit or a full name. Editing occurs in a separate buffer. Press C-c C-c (or LFD, or in some cases RET) to finish the edit, or kill the buffer with C-x k to cancel the edit. The LFD key prevents evaluation of the result of the edit. The number prompted for can also be provided as a prefix argument. Press this key a second time to cancel the prefix. With a negative prefix, deactivate all formulas. With a positive prefix, deactivate and then reactivate from scratch. Default is to scan for nearest formula delimiter symbols. With a prefix of zero, formula is delimited by mark and point. With a non-zero prefix, formula is delimited by scanning forward or backward by that many lines. Parse the region between point and mark as a vector. A nonzero prefix parses n lines before or after point as a vector. A zero prefix parses the current line as a vector. A C-u prefix parses the region between point and mark as a single formula. Parse the rectangle defined by point and mark as a matrix. A positive prefix n divides the rectangle into columns of width n. A zero or C-u prefix parses each line as one formula. A negative prefix suppresses special treatment of bracketed portions of a line. A numeric prefix causes the current language mode to be ignored. Responding to a prompt with a blank line answers that and all later prompts by popping additional stack entries. Answer for v may also be of the form v = v0 or v − v0 . With a positive prefix argument, stack contains many y’s and one common x. With a zero prefix, stack contains a vector of ys and a common x. With a negative prefix, stack contains many [x, y] vectors. (For 3D plots, substitute z for y and x, y for x.) With any prefix argument, all curves in the graph are deleted.

Appendix E: Calc Summary

459

42. With a positive prefix, refines an existing plot with more data points. With a negative prefix, forces recomputation of the plot data. 43. With any prefix argument, set the default value instead of the value for this graph. 44. With a negative prefix argument, set the value for the printer. 45. Condition is considered “true” if it is a nonzero real or complex number, or a formula whose value is known to be nonzero; it is “false” otherwise. 46. Several formulas separated by commas are pushed as multiple stack entries. Trailing ), ], }, >, and " delimiters may be omitted. The notation $$$ refers to the value in stack level three, and causes the formula to replace the top three stack levels. The notation $3 refers to stack level three without causing that value to be removed from the stack. Use LFD in place of RET to prevent evaluation; use M-= in place of RET to evaluate variables. 47. The variable is replaced by the formula shown on the right. The Inverse flag reverses the order of the operands, e.g., I s - x assigns x := a − x. 48. Press ? repeatedly to see how to choose a model. Answer the variables prompt with iv or iv; pv to specify independent and parameter variables. A positive prefix argument takes n + 1 vectors from the stack; a zero prefix takes a matrix and a vector from the stack. 49. With a plain C-u prefix, replace the current region of the destination buffer with the yanked text instead of inserting. 50. All stack entries are reformatted; the H prefix inhibits this. The I prefix sets the mode temporarily, redraws the top stack entry, then restores the original setting of the mode. 51. A negative prefix sets the default 3D resolution instead of the default 2D resolution. 52. This grabs a vector of the form [prec, wsize, ssize, radix, flfmt, ang, frac, symb, polar, matrix, simp, inf ]. A prefix argument from 1 to 12 grabs the nth mode value only. (Space is provided below for you to keep your own written notes.)

Index of Key Sequences

461

Index of Key Sequences !

! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

" " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 " (HMS forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

;

$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

< . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

& . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 & (matrices). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

’ ’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 ’ (HMS forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

> > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

? (

? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

@ )

@ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

[ *

[ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

] +

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

^ ^ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

462

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

‘ ‘ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

\ \ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 } . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

~ ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

0 0-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

A A............................................. a !........................................... a "........................................... a #........................................... a %........................................... a &........................................... A (vectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a *........................................... a +........................................... a -........................................... a ............................................ a /........................................... a :........................................... a ........................................... a ?........................................... a [........................................... a ]........................................... a _........................................... a \........................................... a |........................................... a {........................................... a a........................................... a b........................................... a c........................................... a d........................................... a e........................................... a f........................................... a F........................................... a g........................................... a i........................................... a I........................................... a m........................................... a M...........................................

185 287 250 287 262 287 227 286 284 286 287 262 287 287 286 287 104 287 287 223 261 287 288 261 250 261 262 258 260 273 262 263 266 306 250

a a a a a a a a a a a a a

n........................................... N........................................... p........................................... P........................................... r........................................... R........................................... s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, S........................................... t........................................... T........................................... v........................................... x........................................... X...........................................

261 272 283 268 289 271 255 266 266 286 249 261 272

B B............................................. b #........................................... b %........................................... b ?........................................... b a........................................... b c........................................... b d........................................... b D........................................... b F........................................... b I........................................... b l........................................... b L........................................... b M........................................... b n........................................... b N........................................... b o........................................... b p........................................... b P........................................... b r........................................... b R........................................... b S........................................... b t........................................... b T........................................... b u........................................... b w........................................... b x........................................... b Y...........................................

207 201 199 104 204 204 204 202 199 201 205 205 201 205 200 204 229 200 205 205 201 205 201 229 204 204 202

C C............................................. c %........................................... c ?........................................... c 0-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c c........................................... c d........................................... c f........................................... c F........................................... c h........................................... c p........................................... c r........................................... C-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

208 198 104 190 189 189 188 189 189 189 189 110

Index of Key Sequences

C-d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * ’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * ‘ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-x * z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-xC-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

463

131 337 337 352 103 339 339 353 104 354 103 103 352 349 352 338 105 353 343 111 363 353 103 353 108 338 105 105 354 349 104 340 366 132 337

158 149 148 163 148 159 147 149 148 148 106 159 165 148 157 149 157 351 158 147 146 148 104 155 159 158 111 165 165 164 147 131

E e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

D D............................................. d "........................................... d ,........................................... d ............................................ d ........................................... d ?........................................... d [........................................... d ]........................................... d {........................................... d }........................................... d 0........................................... d 2........................................... d 6........................................... d 8........................................... d A........................................... d b........................................... d B........................................... d c...........................................

d C........................................... d d........................................... d e........................................... d E........................................... d f........................................... d F........................................... d g........................................... d h........................................... d i........................................... d j........................................... d l........................................... d L........................................... d M........................................... d n........................................... d N........................................... d o........................................... d O........................................... d p........................................... d P........................................... d r........................................... d RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d s........................................... d SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d t........................................... d T........................................... d U........................................... d w........................................... d W........................................... d X........................................... d Y........................................... d z........................................... DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110 119 147 148 155 155 155 104 155 155 156 156 146 146 146 146 165 157 157 148

F F............................................. f ?........................................... f [........................................... f ]........................................... f A........................................... f b........................................... f B........................................... f e........................................... f E........................................... f g........................................... f G........................................... f h........................................... f i........................................... f I........................................... f j........................................... f L........................................... f M........................................... f n...........................................

187 104 186 186 185 209 209 209 207 209 209 186 188 207 209 207 186 186

464

f f f f f f f f

Q........................................... r........................................... s........................................... S........................................... T........................................... x........................................... X........................................... y...........................................

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

186 188 185 186 208 186 186 209

G G............................................. g ?........................................... g a........................................... g A........................................... g b........................................... g c........................................... g C........................................... g C-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g C-r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g C-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g d........................................... g D........................................... g f........................................... g F........................................... g g........................................... g h........................................... g H........................................... g j........................................... g k........................................... g K........................................... g l........................................... g L........................................... g n........................................... g N........................................... g O........................................... g p........................................... g P........................................... g q........................................... g r........................................... g R........................................... g s........................................... g S........................................... g t........................................... g T........................................... g v........................................... g V........................................... g x........................................... g X........................................... g z........................................... g Z...........................................

188 104 329 330 331 328 334 332 332 332 330 333 327 328 331 331 330 330 331 335 332 332 331 331 333 330 331 335 332 332 332 332 331 331 334 334 334 334 332 332

H H............................................. h (HMS forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H |........................................... H a /.........................................

137 119 222 262

H H H H H H H H H H h H H H H H H H H H H h H H H H H h h h H h H H H h h H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h

a d......................................... a f......................................... a F......................................... a M......................................... a N......................................... a p......................................... a R......................................... a s......................................... a S......................................... a X......................................... b........................................... b #......................................... b F......................................... b l......................................... b L......................................... b M......................................... b P......................................... b r......................................... b R......................................... b t......................................... b T......................................... c........................................... C........................................... c 0-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c c......................................... c f......................................... c F......................................... C-c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E........................................... f........................................... F........................................... f B......................................... f G......................................... h........................................... i........................................... I |......................................... I a S....................................... I C......................................... I E......................................... I F......................................... I f G....................................... I L......................................... I P......................................... I R......................................... I S......................................... I T......................................... I u M....................................... I u S....................................... I v h....................................... I V h....................................... I v R....................................... I V R....................................... I v U....................................... I V U....................................... j I......................................... k...........................................

262 260 276 250 272 284 271 251 267 272 105 201 199 205 205 201 200 205 205 205 201 105 208 190 190 189 189 105 105 105 207 105 187 209 209 104 105 222 267 208 207 187 209 207 207 187 208 208 231 232 223 223 237 237 237 237 247 105

Index of Key Sequences

H H H H H h H H h H h H H H H H h H H H H H H H H H H H H H H

k b......................................... k c......................................... k e......................................... k s......................................... L........................................... n........................................... P........................................... R........................................... s........................................... S........................................... t........................................... T........................................... u C......................................... u G......................................... u M......................................... u S......................................... v........................................... v e......................................... V e......................................... v h......................................... v H......................................... V h......................................... V H......................................... v k......................................... V k......................................... v l......................................... V l......................................... v R......................................... V R......................................... v U......................................... V U.........................................

465

215 215 215 215 207 105 207 187 105 208 105 208 233 232 231 232 105 226 226 223 226 223 226 223 223 224 224 237 237 237 237

I i............................................. I............................................. I ^........................................... I |........................................... I a F......................................... I a m......................................... I a M......................................... I a s......................................... I a S......................................... I B........................................... I b #......................................... I b F......................................... I b I......................................... I b M......................................... I b N......................................... I b P......................................... I b T......................................... I C........................................... I c p......................................... I E........................................... I F........................................... I f e......................................... I f G......................................... I k B.........................................

105 137 185 222 277 306 250 251 267 207 201 199 201 201 200 200 201 208 189 207 187 209 209 216

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

k C......................................... k F......................................... k n......................................... k N......................................... k P......................................... k T......................................... L........................................... M........................................... P........................................... Q........................................... R........................................... S........................................... T........................................... u C......................................... u M......................................... u S......................................... v G......................................... V G......................................... v h......................................... V h......................................... v R......................................... V R......................................... v s......................................... v S......................................... V s......................................... V S......................................... v U......................................... V U.........................................

216 216 216 217 217 217 207 111 207 207 187 208 208 233 231 232 225 225 223 223 236 236 224 225 224 225 236 236

J J............................................. j "........................................... j &........................................... j ’........................................... j *........................................... j +........................................... j -........................................... j /........................................... j ?........................................... j ‘........................................... j 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j a........................................... j b........................................... j c........................................... j C........................................... j d........................................... j D........................................... j DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j e........................................... j E........................................... j I........................................... j l........................................... j L........................................... j m........................................... j M........................................... j n........................................... j N...........................................

188 249 247 245 248 248 248 248 104 245 243 242 242 243 247 244 246 245 244 247 247 243 246 243 247 243 247

466

j j j j j j j j j j j

o........................................... O........................................... p........................................... r........................................... R........................................... RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s........................................... S........................................... u........................................... U........................................... v...........................................

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

242 242 243 305 246 245 241 242 243 248 248

K K............................................. k ?........................................... k a........................................... k b........................................... k B........................................... k c........................................... k C........................................... k d........................................... k e........................................... k E........................................... k f........................................... k F........................................... k g........................................... k h........................................... k l........................................... k m........................................... k n........................................... k N........................................... k p........................................... k P........................................... k r........................................... k s........................................... k t........................................... k T...........................................

134 104 212 215 216 215 216 214 215 214 215 216 214 212 214 216 216 217 215 217 211 215 216 217

122 104 107 255 141 326 137 356 258 138 135 177 137 138 141 135 141 141 138 137 135 138 135 107 141 139 140 135 198 337 131 337 110 131 337 103

N n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

L L............................................. l *........................................... l +........................................... l -........................................... l /........................................... l d........................................... l f........................................... l m........................................... l n........................................... l q........................................... l s........................................... LFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M (modulo forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m ?........................................... m a........................................... m A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, m B........................................... m C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, m d........................................... m e........................................... m E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, m f........................................... m F........................................... m g........................................... m h........................................... m i........................................... m I........................................... m m........................................... m N........................................... m O........................................... m p........................................... m r........................................... m R........................................... m s........................................... m S........................................... m t........................................... m U........................................... m v........................................... m w........................................... m x........................................... M-% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-C-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207 318 318 318 318 317 319 319 317 317 319 131

O o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 o (HMS forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

P p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 p (error forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 m (HMS forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Index of Key Sequences

467

R R............................................. r ?........................................... r 0-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r i........................................... r s........................................... RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187 104 323 338 337 131

S S............................................. s &........................................... s (HMS forms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s *........................................... s +........................................... s -........................................... s /........................................... s :........................................... s =........................................... s ?........................................... s [........................................... s ]........................................... s ^........................................... s |........................................... s 0-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s A........................................... s c........................................... s d........................................... s D........................................... s e........................................... s E........................................... s F........................................... s G........................................... s H........................................... s i........................................... s I........................................... s k........................................... s l........................................... s L........................................... s m........................................... s n........................................... s p........................................... s P........................................... s r........................................... s R........................................... s s........................................... s t........................................... s T........................................... s u........................................... s U........................................... s x........................................... s X........................................... SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

208 321 119 321 321 321 321 326 325 104 321 321 321 321 321 324 322 141 324 323 324 324 324 324 324 324 323 325 324 322 321 324 324 323 324 321 321 324 322 324 322 324 131

T T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 t + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

t -........................................... t ............................................ t ........................................... t ?........................................... t [........................................... t ]........................................... t 0-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t b........................................... t C........................................... t d........................................... t D........................................... t f........................................... t h........................................... t i........................................... t I........................................... t J........................................... t k........................................... t m........................................... t M........................................... t n........................................... t N........................................... t o........................................... t p........................................... t P........................................... t r........................................... t s........................................... t U........................................... t W........................................... t y........................................... t Y........................................... TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193 240 133 133 104 133 133 321 133 191 133 190 133 133 133 193 191 134 134 192 133 191 133 133 191 133 133 191 192 133 192 131

U U............................................. u #........................................... u *........................................... u +........................................... u ?........................................... u 0-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . u a........................................... u b........................................... u c........................................... u C........................................... u d........................................... u e........................................... u g........................................... u G........................................... u M........................................... u N........................................... u p........................................... u r........................................... u s........................................... u S........................................... u t........................................... u u........................................... u v...........................................

110 230 230 230 104 315 313 313 311 232 316 314 314 231 230 230 316 313 311 232 311 316 313

468

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

u V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 u x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 u X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v V v v V V v V v v V V v v V V

#........................................... #........................................... (........................................... (........................................... )........................................... )........................................... +........................................... +........................................... ,........................................... ,........................................... -........................................... -........................................... ............................................ ............................................ /........................................... /........................................... :........................................... :........................................... ........................................... ?........................................... ?........................................... [........................................... [........................................... ]........................................... ]........................................... ^........................................... ^........................................... {........................................... {........................................... }........................................... }........................................... ~........................................... ~........................................... a........................................... A........................................... a........................................... A........................................... b........................................... b........................................... c........................................... C........................................... c........................................... C........................................... d........................................... D........................................... d........................................... D...........................................

229 229 239 239 239 239 228 228 239 239 228 228 239 239 240 240 229 229 238 238 238 238 238 238 104 104 239 239 239 239 228 228 239 239 239 239 228 228 224 233 224 233 222 222 223 227 223 227 222 227 222 227

v v V V v v V V v V v v V V v v V V v V v v V V v v V V v v V V v v V V v V v V v V v v V V v v V V v v V V v v V V

e........................................... E........................................... e........................................... E........................................... f........................................... F........................................... f........................................... F........................................... G........................................... G........................................... h........................................... H........................................... h........................................... H........................................... i........................................... I........................................... i........................................... I........................................... J........................................... J........................................... k........................................... K........................................... k........................................... K........................................... l........................................... L........................................... l........................................... L........................................... m........................................... M........................................... m........................................... M........................................... n........................................... N........................................... n........................................... N........................................... O........................................... O........................................... p........................................... p........................................... p (complex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p (complex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r........................................... R........................................... r........................................... R........................................... s........................................... S........................................... s........................................... S........................................... t........................................... T........................................... t........................................... T........................................... u........................................... U........................................... u........................................... U...........................................

226 229 226 229 224 228 224 228 225 225 223 225 223 225 222 238 222 238 227 227 223 227 223 227 224 227 224 227 226 235 226 235 227 227 227 227 238 238 219 219 188 188 223 236 223 236 224 225 224 225 226 227 226 227 220 236 220 236

Index of Key Sequences

v V v v V V v v V V

u (complex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . u (complex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v........................................... V........................................... v........................................... V........................................... x........................................... X........................................... x........................................... X...........................................

469

188 188 226 228 226 228 222 228 222 228

W w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

X x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Y y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Y ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Z z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z

#........................................... ’........................................... (........................................... )........................................... /........................................... :........................................... ........................................... ?........................................... ?........................................... [........................................... ]........................................... ‘........................................... |........................................... {........................................... }........................................... C........................................... C-g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D........................................... E........................................... F........................................... G........................................... I........................................... K........................................... P........................................... S........................................... T........................................... U...........................................

366 365 364 364 364 364 364 364 104 104 363 363 365 364 365 365 171 364 361 362 367 368 366 363 361 172 112 361

Index of Calculator Commands

471

Index of Calculator Commands Since all Calculator commands begin with the prefix ‘calc-’, the x key has been provided as a variant of M-x which automatically types ‘calc-’ for you. Thus, x last-args is short for M-x calc-last-args.

A another-calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

C calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-abs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-abs (vectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-abssqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-alg-evaluate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-alg-simplify-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-algebraic-entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-algebraic-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-alt-summation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-always-load-extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-apart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-append-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-arccos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-arccosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-arcsin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-arcsinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-arctan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-arctan2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-arctanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-arrange-vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-auto-recompute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, calc-auto-why . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-autorange-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-base-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-basic-simplify-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-bernoulli-number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-bessel-J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-bessel-Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-beta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-big-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-bin-simplify-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-break-selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-break-vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-build-vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-business-days-minus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-business-days-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-c-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-center-justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-change-sign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103 185 227 185 249 141 107 107 286 135 204 261 337 233 208 208 208 208 208 208 208 188 224 326 326 111 313 313 141 215 209 209 209 157 141 364 242 240 222 193 193 158 187 155 185

calc-choose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-clean-num . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-clear-selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-cnorm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-collect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-commute-left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-commute-right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-complex-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-concat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-conj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-conj-transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-cons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-convert-percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-convert-temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-convert-time-zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-convert-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-copy-as-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-copy-region-as-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-copy-special-constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-copy-to-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-copy-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-copy-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-cosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-cot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-coth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-csc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-csch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-curve-fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-date-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-date-part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-db . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-declare-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-decrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-define-unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-degrees-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-del-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-describe-function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-describe-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-describe-key-briefly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-describe-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-display-strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215 189 190 243 204 227 261 246 246 148 221 188 227 223 198 311 191 311 337 337 323 340 337 322 208 208 208 208 227 208 208 273 190 149 191 317 141 186 316 137 245 262 105 105 105 105 222 204 119 184

472

calc-dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-double-factorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-edit-finish. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-edit-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-edit-user-syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-edit-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-new-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-preserve-modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-update-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-embedded-word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-enable-selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-eng-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-enter-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-enter-units-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-eqn-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-equal-to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-erf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-euler-number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-eval-num . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-evalto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-evaluate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-execute-extended-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-expand-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-expand-vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-explain-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-expm1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-ext-simplify-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-extended-gcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-extract-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-factorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fdiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-ddb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-fv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-irr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-nper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-npv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-pmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-pv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-sln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fin-syd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-find-maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-find-minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-find-root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fix-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-flat-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

126 214 132 132 245 172 323 349 354 352 353 352 353 356 353 353 354 349 244 148 131 245 313 163 286 209 215 139 325 126 103 207 261 250 226 314 207 141 214 313 260 214 185 202 199 201 201 200 201 200 201 201 202 272 272 271 148 157

calc-float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-flush-caches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fortran-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-frac-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-from-hms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-full-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-full-trail-vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-full-vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-gcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-get-modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-get-unit-definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-get-user-defn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-giac-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-grab-rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-grab-region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-grab-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-grab-sum-across . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-grab-sum-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-add-3d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-fast-3d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-juggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-line-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-log-x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-log-y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-log-z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-num-points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-point-style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-range-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-range-y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-range-z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-title-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-title-y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-title-z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-view-commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

188 187 112 159 138 189 319 189 104 240 239 209 214 177 314 368 165 338 338 245 339 339 225 329 330 331 328 334 330 333 334 327 328 334 331 331 330 330 331 335 332 332 332 332 331 331 333 330 332 331 335 332 332 332 331 331 332 334

Index of Calculator Commands

calc-graph-view-trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-zero-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-graph-zero-y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-greater-equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-greater-than . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-group-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-group-digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-hms-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-hms-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-hyperbolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-hypot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-i-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-idiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-ilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-im . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-imaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-in-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-inc-beta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-inc-gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-inc-month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-infinite-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-info-summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-inner-product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-insert-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-insert-variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-inv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-inv (matrices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-isqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-j-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-julian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-else . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-else-if. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-end-for. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-end-if . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-end-loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-end-repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-if . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-pop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kbd-repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-keep-args . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kill-region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-kron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-last-args . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

473

334 332 332 287 287 147 147 223 104 225 137 149 137 186 148 222 185 207 188 188 288 209 209 193 186 222 138 105 105 238 338 324 263 186 227 137 186 148 191 363 363 364 363 365 364 364 363 365 365 365 366 364 134 343 337 337 227 110

calc-latex-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lcm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-leading-zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-left-justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-left-label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-less-equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-less-recursion-depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-less-than . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-let . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-line-breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-line-numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-ln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lnp1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-load-everything . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-log10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-logical-and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-logical-if . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-logical-not. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-logical-or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lshift-arith . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lshift-binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-ltpt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lu-divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lu-minus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lu-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lu-quant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-lu-times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mant-part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-map-equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-maple-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mask-vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mathematica-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-matrix-brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-matrix-center-justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-matrix-left-justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-matrix-mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-matrix-right-justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-maxima-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mcol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mdet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-midi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-minus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mlud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mode-record-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-moebius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-more-recursion-depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mtrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-new-month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-new-week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-new-year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159 214 147 155 156 287 111 287 325 157 106 207 207 111 207 207 287 287 287 287 205 205 217 318 318 318 317 318 186 235 250 165 226 306 165 239 238 238 139 238 186 165 223 227 319 186 184 227 185 103 135 216 111 223 227 192 192 192

474

calc-next-prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-no-simplify-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-normal-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-normal-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-normalize-rat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-not . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-not-equal-to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-np . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-num-integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-num-prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-num-simplify-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-other-window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-outer-product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-over-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, calc-pack-bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-pascal-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-percent-change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-perm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-permanent-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-permanent-variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-pi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-point-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-polar-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-poly-div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-poly-div-rem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-poly-gcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-poly-interp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-poly-rem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-poly-roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-pop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-pop-above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-prepend-to-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-prev-prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-prime-factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-prime-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-quick-units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-radians-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-radix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-random-again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-realign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-reduce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

216 141 157 148 261 205 287 191 317 266 109 141 137 204 103 238 131 149 219 229 158 198 199 215 316 324 207 183 148 189 138 261 262 262 283 262 268 131 131 185 136 337 216 215 215 286 315 104 137 147 211 212 188 106 323 110 236 104

calc-refresh-top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-remove-duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-remove-equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-remove-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-reverse-vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-rewrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-rewrite-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-right-justify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-right-label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-rnorm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-roll-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-roll-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-rotate-binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-rrandom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-rshift-arith . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-rshift-binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-save-modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-scale-float. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sci-notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-scroll-down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-scroll-left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-scroll-right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-scroll-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-add-both-sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-commute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-div-both-sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-evaluate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-expand-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-isolate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-jump-equals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-mult-both-sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-negate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-sub-both-sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sel-unpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-here. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-here-maybe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-less. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-more. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-next. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-once. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-once-maybe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-cardinality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-complement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-enumerate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

146 228 287 313 104 226 289 305 155 156 227 131 131 205 187 212 205 205 135 186 148 104 104 104 104 208 208 248 247 246 248 248 249 247 247 247 247 248 247 248 248 242 241 242 243 243 243 242 242 243 243 229 228 228 229 228 228 229

Index of Calculator Commands

calc-set-union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-xor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-settings-file-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-shift-prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-show-plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-show-selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-shuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-simplify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-simplify-extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-simplify-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sincos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-solve-for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-spn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-sqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-stirling-number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-AlgSimpRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-concat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-Decls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-decr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-EvalRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-ExtSimpRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-FitRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-GenCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-incr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-IntegLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-inv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-LineStyles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-minus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-neg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-PlotRejects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-PointStyles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-TimeZone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-subscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-substitute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-subvector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-summation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-symbolic-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-tabulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-tan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-tanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-taylor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-tex-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

475

228 228 135 135 351 244 212 185 251 258 311 208 208 208 266 225 319 186 215 321 324 321 324 321 321 324 322 324 324 324 324 321 324 321 321 324 322 321 321 324 321 324 321 321 324 324 223 250 224 284 138 286 223 208 208 266 159 120

calc-time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-to-degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-to-hms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-to-radians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-total-algebraic-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-totient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-isearch-backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-isearch-forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-kill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-scroll-left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-scroll-right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-yank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-transpose-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trunc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-truncate-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-truncate-stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-truncate-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-undefine-unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-unformatted-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-units-simplify-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-unix-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-unpack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, calc-unpack-bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-unselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-unstore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-define. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-define-composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-define-edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-define-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-define-invocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-define-kbd-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-define-permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-invocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-user-undefine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-utpb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-utpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-utpf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-utpn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-utpp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-commas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

195 184 112 189 189 189 107 216 133 133 133 133 133 133 133 133 134 133 134 133 133 133 133 133 133 226 132 187 155 155 155 105 316 110 158 141 191 220 229 243 322 361 171 362 367 366 363 361 366 361 216 216 216 217 217 239 239 239

476

calc-vector-correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-covariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-find. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-geometric-mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-harmonic-mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-mean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-mean-error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-median . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-parens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-pop-covariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-pop-sdev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-pop-variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-prod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-sdev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vector-variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-view-units-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-vlength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-why . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-word-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

233 230 232 224 231 231 230 230 231 231 230 239 233 232 232 230 232 230 232 314 224 110 204

calc-working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-xor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-xpon-part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-yacas-language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-yank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140 204 186 164 337

D describe-bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

F full-calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 full-calc-keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Q quick-calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

R read-kbd-macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Index of Algebraic Functions

477

Index of Algebraic Functions This is a list of built-in functions and operators usable in algebraic expressions. Their full Lisp names are derived by adding the prefix ‘calcFunc-’, as in calcFunc-sqrt. All functions except those noted with “*” have corresponding Calc keystrokes and can also be found in the Calc Summary.

! ! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, !! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . !!! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . != . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

> 287 214 297 287

% % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 198

& && . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 &&& . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

* * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

+ + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 +/- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 >= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

? ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

^ ^ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

\ \ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 || . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ||| . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

/ / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

: : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 :: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 := . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

< < . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

A abs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . abs (vectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . abssqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . acute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . afixp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . agmean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . alog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . anest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . apart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . apply (rewrites) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arccos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arccosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arcsin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arcsincos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

185 227 185 236 160 160 235 237 232 207 267 204 237 261 222 233 297 208 208 208 208

478

arcsinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arctan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arctan2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arctanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arrange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . asum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

208 208 208 208 188 224 267 205 326 286

B badd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . besJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . besY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . beta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . betaB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . betaI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . breve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bstring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bsub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193 160 160 376 215 209 209 209 209 209 160 160 119 193

C call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cascent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cbbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cbspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cdescent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ceil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cflat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cheight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . choose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . choriz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clvert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cnorm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . collect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . conj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cons (rewrites) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cprec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235 171 169 169 170 171 187 170 160 160 171 215 168 190 204 169 227 261 297 188 223 297 288 208 208 208 208 167

cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . crule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . crvert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . csc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . csch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . csub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . csup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ctbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ctrn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ctspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cvec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cvert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cvspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

227 169 169 208 208 170 170 170 169 227 170 301 222 169 170 170

D date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dbfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dbpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ddb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ddddot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dddot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . decr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deriv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . det . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dfact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dimag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dnatnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dneg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dnonneg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dnonzero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dnumint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dodd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dotdot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DotDot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dpos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dreal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dsadj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dscalar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dyad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

190 192 317 317 202 160 160 186 189 262 227 145 214 222 204 145 145 235 145 145 145 145 145 145 160 160 160 160 145 146 145 145 198 146 160

E efit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Index of Algebraic Functions

egcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . elim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . eq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . erf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . erfc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . esimplify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . euler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . eval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evalextsimp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evalsimp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evalto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evalv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evalvn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exp10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expm1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

479

214 264 268 301 286 209 209 258 215 299 299 299 325 249 249 207 207 261 207

F fact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 fceil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 fdiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ffinv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 ffloor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 fib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 finv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 fitdummy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 fitmodel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 fitparam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 fitsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 fitvar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 fixp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 fround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 frounde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 froundu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 fsolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 ftrunc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 fv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 fvb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 fvl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

gammaQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . geq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . getdiag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gpoly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . grave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

209 214 287 223 269 225 160 160 287

H hasfitparams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hasfitvars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . holiday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hypot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

283 283 160 160 223 225 189 195 192 186

I idiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . idn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ierf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . if . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . im . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . incmonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . incr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . incyear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . intv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inv (matrices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . irr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . irrb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . islin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . islinnt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . isqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . istrue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

185 222 300 287 207 188 296 288 193 186 193 222 238 263 288 125 186 227 201 201 289 289 186 289 303

J G gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gammag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gammaG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gammaP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

julian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 209 209 209 209

K kron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

480

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

L lambda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lcm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . leq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . let . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . linnt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lnot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lnp1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . log10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ltpb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ltpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ltpf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ltpn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ltpp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ltpt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lufadd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lufdiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lufmul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lufquant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lufsub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lupadd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lupdiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lupmul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lupquant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lupsub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

234 287 214 287 299 289 289 207 287 207 207 207 287 205 287 216 216 216 217 217 217 227 318 318 318 317 318 318 318 318 317 318

122 216 192 223 223 223 235 377

N neg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 neq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 nest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 newmonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 newweek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 newyear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 nextprime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 ninteg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 nonvar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 not . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 nper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 nperb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 nperl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 npfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 nppower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 npv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 npvb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 nrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 nroot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 nterms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

M makemod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mapa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mapc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mapd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mapeq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mapeqp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mapeqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mapr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . matches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . matchnot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maximize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mcol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mdims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . midi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . minimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

mod (operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . moebius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mrcol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mrrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mysin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123 186 235 236 235 236 250 250 250 235 306 306 306 186 272 223 224 319 186 272 192 235

opt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 outer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

P pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pcont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pdeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pdiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pdivide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pdivrem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . perm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pfloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pfrac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pgcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

220 297 189 270 270 261 262 262 198 215 188 189 262 304 296 270

Index of Algebraic Functions

pmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pmtb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pnot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . poly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . por . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pprim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prevprime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prfac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pvb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pvl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pwday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

481

201 201 297 189 283 269 297 235 270 262 216 215 215 160 286 200 200 200 193

Q quote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

R raccum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rateb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ratel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ratint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rcons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rcons (rewrites) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rdup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reduce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reducea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reducec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reduced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . refers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . relch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rewrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rmeq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rnorm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

236 189 211 205 201 201 201 284 223 297 228 188 288 189 236 237 237 237 237 288 199 301 226 289 225 223 287 227 271 268 205 187

rounde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . roundu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rreduce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rreducea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rreducec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rreduced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rreducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rsort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rsubvec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187 187 236 237 237 237 237 205 225 224 223

S scf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 sdev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 sech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 seq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 shuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Si . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 simplify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 sin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 sincos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 sinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 sln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 solve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 spn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 sqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 sqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 stir1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 stir2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 subscr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 subst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 subvec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 syd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

T table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . taylor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tderiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thecoefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thefactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tilde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286 223 208 208 266 262 260 260 160 160 192

482

totient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trunc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . typeof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tzconv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tzone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

216 227 226 187 288 191 195

U under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unixtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unpackt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . usimplify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . utpb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . utpc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . utpf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . utpn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . utpp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . utpt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160 191 221 221 311 216 216 216 217 217 217

228 224 226 306 230 230 231 231 230 229 233 230 232 232 232 229 230 228 229 232 228

V variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vcompl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vconcat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vcorr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vcov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . venum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vflat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vfloor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vgmean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vhmean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vlen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vmatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vmean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vmeane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vmedian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vpcov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vprod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vpsdev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vpvar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vsdev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vspan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vsum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vunion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vunpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vvar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vxor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

289 229 228 235 233 230 232 228 118 160 160 229 226 232 228 231 231

weekday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wmaximize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wminimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wroot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

192 272 272 271

X xfit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xpon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

277 204 186 327 328

Y year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 yearday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Concept Index

483

Concept Index = ‘=>’ operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

‘ “Computation got stuck” message . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

A Accuracy of calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 136 Algebraic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Algebraic notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Algebraic simplifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 AlgSimpRules variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Alternating sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Angle and slope of a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Angular mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Area under a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Arguments, not evaluated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Arguments, restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Arranging a matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

B Basic simplifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Beatles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Bernoulli numbers, approximate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Binary numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Binary operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Branch cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Breaking up long lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

C C language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Caches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Calc init file, mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Calc init file, user-defined commands. . . . . . . . . . 361 Calc init file, user-defined units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Calc init file, variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 calc-ext module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Character strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Clearing the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Coefficients of polynomial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Columns of data, extracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Common logarithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Complex numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Composite units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Compositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Conditional structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Continued fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Continuous memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Correlation coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Covariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Cross product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

D Data, extracting from buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Date arithmetic, additional functions . . . . . . . . . 190 Date forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Daylight saving time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Decimal and non-decimal numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Declaring scalar variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Decls variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Degree of polynomial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Degrees-minutes-seconds forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Deleting stack entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Demonstration of Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Digamma function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Digit grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Digits, vectors of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Division of integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Divisor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Dot product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Duplicate values in a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Duplicating a stack entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Duplicating stack entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

E e variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 207 Editing the stack with Emacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Editing user definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Emptying the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Engineering notation, display of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Entering numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Equations, solving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Error forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Errors, messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Errors, undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Euler’s gamma constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 207 EvalRules variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Evaluates-to operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Evaluation of variables in a formula . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Exchanging stack entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Exiting the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Exponential integral Ei(x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Extended simplification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Extensions module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ExtSimpRules variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

F Fermat, primality test of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

484

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Fibonacci numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 63 Fitting data to a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Fixed points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Flattening a matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Floating-point numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Floats vs. fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Flushing caches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Formulas, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Formulas, evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Formulas, referring to stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 FORTRAN language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Fraction mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Fractional part of a number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Fractions vs. floats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Function call notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Infinity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Integer part of a number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Integration by Simpson’s rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Integration, numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Interval forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Inverse of permutation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 ISO 8601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Iterative structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Keyboard macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Keyboard macros, editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Kill ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Knuth, Art of Computer Programming. . . . . . . . . 14

Gamma constant, Euler’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 207 gamma variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 207 Garbled displays, refreshing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 GenCount variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Generic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Geometric mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 231 Giac language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Golden ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 207 Gregorian calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Grouping digits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Guard digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

H Harmonic mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Harmonic numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Hash tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Help commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Hexadecimal integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Holidays variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Horizontal scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Hours-minutes-seconds forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

I i variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 148 Identity matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Implicit comma in vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Implicit multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Incomplete Algebraic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Incomplete complex numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Incomplete interval forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Incomplete vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Index tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Inexact results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 inf variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Infinite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

J Julian calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Julian day counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Julian day counts, conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

L Lambda expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Large numbers, readability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Last-arguments feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 LaTeX language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Leading zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Least-squares fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Least-squares for fitting a straight line . . . . . . . . . 40 Least-squares for over-determined systems . . . . . 38 Levels of stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Line breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Line, fitting data to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Linear correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Linear equations, systems of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Linear regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Linearity testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 LineStyles variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Local variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Looping structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

M Maple language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Matchstick problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Mathematica language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Matrix display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Matrix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 max-lisp-eval-depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 max-specpdl-size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Maxima language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Maximizing a function over a list of values . . . . . 44 Maximum of a function using Calculus . . . . . . . . . 52

Concept Index

Mean of data values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Median of data values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimization, numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minus signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mistakes, undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode line indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modes variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modulo division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modulo forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving stack entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplication, implicit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

485

230 231 272 106 110 178 177 122 122 132 127

N Nameless functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 nan variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Narrowing the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Negative numbers, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Newton’s method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Non-decimal numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Normalizing a vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Numerator of a fraction, extracting . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Numeric entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Numerical integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Numerical Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Numerical root-finding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

O Octal integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operators in formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Over-determined systems of equations. . . . . . . . . . 38

P Parsing formulas, customized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Parts of formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Pascal language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Pattern matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Permanent mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Permanent user definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Permanent variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Permutation, inverse of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Permutations, applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Perpendicular vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 phi variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 207 Phi, golden ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 207 pi variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 207 Plain vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 PlotRejects variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 PointStyles variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Polar mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Polynomial, list of coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Population statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Positive Infinite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Precedence of operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Precision of calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Primes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Principal values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Product of a sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Programming with algebraic formulas . . . . . . . . . 367 Programming with keyboard macros . . . . . . . . . . 362 Pythagorean Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Q Quaternions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quitting the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310 108 315 321 104

R Radix display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Rank tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Recalling variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Reciprocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Recursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Recursion depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Redoing after an Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Refreshing a garbled display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Removing stack entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Reshaping a matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Restoring saved modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Retrieving previous results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Rewrite rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Roots of equations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Round-off errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Roundoff errors, correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Roundoff errors, examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 32 Roundoff errors, in non-decimal numbers . . . . . . . 28 RPN notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Running the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

S Sample statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Saving mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Scalar mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Scientific notation, display of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Scientific notation, entry of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Scientific notation, in non-decimal numbers . . . . 28 Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Sets, as binary numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Sets, as vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Simpson’s rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Sine integral Si(x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Slope and angle of a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Solving equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Sorting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

486

Speed of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Square-free numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Stack basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Stack levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Standalone Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Standard deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Standard deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Standard user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Starting the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Statistical functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Storing user definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Storing variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321, 324 Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Sub-formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Subscript notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Summation of a series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Summations (by keyboard macros). . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Summations (statistical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Summing rows and columns of data . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Symbolic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Syntax tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Systems of equations, numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Systems of equations, symbolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Systems of linear equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

T Temperature conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Temporary assignment to variables . . . . . . . . . . . 325 TeX language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Time of day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Time travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Time zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Time Zones, converting between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 TimeZone variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Torus, volume of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Total Algebraic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Trail buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Trail pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Triangular lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Truncating the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Two’s complements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

U uinf variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Un-storing variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Unary operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Undoing mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Unit vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Units variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 UnitSimpRules variable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Unix time format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Unix time format, conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Unsafe simplifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 User-defined units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

V Variables, evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variables, in formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variables, temporary assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variance of data values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Void variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126 126 325 232 118 104 322

W Why did an error occur? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wide text, scrolling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Word size for binary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110 104 204 140

Y Yacas language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Index of Variables

487

Index of Variables The variables in this list that do not contain dashes are accessible as Calc variables. Add a ‘var-’ prefix to get the name of the corresponding Lisp variable. The remaining variables are Lisp variables suitable for setqing in your Calc init file or .emacs file.

A AlgSimpRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

C calc-alg-ent-map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 calc-context-sensitive-enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 calc-define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 calc-digit-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 calc-edit-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 calc-edit-mode-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 calc-embedded-announce-formula . . . . . . . 359, 434 calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist. . . . . 434 calc-embedded-close-formula . . . . . . . . . . 359, 435 calc-embedded-close-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 437 calc-embedded-close-new-formula. . . . . . 359, 436 calc-embedded-close-plain . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 435 calc-embedded-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 calc-embedded-new-buffer-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 calc-embedded-new-formula-hook . . . . . . . . . . . 410 calc-embedded-open-close-formula-alist . . 435 calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist . . . . . . 437 calc-embedded-open-close-new-formula-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist. . . . . 435 calc-embedded-open-formula . . . . . . . . . . . 358, 435 calc-embedded-open-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 437 calc-embedded-open-new-formula . . . . . . . 359, 436 calc-embedded-open-plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 435 calc-embedded-word-regexp . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 435 calc-embedded-word-regexp-alist . . . . . . . . . . 435 calc-end-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 calc-ensure-consistent-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 calc-ext-load-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 calc-gnuplot-default-device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 calc-gnuplot-default-output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 calc-gnuplot-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 433 calc-gnuplot-plot-command . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 433 calc-gnuplot-print-command . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 433 calc-gnuplot-print-device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 calc-gnuplot-print-output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 calc-gregorian-switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 calc-highlight-selections-with-faces . . . . 244, 438 calc-language-alist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 calc-load-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 calc-local-var-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

calc-lu-field-reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, calc-lu-power-reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, calc-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mode-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mode-save-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-mode-var-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-multiplication-has-precedence . . . . . . . calc-nonselected-face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, calc-note-threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-other-modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-reset-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-selected-face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, calc-settings-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-start-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-store-var-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-mode-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-trail-window-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-undo-length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-window-hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-Y-help-msgs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CommuteRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

437 437 410 411 410 411 438 438 437 411 411 438 433 409 411 410 410 438 410 373 247

D Decls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 DistribRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

E e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 207 EvalRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 ExtSimpRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

F FactorRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 FitRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

G gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 207 GenCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

H Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

488

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

I i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, inf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IntegAfterRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IntegLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IntegRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IntegSimpRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InvertRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NegateRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 148 117 265 264 264 265 247

J JumpRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

P phi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, PlotData1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlotData2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlotRejects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PointStyles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126 207 329 329 328 332

Q q0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 q9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

L LineStyles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

R M math-daylight-savings-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . math-tzone-names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MergeRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

196 196 247 279 279 177

N nan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

RandSeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

T TimeZone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

U uinf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 UnitSimpRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Index of Lisp Math Functions

489

Index of Lisp Math Functions The following functions are meant to be used with defmath, not defun definitions. For names that do not start with ‘calc-’, the corresponding full Lisp name is derived by adding a prefix of ‘math-’.

A abs-approx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 anglep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 apply-rewrites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

B beforep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 build-polynomial-expr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 build-vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

C calc-binary-op . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-change-current-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-check-defines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-clear-command-flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-cursor-stack-index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-do-alg-entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-encase-atoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-enter-result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374, calc-eval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-find-assoc-parent-formula . . . . . . . . . . . calc-find-nth-part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-find-parent-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-find-selected-part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-find-sub-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-grow-assoc-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-is-hyperbolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-is-inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-normalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-pop-stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-prepare-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-push-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-record-list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-record-undo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-record-why . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-replace-sub-formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-select-buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-set-command-flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372, calc-slow-wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-stack-size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-substack-height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-top-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-top-list-n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374, calc-top-n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-unary-op . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calc-wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cancel-common-factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

388 400 371 385 388 408 400 388 407 400 400 400 400 400 400 386 386 387 387 399 386 387 386 386 389 400 372 385 374 388 389 386 387 387 388 372 402

check-unit-name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . col-matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . common-constant-factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . comp-ascent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . comp-descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . comp-first-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . comp-height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . comp-last-char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . comp-width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . compile-rewrites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . complexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . compose-expr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . composition-to-string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . constp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . convert-temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . copy-matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

407 398 402 409 409 409 409 409 409 394 403 375 390 408 409 391 382 399

D defmath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deriv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dimension-error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . div-mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

369 403 398 396

E e............................................. equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . equal-int . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evaluate-expr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evenp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expr-contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expr-contains-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expr-contains-vars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expr-depends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expr-height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expr-subst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expr-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . extract-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

395 391 392 393 390 405 405 405 405 405 405 405 407

F fixnatnump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fixnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375, fixnump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flatten-vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375, floatp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

390 394 389 399 394 390

490

format-flat-expr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . format-nice-expr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . format-number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . format-value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . frac-gcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . from-hms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . from-radians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . from-radians-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . full-circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GNU Emacs Calc Manual

408 408 408 408 402 396 396 396 395

G gamma-const . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

H half-circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

I idiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . idivmod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . imod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inexact-value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integer-log2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . integerp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is-polynomial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is-true . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . isqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

395 395 395 392 404 375 396 389 371 406 392 396

391 395 395 390 389

M make-float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-frac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-intv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-sdev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . make-vec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . map-tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . map-vec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . map-vec-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mat-col . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mat-dimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mat-less-col . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mat-less-row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mat-row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . match-patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

397 395 404 404 401 392 197 196 391 390 405

N natnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . natnump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nearly-equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nearly-zerop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . negp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . normalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . num-integerp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . num-natnump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . numberp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . numdigs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . numvecp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

375 389 392 392 389 393 390 390 390 394 391

O objectp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . objvecp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oddp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

391 391 390 392

L lessp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ln-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ln-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . looks-evenp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . looks-negp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

math-concat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . math-defcache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . math-defintegral. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . math-defintegral-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . math-defsimplify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . math-equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . math-prev-weekday-in-month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . math-std-daylight-savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . matrixp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . messy-integerp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . multi-subst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

394 393 394 394 394 398 402 398 398 398 397 399 399 398 403

phi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pi-over-180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pi-over-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pi-over-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polar-complexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . poly-mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . poly-mul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . poly-simplify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polynomial-base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polynomial-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . posp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pow-mod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power-of-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . prime-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . primp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

395 395 395 395 395 390 406 406 406 406 406 389 395 396 396 397 391

Q quarter-circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 quarter-integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 quotient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Index of Lisp Math Functions

491

R random-digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . random-digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . random-float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ratp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . read-expr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . read-exprs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . read-number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . realp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rect-complexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reduce-cols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reduce-vec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reject-arg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remove-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rewrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rewrite-heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . row-matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

396 397 397 390 407 408 407 390 390 398 398 392 407 403 403 398

T tderiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to-fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to-hms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to-radians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to-radians-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to-simple-fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to-standard-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . two-pi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

404 397 396 396 396 397 407 399 395

U underflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 units-in-expr-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

S scalarp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scale-int . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scale-rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . simplify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . simplify-extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . simplify-units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . single-units-in-expr-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . solve-eqn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . solve-for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . solve-system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sort-intv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sqrt-e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

sqrt-two-pi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 square-matrixp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 swap-rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

390 394 394 401 401 401 407 405 404 405 394 395 395

V vec-length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 vectorp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

W with-extra-prec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Z zerop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

[PDF] Calc Manual GNU Emacs Calc Dave Gillespie - Free Download PDF (2024)

References